To our custo mers,
Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents
On April 1st, 2010, NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology
Corporation, and Renesas Electronics Corpor ation took over all the business of both
companies. Therefore, althoug h the old com pany name remains in this docum ent, it is a valid
Renesas Electronics document. W e appreciate your understanding.
Renesas Electronics website: http://www.renesas.com
April 1st, 2010
Renesas Electronics Corporation
Issued by: Renesas Electronics Corporation (http://www.renesas.com)
Send any inquiries to http://www.renesas.com/inquiry.
Notice
1. All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is
subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein, please
confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to
additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website.
2. Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights
of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document.
No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted hereby under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights
of Renesas Electronics or others.
3. You should not alter, modify, copy, or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product, whether in whole or in part.
4. Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of
semiconductor products and application examples. You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits, software,
and information in the design of your equipment. Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by
you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software, or information.
5. When exporting the products or technology described in this document, you should comply with the applicable export control
laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations. You should not use Renesas
Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by
the military, including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction. Renesas Electronics products and
technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture, use, or sale is prohibited
under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations.
6. Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document, but Renesas Electronics
does not warrant that such information is error free. Ren esas E lectronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any da mages
incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein.
7. Renesas Electronics products are classified acco rding to the following three quality grades: “Standard”, “High Quality”, and
“Specific”. The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product’s quality grade, as
indicated below. You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular
application. You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as “Specific” without the prior
written consent of Renesas Electronics. Further, you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for
which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way
liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an
application categorized as “Specific” or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written
consent of Renesas Electronics. The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is “Standard” unless otherwise
expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books, et c.
“Standard”: Computers; office equipment; communications equipment; test and measurement equipment; audio and visual
equipment; home electro nic app liances; machine tool s; p ersonal electron ic equipment; and indu strial robots .
“High Quality”: Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.); traffic control systems; anti-disaster systems; anti-
crime systems; safety equipment; and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support.
“Specific”: Aircraft; aerospace equ i pment; submersible repeaters; nu clear reactor control systems; medical equipment or
systems for life support (e.g. artificial life support devices or systems), surgical implantations, or healthcare
interven tion (e.g. excision, et c.), and any oth er applications or purposes that pose a direct th reat to human life.
8. You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics,
especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation
characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or
damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges.
9. Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, semiconductor products have
specific chara cterist ics such as the o ccurren ce of failure at a certai n rate an d malfunct ion s under certai n u se cond ition s. Further,
Renesas Electronics pr oducts are not subject to radiation resi stance design. Please be sure to implement safety measures to
guard them against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a
Renesas Electronics product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire
control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures. Because
the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system
manufactured by you.
10. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for det ai ls as to enviro nmental matters such as the en vi ronmental
compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product. Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances, including without limitation, the EU RoHS
Directive. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with
applicable laws and regulations.
11. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written consent of Renesas
Electronics.
12. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this
document or Renesas Electronics products, or if you have any other inquiries.
(Note 1) “Renesas Electronics” as us ed in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majo ri ty-
owned subsidiaries.
(Note 2) “Renesas Electronics product(s)” means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics.
32182 Group
User’s Manual
32
Users Manual
Rev.1.00 2003.06
RENESAS 32-BIT RISC SINGLE-CHIP
MICROCOMPUTER
M32R FAMILY / M32R/ECU SERIES
All information contained in these materials, including products and product specifications,
represents information on the product at the time of publication and is subject to change by
Renesas Electronics Corp. without notice. Please review the latest information published by
Renesas Electronics Corp. through various means, including the Renesas Electronics Corp.
website (http://www.renesas.com).
Keep safety first in your circuit designs!
Notes regarding these materials
Renesas Technology Corporation puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor prod-
ucts better and more reliable, but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with
them. Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury, fire or property damage.
Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with ap-
propriate measures such as (i) placement of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of non-
flammable material or (iii) prevention against any malfunction or mishap.
These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the
Renesas Technology Corporation product best suited to the customer's application; they do
not convey any license under any intellectual property rights, or any other rights, belonging
to Renesas Technology Corporation or a third party.
Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, or infringe-
ment of any third-party's rights, originating in the use of any product data, diagrams, charts,
programs, algorithms, or circuit application examples contained in these materials.
All information contained in these materials, including product dat a, diagrams, charts, pro-
grams and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these
materials, and are subject to change by Renesas Technology Corporation without notice
due to product improvements or other reasons. It is therefore recommended that custom-
ers contact Renesas Technology Corporation or an authorized Renesas Technology Cor-
poration product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product
listed herein.
The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability, or
other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors.
Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corporation by
various means, including the Renesas Technology Corporation Semiconductor home page
(http://www.renesas.com).
When using any or all of the information contained in these materials, including product
data, diagrams, charts, programs, and algorithms, please be sure to evaluate all informa-
tion as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information
and products. Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any dam-
age, liability or other loss resulting from the information contained herein.
Renesas Technology Corporation semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for
use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is poten-
tially at stake. Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation or an authorized Renesas
Technology Corporation product distributor when considering the use of a product con-
tained herein for any specific purposes, such as apparatus or systems for transportation,
vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea repeater use.
The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corporation is necessary to reprint or
reproduce in whole or in part these materials.
If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions,
they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be im-
ported into a country other than the approved destination.
Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and/
or the country of destination is prohibited.
Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation for further details on these materials or
the products contained therein.
REVISION HISTORY
Rev. Date Description
Page Summary
(1/1)
32182 Group User’s Manual
1.00 Jun 4, 2003 First edition issued
(1)
Table of contents
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Outline of the 32182 Group ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-2
1.1.1 M32R Family CPU Core with Built-in FPU (M32R-FPU) ---------------------------------------------1-2
1.1.2 Built-in Multiplier/Accumulator-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-3
1.1.3 Built-in Single-precision FPU --------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-3
1.1.4 Built-in Flash Memory and RAM ----------------------------------------------------------------------------1-3
1.1.5 Built-in Clock Frequency Multiplier-------------------------------------------------------------------------1-4
1.1.6 Powerful Peripheral Functions Built-in --------------------------------------------------------------------1-4
1.2 Block Diagram--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-5
1.3 Pin Functions ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-8
1.4 Pin Assignments -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-14
CHAPTER 2 CPU
2.1 CPU Registers -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-2
2.2 General-purpose Registers ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-2
2.3 Control Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-2
2.3.1 Processor Status Word Register: PSW (CR0) ----------------------------------------------------------2-3
2.3.2 Condition Bit Register: CBR (CR1) ------------------------------------------------------------------------2-4
2.3.3 Interrupt Stack Pointer: SPI (CR2) and User Stack Pointer: SPU (CR3)-------------------------2-4
2.3.4 Backup PC: BPC (CR6) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-4
2.3.5 Floating-point Status Register: FPSR (CR7) ------------------------------------------------------------2-5
2.4 Accumulator-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-7
2.5 Program Counter ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-7
2.6 Data Formats ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-8
2.6.1 Data Types-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-8
2.6.2 Data Formats ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-9
2.7 Supplementary Explanation for BSET, BCLR, LOCK and UNLOCK Instruction Execution -----------------2-14
CHAPTER 3 ADDRESS SPACE
3.1 Outline of the Address Space ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3-2
3.2 Operation Modes ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3-5
3.3 Internal ROM and Extended External Areas------------------------------------------------------------------------3-9
3.3.1 Internal ROM Area ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3-9
3.3.2 Extended External Area --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3-9
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3-10
3.4.1 Internal RAM Area ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3-10
3.4.2 SFR (Special Function Register) Area --------------------------------------------------------------------3-10
3.5 EIT Vector Entry -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3-33
3.6 ICU Vector Table ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3-34
3.7 Notes about Address Space --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3-36
(2)
CHAPTER 4 EIT
4.1 Outline of EIT---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-2
4.2 EIT Events ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-3
4.2.1 Exception ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-3
4.2.2 Interrupt -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-5
4.2.3 Trap ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-6
4.3 EIT Processing Procedure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-6
4.4 EIT Processing Mechanism---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-7
4.5 Acceptance of EIT Events-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-8
4.6 Saving and Restoring the PC and PSW -----------------------------------------------------------------------------4-8
4.7 EIT Vector Entry -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-10
4.8 Exception Processing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-11
4.8.1 Reserved Instruction Exception (RIE)---------------------------------------------------------------------4-11
4.8.2 Address Exception (AE) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-12
4.8.3 Floating-Point Exception (FPE) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------4-13
4.9 Interrupt Processing ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-15
4.9.1 Reset Interrupt (RI) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-15
4.9.2 System Break Interrupt (SBI)--------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-15
4.9.3 External Interrupt (EI) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-17
4.10 Trap Processing----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-18
4.10.1 Trap ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-18
4.11 EIT Priority Levels -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-19
4.12 Example of EIT Processing -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-20
4.13 Precautions on EIT ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-22
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
5.1 Outline of the Interrupt Controller--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-2
5.2 ICU Related Registers ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-4
5.2.1 Interrupt Vector Register -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-5
5.2.2 Interrupt Request Mask Register ---------------------------------------------------------------------------5-6
5.2.3 SBI (System Break Interrupt) Control Register ---------------------------------------------------------5-7
5.2.4 Interrupt Control Registers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-8
5.3 Interrupt Request Sources in Internal Peripheral I/O -------------------------------------------------------------5-11
5.4 ICU Vector Table ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-12
5.5 Description of Interrupt Operation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-13
5.5.1 Acceptance of Internal Peripheral I/O Interrupts -------------------------------------------------------5-13
5.5.2 Processing by Internal Peripheral I/O Interrupt Handlers --------------------------------------------5-15
5.6 Description of System Break Interrupt (SBI) Operation----------------------------------------------------------5-18
5.6.1 Acceptance of SBI ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-18
5.6.2 SBI Processing by Handler ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-18
CHAPTER 6 INTERNAL MEMORY
6.1 Outline of the Internal Memory -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-2
6.2 Internal RAM----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-2
6.3 Internal Flash Memory ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-2
(3)
6.4 Registers Associated with the Internal Flash Memory -----------------------------------------------------------6-5
6.4.1 Flash Mode Register ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-5
6.4.2 Flash Status Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-6
6.4.3 Flash Status Register 2 (FSTAT2)-------------------------------------------------------------------------6-6
6.4.4 Flash Control Registers---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-8
6.4.5 Virtual Flash S Bank Registers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-12
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-13
6.5.1 Outline of Internal Flash Memory Programming--------------------------------------------------------6-13
6.5.2 Controlling Operation Modes during Flash Programming--------------------------------------------6-18
6.5.3 Procedure for Programming/Erasing the Internal Flash Memory ----------------------------------6-21
6.5.4 Flash Programming Time (Reference)--------------------------------------------------------------------6-30
6.6 Virtual Flash Emulation Function --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-31
6.6.1 Virtual Flash Emulation Area --------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-32
6.6.2 Entering Virtual Flash Emulation Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------6-35
6.6.3 Application Example of Virtual Flash Emulation Mode------------------------------------------------6-36
6.7 Connecting to A Serial Programmer ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-38
6.8 Internal Flash Memory Protect Function-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-40
6.9 Precautions To Be Taken when Rewriting the Internal Flash Memory --------------------------------------6-41
CHAPTER 7 RESET
7.1 Outline of Reset------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-2
7.2 Reset Operation -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-2
7.2.1 Reset at Power-on ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-3
7.2.2 Reset during Operation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-3
7.2.3 Reset at Entering RAM Backup Mode --------------------------------------------------------------------7-3
7.2.4 Reset Vector Relocation during Flash Programming--------------------------------------------------7-3
7.3 Internal State Immediately after Reset -------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-4
7.4 Things to Be Considered after Reset---------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-4
CHAPTER 8 INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
8.1 Outline of Input/Output Ports -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-2
8.2 Selecting Pin Functions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-3
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-5
8.3.1 Port Data Registers --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-7
8.3.2 Port Direction Registers --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-8
8.3.3 Port Operation Mode Registers-----------------------------------------------------------------------------8-9
8.3.4 Port Peripheral Output Select Registers------------------------------------------------------------------8-20
8.3.5 Port Input Special Function Control Register------------------------------------------------------------8-21
8.4 Port Input Level Switching Function ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-24
8.5 Port Peripheral Circuits --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-27
8.6 Precautions on Input/Output Ports ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-31
(4)
CHAPTER 9 DMAC
9.1 Outline of the DMAC------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-2
9.2 DMAC Related Registers------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-4
9.2.1 DMA Channel Control Registers ---------------------------------------------------------------------------9-6
9.2.2 DMA Software Request Generation Registers----------------------------------------------------------9-18
9.2.3 DMA Source Address Registers----------------------------------------------------------------------------9-19
9.2.4 DMA Destination Address Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------9-20
9.2.5 DMA Transfer Count Registers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------9-21
9.2.6 DMA Interrupt Related Registers---------------------------------------------------------------------------9-22
9.3 Functional Description of the DMAC----------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-27
9.3.1 DMA Transfer Request Sources----------------------------------------------------------------------------9-27
9.3.2 DMA Transfer Processing Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------9-33
9.3.3 Starting DMA ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-34
9.3.4 DMA Channel Priority -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-34
9.3.5 Gaining and Releasing Control of the Internal Bus ----------------------------------------------------9-34
9.3.6 Transfer Units ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-35
9.3.7 Transfer Counts-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-35
9.3.8 Address Space--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-35
9.3.9 Transfer Operation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-35
9.3.10 End of DMA and Interrupt ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-37
9.3.11 Each Register Status after Completion of DMA Transfer --------------------------------------------9-37
9.4 Precautions about the DMAC ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-38
CHAPTER 10 MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.1 Outline of Multijunction Timers ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-2
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------10-8
10.2.1 MJT Common Unit Register Map--------------------------------------------------------------------------10-9
10.2.2 Prescaler Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-10
10.2.3 Clock Bus and Input/Output Event Bus Control Unit -------------------------------------------------10-11
10.2.4 Input Processing Control Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-15
10.2.5 Output Flip-flop Control Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-21
10.2.6 Interrupt Control Unit -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-26
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-43
10.3.1 Outline of TOP --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-43
10.3.2 Outline of Each Mode of TOP -------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-45
10.3.3 TOP Related Register Map ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-47
10.3.4 TOP Control Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-49
10.3.5 TOP Counters (TOP0CT–TOP10CT) ---------------------------------------------------------------------10-54
10.3.6 TOP Reload Registers (TOP0RL–TOP10RL)-----------------------------------------------------------10-55
10.3.7 TOP Correction Registers (TOP0CC–TOP10CC) -----------------------------------------------------10-56
10.3.8 TOP Enable Control Registers------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-57
10.3.9 Operation in TOP Single-shot Output Mode (with Correction Function)--------------------------10-59
10.3.10 Operation in TOP Delayed Single-shot Output Mode (with Correction Function) --------------10-65
10.3.11 Operation in TOP Continuous Output Mode (without Correction Function) ---------------------10-70
(5)
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)---------------------------------------------------------------------------10-73
10.4.1 Outline of TIO ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-73
10.4.2 Outline of Each Mode of TIO --------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-75
10.4.3 TIO Related Register Map -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-78
10.4.4 TIO Control Registers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-80
10.4.5 TIO Counters (TIO0CT–TIO9CT) --------------------------------------------------------------------------10-88
10.4.6 TIO Reload 0/ Measure Registers (TIO0RL0–TIO9RL0)---------------------------------------------10-89
10.4.7 TIO Reload 1 Registers (TIO0RL1–TIO9RL1) ----------------------------------------------------------10-90
10.4.8 TIO Enable Control Registers -------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-91
10.4.9 Operation in TIO Measure Free-Run/ Clear Input Modes--------------------------------------------10-93
10.4.10 Operation in TIO Noise Processing Input Mode --------------------------------------------------------10-95
10.4.11 Operation in TIO PWM Output Mode----------------------------------------------------------------------10-96
10.4.12 Operation in TIO Single-shot Output Mode (without Correction Function)-----------------------10-99
10.4.13 Operation in TIO Delayed Single-shot Output Mode (without Correction Function) -----------10-101
10.4.14 Operation in TIO Continuous Output Mode (without Correction Function)-----------------------10-103
10.5 TMS (Input-Related 16-Bit Timer) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-105
10.5.1 Outline of TMS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-105
10.5.2 Outline of TMS Operation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-105
10.5.3 TMS Related Register Map ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-107
10.5.4 TMS Control Registers----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-108
10.5.5 TMS Counters (TMS0CT, TMS1CT) ----------------------------------------------------------------------10-109
10.5.6 TMS Measure Registers (TMS0MR3–0, TMS1MR3–0) ----------------------------------------------10-109
10.5.7 Operation of TMS Measure Input --------------------------------------------------------------------------10-110
10.6 TML (Input-Related 32-Bit Timer)------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-111
10.6.1 Outline of TML --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-111
10.6.2 Outline of TML Operation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-112
10.6.3 TML Related Register Map ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-112
10.6.4 TML Control Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-113
10.6.5 TML Counters ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-114
10.6.6 TML Measure Registers --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-114
10.6.7 Operation of TML Measure Input---------------------------------------------------------------------------10-115
CHAPTER 11 A-D CONVERTER
11.1 Outline of A-D Converter-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-2
11.1.1 Conversion Modes ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-5
11.1.2 Operation Modes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-5
11.1.3 Special Operation Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-8
11.1.4 A-D Converter Interrupt and DMA Transfer Requests ------------------------------------------------11-11
11.1.5 Sample-and-Hold Function-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-11
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-12
11.2.1 A-D Single Mode Register 0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-14
11.2.2 A-D Single Mode Register 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-16
11.2.3 A-D Scan Mode Register 0 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-18
11.2.4 A-D Scan Mode Register 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-20
11.2.5 A-D Conversion Speed Control Register -----------------------------------------------------------------11-22
(6)
11.2.6 A-D Disconnection Detection Assist Function Control Register ------------------------------------11-23
11.2.7 A-D Disconnection Detection Assist Method Select Register ---------------------------------------11-24
11.2.8 A-D Successive Approximation Register -----------------------------------------------------------------11-27
11.2.9 A-D Comparate Data Register ------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-28
11.2.10 10-bit A-D Data Registers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-29
11.2.11 8-bit A-D Data Registers--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-30
11.3 Functional Description of A-D Converter---------------------------------------------------------------------------11-31
11.3.1 How to Find Analog Input Voltages ------------------------------------------------------------------------11-31
11.3.2 A-D Conversion by Successive Approximation Method ----------------------------------------------11-32
11.3.3 Comparator Operation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-33
11.3.4 Calculating the A-D Conversion Time---------------------------------------------------------------------11-34
11.3.5 Accuracy of A-D Conversion --------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-37
11.4 Inflow Current Bypass Circuit-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-39
11.5 Precautions on Using A-D Converter -------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-41
CHAPTER 12 SERIAL I/O
12.1 Outline of Serial I/O -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-2
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-5
12.2.1 SIO Interrupt Related Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------12-6
12.2.2 SIO Transmit Control Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------12-13
12.2.3 SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Registers -------------------------------------------------------------------12-14
12.2.4 SIO Transmit Buffer Registers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-17
12.2.5 SIO Receive Buffer Registers -------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-18
12.2.6 SIO Receive Control Registers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------12-19
12.2.7 SIO Baud Rate Registers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-22
12.3 Transmit Operation in CSIO Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-23
12.3.1 Setting the CSIO Baud Rate---------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-23
12.3.2 Initializing CSIO Transmission ------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-24
12.3.3 Starting CSIO Transmission ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-26
12.3.4 Successive CSIO Transmission ----------------------------------------------------------------------------12-26
12.3.5 Processing at End of CSIO Transmission----------------------------------------------------------------12-27
12.3.6 Transmit Interrupts ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-27
12.3.7 Transmit DMA Transfer Request ---------------------------------------------------------------------------12-27
12.3.8 Example of CSIO Transmit Operation --------------------------------------------------------------------12-29
12.4 Receive Operation in CSIO Mode -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-31
12.4.1 Initialization for CSIO Reception----------------------------------------------------------------------------12-31
12.4.2 Starting CSIO Reception -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-33
12.4.3 Processing at End of CSIO Reception --------------------------------------------------------------------12-33
12.4.4 About Successive Reception --------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-34
12.4.5 Flags Showing the Status of CSIO Receive Operation -----------------------------------------------12-35
12.4.6 Example of CSIO Receive Operation ---------------------------------------------------------------------12-36
12.5 Precautions on Using CSIO Mode-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-38
12.6 Transmit Operation in UART Mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-39
12.6.1 Setting the UART Baud Rate --------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-39
12.6.2 UART Transmit/Receive Data Formats-------------------------------------------------------------------12-39
12.6.3 Initializing UART Transmission -----------------------------------------------------------------------------12-41
12.6.4 Starting UART Transmission --------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-43
(7)
12.6.5 Successive UART Transmission ---------------------------------------------------------------------------12-43
12.6.6 Processing at End of UART Transmission---------------------------------------------------------------12-43
12.6.7 Transmit Interrupts---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-43
12.6.8 Transmit DMA Transfer Request ---------------------------------------------------------------------------12-44
12.6.9 Example of UART Transmit Operation--------------------------------------------------------------------12-45
12.7 Receive Operation in UART Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-47
12.7.1 Initialization for UART Reception---------------------------------------------------------------------------12-47
12.7.2 Starting UART Reception ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-49
12.7.3 Processing at End of UART Reception -------------------------------------------------------------------12-49
12.7.4 Example of UART Receive Operation --------------------------------------------------------------------12-51
12.7.5 Start Bit Detection during UART Reception--------------------------------------------------------------12-53
12.8 Fixed Period Clock Output Function --------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-54
12.9 Precautions on Using UART Mode----------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-55
CHAPTER 13 CAN MODULE
13.1 Outline of the CAN Module --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-2
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-4
13.2.1 CAN Control Registers----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-15
13.2.2 CAN Status Registers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-18
13.2.3 CAN Frame Format Select Registers ---------------------------------------------------------------------13-21
13.2.4 CAN Configuration Registers--------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-22
13.2.5 CAN Timestamp Count Registers--------------------------------------------------------------------------13-24
13.2.6 CAN Error Count Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-25
13.2.7 CAN Baud Rate Prescalers----------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-26
13.2.8 CAN Interrupt Related Registers ---------------------------------------------------------------------------13-27
13.2.9 CAN Cause of Error Registers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-45
13.2.10 CAN Mode Registers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-46
13.2.11 CAN DMA Transfer Request Select Register -----------------------------------------------------------13-47
13.2.12 CAN Mask Registers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-48
13.2.13 CAN Single-Shot Mode Control Registers ---------------------------------------------------------------13-52
13.2.14 CAN Message Slot Control Registers---------------------------------------------------------------------13-53
13.2.15 CAN Message Slots -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-57
13.3 CAN Protocol -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-72
13.3.1 CAN Protocol Frames -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-72
13.3.2 Data Formats during CAN Transmission/Reception---------------------------------------------------13-73
13.3.3 CAN Controller Error States ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-74
13.4 Initializing the CAN Module--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-75
13.4.1 Initializing the CAN Module ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-75
13.5 Transmitting Data Frames ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-78
13.5.1 Data Frame Transmit Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------13-78
13.5.2 Data Frame Transmit Operation----------------------------------------------------------------------------13-79
13.5.3 Transmit Abort Function --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-80
13.6 Receiving Data Frames ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-81
13.6.1 Data Frame Receive Procedure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------13-81
13.6.2 Data Frame Receive Operation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------13-82
13.6.3 Reading Out Received Data Frames----------------------------------------------------------------------13-84
(8)
13.7 Transmitting Remote Frames ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-86
13.7.1 Remote Frame Transmit Procedure -----------------------------------------------------------------------13-86
13.7.2 Remote Frame Transmit Operation------------------------------------------------------------------------13-87
13.7.3 Reading Out Received Data Frames when Set for Remote Frame Transmission-------------13-89
13.8 Receiving Remote Frames --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-91
13.8.1 Remote Frame Receive Procedure------------------------------------------------------------------------13-91
13.8.2 Remote Frame Receive Operation ------------------------------------------------------------------------13-92
13.9 Precautions about CAN Module--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-95
CHAPTER 14 REAL TIME DEBUGGER (RTD)
14.1 Outline of the Real-Time Debugger (RTD) ------------------------------------------------------------------------14-2
14.2 Pin Functions of the RTD ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------14-3
14.3 Functional Description of the RTD-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------14-4
14.3.1 Outline of the RTD Operation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------14-4
14.3.2 Operation of RDR (Real-time RAM Content Output) -------------------------------------------------14-4
14.3.3 Operation of the WRR (RAM Content Forcible Rewrite)---------------------------------------------14-6
14.3.4 Operation of VER (Continuous Monitor) -----------------------------------------------------------------14-7
14.3.5 Operation of VEI (Interrupt Request) ---------------------------------------------------------------------14-7
14.3.6 Operation of RCV (Recover from Runaway) -----------------------------------------------------------14-8
14.3.7 Method for Setting a Specified Address when Using the RTD -------------------------------------14-9
14.3.8 Resetting the RTD---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------14-10
14.4 Typical Connection with the Host ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------14-11
CHAPTER 15 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
15.1 Outline of the External Bus Interface -------------------------------------------------------------------------------15-2
15.1.1 External Bus Interface Related Signals ------------------------------------------------------------------15-2
15.2 External Bus Interface Related Registers -------------------------------------------------------------------------15-4
15.2.1 Port Operation Mode Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------15-4
15.2.2 Port Peripheral Output Select Register ------------------------------------------------------------------15-8
15.2.3 Bus Mode Control Register ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------15-9
15.3 Read/Write Operations -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------15-10
15.4 Bus Arbitration ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------15-16
15.5 Typical Connection of External Extension Memory -------------------------------------------------------------15-18
15.6 Example of Bus Voltage Settings Using VCC-BUS -------------------------------------------------------------15-21
CHAPTER 16 WAIT CONTROLLER
16.1 Outline of the Wait Controller -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16-2
16.2 Wait Controller Related Registers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------16-4
16.2.1 CS Area Wait Control Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------16-4
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller ---------------------------------------------------------------------------16-6
CHAPTER 17 RAM BACKUP MODE
17.1 Outline of RAM Backup Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------17-2
17.2 Example of RAM Backup when Power is Off --------------------------------------------------------------------------17-3
17.2.1 Normal Operating State---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------17-3
17.2.2 RAM Backup State---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------17-4
(9)
17.3 Example of RAM Backup for Saving Power Consumption ----------------------------------------------------17-5
17.3.1 Normal Operating State---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------17-5
17.3.2 RAM Backup State---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------17-6
17.3.3 Precautions to Be Observed at Power-On ---------------------------------------------------------------17-7
17.4 Exiting RAM Backup Mode (Wakeup) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------17-8
CHAPTER 18 OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT
18.1 Oscillator Circuit----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------18-2
18.1.1 Example of an Oscillator Circuit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------18-2
18.1.2 XIN Oscillation Stoppage Detection Circuit --------------------------------------------------------------18-3
18.1.3 Oscillation Drive Capability Select Function -------------------------------------------------------------18-5
18.1.4 System Clock Output Function------------------------------------------------------------------------------18-7
18.1.5 Oscillation Stabilization Time at Power-On --------------------------------------------------------------18-7
18.2 Clock Generator Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------18-8
CHAPTER 19 JTAG
19.1 Outline of JTAG ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-2
19.2 Configuration of the JTAG Circuit------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-3
19.3 JTAG Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-4
19.3.1 Instruction Register (JTAGIR)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-4
19.3.2 Data Register----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-5
19.4 Basic Operation of JTAG ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-6
19.4.1 Outline of JTAG Operation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-6
19.4.2 IR Path Sequence----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-8
19.4.3 DR Path Sequence --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-9
19.4.4 Inspecting and Setting Data Registers--------------------------------------------------------------------19-10
19.5 Boundary Scan Description Language -----------------------------------------------------------------------------19-11
19.6 Notes on Board Design when Connecting JTAG----------------------------------------------------------------------19-12
19.7 Processing Pins when Not Using JTAG----------------------------------------------------------------------------19-13
CHAPTER 20 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
20.1 Configuration of the Power Supply Circuit-------------------------------------------------------------------------20-2
20.2 Power-On Sequence----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------20-3
20.2.1 Power-On Sequence when Not Using RAM Backup --------------------------------------------------20-3
20.2.2 Power-On Sequence when Using RAM Backup--------------------------------------------------------20-4
20.3 Power-Off Sequence----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------20-5
20.3.1 Power-Off Sequence when Not Using RAM Backup --------------------------------------------------20-5
20.3.2 Power-Off Sequence when Using RAM Backup -------------------------------------------------------20-6
CHAPTER 21 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
21.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21-2
21.2 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz ----------------------------------------------21-3
21.2.1 Recommended Operating Conditions (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz)-------------------21-3
21.2.2 D.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz) -----------------------------------------21-5
21.2.3 A-D Conversion Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz) --------------------------21-6
(10)
21.3 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz ------------------------------------------------21-7
21.3.1 Recommended Operating Conditions (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz) --------------------21-7
21.3.2 D.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz)-------------------------------------------21-9
21.3.3 A-D Conversion Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz)----------------------------21-10
21.4 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 3.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz --------------------------------------------21-11
21.4.1 Recommended Operating Conditions (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz)------21-11
21.4.2 D.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz) ----------------------------21-13
21.4.3 A-D Conversion Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz) -------------21-14
21.5 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 3.3 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz----------------------------------------------21-15
21.5.1 Recommended Operating Conditions (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V f(XIN) = 8 MHz) --------21-15
21.5.2 D.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz) ------------------------------21-17
21.5.3 A-D Conversion Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz)---------------21-18
21.6 Flash Memory Related Characteristics-----------------------------------------------------------------------------21-19
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V) --------------------------------------------------------------------------21-20
21.7.1 Timing Requirements------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21-20
21.7.2 Switching Characteristics-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21-24
21.7.3 A.C. Characteristics--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21-27
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V) -----------------------------------------------------------------------21-36
21.8.1 Timing Requirements------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21-36
21.8.2 Switching Characteristics-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21-40
21.8.3 A.C. Characteristics--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21-43
CHAPTER 22 TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS
To be written at a later time---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------22-2
APPENDIX 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICAITONS
Appendix 1.1 Dimensional Outline Drawing ------------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 1-2
APPENDIX 2 INSTRUCTION PROCESSING TIME
Appendix 2.1 32182 Instruction Processing Time------------------------------------------------------------ Appendix 2-2
APPENDIX 3 PROCESSING OF UNUSED PINS
Appendix 3.1 Example Processing of Unused Pins --------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 3-2
APPENDIX 4 SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.1 Precautions about the CPU--------------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-2
Appendix 4.1.1 Precautions Regarding Data Transfer ------------------------------------------------ Appendix 4-2
Appendix 4.2 Precautions about the Address Space------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-3
Appendix 4.2.1 Virtual Flash Emulation Function ------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-3
Appendix 4.3 Precautions about EIT --------------------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-3
Appendix 4.4 Precautions To Be Observed when Programming Internal Flash Memory --------- Appendix 4-3
Appendix 4.5 Precautions to Be Observed after Reset ---------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-4
Appendix 4.5.1 Input/output Ports -------------------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-4
(11)
Appendix 4.6 Precautions about Input/Output Ports --------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-4
Appendix 4.6.1 When Using Input/Output Ports in Output Mode ------------------------------- Appendix 4-4
Appendix 4.6.2 About the Port Input Disable Function -------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-4
Appendix 4.7 Precautions about the DMAC-------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-5
Appendix 4.7.1 About Writing to the DMAC Related Registers---------------------------------- Appendix 4-5
Appendix 4.7.2 Manipulating the DMAC Related Registers by DMA Transfer -------------- Appendix 4-5
Appendix 4.7.3 About the DMA Interrupt Request Status Register----------------------------- Appendix 4-5
Appendix 4.7.4 About the Stable Operation of DMA Transfer ----------------------------------- Appendix 4-5
Appendix 4.8 Precautions about the Multijunction Timers-------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-6
Appendix 4.8.1 Precautions on Using TOP Single-Shot Output Mode ------------------------ Appendix 4-6
Appendix 4.8.2 Precautions on Using TOP Delayed Single-Shot Output Mode ------------ Appendix 4-8
Appendix 4.8.3 Precautions on Using TOP Continuous Output Mode------------------------- Appendix 4-9
Appendix 4.8.4 Precautions on Using TIO Measure Free-Run/Clear Input Modes--------- Appendix 4-9
Appendix 4.8.5 Precautions on Using TIO PWM Output Mode---------------------------------- Appendix 4-9
Appendix 4.8.6 Precautions on Using TIO Single-Shot Output Mode ------------------------- Appendix 4-9
Appendix 4.8.7 Precautions on Using TIO Delayed Single-Shot Output Mode-------------- Appendix 4-10
Appendix 4.8.8 Precautions on Using TIO Continuous Output Mode-------------------------- Appendix 4-10
Appendix 4.8.9 Precautions on Using TMS Measure Input--------------------------------------- Appendix 4-10
Appendix 4.8.10 Precautions on Using TML Measure Input -------------------------------------- Appendix 4-11
Appendix 4.9 Precautions about the A-D Converters -------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-12
Appendix 4.10 Precautions about Serial I/O--------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-15
Appendix 4.10.1 Precautions on Using CSIO Mode------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-15
Appendix 4.10.2 Precautions on Using UART Mode ------------------------------------------------ Appendix 4-16
Appendix 4.11 Precautions about RAM Backup Mode ------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-17
Appendix 4.11.1 Precautions to Be Observed at Power-On -------------------------------------- Appendix 4-17
Appendix 4.12 Precautions about JTAG ------------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-18
Appendix 4.12.1 Notes on Board Design when Connecting JTAG------------------------------- Appendix 4-18
Appendix 4.12.2 Processing Pins when Not Using JTAG------------------------------------------ Appendix 4-19
Appendix 4.13 Precautions about Noise ------------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-20
Appendix 4.13.1 Reduction of Wiring Length --------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-20
Appendix 4.13.2 Inserting a Bypass Capacitor between VSS and VCC Lines --------------- Appendix 4-23
Appendix 4.13.3 Processing Analog Input Pin Wiring ---------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-23
Appendix 4.13.4 Consideration about the Oscillator and VCNT Pin ---------------------------- Appendix 4-24
Appendix 4.13.5 Processing Input/Output Ports ----------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-28
(12)
This page is blank for reasons of layout.
(2)
CHAPTER 4 EIT
4.1 Outline of EIT---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-2
4.2 EIT Events ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-3
4.2.1 Exception ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-3
4.2.2 Interrupt -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-5
4.2.3 Trap ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-6
4.3 EIT Processing Procedure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-6
4.4 EIT Processing Mechanism---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-7
4.5 Acceptance of EIT Events-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-8
4.6 Saving and Restoring the PC and PSW -----------------------------------------------------------------------------4-8
4.7 EIT Vector Entry -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-10
4.8 Exception Processing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-11
4.8.1 Reserved Instruction Exception (RIE)---------------------------------------------------------------------4-11
4.8.2 Address Exception (AE) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-12
4.8.3 Floating-Point Exception (FPE) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------4-13
4.9 Interrupt Processing ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-15
4.9.1 Reset Interrupt (RI) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-15
4.9.2 System Break Interrupt (SBI)--------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-15
4.9.3 External Interrupt (EI) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-17
4.10 Trap Processing----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-18
4.10.1 Trap ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-18
4.11 EIT Priority Levels -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-19
4.12 Example of EIT Processing -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-20
4.13 Precautions on EIT ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-22
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
5.1 Outline of the Interrupt Controller--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-2
5.2 ICU Related Registers ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-4
5.2.1 Interrupt Vector Register -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-5
5.2.2 Interrupt Request Mask Register ---------------------------------------------------------------------------5-6
5.2.3 SBI (System Break Interrupt) Control Register ---------------------------------------------------------5-7
5.2.4 Interrupt Control Registers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-8
5.3 Interrupt Request Sources in Internal Peripheral I/O -------------------------------------------------------------5-11
5.4 ICU Vector Table ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-12
5.5 Description of Interrupt Operation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-13
5.5.1 Acceptance of Internal Peripheral I/O Interrupts -------------------------------------------------------5-13
5.5.2 Processing by Internal Peripheral I/O Interrupt Handlers --------------------------------------------5-15
5.6 Description of System Break Interrupt (SBI) Operation----------------------------------------------------------5-18
5.6.1 Acceptance of SBI ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-18
5.6.2 SBI Processing by Handler ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-18
CHAPTER 6 INTERNAL MEMORY
6.1 Outline of the Internal Memory -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-2
6.2 Internal RAM----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-2
6.3 Internal Flash Memory ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-2
(3)
6.4 Registers Associated with the Internal Flash Memory -----------------------------------------------------------6-5
6.4.1 Flash Mode Register ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-5
6.4.2 Flash Status Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-6
6.4.3 Flash Status Register 2 (FSTAT2)-------------------------------------------------------------------------6-6
6.4.4 Flash Control Registers---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-8
6.4.5 Virtual Flash S Bank Registers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-12
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-13
6.5.1 Outline of Internal Flash Memory Programming--------------------------------------------------------6-13
6.5.2 Controlling Operation Modes during Flash Programming--------------------------------------------6-18
6.5.3 Procedure for Programming/Erasing the Internal Flash Memory ----------------------------------6-21
6.5.4 Flash Programming Time (Reference)--------------------------------------------------------------------6-30
6.6 Virtual Flash Emulation Function --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-31
6.6.1 Virtual Flash Emulation Area --------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-32
6.6.2 Entering Virtual Flash Emulation Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------6-35
6.6.3 Application Example of Virtual Flash Emulation Mode------------------------------------------------6-36
6.7 Connecting to A Serial Programmer ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-38
6.8 Internal Flash Memory Protect Function-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-40
6.9 Precautions To Be Taken when Rewriting the Internal Flash Memory --------------------------------------6-41
CHAPTER 7 RESET
7.1 Outline of Reset------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-2
7.2 Reset Operation -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-2
7.2.1 Reset at Power-on ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-3
7.2.2 Reset during Operation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-3
7.2.3 Reset at Entering RAM Backup Mode --------------------------------------------------------------------7-3
7.2.4 Reset Vector Relocation during Flash Programming--------------------------------------------------7-3
7.3 Internal State Immediately after Reset -------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-4
7.4 Things to Be Considered after Reset---------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-4
CHAPTER 8 INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
8.1 Outline of Input/Output Ports -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-2
8.2 Selecting Pin Functions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-3
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-5
8.3.1 Port Data Registers --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-7
8.3.2 Port Direction Registers --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-8
8.3.3 Port Operation Mode Registers-----------------------------------------------------------------------------8-9
8.3.4 Port Peripheral Output Select Registers------------------------------------------------------------------8-20
8.3.5 Port Input Special Function Control Register------------------------------------------------------------8-21
8.4 Port Input Level Switching Function ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-24
8.5 Port Peripheral Circuits --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-27
8.6 Precautions on Input/Output Ports ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-31
(4)
CHAPTER 9 DMAC
9.1 Outline of the DMAC------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-2
9.2 DMAC Related Registers------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-4
9.2.1 DMA Channel Control Registers ---------------------------------------------------------------------------9-6
9.2.2 DMA Software Request Generation Registers----------------------------------------------------------9-18
9.2.3 DMA Source Address Registers----------------------------------------------------------------------------9-19
9.2.4 DMA Destination Address Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------9-20
9.2.5 DMA Transfer Count Registers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------9-21
9.2.6 DMA Interrupt Related Registers---------------------------------------------------------------------------9-22
9.3 Functional Description of the DMAC----------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-27
9.3.1 DMA Transfer Request Sources----------------------------------------------------------------------------9-27
9.3.2 DMA Transfer Processing Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------9-33
9.3.3 Starting DMA ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-34
9.3.4 DMA Channel Priority -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-34
9.3.5 Gaining and Releasing Control of the Internal Bus ----------------------------------------------------9-34
9.3.6 Transfer Units ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-35
9.3.7 Transfer Counts-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-35
9.3.8 Address Space--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-35
9.3.9 Transfer Operation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-35
9.3.10 End of DMA and Interrupt ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-37
9.3.11 Each Register Status after Completion of DMA Transfer --------------------------------------------9-37
9.4 Precautions about the DMAC ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-38
CHAPTER 10 MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.1 Outline of Multijunction Timers ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-2
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------10-8
10.2.1 MJT Common Unit Register Map--------------------------------------------------------------------------10-9
10.2.2 Prescaler Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-10
10.2.3 Clock Bus and Input/Output Event Bus Control Unit -------------------------------------------------10-11
10.2.4 Input Processing Control Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-15
10.2.5 Output Flip-flop Control Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-21
10.2.6 Interrupt Control Unit -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-26
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-43
10.3.1 Outline of TOP --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-43
10.3.2 Outline of Each Mode of TOP -------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-45
10.3.3 TOP Related Register Map ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-47
10.3.4 TOP Control Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-49
10.3.5 TOP Counters (TOP0CT–TOP10CT) ---------------------------------------------------------------------10-54
10.3.6 TOP Reload Registers (TOP0RL–TOP10RL)-----------------------------------------------------------10-55
10.3.7 TOP Correction Registers (TOP0CC–TOP10CC) -----------------------------------------------------10-56
10.3.8 TOP Enable Control Registers------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-57
10.3.9 Operation in TOP Single-shot Output Mode (with Correction Function)--------------------------10-59
10.3.10 Operation in TOP Delayed Single-shot Output Mode (with Correction Function) --------------10-65
10.3.11 Operation in TOP Continuous Output Mode (without Correction Function) ---------------------10-70
(5)
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)---------------------------------------------------------------------------10-73
10.4.1 Outline of TIO ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-73
10.4.2 Outline of Each Mode of TIO --------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-75
10.4.3 TIO Related Register Map -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-78
10.4.4 TIO Control Registers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-80
10.4.5 TIO Counters (TIO0CT–TIO9CT) --------------------------------------------------------------------------10-88
10.4.6 TIO Reload 0/ Measure Registers (TIO0RL0–TIO9RL0)---------------------------------------------10-89
10.4.7 TIO Reload 1 Registers (TIO0RL1–TIO9RL1) ----------------------------------------------------------10-90
10.4.8 TIO Enable Control Registers -------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-91
10.4.9 Operation in TIO Measure Free-Run/ Clear Input Modes--------------------------------------------10-93
10.4.10 Operation in TIO Noise Processing Input Mode --------------------------------------------------------10-95
10.4.11 Operation in TIO PWM Output Mode----------------------------------------------------------------------10-96
10.4.12 Operation in TIO Single-shot Output Mode (without Correction Function)-----------------------10-99
10.4.13 Operation in TIO Delayed Single-shot Output Mode (without Correction Function) -----------10-101
10.4.14 Operation in TIO Continuous Output Mode (without Correction Function)-----------------------10-103
10.5 TMS (Input-Related 16-Bit Timer) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-105
10.5.1 Outline of TMS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-105
10.5.2 Outline of TMS Operation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-105
10.5.3 TMS Related Register Map ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-107
10.5.4 TMS Control Registers----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-108
10.5.5 TMS Counters (TMS0CT, TMS1CT) ----------------------------------------------------------------------10-109
10.5.6 TMS Measure Registers (TMS0MR3–0, TMS1MR3–0) ----------------------------------------------10-109
10.5.7 Operation of TMS Measure Input --------------------------------------------------------------------------10-110
10.6 TML (Input-Related 32-Bit Timer)------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-111
10.6.1 Outline of TML --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-111
10.6.2 Outline of TML Operation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-112
10.6.3 TML Related Register Map ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-112
10.6.4 TML Control Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-113
10.6.5 TML Counters ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-114
10.6.6 TML Measure Registers --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-114
10.6.7 Operation of TML Measure Input---------------------------------------------------------------------------10-115
CHAPTER 11 A-D CONVERTER
11.1 Outline of A-D Converter-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-2
11.1.1 Conversion Modes ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-5
11.1.2 Operation Modes -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-5
11.1.3 Special Operation Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-8
11.1.4 A-D Converter Interrupt and DMA Transfer Requests ------------------------------------------------11-11
11.1.5 Sample-and-Hold Function-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-11
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-12
11.2.1 A-D Single Mode Register 0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-14
11.2.2 A-D Single Mode Register 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-16
11.2.3 A-D Scan Mode Register 0 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-18
11.2.4 A-D Scan Mode Register 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-20
11.2.5 A-D Conversion Speed Control Register -----------------------------------------------------------------11-22
(6)
11.2.6 A-D Disconnection Detection Assist Function Control Register ------------------------------------11-23
11.2.7 A-D Disconnection Detection Assist Method Select Register ---------------------------------------11-24
11.2.8 A-D Successive Approximation Register -----------------------------------------------------------------11-27
11.2.9 A-D Comparate Data Register ------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-28
11.2.10 10-bit A-D Data Registers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-29
11.2.11 8-bit A-D Data Registers--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-30
11.3 Functional Description of A-D Converter---------------------------------------------------------------------------11-31
11.3.1 How to Find Analog Input Voltages ------------------------------------------------------------------------11-31
11.3.2 A-D Conversion by Successive Approximation Method ----------------------------------------------11-32
11.3.3 Comparator Operation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-33
11.3.4 Calculating the A-D Conversion Time---------------------------------------------------------------------11-34
11.3.5 Accuracy of A-D Conversion --------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-37
11.4 Inflow Current Bypass Circuit-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-39
11.5 Precautions on Using A-D Converter -------------------------------------------------------------------------------11-41
CHAPTER 12 SERIAL I/O
12.1 Outline of Serial I/O -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-2
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-5
12.2.1 SIO Interrupt Related Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------12-6
12.2.2 SIO Transmit Control Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------12-13
12.2.3 SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Registers -------------------------------------------------------------------12-14
12.2.4 SIO Transmit Buffer Registers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-17
12.2.5 SIO Receive Buffer Registers -------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-18
12.2.6 SIO Receive Control Registers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------12-19
12.2.7 SIO Baud Rate Registers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-22
12.3 Transmit Operation in CSIO Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-23
12.3.1 Setting the CSIO Baud Rate---------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-23
12.3.2 Initializing CSIO Transmission ------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-24
12.3.3 Starting CSIO Transmission ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-26
12.3.4 Successive CSIO Transmission ----------------------------------------------------------------------------12-26
12.3.5 Processing at End of CSIO Transmission----------------------------------------------------------------12-27
12.3.6 Transmit Interrupts ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-27
12.3.7 Transmit DMA Transfer Request ---------------------------------------------------------------------------12-27
12.3.8 Example of CSIO Transmit Operation --------------------------------------------------------------------12-29
12.4 Receive Operation in CSIO Mode -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-31
12.4.1 Initialization for CSIO Reception----------------------------------------------------------------------------12-31
12.4.2 Starting CSIO Reception -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-33
12.4.3 Processing at End of CSIO Reception --------------------------------------------------------------------12-33
12.4.4 About Successive Reception --------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-34
12.4.5 Flags Showing the Status of CSIO Receive Operation -----------------------------------------------12-35
12.4.6 Example of CSIO Receive Operation ---------------------------------------------------------------------12-36
12.5 Precautions on Using CSIO Mode-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-38
12.6 Transmit Operation in UART Mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-39
12.6.1 Setting the UART Baud Rate --------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-39
12.6.2 UART Transmit/Receive Data Formats-------------------------------------------------------------------12-39
12.6.3 Initializing UART Transmission -----------------------------------------------------------------------------12-41
12.6.4 Starting UART Transmission --------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-43
(7)
12.6.5 Successive UART Transmission ---------------------------------------------------------------------------12-43
12.6.6 Processing at End of UART Transmission---------------------------------------------------------------12-43
12.6.7 Transmit Interrupts---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-43
12.6.8 Transmit DMA Transfer Request ---------------------------------------------------------------------------12-44
12.6.9 Example of UART Transmit Operation--------------------------------------------------------------------12-45
12.7 Receive Operation in UART Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-47
12.7.1 Initialization for UART Reception---------------------------------------------------------------------------12-47
12.7.2 Starting UART Reception ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-49
12.7.3 Processing at End of UART Reception -------------------------------------------------------------------12-49
12.7.4 Example of UART Receive Operation --------------------------------------------------------------------12-51
12.7.5 Start Bit Detection during UART Reception--------------------------------------------------------------12-53
12.8 Fixed Period Clock Output Function --------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-54
12.9 Precautions on Using UART Mode----------------------------------------------------------------------------------12-55
CHAPTER 13 CAN MODULE
13.1 Outline of the CAN Module --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-2
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-4
13.2.1 CAN Control Registers----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-15
13.2.2 CAN Status Registers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-18
13.2.3 CAN Frame Format Select Registers ---------------------------------------------------------------------13-21
13.2.4 CAN Configuration Registers--------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-22
13.2.5 CAN Timestamp Count Registers--------------------------------------------------------------------------13-24
13.2.6 CAN Error Count Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-25
13.2.7 CAN Baud Rate Prescalers----------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-26
13.2.8 CAN Interrupt Related Registers ---------------------------------------------------------------------------13-27
13.2.9 CAN Cause of Error Registers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-45
13.2.10 CAN Mode Registers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-46
13.2.11 CAN DMA Transfer Request Select Register -----------------------------------------------------------13-47
13.2.12 CAN Mask Registers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-48
13.2.13 CAN Single-Shot Mode Control Registers ---------------------------------------------------------------13-52
13.2.14 CAN Message Slot Control Registers---------------------------------------------------------------------13-53
13.2.15 CAN Message Slots -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-57
13.3 CAN Protocol -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-72
13.3.1 CAN Protocol Frames -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-72
13.3.2 Data Formats during CAN Transmission/Reception---------------------------------------------------13-73
13.3.3 CAN Controller Error States ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-74
13.4 Initializing the CAN Module--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-75
13.4.1 Initializing the CAN Module ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-75
13.5 Transmitting Data Frames ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-78
13.5.1 Data Frame Transmit Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------------------------13-78
13.5.2 Data Frame Transmit Operation----------------------------------------------------------------------------13-79
13.5.3 Transmit Abort Function --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-80
13.6 Receiving Data Frames ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-81
13.6.1 Data Frame Receive Procedure ----------------------------------------------------------------------------13-81
13.6.2 Data Frame Receive Operation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------13-82
13.6.3 Reading Out Received Data Frames----------------------------------------------------------------------13-84
(8)
13.7 Transmitting Remote Frames ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-86
13.7.1 Remote Frame Transmit Procedure -----------------------------------------------------------------------13-86
13.7.2 Remote Frame Transmit Operation------------------------------------------------------------------------13-87
13.7.3 Reading Out Received Data Frames when Set for Remote Frame Transmission-------------13-89
13.8 Receiving Remote Frames --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-91
13.8.1 Remote Frame Receive Procedure------------------------------------------------------------------------13-91
13.8.2 Remote Frame Receive Operation ------------------------------------------------------------------------13-92
13.9 Precautions about CAN Module--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13-95
CHAPTER 14 REAL TIME DEBUGGER (RTD)
14.1 Outline of the Real-Time Debugger (RTD) ------------------------------------------------------------------------14-2
14.2 Pin Functions of the RTD ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------14-3
14.3 Functional Description of the RTD-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------14-4
14.3.1 Outline of the RTD Operation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------14-4
14.3.2 Operation of RDR (Real-time RAM Content Output) -------------------------------------------------14-4
14.3.3 Operation of the WRR (RAM Content Forcible Rewrite)---------------------------------------------14-6
14.3.4 Operation of VER (Continuous Monitor) -----------------------------------------------------------------14-7
14.3.5 Operation of VEI (Interrupt Request) ---------------------------------------------------------------------14-7
14.3.6 Operation of RCV (Recover from Runaway) -----------------------------------------------------------14-8
14.3.7 Method for Setting a Specified Address when Using the RTD -------------------------------------14-9
14.3.8 Resetting the RTD---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------14-10
14.4 Typical Connection with the Host ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------14-11
CHAPTER 15 EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
15.1 Outline of the External Bus Interface -------------------------------------------------------------------------------15-2
15.1.1 External Bus Interface Related Signals ------------------------------------------------------------------15-2
15.2 External Bus Interface Related Registers -------------------------------------------------------------------------15-4
15.2.1 Port Operation Mode Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------15-4
15.2.2 Port Peripheral Output Select Register ------------------------------------------------------------------15-8
15.2.3 Bus Mode Control Register ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------15-9
15.3 Read/Write Operations -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------15-10
15.4 Bus Arbitration ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------15-16
15.5 Typical Connection of External Extension Memory -------------------------------------------------------------15-18
15.6 Example of Bus Voltage Settings Using VCC-BUS -------------------------------------------------------------15-21
CHAPTER 16 WAIT CONTROLLER
16.1 Outline of the Wait Controller -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------16-2
16.2 Wait Controller Related Registers -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------16-4
16.2.1 CS Area Wait Control Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------16-4
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller ---------------------------------------------------------------------------16-6
CHAPTER 17 RAM BACKUP MODE
17.1 Outline of RAM Backup Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------17-2
17.2 Example of RAM Backup when Power is Off --------------------------------------------------------------------------17-3
17.2.1 Normal Operating State---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------17-3
17.2.2 RAM Backup State---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------17-4
(9)
17.3 Example of RAM Backup for Saving Power Consumption ----------------------------------------------------17-5
17.3.1 Normal Operating State---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------17-5
17.3.2 RAM Backup State---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------17-6
17.3.3 Precautions to Be Observed at Power-On ---------------------------------------------------------------17-7
17.4 Exiting RAM Backup Mode (Wakeup) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------17-8
CHAPTER 18 OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT
18.1 Oscillator Circuit----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------18-2
18.1.1 Example of an Oscillator Circuit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------18-2
18.1.2 XIN Oscillation Stoppage Detection Circuit --------------------------------------------------------------18-3
18.1.3 Oscillation Drive Capability Select Function -------------------------------------------------------------18-5
18.1.4 System Clock Output Function------------------------------------------------------------------------------18-7
18.1.5 Oscillation Stabilization Time at Power-On --------------------------------------------------------------18-7
18.2 Clock Generator Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------18-8
CHAPTER 19 JTAG
19.1 Outline of JTAG ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-2
19.2 Configuration of the JTAG Circuit------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-3
19.3 JTAG Registers ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-4
19.3.1 Instruction Register (JTAGIR)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-4
19.3.2 Data Register----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-5
19.4 Basic Operation of JTAG ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-6
19.4.1 Outline of JTAG Operation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-6
19.4.2 IR Path Sequence----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-8
19.4.3 DR Path Sequence --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------19-9
19.4.4 Inspecting and Setting Data Registers--------------------------------------------------------------------19-10
19.5 Boundary Scan Description Language -----------------------------------------------------------------------------19-11
19.6 Notes on Board Design when Connecting JTAG----------------------------------------------------------------------19-12
19.7 Processing Pins when Not Using JTAG----------------------------------------------------------------------------19-13
CHAPTER 20 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
20.1 Configuration of the Power Supply Circuit-------------------------------------------------------------------------20-2
20.2 Power-On Sequence----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------20-3
20.2.1 Power-On Sequence when Not Using RAM Backup --------------------------------------------------20-3
20.2.2 Power-On Sequence when Using RAM Backup--------------------------------------------------------20-4
20.3 Power-Off Sequence----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------20-5
20.3.1 Power-Off Sequence when Not Using RAM Backup --------------------------------------------------20-5
20.3.2 Power-Off Sequence when Using RAM Backup -------------------------------------------------------20-6
CHAPTER 21 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
21.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21-2
21.2 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz ----------------------------------------------21-3
21.2.1 Recommended Operating Conditions (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz)-------------------21-3
21.2.2 D.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz) -----------------------------------------21-5
21.2.3 A-D Conversion Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz) --------------------------21-6
(10)
21.3 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz ------------------------------------------------21-7
21.3.1 Recommended Operating Conditions (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz) --------------------21-7
21.3.2 D.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz)-------------------------------------------21-9
21.3.3 A-D Conversion Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz)----------------------------21-10
21.4 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 3.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz --------------------------------------------21-11
21.4.1 Recommended Operating Conditions (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz)------21-11
21.4.2 D.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz) ----------------------------21-13
21.4.3 A-D Conversion Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz) -------------21-14
21.5 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 3.3 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz----------------------------------------------21-15
21.5.1 Recommended Operating Conditions (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V f(XIN) = 8 MHz) --------21-15
21.5.2 D.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz) ------------------------------21-17
21.5.3 A-D Conversion Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz)---------------21-18
21.6 Flash Memory Related Characteristics-----------------------------------------------------------------------------21-19
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V) --------------------------------------------------------------------------21-20
21.7.1 Timing Requirements------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21-20
21.7.2 Switching Characteristics-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21-24
21.7.3 A.C. Characteristics--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21-27
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V) -----------------------------------------------------------------------21-36
21.8.1 Timing Requirements------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21-36
21.8.2 Switching Characteristics-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21-40
21.8.3 A.C. Characteristics--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------21-43
CHAPTER 22 TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS
To be written at a later time---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------22-2
APPENDIX 1 MECHANICAL SPECIFICAITONS
Appendix 1.1 Dimensional Outline Drawing ------------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 1-2
APPENDIX 2 INSTRUCTION PROCESSING TIME
Appendix 2.1 32182 Instruction Processing Time------------------------------------------------------------ Appendix 2-2
APPENDIX 3 PROCESSING OF UNUSED PINS
Appendix 3.1 Example Processing of Unused Pins --------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 3-2
APPENDIX 4 SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.1 Precautions about the CPU--------------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-2
Appendix 4.1.1 Precautions Regarding Data Transfer ------------------------------------------------ Appendix 4-2
Appendix 4.2 Precautions about the Address Space------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-3
Appendix 4.2.1 Virtual Flash Emulation Function ------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-3
Appendix 4.3 Precautions about EIT --------------------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-3
Appendix 4.4 Precautions To Be Observed when Programming Internal Flash Memory --------- Appendix 4-3
Appendix 4.5 Precautions to Be Observed after Reset ---------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-4
Appendix 4.5.1 Input/output Ports -------------------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-4
(11)
Appendix 4.6 Precautions about Input/Output Ports --------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-4
Appendix 4.6.1 When Using Input/Output Ports in Output Mode ------------------------------- Appendix 4-4
Appendix 4.6.2 About the Port Input Disable Function -------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-4
Appendix 4.7 Precautions about the DMAC-------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-5
Appendix 4.7.1 About Writing to the DMAC Related Registers---------------------------------- Appendix 4-5
Appendix 4.7.2 Manipulating the DMAC Related Registers by DMA Transfer -------------- Appendix 4-5
Appendix 4.7.3 About the DMA Interrupt Request Status Register----------------------------- Appendix 4-5
Appendix 4.7.4 About the Stable Operation of DMA Transfer ----------------------------------- Appendix 4-5
Appendix 4.8 Precautions about the Multijunction Timers-------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-6
Appendix 4.8.1 Precautions on Using TOP Single-Shot Output Mode ------------------------ Appendix 4-6
Appendix 4.8.2 Precautions on Using TOP Delayed Single-Shot Output Mode ------------ Appendix 4-8
Appendix 4.8.3 Precautions on Using TOP Continuous Output Mode------------------------- Appendix 4-9
Appendix 4.8.4 Precautions on Using TIO Measure Free-Run/Clear Input Modes--------- Appendix 4-9
Appendix 4.8.5 Precautions on Using TIO PWM Output Mode---------------------------------- Appendix 4-9
Appendix 4.8.6 Precautions on Using TIO Single-Shot Output Mode ------------------------- Appendix 4-9
Appendix 4.8.7 Precautions on Using TIO Delayed Single-Shot Output Mode-------------- Appendix 4-10
Appendix 4.8.8 Precautions on Using TIO Continuous Output Mode-------------------------- Appendix 4-10
Appendix 4.8.9 Precautions on Using TMS Measure Input--------------------------------------- Appendix 4-10
Appendix 4.8.10 Precautions on Using TML Measure Input -------------------------------------- Appendix 4-11
Appendix 4.9 Precautions about the A-D Converters -------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-12
Appendix 4.10 Precautions about Serial I/O--------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-15
Appendix 4.10.1 Precautions on Using CSIO Mode------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-15
Appendix 4.10.2 Precautions on Using UART Mode ------------------------------------------------ Appendix 4-16
Appendix 4.11 Precautions about RAM Backup Mode ------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-17
Appendix 4.11.1 Precautions to Be Observed at Power-On -------------------------------------- Appendix 4-17
Appendix 4.12 Precautions about JTAG ------------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-18
Appendix 4.12.1 Notes on Board Design when Connecting JTAG------------------------------- Appendix 4-18
Appendix 4.12.2 Processing Pins when Not Using JTAG------------------------------------------ Appendix 4-19
Appendix 4.13 Precautions about Noise ------------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-20
Appendix 4.13.1 Reduction of Wiring Length --------------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-20
Appendix 4.13.2 Inserting a Bypass Capacitor between VSS and VCC Lines --------------- Appendix 4-23
Appendix 4.13.3 Processing Analog Input Pin Wiring ---------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-23
Appendix 4.13.4 Consideration about the Oscillator and VCNT Pin ---------------------------- Appendix 4-24
Appendix 4.13.5 Processing Input/Output Ports ----------------------------------------------------- Appendix 4-28
(12)
This page is blank for reasons of layout.
CHAPTER 1
OVERVIEW
1.1 Outline of the 32182 Group
1.2 Block Diagram
1.3 Pin Functions
1.4 Pin Assignments
1-2
1OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
1.1 Outline of the 32182 Group
The 32182 group (hereafter simply the 32182) belongs to the M32R/ECU series in the M32R family of
Renesas microcomputers. For details about the current development status of the 32182, please contact your
nearest office of Renesas or its distributor.
Table 1.1.1 Product List
Type Name ROM Size RAM Size Package Type Operating Ambient Temperature
M32182F3VFP 384 Kbytes 64 Kbytes 144-pin LQFP: 144P6Q-A (0.5 mm pitch) –40°C to 125°C (@64 MHz)
M32182F3UFP 384 Kbytes 64 Kbytes 144-pin LQFP: 144P6Q-A (0.5 mm pitch) –40°C to 105°C (@80 MHz)
M32182F3TFP 384 Kbytes 64 Kbytes 144-pin LQFP: 144P6Q-A (0.5 mm pitch) –40°C to 85°C (@80 MHz)
M32182F8VFP 1 Mbyte 64 Kbytes 144-pin LQFP: 144P6Q-A (0.5 mm pitch) –40°C to 125°C (@64 MHz)
M32182F8UFP 1 Mbyte 64 Kbytes 144-pin LQFP: 144P6Q-A (0.5 mm pitch) –40°C to 105°C (@80 MHz)
M32182F8TFP 1 Mbyte 64 Kbytes 144-pin LQFP: 144P6Q-A (0.5 mm pitch) –40°C to 85°C (@80 MHz)
1.1.1 M32R Family CPU Core with Built-in FPU (M32R-FPU)
(1) Based on a RISC architecture
• The 32182 is a group of 32-bit RISC single-chip microcomputers. The M32R-FPU in this group of
microcomputers incorporates a fully IEEE 754-compliant, single-precision FPU in order to materialize
the common instruction set and the high-precision arithmetic operation of the M32R CPU. The 32182
products listed in the above table are built around the M32R-FPU and incorporates flash memory,
RAM and various peripheral functions, all integrated into a single chip.
• The M32R-FPU is constructed based on a RISC architecture. Memory is accessed using load/store
instructions, and various arithmetic/logic operations are executed using register-to-register operation
instructions.
• The internally has sixteen 32-bit general-purpose registers. The instruction set consists of 100 dis-
crete instructions in total (83 instructions common to the M32R family plus 17 FPU and extended
instructions). These instructions are either 16 bits or 32 bits long.
• In addition to the ordinary load/store instructions, the M32R-FPU supports compound instructions
such as Load & Address Update and Store & Address Update. These instructions help to speed up
data transfers.
(2) Five-stage pipelined processing
• The M32R-FPU supports five-stage pipelined instruction processing consisting of Instruction Fetch,
Decode, Execute, Memory Access and Write Back (processed in six stages when performing float-
ing-point arithmetic). Not just load/store instructions and register-to-register operation instructions,
but also floating-point arithmetic instructions and compound instructions such as Load & Address
Update and Store & Address Update are executed in one CPUCLK period (which is equivalent to 12.5
ns when f(CPUCLK) = 80 MHz).
• Although instructions are supplied to the execution stage in the order in which they were fetched, it is
possible that if the load/store instruction supplied first is extended by wait cycles inserted in memory
access, the subsequent register-to-register operation instruction will be executed before that instruc-
tion. Using such a facility, which is known as the “out-of-order-completion” mechanism, the M32R-
FPU is able to control instruction execution without wasting clock cycles.
(3) Compact instruction code
• The M32R-FPU supports two instruction formats: one 16 bits long, and one 32 bits long. Use of the
16-bit instruction format especially helps to suppress the code size of a program.
• Moreover, the availability of 32-bit instructions makes programming easier and provides higher per-
formance at the same clock speed than in architectures where the address space is segmented. For
example, some 32-bit instructions allow control to jump to an address 32 Mbytes forward or backward
from the currently executed address in one instruction, making programming easy.
1.1 Outline of the 32182 Group
1
1-3
OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
1.1 Outline of the 32182 Group
1.1.2 Built-in Multiplier/Accumulator
(1) Built-in high-speed multiplier
• The M32R-FPU contains a 32 bits × 16 bits high-speed multiplier which enables the M32R-FPU to
execute a 32 bits × 32 bits integral multiplication instruction in three CPUCLK periods.
(2) DSP-comparable sum-of-products instructions
The M32R-FPU supports the following four types of sum-of-products calculation instructions (or multipli-
cation instructions) which each can be executed in one CPUCLK period using a 56-bit accumulator.
(1) 16 high-order bits of register × 16 high-order bits of register
(2) 16 low-order bits of register × 16 low-order bits of register
(3) Whole 32 bits of register × 16 high-order bits of register
(4) Whole 32 bits of register × 16 low-order bits of register
• The M32R-FPU has some special instructions to round the value stored in the accumulator to 16 or
32 bits or shift the accumulator value before storing in a register to have its digits adjusted. Because
these instructions are also executed in one CPUCLK period, when used in combination with high-
speed data transfer instructions such as Load & Address Update or Store & Address Update, they
enable the M32R-FPU to exhibit data processing capability comparable to that of a DSP.
1.1.3 Built-in Single-precision FPU
• The M32R-FPU supports single-precision floating-point arithmetic fully compliant with IEEE 754 stan-
dards. Specifically, five exceptions specified in IEEE 754 standards (Inexact, Underflow, Division by
Zero, Overflow and Invalid Operation) and four rounding modes (round to nearest, round toward 0,
round toward + Infinity and round toward – Infinity) are supported. What’s more, because general-
purpose registers are used to perform floating-point arithmetic, the overhead associated with trans-
ferring the operand data can be reduced.
1.1.4 Built-in Flash Memory and RAM
• The 32182 contains a RAM that can be accessed with zero wait state, allowing to design a high-speed
embedded system.
• The internal flash memory can be written to while mounted on a printed circuit board (on-board writ-
ing). Use of flash memory facilitates development work, because the chip used at the development
stage can be used directly in mass-production, allowing for a smooth transition from prototype to
mass-production without the need to change the printed circuit board.
• The internal flash memory can be rewritten as many as 100 times.
• The internal flash memory has a virtual flash emulation function, allowing the internal RAM to be
superficially mapped into part of the internal flash memory. When combined with the internal Real-
Time Debugger (RTD) and the M32R family’s common debug interface (Scalable Debug Interface or
SDI), this function makes the ROM table data tuning easy.
• The internal RAM can be accessed for reading or rewriting data from an external device indepen-
dently of the M32R-FPU by using the Real-Time Debugger. The external device is communicated
using the Real-Time Debugger’s exclusive clock-synchronized serial I/O.
1-4
1OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
1.1 Outline of the 32182 Group
1.1.5 Built-in Clock Frequency Multiplier
• The 32182 contains a clock frequency multiplier, which is schematically shown in Figure 1.1.1 below.
XIN pin
(8MHz-10MHz)
BCLK (peripheral clock)
(16MHz-20MHz)
CPUCLK (CPU clock)
(64MHz-80MHz)
X8
1/4
PLL
Figure 1.1.1 Conceptual Diagram of the Clock Frequency Multiplier
Table 1.1.2 Clock
Functional Block Features
CPUCLK • CPU clock: Defined as f(CPUCLK) when it indicates the operating clock frequency for
the M32R-FPU core, internal flash memory and internal RAM.
BCLK • Peripheral clock: Defined as f(BCLK) when it indicates the operating clock frequency
for the internal peripheral I/O and external data bus.
Clock output (BCLK pin output) • A clock with the same frequency as f(BCLK) is output from this pin.
1.1.6 Powerful Peripheral Functions Built-in
(1) Multijunction timer (MJT)
(2) 10-channel DMAC
(3) 12-channel A-D converter (ADC)
(4) 4-channel high-speed serial I/O (SIO)
(5) Real-time debugger (RTD)
(6) 8-level interrupt controller (ICU)
(7) Three operation modes
(8) Wait controller
(9) 2-channel Full-CAN
(10) M32R family’s common debug function (Scalable Debug Interface or SDI)
1
1-5
OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
1.2 Block Diagram
1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 1.2.1 shows a block diagram of the 32182. The features of each block are described in Table 1.2.1.
Figure 1.2.1 Block Diagram of the 32182
PLL Clock Generator
Internal Bus
Interface
AddressData
Internal RAM
(64 Kbytes)
Internal Flash Memory
(M32182F3: 384 Kbytes)
(M32182F8: 1 Mbyte)
M32R-FPU Core
(80 MHz)
Multiplier/Accumulator
(32 bits × 16 bits + 56 bits) DMAC
(10 channels)
Multijunction Timer
(37 channels)
Serial I/O
(4 channels)
A-D Converter
(A-D0: 10-bit converter, 12 channels)
Wait Controller
Interrupt Controller
(23 sources, 8 levels)
Real-Time Debugger
(RTD)
External Bus
Interface
Internal 32-bit bus
Input/output ports, 97 lines
Full CAN
(2 channels)
Single-precision FPU
(fully IEEE 754 compliant)
Internal 16-bit bus
Internal 32-bit bus
Internal Power Supply
Generator (VDC)
1-6
1OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
1.2 Block Diagram
Table 1.2.1 Features of the 32182 (1/2)
Functional Block Features
M32R-FPU CPU core Implementation: Five-stage pipelined instruction processing (processed in six stages when
performing floating-point arithmetic)
• Internal 32-bit structure of the core
• Register configuration
General-purpose registers: 32 bits × 16 registers
Control registers: 32 bits × 6 registers
• Instruction set
16 and 32-bit instruction formats
100 discrete instructions and six addressing modes
• Internal multiplier/accumulator (32 bits × 16 bits + 56 bits)
• Internal single-precision floating-point arithmetic unit (FPU)
RAM • Capacity: 64 Kbytes, accessible with zero wait state
• The internal RAM can be accessed for reading or rewriting data from the outside independently of
the M32R-FPU by using the Real-Time Debugger, without ever causing the CPU performance to
decrease.
Flash memory • Capacity
M32182F3: 384 Kbytes, 1M32182F8: 1 Mbyte
• One-wait access
• Durability: Rewritable 100 times
Bus specification • Fundamental bus cycle: 12.5 ns (when f(CPUCLK = 80 MHz)
• Logical address space : 4 Gbytes linear
• Internal bus specification: Internal 32-bit data bus (for CPU <-> internal flash memory and RAM access)
(or accessed in 64 bits when accessing the internal flash memory for
instructions)
: Internal 16-bit data bus (for internal peripheral I/O access)
• Extended external area: Maximum 3 Mbytes (1 Mbytes × 3 blocks during external
extension mode)
• External data address: 20-bit address
• External data bus: 16-bit data bus
• Shortest external bus access: 1 BCLK period during read, 1 BCLK period during write
Multijunction timer (MJT) • 37-channel multi-functional timer
16-bit output related timer × 11 channels, 16-bit input/output related timer × 10 channels,
16-bit input related timer × 8 channels, 32-bit input related timer × 8 channels
• Flexible timer configuration is possible by interconnecting these timer channels.
• Interrupt request: Counter underflow or overflow and rising or falling or both edges or high or low level
from the TIN pin (These can be used as external interrupt inputs irrespective of timer operation.)
• DMA transfer request: Counter underflow or overflow and rising or falling or both edges or high or
low level from the TIN pin (These can be used as external DMA transfer request inputs
irrespective of timer operation.)
DMAC • Number of channels: 10
• Transfers between internal peripheral I/O’s or internal RAM’s or between internal peripheral I/O
and internal RAM are supported.
• Capable of advanced DMA transfers when used in combination with internal peripheral I/O
• Transfer request: Software or internal peripheral I/O (A-D converter, MJT, serial I/O or CAN)
• DMA channels can be cascaded. (DMA transfer on a channel can be started by completion of a
transfer on another channel.)
• Interrupt request: DMA transfer counter register underflow
1
1-7
OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Table 1.2.1 Features of the 32182 (2/2)
1.2 Block Diagram
Functional Block Features
A-D converter (ADC) • 12 channels: 10-bit resolution A-D converter
• Conversion modes: Ordinary conversion modes plus comparator mode
• Operation modes: Single conversion mode and n-channel scan mode (n = 1–12)
• Sample-and-hold function: Sample-and-hold function can be enabled or disabled as necessary.
• A-D disconnection detection assist function: Influences of the analog input voltage leakage from
any preceding channel during scan mode operation are suppressed.
• An inflow current bypass circuit is built-in.
• Can generate an interrupt or start DMA transfer upon completion of A-D conversion.
• Either 8 or 10-bit conversion results can be read out.
• Interrupt request: Completion of A-D conversion
• DMA transfer request: Completion of A-D conversion
Serial I/O (SIO) • 4-channel serial I/O
• Can be chosen to be clock-synchronized serial I/O or UART.
• Data can be transferred at high speed (2 Mbits per second during clock-synchronized mode or
156 Kbits per second during UART mode when f(BCLK) = 20 MHz).
Interrupt request: Reception completed, receive error, transmit buffer empty or transmission completed
• DMA transfer request: Reception completed or transmit buffer empty
CAN • 16 message slots × 2 blocks
• Compliant with CAN specification 2.0B active.
• Interrupt request: Transmission completed, reception completed, bus error, error-passive, bus-off
or single shot
• DMA transfer request: Failed to send, transmission completed or reception completed
Real-Time Debugger • Internal RAM can be rewritten or monitored independently of the CPU by entering a command
(RTD) from the outside.
• Comes with exclusive clock-synchronized serial ports.
• Interrupt request: RTD interrupt command input
Interrupt Controller (ICU) • Controls interrupt requests from the internal peripheral I/O.
• Supports 8-level interrupt priority including an interrupt disabled state.
• External interrupt: 11 sources (SBI#, TIN0,TIN3, TIN16-TIN23)
• TIN pin input sensing: Rising, falling or both edges or high or low level
Wait Controller • Controls wait states for access to the extended external area.
• Insertion of 0–7 wait states by setting up in software + wait state extension by entering WAIT# signal
PLL • A multiply-by-8 clock generating circuit
Clock • Maximum external input clock frequency (XIN) is 10.0 MHz.
• CPUCLK: Operating clock for the M32R-FPU core, internal flash memory and internal RAM
The maximum CPU clock is 80 MHz (when f(XIN) = 10 MHz).
• BCLK: Operating clock for the internal peripheral I/O and external data bus
The maximum peripheral clock is 20 MHz (peripheral module access when
f(XIN) = 10 MHz).
• Clock output (BCLK pin output): A clock with the same frequency as BCLK is output from this pin.
JTAG • Boundary scan function
VDC • Internal power supply generating circuit: Generates the internal power supply (2.5 V) from an
external single power supply (5 or 3.3 V).
Ports • Input/output pins: 97 pins
• The port input threshold can be set in a program to one of three levels individually for each port
group (with or without Schmitt circuit, selectable).
1-8
1OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
1.3 Pin Functions
Figure 1.3.1 Pin Function Diagram
1.3 Pin Functions
Figure 1.3.1 shows the 32182’s pin function diagram. Pin functions are described in Table 1.3.1.
32182 Group
Port 15
Port 13
Port 12
Port 4
P45/CS1#
XIN
XOUT
VCNT
OSC-VCC
OSC-VSS
P70/BCLK/WR#
RESET#
MOD0
MOD1
FP
P220/CTX0
8
P221/CRX0
P224/A11/CS2#
P225/A12/CS3#
P150/TIN0, P153/TIN3
P130/TIN16-P134/TIN20
P137/TIN23
P136/TIN22/CRX1
P135/TIN21/RXD3
P124/TCLK0-P127/TCLK3
P93/TO16-P97/TO20
P100/TO8
P101/TO9/TXD3
P102/TO10/CTX1
P103/TO11-P107/TO15
P110/TO0-P117/TO7
AD0IN0-AD0IN11
AVCC0
AVSS0
VREF0
P61-P63
SBI#
VCCE
EXCVCC
VSS
P44/CS0#
P43/RD#
P42/BHW#/BHE#
P41/BLW#/BLE#
P71/WAIT#
P72/HREQ#
P73/HACK#
P20/A23-P27/A30
P30/A15-P37/A22
P46/A13, P47/A14
P00/DB0-P07/DB7
P10/DB8-P17/DB15
P82/TXD0
P83/RXD0
P84/SCLKI0/SCLKO0
P85/TXD1
P86/RXD1
P87/SCLKI1/SCLKO1
P174/TXD2
P175/RXD2
P74/RTDTXD
P75/RTDRXD
P76/RTDACK
P77/RTDCLK
JTMS
JTCK
JTRST
JTDO
JTDI
VDDE
EXCVDD
VCC-BUS
Bus control
Bus control
Address bus
Address bus
Bus control
Data bus
Serial
I/O
Serial
I/O
Serial
I/O
RTD
Port 2
Port 3
Port 22
Port 0
Port 1
Port 8
Port 17
Port 7
JTAG
Port 11
Port 10
Port 9
Multijunction
timer
Clock
Reset
Mode
CAN
CAN
A-D converter
Interrupt
controller
Port 6
8
4
5
2
7
4
2
5
5
8
8
8
3
12
2
2
Note • The symbol "#" suffixed to the pin (or signal) names means that the pins (or signals) are active-low.
: Operates with the VCCE power supply
: Operates with the VCC-BUS power supply
: Operates with the OSC-VCC power supply
VCC-BUSVCCEVCC-BUSVCCE
VCCE VCC-BUS VCCE
VCCE
VCCE
VCC-BUS
OSC-VCC
OSC-VCC
1
1-9
OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
1.3 Pin Functions
Table 1.3.1 Description of Pin Functions (1/5)
Type Pin Name Signal Name Input/Output Description
Power supply VCCE Main power supply Power supply for the device (5.0 V ± 0.5 V or 3.3 V ± 0.3 V).
EXCVCC Internal power supply This pin connects an external capacitor.
VCC-BUS Bus power supply Power supply for the bus control pins (5.0 V ± 0.5 V or 3.3 V
± 0.3 V).
VDDE RAM power supply Backup power supply for the internal RAM (5.0 V ± 0.5 V or
3.3 V ± 0.3 V).
EXCVDD Internal power This pin connects an external capacitor for the internal power
supply of RAM supply of the internal RAM.
VSS Ground Connect all VSS pins to ground (GND).
Clock XIN, Clock input Input These are clock input/output pins. A PLL-based ×8 frequency
XOUT Clock output Output multiplier is included, which accepts as input a clock whose
frequency is 1/8 of the internal CPU clock frequency. (XIN
input is 10 MHz when f(CPUCLK) = 80 MHz.)
BCLK System clock Output This pin outputs a clock whose frequency is twice that of the
external input clock (XIN). (BCLK output is 20 MHz when
f(CPUCLK) = 80 MHz.) Use this clock to synchronize the
operation of external devices.
OSC-VCC Clock power supply Power supply for the oscillator circuit. Connect OSC-VCC to
the main power supply.
OSC-VSS Clock ground Connect OSC-VSS to ground.
VCNT PLL control Connect a resistor and capacitor for control of the PLL circuit.
Reset RESET# Reset Input Reset input pin for the internal circuit.
Mode MOD0, Mode Input Set the microcomputer’s operation mode.
MOD1 MOD0 MOD1 Mode
0 0 Single-chip mode
0 1 External extension mode
1 0 Processor mode
(Boot mode) (Note 1)
1 1 (Settings inhibited)
Flash protect FP Flash protect Input This special pin protects the flash memory against rewrites
in hardware.
Address bus A11–A30 Address bus Output Twenty address lines (A11–A30) are included that support
up to 2 MB of memory space per chip select. However, A11
and A12 are shared with CS#2 and CS#3, respectively.
A31 is not output.
Note 1: Boot mode requires that the FP pin should be at the high level. For details about boot mode, see Chapter 6, “Internal
Memory.”
1-10
1OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
1.3 Pin Functions
Table 1.3.1 Description of Pin Functions (2/5)
Type Pin Name Signal Name Input/Output Description
Data bus DB0–DB15 Data bus Input/output This 16-bit data bus is used to connect external devices.
When writing in byte units during a write cycle, the output
data at the invalid byte position is undefined. During a
read cycle, data on the entire 16-bit bus is always read in.
However, only the data at the valid byte position is
transferred into the internal circuit.
Bus control CS0#–CS3# Chip select Output These are chip select signals for external devices.
RD# Read Output This signal is output when reading an external device.
WR# Write Output This signal is output when writing to an external device.
BHW#/BLW# Byte high/low write Output When writing to an external device, this signal indicates the
valid byte position to which data is transferred. BHW# and
BLW# correspond to the upper address side (bits 0–7 are
valid) and the lower address side (bits 8–15 are valid),
respectively.
BHE# Byte high enable Output During an external device access, this signal indicates that
the high-order data (bits 0–7) is valid.
BLE# Byte low enable Output During an external device access, this signal indicates that
the low-order data (bits 8–15) is valid.
WAIT# Wait Input When accessing an external device, a low-level input on
WAIT# pin extends the wait cycle.
HREQ# Hold request Input This input is used by an external device to request control
of the external bus. A low-level input on HREQ# pin places
the CPU in a hold state.
HACK# Hold acknowledge Output This signal notifies that the CPU has entered a hold state
and relinquished control of the external bus.
Multijunction TIN0, TIN3, Timer input Input Input pins for the multijunction timer.
timer TIN16–TIN23
TO0–TO20 Timer output Output Output pins for the multijunction timer.
TCLK0 Timer clock Input Clock input pins for the multijunction timer.
–TCLK3
1
1-11
OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
1.3 Pin Functions
Table 1.3.1 Description of Pin Functions (3/5)
Type Pin Name Signal Name Input/Output Description
A-D converter AVCC0 Analog power supply AVCC0 is the power supply for the A-D0 converter.
Connect AVCC0 to the power supply rail.
AVSS0 Analog ground AVSS0 is the analog ground for the A-D0 converter.
Connect AVSS0 to ground.
AD0IN0 Analog input Input 12-channel analog input pins for the A-D0 converter.
–AD0IN11
VREF0 Reference voltage Input VREF0 is the reference voltage input pin for the A-D0
input converter.
Interrupt SBI# System break Input This is the system break interrupt (SBI) input pin for the
controller interrupt interrupt controller.
Serial I/O SCLKI0/ UART transmit/receive Input/output When channel 0 is in UART mode:
SCLKO0 clock output or CSIO This pin outputs a clock derived from BRG output by
transmit/receive clock dividing it by 2.
input/output When channel 0 is in CSIO mode:
This pin accepts as input a transmit/receive clock when
external clock is selected or outputs a transmit/receive
clock when internal clock is selected.
SCLKI1/ UART transmit/receive Input/output When channel 1 is in UART mode:
SCLKO1 clock output or CSIO This pin outputs a clock derived from BRG output by
transmit/receive clock dividing it by 2.
input/output When channel 1 is in CSIO mode:
This pin accepts as input a transmit/receive clock when
external clock is selected or outputs a transmit/receive
clock when internal clock is selected.
1-12
1OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
1.3 Pin Functions
Table 1.3.1 Description of Pin Functions (4/5)
Type Pin Name Signal Name Input/Output Description
Serial I/O TXD0 Transmit data Output Transmit data output pin for serial I/O channel 0.
RXD0 Received data Input Received data input pin for serial I/O channel 0.
TXD1 Transmit data Output Transmit data output pin for serial I/O channel 1.
RXD1 Received data Input Received data input pin for serial I/O channel 1.
TXD2 Transmit data Output Transmit data output pin for serial I/O channel 2.
RXD2 Received data Input Received data input pin for serial I/O channel 2.
TXD3 Transmit data Output Transmit data output pin for serial I/O channel 3.
RXD3 Received data Input Received data input pin for serial I/O channel 3.
Real-time RTDTXD RTD transmit data Output Serial data output pin for the real-time debugger.
debugger RTDRXD RTD received data Input Serial data input pin for the real-time debugger.
(RTD) RTDCLK RTD clock input Input Serial data transmit/receive clock input pin for the real-time
debugger.
RTDACK RTD acknowledge Output A low-level pulse is output from this pin synchronously with
the start clock for the real-time debugger’s serial data output
word. The low-level pulse width indicates the type of command/
data received by the real-time debugger.
CAN CTX0, CTX1 Transmit data Output This pin outputs data from the CAN module.
CRX0, CRX1 Received data Input This pin accepts as input the data for the CAN module.
JTAG JTMS Test mode select Input Test mode select input to control the state transition of the
test circuit.
JTCK Test clock Input Clock input for the debug module and test circuit.
JTRST Test reset Input Test reset input to initialize the test circuit asynchronously
with device operation.
JTDI Test data input Input This pin accepts as input the test instruction code or test data
that is serially received.
JTDO Test data output Output This pin outputs the test instruction code or test data serially.
1
1-13
OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
1.3 Pin Functions
Table 1.3.1 Description of Pin Functions (5/5)
Type Pin Name Signal Name Input/Output Description
Input/output P00–P07 Input/output port 0 Input/output Programmable input/output port.
ports P10–P17 Input/output port 1
(Note 1) P20–P27 Input/output port 2
P30–P37 Input/output port 3
P41–P47 Input/output port 4
P61–P63 Input/output port 6
P70–P77 Input/output port 7
P82–P87 Input/output port 8
P93–P97 Input/output port 9
P100–P107 Input/output port 10
P110–P117 Input/output port 11
P124–P127 Input/output port 12
P130–P137 Input/output port 13
P150–P153 Input/output port 15
P174, P175 Input/output port 17
P220, P221, Input/output port 22
P224, P225
Note 1: • Input/output port 5 is reserved for future use.
• P221 is input-only port.
Input/output functions cannot be used for the ports listed below, because no external pins are available for these pins.
P65-P67
P140-P147
P151, P152, P154-P157
P160-P167
P172, P173, P176, P177
P180-P187
P190-P197
P200-P203
P210-P217
P222, P223, P226, P227
1-14
1OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
1.4 Pin Assignments
1.4 Pin Assignments
Figure 1.4.1 shows the 32182’s pin assignment diagram. A pin assignment table is shown in Table 1.4.1.
Figure 1.4.1 Pin Assignment Diagram (Top View)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
P97/TO20
P117/TO7
P116/TO6
P115/TO5
P114/TO4
P113/TO3
P112/TO2
P111/TO1
P110/TO0
P127/TCLK3
P126/TCLK2
P125/TCLK1
P124/TCLK0
EXCVCC
VCCE
VSS
VSS
SBI#
P63
P62
P61
AD0IN11
AD0IN10
AD0IN9
AD0IN8
AVSS0
AD0IN7
AD0IN6
AD0IN5
AD0IN4
AD0IN3
AD0IN2
AD0IN1
AD0IN0
VREF0
AVCC0
P150/TIN0
P153/TIN3
P130/TIN16
P131/TIN17
P132/TIN18
P133/TIN19
P134/TIN20
P135/TIN21/RXD3
P136/TIN22/CRX1
P137/TIN23
P220/CTX0
P221/CRX0
VCCE
VCNT
OSC-VCC
XIN
OSC-VSS
XOUT
RESET#
P74/RTDTXD
P75/RTDRXD
P76/RTDACK
P77/RTDCLK
JTDI
JTDO
JTRST
JTCK
JTMS
P100/TO8
P101/TO9/TXD3
P102/TO10/CTX1
P103/TO11
P104/TO12
P105/TO13
P106/TO14
P107/TO15
P174/TXD2
P175/RXD2
FP
MOD0
MOD1
EXCVDD
VSS
EXCVCC
VDDE
VSS
VCCE
P17/DB15
P16/DB14
P15/DB13
P14/DB12
P13/DB11
P12/DB10
P11/DB9
P10/DB8
P07/DB7
P06/DB6
P05/DB5
P04/DB4
P03/DB3
P02/DB2
P01/DB1
P00/DB0
P73/HACK#
P72/HREQ#
P71/WAIT#
P70/BCLK/WR#
P43/RD#
P42/BHW#/BHE#
P41/BLW#/BLE#
VCC-BUS
VSS
P82/TXD0
P83/RXD0
P84/SCLKI0/SCLKO0
P85/TXD1
P86/RXD1
P87/SCLKI1/SCLKO1
VSS
VCCE
P44/CS0#
P45/CS1#
P224/A11/CS2#
P225/A12/CS3#
P46/A13
P47/A14
P30/A15
P31/A16
P32/A17
P33/A18
P34/A19
P35/A20
P36/A21
P37/A22
P20/A23
P21/A24
P22/A25
P23/A26
P24/A27
P25/A28
P26/A29
P27/A30
VCC-BUS
VSS
P93/TO16
P94/TO17
P95/TO18
P96/TO19
Package: 144P6Q-A (0.5 mm pitch)
Note: • The symbol "#" suffixed to the pin (or signal) names means that the pins (or signals) are active-low.
32182 Group
1
1-15
OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
1.4 Pin Assignments
The pins directed for input go to a high-impedance state (Hi-z) when reset. The term “when reset” means that
input on RESET# pin is held low (the device remains reset), and that the RESET# pin is released back high
(the device comes out of reset).
Table 1.4.1 Pin Assignments of the 32182 (1/4)
Note 1: The JTCK, JTDI, JTDO and JTMS pins are reset by input from the JTRST pin, and not reset from the RESET# pin.
Port O t her than
port Ot her t han
port
1 P150/TIN0 P150 TIN0 - Input/outpu
t
2 P153/TIN3 P153 TIN3 - Input/outpu
t
3 P130/TIN16 P130 TIN16 - Input/outpu
t
4 P131/TIN17 P131 TIN17 - Input/outpu
t
5 P132/TIN18 P132 TIN18 - Input/outpu
t
6 P133/TIN19 P133 TIN19 - Input/outpu
t
7 P134/TIN20 P134 TIN20 - Input/outpu
t
8 P135/TIN21/RXD3 P135 TIN21 RXD3 Input/outpu
t
9 P136/TIN22/CRX1 P136 TIN22 CRX1 Input/outpu
t
10 P137/TIN23 P137 TIN23 - Input/outpu
t
11 P220/CTX0 P220 CTX0 - Input/outpu
t
12 P221/CRX0 P221 CRX0 - Input
13 VCCE - VCCE - -
14 VCNT - VCNT - -
15 OSC-VCC - OSC-VCC - -
16 XIN - XIN - Input
17 OSC-VSS - OSC-VSS - -
18 XOUT - XOUT - Output
19 RESET# - RESET# - Input
20 P74/RTDTXD P74 RTDTXD - Input/outpu
t
21 P75/RTDRXD P75 RTDRXD - Input/outpu
t
22 P76/RTDACK P76 RTDACK - Input/outpu
t
23 P77/RTDCLK P77 RTDCLK - Input/outpu
t
24 JTDI ( N ote 1) - JTDI - Input
25 JTDO ( N ote 1) - JTDO - Output
26 JTRST (Note 1) - JTRST - I nput
27 JTCK ( No te 1) - JTCK - I n put
28 JTMS (Note 1) - JT MS - I nput
29 P100/TO8 P100 TO8 - Input/outpu
t
30 P101/TO9/TXD3 P101 TO9 TXD3 Input/outpu
t
31 P102/TO10/CTX1 P102 TO10 CTX1 Input/outpu
t
32 P103/TO11 P103 TO11 - Input/outpu
t
33 P104/TO12 P104 TO12 - Input/outpu
t
Pin
No. Symbol Function Type Pin S tate When Reset
Function Type St ate during
reset State at rese
t
release
P150 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P153 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P130 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P131 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P132 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P133 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P134 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P135 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P136 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P137 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P220 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P221 Input Hi-z Hi-z
VCCE - - -
VCNT - - -
OSC-VCC - - -
XIN Input - -
OSC-VSS - - -
XOUT Output XOUT XOUT
RESET# Input Hi-z Hi-z
P74 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P75 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P76 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P77 Input Hi-z Hi-z
JTDI Input Hi-z Hi-z
JTDO Output Hi-z Hi-z
JTRST Input Hi-z Hi-z
JTCK Input Hi-z Hi-z
JTMS Input Hi-z Hi-z
P100 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P101 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P102 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P103 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P104 Input Hi-z Hi-z
Condition
34 P105/TO13 P105 TO13 - Input/outpu
t
35 P106/TO14 P106 TO14 - Input/outpu
t
36 P107/TO15 P107 TO15 - Input/outpu
t
37 AVCC0 - AVCC0 - -
38 VREF0 - VREF0 - -
39 AD0IN0 - AD0IN0 - Input
40 AD0IN1 - AD0IN1 - Input
41 AD0IN2 - AD0IN2 - Input
42 AD0IN3 - AD0IN3 - Input
43 AD0IN4 - AD0IN4 - Input
44 AD0IN5 - AD0IN5 - Input
45 AD0IN6 - AD0IN6 - Input
46 AD0IN7 - AD0IN7 - Input
47 AVSS0 - AVSS0 - -
48 AD0IN8 - AD0IN8 - Input
49 AD0IN9 - AD0IN9 - Input
50 AD0IN10 - AD0IN10 - Input
51 AD01N11 - AD01N11 - Input
P105 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P106 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P107 Input Hi-z Hi-z
AVCC0 - - -
VREF0 - - -
AD0IN0 Input Hi-z Hi-z
AD0IN1 Input Hi-z Hi-z
AD0IN2 Input Hi-z Hi-z
AD0IN3 Input Hi-z Hi-z
AD0IN4 Input Hi-z Hi-z
AD0IN5 Input Hi-z Hi-z
AD0IN6 Input Hi-z Hi-z
AD0IN7 Input Hi-z Hi-z
AVSS0 - - -
AD0IN8 Input Hi-z Hi-z
AD0IN9 Input Hi-z Hi-z
AD0IN10 Input Hi-z Hi-z
AD01N11 Input Hi-z Hi-z
1-16
1OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
1.4 Pin Assignments
Table 1.4.1 Pin Assignments of the 32182 (2/4)
Port Other than
port
52 P61 P61 - - Input/outpu
t
53 P62 P62 - - Input/outpu
t
54 P63 P63 - - Input/outpu
t
55 SBI# - SBI# - Input
56 VSS - VSS - -
57 VSS - VSS - -
58 VCCE - VCCE - -
59 EXCVCC - EXCVCC - -
60 P124/TCLK0 P124 TCLK0 - Input/outpu
t
61 P125/TCLK1 P125 TCLK1 - Input/outpu
t
62 P126/TCLK2 P126 TCLK2 - Input/outpu
t
63 P127/TCLK3 P127 TCLK3 - Input/outpu
t
64 P110/TO0 P110 TO0 - Input/outpu
t
65 P111/TO1 P111 TO1 - Input/outpu
t
66 P112/TO2 P112 TO2 - Input/outpu
t
67 P113/TO3 P113 TO3 - Input/outpu
t
68 P114/TO4 P114 TO4 - Input/outpu
t
69 P115/TO5 P115 TO5 - Input/outpu
t
70 P116/TO6 P116 TO6 - Input/outpu
t
71 P117/TO7 P117 TO7 - Input/outpu
t
72 P97/TO20 P97 TO20 - Input/outpu
t
73 P96/TO19 P96 TO19 - Input/outpu
t
74 P95/TO18 P95 TO18 - Input/outpu
t
75 P94/TO17 P94 TO17 - Input/outpu
t
76 P93/TO16 P93 TO16 - Input/outpu
t
77 VSS - VSS - -
78 VCC-BUS - VCC-BUS - -
80 P26/A29 P26 A29
-Input/outpu
t
-Input/outpu
t
79 P27/A30 P27 A30
Pin
No. Symbol Function Type Function Type Stat e during
reset State at rese
t
release
P61 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P62 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P63 Input Hi-z Hi-z
SBI# Input Hi-z Hi-z
VSS---
VSS---
VCCE---
EXCVCC---
P124 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P125 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P126 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P127 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P110 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P111 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P112 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P113 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P114 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P115 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P116 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P117 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P97 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P96 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P95 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P94 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P93 Input Hi-z Hi-z
VSS---
VCC-BUS---
Durin g single-c hip an d
exter nal ext ension modes P27 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A30 Out put Hi-z Undef i ned
Durin g single-c hip an d
exter nal ext ension modes P26 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A29 Out put Hi-z Undef i ned
Condition Pin S t a t e When Reset
-Input/outpu
t
90 P34/A19 P34 A19
-Input/outpu
t
88 P36/A21
89 P35/A20 P35 A20
P36 A21
-Input/outpu
t
-Input/outpu
t
-Input/outpu
t
87 P37/A22 P37 A22
86 P20/A23 P20 A23
-Input/outpu
t
84 P22/A25
85 P21/A24 P21 A24
P22 A25
-Input/outpu
t
-Input/outpu
t
-Input/outpu
t
83 P23/A26 P23 A26
82 P24/A27 P24 A27
-Input/outpu
t
81 P25/A28 P25 A28 Durin g single-c hip an d
exter nal ext ension modes P25 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A28 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
Durin g single-c hip an d
exter nal ext ension modes P24 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A27 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
Durin g single-c hip an d
exter nal ext ension modes P23 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A26 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
Durin g single-c hip an d
exter nal ext ension modes P22 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A25 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
Durin g single-c hip an d
exter nal ext ension modes P21 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A24 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
Durin g single-c hip an d
exter nal ext ension modes P20 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A23 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
Durin g single-c hip an d
exter nal ext ension modes P37 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A22 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
Durin g single-c hip an d
exter nal ext ension modes P36 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A21 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
Durin g single-c hip an d
exter nal ext ension modes P35 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A20 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
Durin g single-c hip an d
exter nal ext ension modes P34 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A19 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
1
1-17
OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
1.4 Pin Assignments
Table 1.4.1 Pin Assignments of the 32182 (3/4)
Port Other than
port Ot her t h an
port
101 VCCE - VCCE - -
102 VSS - VSS - -
103 P87/SCLKI1/SCLKO1 P87 SCLKI1 SCLKO1 Input/outpu
104 P86/RXD1 P86 RXD1 - Input/outpu
105 P85/TXD1 P85 TXD1 - Input/outpu
106 P84/SCLKI0/SCLKO0 P84 SCLKI0 SCLKO0 Input/outpu
107 P83/RXD0 P83 RXD0 - Input/outpu
-Input/outpu
100 P44/CS0# P44 CS0#
-Input/outpu
98 P224/A11/CS2#
99 P45/CS1# P45 CS1#
P224 A11
-Input/outpu
CS3# Input/outpu
CS2# Input/outpu
97 P225/A12/CS3# P225 A12
96 P46/A13 P46 A13
-Input/outpu
94 P30/A15
95 P47/A14 P47 A14
P30 A15
-Input/outpu
-Input/outpu
-Input/outpu
93 P31/A16 P31 A16
92 P32/A17 P32 A17
P33 A18
Function Type
Pin
No. Symbol
91 P33/A18 - Input/outpu
Function Type St ate during
reset State at rese
t
release
During single-c hip and
exter nal ext ension modes P33 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A18 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
During single-c hip and
exter nal ext ension modes P32 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A17 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
During single-c hip and
exter nal ext ension modes P31 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A16 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
During single-c hip and
exter nal ext ension modes P30 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A15 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
During single-c hip and
exter nal ext ension modes P47 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A14 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
During single-c hip and
exter nal ext ension modes P46 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A13 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
During single-c hip and
exter nal ext ension modes P225 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A12 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
During single-c hip and
exter nal ext ension modes P224 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode A11 O utput Hi-z Undef ined
During single-c hip and
exter nal ext ension modes P45 Input Hi-z Hi-z
Dur ing pr ocessor mode CS1# Outpu t Hi-z High level
During single-c hip and
exter nal ext ension modes P44 Input Hi-z Hi-z
Dur ing pr ocessor mode CS0# Outpu t Hi-z High level
VCCE---
VSS---
P87 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P86 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P85 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P84 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P83 Input Hi-z Hi-z
Condition Pin S tat e When Reset
108 P82/TXD0 P82 TXD0 - Input/outpu
109 P174/TXD2 P174 TXD2 - Input/outpu
110 P175/RXD2 P175 RXD2 - Input/outpu
111 FP - FP - Input
112 MOD0 - MOD0 - Input
113 MOD1 - MOD1 - Input
114 EXCVDD - EXCVDD - -
115 VSS - VSS - -
116 EXCVCC - EXCVCC - -
117 VDDE - VDDE - -
118 VSS - VSS - -
119 VCCE - VCCE - -
-Input/outpu
123 P14/DB12 P14 DB12
-Input/outpu
121 P16/DB14
122 P15/DB13 P15 DB13
P16 DB14
-Input/outpu
-Input/outpu
120 P17/DB15 P17 DB15
P82 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P174 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P175 Input Hi-z Hi-z
FP Input Hi-z Hi-z
MOD0 Input Hi-z Hi-z
MOD1 Input Hi-z Hi-z
EXCVDD - - -
VSS---
EXCVCC - - -
VDDE---
VSS---
VCCE---
During single-c hip and
exter nal ext ension modes P17 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode DB15 Input /output Hi- z Hi- z
During single-c hip and
exter nal ext ension modes P16 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode DB14 Input /output Hi- z Hi- z
During single-c hip and
exter nal ext ension modes P15 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode DB13 Input /output Hi- z Hi- z
During single-c hip and
exter nal ext ension modes P14 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode DB12 Input /output Hi- z Hi- z
1-18
1OVERVIEW
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
1.4 Pin Assignments
Table 1.4.1 Pin Assignments of the 32182 (4/4)
During single-chip and
exter nal extension modes P03 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode DB3 Input/o ut put Hi-z Hi-z
During single-chip and
exter nal extension modes P02 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode DB2 Input/o ut put Hi-z Hi-z
During single-chip and
exter nal extension modes P01 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode DB1 Input/o ut put Hi-z Hi-z
During single-chip and
exter nal extension modes P00 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode DB0 Input/o ut put Hi-z Hi-z
P73 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P72 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P71 Input Hi-z Hi-z
P70 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode P43 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During ext er nal exte nsion
and proc essor modes RD# Output Hi-z High level
During pr oc essor mode P42 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During ext er nal exte nsion
and proc essor modes BHE#/BHE# O utput Hi-z High lev el
During pr oc essor mode P41 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During ext er nal exte nsion
and proc essor modes BLE #/BLE # O utput Hi-z High level
VCC-BUS---
----
136 P73/HACK# P73 HACK# - Input/outpu
t
137 P72/HREQ# P72 HREQ# - Input/outpu
t
138 P71/WAIT# P71 WAIT# - Input/outpu
t
139 P70/BCLK/WR# P70 BCLK WR# Input/outpu
t
143 VCC-BUS - VCC-BUS - -
144 VSS - VSS - -
-Input/outpu
t
132 P03/DB3 P03 DB3 - Input/outpu
t
-Input/outpu
t
133 P02/DB2
134 P01/DB1 P01 DB1
P02 DB2
135 P00/DB0 P00 DB0
BHE# Input/outpu
t
140 P43/RD# P43 RD#
-Input/outpu
t
-Input/outpu
t
BLE# Input/outpu
t
141 P42/BHW#/BHE#
142 P41/BLW#/BLE# P41 BLW#
P42 BHW#
Port Other t han
port Ot her t han
port
Pin
No. Symbol Function Type
-Input/outpu
t
124 P13/DB11 P13 DB11 - Input/outpu
t
-Input/outpu
t
125 P12/DB10
126 P11/DB9 P11 DB9
P12 DB10
127 P10/DB8 P10 DB8
-Input/outpu
t
128 P07/DB7 P07 DB7
-Input/outpu
t
-Input/outpu
t
-Input/outpu
t
129 P06/DB6
130 P05/DB5 P05 DB5
P06 DB6
131 P04/DB4 P04 DB4 - Input/outpu
t
Function Type State during
reset State at rese
t
release
During single-chip and
exter nal extension modes P13 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode D B11 Input/out put Hi-z Hi-z
During single-chip and
exter nal extension modes P12 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode D B10 Input/out put Hi-z Hi-z
During single-chip and
exter nal extension modes P11 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode DB9 Input/o ut put Hi-z Hi-z
During single-chip and
exter nal extension modes P10 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode DB8 Input/o ut put Hi-z Hi-z
During single-chip and
exter nal extension modes P07 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode DB7 Input/o ut put Hi-z Hi-z
During single-chip and
exter nal extension modes P06 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode DB6 Input/o ut put Hi-z Hi-z
During single-chip and
exter nal extension modes P05 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode DB5 Input/o ut put Hi-z Hi-z
During single-chip and
exter nal extension modes P04 Input Hi-z Hi-z
During pr oc essor mode DB4 Input/o ut put Hi-z Hi-z
Condition Pin Stat e W hen Reset
CHAPTER 2
CPU
2.1 CPU Registers
2.2 General-purpose Registers
2.3 Control Registers
2.4 Accumulator
2.5 Program Counter
2.6 Data Formats
2.7 Supplementary Explanation for BSET, BCLR,
LOCK and UNLOCK Instruction Execution
2
2-2 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CPU
2.3 Control Registers
There are 6 control registers which are the Processor Status Word Register (PSW), the Condition Bit Register
(CBR), the Interrupt Stack Pointer (SPI), the User Stack Pointer (SPU), the Backup PC (BPC) and the Floating-
point Status Register (FPSR).
The dedicated MVTC and MVFC instructions are used for writing and reading these control registers.
In addition, the SM bit, IE bit and C bit of the PSW can also be set by the SETPSW or CLRPSW instruction.
Figure 2.3.1 Control Registers
2.1 CPU Registers
2.1 CPU Registers
The M32R-FPU has 16 general-purpose registers, 6 control registers, an accumulator and a program counter.
The accumulator is of 56-bit configuration, and all other registers are of 32-bit configuration.
2.2 General-purpose Registers
The 16 general-purpose registers (R0–R15) are of 32-bit width and are used to retain data and base address, as
well as for integer calculations, floating-point operations, etc. R14 is used as the link register and R15 as the stack
pointer. The link register is used to store the return address when executing a subroutine call instruction. The
Interrupt Stack Pointer (SPI) and the User Stack Pointer (SPU) are alternately represented by R15 depending on
the value of the Stack Mode (SM) bit in the Processor Status Word Register (PSW).
After reset, the value of the general-purpose registers is undefined.
Figure 2.2.1 General-purpose Registers
b0b0 b31
R0
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14 (Link register)
R15 (Stack pointer) (Note 1)
Note 1: The stack pointer functions as either the SPI or the SPU depending on
the value of the SM bit in the PSW.
b31
b0
Backup PC
BPC
CR6
b31
PSW
CBR
SPI
SPU
CR0
CR1
CR2
CR3
Processor Status Word Register
Condition Bit Register
Interrupt Stack Pointer
User Stack Pointer
CRn
Notes: • CRn (n = 0-3, 6 and 7) denotes the control register number.
• The dedicated MVTC and MVFC instructions are used for writing and reading these control registers.
• The SM bit, IE bit and C bit of the PSW can also be set by the SETPSW or CLRPSW instructions.
Floating-point Status Register
FPSR
CR7
2
2-3 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CPU
2.3 Control Registers
2.3.1 Processor Status Word Register: PSW (CR0)
0000 000 0000000
7654321 8 9 1011121314b15b0
?? 00000?00000000
BC SM IE C
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 b3117 18 19 20 21 22b16 BIEBSM
BPSW field
0 0
PSW field
<After reset: B’0000 0000 0000 0000 ??00 000? 0000 0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–15 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
16 BSM Saves value of SM bit when EIT occurs R W
Backup SM Bit
17 BIE Saves value of IE bit when EIT occurs R W
Backup IE Bit
18–22 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
23 BC Saves value of C bit when EIT occurs R W
Backup C Bit
24 SM 0: Uses R15 as the interrupt stack pointer R W
Stack Mode Bit 1: Uses R15 as the user stack pointer
25 IE 0: Does not accept interrupt R W
Interrupt Enable Bit 1: Accepts interrupt
26–30 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
31 C Indicates carry, borrow or overflow resulting R W
Condition Bit from operations (instruction dependent)
The Processor Status Word Register (PSW) indicates the M32R-FPU status. It consists of the current PSW field
which is regularly used, and the BPSW field where a copy of the PSW field is saved when EIT occurs.
The PSW field consists of the Stack Mode (SM) bit, the Interrupt Enable (IE) bit and the Condition (C) bit.
The BPSW field consists of the Backup Stack Mode (BSM) bit, the Backup Interrupt Enable (BIE) bit and the
Backup Condition (BC) bit.
After reset, BSM, BIE and BC are undefined. All other bits are "0".
2
2-4 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CPU
2.3 Control Registers
2.3.2 Condition Bit Register: CBR (CR1)
The Condition Bit Register (CBR) is derived from the PSW register by extracting its Condition (C) bit. The value
written to the PSW register’s C bit is reflected in this register. The register can only be read. (Writing to the
register with the MVTC instruction is ignored.)
After reset, the value of CBR is H’0000 0000.
b0 b31
0000000000000000000000000000000C
CBR
2.3.3 Interrupt Stack Pointer: SPI (CR2) and User Stack Pointer: SPU (CR3)
The Interrupt Stack Pointer (SPI) and the User Stack Pointer (SPU) retain the address of the current stack
pointer. These registers can be accessed as the general-purpose register R15. R15 switches between repre-
senting the SPI and SPU depending on the value of the Stack Mode (SM) bit in the PSW.
After reset, the values of the SPI and SPU are undefined.
b0 b31
SPI SPI
b0 b31
SPU SPU
2.3.4 Backup PC: BPC (CR6)
The Backup PC (BPC) is used to save the value of the Program Counter (PC) when an EIT occurs. Bit 31 is fixed
to "0".
When an EIT occurs, the register sets either the PC value when the EIT occurred or the PC value for the next
instruction depending on the type of EIT. The BPC value is loaded to the PC when the RTE instruction is
executed. However, the values of the lower 2 bits of the PC are always "00" when returned. (PC always returns
to the word-aligned address.)
After reset, the value of the BPC is undefined.
b0 b31
0
BPCBPC
2
2-5 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CPU
2.3.5 Floating-point Status Register: FPSR (CR7)
0000 000 0000000
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b151b0
00 00000100000000
EV DN CE CX CU CZ CO CV RM
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 b3117b16 EUEX
FS FX FU FZ
0
FO
0
FV
EZ EO
<After reset: H’0000 0100>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 FS Reflects the logical sum of FU, FZ, FO and FV. R
Floating-point Exception Summary Bi t
1 FX Set to "1" when an inexact exception occurs (if EIT processing is R W
Inexact Exception F lag unexecuted (Note 1)). Once set, the flag retains the value "1" until
it is cleared to "0" in software.
2 FU Set to "1" when an underflow exception occurs (if EIT processing is R W
Underflow Exception Flag unexecuted (Note 1)). Once set, the flag retains the value "1" until
it is cleared to "0" in software.
3 FZ Set to "1" when a zero divide exception occurs (if EIT processing is R W
Zero Divide Exception Flag unexecuted (Note 1)). Once set, the flag retains the value "1" until
it is cleared to "0" in software.
4 FO Set to "1" when an overflow exception occurs (if EIT processing is R W
Overflow Exception Flag unexecuted (Note 1)). Once set, the flag retains the value "1" until
it is cleared to "0" in software.
5 FV Set to "1" when an invalid operation exception occurs (if EIT processing R W
Invalid Operation Exception Flag is unexecuted (Note 1)). Once set, the flag retains the value "1" until
it is cleared to "0" in software.
6–16 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
17 EX 0: Mask EIT processing to be executed when an inexact exception occurs. R W
Inexact Exception Enable Bi t 1: Execute EIT processing when an inexact exception occurs.
18 EU 0: Mask EIT processing to be executed when an underflow exception R W
Underflow Exception Enable Bit occurs.
1: Execute EIT processing when an underflow exception occurs.
19 EZ 0: Mask EIT processing to be executed when a zero divide exception R W
Zero Divide Exception Enable Bit occurs.
1: Execute EIT processing when a zero divide exception occurs.
20 EO 0: Mask EIT processing to be executed when an overflow exception R W
Overflow Exception Enable Bit occurs.
1: Execute EIT processing when an overflow exception occurs.
21 EV 0: Mask EIT processing to be executed when an invalid operation R W
Invalid Operation Exception Enable Bit exception occurs.
1: Execute EIT processing when an invalid operation exception occurs.
22 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
23 DN 0: Handle the denormalized number as a denormalized number. R W
Denormalized Number Zero Flush Bit 1: Handle the denormalized number as zero.
(Note 2)
24 CE 0: No unimplemented operation exception occurred. R (Note 3)
Unimplemented Operation 1: An unimplemented operation exception occurred. When the bit is
Exception Cause Bit set to "1", the execution of an FPU operation instruction will clear it to "0".
25 CX 0: No inexact exception occurred. R (Note 3)
Inexact Exception Cause Bit 1: An inexact exception occurred. When the bit is set to "1",
the execution of an FPU operation instruction will clear it to "0".
2.3 Control Registers
2
2-6 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CPU
26 CU 0: No underflow exception occurred R (Note 3)
Underflow Exception Cause Bit 1: An underflow exception occurred. When the bit is set to "1",
the execution of an FPU operation instruction will clear it to "0".
27 CZ 0: No zero divide exception occurred. R (Note 3)
Zero Divide Exception Cause Bit 1: A zero divide exception occurred. When the bit is set to "1",
the execution of an FPU operation instruction will clear it to "0".
28 CO 0: No overflow exception occurred. R(Note 3)
Overflow Exception Cause Bit 1: An overflow exception occurred. When the bit is set to "1",
the execution of an FPU operation instruction will clear it to "0".
29 CV 0: No invalid operation exception occurred. R(Note 3)
Invalid Operation Exception Cause Bit 1: An invalid operation exception occurred. When the bit is set to "1",
the execution of an FPU operation instruction will clear it to "0".
30, 31 RM 00: Round to nearest R W
Rounding Mode Selection Bit 01: Round toward Zero
10: Round toward + Infinity
11: Round toward – Infinity
Note 1: The phrase “If EIT processing unexecuted” means whenever one of the exceptions occurs, enable bits 17 to 21 are set to
"0" which masks the EIT processing so that it cannot be executed. If two exceptions occur at the same time and their
corresponding exception enable bits are set differently (one enabled, and the other masked), EIT processing is executed. In
this case, these two flags do not change state regardless of the enable bits settings.
Note 2: If a denormalized number is given to the operand when DN = "0", an unimplemented exception occurs.
Note 3: This bit is cleared by writing "0". Writing "1" has no effect (the bit retains the value it had before the write).
2.3 Control Registers
2
2-7 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CPU
2.4 Accumulator
2.4 Accumulator
The Accumulator (ACC) is a 56-bit register used for DSP function instructions.
The accumulator is handled as a 64-bit register when accessed for read or write. When reading data from the
accumulator, the value of bit 8 is sign-extended. When writing data to the accumulator, bits 0 to 7 are ignored. The
accumulator is also used for the multiply instruction “MUL,” in which case the accumulator value is destroyed by
instruction execution.
Use the MVTACHI and MVTACLO instructions for writing to the accumulator. The MVTACHI and MVTACLO
instructions write data to the high-order 32 bits (bits 0–31) and the low-order 32 bits (bits 32–63), respectively.
Use the MVFACHI, MVFACLO and MVFACMI instructions for reading data from the accumulator. The MVFACHI,
MVFACLO and MVFACMI instructions read data from the high-order 32 bits (bits 0–31), the low-order 32 bits (bits
32–63) and the middle 32 bits (bits 16–47), respectively.
After reset, the value of accumulator is undefined.
15b0 167 8 31 32 47 48 b63
ACC
(Note 1) Read range of MVFACMI instruction
Write and read ranges of MVTACLO
and MVFACLO instructions
Write and read ranges of MVTACHI
and MVFACHI instructions
Note 1: When read, bits 0 to 7 always show the sign-extended value of the value of bit 8. Writing to this
bit field is ignored.
2.5 Program Counter
The Program Counter (PC) is a 32-bit counter that retains the address of the instruction being executed. Since the
M32R FPU instruction starts with even-numbered addresses, the LSB (bit 31) is always "0".
After reset, the value of PC is H’0000 0000.
b0 b31
0
PCPC
2
2-8 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CPU
2.6 Data Formats
2.6 Data Formats
2.6.1 Data Types
The data types that can be handled by the M32R-FPU instruction set are signed or unsigned 8, 16 and 32-bit
integers and single-precision floating-point numbers. The signed integers are represented by 2’s complements.
Figure 2.6.1 Data Types
Signed byte
(8-bit) integer
Unsigned byte
(8-bit) integer
Signed halfword
(16-bit) integer
Unsigned halfword
(16-bit) integer
Signed word
(32-bit) integer
Unsigned word
(32-bit) integer
Single-precision
floating-point number
b0
b0
b0
b0
b0
b0
b7
b7
b15
b15
b31
b31
S
S
S
b0 b1 b8 b9 b31
SE F
S: Sign bit; E: Exponent field; F: Fraction field
2
2-9 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CPU
2.6 Data Formats
2.6.2 Data Formats
(1) Data formats in registers
The data sizes in the M32R-FPU registers are always words (32 bits).
When loading byte (8-bit) or halfword (16-bit) data from memory into a register, the data is sign-extended
(LDB, LDH instructions) or zero-extended (LDUB, LDUH instructions) to a word (32-bit) quantity before
being loaded in the register.
When storing data from a register into a memory, the 32-bit data, the 16-bit data on the LSB side and the 8-
bit data on the LSB side of the register are stored into memory by the ST, STH and STB instructions,
respectively.
Figure 2.6.2 Data Formats in Registers
Rn
b0 b31
<Load>
Byte
Rn
b0 b31
Halfword
Rn
b0 b31
Word
Sign-extended (LDB instruction) or
zero-extended (LDUB instruction)
From memory
(LDB, LDUB instructions)
<Store>
Rn
b0 b31
Byte
Rn
b0 b31
Halfword
Rn
b0 b31
Word
To memory (STB instruction)
To memory (STH instruction)
To memory (ST instruction)
From memory (LDH, LDUH instructions)
From memory (LD instruction)
Sign-extended (LDH instruction) or
zero-extended (LDUH instruction)
24
16
24
16
2
2-10 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CPU
2.6 Data Formats
Bit endian
(H'01) Byte endian
(H'01234567)
Big endian
Little endian
Note: • Even when bits are arranged in big endian, H'01 is not B'10000000.
HH HL LH LL
H'01 H'23 H'45 H'67
LL LH HL HH
H'67 H'45 H'23 H'01
B'0000001
b0 b7
B'0000001
b7 b0
Figure 2.6.4 General Endian System
(2) Data formats in memory
The data sizes in memory can be byte (8 bits), halfword (16 bits) or word (32 bits). Although byte data can
be located at any address, halfword and word data must be located at the addresses aligned with a
halfword boundary (least significant address bit = "0") or a word boundary (two low-order address bits =
"00"), respectively. If an attempt is made to access memory data that overlaps the halfword or word bound-
ary, an address exception occurs.
Figure 2.6.3 Data Formats in Memory
(3) Endian
The diagrams below show a general endian system and the endian adopted for the M32R family micro-
computers.
Address
Byte
Halfword
Word
+0 address +1 address +2 address +3 address
b0 b31
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Halfword
Halfword
Word
7 8 15 16 23 24
b0 15
b0 b31
b31
2
2-11 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CPU
2.6 Data Formats
• Constant transfer
LD24 Rdest, #imm24
LDI Rdest, #imm16
LDI Rdest, #imm8
SETH Rdest, #imm16
b23
b0
Rdest
imm24
b31b0
LD24 Rdest, #imm24
b15
b0
Rdest
imm16
b31
b0
SETH Rdest, #imm16
00 8
15 00 00
• Register to register transfer
MV Rdest, Rsrc
• Control register transfer
MVFC Rdest, CRsrc
MVTC Rsrc, CRdest
Rsrc b31
b0
Rdest
b31b0
Rsrc b31b0
CRdest b31b0
MVTC Rsrc, CRdest
MV Rdest, Rsrc
Note:The condition bit C changes state when data is written to CR0 (PSW) using the MVTC instruction.
Figure 2.6.6 Transfer Instructions
Little/little
LL LH HL HH
Big/big
HH HL LH LL
Little/big
HH HL LH LL
Endian
(bit/byte)
Data arrangement
Renesas
microcomputer
family name 7700 and M16C families M32R family
31–247–0 23–1615–8 0–7 24–318–15 16–23
Bit number
+0 +1 +2 +3 +0 +1 +2 +3+0 +1 +2 +3
Address
Example:
0x01234567 .byte 67,45,23,01 .byte 01,23,45,67 .byte 01,23,45,67
Note: • The M32R family uses the big endian for both bits and bytes.
7–031–24 15–823–16
Figure 2.6.5 Endian Adopted for the M32R Family
(4) Transfer instructions
2
2-12 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CPU
2.6 Data Formats
(5) Transfer from memory (signed) to registers
• Signed 32 bits
LD24 Rsrc, #label
LD Rdest, @Rsrc
• Signed 16 bits
LD24 Rsrc, #label
LDH Rdest, @Rsrc
• Signed 8 bits
LD24 Rsrc, #label
LDB Rdest, @Rsrc
label Rdest
b31b0
+0 +1 +2 +3
Rdest
label
00 00
FF FF
Determined by MSB
b31b0
+0 +1 +2 +3
Rdest
label
00 00 00
FF FF FF
b31b0
+0 +1 +2 +3
Determined by MSB
Memory Register
0: Positive number
1: Negative number
0: Positive number
1: Negative number
• Unsigned 32 bits
LD24 Rsrc, #label
LD Rdest, @Rsrc
• Unsigned 16 bits
LD24 Rsrc, #label
LDUB Rdest, @Rsrc
• Unsigned 8 bits
LD24 Rsrc, #label
LDUH Rdest, @Rsrc
Rdest
00 00
b31b0
label
+0 +1 +2 +3
label
+0 +1 +2 +3
Rdest
b31b0
label
+0 +1 +2 +3
Rdest
00 00 00
b31b0
Memory Register
Figure 2.6.7 Transfer from Memory (Signed) to Registers
(6) Transfer from memory (unsigned) to registers
Figure 2.6.8 Transfer from Memory (Unsigned) to Registers
2
2-13 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CPU
2.6 Data Formats
(7) Notes on data transfer
When transferring data, be aware that data arrangements in registers and memory are different.
Word data (32 bits)
+0 +1 +2 +3
b0 b31
HH HL LH LL
b0 b31
HH HL LH LL
• Halfword data (16 bits)
+0 +1 +2 +3
b0 b31
H L
b0 b15
H L
• Byte data (8 bits)
+0 +1 +2 +3
b0 b31 b0 b7
(R0–R15)
(R0–R15)
(R0–R15)
+0 +1 +2 +3
b0 b31 b8 b15
(R0–R15)
+0 +1 +2 +3
b0 b31 b16 b23
(R0–R15)
+0 +1 +2 +3
b0 b31 b24 b31
(R0–R15)
+0 +1 +2 +3
b0 b31
H L
b16 b31
H L
(R0–R15)
Data in registers Data in memory
Figure 2.6.9 Difference in Data Arrangements
2
2-14 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CPU
2.7 Supplementary Explanation for BSET, BCLR, LOCK and UNLOCK
Instruction Execution
The LOCK bit is set when executing the BSET or BCLR instruction, and is cleared when the BSET or BCLR
instruction finishes.
The LOCK instruction sets the LOCK bit, as well as performs an ordinary load operation. The UNLOCK instruction
is used to clear the LOCK bit.
The LOCK bit is located inside the CPU, and cannot directly be accessed for read or write by users. This bit
controls granting of bus control requested by devices other than the CPU.
• When LOCK bit = "0"
Control of the bus requested by devices other than the CPU is granted
• When LOCK bit = "1"
Control of the bus requested by devices other than the CPU is denied
In the 32182 group, control of the bus may be requested by devices other than the CPU in the following two cases:
• When DMA transfer is requested by the internal DMAC
• When HREQ# input is pulled low to request that the CPU be placed in a hold state
2.7 Supplementary Explanation for BSET, BCLR, LOCK and UNLOCK Instruction Execution
CHAPTER 3
ADDRESS SPACE
3.1 Outline of the Address Space
3.2 Operation Modes
3.3 Internal ROM and Extended External Areas
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
3.5 EIT Vector Entry
3.6 ICU Vector Table
3.7 Notes about Address Space
3
3-2
ADDRESS SPACE
3.1 Outline of the Address Space
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
3.1 Outline of the Address Space
The logical addresses of the M32R are always handled in 32 bits, providing a linear address space of up to 4
Gbytes. The address space of the M32R/ECU consists of the following:
(1) User space
• Internal ROM area
• Extended external area
• Internal RAM area
• SFR (Special Function Register) area
(2) System space (not open to the user)
(1) User space
The 2 Gbytes from the address H’0000 0000 to the address H’7FFF FFFF comprise the user space.
Located in this space are the internal ROM area, an extended external area, the internal RAM area and the
SFR (Special Function Register) area (in which a set of internal peripheral I/O registers exist). Of these, the
internal ROM and extended external areas are located differently depending on mode settings as will be
described later.
(2) System space
The 2 Gbytes from the address H’8000 0000 to the address H’FFFF FFFF comprise the system space.
This space is reserved for use by development tools such as an in-circuit emulator and debug monitor, and
cannot be used by the user.
3
3-3
ADDRESS SPACE
3.1 Outline of the Address Space
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Logical address
H'0000 0000
H'7FFF FFFF
H'8000 0000
2 Gbytes
H'FFFF FFFF
User space
System space
16 Mbytes
Ghost area
in 16-Mbyte
units
Internal ROM area
384 Mbytes
(Note 1)
CS0 area
CS1 area
CS2 area
CS3 area
SFR area
16 Kbytes
RAM area
64 Kbytes
Reserved area
48 Kbytes
H'0000 0000
H'0005 FFFF
H'0006 0000
H'001F FFFF
H'0020 0000
H'003F FFFF
H'0040 0000
H'005F FFFF
H'0060 0000
H'007F FFFF
H'0080 0000
H'0080 3FFF
H'0080 4000
H'0081 3FFF
H'0081 4000
H'0081 FFFF
H'0082 0000
Ghost area in
128-Kbyte units
H'00FF FFFF
2 Gbytes
EIT vector entry
Note 1: This area is located differently depending on how chip mode is set.
Figure 3.1.1 Address Space of the M32182F3
3
3-4
ADDRESS SPACE
3.1 Outline of the Address Space
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Logical address
H'0000 0000
H'7FFF FFFF
H'8000 0000
2 Gbytes
H'FFFF FFFF
User space
System space
16 Mbytes
Ghost area
in 16-Mbyte
units
Internal ROM area
1 Mbyte
(Note 1)
CS0 area
CS1 area
CS2 area
CS3 area
SFR area
16 Kbytes
RAM area
64 Kbytes
Reserved area
48 Kbytes
H'0000 0000
H'000F FFFF
H'0010 0000
H'001F FFFF
H'0020 0000
H'003F FFFF
H'0040 0000
H'005F FFFF
H'0060 0000
H'007F FFFF
H'0080 0000
H'0080 3FFF
H'0080 4000
H'0081 3FFF
H'0081 4000
H'0081 FFFF
H'0082 0000
Ghost area in
128-Kbyte units
H'00FF FFFF
2 Gbytes
EIT vector entry
Note 1: This area is located differently depending on how chip mode is set.
Figure 3.1.2 Address Space of the M32182F8
3
3-5
ADDRESS SPACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
3.2 Operation Modes
The microcomputer is placed in one of the following modes depending on how CPU operation mode is set by
MOD0 and MOD1 pins. The operation mode used for rewriting the internal flash memory is described separately
in Section 6.5, “Programming the Internal Flash Memory.”
Table 3.2.1 Operation Mode Settings
MOD0 MOD1 (Note 1) Operation mode (Note 2)
VSS VSS Single-chip mode
VSS VCCE External extension mode
VCCE VSS Processor mode (FP = VSS)
VCCE VCCE Reserved (use inhibited)
Note 1: Connect VCCE and VSS to the VCCE input power supply and ground, respectively.
Note 2: For the operation mode used to rewrite the internal flash memory (FP = VCCE) which is not shown in the above
table, see Section 6.5, “Programming the Internal Flash Memory.”
The internal ROM and extended external areas are located differently depending on how operation mode is set.
(All other areas in the address space are located the same way.) The diagram below shows how the internal ROM
and extended external areas are mapped into the address space in each operation mode. (For flash rewrite mode,
see Section 6.5, “Programming the Internal Flash Memory.”)
3.2 Operation Modes
3
3-6
ADDRESS SPACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
3.2 Operation Modes
Figure 3.2.1 Internal ROM and Extended External Area of the M32182F3 in External Extension Mode
Internal ROM
(384 Kbytes)
Reserved area
(640 Kbytes)
CS0 area
(1 Mbyte)
CS1 area
(2 Mbytes)
Logical address
H'000F FFFF
H'0000 0000
H'0010 0000
H'0005 FFFF
H'0006 0000
H'001F FFFF
H'0020 0000
H'003F FFFF
H'0040 0000
H'005F FFFF
H'0060 0000
H'007F FFFF
Internal ROM
(384 Kbytes)
CS1 area
(1 Mbyte)
Internal ROM
(384 Kbytes)
CS0 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS1 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS2 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS3 area
(512 Kbytes)
Reserved area
(640 Kbytes)
CS0 area
(1 Mbyte)
CS2 area
(1 Mbyte)
Reserved area
(640 Kbytes)
CS0 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS1 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS1 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS3 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS3 area
(512 Kbytes)
Reserved area
(640 Kbytes)
Internal ROM
(384 Kbytes)
CS0#
CS1#
A11 / CS2#
A12 / CS3#
CS0#
CS1#
A11 / CS2#
A12 / CS3#
CS0#
CS1#
A11 / CS2#
A12 / CS3#
CS0#
CS1#
A11 / CS2#
A12 / CS3#
Pin function (Note 1)
Note 1: Enclosed in are the valid pin function.
3
3-7
ADDRESS SPACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CS0 area
(1 Mbyte)
CS1 area
(2 Mbytes)
Logical address
H'000F FFFF
H'0000 0000
H'0010 0000
H'001F FFFF
H'0020 0000
H'003F FFFF
H'0040 0000
H'005F FFFF
H'0060 0000
H'007F FFFF
CS1 area
(1 Mbyte)
CS0 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS1 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS2 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS3 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS0 area
(1 Mbyte)
CS2 area
(1 Mbyte)
CS0 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS1 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS1 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS3 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS3 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS0#
CS1#
A11 / CS2#
A12 / CS3#
CS0#
CS1#
A11 / CS2#
A12 / CS3#
CS0#
CS1#
A11 / CS2#
A12 / CS3#
CS0#
CS1#
A11 / CS2#
A12 / CS3#
Pin function (Note 1)
Note 1: Enclosed in are the valid pin function.
Internal ROM
(1 Mbyte)
Internal ROM
(1 Mbyte)
Internal ROM
(1 Mbyte)
Internal ROM
(1 Mbyte)
Figure 3.2.2 Internal ROM and Extended External Area of the M32182F8 in External Extension Mode
3.2 Operation Modes
3
3-8
ADDRESS SPACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 3.2.3 Extended External Area in Processor Mode
CS0 area
(2 Mbytes)
CS1 area
(2 Mbytes)
H'0000 0000
Pin function (Note 2)
Note 2: Enclosed in are the valid
p
in function.
H'001F FFFF
H'0020 0000
H'003F FFFF
H'0040 0000
H'005F FFFF
H'0060 0000
H'007F FFFF
CS1 area
(1 Mbyte)
CS1 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS0 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS2 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS3 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS0 area
(1 Mbyte)
CS2 area
(1 Mbyte)
CS1 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS1 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS0 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS0 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS3 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS3 area
(512 Kbytes)
CS0#
CS1#
A11 / CS2#
A12 / CS3#
CS0#
CS1#
A11 / CS2#
A12 / CS3#
CS0#
CS1#
A11 / CS2#
A12 / CS3#
CS0#
CS1#
A11 / CS2#
A12 / CS3#
3.2 Operation Modes
3
3-9
ADDRESS SPACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
3.3 Internal ROM and Extended External Areas
The 8-Mbyte area in the user space from the address H’0000 0000 to the address H’007F FFFF comprise the
internal ROM and extended external areas. For the address mapping of these areas that differs with each opera-
tion mode, see Section 3.2, “Operation Modes.”
3.3.1 Internal ROM Area
The internal ROM is allocated to the addresses shown below. Located at the beginning of this area is the EIT
vector entry (and the ICU vector table).
Table 3.3.1 Internal ROM Allocation Address
Type Name Size Allocation Address
M32182F3 384 Kbytes H’0000 0000 to H’0005 FFFF
M32182F8 1 Mbyte H’0000 0000 to H’000F FFFF
3.3.2 Extended External Area
The extended external area is only available when external extension or processor mode is selected by opera-
tion mode settings. When accessing the extended external area, the control signals necessary to access exter-
nal devices are output.
The CS0# through CS3# signals are output corresponding to the address mapping of the extended external
area. The CS0#, CS1#, CS2# and CS3# signals are output for the CS0, CS1, CS2 and CS3 areas, respectively.
Table 3.3.2 Address Mapping of the Extended External Area in Each Operation Mode
Operation Mode Address Mapping of Extended External Area
Single-chip mode None
External extension mode H’0010 0000 to H’001F FFFF (CS0 area: 1 Mbyte)
H’0020 0000 to H’003F FFFF (CS1 area: 2 Mbytes)
H’0040 0000 to H’005F FFFF (CS2 area: 2 Mbytes)
H’0060 0000 to H’007F FFFF (CS3 area: 2 Mbytes)
Processor mode H’0000 0000 to H’001F FFFF (CS0 area: 2 Mbytes)
H’0020 0000 to H’003F FFFF (CS1 area: 2 Mbytes)
H’0040 0000 to H’005F FFFF (CS2 area: 2 Mbytes)
H’0060 0000 to H’007F FFFF (CS3 area: 2 Mbytes)
3.3 Internal ROM and Extended External Areas
3
3-10
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
The 8-Mbyte area from the address H’0080 0000 to the address H’00FF FFFF comprise the internal RAM and
SFR (Special Function Register) areas. Of these, the space that the user can actually use is a 128-Kbyte area
from the address H’0080 0000 to the address H’0081 FFFF. The other areas here are ghosts in 128-Kbyte units.
(Do not use the ghost area intentionally during programming.)
3.4.1 Internal RAM Area
The internal RAM area is allocated to the addresses shown below.
Table 3.4.1 Internal RAM Allocation Address
Type Name Size Allocation Address
M32182F3 64 Kbytes H’0080 4000 to H’0081 3FFF
M32182F8 64 Kbytes H’0080 4000 to H’0081 3FFF
3.4.2 SFR (Special Function Register) Area
The addresses H’0080 0000 to H’0080 3FFFF comprise the SFR (Special Function Register) area. Located in
this area are the internal peripheral I/O registers.
Figure 3.4.1 Internal RAM and SFR (Special Function Register) Areas of the M32182F3
SFR area
(16 Kbytes)
H'0080 0000
H'0080 3FFF
H'0080 4000
H'0080 FFFF
H'0080 7FFF
H'0080 8000
H'0081 0000
H'0081 3FFF
Internal RAM
(64 Kbytes)
Virtual flash emulation areas
separated in 4-Kbyte units
can be allocated here.
For details, see Section 6.6.
3
3-11
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 3.4.2 Outline Mapping of the SFR Area
Interrupt Controller
(ICU)
A-D Converter
Serial I/O
Wait Controller
Flash control
MJT (common part)
MJT(TOP)
MJT(TIO)
MJT(TMS)
MJT(TML0)
DMAC
Input/output port
MJT(TML1)
CAN0
CAN1
H'0080 0000
H'0080 007E
H'0080 0080
H'0080 0FFE
H'0080 0FE0
H'0080 1000
H'0080 11FE
H'0080 1400
H'0080 15FE
H'0080 3FFE
H'0080 023E
H'0080 0240
H'0080 02FE
H'0000 0300
H'0080 03BE
H'0080 03C0
H'0080 03DE
H'0080 03E0
H'0080 03FE
H'0080 0400
H'0080 0478
H'0080 0700
H'0080 0786
H'0080 0180
H'0080 0186
H'0080 01E0
H'0080 01F8
H'0080 0200
H'0080 00EE
H'0080 0100
H'0080 0146
0 7
+0 address
8 15 0 7
+0 address +1 address
8 15
Multijunction
timer (MJT)
Note: • The Real-time Debugger (RTD) is an independent module that is operated from the outside, and is transparent to
the CPU.
+1 address
3
3-12
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (1/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 0000 Interrupt Vector Register 5-5
(IVECT)
H'0080 0002 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0004 Interrupt Request Mask Register (Use inhibited area) 5-6
(IMASK)
H'0080 0006 SBI Control Register (Use inhibited area) 5-7
(SBICR) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0060 CAN0 Transmit/Receive & Error Interrupt Control Register (Use inhibited area) 5-8
(ICAN0CR) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0066 (Use inhibited area) RTD Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(IRTDCR)
H'0080 0068 SIO2, 3 Transmit/Receive Interrupt Control Register DMA5–9 Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ISIO23CR) (IDMA59CR)
H'0080 006A (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 006C A-D0 Conversion Interrupt Control Register SIO0 Transmit Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(IAD0CCR) (ISIO0TXCR)
H'0080 006E SIO0 Receive Interrupt Control Register SIO1 Transmit Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ISIO0RXCR) (ISIO1TXCR)
H'0080 0070 SIO1 Receive Interrupt Control Register DMA0–4 Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ISIO1RXCR) (IDMA04CR)
H'0080 0072 TIO0–3 Output Interrupt Control Register TOP6, 7 Output Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ITIO03CR) (ITOP67CR)
H'0080 0074 TOP0–5 Output Interrupt Control Register TIO8, 9 Output Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ITOP05CR) (ITIO89CR)
H'0080 0076 TIO4–7 Output Interrupt Control Register TOP10 Output Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ITIO47CR) (ITOP10CR)
H'0080 0078 TIO8,9 Output Interrupt Control Register TMS0, 1 Output Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ITOP89CR) (ITMS01CR)
H'0080 007A (Use inhibited area) TIN0–2 Input Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ITIN02CR)
H'0080 007C TIN12–19 Input Interrupt Control Register TIN20–29 Input Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ITIN1219CR) (ITIN2029CR)
H'0080 007E TIN3–6 Input Interrupt Control Register CAN1 Transmit/Receive & Error Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ITIN36CR) (ICAN1CR)
H'0080 0080 A-D0 Single Mode Register 0 A-D0 Single Mode Register 1 11-14
(AD0SIM0) (AD0SIM1) 11-16
H'0080 0082 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0084 A-D0 Scan Mode Register 0 A-D0 Scan Mode Register 1 11-18
(AD0SCM0) (AD0SCM1) 11-20
H'0080 0086 A-D0 Disconnection Detection Assist Function Control Register A-D0 Conversion Speed Control Register 11-23
(AD0DDACR) (AD0CVSCR) 11-22
H'0080 0088 A-D0 Successive Approximation Register 11-27
(AD0SAR)
H'0080 008A A-D0 Disconnection Detection Assist Method Select Register 11-24
(AD0DDASEL)
H'0080 008C A-D0 Comparate Data Register 11-28
(AD0CMP)
H'0080 008E (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0090 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 0 11-29
(AD0DT0)
H'0080 0092 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 1 11-29
(AD0DT1)
H'0080 0094 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 2 11-29
(AD0DT2)
H'0080 0096 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 3 11-29
(AD0DT3)
H'0080 0098 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 4 11-29
(AD0DT4)
H'0080 009A 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 5 11-29
(AD0DT5)
H'0080 009C 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 6 11-29
(AD0DT6)
|
|
3
3-13
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (2/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 009E 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 7 11-29
(AD0DT7)
H'0080 00A0 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 8 11-29
(AD0DT8)
H'0080 00A2 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 9 11-29
(AD0DT9)
H'0080 00A4 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 10 11-29
(AD0DT10)
H'0080 00A6 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 11 11-29
(AD0DT11)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 00D0 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 0 11-30
(AD08DT0)
H'0080 00D2 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 1 11-30
(AD08DT1)
H'0080 00D4 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 2 11-30
(AD08DT2)
H'0080 00D6 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 3 11-30
(AD08DT3)
H'0080 00D8 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 4 11-30
(AD08DT4)
H'0080 00DA (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 5 11-30
(AD08DT5)
H'0080 00DC (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 6 11-30
(AD08DT6)
H'0080 00DE (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 7 11-30
(AD08DT7)
H'0080 00E0 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 8 11-30
(AD08DT8)
H'0080 00E2 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 9 11-30
(AD08DT9)
H'0080 00E4 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 10 11-30
(AD08DT10)
H'0080 00E6 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 11 11-30
(AD08DT11)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0100 SIO23 Interrupt Request Status Register SIO03 Interrupt Request Enable Register 12-9
(SI23STAT) (SI03EN) 12-10
H'0080 0102 SIO03 Interrupt Request Source Select Register (Use inhibited area) 12-11
(SI03SEL) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0110 SIO0 Transmit Control Register SIO0 Transmit/Receive Mode Register 12-13
(S0TCNT) (S0MOD) 12-14
H'0080 0112 SIO0 Transmit Buffer Register 12-17
(S0TXB)
H'0080 0114 SIO0 Receive Buffer Register 12-18
(S0RXB)
H'0080 0116 SIO0 Receive Control Register SIO0 Baud Rate Register 12-19
(S0RCNT) (S0BAUR) 12-22
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0120 SIO1 Transmit Control Register SIO1 Transmit/Receive Mode Register 12-13
(S1TCNT) (S1MOD) 12-14
H'0080 0122 SIO1 Transmit Buffer Register 12-17
(S1TXB)
H'0080 0124 SIO1 Receive Buffer Register 12-18
(S1RXB)
H'0080 0126 SIO1 Receive Control Register SIO1 Baud Rate Register 12-19
(S1RCNT) (S1BAUR) 12-22
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0130 SIO2 Transmit Control Register SIO2 Transmit/Receive Mode Register 12-13
(S2TCNT) (S2MOD) 12-14
H'0080 0132 SIO2 Transmit Buffer Register 12-17
(S2TXB)
H'0080 0134 SIO2 Receive Buffer Register 12-18
(S2RXB)
|
|
|
|
|
3
3-14
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (3/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 Pages
H'0080 0136 SIO2 Receive Control Register SIO2 Baud Rate Register 12-19
(S2RCNT) (S2BAUR) 12-22
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0140 SIO3 Transmit Control Register SIO3 Transmit/Receive Mode Register 12-13
(S3TCNT) (S3MOD) 12-14
H'0080 0142 SIO3 Transmit Buffer Register 12-17
(S3TXB)
H'0080 0144 SIO3 Receive Buffer Register 12-18
(S3RXB)
H'0080 0146 SIO3 Receive Control Register SIO3 Baud Rate Register 12-19
(S3RCNT) (S3BAUR) 12-22
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0180 CS0 Area Wait Control Register CS1 Area Wait Control Register 16-4
(CS0WTCR) (CS1WTCR)
H'0080 0182 CS2 Area Wait Control Register CS3 Area Wait Control Register 16-4
(CS2WTCR) (CS3WTCR)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 01E0 Flash Mode Register Flash Status Register 1 6-5
(FMOD) (FSTAT1) 6-6
H'0080 01E2 Flash Control Register 1 Flash Control Register 2 6-8
(FCNT1) (FCNT2) 6-9
H'0080 01E4 Flash Control Register 3 Flash Control Register 4 6-10
(FCNT3) (FCNT4)
H'0080 01E6 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 01E8 Virtual Flash S Bank Register 0 6-12
(FESBANK0)
H'0080 01EA Virtual Flash S Bank Register 1 6-12
(FESBANK1)
H'0080 01EC Virtual Flash S Bank Register 2 6-12
(FESBANK2)
H'0080 01EE Virtual Flash S Bank Register 3 6-12
(FESBANK3)
H'0080 01F0 Virtual Flash S Bank Register 4 6-12
(FESBANK4)
H'0080 01F2 Virtual Flash S Bank Register 5 6-12
(FESBANK5)
H'0080 01F4 Virtual Flash S Bank Register 6 6-12
(FESBANK6)
H'0080 01F6 Virtual Flash S Bank Register 7 6-12
(FESBANK7)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0200 (Use inhibited area) Clock Bus & Input Event Bus Control Register 10-14
(CKIEBCR)
H'0080 0202 Prescaler Register 0 Prescaler Register 1 10-10
(PRS0) (PRS1)
H'0080 0204 Prescaler Register 2 Output Event Bus Control Register 10-10
(PRS2) (OEBCR) 10-15
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0210 TCLK Input Processing Control Register 10-18
(TCLKCR)
H'0080 0212 TIN0–4 Input Processing Control Register 10-19
(TIN04CR)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0218 TIN12–19 Input Processing Control Register 10-20
(TIN1219CR)
H'0080 021A TIN20–23, TIN30–33 Input Processing Control Register 10-20
(TIN2023_3033CR)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0220 F/F6–15 Source Select Register 10-22
(FF615S)
H'0080 0222 (Use inhibited area) F/F16–19 Source Select Register 10-23
(FF1619S)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3
3-15
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (4/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 0224 F/F0–15 Protect Register 10-24
(FF015P)
H'0080 0226 F/F0–15 Data Register 10-25
(FF015D)
H'0080 0228 (Use inhibited area) F/F16–20 Protect Register 10-24
(FF1620P)
H'0080 022A (Use inhibited area) F/F16–20 Data Register 10-25
(FF1620D)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0230 TOP0–5 Interrupt Request Status Register TOP0–5 Interrupt Request Mask Register 10-30
(TOP05IST) (TOP05IMA)
H'0080 0232 TOP6, 7 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register TOP8, 9 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register 10-32
(TOP67IMS) (TOP89IMS) 10-33
H'0080 0234 TIO0–3 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register TIO4–7 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register 10-34
(TIO03IMS) (TIO47IMS) 10-35
H'0080 0236 TIO8, 9 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register TMS0, 1 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register 10-36
(TIO89IMS) (TMS01IMS) 10-37
H'0080 0238 TIN0–2 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register TIN3–6 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register 10-38
(TIN02IMS) (TIN36IMS) 10-39
H'0080 023A (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 023C TIN12–19 Interrupt Request Status Register TIN12–19 Interrupt Request Mask Register 10-40
(TIN1219IST) (TIN1219IMA)
H'0080 023E TIN20–23 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (Use inhibited area) 10-42
(TIN2023IMS)
H'0080 0240 TOP0 Counter 10-54
(TOP0CT)
H'0080 0242 TOP0 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP0RL)
H'0080 0244 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0246 TOP0 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP0CC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0250 TOP1 Counter 10-54
(TOP1CT)
H'0080 0252 TOP1 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP1RL)
H'0080 0254 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0256 TOP1 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP1CC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0260 TOP2 Counter 10-54
(TOP2CT)
H'0080 0262 TOP2 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP2RL)
H'0080 0264 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0266 TOP2 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP2CC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0270 TOP3 Counter 10-54
(TOP3CT)
H'0080 0272 TOP3 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP3RL)
H'0080 0274 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0276 TOP3 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP3CC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0280 TOP4 Counter 10-54
(TOP4CT)
H'0080 0282 TOP4 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP4RL)
|
|
|
|
|
3
3-16
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFSFR Area Register Map (5/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 0284 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0286 TOP4 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP4CC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0290 TOP5 Counter 10-54
(TOP5CT)
H'0080 0292 TOP5 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP5RL)
H'0080 0294 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0296 TOP5 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP5CC)
H'0080 0298 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 029A TOP0–5 Control Register 0 10-50
(TOP05CR0)
H'0080 029C (Use inhibited area) TOP0–5 Control Register 1 10-50
(TOP05CR1)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02A0 TOP6 Counter 10-54
(TOP6CT)
H'0080 02A2 TOP6 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP6CC)
H'0080 02A4 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02A6 TOP6 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP6CC)
H'0080 02A8 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02AA TOP6, 7 Control Register 10-52
(TOP67CR)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02B0 TOP7 Counter 10-54
(TOP7CT)
H'0080 02B2 TOP7 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP7RL)
H'0080 02B4 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02B6 TOP7 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP7CC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02C0 TOP8 Counter 10-54
(TOP8CT)
H'0080 02C2 TOP8 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP8RL)
H'0080 02C4 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02C6 TOP8 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP8CC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02D0 TOP9 Counter 10-54
(TOP9CT)
H'0080 02D2 TOP9 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP9RL)
H'0080 02D4 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02D6 TOP9 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP9CC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02E0 TOP10 Counter 10-54
(TOP10CT)
H'0080 02E2 TOP10 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP10RL)
|
|
|
|
|
|
3
3-17
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (6/21)
Address +0 address +1address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 02E4 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02E6 TOP10 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP10CC)
H'0080 02E8 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02EA TOP8–10 Control Register 10-53
(TOP810CR)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02FA TOP External Enable Permit Register 10-57
(TOPEEN)
H'0080 02FC TOP Enable Protect Register 10-57
(TOPPRO)
H'0080 02FE TOP Count Enable Register 10-58
(TOPCEN)
H'0080 0300 TIO0 Counter 10-88
(TIO0CT)
H'0080 0302 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0304 TIO0 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO0RL1)
H'0080 0306 TIO0 Reload 0/ Measure Register 10-89
(TIO0RL0)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0310 TIO1 Counter 10-88
(TIO1CT)
H'0080 0312 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0314 TIO1 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO1RL1)
H'0080 0316 TIO1 Reload 0/ Measure Register 10-89
(TIO1RL0)
H'0080 0318 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 031A TIO0–3 Control Register 0 10-81
(TIO03CR0)
H'0080 031C (Use inhibited area) TIO0–3 Control Register 1 10-82
(TIO03CR1)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0320 TIO2 Counter 10-88
(TIO2CT)
H'0080 0322 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0324 TIO2 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO2RL1)
H'0080 0326 TIO2 Reload 0/ Measure Register 10-89
(TIO2RL0)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0330 TIO3 Counter 10-88
(TIO3CT)
H'0080 0332 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0334 TIO3 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO3RL1)
H'0080 0336 TIO3 Reload 0/ Measure Register 10-89
(TIO3RL0)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0340 TIO4 Counter 10-88
(TIO4CT)
H'0080 0343 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0344 TIO4 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO4RL1)
H'0080 0346 TIO4 Reload 0/ Measure Register 10-89
(TIO4RL0)
|
|
|
|
|
3
3-18
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (7/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 0348 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 034A TIO4 Control Register TIO5 Control Register 10-83
(TIO4CR) (TIO5CR) 10-85
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0350 TIO5 Counter 10-88
(TIO5CT)
H'0080 0352 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0354 TIO5 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO5RL1)
H'0080 0356 TIO5 Reload 0/ Measure Register 10-89
(TIO5RL0)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0360 TIO6 Counter 10-88
(TIO6CT)
H'0080 0362 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0364 TIO6 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO6RL1)
H'0080 0366 TIO6 Reload 0/ Measure Register 10-89
(TIO6RL0)
H'0080 0368 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 036A TIO6 Control Register TIO7 Control Register 10-86
(TIO6CR) (TIO7CR) 10-87
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0370 TIO7 Counter 10-88
(TIO7CT)
H'0080 0372 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0374 TIO7 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO7RL1)
H'0080 0376 TIO7 Reload 0/ Measure Register 10-89
(TIO7RL0)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0380 TIO8 Counter 10-88
(TIO8CT)
H'0080 0382 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0384 TIO8 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO8RL1)
H'0080 0386 TIO8 Reload 0/ Measure Register 10-89
(TIO8RL0)
H'0080 0388 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 038A TIO8 Control Register TIO9 Control Register 10-87
(TIO8CR) (TIO9CR) 10-88
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0390 TIO9 Counter 10-88
(TIO9CT)
H'0080 0392 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0394 TIO9 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO9RL1)
H'0080 0396 TIO9 Reload 0/ Measure Register 10-89
(TIO9RL0)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 03BC TIO Enable Protect Register 10-91
(TIOPRO)
H'0080 03BE TIO Count Enable Register 10-92
(TIOCEN)
H'0080 03C0 TMS0 Counter 10-109
(TMS0CT)
|
|
|
|
|
|
3
3-19
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (8/21)
Address +0 address +1address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 03C2 TMS0 Measure 3 Register 10-109
(TMS0MR3)
H'0080 03C4 TMS0 Measure 2 Register 10-109
(TMS0MR2)
H'0080 03C6 TMS0 Measure 1 Register 10-109
(TMS0MR1)
H'0080 03C8 TMS0 Measure 0 Register 10-109
(TMS0MR0)
H'0080 03CA TMS0 Control Register TMS1 Control Register 10-108
(TMS0CR) (TMS1CR)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 03D0 TMS1 Counter 10-109
(TMS1CT)
H'0080 03D2 TMS1 Measure 3 Register 10-109
(TMS1MR3)
H'0080 03D4 TMS1 Measure 2 Register 10-109
(TMS1MR2)
H'0080 03D6 TMS1 Measure 1 Register 10-109
(TMS1MR1)
H'0080 03D8 TMS1 Measure 0 Register 10-109
(TMS1MR0)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 03E0 TML0 Counter (Upper) 10-114
(TML0CT)
H'0080 03E2 (Lower)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 03EA (Use inhibited area) TML0 Control Register 10-113
(TML0CR)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 03F0 TML0 Measure 3 Register (Upper) 10-114
(TML0MR3)
H'0080 03F2 (Lower)
H'0080 03F4 TML0 Measure 2 Register (Upper) 10-114
(TML0MR2)
H'0080 03F6 (Lower)
H'0080 03F8 TML0 Measure 1 Register (Upper) 10-114
(TML0MR1)
H'0080 03FA (Lower)
H'0080 03FC TML0 Measure 0 Register (Upper) 10-114
(TML0MR0)
H'0080 03FE (Lower)
H'0080 0400 DMA0–4 Interrupt Request Status Register DMA0–4 Interrupt Request Mask Register 9-24
(DM04ITST) (DM04ITMK) 9-25
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0408 DMA5–9 Interrupt Request Status Register DMA5–9 Interrupt Request Mask Register 9-24
(DM59ITST) (DM59ITMK) 9-25
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0410 DMA0 Channel Control Register 0 DMA0 Channel Control Register 1 9-6
(DM0CNT0) (DM0CNT1)
H'0080 0412 DMA0 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM0SA)
H'0080 0414 DMA0 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM0DA)
H'0080 0416 DMA0 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM0TCT)
H'0080 0418 DMA5 Channel Control Register 0 DMA5 Channel Control Register 1 9-11
(DM5CNT0) (DM5CNT1)
H'0080 041A DMA5 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM5SA)
|
|
|
|
|
|
3
3-20
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (9/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 041C DMA5 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM5DA)
H'0080 041E DMA5 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM5TCT)
H'0080 0420 DMA1 Channel Control Register 0 DMA1 Channel Control Register 1 9-7
(DM1CNT0) (DM1CNT1)
H'0080 0422 DMA1 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM1SA)
H'0080 0424 DMA1 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM1DA)
H'0080 0426 DMA1 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM1TCT)
H'0080 0428 DMA6 Channel Control Register 0 DMA6 Channel Control Register 1 9-12
(DM6CNT0) (DM6CNT1)
H'0080 042A DMA6 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM6SA)
H'0080 042C DMA6 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM6DA)
H'0080 042E DMA6 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM6TCT)
H'0080 0430 DMA2 Channel Control Register 0 DMA2 Channel Control Register 1 9-8
(DM2CNT0) (DM2CNT1)
H'0080 0432 DMA2 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM2SA)
H'0080 0434 DMA2 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM2DA)
H'0080 0436 DMA2 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM2TCT)
H'0080 0438 DMA7 Channel Control Register 0 DMA7 Channel Control Register 1 9-13
(DM7CNT0) (DM7CNT1)
H'0080 043A DMA7 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM7SA)
H'0080 043C DMA7 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM7DA)
H'0080 043E DMA7 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM7TCT)
H'0080 0440 DMA3 Channel Control Register 0 DMA3 Channel Control Register 1 9-9
(DM3CNT0) (DM3CNT1)
H'0080 0442 DMA3 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM3SA)
H'0080 0444 DMA3 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM3DA)
H'0080 0446 DMA3 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM3TCT)
H'0080 0448 DMA8 Channel Control Register 0 DMA8 Channel Control Register 1 9-14
(DM8CNT0) (DM8CNT1)
H'0080 044A DMA8 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM8SA)
H'0080 044C DMA8 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM8DA)
H'0080 044E DMA8 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM8TCT)
H'0080 0450 DMA4 Channel Control Register 0 DMA4 Channel Control Register 1 9-10
(DM4CNT0) (DM4CNT1)
H'0080 0452 DMA4 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM4SA)
H'0080 0454 DMA4 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM4DA)
H'0080 0456 DMA4 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM4TCT)
H'0080 0458 DMA9 Channel Control Register 0 DMA9 Channel Control Register 1 9-15
(DM9CNT0) (DM9CNT1)
H'0080 045A DMA9 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM9SA)
H'0080 045C DMA9 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM9DA)
H'0080 045E DMA9 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM9TCT)
H'0080 0460 DMA0 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM0SRI)
3
3-21
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (10/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 0462 DMA1 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM0SRI)
H'0080 0464 DMA2 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM2SRI)
H'0080 0466 DMA3 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM3SRI)
H'0080 0468 DMA4 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM4SRI)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0470 DMA5 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM5SRI)
H'0080 0472 DMA6 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM6SRI)
H'0080 0474 DMA7 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM7SRI)
H'0080 0476 DMA8 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM8SRI)
H'0080 0478 DMA9 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM9SRI)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0700 P0 Data Register P1 Data Register 8-7
(P0DATA) (P1DATA)
H'0080 0702 P2 Data Register P3 Data Register 8-7
(P2DATA) (P3DATA)
H'0080 0704 P4 Data Register (Use inhibited area) 8-7
(P4DATA)
H'0080 0706 P6 Data Register P7 Data Register 8-7
(P6DATA) (P7DATA)
H'0080 0708 P8 Data Register P9 Data Register 8-7
(P8DATA) (P9DATA)
H'0080 070A P10 Data Register P11 Data Register 8-7
(P10DATA) (P11DATA)
H'0080 070C P12 Data Register P13 Data Register 8-7
(P12DATA) (P13DATA)
H'0080 070E P14 Data Register P15 Data Register 8-7
(P14DATA) (P15DATA)
H'0080 0710 P16 Data Register P17 Data Register 8-7
(P16DATA) (P17DATA)
H'0080 0712 P18 Data Register P19 Data Register 8-7
(P18DATA) (P19DATA)
H'0080 0714 P20 Data Register P21 Data Register 8-7
(P20DATA) (P21DATA)
H'0080 0716 P22 Data Register (Use inhibited area) 8-7
(P22DATA) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0720 P0 Direction Register P1 Direction Register 8-8
(P0DIR) (P1DIR)
H'0080 0722 P2 Direction Register P3 Direction Register 8-8
(P2DIR) (P3DIR)
H'0080 0724 P4 Direction Register (Use inhibited area) 8-8
(P4DIR)
H'0080 0726 P6 Direction Register P7 Direction Register 8-8
(P6DIR) (P7DIR)
H'0080 0728 P8 Direction Register P9 Direction Register 8-8
(P8DIR) (P9DIR)
H'0080 072A P10 Direction Register P11 Direction Register 8-8
(P10DIR) (P11DIR)
H'0080 072C P12 Direction Register P13 Direction Register 8-8
(P12DIR) (P13DIR)
H'0080 072E P14 Direction Register P15 Direction Register 8-8
(P14DIR) (P15DIR)
H'0080 0730 P16 Direction Register P17 Direction Register 8-8
(P16DIR) (P17DIR)
H'0080 0732 P18 Direction Register P19 Direction Register 8-8
(P18DIR) (P19DIR)
H'0080 0734 P20 Direction Register P21 Direction Register 8-8
(P20DIR) (P21DIR)
|
|
|
3
3-22
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (11/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 0736 P22 Direction Register (Use inhibited area) 8-8
(P22DIR) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0740 P0 Operation Mode Register P1 Operation Mode Register 8-9
(P0MOD) (P1MOD)
H'0080 0742 P2 Operation Mode Register P3 Operation Mode Register 8-10
(P2MOD) (P3MOD)
H'0080 0744 P4 Operation Mode Register Port Input Special Function Control Register 8-11
(P4MOD) (PICNT) 8-21
H'0080 0746 P6 Operation Mode Register P7 Operation Mode Register 8-11
(P6MOD) (P7MOD) 8-12
H'0080 0748 P8 Operation Mode Register P9 Operation Mode Register 8-12
(P8MOD) (P9MOD) 8-13
H'0080 074A P10 Operation Mode Register P11 Operation Mode Register 8-13
(P10MOD) (P11MOD) 8-14
H'0080 074C P12 Operation Mode Register P13 Operation Mode Register 8-14
(P12MOD) (P13MOD) 8-15
H'0080 074E P14 Operation Mode Register P15 Operation Mode Register 8-15
(P14MOD) (P15MOD) 8-16
H'0080 0750 P16 Operation Mode Register P17 Operation Mode Register 8-16
(P16MOD) (P17MOD) 8-17
H'0080 0752 P18 Operation Mode Register P19 Operation Mode Register 8-17
(P18MOD) (P19MOD) 8-18
H'0080 0754 P20 Operation Mode Register P21 Operation Mode Register 8-18
(P20MOD) (P21MOD)
H'0080 0756 P22 Operation Mode Register (Use inhibited area) 8-19
(P22MOD) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0760 Port Group 0, 1 Input Level Setting Register Port Group 2, 3 Input Level Setting Register 8-25
(PG01LEV) (PG23LEV)
H'0080 0762 Port Group 4, 5 Input Level Setting Register Port Group 6, 7 Input Level Setting Register 8-25
(PG45LEV) (PG67LEV)
H'0080 0764 Port Group 8 Input Level Setting Register (Use inhibited area) 8-25
(PG8LEV) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 076A P10 Peripheral Output Select Register (Use inhibited area) 8-20
(P10SMOD) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0776 P22 Peripheral Output Select Register (Use inhibited area) 8-20
(P22SMOD) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 077E (Use inhibited area) Bus Mode Control Register 15-9
(BUSMODC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0786 Clock Control Register (Use inhibited area) 18-5
(CLKCR) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0FE0 TML1 Counter (Upper) 10-114
(TML1CT)
H'0080 0FE2 (Lower)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0FEA (Use inhibited area) TML1 Control Register 10-113
(TML1CR)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0FF0 TML1 Measure 3 Register (Upper) 10-114
(TML1MR2)
H'0080 0FF2 (Lower)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3
3-23
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (12/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 0FF4 TML1 Measure 2 Register (Upper) 10-114
(TML1MR2)
H'0080 0FF6 (Lower)
H'0080 0FF8 TML1 Measure 1 Register (Upper) 10-114
(TML1MR1)
H'0080 0FFA (Lower)
H'0080 0FFC TML1 Measure 0 Register (Upper) 10-114
(TML1MR0)
H'0080 0FFE (Lower)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1000 CAN0 Control Register 13-15
(CAN0CNT)
H'0080 1002 CAN0 Status Register 13-18
(CAN0STAT)
H'0080 1004 CAN0 Frame Format Select Register 13-21
(CAN0FFS)
H'0080 1006 CAN0 Configuration Register 13-22
(CAN0CONF)
H'0080 1008 CAN0 Timestamp Count Register 13-24
(CAN0TSTMP)
H'0080 100A CAN0 Receive Error Count Register CAN0 Transmit Error Count Register 13-25
(CAN0REC) (CAN0TEC)
H'0080 100C CAN0 Slot Interrupt Request Status Register 13-29
(CAN0SLIST)
H'0080 100E (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1010 CAN0 Slot Interrupt Request Enable Register 13-30
(CAN0SLIEN)
H'0080 1012 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1014 CAN0 Error Interrupt Request Status Register CAN0 Error Interrupt Request Enable Register 13-31
(CAN0ERIST) (CAN0ERIEN) 13-32
H'0080 1016 CAN0 Baud Rate Prescaler CAN0 Cause of Error Register 13-26
(CAN0BRP) (CAN0EF) 13-45
H'0080 1018 CAN0 Mode Register CAN0 DMA Transfer Request Select Register 13-46
(CAN0MOD) (CAN0DMARQ) 13-47
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1028 CAN0 Global Mask Register Standard ID 0 CAN0 Global Mask Register Standard ID 1 13-48
(C0GMSKS0) (C0GMSKS1)
H'0080 102A CAN0 Global Mask Register Extended ID 0 CAN0 Global Mask Register Extended ID 1 13-49
(C0GMSKE0) (C0GMSKE1)
H'0080 102C CAN0 Global Mask Register Extended ID 2 (Use inhibited area) 13-50
(C0GMSKE2)
H'0080 102E (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1030 CAN0 Local Mask Register A Standard ID 0 CAN0 Local Mask Register A Standard ID 1 13-48
(C0LMSKAS0) (C0LMSKAS1)
H'0080 1032 CAN0 Local Mask Register A Extended ID 0 CAN0 Local Mask Register A Extended ID 1 13-49
(C0LMSKAE0) (C0LMSKAE1)
H'0080 1034 CAN0 Local Mask Register A Extended ID 2 (Use inhibited area) 13-50
(C0LMSKAE2)
H'0080 1036 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1038 CAN0 Local Mask Register B Standard ID 0 CAN0 Local Mask Register B Standard ID 1 13-48
(C0LMSKBS0) (C0LMSKBS1)
H'0080 103A CAN0 Local Mask Register B Extended ID 0 CAN0 Local Mask Register B Extended ID 1 13-49
(C0LMSKBE0) (C0LMSKBE1)
H'0080 103C CAN0 Local Mask Register B Extended ID 2 (Use inhibited area) 13-50
(C0LMSKBE2)
H'0080 103E (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1040 CAN0 Single Shot Mode Control Register 13-52
(CAN0SSMODE)
H'0080 1042 (Use inhibited area)
|
|
3
3-24
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (13/21)
Address +0 address +1address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 1044 CAN0 Single-Shot Interrupt Request Status Register 13-33
(CAN0SSIST)
H'0080 1046 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1048 CAN0 Single-Shot Interrupt Request Enable Register 13-34
(CAN0SSIEN)
H'0080 1050 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Control Register CAN0 Message Slot 1 Control Register 13-53
(C0MSL0CNT) (C0MSL1CNT)
H'0080 1052 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Control Register CAN0 Message Slot 3 Control Register 13-53
(C0MSL2CNT) (C0MSL3CNT)
H'0080 1054 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Control Register CAN0 Message Slot 5 Control Register 13-53
(C0MSL4CNT) (C0MSL5CNT)
H'0080 1056 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Control Register CAN0 Message Slot 7 Control Register 13-53
(C0MSL6CNT) (C0MSL7CNT)
H'0080 1058 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Control Register CAN0 Message Slot 9 Control Register 13-53
(C0MSL8CNT) (C0MSL9CNT)
H'0080 105A CAN0 Message Slot 10 Control Register CAN0 Message Slot 11 Control Register 13-53
(C0MSL10CNT) (C0MSL11CNT)
H'0080 105C CAN0 Message Slot 12 Control Register CAN0 Message Slot 13 Control Register 13-53
(C0MSL12CNT) (C0MSL13CNT)
H'0080 105E CAN0 Message Slot 14 Control Register CAN0 Message Slot 15 Control Register 13-53
(C0MSL14CNT) (C0MSL15CNT)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1100 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Standard ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C0MSL0SID0) (C0MSL0SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1102 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Extended ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C0MSL0EID0) (C0MSL0EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1104 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Extended ID 2 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL0EID2) (C0MSL0DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1106 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL0DT0) (C0MSL0DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1108 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL0DT2) (C0MSL0DT3) 13-66
H'0080 110A CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL0DT4) (C0MSL0DT5) 13-68
H'0080 110C CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL0DT6) (C0MSL0DT7) 13-70
H'0080 110E CAN0 Message Slot 0 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL0TSP)
H'0080 1110 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Standard ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C0MSL1SID0) (C0MSL1SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1112 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Extended ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C0MSL1EID0) (C0MSL1EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1114 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Extended ID 2 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL1EID2) (C0MSL1DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1116 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL1DT0) (C0MSL1DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1118 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL1DT2) (C0MSL1DT3) 13-66
H'0080 111A CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL1DT4) (C0MSL1DT5) 13-68
H'0080 111C CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL1DT6) (C0MSL1DT7) 13-70
H'0080 111E CAN0 Message Slot 1 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL1TSP)
H'0080 1120 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Standard ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C0MSL2SID0) (C0MSL2SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1122 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Extended ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C0MSL2EID0) (C0MSL2EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1124 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Extended ID 2 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL2EID2) (C0MSL2DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1126 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL2DT0) (C0MSL2DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1128 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL2DT2) (C0MSL2DT3) 13-66
H'0080 112A CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL2DT4) (C0MSL2DT5) 13-68
H'0080 112C CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL2DT6) (C0MSL2DT7) 13-70
|
3
3-25
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (14/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 112E CAN0 Message Slot 2 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL2TSP)
H'0080 1130 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Standard ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C0MSL3SID0) (C0MSL3SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1132 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Extended ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C0MSL3EID0) (C0MSL3EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1134 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Extended ID 2 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL3EID2) (C0MSL3DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1136 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL3DT0) (C0MSL3DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1138 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL3DT2) (C0MSL3DT3) 13-66
H'0080 113A CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL3DT4) (C0MSL3DT5) 13-68
H'0080 113C CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL3DT6) (C0MSL3DT7) 13-70
H'0080 113E CAN0 Message Slot 3 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL3TSP)
H'0080 1140 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Standard ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C0MSL4SID0) (C0MSL4SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1142 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Extended ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C0MSL4EID0) (C0MSL4EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1144 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Extended ID 2 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL4EID2) (C0MSL4DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1146 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL4DT0) (C0MSL4DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1148 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL4DT2) (C0MSL4DT3) 13-66
H'0080 114A CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL4DT4) (C0MSL4DT5) 13-68
H'0080 114C CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL4DT6) (C0MSL4DT7) 13-70
H'0080 114E CAN0 Message Slot 4 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL4TSP)
H'0080 1150 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Standard ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C0MSL5SID0) (C0MSL5SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1152 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Extended ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C0MSL5EID0) (C0MSL5EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1154 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Extended ID 2 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL5EID2) (C0MSL5DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1156 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL5DT0) (C0MSL5DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1158 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL5DT2) (C0MSL5DT3) 13-66
H'0080 115A CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL5DT4) (C0MSL5DT5) 13-68
H'0080 115C CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL5DT6) (C0MSL5DT7) 13-70
H'0080 115E CAN0 Message Slot 5 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL5TSP)
H'0080 1160 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Standard ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C0MSL6SID0) (C0MSL6SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1162 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Extended ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C0MSL6EID0) (C0MSL6EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1164 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Extended ID 2 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL6EID2) (C0MSL6DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1166 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL6DT0) (C0MSL6DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1168 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL6DT2) (C0MSL6DT3) 13-66
H'0080 116A CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL6DT4) (C0MSL6DT5) 13-68
H'0080 116C CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL6DT6) (C0MSL6DT7) 13-70
H'0080 116E CAN0 Message Slot 6 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL6TSP)
H'0080 1170 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Standard ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C0MSL7SID0) (C0MSL7SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1172 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Extended ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C0MSL7EID0) (C0MSL7EID1) 13-60
3
3-26
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (15/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 1174 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Extended ID 2 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL7EID2) (C0MSL7DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1176 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL7DT0) (C0MSL7DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1178 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL7DT2) (C0MSL7DT3) 13-66
H'0080 117A CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL7DT4) (C0MSL7DT5) 13-68
H'0080 117C CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL7DT6) (C0MSL7DT7) 13-70
H'0080 117E CAN0 Message Slot 7 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL7TSP)
H'0080 1180 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Standard ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C0MSL8SID0) (C0MSL8SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1182 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Extended ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C0MSL8EID0) (C0MSL8EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1184 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Extended ID 2 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL8EID2) (C0MSL8DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1186 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL8DT0) (C0MSL8DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1188 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL8DT2) (C0MSL8DT3) 13-66
H'0080 118A CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL8DT4) (C0MSL8DT5) 13-68
H'0080 118C CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL8DT6) (C0MSL8DT7) 13-70
H'0080 118E CAN0 Message Slot 8 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL8TSP)
H'0080 1190 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Standard ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C0MSL9SID0) (C0MSL9SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1192 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Extended ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C0MSL9EID0) (C0MSL9EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1194 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Extended ID 2 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL9EID2) (C0MSL9DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1196 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL9DT0) (C0MSL9DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1198 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL9DT2) (C0MSL9DT3) 13-66
H'0080 119A CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL9DT4) (C0MSL9DT5) 13-68
H'0080 119C CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL9DT6) (C0MSL9DT7) 13-70
H'0080 119E CAN0 Message Slot 9 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL9TSP)
H'0080 11A0 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Standard ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C0MSL10SID0) (C0MSL10SID1) 13-58
H'0080 11A2 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Extended ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C0MSL10EID0) (C0MSL10EID1) 13-60
H'0080 11A4 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Extended ID 2 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL10EID2) (C0MSL10DLC) 13-62
H'0080 11A6 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL10DT0) (C0MSL10DT1) 13-64
H'0080 11A8 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL10DT2) (C0MSL10DT3) 13-66
H'0080 11AA CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL10DT4) (C0MSL10DT5) 13-68
H'0080 11AC CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL10DT6) (C0MSL10DT7) 13-70
H'0080 11AE CAN0 Message Slot 10 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL10TSP)
H'0080 11B0 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Standard ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C0MSL11SID0) (C0MSL11SID1) 13-58
H'0080 11B2 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Extended ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C0MSL11EID0) (C0MSL11EID1) 13-60
H'0080 11B4 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Extended ID 2 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL11EID2) (C0MSL11DLC) 13-62
H'0080 11B6 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL11DT0) (C0MSL11DT1) 13-64
H'0080 11B8 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL11DT2) (C0MSL11DT3) 13-66
3
3-27
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (16/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 11BA CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL11DT4) (C0MSL11DT5) 13-68
H'0080 11BC CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL11DT6) (C0MSL11DT7) 13-70
H'0080 11BE CAN0 Message Slot 11 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL11TSP)
H'0080 11C0 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Standard ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C0MSL12SID0) (C0MSL12SID1) 13-58
H'0080 11C2 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Extended ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C0MSL12EID0) (C0MSL12EID1) 13-60
H'0080 11C4 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Extended ID 2 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL12EID2) (C0MSL12DLC) 13-62
H'0080 11C6 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL12DT0) (C0MSL12DT1) 13-64
H'0080 11C8 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL12DT2) (C0MSL12DT3) 13-66
H'0080 11CA CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL12DT4) (C0MSL12DT5) 13-68
H'0080 11CC CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL12DT6) (C0MSL12DT7) 13-70
H'0080 11CE CAN0 Message Slot 12 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL12TSP)
H'0080 11D0 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Standard ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C0MSL13SID0) (C0MSL13SID1) 13-58
H'0080 11D2 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Extended ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C0MSL13EID0) (C0MSL13EID1) 13-60
H'0080 11D4 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Extended ID 2 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL13EID2) (C0MSL13DLC) 13-62
H'0080 11D6 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL13DT0) (C0MSL13DT1) 13-64
H'0080 11D8 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL13DT2) (C0MSL13DT3) 13-66
H'0080 11DA CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL13DT4) (C0MSL13DT5) 13-68
H'0080 11DC CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL13DT6) (C0MSL13DT7) 13-70
H'0080 11DE CAN0 Message Slot 13 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL13TSP)
H'0080 11E0 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Standard ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C0MSL14SID0) (C0MSL14SID1) 13-58
H'0080 11E2 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Extended ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C0MSL14EID0) (C0MSL14EID1) 13-60
H'0080 11E4 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Extended ID 2 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL14EID2) (C0MSL14DLC) 13-62
H'0080 11E6 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL14DT0) (C0MSL14DT1) 13-64
H'0080 11E8 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL14DT2) (C0MSL14DT3) 13-66
H'0080 11EA CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL14DT4) (C0MSL14DT5) 13-68
H'0080 11EC CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL14DT6) (C0MSL14DT7) 13-70
H'0080 11EE CAN0 Message Slot 14 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL14TSP)
H'0080 11F0 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Standard ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C0MSL15SID0) (C0MSL15SID1) 13-58
H'0080 11F2 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Extended ID 0 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C0MSL15EID0) (C0MSL15EID1) 13-60
H'0080 11F4 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Extended ID 2 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL15EID2) (C0MSL15DLC) 13-62
H'0080 11F6 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL15DT0) (C0MSL15DT1) 13-64
H'0080 11F8 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL15DT2) (C0MSL15DT3) 13-66
H'0080 11FA CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL15DT4) (C0MSL15DT5) 13-68
H'0080 11FC CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL15DT6) (C0MSL15DT7) 13-70
3
3-28
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (17/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 11FE CAN0 Message Slot 15 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL15TSP)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1400 CAN1 Control Register 13-15
(CAN1CNT)
H'0080 1402 CAN1 Status Register 13-18
(CAN1STAT)
H'0080 1404 CAN1 Frame Format Select Register 13-21
(CAN1FFS)
H'0080 1406 CAN1 Configuration Register 13-22
(CAN1CONF)
H'0080 1408 CAN1 Timestamp Count Register 13-24
(CAN1TSTMP)
H'0080 140A CAN1 Receive Error Count Register CAN1 Transmit Error Count Register 13-25
(CAN1REC) (CAN1TEC)
H'0080 140C CAN1 Slot Interrupt Request Status Register 13-29
(CAN1SLIST)
H'0080 140E (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1410 CAN1 Slot Interrupt Request Enable Register 13-30
(CAN1SLIEN)
H'0080 1412 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1414 CAN1 Error Interrupt Request Status Register CAN1 Error Interrupt Request Enable Register 13-31
(CAN1ERIST) (CAN1ERIEN) 13-32
H'0080 1416 CAN1 Baud Rate Prescaler CAN1 Cause of Error Register 13-26
(CAN1BRP) (CAN1EF) 13-45
H'0080 1418 CAN1 Mode Register (Use inhibited area) 13-46
(CAN1MOD) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1428 CAN1 Global Mask Register Standard ID 0 CAN1 Global Mask Register Standard ID 1 13-48
(C1GMSKS0) (C1GMSKS1)
H'0080 142A CAN1 Global Mask Register Extended ID 0 CAN1 Global Mask Register Extended ID 1 13-49
(C1GMSKE0) (C1GMSKE1)
H'0080 142C CAN1 Global Mask Register Extended ID 2 (Use inhibited area) 13-50
(C1GMSKE2)
H'0080 142E (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1430 CAN1 Local Mask Register A Standard ID 0 CAN1 Local Mask Register A Standard ID 1 13-48
(C1LMSKAS0) (C1LMSKAS1)
H'0080 1432 CAN1 Local Mask Register A Extended ID 0 CAN1 Local Mask Register A Extended ID 1 13-49
(C1LMSKAE0) (C1LMSKAE1)
H'0080 1434 CAN1 Local Mask Register A Extended ID 2 (Use inhibited area) 13-50
(C1LMSKAE2)
H'0080 1436 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1438 CAN1 Local Mask Register B Standard ID 0 CAN1 Local Mask Register B Standard ID 1 13-48
(C1LMSKBS0) (C1LMSKBS1)
H'0080 143A CAN1 Local Mask Register B Extended ID 0 CAN1 Local Mask Register B Extended ID 1 13-49
(C1LMSKBE0) (C1LMSKBE1)
H'0080 143C CAN1 Local Mask Register B Extended ID 2 (Use inhibited area) 13-50
(C1LMSKBE2)
H'0080 143E (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1440 CAN1 Single-Shot Mode Control Register 13-52
(CAN1SSMODE)
H'0080 1442 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1444 CAN1 Single-Shot Interrupt Request Status Register 13-33
(CAN1SSIST)
H'0080 1446 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1448 CAN1 Single-Shot Interrupt Request Enable Register 13-34
(CAN1SSIEN)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1450 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Control Register CAN1 Message Slot 1 Control Register 13-53
(C1MSL0CNT) (C1MSL1CNT)
|
|
|
3
3-29
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
|
SFR Area Register Map (18/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 1452 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Control Register CAN1 Message Slot 3 Control Register 13-53
(C1MSL0CNT) (C1MSL3CNT)
H'0080 1454 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Control Register CAN1 Message Slot 5 Control Register 13-53
(C1MSL4CNT) (C1MSL5CNT)
H'0080 1456 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Control Register CAN1 Message Slot 7 Control Register 13-53
(C1MSL6CNT) (C1MSL7CNT)
H'0080 1458 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Control Register CAN1 Message Slot 9 Control Register 13-53
(C1MSL8CNT) (C1MSL9CNT)
H'0080 145A CAN1 Message Slot 10 Control Register CAN1 Message Slot 11 Control Register 13-53
(C1MSL10CNT) (C1MSL11CNT)
H'0080 145C CAN1 Message Slot 12 Control Register CAN1 Message Slot 13 Control Register 13-53
(C1MSL12CNT) (C1MSL13CNT)
H'0080 145E CAN1 Message Slot 14 Control Register CAN1 Message Slot 15 Control Register 13-53
(C1MSL14CNT) (C1MSL15CNT)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1500 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C1MSL0SID0) (C1MSL0SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1502 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Extended ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C1MSL0EID0) (C1MSL0EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1504 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Extended ID 2 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL0EID2) (C1MSL0DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1506 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL0DT0) (C1MSL0DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1508 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL0DT2) (C1MSL0DT3) 13-66
H'0080 150A CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL0DT4) (C1MSL0DT5) 13-68
H'0080 150C CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL0DT6) (C1MSL0DT7) 13-70
H'0080 150E CAN1 Message Slot 0 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL0TSP)
H'0080 1510 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C1MSL1SID0) (C1MSL1SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1512 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Extended ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C1MSL1EID0) (C1MSL1EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1514 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Extended ID 2 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL1EID2) (C1MSL1DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1516 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL1DT0) (C1MSL1DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1518 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL1DT2) (C1MSL1DT3) 13-66
H'0080 151A CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL1DT4) (C1MSL1DT5) 13-68
H'0080 151C CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL1DT6) (C1MSL1DT7) 13-70
H'0080 151E CAN1 Message Slot 1 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL1TSP)
H'0080 1520 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C1MSL2SID0) (C1MSL2SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1522 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Extended ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C1MSL2EID0) (C1MSL2EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1524 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Extended ID 2 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL2EID2) (C1MSL2DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1526 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL2DT0) (C1MSL2DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1528 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL2DT2) (C1MSL2DT3) 13-66
H'0080 152A CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL2DT4) (C1MSL2DT5) 13-68
H'0080 152C CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL2DT6) (C1MSL2DT7) 13-70
H'0080 152E CAN1 Message Slot 2 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL2TSP)
H'0080 1530 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C1MSL3SID0) (C1MSL3SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1532 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Extended ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C1MSL3EID0) (C1MSL3EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1534 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Extended ID 2 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL3EID2) (C1MSL3DLC) 13-62
3
3-30
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (19/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 1536 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Standard ID 1 13-63
(C1MSL3DT0) (C1MSL3DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1538 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL3DT2) (C1MSL3DT3) 13-66
H'0080 153A CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL3DT4) (C1MSL3DT5) 13-68
H'0080 153C CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL3DT6) (C1MSL3DT7) 13-70
H'0080 153E CAN1 Message Slot 3 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL3TSP)
H'0080 1540 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C1MSL4SID0) (C1MSL4SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1542 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Extended ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C1MSL4EID0) (C1MSL4EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1544 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Extended ID 2 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL4EID2) (C1MSL4DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1546 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL4DT0) (C1MSL4DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1548 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL4DT2) (C1MSL4DT3) 13-66
H'0080 154A CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL4DT4) (C1MSL4DT5) 13-68
H'0080 154C CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL4DT6) (C1MSL4DT7) 13-70
H'0080 154E CAN1 Message Slot 4 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL4TSP)
H'0080 1550 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C1MSL5SID0) (C1MSL5SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1552 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Extended ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C1MSL5EID0) (C1MSL5EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1554 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Extended ID 2 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL5EID2) (C1MSL5DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1556 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL5DT0) (C1MSL5DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1558 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL5DT2) (C1MSL5DT3) 13-66
H'0080 155A CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL5DT4) (C1MSL5DT5) 13-68
H'0080 155C CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL5DT6) (C1MSL5DT7) 13-70
H'0080 155E CAN1 Message Slot 5 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL5TSP)
H'0080 1560 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C1MSL6SID0) (C1MSL6SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1562 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Extended ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C1MSL6EID0) (C1MSL6EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1564 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Extended ID 2 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL6EID2) (C1MSL6DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1566 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL6DT0) (C1MSL6DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1568 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL6DT2) (C1MSL6DT3) 13-66
H'0080 156A CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL6DT4) (C1MSL6DT5) 13-68
H'0080 156C CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL6DT6) (C1MSL6DT7) 13-70
H'0080 156E CAN1 Message Slot 6 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL6TSP)
H'0080 1570 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C1MSL7SID0) (C1MSL7SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1572 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Extended ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C1MSL7EID0) (C1MSL7EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1574 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Extended ID 2 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL7EID2) (C1MSL7DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1576 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL7DT0) (C1MSL7DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1578 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL7DT2) (C1MSL7DT3) 13-66
H'0080 157A CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL7DT4) (C1MSL7DT5) 13-68
3
3-31
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (20/21)
Address +0 address +1address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 157C CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL7DT6) (C1MSL7DT7) 13-70
H'0080 157E CAN1 Message Slot 7 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL7TSP)
H'0080 1580 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C1MSL8SID0) (C1MSL8SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1582 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Extended ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C1MSL8EID0) (C1MSL8EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1584 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Extended ID 2 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL8EID2) (C1MSL8DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1586 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL8DT0) (C1MSL8DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1588 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL8DT2) (C1MSL8DT3) 13-66
H'0080 158A CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL8DT4) (C1MSL8DT5) 13-68
H'0080 158C CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL8DT6) (C1MSL8DT7) 13-70
H'0080 158E CAN1 Message Slot 8 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL8TSP)
H'0080 1590 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C1MSL9SID0) (C1MSL9SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1592 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Extended ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C1MSL9EID0) (C1MSL9EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1594 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Extended ID 2 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL9EID2) (C1MSL9DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1596 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL9DT0) (C1MSL9DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1598 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL9DT2) (C1MSL9DT3) 13-66
H'0080 159A CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL9DT4) (C1MSL9DT5) 13-68
H'0080 159C CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL9DT6) (C1MSL9DT7) 13-70
H'0080 159E CAN1 Message Slot 9 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL9TSP)
H'0080 15A0 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C1MSL10SID0) (C1MSL10SID1) 13-58
H'0080 15A2 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Extended ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C1MSL10EID0) (C1MSL10EID1) 13-60
H'0080 15A4 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Extended ID 2 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL10EID2) (C1MSL10DLC) 13-62
H'0080 15A6 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL10DT0) (C1MSL10DT1) 13-64
H'0080 15A8 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL10DT2) (C1MSL10DT3) 13-66
H'0080 15AA CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL10DT4) (C1MSL10DT5) 13-68
H'0080 15AC CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL10DT6) (C1MSL10DT7) 13-70
H'0080 15AE CAN1 Message Slot 10 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL10TSP)
H'0080 15B0 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C1MSL11SID0) (C1MSL11SID1) 13-58
H'0080 15B2 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Extended ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C1MSL11EID0) (C1MSL11EID1) 13-60
H'0080 15B4 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Extended ID 2 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL11EID2) (C1MSL11DLC) 13-62
H'0080 15B6 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL11DT0) (C1MSL11DT1) 13-64
H'0080 15B8 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL11DT2) (C1MSL11DT3) 13-66
H'0080 15BA CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL11DT4) (C1MSL11DT5) 13-68
H'0080 15BC CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL11DT6) (C1MSL11DT7) 13-70
H'0080 15BE CAN1 Message Slot 11 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL11TSP)
H'0080 15C0 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C1MSL12SID0) (C1MSL12SID1) 13-58
3
3-32
ADDRESS SPACE
3.4 Internal RAM and SFR Areas
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
SFR Area Register Map (21/21)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 15C2 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Extended ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C1MSL12EID0) (C1MSL12EID1) 13-60
H'0080 15C4 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Extended ID 2 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL12EID2) (C1MSL12DLC) 13-62
H'0080 15C6 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL12DT0) (C1MSL12DT1) 13-64
H'0080 15C8 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL12DT2) (C1MSL12DT3) 13-66
H'0080 15CA CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL12DT4) (C1MSL12DT5) 13-68
H'0080 15CC CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL12DT6) (C1MSL12DT7) 13-70
H'0080 15CE CAN1 Message Slot 12 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL12TSP)
H'0080 15D0 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C1MSL13SID0) (C1MSL13SID1) 13-58
H'0080 15D2 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Extended ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C1MSL13EID0) (C1MSL13EID1) 13-60
H'0080 15D4 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Extended ID 2 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL13EID2) (C1MSL13DLC) 13-62
H'0080 15D6 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL13DT0) (C1MSL13DT1) 13-64
H'0080 15D8 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL13DT2) (C1MSL13DT3) 13-66
H'0080 15DA CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL13DT4) (C1MSL13DT5) 13-68
H'0080 15DC CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL13DT6) (C1MSL13DT7) 13-70
H'0080 15DE CAN1 Message Slot 13 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL13TSP)
H'0080 15E0 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C1MSL14SID0) (C1MSL14SID1) 13-58
H'0080 15E2 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Extended ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C1MSL14EID0) (C1MSL14EID1) 13-60
H'0080 15E4 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Extended ID 2 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL14EID2) (C1MSL14DLC) 13-62
H'0080 15E6 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL14DT0) (C1MSL14DT1) 13-64
H'0080 15E8 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL14DT2) (C1MSL14DT3) 13-66
H'0080 15EA CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL14DT4) (C1MSL14DT5) 13-68
H'0080 15EC CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL14DT6) (C1MSL14DT7) 13-70
H'0080 15EE CAN1 Message Slot 14 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL14TSP)
H'0080 15F0 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Standard ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Standard ID 1 13-57
(C1MSL15SID0) (C1MSL15SID1) 13-58
H'0080 15F2 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Extended ID 0 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Extended ID 1 13-59
(C1MSL15EID0) (C1MSL15EID1) 13-60
H'0080 15F4 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Extended ID 2 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL15EID2) (C1MSL15DLC) 13-62
H'0080 15F6 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL15DT0) (C1MSL15DT1) 13-64
H'0080 15F8 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL15DT2) (C1MSL15DT3) 13-66
H'0080 15FA CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL15DT4) (C1MSL15DT5) 13-68
H'0080 15FC CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL15DT6) (C1MSL15DT7) 13-70
H'0080 15FE CAN1 Message Slot 15 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL15TSP)
3
3-33
ADDRESS SPACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
3.5 EIT Vector Entry
3.5 EIT Vector Entry
The EIT vector entry is located at the beginning of the internal ROM/extended external areas. The branch instruc-
tion for jumping to the start address of each EIT event processing handler is written here. Note that it is the branch
instruction and not the jump address itself that is written here. For details, see Chapter 4, “EIT.”
H'0000 0040
H'0000 0044
H'0000 0048
H'0000 004C
H'0000 0050
H'0000 0054
H'0000 0058
H'0000 005C
H'0000 0060
H'0000 0064
H'0000 0068
H'0000 006C
H'0000 0070
H'0000 0074
H'0000 0078
H'0000 007C
H'0000 0080
H'0000 0090
H'0000 0030
H'0000 0020
H'0000 0010
H'0000 0000
H'0000 0034
H'0000 0038
H'0000 003C
H'0000 0024
H'0000 0028
H'0000 002C
H'0000 0004
H'0000 0008
H'0000 000C
H'0000 0014
H'0000 0018
H'0000 001C
TRAP0
TRAP1
TRAP2
TRAP3
TRAP4
TRAP5
TRAP6
TRAP7
TRAP8
TRAP9
TRAP10
TRAP11
TRAP12
TRAP13
TRAP14
TRAP15
AE (Address Exception)
EI (External Interrupt) (Note 1)
RI (Reset Interrupt)
SBI (System Break Interrupt)
RIE (Reserved Instruction Exception)
FPE (Floating-Point Exception)
0 31
Note 1: When flash entry bit = 1 (flash E/W enable mode), the EI vector entry is located at H'0080 4000.
Figure 3.5.1 EIT Vector Entry
3
3-34
ADDRESS SPACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
3.6 ICU Vector Table
The ICU vector table is used by the internal interrupt controller of the microcomputer. This table has the addresses
shown below, at which the start addresses of interrupt handlers for the interrupt requests from respective internal
peripheral I/Os are set. For details, see Chapter 5, “Interrupt Controller.”
ICU Vector Table Memory Map (1/2)
Address +0 address +1 address
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0000 0094 TIN3–6 Input Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 0096 TIN3–6 Input Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 0098 TIN20–29 Input Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 009A TIN20–29 Input Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 009C TIN12–19 Input Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 009E TIN12–19 Input Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00A0 TIN0–2 Input Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00A2 TIN0–2 Input Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00A4 (Note 1)
H'0000 00A6
H'0000 00A8 TMS0, 1 Output Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00AA TMS0, 1 Output Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00AC TOP8, 9 Output Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00AE TOP8, 9 Output Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00B0 TOP10 Output Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00B2 TOP10 Output Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00B4 TIO4–7 Output Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00B6 TIO4–7 Output Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00B8 TIO8, 9 Output Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00BA TIO8, 9 Output Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00BC TOP0–5 Output Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00BE TOP0–5 Output Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00C0 TOP6, 7 Output Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00C2 TOP6, 7 Output Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00C4 TIO0–3 Output Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00C6 TIO0–3 Output Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00C8 DMA0–4 Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00CA DMA0–4 Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00CC SIO1 Receive Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00CE SIO1 Receive Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00D0 SIO1 Transmit Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00D2 SIO1 Transmit Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00D4 SIO0 Receive Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00D6 SIO0 Receive Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
3.6 ICU Vector Table
3
3-35
ADDRESS SPACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
3.6 ICU Vector Table
ICU Vector Table Memory Map (2/2)
Address +0 address +1 address
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0000 00D8 SIO0 Transmit Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00DA SIO0 Transmit Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00DC A-D0 Conversion Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00DE A-D0 Conversion Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00E0 (Note 1)
H'0000 00E2
H'0000 00E4 (Note 1)
H'0000 00E6
H'0000 00E8 DMA5–9 Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00EA DMA5–9 Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00EC SIO2, 3 Transmit/receive Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00EE SIO2, 3 Transmit/receive Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00F0 RTD Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 00F2 RTD Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 00F4 (Note 1)
H'0000 00F6
H'0000 00F8 (Note 1)
H'0000 00FA
H'0000 00FC (Note 1)
H'0000 00FE
H'0000 0100 (Note 1)
H'0000 0102
H'0000 0104 (Note 1)
H'0000 0106
H'0000 0108 (Note 1)
H'0000 010A
H'0000 010C CAN0 Transmit/receive & Error Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 010E CAN0 Transmit/receive & Error Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
H'0000 0110 CAN1 Transmit/receive & Error Interrupt Handler Start Address (A0–A15)
H'0000 0112 CAN1 Transmit/receive & Error Interrupt Handler Start Address (A16–A31)
Note 1: Valid for the interrupt requests in the 32180. No interrupt requests are generated in the 32182.
3
3-36
ADDRESS SPACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
3.7 Notes about Address Space
3.7 Notes about Address Space
• Virtual flash emulation function
The microcomputer has the function to map 4-Kbyte memory blocks beginning with the address H’0080 8000
into areas (S banks) of the internal flash memory that are divided in 4-Kbyte units. This functions is referred to as
the virtual flash emulation function.
This function allows the data located in 4-Kbyte blocks of the internal RAM to be changed with the flash memory
contents at the addresses specified by the Virtual Flash Bank Register. For details about this function, see
Section 6.6, “Virtual Flash Emulation Function.”
CHAPTER 4
EIT
4 . 1 Outline of EIT
4. 2 EIT Events
4.3 EIT Processing Procedure
4.4 EIT Processing Mechanism
4.5 Acceptance of EIT Events
4. 6 Saving and Restoring the PC and PSW
4 .7 EIT Vector Entry
4.8 Exception Processing
4.9 Interrupt Processing
4.10 Trap Processing
4.11 EIT Priority Levels
4.12 Example of EIT Processing
4.13 Precautions on EIT
4
4-2
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.1 Outline of EIT
If some event occurs when the CPU is executing an ordinary program, it may become necessary to suspend the
program being executed and execute another program. Events like this one are referred to by a generic name as
EIT (Exception, Interrupt and Trap).
(1) Exception
This is an event related to the context being executed. It is generated by an error or violation during instruction
execution. This type of event includes Address Exception (AE), Reserved Instruction Exception (RIE) and Floating-
Point Exception (FPE).
(2) Interrupt
This is an event generated irrespective of the context being executed. It is generated by a hardware-derived signal
from an external source, as well as by the internal peripheral I/O. This type of event includes Reset Interrupt (RI),
System Break Interrupt (SBI) and External Interrupt (EI).
(3) Trap
This refers to a software interrupt generated by executing a TRAP instruction. This type of event is intentionally
generated in a program as in the OS’s system call by the programmer.
4.1 Outline of EIT
Figure 4.1.1 Classification of EITs
EIT Exception (Exception) Reserved Instruction Exception (RIE)
Address Exception (AE)
Floating-Point Exception (FPE)
Reset Interrupt (RI)
System Break Interrupt (SBI)
External Interrupt (EI)
Trap (TRAP)
Interrupt (Interrupt)
Trap (Trap)
4
4-3
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.2 EIT Events
4.2 EIT Events
4.2.1 Exception
(1) Reserved Instruction Exception (RIE)
Reserved Instruction Exception (RIE) occurs when execution of a reserved instruction (unimplemented
instruction) is detected.
(2) Address Exception (AE)
Address Exception (AE) occurs when an attempt is made to access a misaligned address in Load or Store
instructions.
(3) Floating-point Exception (FPE)
Floating-point Exception (FPE) occurs when Unimplemented Exception (UIPL) or one of the five exceptions
specified in the IEEE 754 standard (OVF/UDF/IXCT/DIV0/IVLD) is detected. Each exception processing is
outlined below.
1) Overflow Exception (OVF)
The exception occurs when the absolute value of the operation result exceeds the largest describable
precision in the floating-point format. The following table shows the operation results when an OVF oc-
curs.
Table 4.2.1 Operation Results When an OVF Occurred
Note 1: When the overflow exception enable (EO) bit (FPSR register bit 20) = "0"
Note 2: When the overflow exception enable (EO) bit (FPSR register bit 20) = "1"
Note: • If an OVF occurs while EIT processing for OVF is masked, an IXCT occurs at the same time.
• +MAX = H’7F7F FFFF, –MAX = H’FF7F FFFF
2) Underflow Exception (UDF)
The exception occurs when the absolute value of the operation result is less than the largest describable
precision in the floating-point format. The following table shows the operation results when a UDF occurs.
Table 4.2.2 Operation Results when a UDF Occurred
Note 1: When the underflow exception enable (EU) bit (FPSR register bit 18) = "0"
Note 2: When the underflow exception enable (EU) bit (FPSR register bit 18) = "1"
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
Sign of the Resul
t
-Infinity
+Infinity
0
Rounding Mode
Nearest
Operation Result (Conten
t
When the OVF E IT pro c essing is
mask ed ( N ote 1)
+MAX
- Infinity
+ Inf init y
-MAX
+MAX
-MAX
+ Inf init y
- Infinity
of t he De st ination Regist er )
W hen t he OVF E IT pr ocessing is
executed (Not e 2)
No change
Oper ation Result ( Con t e n
t
W hen UDF EIT proc essing is masked ( Note 1)
DN = 0: An unimplemented exception occur s
DN = 1: 0 is returned
of the Dest ination Regist er )
When UDF E IT pro c essing is execu ted ( Note 2)
No c hange
4
4-4
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Note 1: When the zero division exception enable (EZ) bit (FPSR register bit 19) = "0"
Note 2: When the zero division exception enable (EZ) bit (FPSR register bit 19) = "1"
Please note that the DIV0 EIT processing does not occur in the following conditions.
Table 4.2.5 Cases in Which No DIV0 Occur
4.2 EIT Events
3) Inexact Exception (IXCT)
The exception occurs when the operation result differs from a result led out with an infinite range of
precision. The following table shows the operation results and the respective conditions in which each
IXCT occurs.
Table 4.2.3 Operation Results when an IXCT Occurred
Note 1: When the inexact exception enable (EX) bit (FPSR register bit 17) = "0"
Note 2: When the inexact exception enable (EX) bit (FPSR register bit 17) = "1"
4) Zero Division Exception (DIV0)
The exception occurs when a finite nonzero value is divided by zero. The following table shows the
operation results when a DIV0 is occurs.
Table 4.2.4 Operation Results When a DIV0 Occurred
Overflow occurs in OVF masked
condition
Rounding occ ur s
Occ ur r ence Condition
Oper ation Result ( Con t e nt o
f
When t h e I XCT EIT pr oc essing for is
masked (Note 1)
Ref er enc e OVF operat ion r esult s
Rounded value
the Dest ination Regist er )
W hen the IXCT E IT pr oc essing i
s
executed (Not e 2)
No change
No change
Nonzero finite value
Dividend
of the Dest ination Regist er )
When t he DIV0 EIT pr oc essing is
exec uted ( Note 2)
No c hange
Oper ation Result ( Con t e n
t
W hen the DI V0 EIT pr oc essing is
masked (Note 1)
+-Infinity (Sign is derived by
exclusive O Ring the signs of t he
divisor and dividend. )
Dividend
0
Infinity
Behav ior
An invalid operation except ion oc c ur s
No exceptions occ ur ( with the result = "Infinity")
4
4-5
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.2 EIT Events
5) Invalid Operation Exception (IVLD)
The exception occurs when an invalid operation is executed. The following table shows the operation
results and the respective conditions in which each IVLD occurs.
Table 4.2.6 Operation Results When an IVLD Occurred
Note 1: When the invalid operation exception enable (EV) bit (FPSR register bit 21) = "0"
Note 2: When the invalid operation exception enable (EV) bit (FPSR register bit 21) = "1"
Note: • NaN (Not a Number)
SNaN (Signaling NaN): a NaN in which the MSB of the decimal fraction is "0". When SNaN is used as the
source operand in an operation, an IVLD occurs. SNaNs are useful in identifying program bugs when used
as the initial value in a variable. However, SNaNs cannot be generated by hardware.
QNaN (Quiet NaN): a NaN in which the MSB of the decimal fraction is "1". Even when QNaN is used as the
source operand in an operation, an IVLD will not occur (excluding comparison and format conversion).
Because a result can be checked by the arithmetic operations, QNaN allows the user to debug without
executing an EIT processing. QNaNs are created by hardware.
6) Unimplemented Exception (UIPL)
The exception occurs when the denormalized number zero flush (DN) bit (FPSR register bit 23) = "0" and
a denormalized number is given as an operation operand. (Note 1)
Because the UIPL has no enable bits available, it cannot be masked when they occur. The destination
register remains unchanged.
Note 1: A UDF occurs when the intermediate result of an operation is a denormalized number, in which case if
the DN bit (FPSR register bit 23) = "0", an UIPL occurs.
4.2.2 Interrupt
(1) Reset Interrupt (RI)
Reset Interrupt (RI) is always accepted by entering the RESET# signal. The reset interrupt is assigned the
highest priority.
For details about the reset interrupt, see Chapter 7, “Reset.”
(2) System Break Interrupt (SBI)
System Break Interrupt (SBI) is an emergency interrupt which is used when power outage is detected or a fault
condition is notified by an external watchdog timer. This interrupt can only be used in cases when after interrupt
processing, control will not return to the program that was being executed when the interrupt occurred.
(3) External Interrupt (EI)
External Interrupt (EI) is requested from internal peripheral I/Os managed by the interrupt controller. The
interrupt controller manages these interrupts by assigning each one of eight priority levels including an
interrupt-disabled state.
W hen an integer conversion
overflowed
W hen FT OI
instruction
was execute
d
W hen NaN or Infinity was converted
in to a n i n te g e r When FTOS
instruction
was execute
d
O ccurrence Condition
O peration for SNaN operand
+Infini ty-(+Infi nity), -In fin it y-(-Infini ty)
0 x I nfinity
0 / 0, I nfinity / Infinity
W hen < or > comparison was performed on NaN
O peration Result (Content of the Destination Register)
W hen the I VLD EI T processing is masked (Note 1) W hen the IVLD EI T
processing is execute
d
(Note 2)
Return value when pre-conversion signed bit is:
"0": H’7FFF FFFF
"1": H’8000 0000
Return value when pre-conversion signed bit is:
"0": H’0000 7FFF
"1": H’F FF F 8000
Comparison results (comparison invalid)
QNaN
No change
4
4-6
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.2.3 Trap
Traps are software interrupts which are generated by executing the TRAP instruction. Sixteen distinct vector
addresses are provided corresponding to TRAP instruction operands 0–15.
4.3 EIT Processing Procedure
EIT processing consists of two parts, one in which they are handled automatically by hardware, and one in which
they are handled by user-created programs (EIT handlers). The procedure for processing EITs when accepted,
except for a rest interrupt, is shown below.
4.2 EIT Events
Figure 4.3.1 Outline of the EIT Processing Procedure
When an EIT is accepted, the CPU branches to the EIT vector after hardware preprocessing (as will be described
later). The EIT vector has an entry address assigned for each EIT. This is where the BRA (branch) instruction for
the EIT handler (not the jump address itself) is written.
In the hardware preprocessing, the PC is transferred to the BPC (backup PC), and the content of the PSW register’s
PSW field is transferred to the BPSW field in that register.
Other necessary operations must be performed in the user-created EIT handler. These include saving the BPC and
PSW registers (including the BPSW field) and the general-purpose registers to be used in the EIT handler to the
stack. In addition, the accumulator and the FPSR register must be saved to the stack as necessary. Remember
that all these registers must be saved to the stack in a program by the user.
When processing by the EIT handler is completed, restore the saved registers from the stack and finally execute
the RTE instruction. Control is thereby returned from the EIT processing to the program that was being executed
when the EIT occurred. (This does not apply to the System Break Interrupt, however.)
In the hardware postprocessing, the BPC is returned to the PC, and the content of the PSW register’s BPSW field
is returned to the PSW field in that register. Note that the values stored in the BPC and the PSW register’s BPSW
field after executing the RTE instruction are undefined.
Instruction
A
PCBPC
PSWBPSW
EIT vector
entry EIT handler except for SBI
RTE
instruction
Program suspended
and EIT request
accepted Instruction
processing-canceled
type (RIE, AE)
Instruction processing-completed
type (FPE, EI, TRAP)
Program execution restarted
EIT request
generated
Hardware preprocessing
BPC, PSW, FPSR
and general-purpose
registers are saved
to the stack
Branch
instruction
General-purpose
registers, PSW, FPSR
and BPC are restored
from the stack
Hardware postprocessing
(SBI) Program terminated
or system is reset
User-created EIT handler
BPSWPSW
BPCPC
Processing
by handler
Note 1: Indicates saving and restoring the PSW register bits between its PSW and BPSW fields.
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
SBI
(System Break
Interrupt processing)
Instruction
BInstruction
CInstruction
CInstruction
D
4
4-7
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.4 EIT Processing Mechanism
The EIT processing mechanism consists of the M32R CPU core and the interrupt controller for internal peripheral I/
Os. It also has the backup registers for the PC and PSW (the BPC register and the BPSW field of the PSW
register). The EIT processing mechanism is shown below.
4.4 EIT Processing Mechanism
Figure 4.4.1 EIT Processing Mechanism
Interrupt
controller
(ICU)
SBI
EI
Internal
peripheral
I/Os
RESET# RI
AE, RIE, FPE, TRAP
IE flag
(PSW)
M32R CPU core
SBI#
Low
High
Priority
SBI
EI
RI
M32R/ECU
PSW register
PSWBPSW
BPC register
PC register
4
4-8
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.5 Acceptance of EIT Events
When an EIT event occurs, the CPU suspends the program it has hitherto been executing and branches to EIT
processing by the relevant handler. Conditions under which each EIT event occurs and the timing at which they are
accepted are shown below.
Table 4.5.1 Acceptance of EIT Events
EIT Event Type of Processing Acceptance Timing Values Set in BPC Register
Reserved Instruction Instruction processing- During instruction execution PC value of the instruction that
Exception (RIE) canceled type generated RIE
Address Exception (AE) Instruction processing- During instruction execution PC value of the instruction that
canceled type generated AE
Floating-Point Exception Instruction processing- Break in instructions PC value of the instruction that
(FPE) completed type generated FPE + 4
Reset Interrupt (RI) Instruction processing- Each machine cycle Undefined value
aborted type
System Break Interrupt Instruction processing- Break in instructions PC value of the next instruction
(SBI) completed type (word boundary only)
External Interrupt (EI) Instruction processing- Break in instructions PC value of the next instruction
completed type (word boundary only)
Trap (TRAP) Instruction processing- Break in instructions PC value of TRAP instruction + 4
completed type
4.6 Saving and Restoring the PC and PSW
The following describes operation of the microcomputer at the time when it accepts an EIT and when it executes the
RTE instruction.
(1) Hardware preprocessing when an EIT is accepted
[1] Save the PSW register’s SM, IE and C bits in its backup field.
BSM SM
BIE IE
BC C
[2] Update the PSW register’s SM, IE and C bits
SM Remains unchanged (RIE, AE, FPE, TRAP) or cleared to "0" (SBI, EI, RI)
IE Cleared to "0"
CCleared to "0"
[3] Save the PC register
BPC PC
[4] Set the vector address in the PC register
Branches to the EIT vector and executes the branch (BRA) instruction written in it, thereby transferring
control to the user-created EIT handler.
(2) Hardware postprocessing when the RTE instruction is executed
[A] Restore the PSW register’s SM, IE and C bits from its backup field.
SM BSM
IE BIE
CBC
[B] Restore the PC register from the BPC register.
PC BPC
Note: • The values stored in the BPC and the PSW register’s BSM, BIE and BC bits after executing the RTE
instruction are undefined.
4.5 Acceptance of EIT Events
4
4-9
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.6 Saving and Restoring the PC and PSW
PSW BPC PC
When EIT is accepted
When RTE instruction
is executed
[1] Saving the SM, IE and C bits
BSM
BIE
BC
SM
IE
C
[2] Updating the SM, IE and C bits
SM
IE
C
Unchanged or 0
0
0
[3] Saving the PC
BPC PC
[4] Setting the vector address in the PC
PC Vector address
[B] Restoring the PC from the BPC register
The value stored in the BPC register
after executing the RTE instruction is
undefined.
[A] Restoring the SM, IE and C bits from the
backup field
SM
IE
C
The values stored in the BSM, BIE
and BC bits after executing the RTE
instruction are undefined.
BSM
BIE
BC
[1]
[A] [B]
[2] [3] [4]
Figure 4.6.1 Saving and Restoring the PC and PSW
16 17 23 24 25 31(LSB)15870(MSB)
SM IE CBCBSM BIE
00000000000000000000000000
PSW
BPSW field PSW field
4
4-10
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.7 EIT Vector Entry
The EIT vector entry is located in the user space beginning with the address H’0000 0000. The table below lists the
EIT vector entry.
Table 4.7.1 EIT Vector Entry
Name Abbreviation Vector Address SM IE BPC
Reset Interrupt RI H'0000 0000 (Note 1) 0 0 Undefined
System Break SBI H'0000 0010 0 0 PC of the next instruction
Interrupt
Reserved Instruction RIE H'0000 0020 Unchanged 0 PC of the instruction that generated RIE
Exception
Address Exception AE H'0000 0030 Unchanged 0 PC of the instruction that generated AE
Trap TRAP0 H'0000 0040 Unchanged 0 PC of TRAP instruction + 4
TRAP1 H'0000 0044 Unchanged 0 PC of TRAP instruction + 4
TRAP2 H'0000 0048 Unchanged 0 PC of TRAP instruction + 4
TRAP3 H'0000 004C Unchanged 0 PC of TRAP instruction + 4
TRAP4 H'0000 0050 Unchanged 0 PC of TRAP instruction + 4
TRAP5 H'0000 0054 Unchanged 0 PC of TRAP instruction + 4
TRAP6 H'0000 0058 Unchanged 0 PC of TRAP instruction + 4
TRAP7 H'0000 005C Unchanged 0 PC of TRAP instruction + 4
TRAP8 H'0000 0060 Unchanged 0 PC of TRAP instruction + 4
TRAP9 H'0000 0064 Unchanged 0 PC of TRAP instruction + 4
TRAP10 H'0000 0068 Unchanged 0 PC of TRAP instruction + 4
TRAP11 H'0000 006C Unchanged 0 PC of TRAP instruction + 4
TRAP12 H'0000 0070 Unchanged 0 PC of TRAP instruction + 4
TRAP13 H'0000 0074 Unchanged 0 PC of TRAP instruction + 4
TRAP14 H'0000 0078 Unchanged 0 PC of TRAP instruction + 4
TRAP15 H'0000 007C Unchanged 0 PC of TRAP instruction + 4
External Interrupt EI H'0000 0080 (Note 2) 0 0 PC of the next instruction
Floating-Point Exception FPE H'0000 0090 Unchanged 0 P C o f the instruction that generated FPE + 4
Note 1: During boot mode, the CPU starts executing the boot program after reset. For details, see Section 6.5,
“Programming the Internal Flash Memory.”
Note 2: During flash E/W enable mode, this vector address is moved to the beginning of the internal RAM (address H’0080
4000). For details, see Section 6.5, “Programming the Internal Flash Memory.”
4.7 EIT Vector Entry
4
4-11
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.8 Exception Processing
4.8 Exception Processing
4.8.1 Reserved Instruction Exception (RIE)
[Occurrence Conditions]
Reserved Instruction Exception (RIE) occurs when a reserved instruction (unimplemented instruction) is
detected. Instruction check is performed on the op-code part of the instruction.
When a reserved instruction exception occurs, the instruction that generated it is not executed. If an exter-
nal interrupt is requested at the same time a reserved instruction exception is detected, it is the reserved
instruction exception that is accepted.
[EIT Processing]
(1) Saving SM, IE and C bits
The PSW register’s SM, IE and C bits are saved to the respective backup bits: BSM, BIE and BC.
BSM SM
BIE IE
BC C
(2) Updating SM, IE and C bits
The PSW register’s SM, IE and C bits are updated as shown below.
SM Unchanged
IE 0
C0
(3) Saving the PC
The PC value of the instruction that generated the reserved instruction exception is set in the BPC register.
For example, if the instruction that generated the reserved instruction exception is at address 4, the value 4
is set in the BPC register. Similarly, if the instruction that generated the reserved instruction exception is at
address 6, the value 6 is set in the BPC register. In this case, the value of the BPC register bit 30 indicates
whether the instruction that generated the reserved instruction exception resides on a word boundary (BPC
register bit 30 = "0") or not on a word boundary (BPC register bit 30 = "1").
However, in either case of the above, the address to which the RTE instruction returns after the EIT handler
has terminated is address 4. (This is because the 2 low-order address bits are cleared to ‘00’ when returned
to the PC.)
Figure 4.8.1 Example of a Return Address for Reserved Instruction Exception (RIE)
H'00
Address
RIE occurred
H'04
H'08
H'0C
+0 +1 +2 +3
H'00
Address
RIE occurred
H'04
H'08
H'0C
+0 +1 +2 +3
Return
address
BPC H'06
BPC H'04
Return
address
4
4-12
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.8 Exception Processing
(4) Branching to the EIT vector entry
The CPU branches to the address H’0000 0020 in the user space. This is the last operation performed in
hardware preprocessing.
(5) Jumping from the EIT vector entry to the user-created handler
The CPU executes the BRA instruction written by the user at the address H’0000 0020 of the EIT vector
entry to jump to the start address of the user-created handler. At the beginning of the user-created EIT
handler, first save the BPC and PSW registers and the necessary general-purpose registers to the stack.
Also, save the accumulator and FPSR register as necessary.
(6) Returning from the EIT handler
At the end of the EIT handler, restore the saved registers from the stack and execute the RTE instruction.
When the RTE instruction is executed, hardware postprocessing is automatically performed. At this time,
the CPU restarts from a word-boundary instruction including the instruction that generated a RIE (see Figure
4.8.1). Except when using reserved instruction exceptions intentionally, occurrence of a reserved instruc-
tion exception suggests that the system has some fatal fault already existing in it. In such a case, therefore,
do not return from the reserved instruction exception handler to the program that was being executed when
the exception occurred.
4.8.2 Address Exception (AE)
[Occurrence Conditions]
Address Exception (AE) occurs when an attempt is made to access a misaligned address in Load or Store
instructions. The following lists the combination of instructions and accessed addresses that may cause
address exceptions to occur.
• Two low-order address bits accessed in the LDH, LDUH or STH instruction are ‘01’ or ‘11’
• Two low-order address bits accessed in the LD, ST, LOCK or UNLOCK instruction are ‘01,’ ‘10’ or ‘11’
When an address exception occurs, memory access by the instruction that generated the exception is not
performed. If an external interrupt is requested at the same time an address exception is detected, it is the
address exception that is accepted.
[EIT Processing]
(1) Saving SM, IE and C bits
The PSW register’s SM, IE and C bits are saved to the respective backup bits: BSM, BIE and BC.
BSM SM
BIE IE
BC C
(2) Updating SM, IE and C bits
The PSW register’s SM, IE and C bits are updated as shown below.
SM Unchanged
IE 0
C0
(3) Saving the PC
The PC value of the instruction that generated the address exception is set in the BPC register. For ex-
ample, if the instruction that generated the address exception is at address 4, the value 4 is set in the BPC
register. Similarly, if the instruction that generated the address exception is at address 6, the value 6 is set
in the BPC register. In this case, the value of the BPC register bit 30 indicates whether the instruction that
generated the reserved instruction exception resides on a word boundary (BPC register bit 30 = "0") or not on
a word boundary (BPC register bit 30 = "1").
However, in either case of the above, the address to which the RTE instruction returns after the EIT handler
has terminated is address 4. (This is because the 2 low-order address bits are cleared to ‘00’ when returned
to the PC.)
4
4-13
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.8 Exception Processing
Figure 4.8.2 Example of a Return Address for Address Exception (AE)
(4) Branching to the EIT vector entry
The CPU branches to the address H’0000 0030 in the user space. This is the last operation performed in
hardware preprocessing.
(5) Jumping from the EIT vector entry to the user-created handler
The CPU executes the BRA instruction written by the user at the address H’0000 0030 of the EIT vector
entry to jump to the start address of the user-created handler. At the beginning of the user-created EIT
handler, first save the BPC and PSW registers and the necessary general-purpose registers to the stack.
Also, save the accumulator and FPSR register as necessary.
(6) Returning from the EIT handler
At the end of the EIT handler, restore the saved registers from the stack and execute the RTE instruction.
When the RTE instruction is executed, hardware postprocessing is automatically performed. At this time,
the CPU restarts from a word-boundary instruction including the instruction that generated an AE (see Figure
4.8.2). Except when using address exceptions intentionally, occurrence of an address exception suggests
that the system has some fatal fault already existing in it. In such a case, therefore, do not return from the
address exception handler to the program that was being executed when the exception occurred.
4.8.3 Floating-Point Exception (FPE)
[Occurrence Conditions]
Floating-Point Exception (FPE) occurs when Unimplemented Exception (UIPL) or one of the five exceptions
specified in IEEE 754 standards (OVF, UDF, IXCT, DIV0 or IVLD) is detected.
Note, however, that the EIT processing described below is executed only when the exception that occurred
is one whose exception enable bit in the FPSR register is set to "1" or an unimplemented exception.
[EIT Processing]
(1) Saving SM, IE and C bits
The PSW register’s SM, IE and C bits are saved to the respective backup bits: BSM, BIE and BC.
BSM SM
BIE IE
BC C
(2) Updating SM, IE and C bits
The PSW register’s SM, IE and C bits are updated as shown below.
SM Unchanged
IE 0
C0
H'00
Address
AE occurred
H'04
H'08
H'0C
+0 +1 +2 +3
H'00
Address
AE occurred
H'04
H'08
H'0C
+0 +1 +2 +3
BPC H'06
BPC H'04
Return
address Return
address
4
4-14
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
(3) Saving the PC
The PC value of the instruction that generated the FPE exception + 4 is set in the BPC register.
Because all of the instructions that generate an FPE exception are 32 bits long, the address to which the
RTE returns is always the instruction next to the one that generated the FPE exception.
(4) Branching to the EIT vector entry
The CPU branches to the address H’0000 0090 in the user space. This is the last operation performed in
hardware preprocessing.
(5) Jumping from the EIT vector entry to the user-created handler
The CPU executes the BRA instruction written by the user at the address H’0000 0090 of the EIT vector
entry to jump to the start address of the user-created handler. At the beginning of the user-created EIT
handler, first save the BPC, PSW and FPSR registers and the necessary general-purpose registers to the
stack.
(6) Returning from the EIT handler
At the end of the EIT handler, restore the saved registers from the stack and execute the RTE instruction.
When the RTE instruction is executed, hardware postprocessing is automatically performed.
4.8 Exception Processing
4
4-15
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.9 Interrupt Processing
4.9 Interrupt Processing
4.9.1 Reset Interrupt (RI)
[Occurrence Conditions]
A reset interrupt is accepted in machine cycle by pulling the RESET# input signal low. The reset interrupt is
assigned the highest priority among all EITs.
[EIT Processing]
(1) Initializing SM, IE and C bits
The PSW register’s SM, IE and C bits are initialized as shown below.
SM 0
IE 0
C0
For the reset interrupt, the values of BSM, BIE and BC bits are undefined.
(2) Branching to the EIT vector entry
The CPU branches to the address H’0000 0000 in the user space. However, when operating in boot mode,
the CPU jumps to the boot program. For details, see Section 6.5, “Programming the Internal Flash Memory.”
(3) Jumping from the EIT vector entry to the user program
The CPU executes the instruction written by the user at the address H’0000 0000 of the EIT vector entry. In
the reset vector entry, be sure to initialize the PSW and SPI registers before jumping to the start address of
the user program.
4.9.2 System Break Interrupt (SBI)
System Break Interrupt (SBI) is an emergency interrupt which is used when power outage is detected or a fault
condition is notified by an external watchdog timer. The system break interrupt cannot be masked by the PSW
register IE bit.
Therefore, the system break interrupt can only be used when the system has some fatal event already existing in
it when the interrupt is detected. Also, this interrupt must be used on condition that after processing by the SBI
handler, control will not return to the program that was being executed when the system break interrupt occurred.
[Occurrence Conditions]
A system break interrupt is accepted by a falling edge on SBI# input pin. (The system break interrupt cannot
be masked by the PSW register IE bit.)
In no case will a system break interrupt be activated immediately after executing a 16-bit instruction that
starts from a word boundary. (For 16-bit branch instructions, however, the interrupt is accepted immediately
after branching.) Note also that because of the instruction processing-completed type, a system break
interrupt is accepted after the instruction is completed.
4
4-16
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.9 Interrupt Processing
16-bit instruction
Order in which instructions are executed
32-bit instruction
Address 1000 Address 1002 Address 1004 Address 1008
Interrupt may
be accepted
×
Interrupt cannot
be accepted
16-bit instruction
Interrupt may
be accepted
Interrupt may
be accepted
Figure 4.9.1 Timing at Which System Break Interrupt (SBI) is Accepted
[EIT Processing]
(1) Saving SM, IE and C bits
The PSW register’s SM, IE and C bits are saved to the respective backup bits: BSM, BIE and BC.
BSM SM
BIE IE
BC C
(2) Updating SM, IE and C bits
The PSW register’s SM, IE and C bits are updated as shown below.
SM 0
IE 0
C0
(3) Saving the PC
The address of the next instruction (always on word boundary) following one in which the interrupt was
detected is stored in the BPC register. If the interrupt was detected in a branch instruction, then the next
instruction is one that exists at the jump address.
(4) Branching to the EIT vector entry
The CPU branches to the address H’0000 0010 in the user space. This is the last operation performed in
hardware preprocessing.
(5) Jumping from the EIT vector entry to the user-created handler
The CPU executes the BRA instruction written by the user at the address H’0000 0010 of the EIT vector
entry to jump to the start address of the user-created handler.
The system break interrupt can only be used when the system has some fatal event already existing in it
when the interrupt is detected. Also, this interrupt must be used on condition that after processing by the
SBI handler, control will not return to the program that was being executed when the system break interrupt
occurred.
4
4-17
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 4.9.2 Timing at Which External Interrupt (EI) is Accepted
[EIT Processing]
(1) Saving SM, IE and C bits
The PSW register’s SM, IE and C bits are saved to the respective backup bits: BSM, BIE and BC.
BSM SM
BIE IE
BC C
(2) Updating SM, IE and C bits
The PSW register’s SM, IE and C bits are updated as shown below.
SM 0
IE 0
C0
(3) Saving the PC
The content of the PC register (always on word boundary) is saved to the BPC register.
(4) Branching to the EIT vector entry
The CPU branches to the address H’0000 0080 in the user space. However, when operating in flash E/W enable
mode, the CPU goes to the beginning of the internal RAM (address H’0080 4000). (For details, see Section 6.5,
“Programming the Internal Flash Memory.”) This is the last operation performed in hardware preprocessing.
(5) Jumping from the EIT vector entry to the user-created handler
The CPU executes the BRA instruction written by the user at the address H’0000 0080 of the EIT vector
entry to jump to the start address of the user-created handler. At the beginning of the user-created EIT
handler, first save the BPC and PSW registers and the necessary general-purpose registers to the stack.
Also, save the accumulator and FPSR register as necessary.
4.9.3 External Interrupt (EI)
An external interrupt is generated upon an interrupt request which is output by the microcomputer’s internal
interrupt controller. The interrupt controller manages interrupt requests by assigning each one of seven priority
levels. For details, see Chapter 5, “Interrupt Controller.” For details about the interrupt request sources, see each
section in which the relevant internal peripheral I/O is described.
[Occurrence Conditions]
External interrupts are managed based on interrupt requests from each internal peripheral I/O by the
microcomputer’s internal interrupt controller, and are sent to the CPU via the interrupt controller. The CPU checks
these interrupt requests at a break in instructions residing on word boundaries, and when an interrupt request is
detected and the PSW register IE flag = "1", accepts it as an external interrupt.
In no case will an external interrupt be activated immediately after executing a 16-bit instruction that starts from
a word boundary. (For 16-bit branch instructions, however, the interrupt is accepted immediately after branching.)
4.9 Interrupt Processing
16-bit instruction
Order in which instructions are executed
32-bit instruction
Address 1000 Address 1002 Address 1004 Address 1008
Interrupt may
be accepted
×
Interrupt cannot
be accepted
16-bit instruction
Interrupt may
be accepted Interrupt may
be accepted
4
4-18
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.9 Interrupt Processing
(6) Returning from the EIT handler
At the end of the EIT handler, restore the saved registers from the stack and execute the RTE instruction.
When the RTE instruction is executed, hardware postprocessing is automatically performed.
4.10 Trap Processing
4.10.1 Trap
[Occurrence Conditions]
Traps are software interrupts which are generated by executing the TRAP instruction. Sixteen traps are
generated, each corresponding to one of TRAP instruction operands 0–15. Accordingly, sixteen vector
entries are provided.
[EIT Processing]
(1) Saving SM, IE and C bits
The PSW register’s SM, IE and C bits are saved to the respective backup bits: BSM, BIE and BC.
BSM SM
BIE IE
BC C
(2) Updating SM, IE and C bits
The PSW register’s SM, IE and C bits are updated as shown below.
SM Unchanged
IE 0
C0
(3) Saving the PC
When the trap instruction is executed, the PC value of TRAP instruction + 4 is set in the BPC register. For
example, if the TRAP instruction is located at address 4, the value H’08 is set in the BPC register.
Similarly, if the TRAP instruction is located at address 6, the value H’0A is set in the BPC register. The
value of the BPC register bit 30 indicates whether the trap instruction resides on a word boundary (BPC
register bit 30 = "0") or not on a word boundary (BPC register bit 30 = "1").
However, in either case of the above, the address to which the RTE instruction returns after the EIT
handler has terminated is address 8. (This is because the 2 low-order address bits are cleared to ‘00’
when returned to the PC.)
Figure 4.10.1 Example of a Return Address for Trap (TRAP)
H'00
Address
H'04
H'08
H'0C
+0 +1 +2 +3
H'00
Address
H'04
H'08
H'0C
+0 +1 +2 +3
BPC H'0A
BPC H'08
TRAP instruction
Return
address Return
address
TRAP instruction
4
4-19
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.10 Trap Processing
(4) Branching to the EIT vector entry
The CPU branches to the addresses H’0000 0040–H’0000 007C in the user space. This is the last operation
performed in hardware preprocessing.
(5) Jumping from the EIT vector entry to the user-created handler
The CPU executes the BRA instruction written by the user at the addresses H’0000 0040–H’0000 007C of
the EIT vector entry to jump to the start address of the user-created handler. At the beginning of the user-
created EIT handler, first save the BPC and PSW registers and the necessary general-purpose registers to
the stack. Also, save the accumulator and FPSR register as necessary.
(6) Returning from the EIT handler
At the end of the EIT handler, restore the general-purpose registers and the BPC and PSW registers from
the stack and execute the RTE instruction. When the RTE instruction is executed, hardware postprocessing
is automatically performed. At this time, the CPU restarts from the next word-boundary instruction including
the instruction that generates a trap (see Figure 4.10.1).
4.11 EIT Priority Levels
The table below lists the priority levels of EIT events. When two or more EITs occur simultaneously, the event with
the highest priority is accepted first.
Table 4.11.1 Priority of EIT Events and How Returned from EIT
Priority EIT Event Type of Processing Values Set in BPC Register
1 (Highest) Reset Interrupt (RI) Instruction processing-aborted type Undefined
2 Address Exception (AE) Instruction processing-canceled type PC of the instruction that
generated AE
Reserved Instruction Instruction processing-canceled type PC of the instruction that
Exception (RIE) generated RIE
Floating-Point Exception Instruction processing-completed type PC of the instruction that
(FPE) generated FPE + 4
Trap (TRAP) Instruction processing-completed type TRAP instruction + 4
3 System Break Interrupt Instruction processing-completed type PC of the next instruction
(SBI)
4 External Interrupt (EI) Instruction processing-completed type PC of the next instruction
Note that for External Interrupt (EI), the priority levels of interrupt requests from each peripheral I/O are set by the
microcomputer’s internal interrupt controller. For details, see Chapter 5, “Interrupt Controller.”
4
4-20
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.12 Example of EIT Processing
4.12 Example of EIT Processing
(1) When RIE, AE, FPE, SBI, EI or TRAP occurs singly
Figure 4.12.1 Processing of Events When RIE, AE, FPE, SBI, EI or TRAP Occurs Singly
(2) When RIE, AE, FPE or TRAP and EI occur simultaneously
Figure 4.12.2 Processing of Events When RIE, AE, FPE or TRAP and EI Occur Simultaneously
R TE instruction
IE = 0
RIE, AE, FPE or TRAP is accepted first.
BPC register = Return address A
IE = 1
RIE, AE, FPE or TRAP and EI
occur simultaneously
Return address A:
IE = 1
IE = 0
IE = 1
R TE instruction
: EIT handler
EI is accepted ne xt.
BPC register = Return address A
R TE instruction
IE = 0
IE = 1
BPC register = Return address A
IE = 1
RIE, AE, FPE, SBI, EI or TRAP
occurs singly
Return address A:
If IE = 0, no e vents but reset and
SBI are accepted.
: EIT handler
4
4-21
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.12 Example of EIT Processing
Figure 4.12.3 Example of EIT Processing
BRA instruction
RTE
EIT handler
EIT vector entry
Program being
executed
Save BPC to the stack
Save PSW to the stack
Save general-purpose
registers to the stack
Processing by
EIT handler
Restore general-purpose
registers from the stack
Restore PSW from the stack
Restore BPC from the stack
EIT event
occurs
(SBI)
System Break Interrupt
(SBI) processing
Program terminated
or system reset
(Other than SBI)
PCBPC
PSWBPSW
Hardware
preprocessing
Hardware
postprocessing BPSWPSW
BPCPC
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
Note 1: Indicates saving and restoring the PSW register bits between its PSW and BPSW fields.
4
4-22
EIT
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4.13 Precautions on EIT
4.13 Precautions on EIT
The Address Exception (AE) requires caution because if one of the instructions that use “register indirect + register
update” addressing mode (following three) generates an address exception when it is executed, the values of the
registers to be automatically updated (Rsrc and Rsrc2) become undefined.
Except that the values of Rsrc and Rsrc2 become undefined, these instructions behave the same way as when
used in other addressing modes.
Applicable instructions
L D Rdest, @Rsrc+
ST Rsrc1, @-Rsrc2
ST Rsrc1, @+Rsrc2
If the above case applies, consider the fact that the register values become undefined when you design the processing
to be performed after executing said instructions. (If an address exception occurs, it means that the system has some
fatal fault already existing in it. Therefore, address exceptions must be used on condition that control will not be returned
from the address exception handler to the program that was being executed when the exception occurred.)
CHAPTER 5
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
5.1 Outline of the Interrupt Controller
5.2 ICU Related Registers
5.3 Interrupt Request Sources in Internal
Peripheral I/O
5.4 ICU Vector Table
5.5 Description of Interrupt Operation
5.6 Description of System Break Interrupt (SBI)
Operation
5
5-2
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
5.1 Outline of the Interrupt Controller
The Interrupt Controller (ICU) manages maskable interrupts from internal peripheral I/Os and a system break
interrupt (SBI). The maskable interrupts from internal peripheral I/Os are sent to the M32R CPU as external
interrupts (EI).
The maskable interrupts from internal peripheral I/Os are managed by assigning them one of eight priority levels
including an interrupt-disabled state. If two or more interrupt requests with the same priority level occur at the
same time, their priorities are resolved by predetermined hardware priority. The source of an interrupt request
generated in internal peripheral I/Os is identified by reading the relevant interrupt status register provided for
internal peripheral I/Os.
On the other hand, the system break interrupt (SBI) is recognized when a low-going transition occurs on the SBI#
signal input pin. This interrupt is used for emergency purposes such as when power outage is detected or a fault
condition is notified by an external watchdog timer, so that it is always accepted irrespective of the PSW register
IE bit status. After processing of an SBI, shut down or reset the system without returning to the program that was
being executed when the interrupt occurred.
Specifications of the Interrupt Controller are outlined below.
Table 5.1.1 Outline of the Interrupt Controller (ICU)
Item Specification
Interrupt request source Maskable interrupt requests from internal peripheral I/Os: 23 sources (Note 1)
System break interrupt request: 1 source (input from SBI# pin)
Priority management 8 priority levels including an interrupt-disabled state
(However, interrupts with the same priority level have their priorities resolved by fixed
hardware priority.)
Note 1: There are actually a total of 123 interrupt request resources when counted individually, which are grouped into 23
interrupt request resources.
5.1 Outline of the Interrupt Controller
5
5-3
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Interrupt V ector Register
(IVECT)
Interrupt Request Mask
Register (IMASK)
NEW_IMASK
External Interrupt (EI)
request generated
(maskable)
IMASK
compari-
son
ILEVEL
System Break Interrupt (SBI)
request generated
(nonmaskable)
SBI#
EI
SBI
Interrupt Controller
Interrupt Control Register
SBI Control Register
(SBICR) SBIREQ
IREQ
IREQ
IREQ
IREQ
IREQ
IREQ
Peripheral circuits
Edge
Interrupt
control circuit
Edge
Edge
Level
Interrupt request
Interrupt request
Interrupt request
Level
Level
To the CPU core
To the CPU core
Interrupt
control circuit
Interrupt
control circuit
Priority resolved by interrupt priority levels set
Priority resolved by fixed hardware priority
Figure 5.1.1 Block Diagram of the Interrupt Controller
5.1 Outline of the Interrupt Controller
5
5-4
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
5.2 ICU Related Registers
5.2 ICU Related Registers
The diagram below shows a register map associated with the Interrupt Controller (ICU).
ICU Related Register Map
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 0000 Interrupt Vector Register 5-5
(IVECT)
H'0080 0002 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0004 Interrupt Request Mask Register (Use inhibited area) 5-6
(IMASK)
H'0080 0006 SBI Control Register (Use inhibited area) 5-7
(SBICR) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0060 CAN0 Transmit/Receive & Error Interrupt Control Register (Use inhibited area) 5-8
(ICAN0CR) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0066 (Use inhibited area) RTD Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(IRTDCR)
H'0080 0068 SIO2,3 Transmit/Receive Interrupt Control Register DMA5–9 Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ISIO23CR) (IDMA59CR)
H'0080 006A (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 006C A-D0 Conversion Interrupt Control Register SIO0 Transmit Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(IAD0CCR) (ISIO0TXCR)
H'0080 006E SIO0 Receive Interrupt Control Register SIO1 Transmit Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ISIO0RXCR) (ISIO1TXCR)
H'0080 0070 SIO1 Receive Interrupt Control Register DMA0–4 Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ISIO1RXCR) (IDMA04CR)
H'0080 0072 TIO0–3 Output Interrupt Control Register TOP6,7 Output Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ITIO03CR) (ITOP67CR)
H'0080 0074 TOP0–5 Output Interrupt Control Register TIO8,9 Output Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ITOP05CR) (ITIO89CR)
H'0080 0076 TIO4–7 Output Interrupt Control Register TOP10 Output Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ITIO47CR) (ITOP10CR)
H'0080 0078 TOP8,9 Output Interrupt Control Register TMS0,1 Output Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ITOP89CR) (ITMS01CR)
H'0080 007A (Use inhibited area) TIN0–2 Input Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ITIN02CR)
H'0080 007C TIN12–19 Input Interrupt Control Register TIN20–29 Input Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ITIN1219CR) (ITIN2029CR)
H'0080 007E TIN3–6 Input Interrupt Control Register CAN1 Transmit/Receive & Error Interrupt Control Register 5-8
(ITIN36CR) (ICAN1CR)
|
|
5
5-5
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
5.2 ICU Related Registers
5.2.1 Interrupt Vector Register
Interrupt Vector Register (IVECT) <Address: H’0080 0000>
b01234567891011121314b15
IVECT
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0-15 IVECT When an interrupt request is accepted, the 16-low-order R N
16 low-order bits of ICU vector table address bits of the ICU vector table address for the accepted
interrupt request source are stored in this register.
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords (2 bytes). (This is a read-only register.)
The Interrupt Vector Register (IVECT) is used when an interrupt request is accepted to store the 16-low-order
bits of the ICU vector table address for the accepted interrupt request source.
Before this function can work, the ICU vector table (addresses H’0000 0094 through H’0000 0113) must have
set in it the start addresses of interrupt handlers for each internal peripheral I/O. When an interrupt request is
accepted, the 16-low-order bits of the ICU vector table address for the accepted interrupt request source are
stored in the IVECT register. In the EIT handler, read the content of this IVECT register using the LDH instruction
to get the ICU vector table address.
When the IVECT register is read, operations (1) to (4) below are automatically performed in hardware.
(1) The interrupt priority level of the accepted interrupt request source (ILEVEL) is set in the IMASK register as
a new IMASK value. (Interrupts with lower priority levels than that of the accepted interrupt request source
are masked.)
(2) The interrupt request bit for the accepted interrupt request source is cleared (not cleared for level-recognized
interrupt request sources).
(3) The interrupt request (EI) to the CPU core is deasserted.
(4) The ICU’s internal sequencer is activated to start internal processing (interrupt priority resolution).
Notes: • Do not read the Interrupt Vector Register (IVECT) in the EIT handler unless interrupts are disabled
(PSW register IE bit = "0"). In the EIT handler, furthermore, read the Interrupt Request Mask
Register (IMASK) first before reading the IVECT register.
• To reenable interrupts (by setting the IE bit to "1") after reading the Interrupt Vector Register
(IVECT), perform a dummy access to the internal memory, etc. before reenabling interrupts. (The
ICU vector table readout in the EI handler processing example in Figure 5.5.2 Typical Handler
Operation for Interrupts from Internal Peripheral I/O is an access to the internal ROM and, there-
fore, does not require adding a dummy access.)
5
5-6
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
5.2 ICU Related Registers
5.2.2 Interrupt Request Mask Register
Interrupt Request Mask Register (IMASK) <Address: H’0080 0004>
123456b7b0 IMASK
111
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’07>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–4 No function assigned. Fix to "0" 00
5–7 IMASK 000: Disable maskable interrupts R W
Interrupt request mask bit 001: Accept interrupts with priority level 0
010: Accept interrupts with priority levels 0–1
011: Accept interrupts with priority levels 0–2
100: Accept interrupts with priority levels 0–3
101: Accept interrupts with priority levels 0–4
110: Accept interrupts with priority levels 0–5
111: Accept interrupts with priority levels 0–6
The Interrupt Request Mask Register (IMASK) is used to finally determine whether or not to accept an interrupt
request after comparing its priority with the priority levels (Interrupt Control Register ILEVEL bits) that have been
set for each interrupt request source.
When the Interrupt Vector Register (IVECT) described above is read, the interrupt priority level of the accepted
interrupt request source is set in this IMASK register as a new mask value.
When any value is written to the IMASK register, operations (1) to (2) below are automatically performed in
hardware.
(1) The interrupt request (EI) to the CPU core is deasserted.
(2) The ICU’s internal sequencer is activated to start internal processing (interrupt priority resolution).
Notes: • Do not write to the Interrupt Request Mask Register (IMASK) in the EIT handler unless interrupts
are disabled (PSW register IE bit = "0").
• To reenable interrupts (by setting the IE bit to "1") after writing to the Interrupt Request Mask
Register (IMASK), perform a dummy access to the internal memory, etc. before reenabling inter-
rupts.
5
5-7
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
5.2 ICU Related Registers
5.2.3 SBI (System Break Interrupt) Control Register
SBI (System Break Interrupt) Control Register (SBICR) <Address: H’0080 0006>
123456b7b0 SBIREQ
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–6 No function assigned. Fix to "0" 00
7 SBIREQ 0: SBI not requested R(Note 1)
SBI request bit 1: SBI requested
Note 1: This bit can only be cleared (see below)
The System Break Interrupt (SBI) is an interrupt request generated by a falling edge on the SBI# signal input pin.
When a falling edge on the SBI# signal input pin is detected and this bit is set to "1", a system break interrupt
(SBI) request is generated to the CPU.
This bit cannot be set to "1" in software, it can only be cleared.
To clear this bit to "0", follow the procedure described below.
1. Write "1" to the SBI request bit.
2. Write "0" to the SBI request bit.
Note: • Unless this bit is set to "1", do not perform the above clearing operation.
5
5-8
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
5.2 ICU Related Registers
5.2.4 Interrupt Control Registers
CAN0 Transmit/Receive & Error Interrupt Control Register (ICAN0CR) <Address: H’0080 0060>
RTD Interrupt Control Register (IRTDCR) <Address: H’0080 0067>
SIO2,3 Transmit/Receive Interrupt Control Register (ISIO23CR) <Address: H’0080 0068>
DMA5–9 Interrupt Control Register (IDMA59CR) <Address: H’0080 0069>
A-D0 Conversion Interrupt Control Register (IAD0CCR) <Address: H’0080 006C>
SIO0 Transmit Interrupt Control Register (ISIO0TXCR) <Address: H’0080 006D>
SIO0 Receive Interrupt Control Register (ISIO0RXCR) <Address: H’0080 006E>
SIO1 Transmit Interrupt Control Register (ISIO1TXCR) <Address: H’0080 006F>
SIO1 Receive Interrupt Control Register (ISIO1RXCR) <Address: H’0080 0070>
DMA0–4 Interrupt Control Register (IDMA04CR) <Address: H’0080 0071>
TIO0–3 Output Interrupt Control Register (ITIO03CR) <Address: H’0080 0072>
TOP6,7 Output Interrupt Control Register (ITOP67CR) <Address: H’0080 0073>
TOP0–5 Output Interrupt Control Register (ITOP05CR) <Address: H’0080 0074>
TIO8,9 Output Interrupt Control Register (ITIO89CR) <Address: H’0080 0075>
TIO4–7 Output Interrupt Control Register (ITIO47CR) <Address: H’0080 0076>
TOP10 Output Interrupt Control Register (ITOP10CR) <Address: H’0080 0077>
TOP8,9 Output Interrupt Control Register (ITOP89CR) <Address: H’0080 0078>
TMS0,1 Output Interrupt Control Register (ITMS01CR) <Address: H’0080 0079>
TIN0–2 Input Interrupt Control Register (ITIN02CR) <Address: H’0080 007B>
TIN12–19 Input Interrupt Control Register (ITIN1219CR) <Address: H’0080 007C>
TIN20–29 Input Interrupt Control Register (ITIN2029CR) <Address: H’0080 007D>
TIN3–6 Input Interrupt Control Register (ITIN36CR) <Address: H’0080 007E>
CAN1 Transmit/Receive & Error Interrupt Control Register (ICAN1CR) <Address: H’0080 007F>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15)(b8 123456b7b0
ILEVELIRE
Q
0
111
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’07>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–2 No function assigned. Fix to "0" 00
(8–10)
3 IREQ <When edge recognized> R W
(11) Interrupt request bit At read
0: Interrupt not requested
1: Interrupt requested
At write
0: Clear interrupt request
1: Generate interrupt request
<When level-recognized> R 0
At read
0: Interrupt not requested
1: Interrupt requested
4 No function assigned. Fix to "0" 00
(12)
5–7 ILEVEL 000: Interrupt priority level 0 R W
(13–15) Interrupt priority level bits 001: Interrupt priority level 1
010: Interrupt priority level 2
011: Interrupt priority level 3
100: Interrupt priority level 4
101: Interrupt priority level 5
110: Interrupt priority level 6
111: Interrupt priority level 7 (interrupt disabled)
5
5-9
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
5.2 ICU Related Registers
(1) IREQ (Interrupt Request) bit (Bit 3 or 11)
When an interrupt request from some internal peripheral I/O occurs, the corresponding IREQ (Interrupt Re-
quest) bit is set to "1".
This bit can be set and cleared in software for only edge-recognized interrupt request sources (and not for
level-recognized interrupt request sources). Also, when this bit is set by an edge-recognized interrupt re-
quest generated, it is automatically cleared to "0" by reading the Interrupt Vector Register (IVECT) (not
cleared in the case of level-recognized interrupt request).
If the IREQ bit is cleared in software at the same time it is set by an interrupt request generated, clearing in
software has priority. Also, if the IREQ bit is cleared by reading the Interrupt Vector Register (IVECT) at the
same time it is set by an interrupt request generated, clearing by a read of the IVECT register has priority.
Note: • External Interrupt (EI) to the CPU core is not deasserted by clearing the IREQ bit. External
Interrupt (EI) to the CPU core can only be deasserted by the following operation:
(1) Reset
(2) IVECT register read
(3) Write to the IMASK register
Figure 5.2.1 Configuration of the Interrupt Control Register (Edge-recognized Type)
Interrupt request from
each internal peripheral I/O
Interrupt enabled
ILEVEL
(levels 0-7)
Data bus
Bits 5-7 or bits 13-15
3
F/F
Set
Set/clear
IREQ
Interrupt priority
resolving circuit F/F
Reset
IVECT read
IMASK write
Clear
To the CPU core
Bit 3 or 11
Set EI
Interrupt request from each
group internal peripheral I/O
Interrupt enabled
b3, b11
Data bus
b5-b7, b13-b15
Read
3
IREQ
Read-only circuit
ILEVEL
(levels 0-7)
Group interrupt
Interrupt priority
resolving circuit F/F
Clear
To the CPU core
Set EI
Reset
IVECT read
IMASK write
Figure 5.2.2 Configuration of the Interrupt Control Register (Level-recognized Type)
5
5-10
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
5.2 ICU Related Registers
(2) ILEVEL (Interrupt Priority Level) (Bits 5–7 or bits 13–15)
These bits set the priority levels of interrupt requests from each internal peripheral I/O. Set these bits to ‘111’
to disable or any value ‘000’ through ‘110’ to enable the interrupt from some internal peripheral I/O.
When an interrupt occurs, the Interrupt Controller resolves priority between this interrupt and other interrupt
sources based on ILEVEL settings and finally compares priority with the IMASK value to determine whether
to forward an EI request to the CPU or keep the interrupt request pending.
The table below shows the relationship between ILEVEL settings and the IMASK values at which interrupts
are accepted.
Table 5.2.1 ILEVEL Settings and Accepted IMASK Values
ILEVEL values set IMASK values at which interrupts are accepted
0 (ILEVEL = "000") Accepted when IMASK is 1–7
1 (ILEVEL = "001") Accepted when IMASK is 2–7
2 (ILEVEL = "010") Accepted when IMASK is 3–7
3 (ILEVEL = "011") Accepted when IMASK is 4–7
4 (ILEVEL = "100") Accepted when IMASK is 5–7
5 (ILEVEL = "101") Accepted when IMASK is 6–7
6 (ILEVEL = "110") Accepted when IMASK is 7
7 (ILEVEL = "111") Not accepted (interrupts disabled)
5
5-11
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
5.3 Interrupt Request Sources in Internal Peripheral I/O
The Interrupt Controller receives as inputs the interrupt requests from MJT (multijunction timer), DMAC, serial I/O,
A-D converter, RTD and CAN. For details about these interrupts, see each section in which the relevant internal
peripheral I/O is described.
Table 5.3.1 Interrupt Request Sources in Internal Peripheral I/O
Interrupt Request Sources Contents Number of ICU Type of Input
Input Sources Source ( Note 1)
TIN3–6 input interrupt request TIN3 input 1 Level-recognized
TIN20–29 input interrupt request TIN20–TIN23 inputs 4 Level-recognized
TIN12–19 input interrupt request TIN16–TIN19 inputs 4 Level-recognized
TIN0–2 input interrupt request TIN0 input 1 Level-recognized
TMS0,1 output interrupt request TMS0, TMS1 output 2 Level-recognized
TOP8,9 output interrupt request TOP8, TOP9 output 2 Level-recognized
TOP10 output interrupt request TOP10 output 1 Edge-recognized
TIO4–7 output interrupt request TIO4–TIO7 outputs 4 Level-recognized
TIO8,9 output interrupt request TIO8, TIO9 outputs 2 Level-recognized
TOP0–5 output interrupt request TOP0–TOP5 outputs 6 Level-recognized
TOP6,7 output interrupt request TOP6–TOP7 outputs 2 Level-recognized
TIO0–3 output interrupt request TIO0–TIO3 outputs 4 Level-recognized
DMA0-4 interrupt request DMA0–4 transfer completed 5 Level-recognized
SIO1 receive interrupt request SIO1 reception-completed or receive error interrupt 1 Edge-recognized
SIO1 transmit interrupt request SIO1 transmission-completed or transmit buffer empty 1 Edge-recognized
interrupt
SIO0 receive interrupt request SIO0 reception-completed or receive error interrupt 1 Edge-recognized
SIO0 transmit interrupt request SIO0 transmission-completed or transmit buffer empty 1 Edge-recognized
interrupt
A-D0 conversion interrupt request A-D0 converter’s scan mode one-shot operation, 1 Edge-recognized
single mode or comparate mode completed
DMA5–9 interrupt request DMA5–9 transfer completed 5 Level-recognized
SIO2,3 transmit/receive interrupt SIO2,3 reception-completed or receive error interrupt, 4 Level-recognized
request transmission-completed or transmit buffer empty interrupt
RTD interrupt request RTD interrupt generation command 1 Edge-recognized
CAN0 transmit/receive & error CAN0 transmission or reception completed, CAN0 error 35 Level-recognized
interrupt request passive, CAN0 error bus-off, CAN0 bus error, single shot
CAN1 transmit/receive & error CAN1 transmission or reception completed, CAN1 error 35 Level-recognized
interrupt request passive, CAN1 error bus-off, CAN1 bus error, single shot
Note 1: ICU type of input source
• Edge-recognized: Interrupt requests are generated on a falling edge of the interrupt signal supplied to the ICU.
• Level-recognized: Interrupt requests are generated when the interrupt signal supplied to the ICU is held low. For
this type of interrupt, the ICU’s Interrupt Control Register IRQ bit cannot be set or cleared in software.
5.3 Interrupt Request Sources in Internal Peripheral I/O
5
5-12
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
5.4 ICU Vector Table
5.4 ICU Vector Table
The ICU vector table is used to set the start addresses of interrupt handlers for each internal peripheral I/O. The
32-source interrupt requests (of these, 23 sources are used in the 32182) are assigned the following vector table
addresses.
Table 5.4.1 ICU Vector Table Addresses
Interrupt Request Source ICU Vector Table Addresses
TIN3–6 input interrupt request H'0000 0094 H'0000 0097
TIN20–23 input interrupt request H'0000 0098 H'0000 009B
TIN12–19 input interrupt request H'0000 009C H'0000 009F
TIN0–2 input interrupt request H'0000 00A0 H'0000 00A3
(Note 1) H'0000 00A4 H'0000 00A7
TMS0,1 output interrupt request H'0000 00A8 H'0000 00AB
TOP8,9 output interrupt request H'0000 00AC H'0000 00AF
TOP10 output interrupt request H'0000 00B0 H'0000 00B3
TIO4–7 output interrupt request H'0000 00B4 H'0000 00B7
TIO8,9 output interrupt request H'0000 00B8 H'0000 00BB
TOP0–5 output interrupt request H'0000 00BC H'0000 00BF
TOP6,7 output interrupt request H'0000 00C0 H'0000 00C3
TIO0–3 output interrupt request H'0000 00C4 H'0000 00C7
DMA0–4 interrupt request H'0000 00C8 H'0000 00CB
SIO1 receive interrupt request H'0000 00CC H'0000 00CF
SIO1 transmit interrupt request H'0000 00D0 H'0000 00D3
SIO0 receive interrupt request H'0000 00D4 H'0000 00D7
SIO0 transmit interrupt request H'0000 00D8 H'0000 00DB
A-D0 conversion interrupt request H'0000 00DC H'0000 00DF
(Note 1) H'0000 00E0 H'0000 00E3
(Note 1) H'0000 00E4 H'0000 00E7
DMA5–9 interrupt request H'0000 00E8 H'0000 00EB
SIO2,3 transmit/receive interrupt request H'0000 00EC H'0000 00EF
RTD interrupt request H'0000 00F0 H'0000 00F3
(Note 1) H'0000 00F4 H'0000 00F7
(Note 1) H'0000 00F8 H'0000 00FB
(Note 1) H'0000 00FC H'0000 00FF
(Note 1) H'0000 0100 H'0000 0103
(Note 1) H'0000 0104 H'0000 0107
(Note 1) H'0000 0108 H'0000 010B
CAN0 transmit/receive & error interrupt request H'0000 010C H'0000 010F
CAN1 transmit/receive & error interrupt request H'0000 0110 H'0000 0113
Note 1: Valid for the interrupt requests in the 32180. No interrupt requests are generated in the 32182.
5
5-13
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 5.5.1 Example of Priority Resolution when Accepting Interrupt Requests
5.5 Description of Interrupt Operation
5.5.1 Acceptance of Internal Peripheral I/O Interrupts
An interrupt request from any internal peripheral I/O is checked to see whether or not to accept by comparing its
ILEVEL value set in the Interrupt Control Register and the IMASK value of the Interrupt Request Mask Register.
If its priority is higher than the IMASK value, the interrupt request is accepted. However, if two or more interrupt
requests occur simultaneously, the Interrupt Controller resolves priority between these interrupt requests follow-
ing the procedure described below.
1) The ILEVEL values set in the Interrupt Control Registers for the respective internal peripheral I/Os are
compared with each other.
2) If the ILEVEL values are the same, priorities are resolved according to the predetermined hardware priority.
3) The ILEVEL and IMASK values are compared.
If two or more interrupt requests occur simultaneously, the Interrupt Controller first compares their priority levels
set in each Interrupt Control Register’s ILEVEL bit to select an interrupt request that has the highest priority. If
the interrupt requests have the same ILEVEL value, their priorities are resolved according to the hardware fixed
priority. The interrupt request thus selected has its ILEVEL value compared with the IMASK value and if its
priority is higher than the IMASK value, the Interrupt Controller sends an EI request to the CPU.
Interrupt requests may be masked by setting the Interrupt Request Mask Register and the Interrupt Control
Register’s ILEVEL bit (disabled at level 7) provided for each internal peripheral I/O and the PSW register IE bit.
5.5 Description of Interrupt Operation
Interrupt
requested
or not
Resolve priority
according to
Interrupt Priority
Level (ILEVEL)
Resolve priority
according to
hardware priority
Compare with
IMASK value
TIN3-6 input interrupt request
TIO4-7 output interrupt request
TOP8,9 output interrupt request
SIO0 transmit interrupt request
DMA0-4 interrupt request
A-D0 conversion interrupt request
(ILEVEL settings)
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Level 3
Level 1
Level 3
Not requested
Requested
Requested
Requested
Requested
Requested
Hardware
fixed priority
Accept interrupt
if PSW register
IE bit = 1
Level 3
Level 3
Level 3
Can be accepted
when IMASK = 4-7
1) 2) 3)
5
5-14
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
5.5 Description of Interrupt Operation
Table 5.5.1 Hardware Fixed Priority Levels
Priority Interrupt Request Source ICU Vector Table Address ICU Type of Input Source
High TIN3–6 input interrupt request H'0000 0094 H'0000 0097 Level-recognized
TIN20–23 input interrupt request H'0000 0098 H'0000 009B Level-recognized
TIN12–19 input interrupt request H'0000 009C H'0000 009F Level-recognized
TIN0–2 input interrupt request H'0000 00A0 H'0000 00A3 Level-recognized
TMS0,1 output interrupt request H'0000 00A8 H'0000 00AB Level-recognized
TOP8,9 output interrupt request H'0000 00AC H'0000 00AF Level-recognized
TOP10 output interrupt request H'0000 00B0 H'0000 00B3 Edge-recognized
TIO4–7 output interrupt request H'0000 00B4 H'0000 00B7 Level-recognized
TIO8,9 output interrupt request H'0000 00B8 H'0000 00BB Level-recognized
TOP0–5 output interrupt request H'0000 00BC H'0000 00BF Level-recognized
TOP6,7 output interrupt request H'0000 00C0 H'0000 00C3 Level-recognized
TIO0–3 output interrupt request H'0000 00C4 H'0000 00C7 Level-recognized
DMA0–4 interrupt request H'0000 00C8 H'0000 00CB Level-recognized
SIO1 receive interrupt request H'0000 00CC H'0000 00CF Edge-recognized
SIO1 transmit interrupt request H'0000 00D0 H'0000 00D3 Edge-recognized
SIO0 receive interrupt request H'0000 00D4 H'0000 00D7 Edge-recognized
SIO0 transmit interrupt request H'0000 00D8 H'0000 00DB Edge-recognized
A-D0 conversion interrupt request H'0000 00DC H'0000 00DF Edge-recognized
DMA5–9 interrupt request H'0000 00E8 H'0000 00EB Level-recognized
SIO2,3 transmit/receive interrupt request H'0000 00EC H'0000 00EF Level-recognized
RTD interrupt request H'0000 00F0 H'0000 00F3 Edge-recognized
CAN0 transmit/receive & error interrupt H'0000 010C H'0000 010F Level-recognized
request
CAN1 transmit/receive & error interrupt H'0000 0110 H'0000 0113 Level-recognized
Low request
Table 5.5.2 ILEVEL Settings and Accepted IMASK Values
ILEVEL values set IMASK values at which interrupts are accepted
0 (ILEVEL = "000") Accepted when IMASK is 1–7
1 (ILEVEL = "001") Accepted when IMASK is 2–7
2 (ILEVEL = "010") Accepted when IMASK is 3–7
3 (ILEVEL = "011") Accepted when IMASK is 4–7
4 (ILEVEL = "100") Accepted when IMASK is 5–7
5 (ILEVEL = "101") Accepted when IMASK is 6–7
6 (ILEVEL = "110") Accepted when IMASK is 7
7 (ILEVEL = "111") Not accepted (interrupts disabled)
5
5-15
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
5.5.2 Processing by Internal Peripheral I/O Interrupt Handlers
(1) Branching to the interrupt handler
Upon accepting an interrupt request, the CPU branches to the EIT vector entry after performing the hardware
preprocessing as described in Section 4.3, “EIT Processing Procedure.” The EIT vector entry for External
Interrupt (EI) is located at the address H’0000 0080. This address is where the instruction (not the jump
address itself) for branching to the beginning of the interrupt handler routine for external interrupt requests is
written.
(2) Processing in the External Interrupt (EI) handler
A typical operation of the External Interrupt (EI) handler (for interrupts from internal peripheral I/O) is shown
in Figure 5.5.2.
[1] Saving each register to the stack
Save the BPC, PSW and general-purpose registers to the stack. Also, save the accumulator and FPSR
register to the stack as necessary.
[2] Reading the Interrupt Request Mask Register (IMASK) and saving to the stack
Read the Interrupt Request Mask Register and save its content to the stack.
[3] Reading the Interrupt Vector Register (IVECT)
Read the Interrupt Vector Register. This register holds the 16 low-order address bits of the ICU vector table
for the accepted interrupt request source that was stored in it when accepting an interrupt request. When the
Interrupt Vector Register is read, the following processing is automatically performed in hardware:
• The interrupt priority level of the accepted interrupt request (ILEVEL) is set in the IMASK register as a
new IMASK value. (Interrupts with lower priority levels than that of the accepted interrupt request
source are masked.)
• The accepted interrupt request source is cleared (not cleared for level-recognized interrupt request
sources).
• The interrupt request (EI) to the CPU core is dropped.
• The ICU’s internal sequencer is activated to start internal processing (interrupt priority resolution).
[4] Reading and overwriting the Interrupt Request Mask Register (IMASK)
Read the Interrupt Request Mask Register and overwrite it with the read value. This write to the IMASK
register causes the following processing to be automatically performed in hardware:
• The interrupt request (EI) to the CPU core is dropped.
• The ICU’s internal sequencer is activated to start internal processing (interrupt priority resolution).
Note: • Processing in [4] here is unnecessary when multiple interrupts are to be enabled in [6] below.
[5] Reading the ICU vector table
Read the ICU vector table for the accepted interrupt request source. The relevant ICU vector table
address can be obtained by zero-extending the content of the Interrupt Vector Register that was read in
[3] (i.e., the 16 low-order address bits of the ICU vector table for the accepted interrupt request source).
The ICU vector table must have set in it the start address of the interrupt handler for the interrupt request
source concerned.)
[6] Enabling multiple interrupts
To enable another higher priority interrupt while processing the accepted interrupt (i.e., enabling multiple
interrupts), set the PSW register IE bit to "1".
[7] Branching to the internal peripheral I/O interrupt handler
Branch to the start address of the interrupt handler that was read out in [5].
[8] Processing in the internal peripheral I/O interrupt handler
[9] Disabling interrupts
Clear the PSW register IE bit to "0" to disable interrupts.
5.5 Description of Interrupt Operation
5
5-16
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
5.5 Description of Interrupt Operation
[10] Restoring the Interrupt Request Mask Register (IMASK)
Restore the Interrupt Request Mask Register that was saved to the stack in [2].
[11] Restoring registers from the stack
Restore the registers that were saved to the stack in [1].
[12] Completion of external interrupt processing
Execute the RTE instruction to complete the external interrupt processing. The program returns to the
state in which it was before the currently processed interrupt request was accepted.
(3) Identifying the source of the interrupt request generated
If any internal peripheral I/O has two or more interrupt request sources, check the Interrupt Request Status
Register provided for each internal peripheral I/O to identify the source of the interrupt request generated.
(4) Enabling multiple interrupts
To enable multiple interrupts in the interrupt handler, set the PSW register IE (Interrupt Enable) bit to enable
interrupt requests to be accepted. However, before writing "1" to the IE bit, be sure to save each register
(BPC, PSW, general-purpose registers and IMASK) to the stack.
Note: • Before enabling multiple interrupts, read the Interrupt Vector Register (IVECT) and then the ICU
vector table, as shown in Figure 5.5.2, “Typical Handler Operation for Interrupts from Internal
Peripheral I/O.”
5
5-17
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 5.5.2 Typical Handler Operation for Interrupts from Internal Peripheral I/O
5.5 Description of Interrupt Operation
Note 1: For operations at EIT acceptance and return from EIT, also see Section 4.3, "EIT Processing Procedure."
Note 2: Do not read the Interrupt Vector Register (IVECT) or write to the Interrupt Request Mask Register (IMASK)
in the EIT handler unless interrupts are disabled (PSW register IE bit = 0).
Note 3: When multiple interrupts are disabled, execute processing in [4]. Processing in [4] is unnecessary if multiple
interrupts are enabled by executing processing in [6] and [9].
Note 4: To enable multiple interrupts, execute processing in [6] and [9].
Note 5: To reenable interrupts (by setting the IE bit to 1) after reading the Interrupt Vector Register (IVECT),
perform a dummy access to the internal memory, etc. before reenabling interrupts. In the example here,
there is no need to add a dummy access because the ICU vector table is read after reading the IVECT register.
Similarly, to reenable interrupts (by setting the IE bit to 1) after writing to the Interrupt Request Mask Register
(IMASK), perform a dummy access to the internal memory, etc. before reenabling interrupts.
H'0000 0080 BRA instruction
Read Interrupt Vector
Register (IVECT)
Read ICU vector table
Branch to the interrupt handler
for each internal peripheral I/O
RTE
H'0080 0004
H'0000 0094
H'0000 0113
Interrupt
handler
EI (External Interrupt)
handler
EI (External Interrupt)
vector entry
Interrupt handler
start address
Program being
executed
Interrupt
generated IVECT
Save BPC to the stack
Save PSW to the stack
Save general-purpose
registers to the stack
Restore BPC from the stack
Restore PSW from the stack
Restore general-purpose
registers from the stack
Read and save Interrupt
Request Mask Register
(IMASK) to the stack IMASK
H'0080 0000
Set PSW register IE bit to 1
Clear PSW register
IE bit to 0
Restore Interrupt Request
Mask Register (IMASK)
from the stack
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[6]
[10]
[11]
ICU vector table
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
Hardware preprocessing
when EIT is accepted
Hardware postprocessing
when RTE instruction
is executed
Read and overwrite
Interrupt Request Mask
Register (IMASK)
[4]
[12]
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
(Note 3)
(Note 4)
(Note 5)
(Note 4)
(Note 2)
Interrupt
handler
[1] to [12]: Processing of EI
by interrupt handler
5
5-18
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER (ICU)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
5.6 Description of System Break Interrupt (SBI) Operation
5.6.1 Acceptance of SBI
System Break Interrupt (SBI) is an emergency interrupt which is used when power outage is detected or a fault
condition is notified by an external watchdog timer. The system break interrupt is accepted anytime upon detec-
tion of a falling edge on the SBI# signal input pin no matter how the PSW register IE bit is set, and cannot be
masked.
5.6.2 SBI Processing by Handler
When the system break interrupt generated has been serviced, shut down or reset the system without returning
to the program that was being executed when the interrupt occurred.
5.6 Description of System Break Interrupt (SBI) Operation
Figure 5.6.1 Typical SBI Operation
H'0000 0010 BRA instruction
SBI (System Break Interrupt)
handler
SBI (System Break Interrupt)
vector entry
Program being
executed
SBI generated
Processing to shut
down the system
(Note 1)
Note 1: Do not return to the program that was being executed when the interrupt occurred.
Shut down or
reset the system
CHAPTER 6
INTERNAL MEMORY
6.1 Outline of the Internal Memory
6.2 Internal RAM
6.3 Internal Flash Memory
6.4 Registers Associated with the Internal
Flash Memory
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
6.6 Virtual Flash Emulation Function
6.7 Connecting to A Serial Programmer
6.8 Internal Flash Memory Protect Function
6.9 Precautions To Be Taken when Rewriting
the Internal Flash Memory
6
6-2
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.1 Outline of the Internal Memory
The 32182 internally contains the following types of memory:
• 64-Kbyte RAM
• 384-Kbytes flash memory
6.2 Internal RAM
Specifications of the internal RAM are shown below.
Table 6.2.1 Specifications of the Internal RAM
Item Specification
Size 64 Kbytes
Location address H’0080 4000 to H’0081 3FFF
Wait insertion Operates with zero wait states
Internal bus connection Connected by 32-bit bus
Dual port By using the Real-Time Debugger (RTD), data can be read (monitored) or written to any area of
the internal RAM via serial communication from external devices independently of the CPU. (See
Chapter 14, “Real-Time Debugger.”)
Notes: • Immediately after power-on reset (for the power-on case in which VDDE also goes up from GND), the value of the
RAM is undefined.
• If the RAM is reset during RAM backup (power for only VDDE is on), the RAM retains the value it had immediately
before being reset.
6.3 Internal Flash Memory
Specifications of the internal flash memory are shown below.
Table 6.3.1 Specifications of the Internal Flash Memory
Item Specification
Size M32182F3: 384 Kbytes
M32182F8: 1 Mbyte
Location address M32182F3: H’0000 0000 to H’0005 FFFF
M32182F8: H’0000 0000 to H’000F FFFF
Wait insertion Operates with one wait state
Durability Can be rewritten 100 times
Internal bus connection Instruction access: Connected by 64-bit bus (Transfer rates equivalent to zero wait states on 32-bit
bus are possible.)
Data access: Connected by 32-bit bus
Other Virtual flash emulation function is incorporated. (See Section 6.6, “Virtual Flash Emulation Function.”)
6.1 Outline of the Internal Memory
6
6-3
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 6.3.1 Block Configuration of the M32182F3’s Internal Flash Memory
6.3 Internal Flash Memory
H'0000 0000
H'0000 4000
H'0000 6000
H'0000 8000
H'0001 0000
H'0002 0000
H'0003 0000
16KB
8KB
8KB
32KB
64KB
64KB
64KB
Block 0
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Unequal blocks
Equal blocks
Internal flash memory area of the M32182F3 (384 Kbytes)
H'0004 0000
64KB
64KB
H'0005 0000
H'0005 FFFF
Block 7
Block 8
6
6-4
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
H'0000 0000
H'0000 4000
H'0000 6000
H'0000 8000
H'0001 0000
H'0002 0000
H'0003 0000
H'0004 0000
H'0005 0000
H'0006 0000
H'0007 0000
H'0008 0000
H'0009 0000
H'000A 0000
H'000B 0000
H'000C 0000
H'000D 0000
H'000E 0000
H'000F 0000
H'000F FFFF
16KB
8KB
8KB
32KB
64KB
64KB
64KB
64KB
64KB
64KB
64KB
64KB
64KB
64KB
64KB
64KB
64KB
64KB
64KB
Block 0
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Block 7
Block 8
Block 9
Block 10
Block 11
Block 12
Block 13
Block 14
Block 15
Block 16
Block 17
Block 18
Unequal blocks
Equal blocks
Internal flash memory area of the M32182F8 (1 Mbyte)
Figure 6.3.2 Block Configuration of the M32182F8’s Internal Flash Memory
6
6-5
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.4 Registers Associated with the Internal Flash Memory
6.4 Registers Associated with the Internal Flash Memory
A register map associated with the internal flash memory is shown below.
Internal Flash Memory Related Register Map
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 01E0 Flash Mode Register Flash Status Register 1 6-5
(FMOD) (FSTAT1) 6-6
H'0080 01E2 Flash Control Register 1 Flash Control Register 2 6-8
(FCNT1) (FCNT2) 6-9
H'0080 01E4 Flash Control Register 3 Flash Control Register 4 6-10
(FCNT3) (FCNT4)
H'0080 01E6 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 01E8 Virtual Flash S Bank Register 0 6-12
(FESBANK0)
H'0080 01EA Virtual Flash S Bank Register 1 6-12
(FESBANK1)
H'0080 01EC Virtual Flash S Bank Register 2 6-12
(FESBANK2)
H'0080 01EE Virtual Flash S Bank Register 3 6-12
(FESBANK3)
H'0080 01F0 Virtual Flash S Bank Register 4 6-12
(FESBANK4)
H'0080 01F2 Virtual Flash S Bank Register 5 6-12
(FESBANK5)
H'0080 01F4 Virtual Flash S Bank Register 6 6-12
(FESBANK6)
H'0080 01F6 Virtual Flash S Bank Register 7 6-12
(FESBANK7)
6.4.1 Flash Mode Register
Flash Mode Register (FMOD) <Address: H’0080 01E0>
123456b7b0 FPMOD
?
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’0?>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–6 No function assigned. Fix to "0" 00
7 FPMOD 0: FP pin = "low" R
External FP pin status bit 1: FP pin = "high"
The Flash Mode Register (FMOD) is a read-only status register, with its FPMOD bit indicating the FP (Flash
Protect) pin status.
The internal flash memory is enabled for programming or erase operation only when FPMOD = "1", and is
protected against programming or erase operation when FPMOD = "0".
6
6-6
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.4 Registers Associated with the Internal Flash Memory
6.4.2 Flash Status Registers
There are two registers to indicate the status of the internal flash memory: Flash Status Register 1 (FSTAT1)
located in the SFR area (H’0080 01E1) and Flash Status Register 2 (FSTAT2) included in the internal flash
memory. Use these two status registers (FSTAT1 and FSTAT2) to control the programming or erase operation
performed on the internal flash memory.
Flash Status Register 1 (FSTAT1) <Address: H’0080 01E1>
9 1011121314b15b8 FSTAT
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’01>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–14 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
15 FSTAT 0: Busy R
Ready/busy status bit 1: Ready
Flash Status Register 1 (FSTAT1) is a read-only status register used to know the status of the programming or
erase operation performed on the internal flash memory. When FSTAT = "0" (busy), the internal flash memory is
being programmed or erased, during which time do not start a new programming or erase operation on it. When
FSTAT = "1" (ready), a new programming or erase operation can be started on it.
Furthermore, while FSTAT = "0" (busy), do not operate on the FCNT4 register FRESET bit described later.
6.4.3 Flash Status Register 2 (FSTAT2)
Flash Status Register 2 (FSTAT2)
9 1011121314b15b8
WRERR2
WRERR1ERASEFBUSY
100
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’80>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 FBUSY 0: Being programmed or erased R
Flash busy bit 1: Ready state
9 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 0–
10 ERASE 0: Erase normally operating or terminated R
Erase status confirmation bit 1: Erase error occurred
11 WRERR1 0: Programming normally operating or terminated R
Write status confirmation bit 1 1: Programming error occurred
12 WRERR2 0: Programming normally operating or terminated R
Write status confirmation bit 2 1: Over-programming occurred
13–15 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
6
6-7
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.4 Registers Associated with the Internal Flash Memory
This status register is included in the internal flash memory, and can be enabled for read by writing the Read
Status command (H’7070) to any address of the internal flash memory. For details, see Section 6.5, “Program-
ming the Internal Flash Memory.”
Flash Status Register 2 (FSTAT2) consists of the following four read-only status bits that indicate the operation
condition of the internal flash memory.
(1) FBUSY (Flash Busy) bit (Bit 8)
The FBUSY bit is used to determine whether the operation on the internal flash memory is finished when it is
being programmed or erased. When FBUSY = "0", it means that the programming or erase operation is being
executed; when FBUSY = "1", the operation is finished.
(2) ERASE (Erase status) bit (Bit 10)
The ERASE bit is used to determine after execution of processing whether the erase operation performed on
the internal flash memory resulted in an error. When ERASE = "0", it means that the erase operation termi-
nated normally; when ERASE = "1", the erase operation terminated in an error.
(3) WRERR1 (Write status 1) bit (Bit 11)
The WRERR1 bit is used to determine after completion of processing whether the programming operation
performed on the internal flash memory resulted in an error. When WRERR1 = "0", it means that the pro-
gramming operation terminated normally; when WRERR1 = "1", the programming operation terminated in an
error.
The condition under which WRERR1 is set to "1" is when any bit other than those that must be "0" is found to
be "0" by comparison between the write data and the data in the internal flash memory.
(4) WRERR2 (Write status 2) bit (Bit 12)
The WRERR2 bit is used to determine after execution of processing whether the programming operation
performed on the internal flash memory resulted in an error. When WRERR2 = "0", it means that the pro-
gramming operation terminated normally; when WRERR2 = "1", the programming operation terminated in an
error.
The condition under which WRERR2 is set to "1" is when the internal flash memory cannot be written to even
by repeating the programming operation a specified number of times.
6
6-8
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.4 Registers Associated with the Internal Flash Memory
6.4.4 Flash Control Registers
Flash Control Register 1 (FCNT1) <Address: H’0080 01E2>
123456b7b0
FEMMOD
FENTRY
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–2 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
3 FENTRY 0: Normal read R W
Flash E/W enable mode entry bit 1: Program/erase enable
4–6 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
7 FEMMOD 0: Normal mode R W
Virtual flash emulation mode bit 1: Virtual flash emulation mode
Flash Control Register 1 (FCNT1) consists of the following two bits to control the internal flash memory.
(1) FENTRY (Flash Mode Entry) bit (Bit 3)
The FENTRY bit controls entry to flash E/W enable mode. Flash E/W enable mode can only be entered when
FENTRY = "1".
To set the FENTRY bit to "1", write "0" and then "1" to the FENTRY bit in succession while the FP pin = "high". To
clear the FENTRY bit, check to see that the FSTAT1 register FSTAT bit = "1" (ready) and then write "0" to the
FENTRY bit.
Note that the following operations cannot be performed while programming or erasing the internal flash
memory (FSTAT1 register FSTAT bit = "0" (busy)). If one of these operations is attempted, the FENTRY bit
is cleared to "0" in hardware.
1) Writing "0" to the FENTRY bit
2) Entering a low-level signal to the FP pin
3) Entering a low-level signal to the RESET# pin
When running a program resident in the internal flash memory while the FENTRY bit = "0", the EI vector entry
is located at the address H’0000 0080 of the internal flash memory. When running the flash write/erase
program in the RAM while the FENTRY bit = "1", the EI vector entry is located at the address H’0080 4000 of
the RAM, allowing the flash programming/erase operation to be controlled using interrupts.
Table 6.4.1 Changes of the EI Vector Entry by FENTRY
FENTRY EI Vector Entry Address
0 Internal flash memory area H'0000 0080
1 Internal RAM area H'0080 4000
(2) FEMMOD (Virtual Flash Emulation Mode) bit (Bit 7)
The FEMMOD bit controls entry to virtual flash emulation mode. Virtual flash emulation mode is entered by
setting the FEMMOD bit to "1" while the FENTRY bit = "0". (For details, see Section 6.6, “Virtual Flash
Emulation Function.”)
6
6-9
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
FPROT = 0
FENTRY = 1
YES
NO
FENTRY = 1
FPROT = 1
FPROT is not set to 1 if a write cycle
to any other area occurs during this time.
FPROT = 0
FPROT = 1
Figure 6.4.1 Protection Unlocking Flow
6.4 Registers Associated with the Internal Flash Memory
Flash Control Register 2 (FCNT2) <Address: H’0080 01E3>
9 1011121314b15b8
FPROT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–14 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
15 FPROT 0: Protection by lock bit effective R W
Unlock bit 1: Protection by lock bit invalidated
Flash Control Register 2 (FCNT2) controls invalidation of the internal flash memory protection by a lock bit
(protection against programming/erase operation). Protection of the internal flash memory is invalidated by
setting the FPROT bit to "1", so that any blocks protected by a lock bit can now be programmed or erased.
To set the FPROT bit to "1", write "0" and then "1" to the FPROT bit in succession while the FENTRY bit = "1". To
clear the FPROT bit to "0", write "0" to the FPROT bit.
If one of the following operations is attempted, the FPROT bit is cleared to "0".
1) Writing "0" to the FPROT bit
2) Entering a low-level signal to the FP pin
3) Clearing the FENTRY bit to "0"
4) Entering a low-level signal to the RESET# pin
6
6-10
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.4 Registers Associated with the Internal Flash Memory
Flash Control Register 3 (FCNT3) <Address: H’0080 01E4>
123456b7b0
FELEVEL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–6 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
7 FELEVEL 0: Normal level R W
Erase margin-up bit 1: Raise erase margin up
Flash Control Register 3 (FCNT3) controls the depth of erase levels when erasing the internal flash memory with one
of erase commands. The internal flash memory erase level can be deepened by setting the FELEVEL bit to "1".
Flash Control Register 4 (FCNT4) <Address: H’0080 01E5>
9 1011121314b15b8
FRESET
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–14 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
15 FRESET 0: No operation R W
Flash reset bit 1: Reset
Flash Control Register 4 (FCNT4) controls initializing each status bit of Flash Status Register 2 (FSTAT2) or
canceling a programming/erase operation.
Setting the FRESET bit to "1" initializes each status bit of the FSTAT2 register or cancels a programming/erase
operation.
The FRESET bit is effective only when the FENTRY bit = "1". If the FENTRY bit = "0", the FRESET bit informa-
tion is ignored.
When programming or easing the internal flash memory, make sure the FRESET bit remains "0".
An example for clearing each status of FSTAT2 during a programming/erase operation, and an example for
forcibly terminating (canceling) a programming/erase operation due to time-out are shown below.
6
6-11
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 6.4.2 Example of FCNT4 Register Operation 1 (Clearing each status of the FSTAT2 register)
FRESET = 1
YES
NO
FENTRY = 1
Program/erase
the flash memory
Error found
FRESET = 0
Program/erase
the flash memory
FENTRY = 0
* At this point in time,
the FSTAT1 register FSTAT bit = 1 (ready).
Programming/erase
operation terminated normally
6.4 Registers Associated with the Internal Flash Memory
FRESET = 1
FRESET = 0
Forcibly terminate
Flash programming/erase operation has timed out
Figure 6.4.3 Example of FCNT4 Register Operation 2 (Forcibly terminating operation when programming/
erasing the internal flash memory)
6
6-12
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.4.5 Virtual Flash S Bank Registers
Virtual Flash S Bank Register 0 (FESBANK0) <Address: H’0080 01E8>
Virtual Flash S Bank Register 1 (FESBANK1) <Address: H’0080 01EA>
Virtual Flash S Bank Register 2 (FESBANK2) <Address: H’0080 01EC>
Virtual Flash S Bank Register 3 (FESBANK3) <Address: H’0080 01EE>
Virtual Flash S Bank Register 4 (FESBANK4) <Address: H’0080 01F0>
Virtual Flash S Bank Register 5 (FESBANK5) <Address: H’0080 01F2>
Virtual Flash S Bank Register 6 (FESBANK6) <Address: H’0080 01F4>
Virtual Flash S Bank Register 7 (FESBANK7) <Address: H’0080 01F6>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
MODENS SBANKAD
0 00000000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 MODENS 0: Disable virtual flash emulation function R W
Virtual flash emulation enable bit 1: Enable virtual flash emulation function
1–7 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
8-15 SBANKAD Start address A12–A19 of the relevant S bank R W
S bank address
Note: • These registers must always be accessed in halfwords.
(1) MODENS (Virtual Flash Emulation Enable) bit (Bit 0)
The MODENS bit can be set to "1" after entering virtual flash emulation mode (by setting the FEMMOD bit to
"1" while the FENTRY bit = "0"). This causes the virtual flash emulation function to be enabled for the S bank
area selected by the SBANKAD bits.
(2) SBANKAD (S Bank Address) bits (Bits 8–15)
The SBANKAD bits are provided for selecting one of the S banks that are separated every 4 KB. Use these
SBANKAD bits to set the eight bits A12–A19 of the 32-bit start address of the desired S bank.
Note: • For details, see Section 6.6, “Virtual Flash Emulation Function.”
6.4 Registers Associated with the Internal Flash Memory
6
6-13
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 6.5.1 EI Vector Entry during Flash E/W Enable Mode
EI vector entry
(H'0000 0080)
Internal ROM area
Internal RAM
H'0000 0000
H'00FF FFFF
H'0080 4000
Internal ROM area
Internal RAM
H'0080 3FFF
Flash E/W enable mode
(FENTRY = 1) Normal mode
(FENTRY = 0)
H'0000 0000
H'0080 3FFF EI vector entry
(H'0080 4000)
H'0080 4000
H'00FF FFFF
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
6.5.1 Outline of Internal Flash Memory Programming
To program or erase the internal flash memory, there are following two methods to choose depending on the
situation:
(1) When the flash write/erase program does not exist in the internal flash memory
(2) When the flash write/erase program already exists in the internal flash memory
For (1), set the FP pin = "high", MOD0 = "high" and MOD1 = "low" to enter boot mode. In this case, the CPU
starts running the boot program immediately after reset.
The boot program transfers the flash write/erase program into the internal RAM. After the transfer, jump to a
location in the RAM and use the RAM-resident program to set the Flash Control Register 1 (FCNT1) FENTRY bit
to "1" to make the internal flash memory ready for programming/erase operation (i.e., placed in boot mode +
flash E/W enable mode).
When the above is done, use the flash write/erase program that has been transferred into the internal RAM to
program or erase the internal flash memory.
For (2), set the FP pin = "high", MOD0 = "low" and MOD1 = "low" to enter single-chip mode. Transfer the flash
write/erase program from the internal flash memory in which it has been prepared into the internal RAM. After
the transfer, jump to the RAM and use the program transferred into the RAM to set the Flash Control Register 1
(FCNT1) FENTRY bit to "1" to make the internal flash memory ready for programming/erase operation (i.e.,
placed in single-chip mode + flash E/W enable mode).
When the above is done, use the flash write/erase program that has been transferred into the internal RAM to
program or erase the internal flash memory. Or flash E/W enable mode can be entered from external extension
mode by setting the FP pin = "high", MOD0 = "low" and MOD1 = "high".
During flash E/W enable mode (FP pin = 1, FENTRY = 1), the EIT vector entry for External Interrupt (EI) is
relocated to the start address (H’0080 4000) of the internal RAM. During normal mode, it is located in the flash
area (H’0000 0080).
6
6-14
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 6.5.2 Procedure for Programming/Erasing the Internal Flash Memory (when the flash write/erase
program does not exist in it)
(1) When the flash write/erase program does not exist in the internal flash memory
In this case, the boot program is used to program or erase the internal flash memory. To transfer the write
data, use serial I/O1 in clock-synchronized serial mode.
To program or erase the internal flash memory using a flash programmer, follow the procedure described below.
SIO1
CPU
SIO1
CPU
Flash write/
erase
program
MOD1 = L
SIO1
CPU
RAM
Flash
memory
FP = L or H
RAM
RAM
<Step 1>
• Initial state (Flash write/erase program nonexistent in the internal
flash memory)
<Step 2>
• Set the FP pin high, MOD0 pin high and MOD1 pin low to place the
flash memory in boot mode + flash E/W enable mode.
• Dessert reset signal and start up with the boot program.
Transfer the flash write/erase program into the RAM.
• Jump to the flash write/erase program in the RAM.
<Step 3>
• Using the flash write/erase program in the RAM, set the Flash Control
Register 1 (FCNT1) FENTRY bit to 1.
• Program or erase the internal flash memory using the flash write/erase
program.
When finished, reset MOD0 low and jump to the internal flash memory
or apply a reset to enter normal mode.
M32R/ECU
M32R/ECU
M32R/ECU
External device (e.g., flash programmer)
External device (e.g., flash programmer)
Flash
memory
Flash write
data
Flash
memory
MOD0 = L
Boot
program
Boot
program
Boot
program
MOD1 = L
FP = H MOD0 = H
MOD1 = LFP = H MOD0 = H
RESET = L
RESET = H
RESET = H
Flash write/
erase
program
Write data
Write data
Write data
External device (e.g., flash programmer)
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
6
6-15
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
RESET# pin
MOD0 pin
FENTRY bit
FP pin
MOD1 pin
POWER ON Mode
selected
Reset signal deasserted
(Boot program starts) Mode
selected
Reset signal deasserted
Flash programming/erasing
by the boot progr am
Settings by the
boot program
Figure 6.5.3 Internal Flash Memory Write/Erase Timing (when the flash write/erase program does not exist in it)
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
6
6-16
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 6.5.4 Procedure for Programming/Erasing the Internal Flash Memory (when the flash write/erase
program already exists in it)
(2) When the flash write/erase program already exists in the internal flash memory
In this case, the flash write/erase program prepared in the internal flash memory is used to program or erase
the internal flash memory.
For programming/erase operation here, use the internal peripheral circuits in the manner suitable for the
programming system. (All resources of the internal peripheral circuits such as the data bus, serial I/O and
ports can be used.)
The following shows an example for programming or erasing the internal flash memory by using serial I/O0 in
single-chip mode.
SIO0
CPU
Flash write/
erase
program
SIO0
CPU
Flash write/
erase
program
MOD1 = L
SIO0
CPU
RAM
Flash write/
erase
program
FP = L or H
Write data
RAM
RAM
<Step 1>
• Initial state (Flash write/erase program existing in the internal flash memory)
• An ordinary program in the internal flash memory is being executed.
<Step 2>
• Set the FP pin high, MOD1 pin low and MOD0 pin low to place the
flash memory in single-chip + flash E/W enable mode.
• After determining the FP pin and MOD1 pin levels, transfer the flash
write/erase program from the internal flash memory area into the RAM.
• Jump to the flash write/erase program in the RAM.
<Step 3>
• Using the flash write/erase program in the RAM, set the Flash Control
Register 1 (FCNT1) FENTRY bit to 1.
• Program or erase the internal flash memory using the flash write/erase
program in the RAM.
When finished, jump to the program in the flash memory or apply a
reset to enter normal mode.
M32R/ECU
M32R/ECU
M32R/ECU
External device
External device
External device
Flash
memory
Flash write
data
Flash
memory
MOD0 = L
MOD1 = LFP = H MOD0 = L
MOD1 = LFP = H MOD0 = L
Write data
Write data
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
6
6-17
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
RESET# pin
MOD0 pin
FENTRY bit
FP pin
High or low
High or low (single-chip or external extension)
MOD1 pin
Low
High or low
Flash programming/erasing by
the flash write/erase program
Flash rewrite
starts Flash mode
turned on Flash mode
turned off
Flash write/erase program
transferred into the RAM
Figure 6 .5.5 Internal Flash Memory Write/Erase Timing (when the flash write/erase program already exists in it)
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
6
6-18
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.5.2 Controlling Operation Modes during Flash Programming
The microcomputer’s operation mode is set by MOD0, MOD1 and Flash Control Register 1 (FCNT1) FENTRY
bit. The table below lists operation modes that may be used when programming or erasing the internal flash
memory.
Table 6.5.1 Operation Modes Set during Flash Programming/Erase
FP MOD0 MOD1 FENTRY (Note 1) Operation Mode Reset Vector Entry EI Vector Entry
0 0 0 0 Single-chip mode Start address of internal Flash area
1 0 0 0 flash memory (H'0000 0080)
(H'0000 0000)
0 1 0 0 Processor mode Start address of external External area
area
(H'0000 0000) (H'0000 0080)
0 0 1 0 External extension Start address of internal Flash area
1 0 1 0 mode flash memory (H'0000 0080)
(H'0000 0000)
1 0 0 1 Single-chip mode Start address of internal Beginning of internal RAM
+ flash E/W enable flash memory (H'0080 4000)
(H'0000 0000)
1 1 0 0 Boot mode Boot program starts Flash area
running (H'0000 0080)
1 1 0 1 Boot mode + flash Boot program starts Beginning of internal RAM
E/W enable running (H'0080 4000)
1 0 1 1 External extension Start address of internal Beginning of internal RAM
mode + flash E/W flash memory (H'0080 4000)
enable (H'0000 0000)
1 1 Use inhibited
Note 1: Indicates the Flash Control Register 1 (FCNT1) FENTRY bit status (– denotes “Don’t care”). However, if FP = "0",
writing "1" to FENTRY only results in it cleared to "0".
(1) Flash E/W enable mode
Flash E/W enable mode is a mode in which the internal flash memory can be programmed or erased. In flash
E/W enable mode, no programs can be executed in the internal flash memory. Therefore, the necessary
program must be transferred into the internal RAM before entering flash E/W enable mode, so that it can be
executed in the RAM.
(2) Entering flash E/W enable mode
Flash E/W enable mode can only be entered when operating in single-chip, external extension or boot mode.
Furthermore, it is only when the FP pin = "high" and the Flash Control Register 1 (FCNT1) FENTRY bit = "1"
that flash E/W enable mode can be entered. Flash E/W enable mode cannot be entered when operating in
processor mode or the FP pin = "low".
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
6
6-19
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
(3) Detecting the MOD0 and MOD1 pin levels
The MOD0 and MOD1 pin levels ("high" or "low") can be known by checking the P8 Data Register (Port Data
Register, H’0080 0708) MOD0DT and MOD1DT bits.
P8 Data Register (P8DATA) <Address: H’0080 0708>
123456b7b0
P87DTP86DTP85DTP84DTP83DTP82DTMOD1DTMOD0DT
????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 MOD0DT 0: MOD0 pin = "low" R
MOD0 data bit 1: MOD0 pin = "high"
1 MOD1DT 0: MOD1 pin = "low" R
MOD1 data bit 1: MOD1 pin = "high"
2 P82DT At read R W
Port P82 data bit Depends on how the Port Direction Register is set
3 P83DT • If direction bit = "0" (input mode)
Port P83 data bit 0: Port input pin = "low"
4 P84DT 1: Port input pin = "high"
Port P84 data bit • If direction bit = "1" (output mode) (Note 1)
5 P85DT 0: Port output latch = "0" / Port pin level = "low"
Port P85 data bit 1: Port output latch = "1" / Port pin level = "high"
6 P86DT At write
Port P86 data bit Write to the port output latch
7 P87DT
Port P87 data bit
Note 1: To select the port data to read, use the Port Input Special Function Control Register’s port input data select bit (PISEL).
6
6-20
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 6.5.6 Procedure for Entering Flash E/W Enable Mode
END
START
Enter one of the following modes:
• Single-chip mode
• Boot mode
• External extension mode
Transfer the flash write/erase program
into the internal RAM
Set the Flash Control Register in SFR area
(FCNT1, H'0080 01E2) FENTRY bit to 0
Set the Flash Control Register in SFR area
(FCNT1, H'0080 01E2) FENTRY bit to 1
Execute flash write/erase command and
various read commands (Note 1)
Switched to the flash write/erase
program
Wait for 1 µs
(using a hardware or software timer)
Jump to the flash memory or apply reset Switched to normal mode
Check
MOD0/1 and FP pin
levels
OK
NO
END
FMOD(H'0080 01E0)
FPMOD
P8DATA(H'0080 0708)
D0 = MOD0DT
D1 = MOD1DT
Note 1: For details about each command, see Section 6.5.4, "Procedure for Programming/Erasing
the Internal Flash Memory."
Go to flash E/W enable mode
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
6
6-21
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.5.3 Procedure for Programming/Erasing the Internal Flash Memory
To program or erase the internal flash memory, set up chip mode to enter flash E/W enable mode and execute the
flash write/erase program in the internal RAM into which it has been transferred from the internal flash memory.
In flash E/W enable mode, because the internal flash memory cannot be accessed for read as in normal mode,
no programs present in it can be executed. Therefore, the flash write/erase program must be made available in
the internal RAM before entering flash E/W enable mode. (Once flash E/W enable mode is entered into, only
flash commands and no other commands can be used to access the internal flash memory.)
To access the internal flash memory in flash E/W enable mode, issue commands for the internal flash memory
address to be operated on. The table below lists the commands that can be issued in flash E/W enable mode.
Note: • During flash E/W enable mode, the internal flash memory cannot be accessed for read or write
wordwise.
Table 6.5.2 Commands in Flash E/W Enable Mode
Command Name Issued Command Data
Read Array command H'FFFF
Page Program command H'4141
Lock Bit Program command H'7777
Block Erase command H'2020
Erase All Unlocked Blocks command H'A7A7
Read Status Register command H'7070
Clear Status Register command H'5050
Read Lock Bit Status command H'7171
Verify command (Note 1) H'D0D0
Note 1: • This command is used in conjunction with Lock Bit Program, Block Erase and Erase All Unlocked Blocks
operations.
• This command must be issued immediately after the Lock Bit Program, Block Erase or Erase All Unlocked Blocks
command.
• If the Lock Bit Program, Block Erase or Erase All Unlocked Blocks command is followed by the Read Array com-
mand (H’FFFF), the Lock Bit Program, Block Erase or Erase All Unlocked Blocks command is canceled.
• If the Lock Bit Program, Block Erase or Erase All Unlocked Blocks command is followed by other than the Verify
(H'D0D0) or Read Array (H'FFFF) command, the Lock Bit Program, Block Erase or Erase All Unlocked Blocks
command is not executed normally and terminated in error.
(1) Read Array command
Writing the command (H’FFFF) to any address of the internal flash memory places it in read mode. Then read
the desired flash memory address, and the content of that address will be read out.
Before exiting flash E/W enable mode, always be sure to execute the Read Array command.
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
START
Write the Read Array command (H'FFFF)
to any address of the internal flash memory
Read the desired flash memory address
END
Figure 6.5.7 Read Array Command
6
6-22
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
END
Read any address of the internal flash
memory (Note 3) to check for programming
error (see Figure 6.4.2)
Last address?
YES
NO
START
Write the program data to the internal flash
memory address to be programmed (Note 1)
Write the next program data to the
previously programmed address + 2
Write the Page Program command
(H'4141) to any address of
the internal flash memory
Internal flash memory is programmed
by Page Program (Note 2)
Finished programming
one page?
NO
YES
Wait for 1 µs
(using a hardware or software timer)
FSTAT bit = 1
TIME OUT?
0.5s
YES
NO
Forcibly terminated
(see Figure 6.4.3.)
YES
NO
To next page
Note 1: Start programming from the beginning of a 256-byte boundary (lower address H'00).
Note 2: When a programming operation started, the internal flash memory is automatically readied to run the Read Status command,
so that there is no need to enter the Read Status command until another command is entered.
Note 3: Inspect the Flash Status Register 2 ERASE (erase status), WRERR1 (write status 1) and WRERR2 (write status 2) bits to check
for programming error.
Figure 6.5.8 Page Program Command
(2) Page Program command
The internal flash memory is programmed one page at a time, each page consisting of 256 bytes (lower
addresses H’00 to H’FF). To program the flash memory, write the Page Program command (H’4141) to any
address of the internal flash memory and then the program data to the address to be programmed.
The protected flash memory blocks cannot be accessed for write by the Page Program command.
Page programming is automatically performed by the internal control circuit, and whether the Page Program
command has finished can be known by checking the Flash Status Register 1 (FSTAT1) FSTAT bit. (See
Section 6.4.2, “Flash Status Registers.”) While the FSTAT bit = "0" (busy), the next programming (by the
Page Program command) cannot be performed.
6
6-23
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
(3) Lock Bit Program command
The internal flash memory can be protected against programming/erase operation one block at a time. The
Lock Bit Program command is provided for protecting the flash memory blocks.
Write the Lock Bit Program command (H’7777) to any address of the internal flash memory. Next, write the
Verify command (H’D0D0) to the last even address of the flash memory block to be protected, and this
memory block is thereby protected against programming/erase operation. To remove protection, use the
Flash Control Register 2 (FCNT2) FPROT bit to invalidate protection by a lock bit (see Section 6.4.3, “Flash
Control Registers”) and erase the flash memory block whose protection is to be removed. (The content of
that memory block is also erased.)
Executing a programming/erase operation on flash memory blocks protected by a lock bit results in an error.
If erased, the FSTAT2 register ERASE bit is set to "1" (erase error occurred); if programmed, the FSTAT2
register WRERR1 bit is set to "1" (programming error occurred).
The table below lists the target flash memory blocks and their addresses to be specified when writing the
Verify command.
Table 6.5.3 M32182F3 Target Blocks and Specified Addresses
Target Block Specified Address
0 H'0000 3FFE
1 H'0000 5FFE
2 H'0000 7FFE
3 H'0000 FFFE
4 H'0001 FFFE
5 H'0002 FFFE
6 H'0003 FFFE
7 H'0004 FFFE
8 H'0005 FFFE
Table 6.5.4 M32182F8 Target Blocks and Specified Addresses
Target Block Specified Address
0 H'0000 3FFE
1 H'0000 5FFE
2 H'0000 7FFE
3 H'0000 FFFE
4 H'0001 FFFE
5 H'0002 FFFE
6 H'0003 FFFE
7 H'0004 FFFE
8 H'0005 FFFE
9 H'0006 FFFE
10 H'0007 FFFE
11 H'0008 FFFE
12 H'0009 FFFE
13 H'000A FFFE
14 H'000B FFFE
15 H'000C FFFE
16 H'000D FFFE
17 H'000E FFFE
18 H'000F FFFE
6
6-24
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
END
Read any address of the internal flash
memory (Note 2) to check for
programming error (see Figure 6.4.2)
START
Write the Verify command (H'D0D0)
to the last even address of the flash
memory block to be protected
Write the Lock Bit Program command
(H'7777) to any address of the
internal flash memory
Lock bit is programmed
by Lock Bit Program (Note 1)
Wait for 1 µs
(using a hardware or software timer)
FSTAT bit = 1
TIME OUT?
0.5s
YES
NO
Forcibly terminated
(see Figure 6.4.3.)
YES
NO
Note 1: When a programming operation started, the internal flash memory is automatically readied to run the Read Status
command, so that there is no need to enter the Read Status command until another command is entered.
Note 2: Inspect the Flash Status Register 2 ERASE (erase status), WRERR1 (write status 1) and WRERR2 (write status 2)
bits to check for programming error.
Figure 6.5.9 Lock Bit Program Command
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
6
6-25
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
END
Read any address of the internal flash
memory (Note 2) to check for erase
error (see Figure 6.4.2)
START
Write the Verify command (H'D0D0) to
the last even address of the flash
memory block to be erased
Write the Block Erase command
(H'2020) to any address of the
internal flash memory
Internal flash memory contents
are erased by the Block Erase
command (Note 1)
Wait for 1 µs
(using a hardware or software timer)
FSTAT bit = 1
TIME OUT?
1s
YES
NO
Forcibly terminated
(see Figure 6.4.3.)
YES
NO
Note 1: When an erase operation started, the internal flash memory is automatically readied to run the Read Status command,
so that there is no need to enter the Read Status command until another command is entered.
Note 2: Inspect the Flash Status Register 2 ERASE (erase status), WRERR1 (write status 1) and WRERR2 (write status 2) bits
to check for erase error.
Figure 6.5.10 Block Erase Command
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
(4) Block Erase command
The Block Erase command erases the content of the internal flash memory one block at a time. To perform
this operation, write the Block Erase command (H’2020) to any address of the internal flash memory. Next,
write the Verify command (H’D0D0) to the last even address of the flash memory block to be erased (see
Table 6.5.3, “M32182F3 Target Blocks and Specified Addresses”).
The protected flash memory blocks cannot be erased by the Block Erase command.
Block erase operation is automatically performed by the internal control circuit, and whether the Block Erase
command has finished can be known by checking the Flash Status Register 1 (FSTAT1) FSTAT bit. (See
Section 6.4.2, “Flash Status Registers.”) While the FSTAT bit = "0" (busy), the next block erase operation (by
the Block Erase command) cannot be performed.
6
6-26
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
(5) Erase All Unlocked Blocks command
The Erase All Unlocked Blocks command erases all flash memory blocks that are not protected. To erase all
unlocked blocks, write the command (H’A7A7) to any address of the internal flash memory. Next, write the
Verify command (H’D0D0) to any address of the internal flash memory, and all unlocked memory blocks are
thereby erased.
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
END
Read any address of the internal flash
memory (Note 2) to check for erase
error (see Figure 6.4.2)
START
Write the Verify command (H'D0D0) to
any address of the internal flash memory
Write the Erase All Unlocked Blocks
command (H'A7A7) to any address of the
internal flash memory
Flash memory contents are erased
by Erase All Unlocked Blocks
(Note 1)
Wait for 1 µs
(using a hardware or software timer)
FSTAT bit = 1
TIME OUT?
10s
YES
NO
Forcibly terminated
(see Figure 6.4.3.)
YES
NO
Note 1: When an erase operation started, the internal flash memory is automatically readied to run the Read Status command,
so that there is no need to enter the Read Status command until another command is entered.
Note 2: Inspect the Flash Status Register 2 ERASE (erase status), WRERR1 (write status 1) and WRERR2 (write status 2) bits
to check for erase error.
Figure 6.5.11 Erase All Unlocked Blocks Command
6
6-27
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
START
Write the Read Status Register
command (H'7070) to any address
of the internal flash memory
Read any address of the
internal flash memory
END
Figure 6.5.12 Read Status Register Command
(7) Clear Status Register command
The Clear Status Register command clears the Flash Status Register 2 ERASE (erase status), WRERR1
(write status 1) and WRERR2 (write status 2) bits to "0". Write the Clear Status Register command (H’5050)
to any address of the internal flash memory, and Flash Status Register 2 is thereby initialized.
If an error occurs when programming or erasing the internal flash memory and the Flash Status Register 2
ERASE (erase status), WRERR1 (write status 1) or WRERR2 (write status 2) bit is set to "1", the next
programming or erase operation cannot be executed unless each status bit is cleared to "0".
START
Write the Clear Status Register command (H'5050)
to any address of the internal flash memory
END
Figure 6.5.13 Clear Status Register Command
(6) Read Status Register command
The Read Status Register command reads the content of Flash Status Register 2 (FSTAT2) that indicates
whether flash memory programming or erase operation has terminated normally. To read Flash Status Reg-
ister 2, write the Read Status Register command (H’7070) to any address of the internal flash memory. Next,
read any address of the internal flash memory, and Flash Status Register 2 (FSTAT2) will be read out.
6
6-28
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
START
Write the Read Lock Bit Status command
(H'7171) to any address of the
internal flash memory
Read the last e v en address of the
flash memory bloc k to be chec k ed
END
Figure 6.5.14 Read Lock Bit Status Command
(8) Read Lock Bit Status command
The Read Lock Bit Status command is provided for checking whether a flash memory block is protected
against programming/erase operation. Write the Read Lock Bit Status command (H’7171) to any address of
the internal flash memory. Next, read the last even address of the flash memory block to be checked (see
Table 6.5.3, “M32182F3 Target Blocks and Specified Addresses”), and the read data shows whether the
target block is protected.
If the FLBST0 (lock bit 0) and FLBST1 (lock bit 1) in the read data both are "0", it means that the target
memory block is protected. If the FLBST0 (lock bit 0) and FLBST1 (lock bit 1) both are "1", it means that the
target memory block is not protected.
6
6-29
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Lock Bit Status Register (FLBST)
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
FLB
S
T
0
FLB
S
T
1
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 No function assigned. ?–
1 FLBST0 0: Protected R
Lock bit 0 1: Not protected
2–8 No function assigned. ?–
9 FLBST1 0: Protected R
Lock bit 1 1: Not protected
(Same content as FLBST0 is output)
10–15 No function assigned. ? –
The Lock Bit Status Register is a read-only register, which is included for each memory block independently of
one another. The following shows how the lock bits in this register are set.
a) Setting the lock bit to "0" (protected)
Issue the Lock Bit Program command (H’7777) to the memory block to be protected.
b) Setting the lock bit to "1" (not protected)
Set the Flash Control Register 2 FPROT bit to invalidate protection by a lock bit, then issue the Block Erase
command (H’2020) or Erase All Unlocked Blocks command (H’A7A7) to erase the memory block which is to
be unprotected. This is the only way to set the lock bit to "1". In no way can the lock bit alone be set to "1".
c) Lock bit status after reset
Because the lock bits are nonvolatile, they are unaffected by a reset and power-off.
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
6
6-30
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.5.4 Flash Programming Time (Reference)
The following shows the time needed to program internal flash memory for reference.
(1) Time required for transfer by SIO (for a transfer data size of 384 KB)
1/57,600 bps × 1 (frame) × 11 (number of bits transferred) × 384 KB = approx. 75.1 [s]
(2) Time required for programming the flash memory
384 KB / 256-byte block × 8 ms = approx. 12.3 [s]
(3) Time required for erasing the entire area
50 ms × 9 (blocks) = approx. 450 [ms]
(4) Total flash programming time (entire 384 KB area)
When communicating at 57,600 bps via UART, the flash programming time can be ignored because it is very
short compared to the serial communication time. Therefore, the total flash programming time can be calcu-
lated using the equation below.
(1) + (3) = approx. 76 [s]
If the transfer time can be ignored by speeding up the serial communication or by other means, the fastest
programming time possible can be calculated using the equation below.
(2) + (3) = approx. 13 [s]
6.5 Programming the Internal Flash Memory
6
6-31
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.6 Virtual Flash Emulation Function
The microcomputer has the function to map 4-Kbyte memory blocks beginning with the address H’0080 8000 into
areas (S banks) of the internal flash memory that are divided in 4-Kbyte units. This functions is referred to as the
Virtual Flash Emulation Function.
This function allows the data located in 4-Kbyte blocks of the internal RAM to be changed with the contents of
internal flash memory at the addresses specified by the Virtual Flash S Bank Register. That way, the relevant RAM
data can read out by reading the content of internal flash memory.
For applications that require modifying the contents of internal flash memory (e.g., data table) during operation,
this function enables dynamic data modification by modifying the relevant RAM data.
The RAM blocks allocated for virtual flash emulation can be accessed for read and write the same way as in usual RAM.
This function, when used in combination with the microcomputer’s internal Real-Time Debugger (RTD), allows the
data table, etc. created in the internal flash memory to be referenced or rewritten from the outside, thereby facili-
tating data table tuning from an external device.
Note: • Before programming/erasing the internal flash memory, always be sure to exit this virtual flash
emulation mode.
Figure 6.6.1 Internal RAM Bank Configuration of the M32182F3
6.6 Virtual Flash Emulation Function
H'0080 4000
H'0080 8000
H'0080 9000
H'0080 A000
H'0080 B000
H'0080 C000
H'0080 D000
H'0080 E000
H'0080 F000
RAM bank block 0
(FESBANK0)
4 Kbytes
RAM bank block 1
(FESBANK1)
4 Kbytes
RAM bank block 2
(FESBANK2)
4 Kbytes
RAM bank block 3
(FESBANK3)
4 Kbytes
RAM bank block 4
(FESBANK4)
4 Kbytes
RAM bank block 5
(FESBANK5)
4 Kbytes
RAM bank block 6
(FESBANK6)
4 Kbytes
RAM bank block 7
(FESBANK7)
4 Kbytes
(Cannot be used for
virtual flash emulation)
Internal RAM area
(Cannot be used for
virtual flash emulation)
H'0081 0000
H'0081 3FFF
6
6-32
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.6.1 Virtual Flash Emulation Area
The following shows the internal flash memory areas in which the Virtual Flash Emulation Function is applicable.
Using the Virtual Flash S Bank Register (FESBANK0–FESBANK7), select one among all S banks of internal
flash memory that are divided in 4-Kbyte units (by setting the eight start address bits A12–A19 of the desired S
bank in the Virtual Flash S Bank Register SBANKAD bits). Then set the Virtual Flash S Bank Register’s flash
emulation enable bit (MODENS) to "1", and the selected S bank area will be replaced with 4-Kbyte blocks of the
internal RAM beginning with the address H’0080 8000, up to eight such blocks in all.
Notes: • If the same bank area is set in two or more Virtual Flash S Bank Registers (FESBANK0–
FESBANK7) and each register’s flash emulation enable bit (MODENS) is set to "1" (enabled), the
bank is assigned the corresponding internal RAM area (4-Kbyte) according to the priority of Virtual
Flash S Bank Registers given below.
FESBANK0 > FESBANK1 > FESBANK2 > FESBANK3 > FESBANK4 > FESBANK5 >
FESBANK6 > FESBANK7
• During virtual flash emulation mode, RAM can be accessed for read and write from both the
internal RAM area and the flash emulation areas set in the internal flash memory.
• Before reading any flash emulation area after setting the Flash Control Register 1 (FCNT1) flash
emulation mode bit (FEMMOD) to "1", be sure to check that the flash emulation mode bit
(FEMMOD) has been set to "1" by reading it once.
• Before reading any flash emulation area after setting the Virtual Flash S Bank Register
(FESBANK0–FESBANK7) flash emulation enable bit (MODENS) and bank address bits
(SBANKAD), be sure to check that those MODENS and SBANKAD bits have been set to the
intended values by reading them once.
6.6 Virtual Flash Emulation Function
6
6-33
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
4 Kb
y
te
s
4 Kb
y
te
s
4 Kb
y
te
s
4 Kb
y
te
s
4
Kby
te
s
4 Kb
y
te
s
4 Kb
y
te
s
4 Kb
y
te
s
S
bank
0
(4 Kb
y
tes
)
S
bank
1
(4 Kb
y
tes
)
S
bank
2
(4 Kb
y
tes
)
S
bank
93
(4 Kb
y
tes
)
S
bank
94
(4 Kb
y
tes
)
S
bank
95
(4 Kb
y
tes
)
H'0000 0000
H'0000 1000
H'0000 2000
H'0005 D000
H'0005 E000
H'0005 F000
<Internal flash>
H'0080 8000
H'0080 9000
H'0080 A000
H'0080 B000
H'0080 C000
H'0080 D000
H'0080 E000
H'0080 F000
H'0080 4000
<Internal RAM>
Notes: • If the same bank area is set in two or more Virtual Flash S Bank Registers (FESBANK0-FESBANK7) and each register's flash
emulation enable bit (MODENS) is set to 1, the bank is assigned the corresponding internal RAM area in order of priority:
FESBANK0 > FESBANK1 > FESBANK2 > FESBANK3 > FESBANK4 > FESBANK5 > FESBANK6 > FESBANK7.
• If any 4-Kbyte area (S bank) specified by the Virtual Flash S Bank Register is accessed, its corresponding internal RAM area
is accessed. During virtual flash emulation mode, RAM can be accessed for read and write from both the internal RAM area and
the flash emulation areas set in the internal flash memory.
H'0081 3FFF
Figure 6.6.2 Virtual Flash Emulation Area of the M32182F3
6.6 Virtual Flash Emulation Function
4 Kbytes
4 Kbytes
4 Kbytes
4 Kbytes
4 Kbytes
4 Kbytes
4 Kbytes
4 Kbytes
S bank 0
(4 Kbytes)
S bank 1
(4 Kbytes)
S bank 2
(4 Kbytes)
S bank 253
(4 Kbytes)
S bank 254
(4 Kbytes)
S bank 255
(4 Kbytes)
H'0000 0000
H'0000 1000
H'0000 2000
H'000F D000
H'000F E000
H'000F F000
<Internal flash>
H'0080 8000
H'0080 9000
H'0080 A000
H'0080 B000
H'0080 C000
H'0080 D000
H'0080 E000
H'0080 F000
H'0080 4000
<Internal RAM>
Notes: • If the same bank area is set in two or more Virtual Flash S Bank Registers (FESBANK0-FESBANK7) and each register's flash
emulation enable bit (MODENS) is set to 1, the bank is assigned the corresponding internal RAM area in order of priority:
FESBANK0 > FESBANK1 > FESBANK2 > FESBANK3 > FESBANK4 > FESBANK5 > FESBANK6 > FESBANK7.
• If any 4-Kbyte area (S bank) specified by the Virtual Flash S Bank Register is accessed, its corresponding internal RAM area
is accessed. During virtual flash emulation mode, RAM can be accessed for read and write from both the internal RAM area and
the flash emulation areas set in the internal flash memory.
H'0081 3FFF
Figure 6.6.3 Virtual Flash Emulation Area of the M32182F8
6
6-34
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
S bank
S bank 0
S bank 94
S bank 95
S bank 1
S bank 2
Start address of S bank
in flash memory Values set in S bank
address (SBANKAD) bits
H'0000 0000
(Note 1)
H'0000 1000
(Note 1)
H'0000 2000
(Note 1)
H'0005 E000
(Note 1)
H'0005 F000
(Note 1)
H'00
H'01
H'02
H'5E
H'5F
Note 1: Set the eight start address bits A12-A19 of each S bank of internal flash memory that is divided in 4-Kbyte units
in the Virtual Flash S Bank Register's S bank address (SBANKAD) bits.
Figure 6.6.4 Values Set in the M32182F3’s Virtual Flash S Bank Register
S bank
S bank 0
S bank 254
S bank 255
S bank 1
S bank 2
Start address of S bank
in flash memory Values set in S bank
address (SBANKAD) bits
H'0000 0000
(Note 1)
H'0000 1000
(Note 1)
H'0000 2000
(Note 1)
H'000F E000
(Note 1)
H'000F F000
(Note 1)
H'00
H'01
H'02
H'FE
H'FF
Note 1: Set the eight start address bits A12-A19 of each S bank of internal flash memory that is divided in 4-Kbyte units
in the Virtual Flash S Bank Register's S bank address (SBANKAD) bits.
Figure 6.6.5 Values Set in the M32182F8’s Virtual Flash S Bank Register
6
6-35
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.6.2 Entering Virtual Flash Emulation Mode
To enter virtual flash emulation mode, set the Flash Control Register 1 (FCNT1) FEMMOD bit by writing "1".
After entering virtual flash emulation mode, set the Virtual Flash S Bank Register MODENS bit to "1" to enable
the Virtual Flash Emulation Function.
Even during virtual flash emulation mode, the internal RAM area (H’0080 8000 through H’0080 FFFF) can be
accessed the same way as in usual internal RAM.
Set RAM location address in
Virtual Flash S Bank Register
SBANKADnAddress A12–A19
Write flash data to RAM
Enable virtual flash emulation
MODENS 1
Settings completed
Enter virtual flash emulation mode
FEMMOD 1
Settings start
Figure 6.6.6 Virtual Flash Emulation Mode Sequence
6.6 Virtual Flash Emulation Function
6
6-36
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.6.3 Application Example of Virtual Flash Emulation Mode
By using two RAM areas that have been set in the same flash area by the Virtual Flash Emulation Function, the
data in the flash memory can be replaced successively.
Figure 6.6.7 Application Example of Virtual Flash Emulation Mode (1/2)
Replace area
Flash memory
RAM bloc k 0 Data write to RAM0
RAM bloc k 1
(1) Operation when reset
Replaced
Data write to RAM1
(2) Programming oper ation using RAM bloc k 0
Flash memory
Initial value
Initial value
RAM bloc k 0
RAM bloc k 1
Replaced
(3) Programming oper ation s witched from RAM b lock 0 to RAM b loc k 1
Flash memory
Initial value
RAM bloc k 0
RAM bloc k 1
RAM bloc k 1Bank xx
Bank xx
Bank xx
Bank xx specified
Bank xx specified Bank xx specified
(settings inv alid)
RAM bloc k 0
RAM bloc k 0
6.6 Virtual Flash Emulation Function
6
6-37
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Replaced
(4) Programming oper ation using RAM bloc k 1
Flash memory
Initial value
RAM bloc k 0
RAM bloc k 1
RAM bloc k 1Bank xx
Bank xx specified
Replaced
(5) Programming oper ation s witched from RAM b lock 1 to RAM b loc k 0
RAM bloc k 0
Flash memory
Initial value
RAM bloc k 0
RAM bloc k 1
RAM bloc k 1
Bank xx
Bank xx specified Bank xx specified
(settings inv alid)
(6) Go to (2)
Note: Enclosed in are the v alid area.
(Bank specification cleared)
Data write to RAM0
Figure 6.6.8 Application Example of Virtual Flash Emulation Mode (2/2)
6.6 Virtual Flash Emulation Function
6
6-38
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.7 Connecting to A Serial Programmer
6.7 Connecting to A Serial Programmer
For the internal flash memory to be rewritten in boot mode + flash E/W enable mode by using a general-purpose
serial programmer, several pins on the microcomputer must be processed to make them suitable for the serial
programmer, as shown below.
Table 6.7.1 Processing Microcomputer Pins before Using a Serial Programmer
P i n Nam e P i n No.
SCLKI1 103
RXD1 104
TXD1 105
P84 106
FP 111
MOD0 112
MOD1 113
RESET# 19
JTRST 26
XIN 16
XOUT 18
VCNT 14
OSC-VCC 15
OSC-VSS 17
VREF0 38
AVCC0 37
AVSS0 47
VDDE 117
VCCE 13,58,101,119
Function
Trans fer c l ock i nput
Serial data input (received data)
Serial data output (transmit data)
Transm i t/ recei ve enabl e ou t pu t
Fl ash mem ory prot ect
Operat ion m ode 0
Operat ion m ode 1
Reset
JTAG re se t
Cl o ck i n pu t
Clock output
Cont ro l i npu t for PLL ci rcui t
P LL ci rcui t power suppl y
P LL ci rcui t ground
Referenc e voltage input for A-D
converter
A nal og power suppl y
A nal og ground
RAM back up power s upply
M ai n power supp ly
Remark
Need to be pul led hi gh
Need to be pul led hi gh
Need to be pul led hi gh
Connect to the main power s upply
Connect to the main power s upply
Connect to ground
Af ter sett in g MOD0/MOD1, gr ound an
d
back to main power supply
Pull low via resis t or
Connect to the main power s upply
Connect to ground
Connect to the main power s upply
Connect to the main power s upply
Connect to ground
Connect to the main power s upply
5 V + - 10% or 3.3 V + - 10%
VCC-BUS 78,143
EXCVCC
EXCVDD 59,116
114
VSS 56,57,77,102,115,118,144
B us power s uppl y
Internal power supp l y
Ground
Depends on th e t a rget syst em
Need to be grounded to earth via
bypass capaci tor
0V
6
6-39
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.7 Connecting to A Serial Programmer
Figure 6.7.1 Pin Connection Diagram
The diagram below shows an example of a user system configuration which has had a serial programmer con-
nected. After the user system is powered on, the serial programmer writes to the internal flash memory in clock-
synchronized serial mode. No communication problems associated with the oscillator frequency may occur. If the
system uses any pins that are to be connected to a serial programmer, care must be taken to prevent adverse
effects on the system when a serial programmer is connected. Note that the serial programmer uses the ad-
dresses H’0000 0084 through H’0000 008F as an area in which to check the ID for flash memory protection. If the
internal flash memory needs to be protected, set any ID in this area.
2kW
32182
VCNT
XOUT
XIN
JTRST
MOD1
OSC-VSS
AVSS0
VSS
RESET#
FP
MOD0
P84/SCLKI0/SCLKO0
P87/SCLKI1/SCLKO1
P86/RXD1
P85/TXD1
VCC-BUS
EXCVDD
EXCVCC
VREF0
AVCC0
OSC-VCC
VDDE
VCCE
Connect to
the user
system power
supply rail
Connect to the VCCE (5 or 3.3 V)
power supply rail
Main power supply
Connect to the
VCCE (5 or 3.3V)
power supply rail
Main power supply
(for reference)
RxD (input)
TxD (output)
SCLK0 (output)
BUSY (input)
MOD0 (output)
FP (output)
RESET (output)
GND (common)
Connector
Flash programmer signals
To system circuit
Set microcomputer
operating conditions
User system board
Notes: • Turn on the power for the user system before writing to the internal flash memory.
• If P84-P87 are used in the system circuit, connection to a serial programmer must be taken into consideration.
• SBI# must be fixed high or low to ensure that no interrupts will be generated.
• The pullup resistance values of P84, P86 and P87 must be selected to suit the system design condition.
• The typical pullup resistance values of P84, P86 and P87 are 4.7 to 10 KW.
• The status of any other ports that are not shown here will not affect flash memory programming.
• Make sure the mode setting pin/power supply voltages do not fluctuate to prevent unintended changes of modes
while rewriting the internal flash memory.
6
6-40
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.8 Internal Flash Memory Protect Function
The internal flash memory has the following four types of protect functions to prevent it from being inadvertently
rewritten or illegally copied, programmed or erased.
(1) Flash memory protect ID
When using a tool to program/erase the internal flash memory such as a general-purpose programmer or emu-
lator, the ID entered by a tool and the ID stored in the internal flash memory are collated. Unless the correct ID
is entered, no programming/erase operations can be performed. (For some tools, tool execution is enabled after
erasing the entire flash memory area, and the internal flash memory becomes accessible for write.)
(2) Protection by FP pin
The internal flash memory is protected in hardware against programming/erase operation by pulling the FP
(Flash Protect) pin low. Furthermore, because the FP pin level can be known by reading the Flash Mode Regis-
ter (FMOD)’s FPMOD (external FP pin status) bit in the flash write/erase program, the internal flash memory can
also be protected in software. For systems that do not require protection by setting external pins, the FP pin may
be fixed high to simplify the operation to program/erase the internal flash memory.
(3) Protection by FENTRY bit
Flash E/W enable mode cannot be entered into unless the Flash Control Register 1 (FCNT1)’s FENTRY (flash
mode entry) bit is set to "1". To set the FENTRY bit to "1", write "0" and then "1" in succession while the FP pin
is high.
(4) Protection by a lock bit
Any block of internal flash memory can be protected by setting the lock bit provided for it to "0". That memory
block is disabled against programming/erase operation.
6.8 Internal Flash Memory Protect Function
6
6-41
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.9 Precautions To Be Taken when Rewriting the Internal Flash Memory
6.9 Precautions To Be Taken when Rewriting the Internal Flash Memory
The following describes precautions to be taken when programming/erasing the internal flash memory.
• When the internal flash memory is programmed or erased, a high voltage is generated internally. Because mode
transitions during programming/erase operation may cause the chip to break down, make sure the mode setting
pin/power supply voltages do not fluctuate to prevent unintended changes of modes.
• If the system uses any pins that are to be used by a general-purpose programming/erase tool, care must be
taken to prevent adverse effects on the system when the tool is connected.
• If the internal flash memory needs to be protected while using a general-purpose programming/erase tool, set
any ID in the flash memory protect ID verification area (H’0000 0084 to H’0000 008F).
• If the internal flash memory does not need to be protected while using a general-purpose programming/erase
tool, fill the entire flash memory protect ID verification area (H’0000 0084 to H’0000 008F) with H’FF.
• If the Flash Status Register 2 (FSTAT2)’s each error status is to be cleared (initialized to H’80) by resetting the
Flash Control Register 4 (FCNT4) FRESET bit, check to see that the Flash Status Register 1 (FSTAT1) FSTAT
bit = "1" (ready) before clearing the error status.
• Before resetting the Flash Control Register 1 (FCNT1) FENTRY bit from "1" to "0", check to see that the Flash
Status Register 1 (FSTAT1) FSTAT bit = "1" (ready) or the Flash Status Register 2 (FSTAT2) FBUSY bit = "1"
(ready).
• Do not clear the FENTRY bit if the Flash Control Register 1 (FCNT1) FENTRY bit = "1" and the Flash Status
Register 1 (FSTAT1) FSTAT bit = "0" (busy), or the Flash Status Register 2 (FSTAT2) FBUSY bit = "0" (being
programmed or erased).
6
6-42
INTERNAL MEMORY
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
6.9 Precautions To Be Taken when Rewriting the Internal Flash Memory
This page is blank for reasons of layout.
CHAPTER 7
RESET
7.1 Outline of Reset
7.2 Reset Operation
7.3 Internal State Immediately after Reset
7.4 Things to Be Considered after Reset
7
7-2
RESET
32180 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
7.1 Outline of Reset
The microcomputer is reset by applying a low-level signal to the RESET# input pin. The microcomputer is gotten
out of a reset state by releasing the RESET# input back high, upon which the reset vector entry address is set in
the Program Counter (PC) and the CPU starts executing from the reset vector entry.
7.2 Reset Operation
When a low-level signal in width of more than 200 ns (a duration needed for noise cancellation) is applied to the
RESET# pin, the microcomputer is reset. At this time, pins on the microcomputer are reset (see the Pin State
When Reset in Table 1.4.1, “Pin Assignments”), and an internal bus hold request signal is output internally. Fur-
thermore, the internal circuits (including the CPU) are reset 9–10 BCLK periods later.
When the RESET# input is returned high, the microcomputer pins get out of a reset state and the internal bus hold
request is deasserted 17–18 BCLK periods later. Then the internal circuits get out of a reset state 15 BCLK
periods after that.
7.1 Outline of Reset
Noise Canceller
SR
OVF
Pin reset signal
Internal circuit reset signal
Flip-flop Counter
RESET#
Extended for a duration during which
the RESET# input is held low
17–18BCLK 15BCLK
9–10BCLK
RESET# pin
Reset signal (internal signal)
past the noise canceller
Pin reset (Note 2) and
internal bus hold request
(internal signal)
Internal circuit reset
(internal signal)
Duration needed for
noise cancellation (Note 1)
200ns
Note 1: If the low level duration of the reset signal is less than 200 ns, it is cancelled by the noise canceller.
Note 2: The por t-related registers also are reset.
Figure 7.2.2 Reset Sequence
Figure 7.2.1 Reset Circuit
7
7-3
RESET
32180 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
7.2 Reset Operation
7.2.1 Reset at Power-on
When powering on the microcomputer, hold the RESET# signal input pin low until the rated power supply volt-
age is reached and the microcomputer’s internal x8 clock generator becomes oscillating stably.
7.2.2 Reset during Operation
To reset the microcomputer during operation, hold the RESET# signal input pin low for more than 200 ns.
7.2.3 Reset at Entering RAM Backup Mode
To prevent the RAM access by the CPU or DMA from becoming interrupted by a reset, first an internal bus hold
request is output internally after accepting the reset input. Then the internal circuits are reset after the internal
bus is placed in a hold state.
Note: • Reset input at entering RAM backup mode cannot be used in the following cases (because the
internal bus hold request may not be accepted and the RAM contents may be corrupted):
• When the lock bit = 1 (see Section 2.7, “Supplementary Explanation for BSET, BCLR, LOCK
and UNLOCK Instruction Execution”)
• When executing any instruction present in external memory
7.2.4 Reset Vector Relocation during Flash Programming
When entering the boot mode, the reset vector entry address is relocated to the start address (H'8000 0000) of
the boot program space. For details, see Section 6.5, “Programming the Internal Flash Memory.”
7
7-4
RESET
32180 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
7.3 Internal State Immediately after Reset
7.3 Internal State Immediately after Reset
The table below lists the internal state of the microcomputer immediately after it has gotten out of a reset state. For
details about the initial register state of each internal peripheral I/O, see each section in this manual in which the
relevant internal peripheral I/O is described.
Table 7.3.1 Internal State Immediately after Reset
Register State after Reset
PSW (CR0) B'0000 0000 0000 0000 ??00 000? 0000 0000 (BSM, BIE, BC bits = undefined)
CBR (CR1) H'0000 0000 (C bits = 0)
SPI (CR2) Undefined
SPU (CR3) Undefined
BPC (CR6) Undefined
FPSR (CR7) H'0000 0100 (Only DN bit = 1)
PC H'0000 0000 (Executed beginning with the address H’0000 0000) (Note 1)
R0–R15 Undefined
ACC (accumulator) Undefined
RAM Undefined when reset at power-on. (However, if the RAM is gotten out of reset after
returning from backup mode, it retains the content it had before being reset.)
Note 1: When in boot mode, the CPU executes the boot program.
7.4 Things to Be Considered after Reset
• Input/output ports
After reset, the microcomputer’s input/output ports are disabled against input in order to prevent current from
flowing through the port. To use any ports in input mode, set the Port Input Special Function Control Register
(PICNT) PIEN0 bit to enable them for input. For details, see Section 8.3, “Input/Output Port Related Registers.”
CHAPTER 8
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS
AND PIN FUNCTIONS
8.1 Outline of Input/Output Ports
8.2 Selecting Pin Functions
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
8.4 Port Input Level Switching Function
8.5 Port Peripheral Circuits
8.6 Precautions on Input/Output Ports
8
8-2
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.1 Outline of Input/Output Ports
The 32182 has a total of 97 input/output ports from P0-P13, P15, P17 and P22 (except P5, which is reserved for
future use). These input/output ports can be used as input or output ports by setting the respective direction
registers.
Each input/output port is a dual-function or triple-function pin, sharing the pin with other internal peripheral I/O or
extended external bus signal line. Pin functions are selected depending on the current operation mode or by
setting the input/output port operation mode registers. (If any internal peripheral I/O has still another function, it is
also necessary to set the register provided for that peripheral I/O.)
The microcomputer also has a port input function enable bit that can be used to prevent current from flowing into
the input ports. This helps to simplify the software and hardware processing to be performed immediately after
reset or during flash programming. Note that before any ports can be used in input mode, this port input function
enable bit must be set accordingly.
The input/output ports are outlined below.
Table 8.1.1 Outline of Input/Output Ports
Item Specification
Number of ports Total 97 ports
P0 : P00–P07 (8 ports)
P1 : P10–P17 (8 ports)
P2 : P20–P27 (8 ports)
P3 : P30–P37 (8 ports)
P4 : P41–P47 (7 ports)
P6 : P61–P63 (3 ports)
P7 : P70–P77 (8 ports)
P8 : P82–P87 (6 ports)
P9 : P93–P97 (5 ports)
P10 : P100–P107 (8 ports)
P11 : P110–P117 (8 ports)
P12 : P124–P127 (4 ports)
P13 : P130–P137 (8 ports)
P15 : P150, P153 (2 ports)
P17 : P174, P175 (2 ports)
P22 : P220, P221, P224, P225 (4 ports)
Port function The input/output ports can individually be set for input or output mode using the direction control register
provided for each input/output port. (However, P221 is input-only port.)
Pin function Shared with peripheral I/O or extended external signals to serve dual-functions (or shared with two or
more peripheral I/O functions to serve triple-functions)
Pin function P0–P4, P224, P225: Depends on the CPU operation mode (that is set by MOD0 and MOD1 pins). (Note 1)
selection P6–P22: As set by each input/output port’s operation mode register.
(However, peripheral I/O pin functions are selected by peripheral I/O registers.)
Note 1: If the CPU operation mode is external extension mode, P0–P3, P44–P47, P224 and P225 initially are input/output
port pins, and are switched to extended external signal pin functions by setting the respective port operation mode
registers. P41–P43, when in external extension mode, serve as dedicated external bus interface signal pins.
Note: • P14, P16, P18-P21 are nonexist.
8.1 Outline of Input/Output Ports
8
8-3
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.2 Selecting Pin Functions
8.2 Selecting Pin Functions
Each input/output port serves dual functions sharing the pin with other internal peripheral I/O or extended external
bus signal line (or triple functions sharing the pin with two or more peripheral I/O functions). Pin functions are
selected depending on the current operation mode or by setting the input/output port operation mode registers.
P0–P4, P224 and P225, when the CPU is set to operate in processor mode, all are switched to serve as signal
pins for external access. The CPU operation mode is determined depending on how the MOD0 and MOD1 pins
are set (see the table below).
Table 8.2.1 CPU Operation Modes and P0–P4, P224 and P225 Pin Functions
MOD0 MOD1 Operation Mode P0–P4, P224 and P225 Pin Function
VSS VSS Single-chip mode Input/output port pin
VSS VCCE External extension mode Input/output port pin or extended external signal pin (Note 1)
VCCE VSS Processor mode (FP pin = VSS) Extended external signal pin
VCCE VCCE Reserved (use inhibited)
Note 1: P41–P43 serve as dedicated external bus interface signal pins.
Note: • VCCE and VSS are connected to 5 or 3.3 V and GND, respectively.
Each input/output port has their functions switched between input/output port pins and internal peripheral I/O pins
by setting the respective port operation mode registers. If any internal peripheral I/O has two or more pin functions,
use the register provided for that peripheral I/O to select the desired pin function.
Note that FP and MOD1 pin settings during internal flash memory programming do not affect the pin functions.
8
8-4
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.2 Selecting Pin Functions
Figure 8.2.1 Input/Output Ports and Pin Function Assignments
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
P18
P19
P20
P21
P22
Input/output
port operation
mode setting
(Reserved)
CPU operation
mode settings
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
DB0 DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7
DB8 DB9 DB10 DB11 DB12 DB13 DB14 DB15
A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30
A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22
TO16 TO17 TO18 TO19 TO20
TO9 / TO10 /
TO8 TO11 TO12 TO13 TO14 TO15
TXD3
(Note 2)
CTX1
(Note 2)
A11 / A12 /
CTX0 CRX0 CTX1 CRX1 CS2# CS3#
CS2#(Note 2) CS3#(Note 2)
TO0 TO1 TO2 TO3 TO4 TO5 TO6 TO7
TCLK0 TCLK1 TCLK2 TCLK3
TIN0 TIN1 TIN2 TIN3 TIN4 TIN5 TIN6 TIN7
TO21 TO22 TO23 TO24 TO25 TO26 TO27 TO28
TO29 TO30 TO31 TO32 TO33 TO34 TO35 TO36
TIN33/
TIN26 TIN27 TIN28 TIN29 TIN30 TIN31 TIN32
PWMOFF2
TXD4 RXD4 TXD5 RXD5
TO37 TO38 TO39 TO40 TO41 TO42 TO43 TO44
TIN8 TIN9 TIN10 TIN11 TIN12 TIN13 TIN14 TIN15
TIN24 TIN25 TXD2 RXD2 TXD3 RXD3
MOD0 MOD1 SCLKI0 / SCLKI1 /
TXD0 RXD0 TXD1 RXD1
(Note 3)
(Note 3)
SCLKO0 SCLKO1
BLW# / BHW# /
RD# CS0# CS1# A13 A14
BLE# BHE#
BCLK /
WAIT# HREQ# HACK# RTDTXD RTDRXD RTDACK RTDCLK
WR#
SBI# SCLKI4 / SCLKI5 /
(P61) (P62) (P63) (P67)
(Note 3)
SCLKO4 SCLKO5
TIN21 / TIN22 /
TIN16 TIN17 TIN18 TIN19 TIN20 TIN23
RXD3 CRX1
Note 1: During processor mode, these ports are switched to function as extended external signal pins. During external extension
mode, only P41-P43 are switched to function as external bus interface pins. Other pins become input/output port pins
when reset, so that some of these pins, if needed, must be set to function as external bus interface pins.
Note 2: These are triple-function pins. Their desired output function must be selected using the peripheral output select register.
Note 3: These ports cannot be used for input/output port function. The SBI#, MOD0 and MOD1 pin input levels can be read from
these ports.
Note: • No pins are available for those in shaded sections . However, because internal circuits are included, make sure
the ports are set for low-level output when initialized (to prevent current from flowing in through the port). These pins exist
in only the 32180 and are nonexistent in the 32182. However, P223 is an input-only pin and internally pulled high, so that
there is no need to set it for output.
8
8-5
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
The input/output port related registers included in the microcomputer consists of the port data register, port direc-
tion register and port operation mode register.
Note that P5 is reserved for future use. The tables below show an input/output port related register map.
Input/Output Port Related Register Map (1/2)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 0700 P0 Data Register P1 Data Register 8-7
(P0DATA) (P1DATA)
H'0080 0702 P2 Data Register P3 Data Register 8-7
(P2DATA) (P3DATA)
H'0080 0704 P4 Data Register (Use inhibited area) 8-7
(P4DATA)
H'0080 0706 P6 Data Register P7 Data Register 8-7
(P6DATA) (P7DATA)
H'0080 0708 P8 Data Register P9 Data Register 8-7
(P8DATA) (P9DATA)
H'0080 070A P10 Data Register P11 Data Register 8-7
(P10DATA) (P11DATA)
H'0080 070C P12 Data Register P13 Data Register 8-7
(P12DATA) (P13DATA)
H'0080 070E P14 Data Register P15 Data Register 8-7
(P14DATA) (P15DATA)
H'0080 0710 P16 Data Register P17 Data Register 8-7
(P16DATA) (P17DATA)
H'0080 0712 P18 Data Register P19 Data Register 8-7
(P18DATA) (P19DATA)
H'0080 0714 P20 Data Register P21 Data Register 8-7
(P20DATA) (P21DATA)
H'0080 0716 P22 Data Register (Use inhibited area) 8-7
(P22DATA) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0720 P0 Direction Register P1 Direction Register 8-8
(P0DIR) (P1DIR)
H'0080 0722 P2 Direction Register P3 Direction Register 8-8
(P2DIR) (P3DIR)
H'0080 0724 P4 Direction Register (Use inhibited area) 8-8
(P4DIR)
H'0080 0726 P6 Direction Register P7 Direction Register 8-8
(P6DIR) (P7DIR)
H'0080 0728 P8 Direction Register P9 Direction Register 8-8
(P8DIR) (P9DIR)
H'0080 072A P10 Direction Register P11 Direction Register 8-8
(P10DIR) (P11DIR)
H'0080 072C P12 Direction Register P13 Direction Register 8-8
(P12DIR) (P13DIR)
H'0080 072E P14 Direction Register P15 Direction Register 8-8
(P14DIR) (P15DIR)
H'0080 0730 P16 Direction Register P17 Direction Register 8-8
(P16DIR) (P17DIR)
H'0080 0732 P18 Direction Register P19 Direction Register 8-8
(P18DIR) (P19DIR)
H'0080 0734 P20 Direction Register P21 Direction Register 8-8
(P20DIR) (P21DIR)
H'0080 0736 P22 Direction Register (Use inhibited area) 8-8
(P22DIR) (Use inhibited area)
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
|
Note: • Although no pins are available for P65–P67, P140–P147, P151, P152, P154–P157, P160–P167, P172, P173, P176,
P177, P180–P187, P190–P197, P200–P203, P210–P217, P222, P226 and P227, because internal circuits are in-
cluded, make sure the ports are set for low-level output when initialized (to prevent current from flowing in through the
port).
|
8
8-6
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Input/Output Port Related Register Map (2/2)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 0740 P0 Operation Mode Register P1 Operation Mode Register 8-9
(P0MOD) (P1MOD)
H'0080 0742 P2 Operation Mode Register P3 Operation Mode Register 8-10
(P2MOD) (P3MOD)
H'0080 0744 P4 Operation Mode Register Port Input Special Function Control Register 8-11
(P4MOD) (PICNT) 8-21
H'0080 0746 P6 Operation Mode Register P7 Operation Mode Register 8-11
(P6MOD) (P7MOD) 8-12
H'0080 0748 P8 Operation Mode Register P9 Operation Mode Register 8-12
(P8MOD) (P9MOD) 8-13
H'0080 074A P10 Operation Mode Register P11 Operation Mode Register 8-13
(P10MOD) (P11MOD) 8-14
H'0080 074C P12 Operation Mode Register P13 Operation Mode Register 8-14
(P12MOD) (P13MOD) 8-15
H'0080 074E P14 Operation Mode Register P15 Operation Mode Register 8-15
(P14MOD) (P15MOD) 8-16
H'0080 0750 P16 Operation Mode Register P17 Operation Mode Register 8-16
(P16MOD) (P17MOD) 8-17
H'0080 0752 P18 Operation Mode Register P19 Operation Mode Register 8-17
(P18MOD) (P19MOD) 8-18
H'0080 0754 P20 Operation Mode Register P21 Operation Mode Register 8-18
(P20MOD) (P21MOD)
H'0080 0756 P22 Operation Mode Register (Use inhibited area) 8-19
(P22MOD) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0760 Port Group 0,1 Input Level Setting Register Port Group 2,3 Input Level Setting Register 8-25
(PG01LEV) (PG23LEV)
H'0080 0762 Port Group 4,5 Input Level Setting Register Port Group 6,7 Input Level Setting Register 8-25
(PG45LEV) (PG67LEV)
H'0080 0764 Port Group 8 Input Level Setting Register (Use inhibited area) 8-25
(PG8LEV) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 076A P10 Peripheral Output Select Register (Use inhibited area) 8-20
(P10SMOD) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0776 P22 Peripheral Output Select Register (Use inhibited area) 8-20
(P22SMOD)
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
|
|
|
Note: • Although no pins are available for P65–P67, P140–P147, P151, P152, P154–P157, P160–P167, P172, P173, P176,
P177, P180–P187, P190–P197, P200–P203, P210–P217, P222, P226 and P227, because internal circuits are in-
cluded, make sure the ports are set for low-level output when initialized (to prevent current from flowing in through the
port).
8
8-7
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.3.1 Port Data Registers
P0 Data Register (P0DATA) <Address: H’0080 0700>
P1 Data Register (P1DATA) <Address: H’0080 0701>
P2 Data Register (P2DATA) <Address: H’0080 0702>
P3 Data Register (P3DATA) <Address: H’0080 0703>
P4 Data Register (P4DATA) <Address: H’0080 0704>
P6 Data Register (P6DATA) <Address: H’0080 0706>
P7 Data Register (P7DATA) <Address: H’0080 0707>
P8 Data Register (P8DATA) <Address: H’0080 0708>
P9 Data Register (P9DATA) <Address: H’0080 0709>
P10 Data Register (P10DATA) <Address: H’0080 070A>
P11 Data Register (P11DATA) <Address: H’0080 070B>
P12 Data Register (P12DATA) <Address: H’0080 070C>
P13 Data Register (P13DATA) <Address: H’0080 070D>
P14 Data Register (P14DATA) <Address: H’0080 070E>
P15 Data Register (P15DATA) <Address: H’0080 070F>
P16 Data Register (P16DATA) <Address: H’0080 0710>
P17 Data Register (P17DATA) <Address: H’0080 0711>
P18 Data Register (P18DATA) <Address: H’0080 0712>
P19 Data Register (P19DATA) <Address: H’0080 0713>
P20 Data Register (P20DATA) <Address: H’0080 0714>
P21 Data Register (P21DATA) <Address: H’0080 0715>
P22 Data Register (P22DATA) <Address: H’0080 0716>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15)(b8 123456b7b0
Pn0DT Pn1DT Pn2DT Pn3DT Pn4DT Pn5DT Pn6DT Pn7DT
????????
n = 0–22 (not including P5) <After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0(b8) Pn0DT (Port Pn0 data bit) <At read> R W
1(b9) Pn1DT (Port Pn1 data bit) Depends on how the Port Direction Register is set
2(b10) Pn2DT (Port Pn2 data bit) If direction bit = "0" (input mode)
3(b11) Pn3DT (Port Pn3 data bit) 0: Port input pin = "low"
4(b12) Pn4DT (Port Pn4 data bit) 1: Port input pin = "high"
5(b13) Pn5DT (Port Pn5 data bit) If direction bit = "1" (output mode) (Note 1)
6(b14) Pn6DT (Port Pn6 data bit) 0: Port output latch = "0" / Port pin level = "low"
7(b15) Pn7DT (Port Pn7 data bit) 1: Port output latch = "1" / Port pin level = "high"
<At write>
Write to the port output latch
Note 1: To select the port data to read, use the Port Input Special Function Control Register’s port input data select bit (PISEL).
Notes: • No data bits are provided for the following ports (read as "0", writing has no effect):
P40, P60, P90–P92, P120–P123, P170, P171, P204–P207
• The SBI# pin level can be read out by reading the P64DT bit. Writing to the P64DT bit has no effect.
• The MOD0 and MOD1 pin levels can be read out by reading the P80DT and P81DT bits, respectively. Writing to the P80DT
and P81DT bits has no effect.
• P221 is input-only port. Writing to the P221DT bit has no effect.
• Although no pins are available for P65–P67, P140–P147, P151, P152, P154–P157, P160–P167, P172, P173, P176, P177,
P180–P187, P190–P197, P200–P203, P210–P217, P222, P226 and P227, because internal circuits are included, make
sure the ports are set for low-level output when initialized (to prevent current from flowing in through the port).
• Alhough no pins are available for P223, it is internally pulled high (read as "0", writing has no effect).
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
8
8-8
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.3.2 Port Direction Registers
P0 Direction Register (P0DIR) <Address: H’0080 0720>
P1 Direction Register (P1DIR) <Address: H’0080 0721>
P2 Direction Register (P2DIR) <Address: H’0080 0722>
P3 Direction Register (P3DIR) <Address: H’0080 0723>
P4 Direction Register (P4DIR) <Address: H’0080 0724>
P6 Direction Register (P6DIR) <Address: H’0080 0726>
P7 Direction Register (P7DIR) <Address: H’0080 0727>
P8 Direction Register (P8DIR) <Address: H’0080 0728>
P9 Direction Register (P9DIR) <Address: H’0080 0729>
P10 Direction Register (P10DIR) <Address: H’0080 072A>
P11 Direction Register (P11DIR) <Address: H’0080 072B>
P12 Direction Register (P12DIR) <Address: H’0080 072C>
P13 Direction Register (P13DIR) <Address: H’0080 072D>
P14 Direction Register (P14DIR) <Address: H’0080 072E>
P15 Direction Register (P15DIR) <Address: H’0080 072F>
P16 Direction Register (P16DIR) <Address: H’0080 0730>
P17 Direction Register (P17DIR) <Address: H’0080 0731>
P18 Direction Register (P18DIR) <Address: H’0080 0732>
P19 Direction Register (P19DIR) <Address: H’0080 0733>
P20 Direction Register (P20DIR) <Address: H’0080 0734>
P21 Direction Register (P21DIR) <Address: H’0080 0735>
P22 Direction Register (P22DIR) <Address: H’0080 0736>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15)(b8 123456b7b0
Pn0DR Pn1DR Pn2DR Pn3DR Pn4DR Pn5DR Pn6DR Pn7DR
00000000
n = 0–22 (not including P5) <After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0(b8) Pn0DR (Port Pn0 direction bit) 0: Input mode R W
1(b9) Pn1DR (Port Pn1 direction bit) 1: Output mode
2(b10) Pn2DR (Port Pn2 direction bit)
3(b11) Pn3DR (Port Pn3 direction bit)
4(b12) Pn4DR (Port Pn4 direction bit)
5(b13) Pn5DR (Port Pn5 direction bit)
6(b14) Pn6DR (Port Pn6 direction bit)
7(b15) Pn7DR (Port Pn7 direction bit)
Notes: • No direction bits are provided for the following ports (read as 0, writing has no effect):
P40, P60, P64, P80, P81, P90–P92, P120–P123, P170, P171, P204–P207, P221, P223
• After reset, all ports are set for input mode.
• Although no pins are available for P65–P67, P140–P147, P151, P152, P154–P157, P160–P167, P172, P173, P176, P177,
P180–P187, P190–P197, P200–P203, P210–P217, P222, P226 and P227, because internal circuits are included, make
sure the ports are set for low-level output when initialized (to prevent current from flowing in through the port).
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
8
8-9
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.3.3 Port Operation Mode Registers
P0 Operation Mode Register (P0MOD) <Address: H’0080 0740>
123456b7b0
P00MD P01MD P02MD P03MD P04MD P05MD P06MD P07MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 P00MD 0: P00 R W
Port P00 operation mode bit 1: DB0
1 P01MD 0: P01 R W
Port P01 operation mode bit 1: DB1
2 P02MD 0: P02 R W
Port P02 operation mode bit 1: DB2
3 P03MD 0: P03 R W
Port P03 operation mode bit 1: DB3
4 P04MD 0: P04 R W
Port P04 operation mode bit 1: DB4
5 P05MD 0: P05 R W
Port P05 operation mode bit 1: DB5
6 P06MD 0: P06 R W
Port P06 operation mode bit 1: DB6
7 P07MD 0: P07 R W
Port P07 operation mode bit 1: DB7
Note: • P0 Operation Mode Register is useful only when the CPU operates in external extension mode.
P1 Operation Mode Register (P1MOD) <Address: H’0080 0741>
9 1011121314b15b8
P10MD P11MD P12MD P13MD P14MD P15MD P16MD P17MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 P10MD 0: P10 R W
Port P10 operation mode bit 1: DB8
9 P11MD 0: P11 R W
Port P11 operation mode bit 1: DB9
10 P12MD 0: P12 R W
Port P12 operation mode bit 1: DB10
11 P13MD 0: P13 R W
Port P13 operation mode bit 1: DB11
12 P14MD 0: P14 R W
Port P14 operation mode bit 1: DB12
13 P15MD 0: P15 R W
Port P15 operation mode bit 1: DB13
14 P16MD 0: P16 R W
Port P16 operation mode bit 1: DB14
15 P17MD 0: P17 R W
Port P17 operation mode bit 1: DB15
Note: • P1 Operation Mode Register is useful only when the CPU operates in external extension mode.
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
8
8-10
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
P2 Operation Mode Register (P2MOD) <Address: H’0080 0742>
123456b7b0
P20MD P21MD P22MD P23MD P24MD P25MD P26MD P27MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 P20MD 0: P20 R W
Port P20 operation mode bit 1: A23
1 P21MD 0: P21 R W
Port P21 operation mode bit 1: A24
2 P22MD 0: P22 R W
Port P22 operation mode bit 1: A25
3 P23MD 0: P23 R W
Port P23 operation mode bit 1: A26
4 P24MD 0: P24 R W
Port P24 operation mode bit 1: A27
5 P25MD 0: P25 R W
Port P25 operation mode bit 1: A28
6 P26MD 0: P26 R W
Port P26 operation mode bit 1: A29
7 P27MD 0: P27 R W
Port P27 operation mode bit 1: A30
Note: • P2 Operation Mode Register is useful only when the CPU operates in external extension mode.
P3 Operation Mode Register (P3MOD) <Address: H’0080 0743>
9 1011121314b15b8
P30MD P31MD P32MD P33MD P34MD P35MD P36MD P37MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 P30MD 0: P30 R W
Port P30 operation mode bit 1: A15
9 P31MD 0: P31 R W
Port P31 operation mode bit 1: A16
10 P32MD 0: P32 R W
Port P32 operation mode bit 1: A17
11 P33MD 0: P33 R W
Port P33 operation mode bit 1: A18
12 P34MD 0: P34 R W
Port P34 operation mode bit 1: A19
13 P35MD 0: P35 R W
Port P35 operation mode bit 1: A20
14 P36MD 0: P36 R W
Port P36 operation mode bit 1: A21
15 P37MD 0: P37 R W
Port P37 operation mode bit 1: A22
Note: • P3 Operation Mode Register is useful only when the CPU operates in external extension mode.
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
8
8-11
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
P4 Operation Mode Register (P4MOD) <Address: H’0080 0744>
123456b7b0
P44MD P45MD P46MD P47MD
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–3 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
4 P44MD 0: P44 R W
Port P44 operation mode bit 1: CS0#
5 P45MD 0: P45 R W
Port P45 operation mode bit 1: CS1#
6 P46MD 0: P46 R W
Port P46 operation mode bit 1: A13
7 P47MD 0: P47 R W
Port P47 operation mode bit 1: A14
Note: • P4 Operation Mode Register is useful only when the CPU operates in external extension mode.
P6 Operation Mode Register (P6MOD) <Address: H’0080 0746>
123456b7b0
P
65
M
D
P66MD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–4 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
5, 6 Fix to "0". 00
7 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
Notes: • Port P60 is nonexistent.
• P61–P63 are always input/output ports (single-function pins).
• Port P64 is the SBI# input-only pin. The pin level can be known by reading the data register for P64.
• Although no pins are available for P65 and P66, because internal circuits are included, make sure the ports are set for low-
level output when initialized (to prevent current from flowing in through the port).
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
8
8-12
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
P7 Operation Mode Register (P7MOD) <Address: H’0080 0747>
9 1011121314b15b8
P70MD P71MD P72MD P73MD P74MD P75MD P76MD P77MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 P70MD 0: P70 R W
Port P70 operation mode bit 1: BCLK/WR#
9 P71MD 0: P71 R W
Port P71 operation mode bit 1: WAIT#
10 P72MD 0: P72 R W
Port P72 operation mode bit 1: HREQ#
11 P73MD 0: P73 R W
Port P73 operation mode bit 1: HACK#
12 P74MD 0: P74 R W
Port P74 operation mode bit 1: RTDTXD
13 P75MD 0: P75 R W
Port P75 operation mode bit 1: RTDRXD
14 P76MD 0: P76 R W
Port P76 operation mode bit 1: RTDACK
15 P77MD 0: P77 R W
Port P77 operation mode bit 1: RTDCLK
P8 Operation Mode Register (P8MOD) <Address: H’0080 0748>
123456b7b0
P82MD P83MD P84MD P85MD P86MD P87MD
000000
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0,1 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
2 P82MD 0: P82 R W
Port P82 operation mode bit 1: TXD0
3 P83MD 0: P83 R W
Port P83 operation mode bit 1: RXD0
4 P84MD 0: P84 R W
Port P84 operation mode bit 1: SCLKI0/SCLKO0
5 P85MD 0: P85 R W
Port P85 operation mode bit 1: TXD1
6 P86MD 0: P86 R W
Port P86 operation mode bit 1: RXD1
7 P87MD 0: P87 R W
Port P87 operation mode bit 1: SCLKI1/SCLKO1
Note: • Ports P80 and P81 are nonexistent.
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
8
8-13
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
P9 Operation Mode Register (P9MOD) <Address: H’0080 0749>
9 1011121314b15b8
P93MD P94MD P95MD P96MD P97MD
00000
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–10 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
11 P93MD 0: P93 R W
Port P93 operation mode bit 1: TO16
12 P94MD 0: P94 R W
Port P94 operation mode bit 1: TO17
13 P95MD 0: P95 R W
Port P95 operation mode bit 1: TO18
14 P96MD 0: P96 R W
Port P96 operation mode bit 1: TO19
15 P97MD 0: P97 R W
Port P97 operation mode bit 1: TO20
Note: • Ports P90–P92 are nonexistent.
P10 Operation Mode Register (P10MOD) <Address: H’0080 074A>
123456b7b0
P103MD
P102MDP101MDP100MD P104MD P105MD P106MD P107MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 P100MD 0: P100 R W
Port P100 operation mode bit 1: TO8
1 P101MD 0: P101 R W
Port P101 operation mode bit 1: TO9/TXD3 (Note 1)
2 P102MD 0: P102 R W
Port P102 operation mode bit 1: TO10/CTX1 (Note 1)
3 P103MD 0: P103 R W
Port P103 operation mode bit 1: TO11
4 P104MD 0: P104 R W
Port P104 operation mode bit 1: TO12
5 P105MD 0: P105 R W
Port P105 operation mode bit 1: TO13
6 P106MD 0: P106 R W
Port P106 operation mode bit 1: TO14
7 P107MD 0: P107 R W
Port P107 operation mode bit 1: TO15
Note 1: These functions are selected using the P10 Peripheral Output Select Register.
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
8
8-14
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
P11 Operation Mode Register (P11MOD) <Address: H’0080 074B>
9 1011121314b15b8
P113MD
P112MDP111MDP110MD P114MD P115MD P116MD P117MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 P110MD 0: P110 R W
Port P110 operation mode bit 1: TO0
9 P111MD 0: P111 R W
Port P111 operation mode bit 1: TO1
10 P112MD 0: P112 R W
Port P112 operation mode bit 1: TO2
11 P113MD 0: P113 R W
Port P113 operation mode bit 1: TO3
12 P114MD 0: P114 R W
Port P114 operation mode bit 1: TO4
13 P115MD 0: P115 R W
Port P115 operation mode bit 1: TO5
14 P116MD 0: P116 R W
Port P116 operation mode bit 1: TO6
15 P117MD 0: P117 R W
Port P117 operation mode bit 1: TO7
P12 Operation Mode Register (P12MOD) <Address: H’0080 074C>
123456b7b0
P124MD P125MD P126MD P127MD
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–3 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
4 P124MD 0: P124 R W
Port P124 operation mode bit 1: TCLK0
5 P125MD 0: P125 R W
Port P125 operation mode bit 1: TCLK1
6 P126MD 0: P126 R W
Port P126 operation mode bit 1: TCLK2
7 P127MD 0: P127 R W
Port P127 operation mode bit 1: TCLK3
Note: • Ports P120–P123 are nonexistent.
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
8
8-15
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
P13 Operation Mode Register (P13MOD) <Address: H’0080 074D>
9 1011121314b15b8
P133MD
P132MDP131MDP130MD P134MD P135MD P136MD P137MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 P130MD 0: P130 R W
Port P130 operation mode bit 1: TIN16
9 P131MD 0: P131 R W
Port P131 operation mode bit 1: TIN17
10 P132MD 0: P132 R W
Port P132 operation mode bit 1: TIN18
11 P133MD 0: P133 R W
Port P133 operation mode bit 1: TIN19
12 P134MD 0: P134 R W
Port P134 operation mode bit 1: TIN20
13 P135MD 0: P135 R W
Port P135 operation mode bit 1: TIN21/RXD3 (Note 1)
14 P136MD 0: P136 R W
Port P136 operation mode bit 1: TIN22/CRX1 (Note 1)
15 P137MD 0: P137 R W
Port P137 operation mode bit 1: TIN23
Note 1: Both inputs are enabled.
P14 Operation Mode Register (P14MOD) <Address: H’0080 074E>
123456b7b0
P144MD P145MD P146MD P147MDP140MD P141MD P142MD P143MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0-7 Fix to "0". 00
Note : • Although no pins are available for P140 to P147, because internal circuits are included, make sure the ports are set for low-
level output when initialized (to prevent current from flowing in through the port).
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
8
8-16
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
P15 Operation Mode Register (P15MOD) <Address: H’0080 074F>
9 1011121314b15b8
P153MD
P152MDP151MDP150MD P154MD P155MD P156MD P157MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 P150MD 0: P150 R W
Port P150 operation mode bit 1: TIN0
9, 10 Fix to "0". 00
11 P153MD 0: P153 R W
Port P153 operation mode bit 1: TIN3
12-15 Fix to "0". 00
Note : • Although no pins are available for P151, P152 and P154-P157, because internal circuits are included, make sure the ports
are set for low-level output when initialized (to prevent current from flowing in through the port).
P16 Operation Mode Register (P16MOD) <Address: H’0080 0750>
123456b7b0
P164MD P165MD P166MD P167MDP160MD P161MD P162MD P163MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0-7 Fix to "0". 00
Note : • Although no pins are available for P160 to P167, because internal circuits are included, make sure the ports are set for low-
level output when initialized (to prevent current from flowing in through the port).
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
8
8-17
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
P17 Operation Mode Register (P17MOD) <Address: H’0080 0751>
9 1011121314b15b8
P173MD
P172MD P174MD P175MD P176MD P177MD
000000
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8, 9 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
10, 11 Fix to "0". 00
12 P174MD 0: P174 R W
Port P174 operation mode bit 1: TXD2
13 P175MD 0: P175 R W
Port P175 operation mode bit 1: RXD2
14, 15 Fix to "0". 00
Notes: • Ports P170 and P171 are nonexistent.
• Although no pins are available for P172, P173, P176 and P177, because internal circuits are included, make sure the ports
are set for low-level output when initialized (to prevent current from flowing in through the port).
P18 Operation Mode Register (P18MOD) <Address: H’0080 0752>
123456b7b0
P184MD P185MD P186MD P187MDP180MD P181MD P182MD P183MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0-7 Fix to "0". 00
Note : • Although no pins are available for P180 to P187, because internal circuits are included, make sure the ports are set for low-
level output when initialized (to prevent current from flowing in through the port).
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
8
8-18
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
P19 Operation Mode Register (P19MOD) <Address: H’0080 0753>
9 1011121314b15b8
P193MD
P192MD
P191MDP190MD P194MD P195MD P196MD P197MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–15 Fix to "0" 00
Note : • Although no pins are available for P190 to P197, because internal circuits are included, make sure the ports are set for low-
level output when initialized (to prevent current from flowing in through the port).
P20 Operation Mode Register (P20MOD) <Address: H’0080 0754>
123456b7b0
P200MD P201MD P202MD P203MD
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–3 Fix to "0". 00
4–7 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
Notes : • Although no pins are available for P200 to P203, because internal circuits are included, make sure the ports are set for low
level output when initialized (to prevent current from flowing in through the port).
• Ports P204–P207 are nonexistent.
P21 Operation Mode Register (P21MOD) <Address: H’0080 0755>
9 1011121314b15b8
P213MD
P212MD
P211MDP210MD P214MD P215MD P216MD P217MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–15 Fix to "0". 00
Note : • Although no pins are available for P210 to P217, because internal circuits are included, make sure the ports are set for low-
level output when initialized (to prevent current from flowing in through the port).
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
8
8-19
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
P22 Operation Mode Register (P22MOD) <Address: H’0080 0756>
123456b7b0
P220MD P222MD P223MD P224MD P225MD P226MD P227MD
0 000000
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 P220MD 0: P220 R W
Port P220 operation mode bit 1: CTX0
1 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
2, 3 Fix to "0". 00
4 P224MD 0: P224 R W
Port P224 operation mode bit (Note 1) 1: A11/CS2# (Note 2)
5 P225MD 0: P225 R W
Port P225 operation mode bit (Note 1) 1: A12/CS3# (Note 2)
6, 7 Fix to "0". 00
Note 1: Port P224, P225 operation mode bits are useful only when the CPU operates in external extension mode.
Note 2: These functions are selected using the P22 Peripheral Output Select Register.
Notes: • P221 is the CAN input-only pin.
• Although no pins are available for P222, P223, P226 and P227, because internal circuits are included, make sure the ports
are set for low-level output when initialized (to prevent current from flowing in through the port). Port 223 is an input-only pin
so that there is no need to set it for output.
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
8
8-20
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
8.3.4 Port Peripheral Output Select Registers
P10 Peripheral Output Select Register (P10SMOD) <Address: H’0080 076A>
123456b7b0
P101
SMD P1
02
S
M
D
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
1 P101SMD 0: TO9 R W
Port P101 peripheral output select mode bit 1: TXD3
2 P102SMD 0: TO10 R W
Port P102 peripheral output select mode bit 1: CTX1
3–7 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
P22 Peripheral Output Select Register (P22SMOD) <Address: H’0080 0776>
123456b7b0
P224
S
M
D
P22
5
S
M
D
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–3 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
4 P224SMD 0: A11 R W
Port P224 peripheral output select mode bit 1: CS2#
5 P225SMD 0: A12 R W
Port P225 peripheral output select mode bit 1: CS3#
6–7 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
8
8-21
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.3.5 Port Input Special Function Control Register
Port Input Special Function Control Register (PICNT) <Address: H’0080 0745>
9 1011121314b15b8
PIEN0PISELX
S
TA
T
0
00
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–10 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
11 XSTAT 0: XIN oscillating R (Note 1)
XIN oscillation status bit 1: XIN inactive
12–13 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
14 PISEL 0: Content of port output latch R W
Port input data select bit 1: Port pin level
15 PIEN0 0: Disable input R W
Port input enable bit 1: Enable input
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
(1) XSTAT (XIN oscillation status) bit (Bit 11)
1) Conditions under which XSTAT is set to "1"
XSTAT is set to "1" upon detecting that XIN oscillation has stopped. When XIN remains at the same level for
a predetermined time (3 BCLK periods up to 4 BCLK periods), XIN oscillation is assumed to have stopped.
When operating normally, XIN changes state (high or low) once every BCLK period.
2) Conditions under which XSTAT is cleared to "0"
XSTAT is cleared to "0" by a system reset or by writing "0". If XSTAT is cleared at the same time it is set in (1)
above, the former has priority. Writing "1" to XSTAT is ignored.
3) Method for using XSTAT to detect XIN oscillation stoppage
Because the M32R/ECU internally contains a PLL, the internal clock remains active even when XIN oscilla-
tion has stopped.
By reading XSTAT without clearing it never once after reset, it is possible to know whether XIN has ever
stopped since the reset signal was deasserted. Similarly, by reading XSTAT after clearing it by writing "0", it
is possible to know the current oscillating status of XIN. (However, there must be an interval of at least 5
BCLK periods (20 CPU clock periods) between read and write.)
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
8
8-22
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
Read XSTAT
(1) To know whether XIN oscillation has ever stopped after being reset
Write XSTAT = 0
(2) To know the current status of XIN oscillation
Wait for 20 CPU
clock periods or more
Read XSTAT
Wait before inspecting XSTAT
Figure 8.3.1 Procedure for Setting XSTAT
(2) PISEL (Port input data select) bit (Bit 14)
When the Port Direction Register is set for output, this bit selects the target data to be read from the Port Data
Register. This bit is unaffected by the Port Operation Mode Register.
Table 8.3.1 PISEL Bit Settings and the Target Data To Be Read from the Port Data Register
Direction Register PISEL Settings Target Data to Be Read
0 (input) 0/1 Port pin level
1 (output) 0 Port output latch
1 Port pin level
8
8-23
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.3 Input/Output Port Related Registers
(3) PIEN0 (Port input enable) bit (Bit 15)
This bit is used to prevent current from flowing into the port input pins.
Because the input/output ports are disabled against input after reset, if any ports need to be used in input
mode they must be enabled for input by setting this bit to "1".
When disabled against input, the input/output ports are in a state equivalent to a situation where the pin has
a low-level input applied. Consequently, if a peripheral input function is selected for any port (uncontrolled
pin) while disabled against input by using the Port Operation Mode Register, the port may operate unexpect-
edly due to the low-level input on it.
The following shows the procedure for selecting a peripheral input function.
(1) Enable the port for input when its pin level is valid (high or low)
(2) Select a function using the port operation mode bit
During boot mode, the pins shared with serial I/O functions are enabled for input and can therefore be
protected against current flowing in from the pins other than serial I/O functions during flash programming by
clearing PIEN0.
The table below lists the pins that can be controlled by the PIEN0 bit in each operation mode.
Table 8.3.2 Pins Controllable by PIEN0 Bit
Mode Name Controllable Pins Uncontrolled Pins
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27 P221, P223,
P30–P37, P41–P47, P61–P63 FP, MOD0, MOD1, SBI#, RESET#
Single-chip P65–P67, P70–P77, P82–P87
P93–P97, P100–P107, P110–P117
P124–P127, P130–P137, P140–P147
P150–P157, P160–P167, P172–P177
P180–P187, P190–P197, P200–P203
P210–P217, P220, P222, P224–P227
P61–P63, P65–P67, P70–P77 P00–P07, P10–P17
P82–P87, P93–P97, P100–P107 P20–P27, P30–P37
External extension P110–P117, P124–P127, P130–P137 P41–P47, P221, P223–P227
Microprocessor P140–P147, P150–P157, P160–P167 FP, MOD0, MOD1, SBI#, RESET#
P172–P177, P180–P187, P190–P197
P200–P203, P210–P217, P220, P222
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27 P65, P66, P82–P87, P101
P30–P37, P41–P47, P61–P63 P135–P136, P174–P177, P200–P203
Boot P67, P70–P77, P93–P97 P221, P223,
(single-chip) P100, P102–P107, P110–P117, P124–P127 FP, MOD0, MOD1, SBI#, RESET#
P130–P134, P137, P140–P147, P150–P157
P160–P167, P172–P173, P180–P187
P190–P197, P210–P217, P220
P222, P224–P227
Note : • No pins are available for P65-P67, P140-P147, P151, P152, P154-P157, P160-P167, P172, P173, P176, P177,
P180-P187, P190-P197, P200-P203, P210-P217, P222, P223, P226 and P227.
8
8-24
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.4 Port Input Level Switching Function
The port input level switching function allows the port threshold to be switched to one of three voltage levels (with
or without Schmitt as selected) in units of the following port group.
Group 0: P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27, P30–P37, P41–P47, P70–P73, P224-P227
Group 1: P65–P67, P82–P87, P172–P177
Group 2: P160–P167, P210–P217
Group 3: P93–P97, P110–P117
Group 4: P124–P127, P140–P147, P190–P197
Group 5: P61–P63, SBI#
Group 6: P74–P77, P180–P187, P100–P107
Group 7: P136, P220–P223
Group 8: P130–P135, P137, P150–P157, P200–P203
8.4 Port Input Level Switching Function
Figure 8.4.1 Port Input Level Switching Groups
32182 Group
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
P97/TO20
P117/TO7
P116/TO6
P115/TO5
P114/TO4
P113/TO3
P112/TO2
P111/TO1
P110/TO0
P127/TCLK3
P126/TCLK2
P125/TCLK1
P124/TCLK0
EXCVCC
VCCE
VSS
VSS
SBI#
P63
P62
P61
AD0IN11
AD0IN10
AD0IN9
AD0IN8
AVSS0
AD0IN7
AD0IN6
AD0IN5
AD0IN4
AD0IN3
AD0IN2
AD0IN1
AD0IN0
VREF0
AVCC0
P150/TIN0
P153/TIN3
P130/TIN16
P131/TIN17
P132/TIN18
P133/TIN19
P134/TIN20
P135/TIN21/RXD3
P136/TIN22/CRX1
P137/TIN23
P220/CTX0
P221/CRX0
VCCE
VCNT
OSC-VCC
XIN
OSC-VSS
XOUT
RESET#
P74/RTDTXD
P75/RTDRXD
P76/RTDACK
P77/RTDCLK
JTDI
JTDO
JTRST
JTCK
JTMS
P100/TO8
P101/TO9/TXD3
P102/TO10/CTX1
P103/TO11
P104/TO12
P105/TO13
P106/TO14
P107/TO15
P174/TXD2
P175/RXD2
FP
MOD0
MOD1
EXCVDD
VSS
EXCVCC
VDDE
VSS
VCCE
P17/DB15
P16/DB14
P15/DB13
P14/DB12
P13/DB11
P12/DB10
P11/DB9
P10/DB8
P07/DB7
P06/DB6
P05/DB5
P04/DB4
P03/DB3
P02/DB2
P01/DB1
P00/DB0
P73/HACK#
P72/HREQ#
P71/WAIT#
P70/BCLK/WR#
P43/RD#
P42/BHW#/BHE#
P41/BLW#/BLE#
VCC-BUS
VSS
P82/TXD0
P83/RXD0
P84/SCLKI0/SCLKO0
P85/TXD1
P86/RXD1
P87/SCLKI1/SCLKO1
VSS
VCCE
P44/CS0#
P45/CS1#
P224/A11/CS2#
P225/A12/CS3#
P46/A13
P47/A14
P30/A15
P31/A16
P32/A17
P33/A18
P34/A19
P35/A20
P36/A21
P37/A22
P20/A23
P21/A24
P22/A25
P23/A26
P24/A27
P25/A28
P26/A29
P27/A30
VCC-BUS
VSS
P93/TO16
P94/TO17
P95/TO18
P96/TO19
Port group 0
Port group 8
Port group 7
Port group 8
Port group 7
Port group 6
Port group 6
Port group 5
Port group 4
Port group 3
Port group 0
Port group 1
8
8-25
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.4 Port Input Level Switching Function
Port Group 0,1 Input Level Setting Register (PG01LEV) <Address: H’0080 0760>
123456b7b0
WF0SEL PT0SEL VT0SEL0 VT0SEL1 WF1SEL PT1SEL VT1SEL0 VT1SEL1
00010001
Port Group 2,3 Input Level Setting Register (PG23LEV) <Address: H’0080 0761>
9 1011121314b15b8
WF2SEL PT2SEL VT2SEL0 VT2SEL1 WF3SEL PT3SEL VT3SEL0 VT3SEL1
00010001
Port Group 4,5 Input Level Setting Register (PG45LEV) <Address: H’0080 0762>
123456b7b0
WF4SEL PT4SEL VT4SEL0 VT4SEL1 WF5SEL PT5SEL VT5SEL0 VT5SEL1
00010001
Port Group 6,7 Input Level Setting Register (PG67LEV) <Address: H’0080 0763>
9 1011121314b15b8
WF6SEL PT6SEL VT6SEL0 VT6SEL1 WF7SEL PT7SEL VT7SEL0 VT7SEL1
00010001
Port Group 8 Input Level Setting Register (PG8LEV) <Address: H’0080 0764>
123456b7b0
WF8SEL PT8SEL VT8SEL0 VT8SEL1
0001
0
0
0
0
Note: • The PG8LEV register bits 4–7 have no functions assigned. <After reset: B’0001>
b Bit Name Function R W
0(4) WFnSEL 0: Select standard input for each pin R W
8(12) Group n dual-function input select bit 1: Select threshold switching function
1(5) PTnSEL 0: Select CMOS input R W
9(13) Group n port input select bit 1: Select Schmitt input
2–3 VTnSEL <When PTnSEL = "0" (CMOS input selected)> R W
(6–7) Group n input threshold select bit 00: Select 0.35 VCCE
10–11 01: Select 0.5 VCCE
(14–15) 10: Select 0.7 VCCE
11: Settings inhibited
<When PTnSEL = "1" (Schmitt input selected)>
00: VT+ = 0.5 VCCE
VT– = 0.35 VCCE
01: Settings inhibited
10: VT+ = 0.7 VCCE
VT– = 0.35 VCCE
11: VT+ = 0.7 VCCE
VT– = 0.5VCCE
Notes: • The following ports operate with the VCC-BUS power supply, and not with the VCCE power supply. Therefore, the
reference voltages for these ports are the VCC-BUS input voltage.
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27, P30–P37, P41–P47, P70–P73, P224–P227
• No pins are available for P65-P67, P140-P147, P151, P152, P154-P157, P160-P167, P172, P173, P176, P177, P180-
P187, P190-P197, P200-P203, P210-P217, P222, P223, P226 and P227.
8
8-26
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 8.4.2 Port Level Switching Function
8.4 Port Input Level Switching Function
VT+
VT-Schmitt
Peripheral function
input
Port input
Pin
0.7VCCE
0.5VCCE
0.35VCCE CMOS
S
S
S
S
S
WFnSEL
PTnSEL
VTnSELL
Threshold
Input function enable
Standard input level for each peripheral function pin
8
8-27
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.5 Port Peripheral Circuits
Figures 8.5.1 through 8.5.4 show the peripheral circuit diagrams of the input/output ports described in the preced-
ing pages.
Figure 8.5.1 Port Peripheral Circuit Diagram (1)
Data bus
Operation mode register
Input function
enable
Peripheral function input
Port output latch
Direction register
Input data select bit
Port level
switching function
(Standard:
peripheral TTL)
P44(CS0#)
P45(CS1#)
P70(BCLK/WR#)
P82(TXD0)
P85(TXD1)
P93–P97(TO16–TO20)
P100(TO8)
P103–P107(TO11–TO15)
P110–P117(TO0–TO7)
P174(TXD2)
P220(CTX0)
P00–P07(DB0–DB7)
P10–P17(DB8–DB15)
P20–P27(A23–A30)
P30–P37(A15–A22)
P46, P47(A13, A14)
P71(WAIT#)
P73(HACK#)
P74(RTDTXD)
P76(RTDACK)
P224(A11/CS2#)
P225(A12/CS3#)
(Note 1)
Data bus
Operation mode register
Input function
enable
Peripheral function output
Port output latch
Direction register
Input data select bit
P ort lev el s witching
function (No
peripheral input)
(Note 1)
Note 1: For details about the port level switching function, see Section 8.4, "Port Input Level Switching Function."
Notes: • During processor mode, P00-P07, P10-P17, P20-P27, P30-P37, P45-P47, P224, and P225 are external bus
interface control signal pins, but their functional description in this block diagram is omitted.
• Although P224 and P225 serve triple functions, their functional description in this block diagram is omitted.
The circle denotes a pin.
The symbol denotes a parasitic diode. Make sure the voltage applied to each pin does not exceed the
VCCE voltage.
The input capacitance of each pin is approximately 10 pF.
8.5 Port Peripheral Circuits
8
8-28
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 8.5.2 Port Peripheral Circuit Diagram (2)
8.5 Port Peripheral Circuits
Data bus
Peripheral function input Port level switching
function (Standard:
peripheral Schmitt)
P72(HREQ#)
P75(RTDRXD)
P77(RTDCLK)
P83(RXD0)
P86(RXD1)
P124–P127(TCLK0–TCLK3)
P130–P134(TIN16–TIN20)
P137(TIN23)
P150, P153(TIN0, TIN3)
P175(RXD2)
(Note 1)
Data bus
Port level switching
function (No
peripheral input)
(Note 1)
Peripheral output
select register
Peripheral function output 1
Peripheral function output 2
P101(TO9/TXD3)
P102(TO10/CTX1)
Data bus
Peripheral function input 1 Port level switching
function (Standard:
peripheral Schmitt)
P135(TIN21/RXD3)
P136(TIN22/CRX1)
(Note 1)
Peripheral function input 2
Note 1: For details about the port level switching function, see Section 8.4, "Port Input Level Switching Function."
Notes: • The circle denotes a pin.
• The symbol denotes a parasitic diode. Make sure the voltage applied to each pin does not exceed the VCCE voltage.
• The input capacitance of each pin is approximately 10 pF.
Operation mode register
Input function
enable
Port output latch
Direction register
Input data select bit
Operation mode register
Input function
enable
Port output latch
Direction register
Input data select bit
Operation mode register
Input function
enable
Port output latch
Direction register
Input data select bit
8
8-29
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.5 Port Peripheral Circuits
Operation mode register
Direction register
Port output latch
Data bus
UART/CSIO function
select bit
Internal/external clock
select bit
SCLKOi output
P84(SCLKI0/SCLKO0)
P87(SCLKI1/SCLKO1)
P41(BLW#/BLE#)
P42(BHW#/BHE#)
P43(RD#)
P61-P63 Data bus Port output latch
Direction register
Input data select bit
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
Input data select bit
Input function
enable
Input function
enable
Port level switching
function (No
peripheral input)
Port level switching
function (Standard:
peripheral Schmitt)
Note 1: For details about the port level switching function, see Section 8.4, "Port Input Level Switching Function."
Notes: • During processor and external extension modes, P41-P43 are external bus interface control signal pins, but their
functional description in this block diagram is omitted.
The circle denotes a pin.
The symbol denotes a parasitic diode. Make sure the voltage applied to each pin does not exceed the VCCE voltage.
The input capacitance of each pin is approximately 10 pF.
SCLKIi input
Figure 8.5.3 Port Peripheral Circuit Diagram (3)
8
8-30
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.5 Port Peripheral Circuits
Figure 8.5.4 Port Peripheral Circuit Diagram (4)
OSC-VCC,
VCCE, VDDE
VCC-BUS,
EXCVCC, EXCVDD
MOD0, MOD1
FP
JTDI, JTCK, JTMS
JTDO
RESET#, XIN, JTRST
Output control
AD0IN012,
VREF0,
XOUT
SBI#
P221(CRX0) Data bus
SBI#, CRX0
Note 1: For details about the port level switching function, see Section 8.4, "Port Input Level Switching Function."
Notes: • The circle denotes a pin.
• The symbol denotes a parasitic diode. Make sure the voltage applied to each pin does not exceed
the VCCE voltage.
Port level switching
function (Standard:
peripheral Schmitt)
8
8-31
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
8.6 Precautions on Input/Output Ports
• When using input/output ports in output mode
Because the value of the Port Data Register is undefined after reset, the Port Data Register must have its initial
value set in it before the Port Direction Register can be set for output. Conversely, if the Port Direction Register
is set for output before setting data in the Port Data Register, the Port Data Register outputs an undefined value
until any data is written into it.
• About the port input disable function
Because the input/output ports are disabled against input after reset, they must be enabled for input by setting
the Port Input Enable (PIEN0) bit to "1" before their input functions can be used.
When disabled against input, the input/output ports are in a state equivalent to a situation where the pin has a
low-level input applied. Consequently, if a peripheral input function is selected for any port (uncontrolled pin)
while disabled against input by using the Port Operation Mode Register, the port may operate unexpectedly due
to the low-level input on it.
8.6 Precautions on Input/Output Ports
8
8-32
INPUT/OUTPUT PORTS AND PIN FUNCTIONS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
This page is blank for reasons of layout.
8.6 Precautions on Input/Output Ports
CHAPTER 9
DMAC
9.1 Outline of the DMAC
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
9.3 Functional Description of the DMAC
9.4 Precautions about the DMAC
9
9-2
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.1 Outline of the DMAC
The microcomputer internally contains a 10-channel DMAC (Direct Memory Access Controller). It allows data to
be transferred at high speed between internal peripheral I/Os, between internal RAM and internal peripheral I/O, or
between internal RAMs, as initiated by a software trigger or requested from an internal peripheral I/O.
Table 9.1.1 Outline of the DMAC
Item Description
Number of channels 10 channels
Transfer request sources • Software trigger
• Request from internal peripheral I/Os: A-D converter, multijunction timer, serial I/O (reception
completed, transmit buffer empty) or CAN
• DMA channels can be cascaded (Note 1)
Maximum number of 65,536 times
times transferred
Transferable address • 64 Kbytes (address space from H’0080 0000 to H’0080 FFFF)
space • Transfers between internal peripheral I/Os, between internal RAM and internal peripheral I/O, and
between internal RAMs are supported.
Transfer data size 16 or 8 bits
Transfer method Single transfer DMA (control of the internal bus is relinquished for each transfer performed), dual-
address transfer
Transfer mode Single transfer mode
Direction of transfer One of three modes can be selected for the source and destination:
• Address fixed
• Address incremental
• Ring buffered
Channel priority DMA0 > DMA1 > DMA2 > DMA3 > DMA4 > DMA5 > DMA6 > DMA7 > DMA8 > DMA9
(Priority is fixed)
Maximum transfer rate 13.3 Mbytes per second (when internal peripheral clock BCLK = 20 MHz)
Interrupt request Group interrupt request can be generated when each transfer count register underflows.
Transfer area 64 Kbytes from H’0080 0000 to H’0080 FFFF (Note 2)
Note 1: The DMA channels can be cascaded in the manner described below.
• Start DMA transfer on DMA1 upon completion of one DMA transfer on DMA0
• Start DMA transfer on DMA5 upon completion of all DMA transfers on DMA0 (upon underflow of the transfer count
register)
• Start DMA transfer on DMA2 upon completion of one DMA transfer on DMA1
• Start DMA transfer on DMA0 upon completion of one DMA transfer on DMA2
• Start DMA transfer on DMA3 upon completion of one DMA transfer on DMA2
• Start DMA transfer on DMA4 upon completion of one DMA transfer on DMA3
• Start DMA transfer on DMA6 upon completion of one DMA transfer on DMA5
• Start DMA transfer on DMA7 upon completion of one DMA transfer on DMA6
• Start DMA transfer on DMA5 upon completion of one DMA transfer on DMA7
• Start DMA transfer on DMA8 upon completion of one DMA transfer on DMA7
• Start DMA transfer on DMA9 upon completion of one DMA transfer on DMA8
Note 2: Address space from H'0081 0000 to H'0081 3FFF cannot be transferred into the internal RAM area.
9.1 Outline of the DMAC
9DMAC
9-3 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 9.1.1 Block Diagram of the DMAC
9.1 Outline of the DMAC
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
SDMA0 udf
end
DMA1 udf
end
DMA2 udf
end
DMA3 udf
end
DMA4 udf
end
DMA5 udf
end
DMA6 udf
end
DMA7 udf
end
DMA8 udf
end
DMA9 udf
end
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
AD0 conversion
completed
TIO8_udf
TIN0S
CAN0_S0/S15
TIN3S
AD0 conversion
completed
TIO8_udf
Software
start
Software start
TIN18S
Software start
SIO0_TXD
SIO1_RXD
Software start
SIO0_RXD
Software start
Software start
DMA0–4
interrupt
DMA5–9
interrupt
SIO2_RXD
SIO1_TXD
Software start
SIO2_TXD
Software start
SIO3_RXD
Software start
SIO3_TXD
Software start
CAN0_S1/S14
TIN0S
TIN19S
SIO0_TXD
TIN20S
SIO1_RXD
SIO3_TXD
0123
Input event bus Output event bus
3210
3210 0123
9
9-4
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
The diagram below shows a memory map of the DMAC related registers.
DMAC Related Register Map (1/2)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 0400 DMA0–4 Interrupt Request Status Register DMA0–4 Interrupt Request Mask Register 9-24
(DM04ITST) (DM04ITMK) 9-25
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0408 DMA5–9 Interrupt Request Status Register DMA5–9 Interrupt Request Mask Register 9-24
(DM59ITST) (DM59ITMK) 9-25
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0410 DMA0 Channel Control Register 0 DMA0 Channel Control Register 1 9-6
(DM0CNT0) (DM0CNT1)
H'0080 0412 DMA0 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM0SA)
H'0080 0414 DMA0 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM0DA)
H'0080 0416 DMA0 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM0TCT)
H'0080 0418 DMA5 Channel Control Register 0 DMA5 Channel Control Register 1 9-11
(DM5CNT0) (DM5CNT1)
H'0080 041A DMA5 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM5SA)
H'0080 041C DMA5 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM5DA)
H'0080 041E DMA5 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM5TCT)
H'0080 0420 DMA1 Channel Control Register 0 DMA1 Channel Control Register 1 9-7
(DM1CNT0) (DM1CNT1)
H'0080 0422 DMA1 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM1SA)
H'0080 0424 DMA1 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM1DA)
H'0080 0426 DMA1 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM1TCT)
H'0080 0428 DMA6 Channel Control Register 0 DMA6 Channel Control Register 1 9-12
(DM6CNT0) (DM6CNT1)
H'0080 042A DMA6 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM6SA)
H'0080 042C DMA6 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM6DA)
H'0080 042E DMA6 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM6TCT)
H'0080 0430 DMA2 Channel Control Register 0 DMA2 Channel Control Register 1 9-8
(DM2CNT0) (DM2CNT1)
H'0080 0432 DMA2 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM2SA)
H'0080 0434 DMA2 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM2DA)
H'0080 0436 DMA2 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM2TCT)
H'0080 0438 DMA7 Channel Control Register 0 DMA7 Channel Control Register 1 9-13
(DM7CNT0) (DM7CNT1)
H'0080 043A DMA7 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM7SA)
H'0080 043C DMA7 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM7DA)
H'0080 043E DMA7 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM7TCT)
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
|
|
9DMAC
9-5 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
DMAC Related Register Map (2/2)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 0440 DMA3 Channel Control Register 0 DMA3 Channel Control Register 1 9-9
(DM3CNT0) (DM3CNT1)
H'0080 0442 DMA3 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM3SA)
H'0080 0444 DMA3 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM3DA)
H'0080 0446 DMA3 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM3TCT)
H'0080 0448 DMA8 Channel Control Register 0 DMA8 Channel Control Register 1 9-14
(DM8CNT0) (DM8CNT1)
H'0080 044A DMA8 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM8SA)
H'0080 044C DMA8 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM8DA)
H'0080 044E DMA8 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM8TCT)
H'0080 0450 DMA4 Channel Control Register 0 DMA4 Channel Control Register 1 9-10
(DM4CNT0) (DM4CNT1)
H'0080 0452 DMA4 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM4SA)
H'0080 0454 DMA4 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM4DA)
H'0080 0456 DMA4 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM4TCT)
H'0080 0458 DMA9 Channel Control Register 0 DMA9 Channel Control Register 1 9-15
(DM9CNT0) (DM9CNT1)
H'0080 045A DMA9 Source Address Register 9-19
(DM9SA)
H'0080 045C DMA9 Destination Address Register 9-20
(DM9DA)
H'0080 045E DMA9 Transfer Count Register 9-21
(DM9TCT)
H'0080 0460 DMA0 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM0SRI)
H'0080 0462 DMA1 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM1SRI)
H'0080 0464 DMA2 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM2SRI)
H'0080 0466 DMA3 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM3SRI)
H'0080 0468 DMA4 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM4SRI)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0470 DMA5 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM5SRI)
H'0080 0472 DMA6 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM6SRI)
H'0080 0474 DMA7 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM7SRI)
H'0080 0476 DMA8 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM8SRI)
H'0080 0478 DMA9 Software Request Generation Register 9-18
(DM9SRI)
|
9
9-6
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.2.1 DMA Channel Control Registers
DMA0 Channel Control Register 0 (DM0CNT0) <Address: H’0080 0410>
123456b7b0
SADSL0 DADSL0
MDSEL0 TREQF0 REQSL0 TENL0 TSZSL0
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 MDSEL0 0: Normal mode R W
DMA0 transfer mode select bit 1: Ring buffer mode
1 TREQF0 0: Transfer not requested R(Note 1)
DMA0 transfer request flag bit 1: Transfer requested
2, 3 REQSL0 00: Software start or one DMA2 transfer completed R W
DMA0 transfer request source select bit 01: A-D0 conversion completed
10: MJT (TIO8_udf)
11: Extended DMA0 transfer request source select
(DMA0 Channel Control Register 1)
4 TENL0 0: Disable transfer R W
DMA0 transfer enable bit 1: Enable transfer
5 TSZSL0 0: 16 bits R W
DMA0 transfer size select bit 1: 8 bits
6 SADSL0 0: Fixed R W
DMA0 source address direction select bit 1: Increment
7 DADSL0 0: Fixed R W
DMA0 destination address direction select bit 1: Increment
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
DMA0 Channel Control Register 1 (DM0CNT1) <Address: H’0080 0411>
9 1011121314b15b8 REQESEL0
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–11 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
12–15 REQESEL0 0000: MJT (input event bus 2) R W
Extended DMA0 transfer request source select bit 0001: Settings inhibited
0010: CAN (CAN0_S0/S15)
0011: Common 1) MJT (input event bus 1)
0100: Common 2) MJT (input event bus 3)
0101: Common 3) MJT (output event bus 2)
0110: Common 4) MJT (output event bus 3)
0111: Common 5) AD0 conversion completed
1000: Common 6) MJT (TIN0S)
1001: Common 7) MJT (TIO8_udf)
1010: Settings inhibited
1111: Settings inhibited
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
| |
9DMAC
9-7 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
DMA1 Channel Control Register 0 (DM1CNT0) <Address: H’0080 0420>
123456b7b0
SADSL1 DADSL1
MDSEL1 TREQF1 REQSL1 TENL1 TSZSL1
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 MDSEL1 0: Normal mode R W
DMA1 transfer mode select bit 1: Ring buffer mode
1 TREQF1 0: Transfer not requested R(Note 1)
DMA1 transfer request flag bit 1: Transfer requested
2, 3 REQSL1 00: Software start R W
DMA1 transfer request source select bit 01: MJT (output event bus 0)
10: Settings inhibited
11: Extended DMA1 transfer request source select
(DMA1 Channel Control Register 1)
4 TENL1 0: Disable transfer R W
DMA1 transfer enable bit 1: Enable transfer
5 TSZSL1 0: 16 bits R W
DMA1 transfer size select bit 1: 8 bits
6 SADSL1 0: Fixed R W
DMA1 source address direction select bit 1: Increment
7 DADSL1 0: Fixed R W
DMA1 destination address direction select bit 1: Increment
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
DMA1 Channel Control Register 1 (DM1CNT1) <Address: H’0080 0421>
9 1011121314b15b8 REQESEL1
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–11 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
12–15 REQESEL1 0000: One DMA0 transfer completed R W
Extended DMA1 transfer request source select bit 0001: MJT(TIN3S)
0010: Settings inhibited
0011: Common 1) MJT (input event bus 1)
0100: Common 2) MJT (input event bus 3)
0101: Common 3) MJT (output event bus 2)
0110: Common 4) MJT (output event bus 3)
0111: Common 5) AD0 conversion completed
1000: Common 6) MJT (TIN0S)
1001: Common 7) MJT (TIO8_udf)
1010: Settings inhibited
1111: Settings inhibited
| |
9
9-8
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
DMA2 Channel Control Register 0 (DM2CNT0) <Address: H’0080 0430>
123456b7b0
SADSL2 DADSL2MDSEL2 TREQF2 REQSL2 TENL2 TSZSL2
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 MDSEL2 0: Normal mode R W
DMA2 transfer mode select bit 1: Ring buffer mode
1 TREQF2 0: Transfer not requested R(Note 1)
DMA2 transfer request flag bit 1: Transfer requested
2, 3 REQSL2 00: Software start R W
DMA2 transfer request source select bit 01: MJT (output event bus 1)
10: MJT (TIN18S)
11: Extended DMA2 transfer request source select
(DMA2 Channel Control Register 1)
4 TENL2 0: Disable transfer R W
DMA2 transfer enable bit 1: Enable transfer
5 TSZSL2 0: 16 bits R W
DMA2 transfer size select bit 1: 8 bits
6 SADSL2 0: Fixed R W
DMA2 source address direction select bit 1: Increment
7 DADSL2 0: Fixed R W
DMA2 destination address direction select bit 1: Increment
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
DMA2 Channel Control Register 1 (DM2CNT1) <Address: H’0080 0431>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8 REQESEL2
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–11 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
12–15 REQESEL2 0000: One DMA1 transfer completed R W
Extended DMA2 transfer request source select bit 0001: Settings inhibited
0010: CAN(CAN0_S1/S14)
0011: Common 1) MJT (input event bus 1)
0100: Common 2) MJT (input event bus 3)
0101: Common 3) MJT (output event bus 2)
0110: Common 4) MJT (output event bus 3)
0111: Common 5) AD0 conversion completed
1000: Common 6) MJT (TIN0S)
1001: Common 7) MJT (TIO8_udf)
1010: Settings inhibited
1111: Settings inhibited
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
| |
9DMAC
9-9 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
DMA3 Channel Control Register 0 (DM3CNT0) <Address: H’0080 0440>
123456b7b0
SADSL3 DADSL3MDSEL3 TREQF3 REQSL3 TENL3 TSZSL3
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 MDSEL3 0: Normal mode R W
DMA3 transfer mode select bit 1: Ring buffer mode
1 TREQF3 0: Transfer not requested R(Note 1)
DMA3 transfer request flag bit 1: Transfer requested
2, 3 REQSL3 00: Software start R W
DMA3 transfer request source select bit 01: SIO0_TXD (transmit buffer empty)
10: SIO1_RXD
11: Extended DMA3 transfer request source select
(DMA3 Channel Control Register 1)
4 TENL3 0: Disable transfer R W
DMA3 transfer enable bit 1: Enable transfer
5 TSZSL3 0: 16 bits R W
DMA3 transfer size select bit 1: 8 bits
6 SADSL3 0: Fixed R W
DMA3 source address direction select bit 1: Increment
7 DADSL3 0: Fixed R W
DMA3 destination address direction select bit 1: Increment
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
DMA3 Channel Control Register 1 (DM3CNT1) <Address: H’0080 0441>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8 REQESEL3
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–11 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
12–15 REQESEL3 0000: MJT(TIN0) R W
Extended DMA3 transfer request source select bit 0001: One DMA2 transfer completed
0010: Settings inhibited
0011: Common 1) MJT (input event bus 1)
0100: Common 2) MJT (input event bus 3)
0101: Common 3) MJT (output event bus 2)
0110: Common 4) MJT (output event bus 3)
0111: Common 5) AD0 conversion completed
1000: Common 6) MJT (TIN0S)
1001: Common 7) MJT (TIO8_udf)
1010: Settings inhibited
1111: Settings inhibited
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
| |
9
9-10
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
DMA4 Channel Control Register 0 (DM4CNT0) <Address: H’0080 0450>
123456b7b0
SADSL4 DADSL4MDSEL4 TREQF4 REQSL4 TENL4 TSZSL4
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 MDSEL4 0: Normal mode R W
DMA4 transfer mode select bit 1: Ring buffer mode
1 TREQF4 0: Transfer not requested R(Note 1)
DMA4 transfer request flag bit 1: Transfer requested
2, 3 REQSL4 00: Software start R W
DMA4 transfer request source select bit 01: One DMA3 transfer completed
10: SIO0_RXD
11: Extended DMA4 transfer request source select
(DMA4 Channel Control Register 1)
4 TENL4 0: Disable transfer R W
DMA4 transfer enable bit 1: Enable transfer
5 TSZSL4 0: 16 bits R W
DMA4 transfer size select bit 1: 8 bits
6 SADSL4 0: Fixed R W
DMA4 source address direction select bit 1: Increment
7 DADSL4 0: Fixed R W
DMA4 destination address direction select bit 1: Increment
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
DMA4 Channel Control Register 1 (DM4CNT1) <Address: H’0080 0451>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8 REQESEL4
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–11 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
12–15 REQESEL4 0000: MJT(TIN19S) R W
Extended DMA4 transfer request source select bit 0001: SIO0_TXD (transmit buffer empty)
0010: Settings inhibited
0011: Common 1) MJT (input event bus 1)
0100: Common 2) MJT (input event bus 3)
0101: Common 3) MJT (output event bus 2)
0110: Common 4) MJT (output event bus 3)
0111: Common 5) AD0 conversion completed
1000: Common 6) MJT (TIN0S)
1001: Common 7) MJT (TIO8_udf)
1010: Settings inhibited
1111: Settings inhibited
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
| |
9DMAC
9-11 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
DMA5 Channel Control Register 0 (DM5CNT0) <Address: H’0080 0418>
123456b7b0
SADSL5 DADSL5MDSEL5 TREQF5 REQSL5 TENL5 TSZSL5
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 MDSEL5 0: Normal mode R W
DMA5 transfer mode select bit 1: Ring buffer mode
1 TREQF5 0: Transfer not requested R(Note 1)
DMA5 transfer request flag bit 1: Transfer requested
2, 3 REQSL5 00: Software start or one DMA7 transfer completed R W
DMA5 transfer request source select bit 01: All DMA0 transfers completed
10: SIO2_RXD
11: Extended DMA5 transfer request source select
(DMA5 Channel Control Register 1)
4 TENL5 0: Disable transfer R W
DMA5 transfer enable bit 1: Enable transfer
5 TSZSL5 0: 16 bits R W
DMA5 transfer size select bit 1: 8 bits
6 SADSL5 0: Fixed R W
DMA5 source address direction select bit 1: Increment
7 DADSL5 0: Fixed R W
DMA5 destination address direction select bit 1: Increment
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
DMA5 Channel Control Register 1 (DM5CNT1) <Address: H’0080 0419>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8 REQESEL5
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–11 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
12–15 REQESEL5 0000: MJT(TIN20S) R W
Extended DMA5 transfer request source select bit 0001: Settings inhibited
0010: Settings inhibited
0011: Common 1) MJT (input event bus 1)
0100: Common 2) MJT (input event bus 3)
0101: Common 3) MJT (output event bus 2)
0110: Common 4) MJT (output event bus 3)
0111: Common 5) AD0 conversion completed
1000: Common 6) MJT (TIN0S)
1001: Common 7) MJT (TIO8_udf)
1010: Settings inhibited
1111: Settings inhibited
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
| |
9
9-12
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
DMA6 Channel Control Register 0 (DM6CNT0) <Address: H’0080 0428>
123456b7b0
SADSL6 DADSL6MDSEL6 TREQF6 REQSL6 TENL6 TSZSL6
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 MDSEL6 0: Normal mode R W
DMA6 transfer mode select bit 1: Ring buffer mode
1 TREQF6 0: Transfer not requested R(Note 1)
DMA6 transfer request flag bit 1: Transfer requested
2, 3 REQSL6 00: Software start R W
DMA6 transfer request source select bit 01: SIO1_TXD (transmit buffer empty)
10: Settings inhibited
11: Extended DMA6 transfer request source select
(DMA6 Channel Control Register 1)
4 TENL6 0: Disable transfer R W
DMA6 transfer enable bit 1: Enable transfer
5 TSZSL6 0: 16 bits R W
DMA6 transfer size select bit 1: 8 bits
6 SADSL6 0: Fixed R W
DMA6 source address direction select bit 1: Increment
7 DADSL6 0: Fixed R W
DMA6 destination address direction select bit 1: Increment
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
DMA6 Channel Control Register 1 (DM6CNT1) <Address: H’0080 0429>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8 REQESEL6
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–11 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
12–15 REQESEL6 0000: One DMA5 transfer completed R W
Extended DMA6 transfer request source select bit 0001: Settings inhibited
0010: SIO1_RXD
0011: Common 1) MJT (input event bus 1)
0100: Common 2) MJT (input event bus 3)
0101: Common 3) MJT (output event bus 2)
0110: Common 4) MJT (output event bus 3)
0111: Common 5) AD0 conversion completed
1000: Common 6) MJT (TIN0S)
1001: Common 7) MJT (TIO8_udf)
1010: Settings inhibited
1111: Settings inhibited
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
| |
9DMAC
9-13 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
DMA7 Channel Control Register 0 (DM7CNT0) <Address: H’0080 0438>
123456b7b0
SADSL7 DADSL7MDSEL7 TREQF7 REQSL7 TENL7 TSZSL7
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 MDSEL7 0: Normal mode R W
DMA7 transfer mode select bit 1: Ring buffer mode
1 TREQF7 0: Transfer not requested R(Note 1)
DMA7 transfer request flag bit 1: Transfer requested
2, 3 REQSL7 00: Software start R W
DMA7 transfer request source select bit 01: SIO2_TXD (transmit buffer empty)
10: Settings inhibited
11: Extended DMA7 transfer request source select
(DMA7 Channel Control Register 1)
4 TENL7 0: Disable transfer R W
DMA7 transfer enable bit 1: Enable transfer
5 TSZSL7 0: 16 bits R W
DMA7 transfer size select bit 1: 8 bits
6 SADSL7 0: Fixed R W
DMA7 source address direction select bit 1: Increment
7 DADSL7 0: Fixed R W
DMA7 destination address direction select bit 1: Increment
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
DMA7 Channel Control Register 1 (DM7CNT1) <Address: H’0080 0439>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8 REQESEL7
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–11 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
12–15 REQESEL7 0000: One DMA6 transfer completed R W
Extended DMA7 transfer request source select bit 0001: Settings inhibited
0010: SIO3_TXD (transmit buffer empty)
0011: Common 1) MJT (input event bus 1)
0100: Common 2) MJT (input event bus 3)
0101: Common 3) MJT (output event bus 2)
0110: Common 4) MJT (output event bus 3)
0111: Common 5) AD0 conversion completed
1000: Common 6) MJT (TIN0S)
1001: Common 7) MJT (TIO8_udf)
1010: Settings inhibited
1111: Settings inhibited
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
| |
9
9-14
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
DMA8 Channel Control Register 0 (DM8CNT0) <Address: H’0080 0448>
123456b7b0
SADSL8 DADSL8MDSEL8 TREQF8 REQSL8 TENL8 TSZSL8
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 MDSEL8 0: Normal mode R W
DMA8 transfer mode select bit 1: Ring buffer mode
1 TREQF8 0: Transfer not requested R(Note 1)
DMA8 transfer request flag bit 1: Transfer requested
2, 3 REQSL8 00: Software start R W
DMA8 transfer request source select bit 01: MJT (input event bus 0)
10: SIO3_RXD
11: Extended DMA8 transfer request source select
(DMA8 Channel Control Register 1)
4 TENL8 0: Disable transfer R W
DMA8 transfer enable bit 1: Enable transfer
5 TSZSL8 0: 16 bits R W
DMA8 transfer size select bit 1: 8 bits
6 SADSL8 0: Fixed R W
DMA8 source address direction select bit 1: Increment
7 DADSL8 0: Fixed R W
DMA8 destination address direction select bit 1: Increment
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
DMA8 Channel Control Register 1 (DM8CNT1) <Address: H’0080 0449>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8 REQESEL8
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–11 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
12–15 REQESEL8 0000: Settings inhibited R W
Extended DMA8 transfer request source select bit 0001: Settings inhibited
0010: One DMA7 transfer completed
0011: Common 1) MJT (input event bus 1)
0100: Common 2) MJT (input event bus 3)
0101: Common 3) MJT (output event bus 2)
0110: Common 4) MJT (output event bus 3)
0111: Common 5) AD0 conversion completed
1000: Common 6) MJT (TIN0S)
1001: Common 7) MJT (TIO8_udf)
1010: Settings inhibited
1111: Settings inhibited
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
| |
9DMAC
9-15 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
DMA9 Channel Control Register 0 (DM9CNT0) <Address: H’0080 0458>
123456b7b0
SADSL9 DADSL9MDSEL9 TREQF9 REQSL9 TENL9 TSZSL9
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 MDSEL9 0: Normal mode R W
DMA9 transfer mode select bit 1: Ring buffer mode
1 TREQF9 0: Transfer not requested R(Note 1)
DMA9 transfer request flag bit 1: Transfer requested
2, 3 REQSL9 00: Software start R W
DMA9 transfer request source select bit 01: SIO3_TXD (transmit buffer empty)
10: Settings inhibited
11: Extended DMA9 transfer request source select
(DMA9 Channel Control Register 1)
4 TENL9 0: Disable transfer R W
DMA9 transfer enable bit 1: Enable transfer
5 TSZSL9 0: 16 bits R W
DMA9 transfer size select bit 1: 8 bits
6 SADSL9 0: Fixed R W
DMA9 source address direction select bit 1: Increment
7 DADSL9 0: Fixed R W
DMA9 destination address direction select bit 1: Increment
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
DMA9 Channel Control Register 1 (DM9CNT1) <Address: H’0080 0459>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8 REQESEL9
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–11 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
12–15 REQESEL9 0000: One DMA8 transfer completed R W
Extended DMA9 transfer request source select bit 0001: Settings inhibited
0010: Settings inhibited
0011: Common 1) MJT (input event bus 1)
0100: Common 2) MJT (input event bus 3)
0101: Common 3) MJT (output event bus 2)
0110: Common 4) MJT (output event bus 3)
0111: Common 5) AD0 conversion completed
1000: Common 6) MJT (TIN0S)
1001: Common 7) MJT (TIO8_udf)
1010: Settings inhibited
1111: Settings inhibited
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
| |
9
9-16
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
The DMA Channel Control Register consists of the bits to select DMA transfer mode on each channel, set the
DMA transfer request flag, select the cause or source of DMA request and enable DMA transfer, as well as
those to set the transfer size and the source/destination address directions.
[DMnCNT0 Register]
(1) MDSELn (DMAn Transfer Mode Select) bit (Bit 0)
When performing DMA transfer in single transfer mode, this bit selects normal mode or ring buffer mode. Setting
this bit to "0" selects normal mode and setting it to "1" selects ring buffer mode.
In ring buffer mode, transfer begins from the transfer start address and after performing transfers 32 times, control
is recycled back to the transfer start address, from which transfer operation is repeated. In this case, the Transfer
Count Register counts in free-run mode, during which time transfer operation is continued until the transfer enable
bit is reset to "0" (to disable transfer). In ring buffer mode, no interrupt is generated at completion of DMA transfer.
(2) TREQFn (DMAn Transfer Request Flag) bit (Bit 1)
This flag is set to "1" when a DMA transfer request occurs, and is cleared to "0" when the transfer for that
transfer request is completed. Reading this flag helps to know DMA transfer requests on each channel.
Writing "0" to this bit clears the generated DMA transfer request. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the
value it had before the write.
If a new DMA transfer request occurs on a channel for which the DMA transfer request flag has already been
set to "1", the next DMA transfer request is not accepted until the transfer being performed on that channel is
completed.
(3) REQSLn (DMAn Transfer Request Source Select) bits (Bits 2–3)
These bits select the cause or source of DMA transfer request on each DMA channel.
(4) TENLn (DMAn Transfer Enable) bit (Bit 4)
Setting this bit to "1" enables transfer, and the channel is made ready for DMA transfer. When all transfers on
that channel are completed (i.e., the Transfer Counter Register underflows), the bit is cleared to "0".
Setting this bit to "0" disables transfer. However, if a transfer request has already been accepted, transfers
on that channel are not disabled until after the requested transfer is completed.
(5) TSZSLn (DMAn Transfer Size Select) bit (Bit 5)
This bit selects the number of bits to be transferred in one DMA transfer operation (the unit of one transfer).
The unit of one transfer is 16 bits when TSZSL = "0" or 8 bits when TSZSL = "1".
(6) SADSLn (DMAn Source Address Direction Select) bit (Bit 6)
This bit selects the direction in which the source address changes. This mode can be selected from two
choices: Address fixed or Address incremental.
(7) DADSLn (DMAn Destination Address Direction Select) bit (Bit 7)
This bit selects the direction in which the destination address changes. This mode can be selected from two
choices: Address fixed or Address incremental.
[DMnCNT1 Register]
(1) REQESELn (Extended DMAn Transfer Request Source Select) bits (Bits 12–15)
These bits select the cause or source of extended DMA transfer request on each DMA channel.
Note: • The extended DMA transfer request sources selected by the REQESELn (Extended DMAn
Transfer Request Source Select) bits have no effect unless the “Extended” DMA transfer re-
quest source is selected with the DMA Channel Control Register’s DMA Request Source Se-
lect (REQSLn) bits.
9DMAC
9-17 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
Extended DMA transfer
request source selected DMAn transfer
request source
SSDMAn
Figure 9.2.1 Block Diagram of Extended DMAn Transfer Request Source Selection
9
9-18
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
9.2.2 DMA Software Request Generation Registers
DMA0 Software Request Generation Register (DM0SRI) <Address: H’0080 0460>
DMA1 Software Request Generation Register (DM1SRI) <Address: H’0080 0462>
DMA2 Software Request Generation Register (DM2SRI) <Address: H’0080 0464>
DMA3 Software Request Generation Register (DM3SRI) <Address: H’0080 0466>
DMA4 Software Request Generation Register (DM4SRI) <Address: H’0080 0468>
DMA5 Software Request Generation Register (DM5SRI) <Address: H’0080 0470>
DMA6 Software Request Generation Register (DM6SRI) <Address: H’0080 0472>
DMA7 Software Request Generation Register (DM7SRI) <Address: H’0080 0474>
DMA8 Software Request Generation Register (DM8SRI) <Address: H’0080 0476>
DMA9 Software Request Generation Register (DM9SRI) <Address: H’0080 0478>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
DM0SRI–DM9SRI
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–15 DM0SRI–DM9SRI DMA transfer request is generated by writing any ? W
DMA software request generation bits data to these bits.
Note: • This register may be accessed in either bytes or halfwords.
The DMA Software Request Generation Register is used to generate DMA transfer requests in software. A DMA
transfer request can be generated by writing any data to this register when “Software start” has been selected
for the cause of DMA transfer request.
(1) DM0SRI–DM9SRI (DMA Software Request Generation) bits
A software DMA transfer request is generated by writing any data to this register in halfword (16 bits) or in
byte (8 bits) beginning with an even or odd address when “Software start” is selected as the cause of DMA
transfer request (by setting the DMAn Channel Control Register 0 bits 2–3 to ‘00’).
9DMAC
9-19 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.2.3 DMA Source Address Registers
DMA0 Source Address Register (DM0SA) <Address: H’0080 0412>
DMA1 Source Address Register (DM1SA) <Address: H’0080 0422>
DMA2 Source Address Register (DM2SA) <Address: H’0080 0432>
DMA3 Source Address Register (DM3SA) <Address: H’0080 0442>
DMA4 Source Address Register (DM4SA) <Address: H’0080 0452>
DMA5 Source Address Register (DM5SA) <Address: H’0080 041A>
DMA6 Source Address Register (DM6SA) <Address: H’0080 042A>
DMA7 Source Address Register (DM7SA) <Address: H’0080 043A>
DMA8 Source Address Register (DM8SA) <Address: H’0080 044A>
DMA9 Source Address Register (DM9SA) <Address: H’0080 045A>
b01234567891011121314b15
DM0SA–DM9SA
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–15 DM0SA–DMA9SA Source address bits A16–A31 R W
(A0–A15 are fixed to H’0080)
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
The DMA Source Address Register is used to set the source address of DMA transfer in such a way that bit 0
and bit 15 correspond to A16 and A31, respectively. Because this register is comprised of a current register, the
values read from this register are always the current value.
When DMA transfer finishes (i.e., the Transfer Count Register underflows), the value in this register if “Address
fixed” is selected, is the same source address that was set in it before the DMA transfer began; if “Address
incremental” is selected, the value in this register is the last transfer address + 1 (for 8-bit transfer) or the last
transfer address + 2 (for 16-bit transfer).
The DMA Source Address Register must always be accessed in halfwords (16 bits) beginning with an even
address. If accessed in bytes, the value in this register is undefined.
(1) DM0SA–DM9SA (Source Address bits A16–A31)
Set this register to specify the source address of DMA transfer in the internal I/O or RAM space from the
address H’0080 0000 to the address H’0080 FFFF.
The 16 high-order source address bits (A0–A15) are always fixed to H’0080. Use this register to set the 16
low-order source address bits (with bit 0 corresponding to the source address A16, and bit 15 corresponding
to the source address A31).
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
9
9-20
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.2.4 DMA Destination Address Registers
DMA0 Destination Address Register (DM0DA) <Address: H’0080 0414>
DMA1 Destination Address Register (DM1DA) <Address: H’0080 0424>
DMA2 Destination Address Register (DM2DA) <Address: H’0080 0434>
DMA3 Destination Address Register (DM3DA) <Address: H’0080 0444>
DMA4 Destination Address Register (DM4DA) <Address: H’0080 0454>
DMA5 Destination Address Register (DM5DA) <Address: H’0080 041C>
DMA6 Destination Address Register (DM6DA) <Address: H’0080 042C>
DMA7 Destination Address Register (DM7DA) <Address: H’0080 043C>
DMA8 Destination Address Register (DM8DA) <Address: H’0080 044C>
DMA9 Destination Address Register (DM9DA) <Address: H’0080 045C>
b01234567891011121314b15
DM0DA–DM9DA
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–15 DM0DA–DM9DA Destination address bits A16–A31 R W
(A0–A15 are fixed to H’0080)
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords
The DMA Destination Address Register is used to set the destination address of DMA transfer in such a way that
bit 0 and bit 15 correspond to A16 and A31, respectively. Because this register is comprised of a current register,
the values read from this register are always the current value.
When DMA transfer finishes (i.e., the Transfer Count Register underflows), the value in this register if “Address
fixed” is selected, is the same source address that was set in it before the DMA transfer began; if “Address
incremental” is selected, the value in this register is the last transfer address + 1 (for 8-bit transfer) or the last
transfer address + 2 (for 16-bit transfer).
The DMA Destination Address Register must always be accessed in halfwords (16 bits) beginning with an even
address. If accessed in bytes, the value in this register is undefined.
(1) DM0DA–DM9DA (Destination Address bits A16–A31)
Set this register to specify the destination address of DMA transfer in the internal I/O or RAM space from the
address H’0080 0000 to the address H’0080 FFFF.
The 16 high-order destination address bits (A0–A15) are always fixed to H’0080. Use this register to set the
16 low-order destination address bits (with bit 0 corresponding to the destination address A16, and bit 15
corresponding to the destination address A31).
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
9DMAC
9-21 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.2.5 DMA Transfer Count Registers
DMA0 Transfer Count Register (DM0TCT) <Address: H’0080 0416>
DMA1 Transfer Count Register (DM1TCT) <Address: H’0080 0426>
DMA2 Transfer Count Register (DM2TCT) <Address: H’0080 0436>
DMA3 Transfer Count Register (DM3TCT) <Address: H’0080 0446>
DMA4 Transfer Count Register (DM4TCT) <Address: H’0080 0456>
DMA5 Transfer Count Register (DM5TCT) <Address: H’0080 041E>
DMA6 Transfer Count Register (DM6TCT) <Address: H’0080 042E>
DMA7 Transfer Count Register (DM7TCT) <Address: H’0080 043E>
DMA8 Transfer Count Register (DM8TCT) <Address: H’0080 044E>
DMA9 Transfer Count Register (DM9TCT) <Address: H’0080 045E>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
DM0TCT–DM15TCT
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–15 DM0TCT–DM9TCT DMA transfer count R W
(Has no effect during ring buffer mode)
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
The DMA Transfer Count Register is used to set the number of times data is transferred on each channel.
However, the value in this register has no effect during ring buffer mode.
The transfer count is the (value set in the transfer count register + 1). Because the DMA Transfer Count Register
is comprised of a current register, the values read from this register are always the current value. (However, if
the register is read in a cycle immediately after transfer, the value obtained is one that was stored in the count
register before the transfer began.) When transfer finishes, this count register underflows and the value read
from it is H’FFFF.
When transfer is enabled, this register is protected in hardware and cannot be accessed for write.
During ring buffer mode, the transfer count register counts down in free-run mode and continues counting until
transfer is disabled. No interrupt is generated at underflow.
If any cascaded channel exists, each time one DMA transfer (byte or halfword) is completed or when all trans-
fers on a channel are completed (i.e., the transfer count register underflows), transfer on the cascaded channel
starts.
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
9
9-22
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
9.2.6 DMA Interrupt Related Registers
The DMA interrupt related registers are used to control the interrupt request signals sent from the DMAC to the
Interrupt Controller.
(1) Interrupt request status bit
This status bit is used to determine whether there is an interrupt request. When an interrupt request occurs,
this bit is set in hardware (cannot be set in software). The status bit is cleared by writing "0". Writing "1" has
no effect; the bit retains the status it had before the write. Because this status bit is unaffected by the interrupt
request mask bit, it can be used to inspect the operating status of peripheral functions.
In interrupt handling, make sure that within the grouped interrupt request status, only the status bit for the
interrupt request that has been serviced is cleared. If the status bit for any interrupt request that has not been
serviced is cleared, the pending interrupt request is cleared simultaneously with its status bit.
(2) Interrupt request mask bit
This bit is used to disable unnecessary interrupt requests within the grouped interrupt request. Set this bit to "0" to
enable interrupt requests or "1" to disable interrupt requests.
Figure 9.2.2 Interrupt Request Status and Mask Registers
To the Interrupt
Controller
Interrupt request from
each peripheral function
Interrupt request status
Data bus
Set
Group interrupt
Interrupt request enabled
clear F/F
F/F
Data = 0
9DMAC
9-23 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
Figure 9.2.3 Example for Clearing Interrupt Request Status
b4 5 b7
Interrupt request status
Initial state
Event occurs on bit 6
Interrupt request
Event occurs on bit 4
Only bit 6 cleared
Bit 4 data retained
b4 5 b7
1 1 0 1
Write to the interrupt request status
Example for clearing interrupt request status
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 0 0 0
Program example
ISTREG = 0xfd; /* Clear ISTAT1 (0x02 bit) only */
To clear the Interrupt Request Status Register 0 (ISTREG) interrupt request status 1, ISTAT1 (0x02 bit)
To clear an interrupt request status, always be sure to write "1" to all other interrupt request status bits. At this time,
avoid using a logic operation like the one shown below. Because it requires three step-ISTREG read, logic operation
and write, if another interrupt request occurs between the read and write, status may be inadvertently cleared.
b4 5 6 b7
Interrupt request status
Event occurs on bit 6
Event occurs on bit 4
Only bit 6 cleared
Bit 4 also cleared
0 0 1 0
1 0 1 0
0 0 0 0
Read
0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0
Clear bit 6 (AND'ing with 1101)
Write
6
6
ISTREG &= 0xfd; /* Clear ISTAT1 (0x02 bit) only */
9
9-24
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
DMA0–4 Interrupt Request Status Register (DM04ITST) <Address: H’0080 0400>
123456b7b0
DMITST4 DMITST3 DMITST1 DMITST0DMITST2
00000
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–2 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
3 DMITST4 (DMA4 interrupt request status bit) 0: Interrupt not requested R(Note 1)
4 DMITST3 (DMA3 interrupt request status bit) 1: Interrupt requested
5 DMITST2 (DMA2 interrupt request status bit)
6 DMITST1 (DMA1 interrupt request status bit)
7 DMITST0 (DMA0 interrupt request status bit)
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
DMA5–9 Interrupt Request Status Register (DM59ITST) <Address: H’0080 0408>
123456b7b0
DMITST9 DMITST8 DMITST6 DMITST5DMITST7
00000
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–2 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
3 DMITST9 (DMA9 interrupt request status bit) 0: Interrupt not requested R(Note 1)
4 DMITST8 (DMA8 interrupt request status bit) 1: Interrupt requested
5 DMITST7 (DMA7 interrupt request status bit)
6 DMITST6 (DMA6 interrupt request status bit)
7 DMITST5 (DMA5 interrupt request status bit)
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
The Interrupt Request Status Register helps to know the status of interrupt requests on each channel. If the DMAn
interrupt request status bit (n = 0–9) is set to "1", it means that a DMA interrupt request on the corresponding
channel has been generated.
(1) DMITSTn (DMAn Interrupt Request Status) bit (n = 0–9)
[Setting the DMAn interrupt request status bit]
This bit is set in hardware, and cannot be set in software.
[Clearing the DMAn interrupt request status bit]
This bit is cleared by writing "0" in software.
Note: • The DMAn interrupt request status bit cannot be cleared by writing "0" to the DMA Interrupt
Control Register’s “interrupt request bit” included in the Interrupt Controller.
When writing to the DMA Interrupt Request Status Register, make sure only the bits to be cleared are set to "0"
and all other bits are set to "1". Those bits that have been set to "1" are unaffected by writing in software and
retain the value they had before the write.
9DMAC
9-25 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
DMA0–4 Interrupt Request Mask Register (DM04ITMK) <Address: H’0080 0401>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8
DMITMK4 DMITMK3 DMITMK1 DMITMK0DMITMK2
00000
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–10 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
11 DMITMK4 (DMA4 interrupt request mask bit) 0: Enable interrupt request R W
12 DMITMK3 (DMA3 interrupt request mask bit) 1: Mask (disable) interrupt request
13 DMITMK2 (DMA2 interrupt request mask bit)
14 DMITMK1 (DMA1 interrupt request mask bit)
15 DMITMK0 (DMA0 interrupt request mask bit)
DMA5–9 Interrupt Request Mask Register (DM59ITMK) <Address: H’0080 0409>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8
DMITMK9 DMITMK8 DMITMK6 DMITMK5DMITMK7
00000
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–10 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
11 DMITMK9 (DMA9 interrupt request mask bit) 0: Enable interrupt request R W
12 DMITMK8 (DMA8 interrupt request mask bit) 1: Mask (disable) interrupt request
13 DMITMK7 (DMA7 interrupt request mask bit)
14 DMITMK6 (DMA6 interrupt request mask bit)
15 DMITMK5 (DMA5 interrupt request mask bit)
The DMA Interrupt Request Mask Register is used to mask interrupt requests on each DMA channel.
(1) DMITMKn (DMAn Interrupt Request Mask) bit (n = 0–9)
Setting the DMAn interrupt request mask bit to "1" masks the interrupt requests on DMAn channel. However,
if an interrupt request occurs, the DMAn interrupt request status bit is always set to "1" irrespective of the
contents of this mask register.
9
9-26
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
F/F
F/F
DMITMK5
DMITST5
F/F
F/F
DMITMK6
DMITST6
F/F
F/F
DMITMK7
DMITST7
F/F
F/F
DMITMK8
DMITST8
F/F
F/F
DMITMK9
DMITST9
b15
b7
b14
b6
b13
b5
b12
b4
b11
b3
Data bus DMA9UDF
DMA8UDF
DMA7UDF
DMA6UDF
DMA5UDF
DMA transfer interrupt request 1
(Level)
5-source inputs
DM59ITST (H'0080 0408)
DM59ITMK (H'0080 0409)
Figure 9.2.5 Block Diagram of DMA Transfer Interrupt Request 1
F/F
F/F
DMITMK0
DMITST0
F/F
F/F
DMITMK1
DMITST1
F/F
F/F
DMITMK2
DMITST2
F/F
F/F
DMITMK3
DMITST3
F/F
F/F
DMITMK4
DMITST4
b15
b7
b14
b6
b13
b5
b12
b4
b11
b3
Data bus DMA4UDF
DMA3UDF
DMA2UDF
DMA1UDF
DMA0UDF
DMA transfer interrupt request 0
(Level)
5-source inputs
DM04ITST (H'0080 0400)
DM04ITMK (H'0080 0401)
Figure 9.2.4 Block Diagram of DMA Transfer Interrupt Request 0
9.2 DMAC Related Registers
9DMAC
9-27 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.3 Functional Description of the DMAC
9.3.1 DMA Transfer Request Sources
For each DMA channel (channels 0–9), DMA transfer can be requested from two or more sources. There are
various causes or sources of DMA transfer request, so that DMA transfer can be started by a request from some
internal peripheral I/O, started in software by a program, or can be started upon completion of one transfer or all
transfers on another DMA channel (cascade mode).
The causes or sources of DMA transfer requests are selected using the transfer request source select bits
REQSLn on each channel (DMAn Channel Control Register 0 bits 2–3) or the extended transfer request source
select bits REQESELn (DMAn Channel Control Register 1 bits 12–15). The tables below list the causes or
sources of DMA transfer requests on each channel.
Table 9.3.1 DMA Transfer Request Sources and Generation Timings on DMA0
REQSL0 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0 0 Software start or one DMA2 When any data is written to the DMA0 Software Request Generation Register
transfer completed (software start) or when one DMA2 transfer is completed (cascade mode)
0 1 A-D0 conversion completed When A-D0 conversion is completed
1 0 MJT (TIO8_udf) When MJT TIO8 underflows
1 1 Extended DMA0 transfer request The source selected by the DMA0 Channel Control Register 1 (DM0CNT1)
source selected REQESEL0 bits (see below)
REQESEL0 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0000 MJT (input event bus 2) When MJT input event bus 2 signal is generated
0001 Settings inhibited
0010 CAN (CAN0_S0/S15) When CAN0 slot 0 transmission failed or slot 15 transmission reception finished
0011 MJT (input event bus 1) When MJT input event bus 1 signal is generated
0100 MJT (input event bus 3) When MJT input event bus 3 signal is generated
0101 MJT (output event bus 2) When MJT output event bus 2 signal is generated
0110 MJT (output event bus 3) When MJT output event bus 3 signal is generated
0111 A-D0 conversion completed When A-D0 conversion is completed
1000 MJT (TIN0 input signal) When MJT TIN0 input signal is generated
1001 MJT (TIO8_udf) When MJT TIO8 underflow occurs
1010
| Settings inhibited
1111
9.3 Functional Description of the DMAC
9
9-28
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Table 9.3.2 DMA Transfer Request Sources and Generation Timings on DMA1
REQSL1 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0 0 Software start When any data is written to the DMA1 Software Request Generation Register
0 1 MJT (output event bus 0) When MJT output event bus 0 signal is generated
1 0 Settings inhibited
1 1 Extended DMA1 transfer request The source selected by the DMA1 Channel Control Register 1 (DM1CNT1)
source selected REQESEL1 bits (see below)
REQESEL1 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0000 One DMA0 transfer completed When one DMA0 transfer is completed (cascade mode)
0001 MJT (TIN3 input signal) When MJT TIN3 input signal is generated
0010 Settings inhibited
0011 MJT (input event bus 1) When MJT input event bus 1 signal is generated
0100 MJT (input event bus 3) When MJT input event bus 3 signal is generated
0101 MJT (output event bus 2) When MJT output event bus 2 signal is generated
0110 MJT (output event bus 3) When MJT output event bus 3 signal is generated
0111 A-D0 conversion completed When A-D0 conversion is completed
1000 MJT (TIN0 input signal) When MJT TIN0 input signal is generated
1001 MJT (TIO8_udf) When MJT TIO8 underflow occurs
1010
| Settings inhibited
1111
Table 9.3.3 DMA Transfer Request Sources and Generation Timings on DMA2
REQSL2 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0 0 Software start When any data is written to the DMA2 Software Request Generation Register
0 1 MJT (output event bus 1) When MJT output event bus 1 signal is generated
1 0 MJT (TIN18 input signal) When MJT TIN18 input signal is generated
1 1 Extended DMA2 transfer request The source selected by the DMA2 Channel Control Register 1 (DM2CNT1)
source selected REQESEL2 bits (see below)
REQESEL2 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0000 One DMA1 transfer completed When one DMA1 transfer is completed (cascade mode)
0001 Settings inhibited
0010 CAN(CAN0_S1/S14) When CAN0 slot 1 transmission failed or slot 14 transmission reception finished
0011 MJT (input event bus 1) When MJT input event bus 1 signal is generated
0100 MJT (input event bus 3) When MJT input event bus 3 signal is generated
0101 MJT (output event bus 2) When MJT output event bus 2 signal is generated
0110 MJT (output event bus 3) When MJT output event bus 3 signal is generated
0111 A-D0 conversion completed When A-D0 conversion is completed
1000 MJT (TIN0 input signal) When MJT TIN0 input signal is generated
1001 MJT (TIO8_udf) When MJT TIO8 underflow occurs
1010
| Settings inhibited
1111
9.3 Functional Description of the DMAC
9DMAC
9-29 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Table 9.3.4 DMA Transfer Request Sources and Generation Timings on DMA3
REQSL3 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0 0 Software start When any data is written to the DMA3 Software Request Generation Register
0 1 Serial I/O0 (transmit buffer empty) When serial I/O0 transmit buffer is empty
1 0 Serial I/O1 (reception completed) When serial I/O1 reception is completed
1 1 Extended DMA3 transfer request The source selected by the DMA3 Channel Control Register 1 (DM3CNT1)
source selected REQESEL3 bits (see below)
REQESEL3 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0000 MJT (TIN0 input signal) When MJT TIN0 input signal is generated
0001 One DMA2 transfer completed When one DMA2 transfer is completed (cascade mode)
0010 Settings inhibited
0011 MJT (input event bus 1) When MJT input event bus 1 signal is generated
0100 MJT (input event bus 3) When MJT input event bus 3 signal is generated
0101 MJT (output event bus 2) When MJT output event bus 2 signal is generated
0110 MJT (output event bus 3) When MJT output event bus 3 signal is generated
0111 A-D0 conversion completed When A-D0 conversion is completed
1000 MJT (TIN0 input signal) When MJT TIN0 input signal is generated
1001 MJT (TIO8_udf) When MJT TIO8 underflow occurs
1010
| Settings inhibited
1111
Table 9.3.5 DMA Transfer Request Sources and Generation Timings on DMA4
REQSL4 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0 0 Software start When any data is written to the DMA4 Software Request Generation Register
0 1 One DMA3 transfer completed When one DMA3 transfer is completed (cascade mode)
1 0 Serial I/O0 (reception completed) When serial I/O0 reception is completed
1 1 Extended DMA4 transfer request The source selected by the DMA4 Channel Control Register 1 (DM4CNT1)
source selected REQESEL4 bits (see below)
REQESEL4 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0000 MJT (TIN19 input signal) When MJT TIN19 input signal is generated
0001 Serial I/O0 (transmit buffer empty) When serial I/O0 transmit buffer is empty
0010 Settings inhibited
0011 MJT (input event bus 1) When MJT input event bus 1 signal is generated
0100 MJT (input event bus 3) When MJT input event bus 3 signal is generated
0101 MJT (output event bus 2) When MJT output event bus 2 signal is generated
0110 MJT (output event bus 3) When MJT output event bus 3 signal is generated
0111 A-D0 conversion completed When A-D0 conversion is completed
1000 MJT (TIN0 input signal) When MJT TIN0 input signal is generated
1001 MJT (TIO8_udf) When MJT TIO8 underflow occurs
1010
| Settings inhibited
1111
9.3 Functional Description of the DMAC
9
9-30
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Table 9.3.6 DMA Transfer Request Sources and Generation Timings on DMA5
REQSL5 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0 0 Software start or one DMA7 When any data is written to the DMA5 Software Request Generation Register
transfer completed (software start) or when one DMA7 transfer is completed (cascade mode)
0 1 All DMA0 transfers completed When all DMA0 transfers are completed (cascade mode)
1 0 Serial I/O2 (reception completed) When serial I/O2 reception is completed
1 1 Extended DMA5 transfer request The source selected by the DMA5 Channel Control Register 1 (DM5CNT1)
source selected REQESEL5 bits (see below)
REQESEL5 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0000 MJT (TIN20 input signal) When MJT TIN20 input signal is generated
0001 Settings inhibited
0010 Settings inhibited
0011 MJT (input event bus 1) When MJT input event bus 1 signal is generated
0100 MJT (input event bus 3) When MJT input event bus 3 signal is generated
0101 MJT (output event bus 2) When MJT output event bus 2 signal is generated
0110 MJT (output event bus 3) When MJT output event bus 3 signal is generated
0111 A-D0 conversion completed When A-D0 conversion is completed
1000 MJT (TIN0 input signal) When MJT TIN0 input signal is generated
1001 MJT (TIO8_udf) When MJT TIO8 underflow occurs
1010
| Settings inhibited
1111
Table 9.3.7 DMA Transfer Request Sources and Generation Timings on DMA6
REQSL6 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0 0 Software start When any data is written to the DMA6 Software Request Generation Register
0 1 Serial I/O1 (transmit buffer empty) When serial I/O1 transmit buffer is empty
1 0 Settings inhibited
1 1 Extended DMA6 transfer request The source selected by the DMA6 Channel Control Register 1 (DM6CNT1)
source selected REQESEL6 bits (see below)
REQESEL6 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0000 One DMA5 transfer completed When one DMA5 transfer is completed (cascade mode)
0001 Settings inhibited
0010 Serial I/O1 (reception completed) When serial I/O1 reception is completed
0011 MJT (input event bus 1) When MJT input event bus 1 signal is generated
0100 MJT (input event bus 3) When MJT input event bus 3 signal is generated
0101 MJT (output event bus 2) When MJT output event bus 2 signal is generated
0110 MJT (output event bus 3) When MJT output event bus 3 signal is generated
0111 A-D0 conversion completed When A-D0 conversion is completed
1000 MJT (TIN0 input signal) When MJT TIN0 input signal is generated
1001 MJT (TIO8_udf) When MJT TIO8 underflow occurs
1010
| Settings inhibited
1111
9.3 Functional Description of the DMAC
9DMAC
9-31 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.3 Functional Description of the DMAC
Table 9.3.8 DMA Transfer Request Sources and Generation Timings on DMA7
REQSL7 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0 0 Software start When any data is written to the DMA7 Software Request Generation Register
0 1 Serial I/O2 (transmit buffer empty) When serial I/O2 transmit buffer is empty
1 0 Settings inhibited
1 1 Extended DMA7 transfer request The source selected by the DMA7 Channel Control Register 1 (DM7CNT1)
source selected REQESEL7 bits (see below)
REQESEL7 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0000 One DMA6 transfer completed When one DMA6 transfer is completed (cascade mode)
0001 Settings inhibited
0010 Serial I/O3 (reception completed) When serial I/O3 reception is completed
0011 MJT (input event bus 1) When MJT input event bus 1 signal is generated
0100 MJT (input event bus 3) When MJT input event bus 3 signal is generated
0101 MJT (output event bus 2) When MJT output event bus 2 signal is generated
0110 MJT (output event bus 3) When MJT output event bus 3 signal is generated
0111 A-D0 conversion completed When A-D0 conversion is completed
1000 MJT (TIN0 input signal) When MJT TIN0 input signal is generated
1001 MJT (TIO8_udf) When MJT TIO8 underflow occurs
1010
| Settings inhibited
1111
Table 9.3.9 DMA Transfer Request Sources and Generation Timings on DMA8
REQSL8 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0 0 Software start When any data is written to the DMA8 Software Request Generation Register
0 1 MJT (input event bus 0) When MJT input event bus 0 signal is generated
1 0 Serial I/O3 (reception completed) When serial I/O3 reception is completed
1 1 Extended DMA8 transfer request The source selected by the DMA8 Channel Control Register 1 (DM8CNT1)
source selected REQESEL8 bits (see below)
REQESEL8 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0000 Settings inhibited
0001 Settings inhibited
0010 One DMA7 transfer completed When one DMA7 transfer is completed (cascade mode)
0011 MJT (input event bus 1) When MJT input event bus 1 signal is generated
0100 MJT (input event bus 3) When MJT input event bus 3 signal is generated
0101 MJT (output event bus 2) When MJT output event bus 2 signal is generated
0110 MJT (output event bus 3) When MJT output event bus 3 signal is generated
0111 A-D0 conversion completed When A-D0 conversion is completed
1000 MJT (TIN0 input signal) When MJT TIN0 input signal is generated
1001 MJT (TIO8_udf) When MJT TIO8 underflow occurs
1010
| Settings inhibited
1111
9
9-32
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Table 9.3.10 DMA Transfer Request Sources and Generation Timings on DMA9
REQSL9 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0 0 Software start When any data is written to the DMA9 Software Request Generation Register
0 1 Serial I/O3 (transmit buffer empty) When serial I/O3 transmit buffer is empty
1 0 Settings inhibited
1 1 Extended DMA9 transfer request The source selected by the DMA9 Channel Control Register 1 (DM9CNT1)
source selected REQESEL9 bits (see below)
REQESEL9 DMA Transfer Request Source DMA Transfer Request Generation Timing
0000 One DMA8 transfer completed When one DMA8 transfer is completed (cascade mode)
0001 Settings inhibited
0010 Settings inhibited
0011 MJT (input event bus 1) When MJT input event bus 1 signal is generated
0100 MJT (input event bus 3) When MJT input event bus 3 signal is generated
0101 MJT (output event bus 2) When MJT output event bus 2 signal is generated
0110 MJT (output event bus 3) When MJT output event bus 3 signal is generated
0111 A-D0 conversion completed When A-D0 conversion is completed
1000 MJT (TIN0 input signal) When MJT TIN0 input signal is generated
1001 MJT (TIO8_udf) When MJT TIO8 underflow occurs
1010
| Settings inhibited
1111
9.3 Functional Description of the DMAC
9DMAC
9-33 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
DMA transfer starts as requested by
internal peripheral I/O
DMA transfer
processing starts
Transfer count register underflows
Interrupt request generated
Set DMA0 Channel Control Register 0
Set DMA0-4 Interrupt Request Status Registers 0 and 1
Set DMA0 Channel Control Registers 0 and 1
Set DMA0 Source Address Register
Set DMA0 Destination Address Register
Set DMA0 Count Register
Setting
DMAC-related
registers
Starting DMA transfer
DMA transfer
completed
• Transf ers disabled
• Interrupt request status
bits cleared
Set DMA0-4 Interrupt Request Mask Register
• Source address of transfer
• Destination address of transfer
• Number of times DMA transfer
is performed
Transfer mode, request source,
transfer size, address direction
and transfer enable
DMA operation
completed
• Interrupt request enabled
Set the interrupt controller's
DMA0-4 Interrupt Control Register • Interrupt priority level
Setting interrupt
controller-related
registers
Figure 9.3.1 Example of a DMA Transfer Processing Procedure
9.3.2 DMA Transfer Processing Procedure
Shown below is an example of how to control DMA transfer in cases when performing transfer on DMA channel 0.
9.3 Functional Description of the DMAC
9
9-34
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 9.3.2 Gaining and Releasing Control of the Internal Bus
One DMA transfer
DMAC
CPU
Internal bus arbitration
(requests from the DMAC)
Internal bus
R: Read
W: Write
RW R W R W
Requested Gained Requested Gained Requested Gained
One DMA transfer One DMA transfer
Released Released Released
9.3 Functional Description of the DMAC
9.3.3 Starting DMA
Use the DMAn Channel Control Register 0 REQSL (DMA transfer request source select) and DMAn Channel
Control Register 1 REQESEL (extended DMA transfer request source select) bits to set the cause or source of
DMA transfer request. To enable DMA, set the TENL (DMA transfer enable) bit to "1". DMA transfer begins when
the specified cause or source of DMA transfer request becomes effective after setting the TENL (DMA transfer
enable) bit to "1".
Note: • If the transfer request source selected by the REQSL (DMA transfer request source select) and
REQESEL (extended DMA transfer request source select) bits is MJT (TIN input signal), the time
required for DMA transfer to begin after detecting the rising or falling or both edges of the TIN input
signal is three cycles (150 ns when the internal peripheral clock = 20 MHz) at the shortest. Or,
depending on the preceding or following bus usage condition, up to five cycles (250 ns when the
internal peripheral clock = 20 MHz) may be required. (However, this applies when the external
bus, HOLD and the LOCK instruction all are unused.)
To ensure that changes of the TIN input signal state will be detected correctly, make sure the TIN input
signal is held active for a duration of more than 7tc (BCLK)/2. (For details, see Section 21.7, “AC
Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V),” and Section 21.8, “AC Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V).”)
9.3.4 DMA Channel Priority
DMA0 has the highest priority. The priority of this and other channels is shown below.
DMA0 > DMA1 > DMA2 > DMA3 > DMA4 > DMA5 > DMA6 > DMA7 > DMA8 > DMA9
This order of priority is fixed and cannot be changed. Among channels on which DMA transfer is requested, the
channel that has the highest priority is selected.
9.3.5 Gaining and Releasing Control of the Internal Bus
For any channel, control of the internal bus is gained and released in “single transfer DMA” mode. In single
transfer DMA, the DMAC gains control of the internal bus (in one peripheral clock cycle) when DMA transfer
request is accepted and after executing one DMA transfer (in one read and one write internal clock cycle),
returns bus control to the CPU. The diagram below shows the operation in single transfer DMA.
9DMAC
9-35 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.3.6 Transfer Units
Use the TSZSL (DMA transfer size select) bit to set for each channel the number of bits (8 or 16 bits) to be
transferred in one DMA transfer.
9.3.7 Transfer Counts
Use the DMA Transfer Count Register to set transfer counts for each channel. Transfer can be performed up to
65,536 times. The value of the DMA Transfer Count Register is decremented by one every time one transfer unit
is transferred. In ring buffer mode, the DMA Transfer Count Register operates in free-run mode, with the value
set in it ignored.
9.3.8 Address Space
The address space in which data can be transferred by DMA is 64 Kbytes of internal peripheral I/O or RAM space
(H’0080 0000 through H’0080 FFFF) for both source and destination. To set the source and destination addresses on
each DMA channel, use the DMA Source Address Register and DMA Destination Address Register.
9.3.9 Transfer Operation
(1) Dual-address transfer
Irrespective of the size of transfer unit, data is transferred in two bus cycles, one for source read access and
one for destination write access. (The transfer data is taken into the DMAC’s internal temporary register
before being transferred.)
(2) Bus protocol and bus timing
Because the bus interface is shared with the CPU, DMA transfer is performed with the same bus protocol and
the same bus timing as when peripheral modules are accessed by the CPU.
(3) Transfer rate
Transfer is performed using a total of three peripheral clock cycles, one cycle to gain control of the bus and
one read and one write cycle to perform one transfer. Therefore, the maximum transfer rate is calculated by
the equation below:
Maximum transfer rate [bytes per second] = 2 bytes × 1
1/f(BCLK) × 3 cycles
(4) Address count direction and address changes
The direction in which the source and destination addresses are counted as transfer proceeds (“Address
fixed” or “Address incremental”) is set for each channel using the SADSL (source address direction select)
and DADSL (destination address direction select) bits.
When the transfer size is 16 bits, the address is incremented by two for each DMA transfer performed; when
the transfer size is 8 bits, the address is incremented by one.
Table 9.3.11 Address Count Direction and Address Changes
Address Count Direction Transfer Unit Address Change for One DMA
Address fixed 8 bits 0
16 bits 0
Address incremental 8 bits +1
16 bits +2
9.3 Functional Description of the DMAC
9
9-36
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 9.3.3 Transfer Byte Positions
(7) Ring buffer mode
When ring buffer mode is selected, transfer begins from the transfer start address and after performing
transfers 32 times, control returns to the transfer start address, from which transfer operation is repeated. In
this case, however, the five low-order bits of the ring buffer start address must always be B’00000 (if transfer
size = 16 bits, the six low-order bits must be B’000000).
The following describes how addresses are incremented in ring buffer mode.
[1] When the transfer size is 8 bits
The 27 high-order bits of the transfer start address are fixed, and the five low-order bits are incremented
by one at a time. When as transfer proceeds the five low-order bits reach B’11111, they are recycled to
B’00000 by the next increment operation, thus returning to the start address again.
[2] When the transfer size is 16 bits
The 26 high-order bits of the transfer start address are fixed, and the six low-order bits are incremented
by two at a time. When as transfer proceeds the six low-order bits reach B’111110, they are recycled to
B’000000 by the next increment operation, thus returning to the start address again.
If the source address has been set to be incremented, it is the source address that recycles to the start
address; if the destination address has been set to be incremented, it is the destination address that recycles
to the start address. If both source and destination addresses have been set to be incremented, both ad-
dresses recycle to the start address. However, the start address on either side must have their five low-order
bits initially set to B’00000 (if transfer size = 16 bits, the six low-order bits must be B’000000).
During ring buffer mode, the transfer count register is ignored. Once DMA operation starts, the counter operates
in free-run mode, and the transfer continues until the transfer enable bit is cleared to "0" (to disable transfer).
9.3 Functional Description of the DMAC
(5) Transfer count value
The transfer count value is decremented one at a time, irrespective of the size of transfer unit (8 or 16 bits).
(6) Transfer byte positions
When the transfer unit is 8 bits, the LSB of the address register is effective for both source and destination.
(Therefore, in addition to data transfers between even addresses or between odd addresses, data may be
transferred from even address to odd address or vice versa.) When the transfer unit is 16 bits, the LSB of the
address register (= bit 15) is ignored, and data are always transferred in two bytes aligned to the 16-bit bus.
The diagram below shows the valid byte positions in DMA transfer.
b0 b7 b8 b15
8 bits
+0 +1
Source
Destination
<When transfer size = 8 bits>
8 bits
8 bits 8 bits 16 bits
16 bits
b0 b7 b8 b15
+0 +1
<When transfer size = 16 bits>
9DMAC
9-37 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.3 Functional Description of the DMAC
Figure 9.3.4 Example of How Addresses Are Incremented in 32-channel Ring Buffer Mode
9.3.10 End of DMA and Interrupt
In normal mode, DMA transfer is terminated by an underflow of the transfer count register. When transfer fin-
ishes, the transfer enable bit is cleared to "0" and transfers are thereby disabled. Also, an interrupt request is
generated at completion of transfer. However, if interrupt requests on any channel have been masked by the
DMA Interrupt Request Mask Register, no interrupt requests are generated on that channel.
During ring buffer mode, the transfer count register operates in free-run mode, and transfer continues until the
transfer enable bit is cleared to "0" (to disable transfer). In this case, therefore, no interrupt requests are gener-
ated at completion of DMA transfer. Nor are these DMA transfer-completed interrupt requests are generated
even when transfer in ring buffer mode is terminated by clearing the transfer enable bit.
9.3.11 Each Register Status after Completion of DMA Transfer
When DMA transfer is completed, the status of the source and destination address registers becomes as fol-
lows:
(1) Address fixed
• The values set in the address registers before DMA transfer started remain intact (fixed).
(2) Address incremental
• For 8-bit transfer, the values of the address registers are the last transfer address + 1.
• For 16-bit transfer, the values of the address registers are the last transfer address + 2.
The transfer count register at completion of DMA transfer is in an underflow state (H’FFFF). Therefore, before
another DMA transfer can be performed, the transfer count register must be set newly again, except when trying
to perform transfers 65,536 times (H’FFFF).
<When transfer size = 8 bits>
Transfer count Transfer address
1 H'0080 1000
2 H'0080 1001
3 H'0080 1002
31 H'0080 101E
32 H'0080 101F
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
1 H'0080 1000
2 H'0080 1001
<When transfer size = 16 bits>
Transfer count Transfer address
1 H'0080 1000
2 H'0080 1002
3 H'0080 1004
31 H'0080 103C
32 H'0080 103E
1 H'0080 1000
2 H'0080 1002
| | | |
| | | |
9
9-38
DMAC
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
9.4 Precautions about the DMAC
• About writing to the DMAC related registers
Because DMA transfer involves exchanging data via the internal bus, the DMAC related registers basically can
only be accessed for write immediately after reset or when transfer is disabled (transfer enable bit = "0"). When
transfer is enabled, do not write to the DMAC related registers, except the DMA transfer enable bit, the transfer
request flag and the DMA Transfer Count Register that is protected in hardware. This is a precaution necessary
to ensure stable DMA operation.
The table below lists the registers that can or cannot be accessed for write.
Table 9.4.1 DMAC Related Registers That Can or Cannot Be Accessed for Write
Status Transfer enable bit Transfer request flag Other DMAC related registers
Transfer enabled Can be accessed Can be accessed Cannot be accessed
Transfer disabled Can be accessed Can be accessed Can be accessed
Even for registers that can exceptionally be written to while transfer is enabled, the following conditions must be
observed:
(1) DMA Channel Control Register 0 transfer enable bit and transfer request flag
For all other bits in this register, be sure to write the same data that those bits had before the write. Note,
however, that only writing "0" is effective for the transfer request flag.
(2) DMA Transfer Count Register
When transfer is enabled, this register is protected in hardware, so that any data rewritten to it is ignored.
(3) Rewriting the DMA source and DMA destination addresses on different channels by DMA transfer
Although this operation means accessing the DMAC related registers while DMA is enabled, there is no
problem. Note, however, that no data can be transferred by DMA to the DMAC related registers on the
currently active channel itself.
• Manipulating the DMAC related registers by DMA transfer
When manipulating the DMAC related registers by means of DMA transfer (e.g., reloading the DMAC related
registers with the initial values by DMA transfer), do not write to the DMAC related registers on the currently
active channel through that channel. (If this precaution is neglected, device operation cannot be guaranteed.)
It is only the DMAC related registers on other channels that can be rewritten by means of DMA transfer. (For
example, the DMAn Source Address and DMAn Destination Address Registers on channel 1 can be rewritten by
DMA transfer through channel 0.)
• About the DMA Interrupt Request Status Register
When clearing the DMA Interrupt Request Status Register, be sure to write "1" to all bits, except those to be
cleared. Writing "1" to any bits in this register has no effect, so that they retain the data they had before the write.
• About the stable operation of DMA transfer
To ensure the stable operation of DMA transfer, never rewrite the DMAC related registers, except the channel
control register’s transfer enable bit, unless transfer is disabled. One exception is that even when transfer is
enabled, the DMA Source Address and DMA Destination Address Registers can be rewritten by DMA transfer
from one channel to another.
9.4 Precautions about the DMAC
CHAPTER 10
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.1 Outline of Multijunction Timers
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
10.5 TMS (Input-Related 16-Bit Timer)
10.6 TML (Input-Related 32-Bit Timer)
10
10-2
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.1 Outline of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.1 Outline of Multijunction Timers
The multijunction timers (abbreviated MJT) have input event and output event buses. Therefore, in addition to
being used as a single unit, the timers can be internally connected to each other. This capability allows for highly
flexible timer configuration, making it possible to meet various application needs. It is because the timers are
connected to the internal event buses at multiple points that they are called the “multijunction” timers.
The 32182 has four types of MJT as listed in the table below, providing a total of 37-channel timers.
Table 10.1.1 Outline of MJT
Name Type No. of Channels Description
TOP Output-related 11 One of three output modes can be selected by software.
(Timer 16-bit timer <With correction function>
OutPut) (down-counter) • Single-shot output mode
• Delayed single-shot output mode
<Without correction function>
• Continuous output mode
TIO Input/output-related 10 One of three input modes or four output modes can be selected
(Timer 16-bit timer by software.
Input (down-counter) <Input modes>
OutPut) • Measure clear input mode
• Measure free-run input mode
• Noise processing input mode
<Output modes without correction function>
• PWM output mode
• Single-shot output mode
• Delayed single-shot output mode
• Continuous output mode
TMS Input-related 8 16-bit input measure timer
(Timer 16-bit timer
Measure (up-counter)
Small)
TML Input-related 8 32-bit input measure timer
(Timer 32-bit timer
Measure (up-counter)
Large)
10
10-3
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.1 Outline of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Table 10.1.2 Interrupt Generation Functions of MJT
Signal Name MJT Interrupt Request Source Source of Interrupt No. of ICU Input Sources
IRQ0 TIO0–3 output TIO0–3 output interrupt 4
IRQ1 TOP6, TOP7 output TOP6, 7 output interrupt 2
IRQ2 TOP0–5 output TOP0–5 output interrupt 6
IRQ3 TIO8, TIO9 output TIO8, 9 output interrupt 2
IRQ4 TIO4–7 output TIO4–7 output interrupt 4
IRQ5 TOP10 output TOP10 output interrupt 1
IRQ6 TOP8, TOP9 output TOP8, 9 output interrupt 2
IRQ7 TMS0, TMS1 output TMS0, 1 output interrupt 2
IRQ9 TIN0 input TIN0–2 input interrupt 1
IRQ10 TIN16–TIN19 input TIN12–19 input interrupt 4
IRQ11 TIN20–TIN23 input TIN20–29 input interrupt 4
IRQ12 TIN3 input TIN3–6 input interrupt 1
Table 10.1.3 DMA Transfer Request Generation by MJT
Corresponding DMAC Channel No. DMA Transfer Request Source
DMA0 TIO8_udf
Input event bus 2
Common transfer request source (see Table 10.1.4)
DMA1 Output event bus 0
TIN3 input signal
Common transfer request source (see Table 10.1.4)
DMA2 Output event bus 1
TIN18 input signal
Common transfer request source (see Table 10.1.4)
DMA3 TIN0 input signal
Common transfer request source (see Table 10.1.4)
DMA4 TIN19 input signal
Common transfer request source (see Table 10.1.4)
DMA5 TIN20 input signal
Common transfer request source (see Table 10.1.4)
DMA6 Common transfer request source (see Table 10.1.4)
DMA7 Common transfer request source (see Table 10.1.4)
DMA8 Input event bus 0
Common transfer request source (see Table 10.1.4)
DMA9 Common transfer request source (see Table 10.1.4)
10
10-4
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.1 Outline of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Table 10.1.4 DMA Transfer Request Generation by MJT (Common)
Corresponding DMAC Channel No. DMA Transfer Request Source
DMAn Input event bus 1
Input event bus 3
Output event bus 2
Output event bus 3
TIN0 input signal
TIO8_udf
Table 10.1.5 A-D Conversion Start Request by MJT
Signal Name A-D Conversion Start Request Source A-D Converter
AD0TRG Input event bus 2, input event bus 3, Can be input to A-D0 conversion start trigger
output event bus 3, TIN23
10
10-5
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.1 Outline of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 10.1.1 Block Diagram of MJT (1/3)
TCLK0 (P124)
TIN0 (P150)
BCLK/2
TIN3 (P153)
TCLK1 (P125)
TCLK2 (P126)
TO0 (P110)
TO1 (P111)
TO2 (P112)
TO3 (P113)
TO4 (P114)
TO5 (P115)
TO6 (P116)
TO7 (P117)
TO8 (P100)
TO9 (P101)
TO10 (P102)
TO11 (P103)
TO12 (P104)
TO13 (P105)
TO14 (P106)
TO15 (P107)
TO16 (P93)
TO17 (P94)
TO18 (P95)
TO19 (P96)
TO20 (P97)
IRQ9
DMA3,DMA commom
IRQ12
DMA1
IRQ2
IRQ2
IRQ2
IRQ2
IRQ2
IRQ2
IRQ1
IRQ1
IRQ6
IRQ6
IRQ5
IRQ0
IRQ0
IRQ0
IRQ0
IRQ4
IRQ4
IRQ4
IRQ4
DMA0
DMA
common
IRQ3
IRQ3
: Prescalers
: Output flip-flop
:
Selector
Notes: • IRQ0-18 denotes interrupt signals, of which the same number represents the same group of interrupts.
• DMA0-9 and DMA common denote DMA request signals to the DMAC.
• AD0TRG denotes trigger signal to the A-D0 converter.
SF/F
PRS0-5
S
TOP 0
clk en udf
TOP 1
clk en udf
TOP 2
clk en udf
TOP 3
clk en udf
TOP 4
clk en udf
TOP 5
clk en udf
TOP 6
clk en udf
TOP 7
clk en udf
TOP 8
clk en udf
TOP 9
clk en udf
TOP 10
clk en udf
TIO 0
clk en/cap udf
TIO 1
clk en/cap udf
TIO 2
clk en/cap udf
TIO 3
clk en/cap udf
TIO 4
clk en/cap udf
TIO 5
clk en/cap udf
TIO 6
clk en/cap udf
TIO 7
clk en/cap udf
TIO 8
clk en/cap udf
TIO 9
clk en/cap udf
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
TIN0S
TCLK0S
F/F10
F/F11
F/F12
F/F13
F/F14
F/F15
F/F16
F/F17
F/F18
F/F19
F/F20
F/F0
F/F1
F/F2
F/F3
F/F4
F/F5
F/F6
F/F7
F/F8
F/F9
TIN3S
S
S
PRS0
PRS1
PRS2
TCLK1S
TCLK2S
S
S
S
S
S
3210 3210 0123
3210 3210 0123
Clock bus Input event bus Output event bus
10
10-6
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.1 Outline of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TCLK3 (P127)
TIN16(P130)
TIN17(P131)
TIN18 (P132)
TIN19 (P133)
BCLK/2
TIN20 (P134)
TIN21 (P135)
TIN22 (P136)
TIN23 (P137)
BCLK/2
IRQ10
IRQ10
IRQ10
DMA2
IRQ10
DMA4
IRQ11
DMA5
IRQ11
IRQ11
IRQ11
(To A-D0 converter) AD0TRG
(To A-D1 converter)AD1TRG
AD0TRG (to A-D0 converter)
AD0TRG (to A-D0 converter)
AD0TRG
(to A-D0
converter)
IRQ7
IRQ7
TMS 0
clk cap3 cap2 cap1 cap0 ovf
S
TCLK3S
S
S
S
S
TMS 1
clk cap3 cap2 cap1 cap0 ovf
TIN16S
TIN17S
TIN18S
TIN19S
S
S
S
S
S
TML 0 (32-bit)
clk cap3 cap2 cap1 cap0
TIN20S
TIN21S
TIN22S
TIN23S
S
S
S
S
S
TML 1 (32-bit)
clk cap3 cap2 cap1 cap0
S
S
S
S
S
3210 3210 0123
3210 3210 0123
Clock bus Input event bus Output event bus
Figure 10.1.2 Block Diagram of MJT (2/3)
10
10-7
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.1 Outline of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
DMA0 udf
end
DMA1 udf
end
DMA2 udf
end
DMA3 udf
end
DMA4 udf
end
DMA5 udf
end
DMA6 udf
end
DMA7 udf
end
DMA8 udf
end
DMA9 udf
end
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
AD0 conversion
completed
TIO8_udf
TIN0S
CAN0_S0/S15
TIN3S
AD0 conversion
completed
TIO8_udf
Software start
Software start
TIN18S
Software start
SIO0_TXD
SIO1_RXD
Software start
SIO0_RXD
Software start
Software start
DMA0–4
interrupt
DMA5–9
interrupt
SIO2_RXD
SIO1_TXD
Software start
SIO2_TXD
Software start
SIO3_RXD
Software start
CAN0_S1/S14
TIN0S
TIN19S
SIO0_TXD
TIN20S
SIO1_RXD
SIO3_TXD
SIO3_TXD
Software start
0123
Input event bus Output event bus
3210
3210 0123
Figure 10.1.3 Block Diagram of MJT (3/3)
10
10-8
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
The common units of MJT include the following:
• Prescaler Unit
• Clock Bus and Input/Output Event Bus Control Unit
• Input Processing Control Unit
• Output Flip-flop Control Unit
• Interrupt Control Unit
10
10-9
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.2.1 MJT Common Unit Register Map
The table below shows a common unit register map of MJT.
MJT Common Unit Register Map
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 0200 (Use inhibited area) Clock Bus & Input Event Bus Control Register 10-14
(CKIEBCR)
H'0080 0202 Prescaler Register 0 Prescaler Register 1 10-10
(PRS0) (PRS1)
H'0080 0204 Prescaler Register 2 Output Event Bus Control Register 10-10
(PRS2) (OEBCR) 10-15
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0210 TCLK Input Processing Control Register 10-18
(TCLKCR)
H'0080 0212 TIN0–4 Input Processing Control Register 10-19
(TIN04CR)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0218 TIN12–19 Input Processing Control Register 10-20
(TIN1219CR)
H'0080 021A TIN20–23, TIN30–33 Input Processing Control Register 10-20
(TIN2023_3033CR)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0220 F/F6–15 Source Select Register 10-22
(FF615S)
H'0080 0222 (Use inhibited area) F/F16–19 Source Select Register 10-23
(FF1619S)
H'0080 0224 F/F0–15 Protect Register 10-24
(FF015P)
H'0080 0226 F/F0–15 Data Register 10-25
(FF015D)
H'0080 0228 (Use inhibited area) F/F16–20 Protect Register 10-24
(FF1620P)
H'0080 022A (Use inhibited area) F/F16–20 Data Register 10-25
(FF1620D)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0230 TOP0–5 Interrupt Request Status Register TOP0–5 Interrupt Request Mask Register 10-30
(TOP05IST) (TOP05IMA)
H'0080 0232 TOP6,7 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register TOP8,9 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register 10-32
(TOP67IMS) (TOP89IMS) 10-33
H'0080 0234 TIO0–3 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register TIO4–7 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register 10-34
(TIO03IMS) (TIO47IMS) 10-35
H'0080 0236 TIO8,9 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register TMS0,1 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register 10-36
(TIO89IMS) (TMS01IMS) 10-37
H'0080 0238 TIN0–2 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register TIN3–6 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register 10-38
(TIN02IMS) (TIN36IMS) 10-39
H'0080 023A (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 023C TIN12–19 Interrupt Request Status Register TIN12–19 Interrupt Request Mask Register 10-40
(TIN1219IST) (TIN1219IMA)
H'0080 023E TIN20–23 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (Use inhibited area) 10-42
(TIN2023IMS)
|
|
|
|
10
10-10
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.2.2 Prescaler Unit
The Prescalers PRS0–2 are an 8-bit counter, which generates clocks supplied to each timer (TOP, TIO, TMS
and TML) from the internal peripheral clock (BCLK) divided by 2 (10 MHz when f(BCLK) = 20 MHz).
The values of prescaler registers are initialized to H’00 immediately after reset. When the set value of any
prescaler register is rewritten, the prescaler starts operating with the new value at the same time it has
underflowed.
Values H’00 to H’FF can be set in the prescaler register. The prescaler’s divide-by ratio is given by the equation
below:
Prescaler divide-by ratio = 1
prescaler set value + 1
Prescaler Register 0 (PRS0) <Address: H’0080 0202>
Prescaler Register 1 (PRS1) <Address: H’0080 0203>
Prescaler Register 2 (PRS2) <Address: H’0080 0204>
9 1011121314b15b8
123456b7b0
PRS0–PRS5
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–7 PRS0–PRS2 Set the prescaler divide-by value R W
(8–15) Prescaler
Prescaler Registers 0–2 start counting immediately after reset.
If the prescaler register is accessed for read during operation, the value written into it, not the current count, is
read out.
10
10-11
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.2.3 Clock Bus and Input/Output Event Bus Control Unit
(1) Clock bus
The clock bus is provided for supplying clock to each timer, and is comprised of four lines of clock bus 0–3.
Each timer can use these clock bus signals as clock input signals. The table below lists the signals that can
be fed into the clock bus.
Table 10.2.1 Acceptable Clock Bus Signals
Clock Bus Acceptable Signal
3 TCLK0 input
2 Internal prescaler (PRS2) or TCLK3 input
1 Internal prescaler (PRS1)
0 Internal prescaler (PRS0)
(2) Input event bus
The input event bus is provided for supplying a count enable signal or measure capture signal to each timer,
and is comprised of four lines of input event bus 0–3. Each timer can use these input event bus signals as
enable (or capture) input. Furthermore, they can also be used as request signals to start A-D conversion or
DMA transfer.
The table below lists the signals that can be fed into the input event bus.
Table 10.2.2 Connectable (Acceptable) Input Event Bus Signals
Input Event Bus Connectable (Acceptable) Signal (Note 1)
3 TIN3 input, output event bus 2 or TIO7 underflow signal
2 TIN0 input
1 TIO6 underflow signal
0 TIO5 underflow signal
Note 1: For the destination (output) to which the input event bus signals are connected, see Figure 10.1.1, “Block Diagram of MJT.”
(3) Output event bus
The output event bus has the underflow signal from each timer connected to it, and is comprised of four lines
of output event bus 0–3. Output event bus signals are connected to output flip-flops, and can also be con-
nected to the A-D converter and DMAC. Furthermore, output event bus 2 can be connected to input event
bus 3.
The table below lists the signals that can be connected to the output event bus.
Table 10.2.3 Connectable (Acceptable) Output Event Bus Signals
Input Event Bus Connectable (Acceptable) Signal (Note 1)
3 TOP8, TIO3, TIO4 or TIO8 underflow signal
2 TOP9 or TIO2 underflow signal
1 TOP7 or TIO1 underflow signal
0 TOP6 or TIO0 underflow signal
Note 1: For the destination (output) to which the output event bus signals are connected, see Figure 10.1.1, “Block Diagram of MJT.”
Note that the signals from each timer to the output event bus (and TIO5, 6 signals to the input event bus) are
generated with the timing shown in Table 10.2.4, and not the timing at which signals are output from the timer
to the output flip-flop.
10
10-12
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Table 10.2.4 Timing at Which Signals are Generated to the Output Event Bus by Each Timer
Timer Mode Timing at which signals are generated to the output event bus
TOP Single-shot output mode When the counter underflows
Delayed single-shot output mode When the counter underflows
Continuous output mode When the counter underflows
TIO(Note 1) Measure clear input mode When the counter underflows
Measure free-run input mode When the counter underflows
Noise processing input mode When the counter underflows
PWM output mode When the counter underflows
Single-shot output mode When the counter underflows
Delayed single-shot output mode When the counter underflows
Continuous output mode When the counter underflows
TMS (16-bit measure input) No signals generated
TML (32-bit measure input) No signals generated
Note 1: TIO5–7 output an underflow signal to the input event bus.
10
10-13
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 10.2.1 Conceptual Diagram of the Clock Bus and Input/Output Event Bus
Clock bus Input event bus
TCLK0S
3 2 1 0
TCLK0 (P124)
TIN0 (P150)
TIN3 (P153)
PRS1
PRS0
PRS0-2 : Prescaler
3 2 1 0
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
PRS2
TCLK3 (P127)
udf
TIO 5
udf
TIO 6
S
Output event bus
0 1 2 3
udf
TIO 7
clk en udf
TOP 6
clk en udf
TOP 7
clk en udf
TOP 8
clk en udf
TOP 9
udf
TIO 0
udf
TIO 1
udf
TIO 2
udf
TIO 3
udf
TIO 4
udf
TIO 8
0 1 2 3
S: Selector
TCLK3S
TIN0S
TIN3S
BCLK/2
10
10-14
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
The Clock Bus and Input/Output Event Bus Control Unit has the following registers:
• Clock Bus & Input Event Bus Control Register (CKIEBCR)
• Output Event Bus Control Register (OEBCR)
Clock Bus & Input Event Bus Control Register (CKIEBCR) <Address: H’0080 0201>
9 1011121314b15b8
CKB2SIEB0S
IEB1S
IEB3S IEB2S
000000 0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8, 9 IEB3S 00: Select external input 3 (TIN3) R W
Input event bus 3 input select bit 01: – ditto –
10: Select output event bus 2
11: Select TIO7 output
10, 11 IEB2S 00: Select external input 0 (TIN0) R W
Input event bus 2 input select bit 01: Select external input 2 (TIN2) (Note 1)
10: Select external input 4 (TIN4) (Note 1)
11: – ditto – (Note 1)
12 IEB1S 0: Select external input 5 (TIN5) (Note 1) R W
Input event bus 1 input select bit 1: Select TIO6 output
13 IEB0S 0: Select external input 6 (TIN6) (Note 1) R W
Input event bus 0 input select bit 1: Select TIO5 output
14 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
15 CKB2S 0: Select prescaler 2 R W
Clock bus 2 input select bit 1: Select external clock 3 (TCLK3)
Note 1: Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins and the selected function
therefore has no effect.
The CKIEBCR register is used to select the clock source (external input or prescaler) supplied to the clock bus
and the count enable/capture signal (external input or output event bus) supplied to the input event bus.
10
10-15
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Output Event Bus Control Register (OEBCR) <Address: H’0080 0205>
9 1011121314b15b8
OEB0SOEB1SOEB3S OEB2S
00
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8, 9 OEB3S 00: Select TOP8 output R W
Output event bus 3 input select bit 01: Select TIO3 output
10: Select TIO4 output
11: Select TIO8 output
10 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
11 OEB2S 0: Select TOP9 output R W
Output event bus 2 input select bit 1: Select TIO2 output
12 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
13 OEB1S 0: Select TOP7 output R W
Output event bus 1 input select bit 1: Select TIO1 output
14 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
15 OEB0S 0: Select TOP6 output R W
Output event bus 0 input select bit 1: Select TIO0 output
The OEBCR register is used to select the timer (TOP or TIO) whose underflow signal is supplied to the output
event bus.
10.2.4 Input Processing Control Unit
The Input Processing Control Unit processes TCLK and TIN input signals to the MJT. In TCLK input processing,
it selects the source of TCLK signal, and for external input, it selects the active edge (rising or falling or both) or
level (high or low) of the signal, at which to generate the clock signal supplied to the clock bus.
In TIN input processing, the unit selects the active edge (rising or falling or both) or level (high or low) of the
signal, at which to generate the enable, measure or count source signal for each timer or the signal supplied to
each event bus.
Following input processing registers are included:
• TLCK Input Processing Control Register (TCLKCR)
• TIN0–4 Input Processing Control Register (TIN04CR)
• TIN12–19 Input Processing Control Register (TIN1219CR)
• TIN20–23, TIN30–33 Input Processing Control Register (TIN2023_3033CR)
10
10-16
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Count clock
Count clock
Count clock
BCLK/2
Count clock
BCLK/2
TCLK
TCLK
Count clock
TCLK
TCLK
TCLK
Count clock
BCLK/2
Item Function
BCLK/2
Rising edge
Falling edge
Both edges
Low level
High level
(1) Functions of TCLK Input Processing Control Registers
10
10-17
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
(2) Functions of TIN Input Processing Control Registers
Internal edge
signal
Internal edge
signal
Internal edge
signal
Prescaler output period or TCLK input period
TIN
TIN
Internal edge
signal
TIN
TIN
TIN
Internal edge
signal
Prescaler output period or TCLK input period
Item Function
Rising edge
Falling edge
Both edges
Low level
High level
10
10-18
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TLCK Input Processing Control Register (TCLKCR) <Address: H’0080 0210>
b01234567891011121314b15
TCLK3S TCLK2S TCLK1S TCLK0S
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
000
0
0
00
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0, 1 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
2, 3 TCLK3S 00: BCLK/2 R W
TCLK3 input processing select bit 01: Rising edge
10: Falling edge
11: Both edges
4 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
5–7 TCLK2S 000: Disable input R W
TCLK2 input processing select bit 001: Rising edge
010: Falling edge
011: Both edges
100: Low level
101: Low level
110: High level
111: High level
8 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
9–11 TCLK1S 000: Disable input R W
TCLK1 input processing select bit 001: Rising edge
010: Falling edge
011: Both edges
100: Low level
101: Low level
110: High level
111: High level
12,13 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
14,15 TCLK0S 00: BCLK/2 R W
TCLK0 input processing select bit 01: Rising edge
10: Falling edge
11: Both edges110
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
10
10-19
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIN0–4 Input Processing Control Register (TIN04CR) <Address: H’0080 0212>
b01234567891011121314b15
TIN4S TIN3S TIN2S TIN0STIN1S
0
000
0
0
0
0
0
0
000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
1–3 Fix to "0". 00
4 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
5–7 TIN3S 000: Disable input R W
TIN3 input processing select bit 001: Rising edge
010: Falling edge
011: Both edges
100: Low level
101: Low level
110: High level
111: High level
8,9 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
10,11 Fix to "0". 00
12,13 Fix to "0". 00
14,15 TIN0S 00: Disable input R W
TIN0 input processing select bit 01: Rising edge
10: Falling edge
11: Both edges
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
10
10-20
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIN12–19 Input Processing Control Register (TIN1219CR) <Address: H’0080 0218>
b01234567891011121314b15
TIN19S TIN18S TIN17S TIN16S TIN15S TIN14S TIN13S TIN12S
0000000000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0, 1 TIN19S (TIN19 input processing select bit) 00: Disable input R W
2, 3 TIN18S (TIN18 input processing select bit) 01: Rising edge
4, 5 TIN17S (TIN17 input processing select bit) 10: Falling edge
6, 7 TIN16S (TIN16 input processing select bit) 11: Both edges
8-15 Fix to "0". 00
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
TIN20–23, TIN30–33 Input Processing Control Register (TIN2023_3033CR) <Address: H’0080 021A>
b01234567891011121314b15
TIN33S TIN32S TIN31S TIN30S TIN23S TIN22S TIN21S TIN20S
0000000000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0-7 Fix to "0". 00
8, 9 TIN23S (TIN23 input processing select bit) 00: Disable input R W
10, 11 TIN22S (TIN22 input processing select bit) 01: Rising edge
12, 13 TIN21S (TIN21 input processing select bit) 10: Falling edge
14, 15 TIN20S (TIN20 input processing select bit) 11: Both edges
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
10
10-21
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.2.5 Output Flip-flop Control Unit
The Output Flip-flop Control Unit controls the flip-flops (F/F) provided for each timer. Following flip-flop control
registers are included:
• F/F6–15 Source Select Register (FF615S)
• F/F16–19 Source Select Register (FF1619S)
• F/F0–15 Protect Register (FF015P)
• F/F16–20 Protect Register (FF1620P)
• F/F0–15 Data Register (FF015D)
• F/F16–20 Data Register (FF1620D)
The timing at which signals are generated to the output flip-flop by each timer are shown in Table 10.2.5. (Note
that this timing is different from one at which signals are output from the timer to the output event bus.)
10.2.5 Timing at Which Signals Are Generated to the Output Flip-Flop by Each Timer
Timer Mode Timing at which signals are generated to the output flip-flop
TOP Single-shot output mode When count is enabled or underflows
Delayed single-shot output mode When counter underflows
Continuous output mode When count is enabled or underflows
TIO Measure clear input mode When counter underflows
Measure free-run input mode When counter underflows
Noise processing input mode When counter underflows
PWM output mode When count is enabled or underflows
Single-shot output mode When count is enabled or underflows
Delayed single-shot output mode When counter underflows
Continuous output mode When count is enabled or underflows
TMS (16-bit measure input) No signals generated
TML (32-bit measure input) No signals generated
Figure 10.2.2 Configuration of the F/F Output Circuit Table
Output event bus 0
Data bus
F/F protect (FPn)
WR
Data bus
Output control (ON/OFF)
TOn
Internal edge signal
Port operation mode register (PnMOD)
F/Fn output data (FDn)
TOP/TIO
F/F source selection (FSn)
Output event bus 1
Output event bus 2
Output event bus 3
F/F
F/F
F/F
10
10-22
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
F/F6–15 Source Select Register (FF615S) <Address: H’0080 0220>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
FS15 FS14 FS13 FS12 FS11 FS10 FS9 FS8 FS7 FS6
0
0
0
0000000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–2 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
3 FS15 0: TIO4 output R W
F/F15 source select bit 1: Output event bus 0
4 FS14 0: TIO3 output R W
F/F14 source select bit 1: Output event bus 0
5 FS13 0: TIO2 output R W
F/F13 source select bit 1: Output event bus 3
6 FS12 0: TIO1 output R W
F/F12 source select bit 1: Output event bus 2
7 FS11 0: TIO0 output R W
F/F11 source select bit 1: Output event bus 1
8, 9 FS10 00: TOP10 output R W
F/F10 source select bit 01: TOP10 output
10: Output event bus 0
11: Output event bus 1
10, 11 FS9 00: TOP9 output R W
F/F9 source select bit 01: TOP9 output
10: Output event bus 0
11: Output event bus 1
12, 13 FS8 00: TOP8 output R W
F/F8 source select bit 01: Output event bus 0
10: Output event bus 1
11: Output event bus 2
14 FS7 0: TOP7 output R W
F/F7 source select bit 1: Output event bus 0
15 FS6 0: TOP6 output R W
F/F6 source select bit 1: Output event bus 1
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
10
10-23
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
F/F16–19 Source Select Register (FF1619S) <Address: H’0080 0223>
9 1011121314b15b8
FS16FS17FS19 FS18
00000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
8, 9 FS19 00: TIO8 output R W
F/F19 source select bit 01: TIO8 output
10: Output event bus 0
11: Output event bus 1
10, 11 FS18 00: TIO7 output R W
F/F18 source select bit 01: TIO7 output
10: Output event bus 0
11: Output event bus 1
12, 13 FS17 00: TIO6 output R W
F/F17 source select bit 01: TIO6 output
10: Output event bus 0
11: Output event bus 1
14, 15 FS16 00: TIO5 output R W
F/F16 source select bit 01: Output event bus 0
10: Output event bus 1
11: Output event bus 3
These registers select the signal source for each output F/F (flip-flop). This signal source can be chosen to be a
signal from the internal output bus or an underflow output from each timer.
10
10-24
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
F/F0–15 Protect Register (FF015P) <Address: H’0080 0224>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
FP15 FP14 FP13 FP12 FP11 FP10 FP9 FP8 FP7 FP6 FP5 FP4 FP3 FP2 FP1 FP0
0000000000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 FP15 (F/F15 protect bit) 0: Enable write to F/F output bit R W
1 FP14 (F/F14 protect bit) 1: Disable write to F/F output bit
2 FP13 (F/F13 protect bit)
3 FP12 (F/F12 protect bit)
4 FP11 (F/F11 protect bit)
5 FP10 (F/F10 protect bit)
6 FP9 (F/F9 protect bit)
7 FP8 (F/F8 protect bit)
8 FP7 (F/F7 protect bit)
9 FP6 (F/F6 protect bit)
10 FP5 (F/F5 protect bit)
11 FP4 (F/F4 protect bit)
12 FP3 (F/F3 protect bit)
13 FP2 (F/F2 protect bit)
14 FP1 (F/F1 protect bit)
15 FP0 (F/F0 protect bit)
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
F/F16–20 Protect Register (FF1620P) <Address: H’0080 0229>
9 1011121314b15b8
FP16FP17FP20 FP19 FP18
00000
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–10 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
11 FP20 (F/F20 protect bit) 0: Enable write to F/F output bit R W
12 FP19 (F/F19 protect bit) 1: Disable write to F/F output bit
13 FP18 (F/F18 protect bit)
14 FP17 (F/F17 protect bit)
15 FP16 (F/F16 protect bit)
This register enables or disables write to each output F/F (flip-flop). If write to any output F/F is disabled, writing
to the corresponding F/F data register has no effect.
10
10-25
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
F/F0–15 Data Register (FF015D) <Address: H’0080 0226>
b01234567891011121314b15
FD15 FD14 FD13 FD12 FD11 FD10 FD9 FD8 FD7 FD6 FD5 FD4 FD3 FD2 FD1 FD0
0000000000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 FD15 (F/F15 output data bit) 0: F/F output data = 0 R W
1 FD14 (F/F14 output data bit) 1: F/F output data = 1
2 FD13 (F/F13 output data bit)
3 FD12 (F/F12 output data bit)
4 FD11 (F/F11 output data bit)
5 FD10 (F/F10 output data bit)
6 FD9 (F/F9 output data bit)
7 FD8 (F/F8 output data bit)
8 FD7 (F/F7 output data bit)
9 FD6 (F/F6 output data bit)
10 FD5 (F/F5 output data bit)
11 FD4 (F/F4 output data bit)
12 FD3 (F/F3 output data bit)
13 FD2 (F/F2 output data bit)
14 FD1 (F/F1 output data bit)
15 FD0 (F/F0 output data bit)
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
F/F16–20 Data Register (FF1620D) <Address: H’0080 022B>
9 1011121314b15b8
FD16FD17FD20 FD19 FD18
00000
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–10 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
11 FD20 (F/F20 output data bit) 0: F/F output data = 0 R W
12 FD19 (F/F19 output data bit) 1: F/F output data = 1
13 FD18 (F/F18 output data bit)
14 FD17 (F/F17 output data bit)
15 FD16 (F/F16 output data bit)
This register is used to set the data for each output F/F (flip-flop). Although the F/F outputs normally change
state depending on timer outputs, the F/F outputs can be set to 1 or cleared to 0 as necessary by writing to this
register. The F/F data register can only be operated on when the F/F protect register described above is enabled
for write.
10
10-26
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.2.6 Interrupt Control Unit
The Interrupt Control Unit controls the interrupt request signals output to the Interrupt Controller by each timer.
Following timer interrupt control registers are provided for each timer:
• TOP0–5 Interrupt Request Status Register (TOP05IST)
• TOP0–5 Interrupt Request Mask Register (TOP05IMA)
• TOP6,7 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TOP67IMS)
• TOP8,9 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TOP89IMS)
• TIO0–3 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TIO03IMS)
• TIO4–7 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TIO47IMS)
• TIO8,9 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TIO89IMS)
• TMS0,1 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TMS01IMS)
• TIN0–2 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TIN02IMS)
• TIN3–6 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TIN36IMS)
• TIN12–19 Interrupt Request Status Register (TIN1219IST)
• TIN12–19 Interrupt Request Mask Register (TIN1219IMA)
• TIN20–23 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TIN2023IMS)
For interrupts which have only one interrupt request source in the interrupt vector table, no interrupt control
registers are included in the timer, and the interrupt request status flags are automatically managed within the
Interrupt Controller. For details, see Chapter 5, “Interrupt Controller.”
• TOP10 TOP10 Output Interrupt Request (IRQ5)
10
10-27
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 10.2.3 Interrupt Request Status and Mask Registers
For interrupts which have two or more interrupt sources in the interrupt vector table, interrupt control registers
are included, with which to control interrupt requests and determine interrupt input. Therefore, the status flags in
the Interrupt Controller only serve as a bit to determine interrupt requests from interrupt-enabled sources and
cannot be accessed for write.
(1) Interrupt request status bit
This status bit is used to determine whether there is an interrupt request. When an interrupt request occurs,
this bit is set in hardware (cannot be set in software). The status bit is cleared by writing "0". Writing "1" has
no effect; the bit retains the status it had before the write. Because this status bit is unaffected by the interrupt
request mask bit, it can be used to inspect the operating status of peripheral functions.
In interrupt handling, make sure that within the grouped interrupt request status, only the status bit for the
interrupt request that has been serviced is cleared. If the status bit for any interrupt request that has not been
serviced is cleared, the pending interrupt request is cleared simultaneously with its status bit.
(2) Interrupt request mask bit
This bit is used to disable unnecessary interrupts within the grouped interrupt request. Set this bit to "0" to
enable interrupt requests or "1" to disable interrupt requests.
To the Interrupt
Controller
Timer or TIN input
interrupt request
Interrupt request status
Data bus
Set
Group interrupt
Interrupt request enabled
clear
F/F
F/F
Data = 0
10
10-28
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 10.2.4 Example for Clearing Interrupt Request Status
b4 5 b7
Interrupt request status
Initial state
Event occurs on bit 6
Interrupt request
Event occurs on bit 4
Only bit 6 cleared
Bit 4 data retained
b4 5 b7
1 1 0 1
Write to the interrupt request status
Example for clearing interrupt request status
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 0 0 0
Program example
ISTREG = 0xfd; /* Clear ISTAT1 (0x02 bit) only */
To clear the Interrupt Request Status Register 0 (ISTREG) interrupt request status 1, ISTAT1 (0x02 bit)
To clear an interrupt request status, always be sure to write "1" to all other interrupt request status bits. At this time,
avoid using a logic operation like the one shown below. Because it requires three step-ISTREG read, logic operation
and write, if another interrupt request occurs between the read and write, status may be inadvertently cleared.
b4 5 6 b7
Interrupt request status
Event occurs on bit 6
Event occurs on bit 4
Only bit 6 cleared
Bit 4 also cleared
0 0 1 0
1 0 1 0
0 0 0 0
Read
0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0
Clear bit 6 (ANDing with 1101)
Write
6
6
ISTREG &= 0xfd; /* Clear ISTAT1 (0x02 bit) only */
10
10-29
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
The table below shows the relationship between the interrupt request signals generated by multijunction timers
and the interrupt sources input to the Interrupt Controller (ICU).
Table 10.2.6 Interrupt Request Signals Generated by MJT
Signal Name Generated by Interrupt Request Source (Note 1) No. of ICU Input Sources
IRQ0 TIO0, TIO1, TIO2, TIO3 TIO0–3 output interrupt 4
IRQ1 TOP6, TOP7 TOP6, 7 output interrupt 2
IRQ2 TOP0, TOP1, TOP2, TOP3, TOP4, TOP5 TOP0–5 output interrupt 6
IRQ3 TIO8, TIO9 TIO8, 9 output interrupt 2
IRQ4 TIO4, TIO5, TIO6, TIO7 TIO4–7 output interrupt 4
IRQ6 TOP8, TOP9 TOP8, 9 output interrupt 2
IRQ7 TMS0, TMS1 TMS0, 1 output interrupt 2
IRQ9 TIN0 TIN0–2 input interrupt 1
IRQ10 TIN16, TIN17, TIN18, TIN19 TIN12–19 input interrupt 4
IRQ11 TIN20, TIN21, TIN22, TIN23 TIN20–29 input interrupt 4
IRQ12 TIN3 TIN3–6 input interrupt 1
Note 1: See Chapter 5, “Interrupt Controller (ICU).”
Note: • TOP10 has only one interrupt source in each interrupt group, so that their status and mask registers are nonexistent
in the MJT interrupt control registers. (They are controlled directly by the Interrupt Controller.)
10
10-30
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TOP0–5 Interrupt Request Status Register (TOP05IST) <Address: H’0080 0230>
123456b7b0
TOPIS0TOPIS1TOPIS4TOPIS5 TOPIS3 TOPIS2
000000
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0, 1 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
2 TOPIS5 (TOP5 interrupt request status bit) 0: Interrupt not requested R(Note 1)
3 TOPIS4 (TOP4 interrupt request status bit) 1: Interrupt requested
4 TOPIS3 (TOP3 interrupt request status bit)
5 TOPIS2 (TOP2 interrupt request status bit)
6 TOPIS1 (TOP1 interrupt request status bit)
7 TOPIS0 (TOP0 interrupt request status bit)
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
TOP0–5 Interrupt Request Mask Register (TOP05IMA) <Address: H’0080 0231>
9 1011121314b15b8
TOPIM0TOPIM1TOPIM4TOPIM5 TOPIM3 TOPIM2
000000
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8, 9 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
10 TOPIM5 (TOP5 interrupt request mask bit) 0: Enable interrupt request R W
11 TOPIM4 (TOP4 interrupt request mask bit) 1: Mask (disable) interrupt request
12 TOPIM3 (TOP3 interrupt request mask bit)
13 TOPIM2 (TOP2 interrupt request mask bit)
14 TOPIM1 (TOP1 interrupt request mask bit)
15 TOPIM0 (TOP0 interrupt request mask bit)
10
10-31
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 10.2.5 Block Diagram of TOP0–5 Output Interrupt Request
TOP0-5 output interrupt request
IRQ2
Data bus
b2 TOPIS5
F/F
TOPIM5
F/F
b10
b3 TOPIS4
F/F
TOPIM4
F/F
b11
b4 TOPIS3
F/F
TOPIM3
F/F
b12
b5 TOPIS2
F/F
TOPIM2
F/F
b13
b6 TOPIS1
F/F
TOPIM1
F/F
b14
b7 TOPIS0
F/F
TOPIM0
F/F
b15
(Level)
6-source inputs
TOP05IST <H'0080 0230>
TOP05IMA <H'0080 0231>
TOP5udf
TOP4udf
TOP3udf
TOP2udf
TOP1udf
TOP0udf
10
10-32
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TOP6,7 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TOP67IMS) <Address: H’0080 0232>
123456b7b0
TOPIM6TOPIM7TOPIS6TOPIS7
00 00
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0, 1 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
2 TOPIS7 (TOP7 interrupt request status bit) 0: Interrupt not requested R(Note 1)
3 TOPIS6 (TOP6 interrupt request status bit) 1: Interrupt requested
4, 5 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
6 TOPIM7 (TOP7 interrupt request mask bit) 0: Enable interrupt request R W
7 TOPIM6 (TOP6 interrupt request mask bit) 1: Mask (disable) interrupt request
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
TOP6,7 output interrupt request
IRQ1
Data bus
b2 TOPIS7
F/F
TOPIM7
F/F
b6
b3 TOPIS6
F/F
TOPIM6
F/F
b7
(Level)
2-source inputs
TOP67IMS <H'0080 0232>
TOP7udf
TOP6udf
Figure 10.2.6 Block Diagram of TOP6,7 Output Interrupt Request
10
10-33
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TOP8,9 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TOP89IMS) <Address: H’0080 0233>
9 1011121314b15b8
TOPIM8TOPIM9TOPIS8TOPIS9
00 00
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8,9 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
10 TOPIS9 (TOP9 interrupt request status bit) 0: Interrupt not requested R(Note 1)
11 TOPIS8 (TOP8 interrupt request status bit) 1: Interrupt requested
12,13 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
14 TOPIM9 (TOP9 interrupt request mask bit) 0: Enable interrupt request R W
15 TOPIM8 (TOP8 interrupt request mask bit) 1: Mask (disable) interrupt request
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
Note: • TOP10 has only one interrupt source in the interrupt group, so that its status and mask registers are nonexistent in the MJT
interrupt control registers. (They are controlled directly by the Interrupt Controller.)
b10 TOPIS9
F/F
TOPIM9
F/F
b14
b11 TOPIS8
F/F
TOPIM8
F/F
b15
TOP8,9 output interrupt request
IRQ6
(Level)
2-source inputs
TOP89IMS <H'0080 0233>
Data bus
TOP9udf
TOP8udf
Figure 10.2.7 Block Diagram of TOP8,9 Output Interrupt Request
10
10-34
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIO0–3 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TIO03IMS) <Address: H’0080 0234>
123456b7b0
TIOIM0TIOIM1TIOIS0TIOIS3 TIOIS2 TIOIS1 TIOIM3 TIOIM2
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 TIOIS3 (TIO3 interrupt request status bit) 0: Interrupt not requested R(Note 1)
1 TIOIS2 (TIO2 interrupt request status bit) 1: Interrupt requested
2 TIOIS1 (TIO1 interrupt request status bit)
3 TIOIS0 (TIO0 interrupt request status bit)
4 TIOIM3 (TIO3 interrupt request mask bit) 0: Enable interrupt request R W
5 TIOIM2 (TIO2 interrupt request mask bit) 1: Mask (disable) interrupt request
6 TIOIM1 (TIO1 interrupt request mask bit)
7 TIOIM0 (TIO0 interrupt request mask bit)
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
TIO0–3 output interrupt request
IRQ0
Data bus
b0 TIOIS3
F/F
TIOIM3
F/F
b4
b1 TIOIS2
F/F
TIOIM2
F/F
b5
b2 TIOIS1
F/F
TIOIM1
F/F
b6
b3 TIOIS0
F/F
TIOIM0
F/F
b7
(Level)
4-source inputs
TIO03IMS <H'0080 0234>
TIO3udf
TIO2udf
TIO1udf
TIO0udf
Figure 10.2.8 Block Diagram of TIO0–3 Output Interrupt Request
10
10-35
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIO4–7 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TIO47IMS) <Address: H’0080 0235>
9 1011121314b15b8
TIOIM4TIOIM5TIOIS4TIOIS7 TIOIS6 TIOIS5 TIOIM7 TIOIM6
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 TIOIS7 (TIO7 interrupt request status bit) 0: Interrupt not requested R(Note 1)
9 TIOIS6 (TIO6 interrupt request status bit) 1: Interrupt requested
10 TIOIS5 (TIO5 interrupt request status bit)
11 TIOIS4 (TIO4 interrupt request status bit)
12 TIOIM7 (TIO7 interrupt request mask bit) 0: Enable interrupt request R W
13 TIOIM6 (TIO6 interrupt request mask bit) 1: Mask (disable) interrupt request
14 TIOIM5 (TIO5 interrupt request mask bit)
15 TIOIM4 (TIO4 interrupt request mask bit)
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
TIO4–7 output interrupt request
IRQ4
Data bus
b8 TIOIS7
F/F
TIOIM7
F/F
b12
b9 TIOIS6
F/F
TIOIM6
F/F
b13
b10 TIOIS5
F/F
TIOIM5
F/F
b14
b11 TIOIS4
F/F
TIOIM4
F/F
b15
(Level)
4-source inputs
TIO47IMS <H'0080 0235>
TIO7udf
TIO6udf
TIO5udf
TIO4udf
Figure 10.2.9 Block Diagram of TIO4–7 Output Interrupt Request
10
10-36
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIO8,9 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TIO89IMS) <Address: H’0080 0236>
123456b7b0
TIOIM8TIOIM9TIOIS8TIOIS9
00 00
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0, 1 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
2 TIOIS9 (TIO9 interrupt request status bit) 0: Interrupt not requested R(Note 1)
3 TIOIS8 (TIO8 interrupt request status bit) 1: Interrupt requested
4, 5 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
6 TIOIM9 (TIO9 interrupt request mask bit) 0: Enable interrupt request R W
7 TIOIM8 (TIO8 interrupt request mask bit) 1: Mask (disable) interrupt request
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
TIO8, 9 output interrupt request
IRQ3
Data bus
b2 TIOIS9
F/F
TIOIM9
F/F
b6
b3 TIOIS8
F/F
TIOIM8
F/F
b7
(Level)
2-source inputs
TIO89IMS <H'0080 0236>
TIO9udf
TIO8udf
Figure 10.2.10 Block Diagram of TIO8,9 Output Interrupt Request
10
10-37
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TMS0,1 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TMS01IMS) <Address: H’0080 0237>
9 1011121314b15b8
TMSIM0TMSIM1TMSIS0TMSIS1
00 00
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8, 9 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
10 TMSIS1 (TMS1 interrupt request status bit) 0: Interrupt not requested R(Note 1)
11 TMSIS0 (TMS0 interrupt request status bit) 1: Interrupt requested
12, 13 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
14 TMSIM1 (TMS1 interrupt request mask bit) 0: Enable interrupt request R W
15 TMSIM0 (TMS0 interrupt request mask bit) 1: Mask (disable) interrupt request
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
TMS0, 1 output interrupt request
IRQ7
Data bus
b10 TMSIS1
F/F
TMSIM1
F/F
b14
b11 TMSIS0
F/F
TMSIM0
F/F
b15
(Level)
2-source inputs
TMS01IMS <H'0080 0237>
TMS1ovf
TMS0ovf
Figure 10.2.11 Block Diagram of TMS0,1 Output Interrupt Request
10
10-38
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIN0–2 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TIN02IMS) <Address: H’0080 0238>
123456b7b0
TINIM0TINIM1TINIM2TINIS0TINIS1TINIS2
000 000
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
1 TINIS2 (TIN2 interrupt request status bit) (Note 2) 0: Interrupt not requested R(Note 1)
2 TINIS1 (TIN1 interrupt request status bit) (Note 2) 1: Interrupt requested
3 TINIS0 (TIN0 interrupt request status bit)
4 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
5 TINIM2 (TIN2 interrupt request mask bit) (Note 2) 0: Enable interrupt request R W
6 TINIM1 (TIN1 interrupt request mask bit) (Note 2) 1: Mask (disable) interrupt request
7 TINIM0 (TIN0 interrupt request mask bit)
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
Note 2: Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins and the selected function
therefore has no effect.
Figure 10.2.12 Block Diagram of TIN0–2 Input Interrupt Request
TIN0–2 input interrupt request
IRQ9
Data bus
b1 TINIS2
F/F
TINIM2
F/F
b5
b2 TINIS1
F/F
TINIM1
F/F
b6
b3 TINIS0
F/F
TINIM0
F/F
b7
(Level)
3-source inputs
TIN02IMS <H'0080 0238>
TIN2edge
(Note 1)
TIN1edge
(Note 1)
TIN0edge
Note 1: Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins
and the selected function therefore has no effect.
10
10-39
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIN3–6 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TIN36IMS) <Address: H’0080 0239>
9 1011121314b15b8
TINIM3TINIM4TINIM5TINIM6TINIS3TINIS4TINIS5
TINIS6
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 TINIS6 (TIN6 interrupt request status bit) (Note 2) 0: Interrupt not requested R(Note 1)
9 TINIS5 (TIN5 interrupt request status bit) (Note 2) 1: Interrupt requested
10 TINIS4 (TIN4 interrupt request status bit) (Note 2)
11 TINIS3 (TIN3 interrupt request status bit)
12 TINIM6 (TIN6 interrupt request mask bit) (Note 2) 0: Enable interrupt request R W
13 TINIM5 (TIN5 interrupt request mask bit) (Note 2) 1: Mask (disable) interrupt request
14 TINIM4 (TIN4 interrupt request mask bit) (Note 2)
15 TINIM3 (TIN3 interrupt request mask bit)
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
Note 2: Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins and the selected function
therefore has no effect.
Figure 10.2.13 Block Diagram of TIN3–6 Input Interrupt Request
TIN3–6 input interrupt request
IRQ12
Data bus
b8 TINIS6
F/F
TINIM6
F/F
b12
b9 TINIS5
F/F
TINIM5
F/F
b13
b10 TINIS4
F/F
TINIM4
F/F
b14
(Level)
4-source inputs
TIN36IMS <H'0080 0239>
TIN6edge
(Note 1)
TIN5edge
(Note 1)
TIN4edge
(Note 1)
b11 TINIS3
F/F
TINIM3
F/F
b15
TIN3edge
Note 1: Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins
and the selected function therefore has no effect.
10
10-40
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIN12–19 Interrupt Request Status Register (TIN1219IST) <Address: H’0080 023C>
123456b7b0
TINIS12TINIS13TINIS14TINIS15TINIS16TINIS17TINIS18TINIS19
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 TINIS19 (TIN19 interrupt request status bit) 0: Interrupt not requested R(Note 1)
1 TINIS18 (TIN18 interrupt request status bit) 1: Interrupt requested
2 TINIS17 (TIN17 interrupt request status bit)
3 TINIS16 (TIN16 interrupt request status bit)
4 TINIS15 (TIN15 interrupt request status bit) (Note 2)
5 TINIS14 (TIN14 interrupt request status bit) (Note 2)
6 TINIS13 (TIN13 interrupt request status bit) (Note 2)
7 TINIS12 (TIN12 interrupt request status bit) (Note 2)
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
Note 2: Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins and the selected function
therefore has no effect.
TIN12–19 Interrupt Request Mask Register (TIN1219IMA) <Address: H’0080 023D>
9 1011121314b15b8
TINIM12TINIM13TINIM14TINIM15TINIM16TINIM17TINIM18TINIM19
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 TINIM19 (TIN19 interrupt request mask bit) 0: Enable interrupt request R W
9 TINIM18 (TIN18 interrupt request mask bit) 1: Mask (disable) interrupt request
10 TINIM17 (TIN17 interrupt request mask bit)
11 TINIM16 (TIN16 interrupt request mask bit)
12 TINIM15 (TIN15 interrupt request mask bit) (Note 1)
13 TINIM14 (TIN14 interrupt request mask bit) (Note 1)
14 TINIM13 (TIN13 interrupt request mask bit) (Note 1)
15 TINIM12 (TIN12 interrupt request mask bit) (Note 1)
Note 1: Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins and the selected function
therefore has no effect.
10
10-41
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIN12–19 input interrupt request
IRQ10
Data bus
b0 TINIS19
F/F
TINIM19
F/F
b8
b1 TINIS18
F/F
TINIM18
F/F
b9
b2 TINIS17
F/F
TINIM17
F/F
b10
b3 TINIS16
F/F
TINIM16
F/F
b11
b4 TINIS15
F/F
TINIM15
F/F
b12
(Level)
8-source inputs
TIN1219IST <H'0080 023C>
TIN1219IMA <H'0080 023D>
TIN19edge
TIN18edge
TIN17edge
TIN16edge
TIN15edge
(Note 1)
b5 TINIS14
F/F
TINIM14
F/F
b13
b6 TINIS13
F/F
TINIM13
F/F
b14
b7 TINIS12
F/F
TINIM12
F/F
b15
TIN14edge
(Note 1)
TIN13edge
(Note 1)
TIN12edge
(Note 1)
Note 1: Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins
and the selected function therefore has no effect.
Figure 10.2.14 Block Diagram of TIN12–19 Input Interrupt Request
10
10-42
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.2 Common Units of Multijunction Timers
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIN20–23 Interrupt Request Mask & Status Register (TIN2023IMS) <Address: H’0080 023E>
123456b7b0
TINIM20TINIM21TINIM22TINIM23TINIS20TINIS21TINIS22TINIS23
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 TINIS23 (TIN23 interrupt request status bit) 0: Interrupt not requested R(Note 1)
1 TINIS22 (TIN22 interrupt request status bit) 1: Interrupt requested
2 TINIS21 (TIN21 interrupt request status bit)
3 TINIS20 (TIN20 interrupt request status bit)
4 TINIM23 (TIN23 interrupt request mask bit) 0: Enable interrupt request R W
5 TINIM22 (TIN22 interrupt request mask bit) 1: Mask (disable) interrupt request
6 TINIM21 (TIN21 interrupt request mask bit)
7 TINIM20 (TIN20 interrupt request mask bit)
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
Figure 10.2.15 Block Diagram of TIN20-29 Input Interrupt Request
TIN20-29 input interrupt request
IRQ11
Data bus
b0 TINIS23
F/F
TINIM23
F/F
b4
b1 TINIS22
F/F
TINIM22
F/F
b5
b2 TINIS21
F/F
TINIM21
F/F
b6
b3 TINIS20
F/F
TINIM20
F/F
b7
29-source inputs
TIN2023IMS <H'0080 023E>
TIN23edge
TIN22edge
TIN21edge
TIN20edge
(Level)
Note 1: Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins
and the selected function therefore has no effect.
10
10-43
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
10.3.1 Outline of TOP
TOP (Timer OutPut) is an output-related 16-bit timer, whose operation mode can be selected from the following
by mode switching in software:
• Single-shot output mode
• Delayed single-shot output mode
• Continuous output mode
The table below shows specifications of TOP. The diagram in the next page shows a block diagram of TOP.
Table 10.3.1 Specifications of TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
Item Specification
Number of channels 11 channels
Counter 16-bit down-counter
Reload register 16-bit reload register
Correction register 16-bit correction register
Timer startup Started by writing to the enable bit in software or enabled by external input (rising or
falling edge or both)
Operation mode <With correction function>
• Single-shot output mode
• Delayed single-shot output mode
<Without correction function>
• Continuous output mode
Interrupt request generation Can be generated by a counter underflow
10
10-44
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 10.3.1 Block Diagram of TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
IRQ2
clk
en
udf
TOP 0
Clock bus Input event bus
clk en udf
TOP 1
clk en udf
TOP 2
clk en udf
TOP 3
Output event bus
TCLK0S
TO 0 (P110)
IRQ9
3 2 1 0
clk en udf
TOP 4
clk en udf
TOP 5
TCLK0 (P124)
TIN0 (P150)
S
S
TIN0S
clk en udf
TOP 6
clk en udf
TOP 7
S
S
S
S
Sclk en udf
TOP 8
clk en udf
TOP 9
clk en udf
TOP 10
F/F0
F/F1
F/F2
F/F3
F/F4
F/F5
F/F6
F/F7
F/F8
F/F9
F/F10
S
: Selector
F/F
:Output flip-flop
S
S
S
S
S
IRQ2
IRQ2
IRQ2
IRQ2
IRQ2
TO 1 (P111)
TO 2 (P112)
TO 3 (P113)
TO 4 (P114)
TO 5 (P115)
TO 6 (P116)
TO 7 (P117)
TO 8 (P100)
TO 9 (P101)
TO 10 (P102)
IRQ1
IRQ1
IRQ6
IRQ6
IRQ5
3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3
Reload register
Down-counter
Correction register
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3
(16-bit)
DRQ7
10
10-45
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.3.2 Outline of Each Mode of TOP
Each mode of TOP is outlined below. For each TOP channel, only one of the following modes can be selected.
(1) Single-shot output mode
In single-shot output mode, the timer generates a pulse in width of (reload register set value + 1) only once
and then stops.
When the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software or by external input) after setting the reload
register, the counter is loaded with the content of the reload register and starts counting synchronously with
the count clock. The counter counts down and stops when it underflows after reaching the minimum count.
The F/F output waveform in single-shot output mode is inverted at startup and upon underflow, generating a
single-shot pulse waveform in width of (reload register set value + 1) only once. An interrupt request can be
generated when the counter underflows.
(2) Delayed single-shot output mode
In delayed single-shot output mode, the timer generates a pulse in width of (reload register set value + 1)
after a finite time equal to (counter set value + 1) only once and then stops.
When the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software or by external input) after setting the
counter and reload register, it starts counting down from the counter’s set value synchronously with the count
clock. The first time the counter underflows, it is loaded with the reload register value and continues counting
down. The counter stops when it underflows next time.
The F/F output waveform in delayed single-shot output mode is inverted when the counter underflows first
time and next, generating a single-shot pulse waveform in width of (reload register set value + 1) after a finite
time equal to (first set value of counter + 1) only once.
An interrupt request can be generated when the counter underflows first time and next.
(3) Continuous output mode
In continuous output mode, the timer counts down starting from the set value of the counter and when the
counter underflows, it is loaded with the reload register value. Thereafter, this operation is repeated each
time the counter underflows, thus generating consecutive pulses whose waveform is inverted in width of
(reload register set value + 1).
When the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software or by external input) after setting the
counter and reload register, it starts counting down from the counter’s set value synchronously with the count
clock and when the minimum count is reached, generates an underflow. This underflow causes the counter
to be loaded with the content of the reload register and start counting over again. Thereafter, this operation is
repeated each time an underflow occurs. To stop the counter, disable count by writing to the enable bit in
software.
The F/F output waveform in continuous output mode is inverted at startup and upon underflow, generating a
waveform of consecutive pulses until the timer stops counting. An interrupt request can be generated each
time the counter underflows.
10
10-46
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
<Count clock-dependent delay>
• Because the timer operates synchronously with the count clock, there is a count clock-dependent delay
from when the timer is enabled till when it actually starts operating. In operation mode where the F/F output
is inverted when the timer is enabled, there is also a count clock-dependent delay before the F/F output is
inverted.
BCLK
Count clock
Enable
F/F operation (Note 1)
Count clock period
Count clock-dependent
delay
Write to the enable bit
Note 1: This applies to the case where F/F output is inverted when the timer is enabled.
Inverted
Figure 10.3.2 Count Clock Dependent Delay
10
10-47
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.3.3 TOP Related Register Map
Shown below is a TOP related register map.
TOP Related Register Map (1/2)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 0240 TOP0 Counter 10-54
(TOP0CT)
H'0080 0242 TOP0 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP0RL)
H'0080 0244 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0246 TOP0 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP0CC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0250 TOP1 Counter 10-54
(TOP1CT)
H'0080 0252 TOP1 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP1RL)
H'0080 0254 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0256 TOP1 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP1CC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0260 TOP2 Counter 10-54
(TOP2CT)
H'0080 0262 TOP2 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP2RL)
H'0080 0264 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0266 TOP2 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP2CC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0270 TOP3 Counter 10-54
(TOP3CT)
H'0080 0272 TOP3 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP3RL)
H'0080 0274 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0276 TOP3 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP3CC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0280 TOP4 Counter 10-54
(TOP4CT)
H'0080 0282 TOP4 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP4RL)
H'0080 0284 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0286 TOP4 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP4CC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0290 TOP5 Counter 10-54
(TOP5CT)
H'0080 0292 TOP5 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP5RL)
H'0080 0294 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0296 TOP5 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP5CC)
H'0080 0298 (Use inhibited area)
|
|
|
|
|
10
10-48
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TOP Related Register Map (2/2)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 029A TOP0–5 Control Register 0 10-50
(TOP05CR0)
H'0080 029C (Use inhibited area) TOP0–5 Control Register 1 10-50
(TOP05CR1)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02A0 TOP6 Counter 10-54
(TOP6CT)
H'0080 02A2 TOP6 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP6RL)
H'0080 02A4 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02A6 TOP6 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP6CC)
H'0080 02A8 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02AA TOP6,7 Control Register 10-52
(TOP67CR)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02B0 TOP7 Counter 10-54
(TOP7CT)
H'0080 02B2 TOP7 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP7RL)
H'0080 02B4 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02B6 TOP7 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP7CC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02C0 TOP8 Counter 10-54
(TOP8CT)
H'0080 02C2 TOP8 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP8RL)
H'0080 02C4 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02C6 TOP8 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP8CC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02D0 TOP9 Counter 10-54
(TOP9CT)
H'0080 02D2 TOP9 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP9RL)
H'0080 02D4 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02D6 TOP9 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP9CC)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02E0 TOP10 Counter 10-54
(TOP10CT)
H'0080 02E2 TOP10 Reload Register 10-55
(TOP10RL)
H'0080 02E4 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02E6 TOP10 Correction Register 10-56
(TOP10CC)
H'0080 02E8 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02EA TOP8–10 Control Register 10-53
(TOP810CR)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 02FA TOP External Enable Permit Register 10-57
(TOPEEN)
H'0080 02FC TOP Enable Protect Register 10-57
(TOPPRO)
H'0080 02FE TOP Count Enable Register 10-58
(TOPCEN)
|
|
|
|
|
|
10
10-49
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.3.4 TOP Control Registers
The TOP control registers are used to select operation modes of TOP0–10 (single-shot output, delayed single-
shot output or continuous output mode), as well as select the count enable and count clock sources. Following
four TOP control registers are provided for each timer group.
• TOP0–5 Control Register 0 (TOP05CR0)
• TOP0–5 Control Register 1 (TOP05CR1)
• TOP6,7 Control Register (TOP67CR)
• TOP8–10 Control Register (TOP810CR)
10
10-50
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TOP0–5 Control Register 0 (TOP05CR0) <Address: H’0080 029A>
b01234567891011121314b15
TOP3M TOP2M TOP1M TOP0M TOP05ENS TOP05CKS
00000000
0
000
0
0
00
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0, 1 TOP3M (TOP3 operation mode select bit) 00: Single-shot output mode R W
2, 3 TOP2M (TOP2 operation mode select bit) 01: Delayed single-shot output mode
4, 5 TOP1M (TOP1 operation mode select bit) 10: Continuous output mode
6, 7 TOP0M (TOP0 operation mode select bit) 11: – ditto –
8 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
9–11 TOP05ENS 000: External TIN0 input R W
TOP0–5 enable source select bit 001: – ditto –
010: – ditto –
011: – ditto –
100: Input event bus 0
101: Input event bus 1
110: Input event bus 2
111: Input event bus 3
12, 13 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
14, 15 TOP05CKS 00: Clock bus 0 R W
TOP0–5 clock source select bit 01: Clock bus 1
10: Clock bus 2
11: Clock bus 3
Notes: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
• Operation mode can only be set or changed while the counter is inactive.
TOP0–5 Control Register 1 (TOP05CR1) <Address: H’0080 029D>
9 1011121314b15b8 TOP5M TOP4M
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–11 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
12, 13 TOP5M (TOP5 operation mode select bit) 00: Single-shot output mode R W
14, 15 TOP4M (TOP4 operation mode select bit) 01: Delayed single-shot output mode
10: Continuous output mode
11: – ditto –
Note: • Operation mode can only be set or changed while the counter is inactive.
10
10-51
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
clk en TOP 0
Clock bus Input event bus
clk en TOP 1
clk en TOP 2
clk en TOP 3
3 2 1 0
clk en TOP 4
clk en TOP 5
S
S: Selector
TIN0 (P150) S
TIN0S
3 2 1 0
Note: • This diagram only illustrates TOP control registers and is partly omitted.
Figure 10.3.3 Outline Diagram of TOP0–5 Clock and Enable Inputs
10
10-52
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TOP6,7 Control Register (TOP67CR) <Address: H’0080 02AA>
b01234567891011121314b15
TOP7
ENS TOP7M TOP67ENS TOP67CKS
0
00
0
0
0
0
0
0
000
0
0
00
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
1 TOP7ENS 0: Result selected by TOP67ENS bit R W
TOP7 enable source select bit 1: TOP6 output
2, 3 TOP7M 00: Single-shot output mode R W
TOP7 operation mode select bit 01: Delayed single-shot output mode
10: Continuous output mode
11: – ditto –
4, 5 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
6, 7 TOP6M 00: Single-shot output mode R W
TOP6 operation mode select bit 01: Delayed single-shot output mode
10: Continuous output mode
11: – ditto –
8 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
9–11 TOP67ENS 000: External TIN1 input (Note 1) R W
TOP6, TOP7 enable source select bit 001: – ditto – (Note 1)
010: – ditto – (Note 1)
011: – ditto – (Note 1)
100: Input event bus 0
101: Input event bus 1
110: Input event bus 2
111: Input event bus 3
12, 13 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
14, 15 TOP67CKS 00: Clock bus 0 R W
TOP6, TOP7 clock source select bit 01: Clock bus 1
10: Clock bus 2
11: Clock bus 3
Note 1:Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins and the selected function
therefore has no effect.
Notes: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
• Operation mode can only be set or changed while the counter is inactive.
Clock bus Input event bus
3 2 1 0
clk en udf
TOP 6
clk en udf
TOP 7
S
S
S: Selector
3 2 1 0
S
Note: • This diagram only illustrates TOP control registers and is partly omitted.
Figure 10.3.4 Outline Diagram of TOP6, TOP7 Clock and Enable Inputs
10
10-53
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Clock bus Input event bus
3 2 1 0
S
Sclk en TOP 8
clk en TOP 9
clk en TOP 10
S: Selector
3 2 1 0
Note: • This diagram only illustrates TOP control registers and is partly omitted.
Figure 10.3.5 Outline Diagram of TOP8–10 Clock and Enable Inputs
TOP8–10 Control Register (TOP810CR) <Address: H’0080 02EA>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
TOP10M TOP9M T
O
P
8
1
0
EN
S
TOP810CKS
0
0
00000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0, 1 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
2, 3 TOP10M (TOP10 operation mode select bit) 00: Single-shot output mode R W
4, 5 TOP9M (TOP9 operation mode select bit) 01: Delayed single-shot output mode
6, 7 TOP8M (TOP8 operation mode select bit) 10: Continuous output mode
11: – ditto –
8–10 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
11 TOP810ENS 0: External TIN2 input (Note 1) R W
TOP8–10 enable source select bit 1: Input event bus 3
12, 13 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
14, 15 TOP810CKS 00: Clock bus 0 R W
TOP8–10 clock source select bit 01: Clock bus 1
10: Clock bus 2
11: Clock bus 3
Note 1: Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins and the selected function
therefore has no effect.
Notes: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
• Operation mode can only be set or changed while the counter is inactive.
10
10-54
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.3.5 TOP Counters (TOP0CT–TOP10CT)
TOP0 Counter (TOP0CT) <Address: H’0080 0240>
TOP1 Counter (TOP1CT) <Address: H’0080 0250>
TOP2 Counter (TOP2CT) <Address: H’0080 0260>
TOP3 Counter (TOP3CT) <Address: H’0080 0270>
TOP4 Counter (TOP4CT) <Address: H’0080 0280>
TOP5 Counter (TOP5CT) <Address: H’0080 0290>
TOP6 Counter (TOP6CT) <Address: H’0080 02A0>
TOP7 Counter (TOP7CT) <Address: H’0080 02B0>
TOP8 Counter (TOP8CT) <Address: H’0080 02C0>
TOP9 Counter (TOP9CT) <Address: H’0080 02D0>
TOP10 Counter (TOP10CT) <Address: H’0080 02E0>
b01234567891011121314b15
TOP0CT–TOP10CT
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–15 TOP0CT–TOP10CT 16-bit counter value R W
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
The TOP counters are a 16-bit down-counter. After the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software
or by external input), the counter starts counting synchronously with the count clock.
10
10-55
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.3.6 TOP Reload Registers (TOP0RL–TOP10RL)
TOP0 Reload Register (TOP0RL) <Address: H’0080 0242>
TOP1 Reload Register (TOP1RL) <Address: H’0080 0252>
TOP2 Reload Register (TOP2RL) <Address: H’0080 0262>
TOP3 Reload Register (TOP3RL) <Address: H’0080 0272>
TOP4 Reload Register (TOP4RL) <Address: H’0080 0282>
TOP5 Reload Register (TOP5RL) <Address: H’0080 0292>
TOP6 Reload Register (TOP6RL) <Address: H’0080 02A2>
TOP7 Reload Register (TOP7RL) <Address: H’0080 02B2>
TOP8 Reload Register (TOP8RL) <Address: H’0080 02C2>
TOP9 Reload Register (TOP9RL) <Address: H’0080 02D2>
TOP10 Reload Register (TOP10RL) <Address: H’0080 02E2>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
TOP0RL–TOP10RL
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–15 TOP0RL–TOP10RL 16-bit reload register value R W
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
The TOP reload registers are used to load data into the TOP counter registers (TOP0CT–TOP10CT). The
content of the reload register is loaded into the counter in the following cases:
• When the counter is enabled in single-shot output mode
• When the counter underflowed in delayed single-shot or continuous output mode
Simply because data is written to the reload register does not mean that the data is loaded into the counter. The
counter is loaded with data in only the above cases.
Note that reloading of data after an underflow is performed synchronously with a clock pulse at which the
counter underflowed.
10
10-56
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.3.7 TOP Correction Registers (TOP0CC–TOP10CC)
TOP0 Correction Register (TOP0CC) <Address: H’0080 0246>
TOP1 Correction Register (TOP1CC) <Address: H’0080 0256>
TOP2 Correction Register (TOP2CC) <Address: H’0080 0266>
TOP3 Correction Register (TOP3CC) <Address: H’0080 0276>
TOP4 Correction Register (TOP4CC) <Address: H’0080 0286>
TOP5 Correction Register (TOP5CC) <Address: H’0080 0296>
TOP6 Correction Register (TOP6CC) <Address: H’0080 02A6>
TOP7 Correction Register (TOP7CC) <Address: H’0080 02B6>
TOP8 Correction Register (TOP8CC) <Address: H’0080 02C6>
TOP9 Correction Register (TOP9CC) <Address: H’0080 02D6>
TOP10 Correction Register (TOP10CC) <Address: H’0080 02E6>
b01234567891011121314b15
TOP0CC–TOP10CC
????????????????
(Acceptable range of values: +32,767 to –32,768) <After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–15 TOP0CC–TOP10CC 16-bit correction register value R W
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
The TOP correction registers are used to correct the TOP counter value by adding or subtracting in the middle
of operation. To increase or reduce the counter value, write to this correction register a value by which the
counter value is to be increased or reduced from its initial set value. To add, write the value to be added to the
correction register directly as is. To subtract, write the 2’s complement of the value to be subtracted to the
correction register.
The counter is corrected synchronously with a clock pulse next to one at which the correction value was written
to the TOP correction register. If the counter is corrected this way, note that because one down count in that
clock period is canceled, the counter value actually is corrected by (correction register value + 1). For example,
if the initial counter value is 10 and the value 3 is written to the correction register when the counter has counted
down to 5, then the counter counts a total of 15 before it underflows.
10
10-57
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.3.8 TOP Enable Control Registers
TOP External Enable Permit Register (TOPEEN) <Address: H’0080 02FA>
b01234567891011121314b15
TOP10
EEN TOP9
EEN TOP8
EEN TOP7
EEN TOP6
EEN TOP5
EEN TOP4
EEN TOP3
EEN TOP2
EEN TOP1
EEN TOP0
EEN
0
0
0
0
00000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–4 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
5 TOP10EEN (TOP10 external enable permit bit) 0: Disable external enable R W
6 TOP9EEN (TOP9 external enable permit bit) 1: Enable external enable
7 TOP8EEN (TOP8 external enable permit bit)
8 TOP7EEN (TOP7 external enable permit bit)
9 TOP6EEN (TOP6 external enable permit bit)
10 TOP5EEN (TOP5 external enable permit bit)
11 TOP4EEN (TOP4 external enable permit bit)
12 TOP3EEN (TOP3 external enable permit bit)
13 TOP2EEN (TOP2 external enable permit bit)
14 TOP1EEN (TOP1 external enable permit bit)
15 TOP0EEN (TOP0 external enable permit bit)
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
The TOP External Enable Permit Register controls enable operation on TOP counters from external devices by
enabling or disabling it.
TOP Enable Protect Register (TOPPRO) <Address: H’0080 02FC>
b01234567891011121314b15
TOP10
PRO TOP9
PRO TOP8
PRO TOP7
PRO TOP6
PRO TOP5
PRO TOP4
PRO TOP3
PRO TOP2
PRO TOP1
PRO TOP0
PRO
0
0
0
0
00000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–4 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
5 TOP10PRO (TOP10 enable protect bit) 0: Enable for rewriting R W
6 TOP9PRO (TOP9 enable protect bit) 1: Protect against rewriting
7 TOP8PRO (TOP8 enable protect bit)
8 TOP7PRO (TOP7 enable protect bit)
9 TOP6PRO (TOP6 enable protect bit)
10 TOP5PRO (TOP5 enable protect bit)
11 TOP4PRO (TOP4 enable protect bit)
12 TOP3PRO (TOP3 enable protect bit)
13 TOP2PRO (TOP2 enable protect bit)
14 TOP1PRO (TOP1 enable protect bit)
15 TOP0PRO (TOP0 enable protect bit)
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
The TOP Enable Protect Register controls rewriting of the TOP count enable bit by enabling for or protecting it
against rewriting.
10
10-58
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TOP Count Enable Register (TOPCEN) <Address: H’0080 02FE>
b01234567891011121314b15
TOP10
CEN TOP9
CEN TOP8
CEN TOP7
CEN TOP6
CEN TOP5
CEN TOP4
CEN TOP3
CEN TOP2
CEN TOP1
CEN TOP0
CEN
0
0
0
0
00000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–4 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
5 TOP10CEN (TOP10 count enable bit) 0: Stop counting R W
6 TOP9CEN (TOP9 count enable bit) 1: Enable counting
7 TOP8CEN (TOP8 count enable bit)
8 TOP7CEN (TOP7 count enable bit)
9 TOP6CEN (TOP6 count enable bit)
10 TOP5CEN (TOP5 count enable bit)
11 TOP4CEN (TOP4 count enable bit)
12 TOP3CEN (TOP3 count enable bit)
13 TOP2CEN (TOP2 count enable bit)
14 TOP1CEN (TOP1 count enable bit)
15 TOP0CEN (TOP0 count enable bit)
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
The TOP Count Enable Register controls operation of TOP counters. To enable any TOP counter in software,
enable its corresponding enable protect bit for write and set the count enable bit by writing "1". To stop any TOP
counter, enable its corresponding enable protect bit for write and reset the count enable bit by writing "0".
In all but continuous output mode, when the counter stops due to occurrence of an underflow, the count enable
bit is automatically reset to "0". Therefore, the TOP0-10 Count Enable Register when accessed for read serves
as a status register indicating whether the counter is operating or idle.
WR
Dn
TOPm enable protect
(TOPmPRO) WR
EN-ON
TOPm external enable
(TOPmEEN)
TINnS
TOPm count enable
(TOPmCEN) TOP enable control
Input processing
selection
F/F
F/F
F/F
Event bus
TINn
Figure 10.3.6 Configuration of the TOP Enable Circuit
10
10-59
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.3.9 Operation in TOP Single-shot Output Mode (with Correction Function)
(1) Outline of TOP single-shot output mode
In single-shot output mode, the timer generates a pulse in width of (reload register set value + 1) only once
and then stops.
When the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software or by external input) after setting the reload
register, the counter is loaded with the content of the reload register and starts counting synchronously with
the count clock. The counter counts down and stops when it underflows after reaching the minimum count.
The F/F output waveform in single-shot output mode is inverted (F/F output levels change from low to high or
vice versa) at startup and upon underflow, generating a single-shot pulse waveform in width of (reload regis-
ter set value + 1) only once. An interrupt request can be generated when the counter underflows. The count
value is (reload register set value + 1).
For example, if the initial reload register value is 7, then the count value is 8.
Figure 10.3.7 Example of Counting in TOP Single-shot Output Mode
Enable
Reload
register
(7) 6543
12345678
H'FFFF
7
Counter
Interrupt request
Underflow
Count value = 8
(Note 1)
Note 1: What actually is seen in the cycle immediately after reload is the previous counter value, and not 7.
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
210
F/F output
Count clock
* A count clock dependent delay is included before
F/F output changes state after the timer is enabled.
10
10-60
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
In the example below, the reload register is initially set to H’A000. (The initial counter value can be undefined,
and does not have to be specific.) When the timer starts, the reload register value is loaded into the counter,
letting it start counting. Thereafter, it continues counting down until it underflows after reaching the minimum
count.
Count clock
Correction register
H'FFFF
H'0000
Enabled
(by writing to the enable bit
or by external input)
F/F output
Disabled
(by underflow)
(Unused)
TOP interrupt request
due to underflow
Enable bit
Starts counting down from
the reload register set value
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Reload register
H'A000
Data inverted
by enable
Counter
H'A000
Data inverted
by underflow
H'FFFF
H'(A000-1)
Indeterminate
value
Figure 10.3.8 Typical Operation in TOP Single-shot Output Mode
10
10-61
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
When writing to the correction register, be careful not to cause the counter to overflow. Even if the counter
overflows due to correction of counts, no interrupt requests are generated for reasons of an overflow.
(2) Correction function of TOP single-shot output mode
To change the counter value while in progress, write to the TOP correction register a value by which the
counter value is to be increased or reduced from its initial set value. To add, write the value to be added to the
correction register directly as is. To subtract, write the 2’s complement of the value to be subtracted to the
correction register.
The counter is corrected synchronously with a count clock pulse next to one at which the correction value was
written to the TOP correction register. If the counter is corrected this way, note that because one down count in
that clock period is canceled, the counter value actually is corrected by (correction register value + 1).
For example, if the initial counter value is 7 and the value 3 is written to the correction register when the
counter has counted down to 3, then the counter counts a total of 12 before it underflows.
Figure 10.3.9 Example of Counting in TOP Single-shot Output Mode When Count is Corrected
(7) 6543210
1234567891011
12
6543
7
3
Correction
register
+3
Underflow
Count value = (7 + 1) + (3 + 1) = 12
Count clock
dependent delay
H'FFFF
Enable
Reload
register
Counter
Interrupt request
Count clock
(Note 1)
Note 1: What actually is seen in the cycle immediately after reload is the previous counter value, and not 7.
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
10
10-62
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 10.3.10 Typical Operation in TOP Single-shot Output Mode When Count is Corrected
Data inverted
by enable Data inverted
by underflow
H'(8000-1)
H'FFFF
H'0000
H'8000
H'5000
H'5000+H'4000
H'8000
H'FFFF
Undefined H'4000
Count clock
Correction register
Enabled
(by writing to the enable bit
or by external input)
F/F output
TOP interrupt request
due to underflow
Enable bit
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Reload register
Write to the
correction register
Undefined
value
Disabled
(by underflow)
Counter
In the example below, the reload register is initially set to H’8000. When the timer starts, the reload register
value is loaded into the counter, letting it start counting down. In the diagram below, the value H’4000 is
written to the correction register when the counter has counted down to H’5000. As a result of this correction,
the count has been increased to H’9000, so that the counter counts a total of (H’8000 + 1 + H’4000 + 1)
before it stops.
10
10-63
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
(3) Precautions on using TOP single-shot output mode
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TOP single-shot output mode.
• If the counter stops due to an underflow in the same clock period as the timer is enabled by external input,
the former has priority so that the counter stops.
• If the counter stops due to an underflow in the same clock period as count is enabled by writing to the enable
bit, the latter has priority so that count is enabled.
• If the timer is enabled by external input in the same clock period as count is disabled by writing to the enable
bit, the latter has priority so that count is disabled.
• Because the timer operates synchronously with the count clock, a count clock-dependent delay is included
before F/F output is inverted after the timer is enabled.
• When writing to the correction register, be careful not to cause the counter to overflow. Even if the counter
overflows due to correction of counts, no interrupt requests are generated for reasons of an overflow.
Therefore, if the counter underflows in the subsequent down-count after an overflow, a false interrupt re-
quest is generated for an underflow that includes the overflowed count.
10
10-64
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
H'FFFF
H'0000
H'FFF8
H'(FFF0+0014)
H'0004
H'FFF0
H'0014
H'FFF8
H'FFFF
Data inverted
by enable Data inverted
by underflow
H'(FFF8-1)
Counter
Count clock
Correction register
F/F output
TOP interrupt request
due to underflow
Enable bit
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Reload register
Write to the
correction register
Enabled
(by writing to the enable bit
or by external input) Disabled
(by underflow)
Undefined
value
Actual count after overflow
Overflow occurs
Undefined
Figure 10.3.11 Example of an Operation in TOP Single-shot Output Mode Where Count Overflows Due to Correction
In the example below, the reload register is initially set to H’FFF8. When the timer starts, the reload register
value is loaded into the counter, letting it start counting down. In the diagram below, the value H’0014 is
written to the correction register when the counter has counted down to H’FFF0. As a result of this correction,
the count overflows to H’0004 and the counter fails to count correctly. Also, an interrupt request is generated
for an erroneous overflowed count.
10
10-65
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.3.10 Operation in TOP Delayed Single-shot Output Mode (with Correction Function)
(1) Outline of TOP delayed single-shot output mode
In delayed single-shot output mode, the timer generates a pulse in width of (reload register set value + 1)
after a finite time equal to (counter set value + 1) only once and then stops.
When the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software or by external input) after setting the
counter and reload register, it starts counting down from the counter’s set value synchronously with the count
clock. The first time the counter underflows, it is loaded with the reload register value and continues counting
down. The counter stops when it underflows next time.
The F/F output waveform in delayed single-shot output mode is inverted (F/F output level changes from low to high
or vice versa) when the counter underflows first time and next, generating a single-shot pulse waveform in width
of (reload register set value + 1) after a finite time equal to (first set value of counter + 1) only once.
An interrupt request can be generated when the counter underflows first time and next.
The (counter set value + 1) and (reload register set value + 1) are effective as count values.
For example, if the initial counter value is 4 and the initial reload register value is 5, then the timer operates as
shown below.
Figure 10.3.12 Example of Counting in TOP Delayed Single-shot Output Mode
4321
12345678
5
F/F output
910 11
0
3210
4
(5)
(Note 1) H'FFFF
Count clock
dependent delay
Enable
Reload
register
Counter
Interrupt request
Count clock
Note 1: What actually is seen in the cycle immediately after reload is the previous counter value, and not 5.
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Underflow Underflow
Count value = (4 + 1) + (5 + 1) = 11
10
10-66
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
In the example below, the counter and the reload register are initially set to H’A000 and H’F000, respectively.
When the timer is enabled, the counter starts counting down and when it underflows after reaching the
minimum count, the counter is loaded with the content of the reload register and continues counting down.
The counter stops when it underflows second time.
Figure 10.3.13 Typical Operation in TOP Delayed Single-shot Output Mode
H'FFFF
H'0000
Underflow
(first time)
Count down from the
counter's set value
H'A000
Underflow
(second time)
H'F000
Count down from the
reload register's
set value
H'(F000-1)
(Unused)
H'FFFF
H'F000
Data inverted
by underflow Data inverted
by underflow
Count clock
Correction register
Enabled
(by writing to the enable bit
or by external input)
F/F output
TOP interrupt request
due to underflow
Enable bit
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Reload register
Counter
10
10-67
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
(2) Correction function of TOP delayed single-shot output mode
To change the counter value while in progress, write to the TOP correction register a value by which the
counter value is to be increased or reduced from its initial set value. To add, write the value to be added to the
correction register directly as is. To subtract, write the 2’s complement of the value to be subtracted to the
correction register.
The counter is corrected synchronously with a count clock pulse next to one at which the correction value was
written to the TOP correction register. If the counter is corrected this way, note that because one down count in
that clock period is canceled, the counter value actually is corrected by (correction register value + 1).
For example, if the reload register value is 7 and the value 3 is written to the correction register when the
counter has counted down to 3 after being reloaded, then the counter counts a total of 12 after being reloaded
before it underflows.
Enable = "H"
(7) 6543210
123456789101112
6543
7
+3
(Note 1)
0
H'FFFF
3
Underflow
Correction
register
Reload
register
Counter
Interrupt request
Count clock
Note 1: What actually is seen in the cycle immediately after reload is the H'FFFF (underflow value), and not 7.
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Count value after being reloaded = (7 + 1) + (3 + 1) = 12
Figure 10.3.14 Example of Counting in TOP Delayed Single-shot Output Mode When Count is Corrected
When writing to the correction register, be careful not to cause the counter to overflow. Even if the counter
overflows due to correction of counts, no interrupt requests are generated for reasons of an overflow.
10
10-68
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 10.3.15 Typical Operation in TOP Delayed Single-shot Output Mode when Count is Corrected
H'FFFF
H'0000
H'9000+H'0008
H'F000
H'A000
H'F000
H'(F000+0008+1)
H'0008
Write to the
correction register
H'9000
Data inverted
by underflow Data inverted
by underflow
Correction register
F/F output
TOP interrupt request
due to underflow
Enable bit
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Reload register
Counter
Count clock
Underflow
(first time) Underflow
(second time)
Enabled
(by writing to the enable bit
or by external input)
Undefined
In the example below, the counter and the reload register are initially set to H’A000 and H’F000, respectively.
When the timer is enabled, the counter starts counting down and when it underflows first time after reaching
the minimum count, the counter is loaded with the content of the reload register and continues counting
down. In the diagram below, the value H’0008 is written to the correction register when the counter has
counted down to H’9000. As a result of this correction, the counter has its count value increased to H’9008
and counts (H’F000 + 1 + H’0008 + 1) after the first underflow before it stops.
10
10-69
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
(3) Precautions on using TOP delayed single-shot output mode
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TOP delayed single-shot output mode.
• If the counter stops due to an underflow in the same clock period as the timer is enabled by external input,
the former has priority so that the counter stops.
• If the counter stops due to an underflow in the same clock period as count is enabled by writing to the enable
bit, the latter has priority so that count is enabled.
• If the timer is enabled by external input in the same clock period as count is disabled by writing to the enable
bit, the latter has priority so that count is disabled.
• Even if the counter overflows due to correction of counts, no interrupt requests are generated for reasons of
an overflow. Therefore, if the counter underflows in the subsequent down-count after an overflow, a false
interrupt request is generated for an underflow that includes the overflowed count.
• If the counter is accessed for read immediately after being reloaded pursuant to an underflow, the counter
value temporarily reads as H’FFFF but immediately changes to (reload value – 1) at the next clock edge.
Figure 10.3.16 Counter Value Immediately after Underflow
Count clock
Enable bit "H"
H'0001 H'0000 H'FFFF H'AAA9 H'AAA8
Counter value
H'AAAA
Reload register
Reload due to underflow
H'(AAAA-1) H'(AAAA-2)
What is seen during reload cycle is always H'FFFF,
and not the reload register value (in this case, H'AAAA).
Count down from the
reload register value
Reload cycle
10
10-70
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.3.11 Operation in TOP Continuous Output Mode (without Correction Function)
(1) Outline of TOP continuous output mode
In continuous output mode, the timer counts down starting from the set value of the counter and when the
counter underflows, it is loaded with the reload register value. Thereafter, this operation is repeated each
time the counter underflows, thus generating consecutive pulses whose waveform is inverted in width of
(reload register set value + 1).
When the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software or by external input) after setting the
counter and reload register, it starts counting down from the counter’s set value synchronously with the count
clock and when the minimum count is reached, generates an underflow. This underflow causes the counter
to be loaded with the content of the reload register and start counting over again. Thereafter, this operation is
repeated each time an underflow occurs. To stop the counter, disable count by writing to the enable bit in
software.
The F/F output waveform in continuous output mode is inverted (F/F output level changes from low to high or
vice versa) at startup and upon underflow, generating a waveform of consecutive pulses until the timer stops
counting. An interrupt request can be generated each time the counter underflows.
The (counter set value + 1) and (reload register set value + 1) are effective as count values.
For example, if the initial counter value is 4 and the initial reload register value is 5, then the timer operates as
shown below.
Figure 10.3.17 Example of Counting in TOP Continuous Output Mode
(4) 321
12345
(Note 1)
F/F output
0
3210
4
(5)
(Note 2)
3210
(5) (5)
4
5
123456123456
Count clock
dependent delay
Enable
Reload
register
Counter
Interrupt request
Count clock
Underflow
Note 1: What actually is seen in the cycle immediately after enable is the previous counter value, and not 4.
Note 2: What actually is seen in the cycle immediately after reload is H'FFFF (underflow value), and not 5.
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Underflow Underflow
(Note 2) (Note 2)
Count value = 5 Count value = 6 Count value = 6
10
10-71
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
In the example below, the counter and the reload register are initially set to H’A000 and H’E000, respectively.
When the timer is enabled, the counter starts counting down and when it underflows after reaching the
minimum count, the counter is loaded with the content of the reload register and continues counting down.
H'FFFF
H'0000
H'E000
H'A000
H'E000 H'(E000-1) H'(E000-1)
H'FFFF H'FFFF
Data inverted
by underflow
Data inverted
by underflow
Data inverted by
enable
Count clock
Correction register
F/F output
TOP interrupt request
due to underflow
Enable bit
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Reload register
Counter
Underflow
(first time) Underflow
(second time)
Enabled
(by writing to the enable bit
or by external input)
Count down from the
counter's set value Count down from the
reload register's
set value
Count down from the
reload register's
set value
(Unused)
Figure 10.3.18 Typical Operation in TOP Continuous Output Mode
10
10-72
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.3 TOP (Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
(2) Precautions on using TOP continuous output mode
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TOP continuous output mode.
• If the timer is enabled by external input in the same clock period as count is disabled by writing to the enable
bit, the latter has priority so that count is disabled.
• If the counter is accessed for read immediately after being reloaded pursuant to an underflow, the counter
value temporarily reads as H’FFFF but immediately changes to (reload value – 1) at the next clock edge.
• Because the timer operates synchronously with the count clock, a count clock-dependent delay is included
before F/F output is inverted after the timer is enabled.
10-73
10 10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
10.4.1 Outline of TIO
TIO (Timer Input/Output) is an input/output-related 16-bit timer, whose operation mode can be selected from the
following by mode switching in software, one at a time:
<Input modes>
• Measure clear input mode
• Measure free-run input mode
• Noise processing input mode
<Output modes without correction function>
• PWM output mode
• Single-shot output mode
• Delayed single-shot output mode
• Continuous output mode
The table below shows specifications of TIO. The diagram in the next page shows a block diagram of TIO.
Table 10.4.1 Specifications of TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
Item Specification
Number of channels 10 channels
Counter 16-bit down-counter
Reload register 16-bit reload register
Measure register 16-bit capture register
Timer startup Started by writing to the enable bit in software or enabled by external input (rising or falling
or both edges or high or low level)
Operation mode <Input modes>
• Measure clear input mode
• Measure free-run input mode
• Noise processing input mode
<Output modes without correction function>
• PWM output mode
• Single-shot output mode
• Delayed single-shot output mode
• Continuous output mode
Interrupt request generation Can be generated by a counter underflow
10
10-74
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 10.4.1 Block Diagram of TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
IRQ12
Clock bus Input event bus Output event bus
3 2 1 0
BCLK/2
TCLK1 (P125)
clk
en/cap
udf
TIO 0
clk en/cap udf
TIO 1
clk en/cap udf
TIO 2
clk en/cap udf
TIO 3
clk en/cap udf
TIO 4
S
S
TIN3S
TIN3 (P153)
S
S
S
S
PRS1
PRS0
clk en/cap udf
TIO 5
S
TCLK1S
S
TCLK2 (P126) clk en/cap udf
TIO 6
S
TCLK2S
S
clk en/cap udf
TIO 7
S
S
S
S
clk en/cap udf
TIO 8
clk en/cap udf
TIO 9
SS
F/F11
F/F12
F/F13
F/F14
F/F15
S
F/F16
F/F17
F/F18
F/F19
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
TO 11 (P103)
TO 12 (P104)
TO 13 (P105)
TO 14 (P106)
TO 15 (P107)
IRQ0
IRQ0
IRQ0
IRQ0
IRQ4
TO 16 (P93)
TO 17 (P94)
TO 18 (P95)
TO 19 (P96)
TO 20 (P97)
IRQ4
IRQ4
IRQ4
DMA0
IRQ3
3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3
0 1 2 33 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
PRS2
Reload 0/measure register
Down-counter
Reload 1 register (Note 1)
(16-bit)
IRQ3
F/F20
S: Selector
F/F : Flip-flop
PRS0–2 : Prescaler
Note 1: The reload 1 register is used in only PWM output mode.
10-75
10 10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.4.2 Outline of Each Mode of TIO
Each mode of TIO is outlined below. For each TIO channel, only one of the following modes can be selected.
(1) Measure clear/free-run input modes
In measure clear/free-run input modes, the timer is used to measure a duration of time from when the counter
starts counting till when an external capture signal is entered.
After the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software), the counter starts counting down synchro-
nously with the count clock. When a capture signal is entered from an external device, the counter value at
that point in time is written into a register called the “measure register.”
In measure clear input mode, the counter value is initialized to H’FFFF upon capture, from which the counter
starts counting down again. In measure free-run input mode, the counter continues counting down even after
capture and upon underflow, recycles to H’FFFF, from which it starts counting down again.
To stop the counter, disable count by writing to the enable bit in software. An interrupt request can be gener-
ated by a counter underflow or execution of a measure operation.
(2) Noise processing input mode
In noise processing input mode, the timer is used to detect that the input signal remained in the same state for
over a predetermined time.
In noise processing input mode, a high or low level on external input activates the counter and if the input
signal remains in the same state for over a predetermined time before the counter underflows, the counter
generates an interrupt request before stopping. If the valid-level signal being applied turns to an invalid level
before the counter underflows, the counter temporarily stops counting and when a valid-level signal is en-
tered again, the counter is reloaded with the initial count and restarts counting.
The timer stops at the same time the counter underflows or count is disabled by writing to the enable bit. An
interrupt request can be generated by a counter underflow.
(3) PWM output mode (without correction function)
In PWM output mode, the timer uses two reload registers to generate a waveform with a given duty cycle.
When the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software or by external input) after setting the initial
values in the reload 0 and reload 1 registers, the counter is loaded with the reload 0 register value and starts
counting down synchronously with the count clock. The first time the counter underflows, it is loaded with the
reload 1 register value and continues counting. Thereafter, the counter is loaded with the reload 0 and reload
1 register values alternately each time an underflow occurs.
The F/F output waveform in PWM output mode is inverted when the counter starts counting and each time it
underflows. The timer stops at the same time count is disabled by writing to the enable bit (and not in
synchronism with PWM output period). An interrupt request can be generated at an even underflow after the
counter being enabled.
10
10-76
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
(4) Single-shot output mode (without correction function)
In single-shot output mode, the timer generates a pulse in width of (reload 0 register set value + 1) only once
and then stops.
When the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software or by external input) after setting the reload
0 register, the counter is loaded with the reload 0 register value and starts counting synchronously with the
count clock. The counter counts down and when the minimum count is reached, stops upon underflow.
The F/F output waveform in single-shot output mode is inverted at startup and upon underflow, generating a
single-shot pulse waveform in width of (reload 0 register set value + 1) only once. An interrupt request can be
generated when the counter underflows.
(5) Delayed single-shot output mode (without correction function)
In delayed single-shot output mode, the timer generates a pulse in width of (reload 0 register set value + 1)
after a finite time equal to (counter set value + 1) only once and then stops.
When the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software or by external input) after setting the
counter and reload 0 register, it starts counting down from the counter’s set value synchronously with the
count clock. The first time the counter underflows, it is loaded with the reload 0 register value and continues
counting down. The counter stops when it underflows next time.
The F/F output waveform in delayed single-shot output mode is inverted when the counter underflows first
time and next, generating a single-shot pulse waveform in width of (reload 0 register set value + 1) after a
finite time equal to (first set value of counter + 1) only once. An interrupt request can be generated when the
counter underflows first time and next.
(6) Continuous output mode (without correction function)
In continuous output mode, the timer counts down starting from the set value of the counter and when the
counter underflows, it is loaded with the reload 0 register value. Thereafter, this operation is repeated each
time the counter underflows, thus generating consecutive pulses in width of (reload 0 register set value + 1).
When the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software or by external input) after setting the
counter and reload 0 register, it starts counting down from the counter’s set value synchronously with the
count clock and when the minimum count is reached, generates an underflow. This underflow causes the
counter to be loaded with the content of the reload 0 register and start counting over again. Thereafter, this
operation is repeated each time an underflow occurs. To stop the counter, disable count by writing to the
enable bit in software.
The F/F output waveform in continuous output mode is inverted at startup and upon underflow, generating a
waveform of consecutive pulses until the timer stops counting. An interrupt request can be generated each
time the counter underflows.
10-77
10 10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
<Count clock-dependent delay>
• Because the timer operates synchronously with the count clock, there is a count clock-dependent delay
from when the timer is enabled till when it actually starts operating. In operation mode where the F/F output
is inverted when the timer is enabled, there is also a count clock-dependent delay before the F/F output is
inverted.
BCLK
Count clock
Enable
F/F operation (Note 1)
Count clock period
Count clock-dependent
delay
Write to the enable bit
Note 1: This applies to the case where F/F output is inverted when the timer is enabled.
Inverted
Figure 10.4.2 Count Clock Dependent Delay
10
10-78
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.4.3 TIO Related Register Map
Shown below is a TIO related register map.
TIO Related Register Map (1/2)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 0300 TIO0 Counter 10-88
(TIO0CT)
H'0080 0302 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0304 TIO0 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO0RL1)
H'0080 0306 TIO0 Reload 0/Measure Register 10-89
(TIO0RL0)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0310 TIO1 Counter 10-88
(TIO1CT)
H'0080 0312 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0314 TIO1 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO1RL1)
H'0080 0316 TIO1 Reload 0/Measure Register 10-89
(TIO1RL0)
H'0080 0318 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 031A TIO0–3 Control Register 0 10-81
(TIO03CR0)
H'0080 031C (Use inhibited area) TIO0–3 Control Register 1 10-82
(TIO03CR1)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0320 TIO2 Counter 10-88
(TIO2CT)
H'0080 0322 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0324 TIO2 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO2RL1)
H'0080 0326 TIO2 Reload 0/Measure Register 10-89
(TIO2RL0)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0330 TIO3 Counter 10-88
(TIO3CT)
H'0080 0332 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0334 TIO3 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO3RL1)
H'0080 0336 TIO3 Reload 0/Measure Register 10-89
(TIO3RL0)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0340 TIO4 Counter 10-88
(TIO4CT)
H'0080 0342 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0344 TIO4 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO4RL1)
H'0080 0346 TIO4 Reload 0/Measure Register 10-89
(TIO4RL0)
H'0080 0348 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 034A TIO4 Control Register TIO5 Control Register 10-83
(TIO4CR) (TIO5CR) 10-85
(Use inhibited area)
|
|
|
|
|
10-79
10 10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIO Related Register Map (2/2)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 0350 TIO5 Counter 10-88
(TIO5CT)
H'0080 0352 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0354 TIO5 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO5RL1)
H'0080 0356 TIO5 Reload 0/Measure Register 10-89
(TIO5RL0)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0360 TIO6 Counter 10-88
(TIO6CT)
H'0080 0362 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0364 TIO6 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO6RL1)
H'0080 0366 TIO6 Reload 0/Measure Register 10-89
(TIO6RL0)
H'0080 0368 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 036A TIO6 Control Register TIO7 Control Register 10-86
(TIO6CR) (TIO7CR) 10-87
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0370 TIO7 Counter 10-88
(TIO7CT)
H'0080 0372 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0374 TIO7 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO7RL1)
H'0080 0376 TIO7 Reload 0/Measure Register 10-89
(TIO7RL0)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0380 TIO8 Counter 10-88
(TIO8CT)
H'0080 0382 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0384 TIO8 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO8RL1)
H'0080 0386 TIO8 Reload 0/Measure Register 10-89
(TIO8RL0)
H'0080 0388 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 038A TIO8 Control Register TIO9 Control Register 10-87
(TIO8CR) (TIO9CR) 10-88
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0390 TIO9 Counter 10-88
(TIO9CT)
H'0080 0392 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0394 TIO9 Reload 1 Register 10-90
(TIO9RL1)
H'0080 0396 TIO9 Reload 0/Measure Register 10-89
(TIO9RL0)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 03BC TIO Enable Protect Register 10-91
(TIOPRO)
H'0080 03BE TIO Count Enable Register 10-92
(TIOCEN)
|
|
|
|
|
10
10-80
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.4.4 TIO Control Registers
The TIO control registers are used to select operation modes of TIO0–9 (measure input, noise processing input,
PWM output, single-shot output, delayed single-shot output or continuous output mode), as well as select the
count enable and count clock sources.
Following TIO control registers are provided for each timer group.
• TIO0–3 Control Register 0 (TIO03CR0)
• TIO0–3 Control Register 1 (TIO03CR1)
• TIO4 Control Register (TIO4CR)
• TIO5 Control Register (TIO5CR)
• TIO6 Control Register (TIO6CR)
• TIO7 Control Register (TIO7CR)
• TIO8 Control Register (TIO8CR)
• TIO9 Control Register (TIO9CR)
10-81
10 10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIO0–3 Control Register 0 (TIO03CR0) <Address: H’0080 031A>
b01234567891011121314b15
TIO3EEN TIO2ENSTIO3M TIO2M TIO1M TIO0MTIO1ENS TIO0ENS
0000000000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 TIO3EEN (Note 1) 0: Disable external input R W
TIO3 external input enable bit 1: Enable external input
1–3 TIO3M 000: Single-shot output mode R W
TIO3 operation mode select bit 001: Delayed single-shot output mode
010: Continuous output mode
011: PWM output mode
100: Measure clear input mode
101: Measure free-run input mode
110: Noise processing input mode
111: – ditto –
4 TIO2ENS 0: No selection R W
TIO2 enable/measure input source select bit 1: External input TIN5 (Note 2)
5–7 TIO2M 000: Single-shot output mode R W
TIO2 operation mode select bit 001: Delayed single-shot output mode
010: Continuous output mode
011: PWM output mode
100: Measure clear input mode
101: Measure free-run input mode
110: Noise processing input mode
111: – ditto –
8 TIO1ENS 0: No selection R W
TIO1 enable/measure input source select bit 1: External input TIN4 (Note 2)
9–11 TIO1M 000: Single-shot output mode R W
TIO1 operation mode select bit 001: Delayed single-shot output mode
010: Continuous output mode
011: PWM output mode
100: Measure clear input mode
101: Measure free-run input mode
110: Noise processing input mode
111: – ditto –
12 TIO0ENS 0: No selection R W
TIO0 enable/measure input source select bit 1: External input TIN3
13–15 TIO0M 000: Single-shot output mode R W
TIO0 operation mode select bit 001: Delayed single-shot output mode
010: Continuous output mode
011: PWM output mode
100: Measure clear input mode
101: Measure free-run input mode
110: Noise processing input mode
111: – ditto –
Note 1: During measure free-run/clear input mode, even if this bit is set to "0" (external input disabled), when a capture signal is
entered from an external device, the counter value at that point in time is written into the measure register. In measure clear
input mode, however, if this bit = "0" (external input disabled), the counter value is not initialized (H’FFFF) upon capture and,
therefore, this bit should be set to "1" (external input enabled).
Note 2: Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins and the selected function
therefore has no effect.
Notes: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
• Operation mode can only be set or changed while the counter is inactive.
• To select TIO3 enable/measure input sources, use the TIO4 Control Register TIO34ENS (TIO3, TIO4 enable/measure
input source select) bits.
10
10-82
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIO0–3 Control Register 1 (TIO03CR1) <Address: H’0080 031D>
9 1011121314b15b8 TIO03CKS
00
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–13 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
14, 15 TIO03CKS 00: Clock bus 0 R W
TIO0–3 clock source select bit 01: Clock bus 1
10: Clock bus 2
11: Clock bus 3
Figure 10.4.3 Outline Diagram of TIO0–4 Clock and Enable Inputs
Clock bus Input event bus
3 2 1 0
clk en/cap TIO 0
clk en/cap TIO 1
clk en/cap TIO 2
clk en/cap TIO 3
clk en/cap TIO 4
S
S
TIN3S
TIN3 (P153)
S
S
S
S
S: Selector
3 2 1 0
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
Note:This diagram only illustrates TIO control registers and is partly omitted.
10-83
10 10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIO4 Control Register (TIO4CR) <Address: H’0080 034A>
123456b7b0
TIO4MTIO4EENTIO4CKS TIO34ENS
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0, 1 TIO4CKS 00: Clock bus 0 R W
TIO4 clock source select bit 01: Clock bus 1
10: Clock bus 2
11: Clock bus 3
2 TIO4EEN (Note 1) 0: Disable external input R W
TIO4 external input enable bit 1: Enable external input
3, 4 TIO34ENS 00: External input TIN6 (Note 2) R W
TIO3,4 enable/measure input source select bit 01: – ditto – (Note 2)
10: Input event bus 2
11: Input event bus 3
5–7 TIO4M 000: Single-shot output mode R W
TIO4 operation mode select bit 001: Delayed single-shot output mode
010: Continuous output mode
011: PWM output mode
100: Measure clear input mode
101: Measure free-run input mode
110: Noise processing input mode
111: – ditto –
Note 1: During measure free-run/clear input mode, even if this bit is set to "0" (external input disabled), when a capture signal is
entered from an external device, the counter value at that point in time is written into the measure register. In measure clear
input mode, however, if this bit = "0" (external input disabled), the counter value is not initialized (H’FFFF) upon capture
and, therefore, this bit should be set to "1" (external input enabled).
Note 2: Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins and the selected function
therefore has no effect.
Note: • Operation mode can only be set or changed while the counter is inactive.
10
10-84
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
clk en/cap
S
TCLK2S
S
Clock bus Input event bus
3 2 1 0
TCLK1 (P125) clk en/cap TIO 5
S
TCLK1S
S
TCLK2 (P126) TIO 6
clk en/cap TIO 7
S
S
S
S
clk en/cap TIO 8
clk en/cap TIO 9
S
S
S: Selector
3 2 1 0
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
Note: • This diagram only illustrates TIO control registers and is partly omitted.
Figure 10.4.4 Outline Diagram of TIO5–9 Clock and Enable Inputs
10-85
10 10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIO5 Control Register (TIO5CR) <Address: H’0080 034B>
9 1011121314b15b8 TIO5MTIO5CKS TIO5ENS
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–10 TIO5CKS 000: External input TCLK1 R W
TIO5 clock source select bit 001: – ditto –
010: – ditto –
011: – ditto –
100: Clock bus 0
101: Clock bus 1
110: Clock bus 2
111: Clock bus 3
11, 12 TIO5ENS 00: No selection R W
TIO5 enable/measure input source select bit 01: – ditto –
10: External input TIN7 (Note 1)
11: Input event bus 3
13–15 TIO5M 000: Single-shot output mode R W
TIO5 operation mode select bit 001: Delayed single-shot output mode
010: Continuous output mode
011: PWM output mode
100: Measure clear input mode
101: Measure free-run input mode
110: Noise processing input mode
111: – ditto –
Note 1 : Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins and the selected function
therefore has no effect.
Note: • Operation mode can only be set or changed while the counter is inactive.
10
10-86
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIO6 Control Register (TIO6CR) <Address: H’0080 036A>
123456b7b0
TIO6MTIO6CKS TIO6ENS
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–2 TIO6CKS 000: External input TCLK2 R W
TIO6 clock source select bit 001: – ditto –
010: – ditto –
011: – ditto –
100: Clock bus 0
101: Clock bus 1
110: Clock bus 2
111: Clock bus 3
3, 4 TIO6ENS 00: No selection R W
TIO6 enable/measure input source select bit 01: External input TIN8 (Note 1)
10: Input event bus 2
11: Input event bus 3
5–7 TIO6M 000: Single-shot output mode R W
TIO6 operation mode select bit 001: Delayed single-shot output mode
010: Continuous output mode
011: PWM output mode
100: Measure clear input mode
101: Measure free-run input mode
110: Noise processing input mode
111: – ditto –
Note 1 : Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins and the selected function
therefore has no effect.
Note: • Operation mode can only be set or changed while the counter is inactive.
10-87
10 10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
TIO7 Control Register (TIO7CR) <Address: H’0080 036B>
9 1011121314b15b8 TIO7MTIO7CKS TIO7ENS
0000000
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
9, 10 TIO7CKS 00: Clock bus 0 R W
TIO7 clock source select bit 01: Clock bus 1
10: Clock bus 2
11: Clock bus 3
11, 12 TIO7ENS 00: No selection R W
TIO7 enable/measure input source select bit 01: External input TIN9 (Note 1)
10: Input event bus 0
11: Input event bus 3
13–15 TIO7M 000: Single-shot output mode R W
TIO7 operation mode select bit 001: Delayed single-shot output mode
010: Continuous output mode
011: PWM output mode
100: Measure clear input mode
101: Measure free-run input mode
110: Noise processing input mode
111: – ditto –
Note 1 : Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins and the selected function
therefore has no effect.
Note: • Operation mode can only be set or changed while the counter is inactive.
TIO8 Control Register (TIO8CR) <Address: H’0080 038A>
123456b7b0 TIO8MTIO8CKS TIO8ENS
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0, 1 TIO8CKS 00: Clock bus 0 R W
TIO8 clock source select bit 01: Clock bus 1
10: Clock bus 2
11: Clock bus 3
2–4 TIO8ENS 000: No selection R W
TIO8 enable/measure input source select bit 001: – ditto –
010: – ditto –
011: – ditto –
100: External input TIN10 (Note 1)
101: Input event bus 1
110: Input event bus 2
111: Input event bus 3
5–7 TIO8M 000: Single-shot output mode R W
TIO8 operation mode select bit 001: Delayed single-shot output mode
010: Continuous output mode
011: PWM output mode
100: Measure clear input mode
101: Measure free-run input mode
110: Noise processing input mode
111: – ditto –
Note 1 : Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins and the selected function
therefore has no effect.
Note: • Operation mode can only be set or changed while the counter is inactive.
10
10-88
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.4.5 TIO Counters (TIO0CT–TIO9CT)
TIO0 Counter (TIO0CT) <Address: H’0080 0300>
TIO1 Counter (TIO1CT) <Address: H’0080 0310>
TIO2 Counter (TIO2CT) <Address: H’0080 0320>
TIO3 Counter (TIO3CT) <Address: H’0080 0330>
TIO4 Counter (TIO4CT) <Address: H’0080 0340>
TIO5 Counter (TIO5CT) <Address: H’0080 0350>
TIO6 Counter (TIO6CT) <Address: H’0080 0360>
TIO7 Counter (TIO7CT) <Address: H’0080 0370>
TIO8 Counter (TIO8CT) <Address: H’0080 0380>
TIO9 Counter (TIO9CT) <Address: H’0080 0390>
b01234567891011121314b15
TIO0CT–TIO9CT
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–15 TIO0CT–TIO9CT 16-bit reload counter value R(Note 1)
Note 1: Protected against write during PWM output mode.
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
The TIO counter is a 16-bit down-counter. After the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software or by
external input), the counter starts counting synchronously with the count clock.
These counters are protected against write during PWM output mode.
TIO9 Control Register (TIO9CR) <Address: H’0080 038B>
9 1011121314b15b8 TIO9MTIO9CKS TIO9ENS
0000000
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
9, 10 TIO9CKS 00: Clock bus 0 R W
TIO9 clock source select bit 01: Clock bus 1
10: Clock bus 2
11: Clock bus 3
11, 12 TIO9ENS 00: No selection R W
TIO9 enable/measure input source select bit 01: External input TIN11 (Note 1)
10: Input event bus 1
11: Input event bus 3
13–15 TIO9M 000: Single-shot output mode R W
TIO9 operation mode select bit 001: Delayed single-shot output mode
010: Continuous output mode
011: PWM output mode
100: Measure clear input mode
101: Measure free-run input mode
110: Noise processing input mode
111: – ditto –
Note 1 : Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins and the selected function
therefore has no effect.
Note: • Operation mode can only be set or changed while the counter is inactive.
10-89
10 10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.4.6 TIO Reload 0/ Measure Registers (TIO0RL0–TIO9RL0)
TIO0 Reload 0/ Measure Register (TIO0RL0) <Address: H’0080 0306>
TIO1 Reload 0/ Measure Register (TIO1RL0) <Address: H’0080 0316>
TIO2 Reload 0/ Measure Register (TIO2RL0) <Address: H’0080 0326>
TIO3 Reload 0/ Measure Register (TIO3RL0) <Address: H’0080 0336>
TIO4 Reload 0/ Measure Register (TIO4RL0) <Address: H’0080 0346>
TIO5 Reload 0/ Measure Register (TIO5RL0) <Address: H’0080 0356>
TIO6 Reload 0/ Measure Register (TIO6RL0) <Address: H’0080 0366>
TIO7 Reload 0/ Measure Register (TIO7RL0) <Address: H’0080 0376>
TIO8 Reload 0/ Measure Register (TIO8RL0) <Address: H’0080 0386>
TIO9 Reload 0/ Measure Register (TIO9RL0) <Address: H’0080 0396>
b01234567891011121314b15
TIO0RL0–TIO9RL0
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–15 TIO0RL0–TIO9RL0 16-bit reload register value R(Note 1)
Note 1: This register is protected against write during measure input mode.
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
The TIO Reload 0/ Measure Registers serve dual purposes as a register for reloading data into the TIO Count
Registers (TIO0CT–TIO9CT) and as a measure register during measure input mode. These registers are pro-
tected against write during measure input mode.
The content of the reload 0 register is loaded into the counter in the following cases:
• When after the counter started counting in noise processing input mode, the input signal is inverted and a
valid-level signal is entered again before the counter underflows
• When the counter is enabled in single-shot output mode
• When the counter underflowed in delayed single-shot output or continuous output mode
• When the counter is enabled in PWM output mode and when the counter value set by the reload 1 register
underflowed
Simply because data is written to the reload 0 register does not mean that the data is loaded into the counter.
If this register is used as a measure register, the counter value is latched into that measure register by event
input.
10
10-90
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.4.7 TIO Reload 1 Registers (TIO0RL1–TIO9RL1)
TIO0 Reload 1 Register (TIO0RL1) <Address: H’0080 0304>
TIO1 Reload 1 Register (TIO1RL1) <Address: H’0080 0314>
TIO2 Reload 1 Register (TIO2RL1) <Address: H’0080 0324>
TIO3 Reload 1 Register (TIO3RL1) <Address: H’0080 0334>
TIO4 Reload 1 Register (TIO4RL1) <Address: H’0080 0344>
TIO5 Reload 1 Register (TIO5RL1) <Address: H’0080 0354>
TIO6 Reload 1 Register (TIO6RL1) <Address: H’0080 0364>
TIO7 Reload 1 Register (TIO7RL1) <Address: H’0080 0374>
TIO8 Reload 1 Register (TIO8RL1) <Address: H’0080 0384>
TIO9 Reload 1 Register (TIO9RL1) <Address: H’0080 0394>
b01234567891011121314b15
TIO0RL1–TIO9RL1
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–15 TIO0RL1–TIO9RL1 16-bit reload register value R W
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
The TIO Reload 1 Registers are used to reload data into the TIO Count Registers (TIO0CT–TIO9CT).
The content of the reload 1 register is loaded into the counter in the following cases:
• When the count value set by the reload 0 register underflowed in PWM output mode
Simply because data is written to the reload 1 register does not mean that the data is loaded into the counter.
10-91
10 10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.4.8 TIO Enable Control Registers
TIO Enable Protect Register (TIOPRO) <Address: H’0080 03BC>
b01234567891011121314b15
TIO9PRO TIO8PRO TIO7PRO TIO6PRO TIO5PRO TIO4PRO TIO3PRO TIO2PRO TIO1PRO TIO0PRO
0
0
0
0
0
0
0000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–5 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
6 TIO9PRO (TIO9 enable protect bit) 0: Enable rewrite R W
7 TIO8PRO (TIO8 enable protect bit) 1: Disable rewrite
8 TIO7PRO (TIO7 enable protect bit)
9 TIO6PRO (TIO6 enable protect bit)
10 TIO5PRO (TIO5 enable protect bit)
11 TIO4PRO (TIO4 enable protect bit)
12 TIO3PRO (TIO3 enable protect bit)
13 TIO2PRO (TIO2 enable protect bit)
14 TIO1PRO (TIO1 enable protect bit)
15 TIO0PRO (TIO0 enable protect bit)
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
The TIO Enable Protect Register controls rewriting of the TIO count enable bit described in the next page by
enabling or disabling it.
10
10-92
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
WR
Dn
TIOm enable protect
(TIOmPRO) WR
EN-ON
TIOm external enable
(TIOmEEN or TIOmENS)
TINnS
TIOm count enable
(TIOmCEN) TIO enable control
Input processing
selection
F/F
F/F
F/F
Event bus
TINn
Figure 10.4.5 Configuration of the TIO Enable Circuit
TIO Count Enable Register (TIOCEN) <Address: H’0080 03BE>
b01234567891011121314b15
TIO9CEN TIO8CEN TIO7CEN TIO6CEN TIO5CEN TIO4CEN TIO3CEN TIO2CEN TIO1CEN TIO0CEN
0
0
0
0
0
0
0000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–5 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
6 TIO9CEN (TIO9 count enable bit) 0: Stop count R W
7 TIO8CEN (TIO8 count enable bit) 1: Enable count
8 TIO7CEN (TIO7 count enable bit)
9 TIO6CEN (TIO6 count enable bit)
10 TIO5CEN (TIO5 count enable bit)
11 TIO4CEN (TIO4 count enable bit)
12 TIO3CEN (TIO3 count enable bit)
13 TIO2CEN (TIO2 count enable bit)
14 TIO1CEN (TIO1 count enable bit)
15 TIO0CEN (TIO0 count enable bit)
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords
The TIO Count Enable Register controls operation of the TIO counters. To enable any TIO counter in software,
enable its corresponding enable protect bit for write and set the count enable bit by writing "1". To stop any TIO
counter, enable its corresponding enable protect bit for write and reset the count enable bit by writing "0".
In all but continuous output mode, when the counter stops due to occurrence of an underflow, the count enable
bit is automatically reset to "0". Therefore, the TIO Count Enable Register when accessed for read serves as a
status register indicating whether the counter is operating or idle.
10-93
10 10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.4.9 Operation in TIO Measure Free-Run/ Clear Input Modes
(1) Outline of TIO measure free-run/ clear input modes
In measure free-run/ clear input modes, the timer is used to measure a duration of time from when the
counter starts counting till when an external capture signal is entered. An interrupt request can be generated
by a counter underflow or execution of a measure operation.
After the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software), the counter starts counting down synchro-
nously with the count clock. When a capture signal is entered from an external device, the counter value at
that point in time is written into a register called the “measure register.”
In measure clear input mode, the counter value is initialized to H’FFFF upon capture, from which the counter
starts counting down again. When the counter underflows, it starts counting down from H'FFFF.
In measure free-run input mode, the counter continues counting down even after capture and upon under-
flow, recycles to H’FFFF, from which it starts counting down again.
To stop the counter, disable count by writing to the enable bit in software.
Figure 10.4.6 Typical Operation in Measure Free-Run Input Mode
Count clock
Counter
H'FFFF
H'0000
Enabled
(by writing to
the enable bit)
TIO interrupt request
Measure event
(capture) occurs
Enable bit
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Measure register
TIN interrupt request due to
external event input
TIO interrupt request due
to underflow
H'7000
H'9000
Measure event
(capture)
TIN interrupt request due to
external event input
TIN interrupt request
Undefined
value
H'7000Undefined H'9000
10
10-94
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
(2) Precautions on using TIO measure free-run/ clear input modes
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TIO measure free-run/ clear input modes.
• If measure event input and write to the counter occur in the same clock period, the write value is set in the
counter while at the same time latched into the measure register.
Figure 10.4.7 Typical Operation in Measure Clear Input Mode
H'FFFF
H'0000
H'7000
H'0008
Enabled
(by writing to
the enable bit) Measure event
(capture) occurs
Count clock
Counter
TIO interrupt request
Enable bit
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Measure register
TIN interrupt request
Undefined
value
TIN interrupt request due to
external event input
TIO interrupt request due
to underflow
Undefined
10-95
10 10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.4.10 Operation in TIO Noise Processing Input Mode
In noise processing input mode, the timer is used to detect that the input signal remained in the same state for
over a predetermined time.
In noise processing input mode, a high or low level on external input activates the counter and if the input signal
remains in the same state for over a predetermined time before the counter underflows, the counter generates
an interrupt request before stopping. If the valid-level signal being applied turns to an invalid level before the
counter underflows, the counter temporarily stops counting and when a valid-level signal is entered again, the
counter is reloaded with the initial count and restarts counting. The effective count width is (reload 0 register set
value + 1).
The timer stops at the same time the counter underflows or count is disabled by writing to the enable bit. An
interrupt request can be generated by a counter underflow.
Figure 10.4.8 Typical Operation in Noise Processing Input Mode
H'FFFF
H'0000
Reload 0 register
External input
(noise processing)
H'A000
Effective signal
width
Invalid
Disabled by underflow
H'A000
Count clock
Counter
Enabled
(by writing to
the enable bit)
TIO interrupt request
Enable bit
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Invalid
TIO interrupt request due
to underflow
10
10-96
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Count clock
Counter
H'FFFF
H'0000
Enabled
(by writing to the enable bit
or by external input)
F/F output
Underflow
(first time)
TIO interrupt request
due to underflow
Enable bit
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Reload 0 register H'A000
Underflow
(second time)
Count down from
the reload 1
register set value
H'(C000-1)
H'(A000-1)
Reload 1 register H'C000
Count down from
the reload 0
register set value
H'A000
PWM output period
H'C000
H'A000
Undefined
value
Count down from
the reload 0
register set value
Data inverted by
underflow
Data inverted by
enable Data inverted by
underflow
H'(A000-1)
Figure 10.4.9 Typical Operation in PWM Output Mode
10.4.11 Operation in TIO PWM Output Mode
(1) Outline of TIO PWM output mode
In PWM output mode, the timer uses two reload registers to generate a waveform with a given duty cycle.
When the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software or by external input) after setting the initial
values in the reload 0 and reload 1 registers, the counter is loaded with the reload 0 register value and starts
counting down synchronously with the count clock. The first time the counter underflows, it is loaded with the
reload 1 register value and continues counting. Thereafter, the counter is loaded with the reload 0 and reload
1 register values alternately each time an underflow occurs. The (reload 0 register set value + 1) and (reload
1 register set value + 1) respectively are effective as count values. The timer stops at the same time count is
disabled by writing to the enable bit (and not in synchronism with PWM output period).
The F/F output waveform in PWM output mode is inverted (F/F output level changes from low to high or vice
versa) when the counter starts counting and each time it underflows. An interrupt request can be generated
at an even underflow after the counter being enabled.
Note that TIO’s PWM output mode does not have the count correction function.
10-97
10 10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
To rewrite the reload 0 and reload 1 registers while the timer is operating, rewrite the reload 1 register first
and then the reload 0 register. That way, the reload 0 and reload 1 registers both are updated synchronously
with PWM period, from which the timer starts operating. This operation can normally be performed collec-
tively by accessing 32-bit addresses beginning with the reload 1 register address wordwise. (Data are auto-
matically written to the reload 1 and then the reload 0 registers in succession.)
If the reload 0 and reload 1 registers are updated in the reverse order beginning with reload 0, only the reload
0 register is updated. Note also that if the reload 0 and reload 1 registers are accessed for read, the read
values are always the data that have been written to the respective registers, and not the reload values being
actually used.
When altering PWM period by rewriting the reload registers, if the PWM period terminates before the CPU
finishes writing to reload 0, the PWM period is not altered in the current session and the data written to the
register is reflected in the next period.
(3) Precautions on using TIO PWM output mode
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TIO PWM output mode.
• If the timer is enabled by external input in the same clock period as count is disabled by writing to the
enable bit, the latter has priority so that count is disabled.
• If the counter is accessed for read immediately after being reloaded pursuant to an underflow, the counter
value temporarily reads as H’FFFF but immediately changes to (reload value – 1) at the next clock edge.
• Because the timer operates synchronously with the count clock, a count clock-dependent delay is in-
cluded before F/F output is inverted after the timer is enabled.
(2) Reload register updates in TIO PWM output mode
In PWM output mode, when the timer remains idle, the reload 0 and reload 1 registers are updated at the
same time data are written to the respective registers. But when the timer is operating, the reload 1 register
is updated by updating the reload 0 register. However, if the reload 0 and reload 1 registers are accessed for
read, the read values are always the data that have been written to the respective registers.
Internal bus
TIOnRL1
Reload 1 Reload 1 WR Reload 0 WR
Buffer
16-bit counter
Prescaler output
F/F TO
TIOnRL0
Reload 0
PWM mode control
Figure 10.4.10 PWM Circuit Diagram
10
10-98
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 10.4.11 Reload 0 and Reload 1 Register Updates in PWM Output Mode
(a) When reload register updates take effect in the current period (reflected in the next period)
Count clock
Reload 0 register
Reload 1 register
H'0001 H'FFFF
H'1000
H'7FFF
H'2000
H'8000
H'9000
Counter
Interrupt due
to underflow
Timing at which reload 0 and reload 1
registers are updated
Operation by new reload value written
Reload 0 register
Reload 1 register
F/F output
Write to reload 1 Write to reload 0
(Reload 1 data latched)
H'1000
H'2000
H'8000
H'9000
Enlarged
view
Old PWM
output period
F/F output
H'7FFEH'0000
PWM period latched
Reload 1 buffer H'2000 H'9000
New PWM
output period
New PWM
output period
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
H'0001 H'FFFF
H'1000
H'0FFF
H'2000
H'8000
H'9000
(b) When reload register updates take effect in the next period (reflected one period later)
Operation by old reload value
H'1000
H'2000
H'8000
H'9000
H'0FFEH'0000
H'2000 H'9000
Write to reload 1 Write to reload 0
(Reload 1 data latched)
Old PWM
output period
Old PWM
output period
Old PWM
output period
Timing at which reload 0 and reload 1
registers are updated
PWM period latched
Count clock
Reload 0 register
Reload 1 register
Counter
Interrupt due
to underflow
Reload 0 register
Reload 1 register
F/F output
Enlarged
view
F/F output
Reload 1 buffer
10-99
10 10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.4.12 Operation in TIO Single-shot Output Mode (without Correction Function)
(1) Outline of TIO single-shot output mode
In single-shot output mode, the timer generates a pulse in width of (reload 0 register set value + 1) only once
and then stops.
When the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software or by external input) after setting the reload
0 register, the counter is loaded with the content of the reload 0 register and starts counting synchronously
with the count clock. The counter counts down and when the minimum count is reached, stops upon under-
flow.
The F/F output waveform in single-shot output mode is inverted (F/F output level changes from low to high or
vice versa) at startup and upon underflow, generating a single-shot pulse waveform in width of (reload 0
register set value + 1) only once. An interrupt request can be generated when the counter underflows.
The count value is (reload 0 register set value + 1). (For counting operation, see also Section 10.3.9, “Opera-
tion of TOP Single-shot Output Mode.”)
(2) Precautions on using TIO single-shot output mode
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TIO single-shot output mode.
• If the counter stops due to an underflow in the same clock period as the timer is enabled by external input,
the former has priority so that the counter stops.
• If the counter stops due to an underflow in the same clock period as count is enabled by writing to the
enable bit, the latter has priority so that count is enabled.
• If the timer is enabled by external input in the same clock period as count is disabled by writing to the
enable bit, the latter has priority so that count is disabled.
• Because the timer operates synchronously with the count clock, a count clock-dependent delay is in-
cluded before F/F output is inverted after the timer is enabled.
10
10-100
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Count clock
H'FFFF
H'0000
Enabled
(by writing to the enable bit
or by external input)
F/F output
Disabled
(by underflow)
(Unused)
TIO interrupt request
due to underflow
Enable bit
Count down from the
reload 0 register set value
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Reload 0 register H'A000
H'A000
Counter
Reload 1 register
Undefined
value
H'(A000-1)
Data inverted by
enable Data inverted by
underflow
Figure 10.4.12 Typical Operation in TIO Single-shot Output Mode (without Correction Function)
10-101
10 10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.4.13 Operation in TIO Delayed Single-shot Output Mode (without Correction Function)
(1) Outline of TIO delayed single-shot output mode
In delayed single-shot output mode, the timer generates a pulse in width of (reload 0 register set value + 1)
after a finite time equal to (counter set value + 1) only once and then stops.
When the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software or by external input) after setting the
counter and reload 0 register, it starts counting down from the counter’s set value synchronously with the
count clock. The first time the counter underflows, it is loaded with the reload 0 register value and continues
counting down. The counter stops when it underflows next time.
The F/F output waveform in delayed single-shot output mode is inverted (F/F output level changes from low
to high or vice versa) when the counter underflows first time and next, generating a single-shot pulse wave-
form in width of (reload 0 register set value + 1) after a finite time equal to (first set value of counter + 1) only
once.
An interrupt request can be generated when the counter underflows first time and next.
The (counter set value + 1) and (reload 0 register set value + 1) are effective as count values. (For counting
operation, see also Section 10.3.10, “Operation of TOP Delayed Single-shot Output Mode.”)
(2) Precautions on using TIO delayed single-shot output mode
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TIO delayed single-shot output mode.
• If the counter stops due to an underflow in the same clock period as the timer is enabled by external input,
the former has priority so that the counter stops.
• If the counter stops due to an underflow in the same clock period as count is enabled by writing to the
enable bit, the latter has priority so that count is enabled.
• If the timer is enabled by external input in the same clock period as count is disabled by writing to the
enable bit, the latter has priority so that count is disabled.
• If the counter is accessed for read immediately after being reloaded pursuant to an underflow, the counter
value temporarily reads as H’FFFF but immediately changes to (reload value – 1) at the next clock edge.
10
10-102
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
H'FFFF
H'0000
Underflow
(first time)
Count down from the
counter set value
H'A000
Underflow
(second time)
H'F000
Count down from the
reload 0 register
set value
H'EFFF
H'F000
Data inverted by
underflow Data inverted by
underflow
Count clock
F/F output
(Unused)
TIO interrupt request
due to underflow
Enable bit
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Reload 0 register
Counter
Reload 1 register
Enabled
(by writing to the enable bit
or by external input)
Figure 10.4.13 Typical Operation in TIO Delayed Single-shot Output Mode (without Correction Function)
10-103
10 10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.4.14 Operation in TIO Continuous Output Mode (without Correction Function)
(1) Outline of TIO continuous output mode
In continuous output mode, the timer counts down starting from the set value of the counter and when the
counter underflows, it is loaded with the reload 0 register value. Thereafter, this operation is repeated each
time the counter underflows, thus generating consecutive pulses whose waveform is inverted in width of
(reload 0 register set value + 1).
When the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software or by external input) after setting the
counter and reload 0 register, it starts counting down from the counter’s set value synchronously with the
count clock and when the minimum count is reached, generates an underflow. This underflow causes the
counter to be loaded with the content of the reload 0 register and start counting over again. Thereafter, this
operation is repeated each time an underflow occurs. To stop the counter, disable count by writing to the
enable bit in software.
The F/F output waveform in continuous output mode is inverted (F/F output level changes from low to high or
vice versa) at startup and upon underflow, generating a waveform of consecutive pulses until the timer stops
counting. An interrupt request can be generated each time the counter underflows.
The (counter set value + 1) and (reload 0 register set value + 1) are effective as count values. (For counting
operation, see also Section 10.3.11, “Operation of TOP Continuous Output Mode.”)
(2) Precautions on using TIO continuous output mode
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TIO continuous output mode.
• If the timer is enabled by external input in the same clock period as count is disabled by writing to the
enable bit, the latter has priority so that count is disabled.
• If the counter is accessed for read immediately after being reloaded pursuant to an underflow, the counter
value temporarily reads as H’FFFF but immediately changes to (reload value – 1) at the next clock edge.
• Because the timer operates synchronously with the count clock, a count clock-dependent delay is in-
cluded before F/F output is inverted after the timer is enabled.
10
10-104
10.4 TIO (Input/Output-Related 16-Bit Timer)
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
H'FFFF
H'0000
H'E000
H'A000
H'E000 H'DFFF H'DFFF
(Unused)
Data inverted by
enable Data inverted by
underflow Data inverted by
underflow
Count clock
F/F output
TIO interrupt request
due to underflow
Enable bit
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Reload 0 register
Counter
Reload 1 register
Underflow
(first time)
Count down from
the counter set
value
Underflow
(second time)
Count down from the
reload 0 register
set value
Enabled
(by writing to the enable bit
or by external input)
Count down from the
reload 0 register
set value
Figure 10.4.14 Typical Operation in TIO Continuous Output Mode (without Correction Function)
10
10-105
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.5 TMS (Input-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.5 TMS (Input-Related 16-Bit Timer)
10.5.1 Outline of TMS
TMS (Timer Measure Small) is an input-related 16-bit timer capable of measuring input pulses in two circuit
blocks comprising a total of eight channels.
The table below shows specifications of TMS. The diagram in the next page shows a block diagram of TMS.
Table 10.5.1 Specifications of TMS (Input-Related 16-Bit Timer)
Item Specification
Number of channels 8 channels (2 circuit blocks consisting of 4 channels each, 8 channels in total)
Counter 16-bit up-counter × 2
Measure register 16-bit measure register × 8
Timer startup Started by writing to the enable bit in software
Interrupt request generation Can be generated by a counter overflow
10.5.2 Outline of TMS Operation
In TMS, when the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software), the counter starts operating. The
counter is a 16-bit up-counter, where the counter value is latched into each measure register when a measure
signal is entered from an external device.
The counter stops counting at the same time count is disabled by writing to the enable bit in software.
TIN and TMS interrupt requests can be generated by external measure signal input and counter overflow,
respectively.
10
10-106
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.5 TMS (Input-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Clock bus Input event bus
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
clk
TMS 0
S
ovf
cap3 cap2 cap1 cap0
S
S
S
S
TCLK3 (P127) TCLK3S
S
S
S
S
S
TIN16S
DMA5
TIN17S
TIN16 (P130)
TIN17 (P131)
TIN18S
TIN18 (P132)
TIN19S
TIN19 (P133)
DMA6
IRQ10
IRQ10
IRQ10
IRQ10
Output event bus
0 1 2 3
IRQ7
S: Selector
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3
Measure register 3
Counter
(16-bit)
clk
TMS 1
ovf
cap3 cap2 cap1 cap0
IRQ7
Counter
(16-bit)
Measure register 2
Measure register 1
Measure register 0
Measure register 3
Measure register 2
Measure register 1
Measure register 0
Figure 10.5.1 Block Diagram of TMS (Input-Related 16-Bit Timer)
10
10-107
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.5 TMS (Input-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.5.3 TMS Related Register Map
Shown below is a TMS related register map.
TMS Related Register Map
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 03C0 TMS0 Counter 10-109
(TMS0CT)
H'0080 03C2 TMS0 Measure 3 Register 10-109
(TMS0MR3)
H'0080 03C4 TMS0 Measure 2 Register 10-109
(TMS0MR2)
H'0080 03C6 TMS0 Measure 1 Register 10-109
(TMS0MR1)
H'0080 03C8 TMS0 Measure 0 Register 10-109
(TMS0MR0)
H'0080 03CA TMS0 Control Register TMS1 Control Register 10-108
(TMS0CR) (TMS1CR)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 03D0 TMS1 Counter 10-109
(TMS1CT)
H'0080 03D2 TMS1 Measure 3 Register 10-109
(TMS1MR3)
H'0080 03D4 TMS1 Measure 2 Register 10-109
(TMS1MR2)
H'0080 03D6 TMS1 Measure 1 Register 10-109
(TMS1MR1)
H'0080 03D8 TMS1 Measure 0 Register 10-109
(TMS1MR0)
<Count clock-dependent delay>
• Because the timer operates synchronously with the count clock, there is a count clock-dependent delay
from when the timer is enabled till when it actually starts operating.
Figure 10.5.2 Count Clock-Dependent Delay
BCLK
Count clock
Enable
Count clock period
Count clock-dependent
delay
Write to the enable bit
|
10
10-108
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.5 TMS (Input-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.5.4 TMS Control Registers
The TMS control registers are used to select TMS0/1 input events and count clock sources, as well as control
count enable. Following two TMS control registers are included:
• TMS0 Control Register (TMS0CR)
• TMS1 Control Register (TMS1CR)
TMS0 Control Register (TMS0CR) <Address: H’0080 03CA>
123456b7b0
TMS0SS0 TMS0SS1 TMS0SS2 TMS0SS3 TMS0CKS TMS0CEN
000000 0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 TMS0SS0 0: External input TIN15 (Note 1) R W
TMS0 measure 0 source select bit 1: Input event bus 0
1 TMS0SS1 0: External input TIN14 (Note 1) R W
TMS0 measure 1 source select bit 1: Input event bus 1
2 TMS0SS2 0: External input TIN13 (Note 1) R W
TMS0 measure 2 source select bit 1: Input event bus 2
3 TMS0SS3 0: External input TIN12 (Note 1) R W
TMS0 measure 3 source select bit 1: Input event bus 3
4, 5 TMS0CKS 00: External input TCLK3 R W
TMS0 clock source select bit 01: Clock bus 0
10: Clock bus 1
11: Clock bus 3
6 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
7 TMS0CEN 0: Stop count R W
TMS0 count enable bit 1: Start count
Note 1 : Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins and the selected function
therefore has no effect.
TMS1 Control Register (TMS1CR) <Address: H’0080 03CB>
9 1011121314b15b8
TMS1SS0 TMS1SS1 TMS1SS2 TMS1SS3 TMS1CKS TMS1CEN
0000 0 0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 TMS1SS0 0: External input TIN19 R W
TMS1 measure 0 source select bit 1: Input event bus 0
9 TMS1SS1 0: External input TIN18 R W
TMS1 measure 1 source select bit 1: Input event bus 1
10 TMS1SS2 0: External input TIN17 R W
TMS1 measure 2 source select bit 1: Input event bus 2
11 TMS1SS3 0: External input TIN16 R W
TMS1 measure 3 source select bit 1: Input event bus 3
12 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
13 TMS1CKS 0: Clock bus 0 R W
TMS1 clock source select bit 1: Clock bus 3
14 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
15 TMS1CEN 0: Stop count R W
TMS1 count enable bit 1: Start count
10
10-109
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.5 TMS (Input-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.5.5 TMS Counters (TMS0CT, TMS1CT)
TMS0 Counter (TMS0CT) <Address: H’0080 03C0>
TMS1 Counter (TMS1CT) <Address: H’0080 03D0>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
TMS0CT,TMS1CT
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–15 TMS0CT, TMS1CT 16-bit counter value R W
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
The TMS counter is a 16-bit up-counter, which starts counting when the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable
bit in software). The counters can be read during operation.
10.5.6 TMS Measure Registers (TMS0MR3–0, TMS1MR3–0)
TMS0 Measure 3 Register (TMS0MR3) <Address: H’0080 03C2>
TMS0 Measure 2 Register (TMS0MR2) <Address: H’0080 03C4>
TMS0 Measure 1 Register (TMS0MR1) <Address: H’0080 03C6>
TMS0 Measure 0 Register (TMS0MR0) <Address: H’0080 03C8>
TMS1 Measure 3 Register (TMS1MR3) <Address: H’0080 03D2>
TMS1 Measure 2 Register (TMS1MR2) <Address: H’0080 03D4>
TMS1 Measure 1 Register (TMS1MR1) <Address: H’0080 03D6>
TMS1 Measure 0 Register (TMS1MR0) <Address: H’0080 03D8>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
TMS0MR3–0,TMS1MR3–0
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–15 TMS0MR3-TMS0MR0 16-bit measured value R
TMS1MR3-TMS1MR0
Notes: • This register is a read-only register.
• This register can be accessed in either byte or halfword.
The TMS measure registers are used to latch counter contents upon event input. The TMS measure registers
are a read-only register.
10
10-110
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.5 TMS (Input-Related 16-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.5.7 Operation of TMS Measure Input
(1) Outline of TMS measure input
In TMS measure input, when the timer is enabled (by writing to the enable bit in software), it starts counting
up synchronously with the count clock. Then when event input to TMS is detected while the timer is operat-
ing, the counter value is latched into measure registers 0–3. The timer stops counting at the same time count
is disabled by writing to the enable bit.
A TIN interrupt request can be generated by measure signal input from an external device. A TMS interrupt
request can be generated when the counter overflows.
Count clock
Counter
H'FFFF
H'0000
Enabled
(by writing to the
enable bit)
Measure
event 1
occurs
Undefined
Enable bit
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Measure 0 register
H'8000
Overflow
occurs
TIN19 interrupt request
H'C000
Measure 1 register
TIN18 interrupt request
Measure
event 0
occurs
TMS interrupt request
due to overflow
H'6000
H'D000
H'6000H'8000
Undefined
value
Undefined H'D000
H'C000
Measure
event 1
occurs
Measure
event 0
occurs
Figure 10.5.3 Typical Operation of TMS Measure Input
(2) Precautions on using TMS measure input
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TMS measure input.
• If measure event input and write to the counter occur in the same clock period, the write value is set in the
counter while at the same time latched into the measure register.
10
10-111
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.6 TML (Input-Related 32-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 10.6.1 Block Diagram of TML (Input-Related 32-Bit Timer)
Clock bus Input event bus
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
S
S
S
S
TIN20S
TIN21S
TIN20 (P134)
TIN21 (P135)
TIN22S
TIN22 (P136)
TIN23S
TIN23 (P137)
IRQ11
IRQ11
IRQ11
IRQ11
BCLK/2
Output event bus
0 1 2 3
S: Selector
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3
clk
TML0
cap3 cap2 cap1 cap0
Measure register 3
Counter
(32-bit)
S
S
S
S
S
clk
TML1
cap3 cap2 cap1 cap0
S
Measure register 2
Measure register 1
Measure register 0
Measure register 3
Measure register 2
Measure register 1
Measure register 0
Counter
(32-bit)
10.6 TML (Input-Related 32-Bit Timer)
10.6.1 Outline of TML
TML (Timer Measure Large) is an input-related 32-bit timer capable of measuring input pulses in two circuit
blocks comprising a total of eight channels.
The table below shows specifications of TML. The diagram in the next page shows a block diagram of TML.
Table 10.6.1 Specifications of TML (Input-Related 32-Bit Timer)
Item Specification
Number of channels 8 channels (2 circuit blocks consisting of 4 channels each, 8 channels in total)
Input clock BCLK/2 (10.0 MHz when f(BCLK) = 20 MHz) or clock bus 1 input
Counter 32-bit up-counter × 2
Measure register 32-bit measure register × 8
Timer startup Start counting immediately after reset
10
10-112
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.6 TML (Input-Related 32-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.6.2 Outline of TML Operation
In TML, the timer starts counting upon deassertion of the reset input signal. The counter included in the timer is
a 32-bit up-counter, where when a measure event signal is entered from an external device, the counter value at
that point in time is stored in each 32-bit measure register.
When the reset input signal is deasserted, the counter starts operating with a BCLK/2 clock, and cannot be
stopped once it has started. The counter is idle only when the microcomputer remains reset.
A TIN interrupt request can be generated by external measure signal input. However, no TML counter overflow
interrupts are available.
10.6.3 TML Related Register Map
Shown below is a TML related register map.
TML Related Register Map
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 03E0 TML0 Counter (Upper) 10-114
(TML0CT)
H'0080 03E2 (Lower)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 03EA (Use inhibited area) TML0 Control Register 10-113
(TML0CR)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 03F0 TML0 Measure 3 Register (Upper) 10-114
(TML0MR3)
H'0080 03F2 (Lower)
H'0080 03F4 TML0 Measure 2 Register (Upper) 10-114
(TML0MR2)
H'0080 03F6 (Lower)
H'0080 03F8 TML0 Measure 1 Register (Upper) 10-114
(TML0MR1)
H'0080 03FA (Lower)
H'0080 03FC TML0 Measure 0 Register (Upper) 10-114
(TML0MR0)
H'0080 03FE (Lower)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0FE0 TML1 Counter (Upper) 10-114
(TML1CT)
H'0080 0FE2 (Lower)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0FEA (Use inhibited area) TML1 Control Register 10-113
(TML1CR)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0FF0 TML1 Measure 3 Register (Upper) 10-114
(TML1MR3)
H'0080 0FF2 (Lower)
H'0080 0FF4 TML1 Measure 2 Register (Upper) 10-114
(TML1MR2)
H'0080 0FF6 (Lower)
H'0080 0FF8 TML1 Measure 1 Register (Upper) 10-114
(TML1MR1)
H'0080 0FFA (Lower)
H'0080 0FFC TML1 Measure 0 Register (Upper) 10-114
(TML1MR0)
H'0080 0FFE (Lower)
|
|
|
|
|
10
10-113
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.6 TML (Input-Related 32-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.6.4 TML Control Registers
TML0 Control Register (TML0CR) <Address: H’0080 03EB>
9 1011121314b15b8
TML0SS0 TML0SS1 TML0SS2 TML0SS3 TML0CKS
0000 0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 TML0SS0 0: External input TIN23 R W
TML0 measure 0 source select bit 1: Input event bus 0
9 TML0SS1 0: External input TIN22 R W
TML0 measure 1 source select bit 1: Input event bus 1
10 TML0SS2 0: External input TIN21 R W
TML0 measure 2 source select bit 1: Input event bus 2
11 TML0SS3 0: External input TIN20 R W
TML0 measure 3 source select bit 1: Input event bus 3
12–14 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
15 TML0CKS (Note 1) 0: BCLK/2 R W
TML0 clock source select bit 1: Clock bus 1
Note 1: The counter can only be written normally when BCLK/2 is used as the clock source for the counter. If the selected clock
source is not BCLK/2, do not write to the counter because it cannot be written normally.
TML1 Control Register (TML1CR) <Address: H’0080 0FEB>
9 1011121314b15b8
TML1SS0 TML1SS1 TML1SS2 TML1SS3 TML1CKS
0000 0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 TML1SS0 0: External input TIN33 (Note 2) R W
TML1 measure 0 source select bit 1: Input event bus 0
9 TML1SS1 0: External input TIN32 (Note 2) R W
TML1 measure 1 source select bit 1: Input event bus 1
10 TML1SS2 0: External input TIN31 (Note 2) R W
TML1 measure 2 source select bit 1: Input event bus 2
11 TML1SS3 0: External input TIN30 (Note 2) R W
TML1 measure 3 source select bit 1: Input event bus 3
12–14 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
15 TML1CKS (Note 1) 0: BCLK/2 R W
TML1 clock source select bit 1: Clock bus 1
Note 1: The counter can only be written normally when BCLK/2 is used as the clock source for the counter. If the selected clock
source is not BCLK/2, do not write to the counter because it cannot be written normally.
Note 2 : Although the 32180 has pins for these functions, the 32182 does not have corresponding pins and the selected function
therefore has no effect.
The TML control register is used to select TML input event and count clock.
10
10-114
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.6 TML (Input-Related 32-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.6.5 TML Counters
TML0 Counter (TML0CT) <Address: H’0080 03E0>
TML1 Counter (TML1CT) <Address: H’0080 0FE0>
b01234567891011121314b15
TML0CT, TML1CT(16 high-order bits)
b16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 b31
(16 low-order bits)
????????????????
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–31 TML0CT, TML1CT 32-bit counter value R(Note 1)
Note 1: If the clock source selected for the counter is not BCLK/2, do not write to this register.
Note: • This register must always be accessed wordwise (in 32 bits) beginning with the word boundary.
The TML counter is a 32-bit up-counter, which starts counting upon deassertion of the reset input signal. The
counters can be read during operation.
10.6.6 TML Measure Registers
TML0 Measure 3 Register (TML0MR3) <Address: H’0080 03F0>
TML0 Measure 2 Register (TML0MR2) <Address: H’0080 03F4>
TML0 Measure 1 Register (TML0MR1) <Address: H’0080 03F8>
TML0 Measure 0 Register (TML0MR0) <Address: H’0080 03FC>
TML1 Measure 3 Register (TML1MR3) <Address: H’0080 0FF0>
TML1 Measure 2 Register (TML1MR2) <Address: H’0080 0FF4>
TML1 Measure 1 Register (TML1MR1) <Address: H’0080 0FF8>
TML1 Measure 0 Register (TML1MR0) <Address: H’0080 0FFC>
b01234567891011121314b15
TML0MR3–TML0MR0, TML1MR3–TML1MR0 (16 high-order bits)
b16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
(16 low-order bits)
????????????????
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–31 TML0MR3–TML0MR0, TML1MR3–TML1MR0 32-bit measure register value R
Notes: • These registers are a read-only register.
• These registers must always be accessed wordwise (in 32 bits) beginning with the word boundary.
The TML measure register is a 32-bit register, which is used to latch the counter content upon event input. The
TML measure registers can only be read, and cannot be written to.
10
10-115
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.6 TML (Input-Related 32-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
10.6.7 Operation of TML Measure Input
(1) Outline of TML measure input
In TML measure input, when the reset input signal is deasserted, the counter starts counting up synchro-
nously with the count clock. Upon event input to measure registers 0–3, the counter value is latched into each
measure register.
A TIN interrupt request can be generated by measure signal input from an external device. However, no TML
counter overflow interrupts are available.
Figure 10.6.2 Typical Operation of TML Measure Input
Count clock
Counter (32-bit)
H'FFFF FFFF
H'0000 0000
Enabled
(by deassertion
of reset)
Undefined
Reset
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Measure 0 register
Overflow
occurs
TIN23 interrupt request
Measure 1 register
TIN22 interrupt request
Measure
event 0
occurs
H'8000 0000
H'C000 0000
H'8000 0000 H'6000 0000
H'6000 0000
H'D000 0000
Undefined
value
Undefined H'C000 0000 H'D000 0000
Measure
event 1
occurs
Measure
event 0
occurs
Measure
event 1
occurs
10
10-116
MULTIJUNCTION TIMERS
10.6 TML (Input-Related 32-Bit Timer)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
(2) Precautions on using TML measure input
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TML measure input.
• If measure event input and write to the counter occur in the same clock period, the write value is set in the
counter, whereas the up-count value (before being rewritten) is latched into the measure register.
• If clock bus 1 is selected and any clock other than BCLK/2 is used for the timer, the counter cannot be
written normally. Therefore, when using any clock other than BCLK/2, do not write to the counter.
• If clock bus 1 is selected and any clock other than BCLK/2 is used for the timer, the value captured into the
measure register is one count larger the counter value. During the count clock to BCLK/2 period interval,
however, the captured value is exactly the counter value.
The diagram below shows the relationship between counter operation and the valid data that can be cap-
tured.
Counter BACDE
F
ABCDE
When BCLK/2 is selected
BCLK/2
Captured
Counter BA C
When clock bus 1 is selected
BCLK/2
Count clock
Captured BCD
F
Figure 10.6.3 Mistimed Counter Value and the Captured Value
CHAPTER 11
A-D CONVERTER
11.1 Outline of A-D Converter
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
11.3 Functional Description of A-D Converter
11.4 Inflow Current Bypass Circuit
11.5 Precautions on Using A-D Converter
11
11-2
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.1 Outline of A-D Converter
The 32182 contains 10-bit A-D Converter of the successive approximation type (A-D0 Converter). In addition to
performing conversion individually on each channel, the A-D Converter can perform conversion successively on
all of N channels (N = 1–12) as a single group. The conversion result can be read out in either 10 or 8 bits.
There are following conversion and operation modes for the A-D conversion:
(1) Conversion Modes
• A-D conversion mode : Ordinary mode in which analog input voltages are converted into digital quantities.
• Comparator mode (Note 1): A mode in which analog input voltage is compared with a preset comparison
voltage to find only the relative magnitude of two quantities. (Useful in only
single operation mode)
(2) Operation Modes
• Single mode : Analog input voltage on one channel is A-D converted once or comparated
(Note 1) with a given quantity.
Scan mode : Analog input voltages on two or more selected channels (in N channel units, N =
1–12) are sequentially A-D converted.
Single-shot scan mode : Scan operation is performed for one cycle.
Continuous scan mode
: Scan operation is repeatedly until stopped.
(3) Special Operation Modes
Forcible single mode execution during scan mode : Conversion is forcibly executed in single mode (comparator
mode) during scan operation.
• Scan mode start after single mode execution : Scan operation is started subsequently after executing
conversion in single mode.
• Conversion restart : A-D conversion being executed in single or scan mode is
restarted.
(4) Sample-and-Hold Function
The analog input voltage is sampled when starting A-D conversion, and A-D conversion is performed on the
sampled voltage. This function can be enabled or disabled as necessary.
(5) A-D Disconnection Detection Assist Function
To suppress influences of the analog input voltage leakage from any preceding channel during scan mode
operation, a function is incorporated that helps to fix the electric charge on the chopper amp capacitor to the
given state (AVCC or AVSS) before starting A-D conversion. This function provides a sure and reliable means of
detecting a disconnection in the wiring patterns connecting to the analog input pins.
(6) Inflow Current Bypass Circuit
If an overvoltage or negative voltage is applied to any analog input channel which is currently inactive, a current
flows into or out of the analog input channel currently being A-D converted via the internal circuit, causing the
conversion accuracy to degrade. To solve this problem, the A-D Converter incorporates a circuit that bypasses
such inflow current. This circuit is always enabled.
(7) Conversion Speed
The A-D conversion and comparate speed can be selected from a total of four speeds available: slow mode
(normal or double speed) and fast mode (normal or double speed). The normal speed and double speed in slow
mode are compatible with the 32170 group of Renesas microcomputers.
11.1 Outline of A-D Converter
11
11-3
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.1 Outline of A-D Converter
(8) Interrupt and DMA Transfer Request Generation Function
An A-D conversion interrupt or DMA transfer request can be generated each time A-D conversion or comparate
operation in single mode is completed, as well as when a single-shot scan operation or one cycle of continuous
scan operation is completed.
Note 1: To discriminate between the comparison performed internally by the successive approximation-
type A-D Converter and that performed in comparator mode using the same A-D Converter as a
comparator, the comparison in comparator mode is referred to in this manual as “comparate.”
Table 11.1.1 outlines the A-D Converter and Figure 11.1.1 shows block diagram of A-D Converter.
Table 11.1.1 Outline of the A-D Converter
Item Description
Analog input 12 channels
A-D0 Converter: 12-channel analog input-only pins
A-D conversion method Successive approximation method
Resolution 10 bits (Conversion result can be read out in either 8 or 10 bits)
Absolute accuracy (Note 1) During slow mode: ±2 SLB at normal speed, ±2 SLB at double speed
Conditions: Ta = 25°C, During fast mode: ±3 SLB at normal speed, ±3 SLB at double speed
AVCC0 = 5.12 V, Note: • The accuracy when sample-and-hold is enabled is T.B.D.
VREF0 = 5.12 V
Conversion mode A-D conversion mode and comparator mode
Operation mode Single mode, single-shot scan mode and continuous scan mode
Conversion start trigger Software start Started by setting the A-D conversion start bit to "1"
Hardware start A-D0 Converter MJT (input event bus 2), MJT (input event bus 3),
MJT (output event bus 3) and MJT (TIN23S)
Conversion speed During single mode Slow mode Normal speed 299BCLK 14.95µs (Note 2)
BCLK: (• When sample-and-hold disabled Double speed 173BCLK 8.65µs
Internal peripheral clock
When normal sample-and-hold enabled) Fast mode Normal speed 131BCLK 6.55µs
Double speed 89BCLK 4.45µs
During single mode Slow mode Normal speed 191BCLK 9.55µs
(When fast sample-and-hold enabled) Double speed 101BCLK 5.05µs
Fast mode Normal speed 95BCLK 4.75µs
Double speed 53BCLK 2.65µs
During comparator mode Slow mode Normal speed 47BCLK 2.35µs
Double speed 29BCLK 1.45µs
Fast mode Normal speed 23BCLK 1.15µs
Double speed 17BCLK 0.85µs
Sample-and-hold function Sample-and-hold function can be enabled or disabled as necessary.
A-D disconnection Influences of the analog input voltage leakage from any preceding channel during scandetection
assist function mode operation are suppressed.
Interrupt request Generated when A-D conversion or comparate operation is completed
generation function Generated when a single-shot scan operation or one cycle of continuous scan operation is completed
DMA transfer request Generated when A-D conversion or comparate operation is completed
generation function Generated when a single-shot scan operation or one cycle of continuous scan operation is completed
Note 1: The conversion accuracy stipulated here refers to that of the microcomputer alone, with influences of the power
supply wiring and noise on the board not taken into account.
Note 2: This indicates the conversion time when f(BCLK) = 20 MHz (1 BCLK = 50 ns).
11
11-4
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.1 Outline of A-D Converter
Figure 11.1.1 Block Diagram of the A-D0 Converter
AD0IN0
AD0IN1
AD0IN2
AD0IN3
AD0IN4
AD0IN5
AD0IN6
AD0IN7 Selector
Interrupt request
AVSS0
VREF0
10-bit A-D Successive
Approximation Register
(AD0SAR)
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 0
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 1
A-D0 Single Mode Register
A-D Comparate
Data Register A-D Control Circuit
• Mode selection
• Channel selection
• Conversion time
selection
• Flag control
• Interrupt control
10-bit D-A Converter Comparator
AD0IN8
AD0IN9
AD0IN10
AD0IN11
AD0CMP
AD0DT0
AD0DT1
AD0DT2
AD0DT3
AD0DT4
AD0DT5
AD0DT6
AD0DT7
AD0DT8
AD0DT9
AD0DT10
AD0DT11
DMA transfer request
Successive Approximation-type
A-D Converter Unit
Internal data bus
A-D0 Scan Mode Register
AD0SCM0, 1
AD0SIM0, 1
AVCC0
10-bit readout
8-bit readout
Shifter
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 2
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 3
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 4
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 5
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 6
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 7
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 8
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 9
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 10
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 11
Input ev ent bus 3
Input ev ent bus 2
Output ev ent bus 3
TIN23S S
S
AD0CTRG1
AD0STRG1
DMA0
DMA common
Sample-and-Hold
Control Circuit
11
11-5
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 11.1.2 Operation in Single Mode (A-D Conversion)
A-D conversion interrupt or DMA transfer request
Note 1: A-D0 conversion start: Software trigger Started by setting the A-D0 conversion start bit to "1"
Hardware trigger Started by input event bus 3, input event bus 2,
output event bus 3 or TIN23S signal input
ANiINn Completed
ADiDTn
10-bit A-Di Data Register
Conversion starts
(Note 1) i=1
n=0–11
11.1.1 Conversion Modes
The A-D Converter has two conversion modes: “A-D Conversion mode” and “Comparator mode.”
(1) A-D Conversion Mode
In A-D conversion mode, the analog input voltage on a specified channel is A-D converted.
In single mode, A-D conversion is performed on a channel selected by the A-D Single Mode Register 1
analog input pin select bit.
In scan mode, A-D conversion is performed on channels selected by A-D Scan Mode Register 1 according to
settings of A-D Scan Mode Register 0.
The conversion result is stored in each channel’s corresponding 10-bit A-D Data Register. There is also an 8-
bit A-D Data Register for each channel, from which 8-bit A-D conversion results can be read out.
An A-D conversion interrupt or DMA transfer request can be generated when A-D conversion in single mode
is completed, as well as when one cycle of scan loop in scan mode is completed.
(2) Comparator Mode
In comparator mode, the analog input voltage on a specified channel is “comparated” (compared) with the succes-
sive approximation register value, and the result (relative magnitude of two values) is returned to a flag.
The channel to be comparated is selected using the A-D Single Mode Register 1 analog input pin select bit.
The result of comparate operation is flagged ("0" or "1") by setting the A-D Comparate Data Register bit that
corresponds to the selected channel.
An A-D conversion interrupt or DMA transfer request can be generated when comparate operation is completed.
11.1.2 Operation Modes
There are two operation modes for the A-D Converter: “Single mode” and “Scan mode.” When comparator mode
is selected as A-D conversion mode, only single mode can be used.
(1) Single Mode
In single mode, the analog input voltage on one selected channel is A-D converted or comparated once. An A-D conver-
sion interrupt or DMA transfer request can be generated when A-D conversion or comparate operation is completed.
11.1 Outline of A-D Converter
11
11-6
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
A-D conversion interrupt or DMA transfer request
ADiIN0 Completed here when operating
in single-shot scan mode
ADiDT0
10-bit A-Di Data Register
Conversion
starts
(Note 1) ADiIN1 ADiINn-1 ADiINn
ADiDT1 ADiDTn-1 ADiDTn
During continuous scan mode
<n-channel scan> i= 1
n=0–11
Note 1: A-D0 conversion start: Software trigger Started by setting the A-D0 conversion start bit to "1"
Hardware trigger Started by input event bus 3, input event bus 2,
output event bus 3 or TIN23S signal input
Figure 11.1.4 Operation of A-D Conversion in Scan Mode
11.1 Outline of A-D Converter
Figure 11.1.3 Operation in Single Mode (Comparate)
(2) Scan Mode
In scan mode, the analog input voltages from channel 0 (ADiIN0, i = 0) to the channel (channels 0–11)
selected by the A-D Scan Mode Register 1 scan loop select bit are sequentially A-D converted.
There are two types of scan mode: “Single-shot scan mode” in which A-D conversion is completed after
performing one cycle of scan operation, and “Continuous scan mode” in which scan operation is continued
until halted by setting the A-D scan mode register 0’s A-D conversion stop bit to "1".
These types of scan mode are selected using A-D Scan Mode Register 0. The channels to be scanned are
selected using A-D Scan Mode Register 1. The selected channels are scanned sequentially beginning with
channel 0.
An A-D conversion interrupt or DMA transfer request can be generated when one cycle of scan operation is
completed.
A-D conversion interrupt
or DMA transfer request
Note 1: Comparate operation is started by writing a comparison value to the Successive
Approximation Register (ADiSAR)
ADiINn Completed
ADiCMP
A-Di Comparate
Data Register
Conversion
starts
(Note 1)
ADiSAR
A-D Successive Approximation Register
Comparate result
ADiCMP=0 (ANn > ADiSAR)
ADiCMP=1 (ANn < ADiSAR)
i=1
n=0–11
11
11-7
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Table 11.1.2 Registers in Which Scan Mode A-D Conversion Results Are Stored
Scan Mode Register 1 Selected channels Selected channels A-D conversion result
channel selection for single-shot scan for continuous scan storage register
B'0000:0 ADiIN0 ADiIN0 10-bit A-Di Data Register 0
(ADiIN0) Completed ADiIN0 10-bit A-Di Data Register 0
(Repeated until
forcibly terminated)
B'0001:1 ADiIN0 ADiIN0 10-bit A-Di Data Register 0
(ADiIN1) ADiIN1 ADiIN1 10-bit A-Di Data Register 1
Completed ADiIN0 10-bit A-Di Data Register 0
(Repeated until
forcibly terminated)
B'0010:2 ADiIN0 ADiIN0 10-bit A-Di Data Register 0
(ADiIN2) ADiIN1 ADiIN1 10-bit A-Di Data Register 1
ADiIN2 ADiIN2 10-bit A-Di Data Register 2
Completed ADiIN0 10-bit A-Di Data Register 0
(Repeated until
forcibly terminated)
B'0011:3 ADiIN0 ADiIN0 10-bit A-Di Data Register 0
(ADiIN3) ADiIN1 ADiIN1 10-bit A-Di Data Register 1
ADiIN2 ADiIN2 10-bit A-Di Data Register 2
ADiIN3 ADiIN3 10-bit A-Di Data Register 3
Completed ADiIN0 10-bit A-Di Data Register 0
(Repeated until
forcibly terminated)
B'XXXX:n ADiIN0 ADiIN0 10-bit A-Di Data Register 0
(ADiINn) ADiIN1 ADiIN1 10-bit A-Di Data Register 1
ADiIN2 ADiIN2 10-bit A-Di Data Register 2
n11
ADiINn ADiINn 10-bit A-Di Data Register n
Completed ADiIN0 10-bit A-Di Data Register 0
(Repeated until
forcibly terminated)
11.1 Outline of A-D Converter
(i=0)
11
11-8
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.1.3 Special Operation Modes
(1) Forcible single mode execution during scan mode
In this special operation mode, single mode conversion (A-D conversion or comparate) is forcibly executed
on a specified channel during scan mode operation. For A-D conversion mode, the conversion result is
stored in the 10-bit A-D Data Register corresponding to the specified channel, whereas for comparate mode,
the conversion result is stored in the 10-bit A-D Comparate Data Register. When the A-D conversion or
comparate operation on a specified channel finishes, scan mode A-D conversion is restarted from where it
was canceled during scan operation.
To start single mode conversion during scan mode operation in software, choose a software trigger using the
A-D Single Mode Register 0 A-D conversion start trigger select bit. Then, for A-D conversion, set the said
register’s A-D conversion start bit to "1". For comparate mode, write a comparison value to the A-D Succes-
sive Approximation Register (AD0SAR) during scan mode operation.
To start single mode conversion during scan mode operation in hardware, choose a hardware trigger using
the A-D Single Mode Register 0 A-D conversion start trigger select bit. Then enter the hardware trigger
selected with the said register.
An A-D conversion interrupt or DMA transfer request can be generated when conversion on a specified
channel or one cycle of scan operation is completed.
Figure 11.1.5 Forcible Single Mode Execution during Scan Mode
A-D conversion interrupt or DMA transfer request
ADiIN0
ADiDT0
10-bit A-Di Data Register
Scan mode
conversion starts ADiIN1
ADiDT1 ADiDT5
Note 1: The canceled convert operation on channel 2 is reexecuted from the beginning.
<To perform single mode conversion on channel ADiIN5
during ADiIN2 conversion in n-channel single-shot scan mode>
Completed
ADiIN2 ADiINn
ADiDT2 ADiDTn
ADiIN5
Forcible single mode
execution starts
(Note 1)
ADiIN2
i=0
n=0–11
11.1 Outline of A-D Converter
11
11-9
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 11.1.6 Scan Mode Start after Single Mode Execution
A-D conversion interrupt or DMA transfer request
ADiIN0
ADiDT0
10-bit A-Di Data Register
Instructed to start
scan mode conversion
ADiIN1
ADiDT1ADiDT5
<To start n-channel single-shot scan mode subsequently after single mode conversion on channel ADiIN5>
Completed
ADiINn-1 ADiINn
ADiDTn-1 ADiDTn
ADiIN5
Single mode
conversion starts
i=0
n=0–11
(2) Scan mode start after single mode execution
In this special operation mode, scan operation is started subsequently after executing single mode conver-
sion (A-D conversion or comparate).
To start this mode in software, choose a software trigger using the A-D Scan Mode Register 0 A-D conver-
sion start trigger select bit. Then set the said register’s A-D conversion start bit to "1" during single mode
conversion operation.
To start this mode in hardware, choose a hardware trigger using the A-D Scan Mode Register 0 A-D conver-
sion start trigger select bit. Then enter the hardware trigger selected with the said register during single mode
conversion operation.
If a hardware trigger is selected using the A-D conversion start trigger select bit in both A-D Single Mode
Register 0 and A-D Scan Mode Register 0 and the selected hardware triggers are entered, the A-D Converter
first performs single mode conversion and then scan mode conversion in succession.
An A-D conversion interrupt or DMA transfer request can be generated when single mode conversion on a
specified channel or one cycle of scan operation is completed.
11.1 Outline of A-D Converter
11
11-10
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.1 Outline of A-D Converter
(3) Conversion restart
In this special operation mode, operation being executed in single or scan mode is stopped in the middle and
reexecuted from the beginning.
When in single mode, set the A-D Single Mode Register 0 A-D conversion start bit to "1" again or enter a
hardware trigger during A-D conversion or comparate operation, and the operation being executed is re-
started over again.
When in scan mode, set the A-D Scan Mode Register 0 A-D conversion start bit to "1" again or enter a
hardware trigger signal during scan operation, and the channel being converted is canceled and A-D conver-
sion is performed from channel 0 over again.
Figure 11.1.7 Conversion Restart during Single Mode Operation
A-D conversion interrupt or DMA transfer request
Single mode
ADiIN5 conversion
starts
ADiDT5
<To restart single mode ADiIN5 conversion>
Completed
Single mode ADiIN5
restarts
ADiIN5
ADiIN5
10-bit A-Di Data Register
i=0
Figure 11.1.8 Conversion Restart during Scan Operation
A-D conversion interru
p
t or DMA transfer re
q
uest
ADiIN0
ADiDT0
10-bit A-Di Data Register
Scan mode
conversion starts
ADiIN1
ADiDT1
<To restart during ADiIN2 conversion in n-channel single-shot scan mode>
Completed
ADiINn-1 ADiINn
ADiDTn-1 ADiDTn
Scan mode
restarts
ADiIN2
ADiIN0
ADiDT0
ADiIN1
ADiDT1
i=0
n=0–11
11
11-11
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.1.4 A-D Converter Interrupt and DMA Transfer Requests
The A-D Converter can generate an A-D conversion interrupt or DMA transfer request each time A-D conver-
sion, comparate operation, single-shot scan or one cycle of continuous scan mode is completed. The A-D Single
Mode Register 0 and A-D Scan Mode Register 0 are used to select between A-D conversion interrupt and DMA
transfer requests.
11.1 Outline of A-D Converter
Figure 11.1.9 Selecting between Interrupt and DMA Transfer Requests
11.1.5 Sample-and-Hold Function
The analog input voltage that was sampled immediately after A-D conversion started is held on, and A-D conver-
sion is performed on that seized voltage.
The A-D conversion time in “normal” sample-and-hold mode is the same as in conventional A-D conversion
mode of the 32170, etc. The A-D conversion time in “fast” sample-and-hold mode is significantly short, allowing
to obtain conversion results more quickly than ever.
Scan mode (when one cycle
of scan is completed)
Single mode (when A-D conversion or
comparate operation is completed)
A-Di conversion interrupt request
(To the Interrupt Controller)
DMA transfer request
(To the DMAC)
A-Di Scan Mode Register 0
interrupt/DMA transfer request select bit
A-Di Single Mode Register 0
interrupt/DMA transfer request select bit
i=0
11
11-12
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
Shown below is an A-D converter related register map.
A-D Converter Related Register Map (1/2)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 0080 A-D0 Single Mode Register 0 A-D0 Single Mode Register 1 11-14
(AD0SIM0) (AD0SIM1) 11-16
H'0080 0082 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0084 A-D0 Scan Mode Register 0 A-D0 Scan Mode Register 1 11-18
(AD0SCM0) (AD0SCM1) 11-20
H'0080 0086
A-D0 Disconnection Detection Assist Function Control Register
A-D0 Conversion Speed Control Register 11-23
(AD0DDACR) (AD0CVSCR) 11-22
H'0080 0088 A-D0 Successive Approximation Register 11-27
(AD0SAR)
H'0080 008A A-D0 Disconnection Detection Assist Method Select Register 11-24
(AD0DDASEL)
H'0080 008C A-D0 Comparate Data Register 11-28
(AD0CMP)
H'0080 008E (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0090 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 0 11-29
(AD0DT0)
H'0080 0092 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 1 11-29
(AD0DT1)
H'0080 0094 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 2 11-29
(AD0DT2)
H'0080 0096 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 3 11-29
(AD0DT3)
H'0080 0098 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 4 11-29
(AD0DT4)
H'0080 009A 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 5 11-29
(AD0DT5)
H'0080 009C 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 6 11-29
(AD0DT6)
H'0080 009E 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 7 11-29
(AD0DT7)
H'0080 00A0 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 8 11-29
(AD0DT8)
H'0080 00A2 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 9 11-29
(AD0DT9)
H'0080 00A4 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 10 11-29
(AD0DT10)
H'0080 00A6 10-bit A-D0 Data Register 11 11-29
(AD0DT11)
| (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 00D0 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 0 11-30
(AD08DT0)
H'0080 00D2 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 1 11-30
(AD08DT1)
H'0080 00D4 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 2 11-30
(AD08DT2)
H'0080 00D6 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 3 11-30
(AD08DT3)
H'0080 00D8 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 4 11-30
(AD08DT4)
H'0080 00DA (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 5 11-30
(AD08DT5)
H'0080 00DC (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 6 11-30
(AD08DT6)
H'0080 00DE (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 7 11-30
(AD08DT7)
H'0080 00E0 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 8 11-30
(AD08DT8)
H'0080 00E2 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 9 11-30
(AD08DT9)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
11
11-13
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
A-D Converter Related Register Map (2/2)
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 00E4 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 10 11-30
(AD08DT10)
H'0080 00E6 (Use inhibited area) 8-bit A-D0 Data Register 11 11-30
(AD08DT11)
11
11-14
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
11.2.1 A-D Single Mode Register 0
A-D0 Single Mode Register 0 (AD0SIM0) <Address: H’0080 0080>
123456b7b0
ADSTRG0ADSTRG1 ADSSEL ADSREQ ADSSTTADSSTPADSCMP
0 000100
0
<After reset: H’04>
b Bit Name Function R W
0ADSTRG1 (Note 1) Bits 0 and 2 are used to select an A-D hardware trigger. R W
A-D hardware trigger select 1 bit b0 b2
0 0 : Input event bus 2
0 1 : Input event bus 3
1 0 : Output event bus 3
1 1 : TIN23S signal
1 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
2 ADSTRG0 (Note 1) Bits 0 and 2 are used to select an A-D hardware trigger. R W
A-D hardware trigger select 0 bit (See the column for bit 0.)
3 ADSSEL 0: Software trigger R W
A-D conversion start trigger select bit 1: Hardware trigger (Note 2)
4 ADSREQ 0: A-D conversion interrupt request R W
Interrupt/DMA transfer request select bit 1: DMA transfer request
5 ADSCMP 0: A-D conversion/comparate in progress R
A-D conversion/comparate completed bit 1: A-D conversion/comparate completed
6 ADSSTP 0: No operation 0 W
A-D conversion stop bit 1: Stop A-D conversion
7 ADSSTT 0: No operation 0 W
A-D conversion start bit 1:Start A-D conversion
Note 1: Two bits—A-D hardware trigger select 1 (bit 0) and A-D hardware trigger select 0 (bit 2)—are used to select an A-D
hardware trigger.
Note 2: During comparator mode, hardware triggers, if any selected, are ignored and operation is started by a software trigger.
A-D Single Mode Register 0 is used to control operation of the A-D Converter during single mode (including
“Forcible single mode execution during scan mode”).
(1) ADSTRG (A-D Hardware Trigger Select) bits (Bits 0 and 2)
These bits select a hardware trigger when A-D conversion by the A-D Converter is to be started in hardware.
Select one from the following hardware trigger sources:
A-D0 Converter: Input event bus 2
Input event bus 3
Output event bus 3
TIN23 edge select output
The contents of these bits are ignored if a software trigger is selected by ADSSEL (A-D conversion start
trigger select bit).
11
11-15
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
(2) ADSSEL (A-D Conversion Start Trigger Select) bit (Bit 3)
This bit selects whether to use a software or hardware trigger to start A-D conversion during single mode.
If a software trigger is selected, A-D conversion is started by setting the ADSSTT (A-D conversion start) bit to
"1". If a hardware trigger is selected, A-D conversion is started by the trigger source selected with the
ADSTRG (hardware trigger select) bits.
(3) ADSREQ (A-D Interrupt/DMA Transfer Request Select) bit (Bit 4)
This bit selects whether to request an A-D conversion interrupt or a DMA transfer when single mode opera-
tion (A-D conversion or comparate) is completed. If neither an interrupt nor a DMA transfer are used, choose
to request an A-D conversion interrupt and use the A-D Conversion Interrupt Control Register of the Interrupt
Controller (ICU) to mask the interrupt request, or choose to request a DMA transfer and use the DMA Chan-
nel Control Register to disable DMA transfers to be performed upon completion of A-D conversion.
(4) ADSCMP (A-D Conversion/Comparate Completed) bit (Bit 5)
This is a read-only bit, whose value after reset is "1". This bit is "0" when the A-D Converter is performing
single mode operation (A-D conversion or comparate) and is set to "1" when the operation finishes.
This bit is also set to "1" when A-D conversion or comparate operation is forcibly terminated by setting the
ADSSTP (A-D conversion stop) bit to "1" during A-D conversion or comparate operation.
(5) ADSSTP (A-D Conversion Stop) bit (Bit 6)
Setting this bit to "1" while the A-D Converter is performing single mode operation (A-D conversion or
comparate) causes the operation being performed to stop. Manipulation of this bit is ignored while single
mode operation is idle or scan mode operation is under way.
Operation stops immediately after writing to this bit. If the A-D Successive Approximation Register is read
after being stopped, the content read from the register is the value in the middle of conversion (not trans-
ferred to the A-D Data Register).
If the A-D conversion start bit and A-D conversion stop bit are set to "1" at the same time, the A-D conversion
stop bit has priority.
If this bit is set to "1" when performing single mode operation in special mode “Forcible single mode execution
during scan mode,” only single mode conversion stops and scan mode operation restarts.
(6) ADSSTT (A-D Conversion Start) bit (Bit 7)
If this bit is set to "1" when a software trigger has been selected with the ADSSEL (A-D conversion start
trigger select) bit, the A-D Converter starts A-D conversion.
If the A-D conversion start bit and A-D conversion stop bit are set to "1" at the same time, the A-D conversion
stop bit has priority.
If this bit is set to "1" again while performing single mode conversion, special operation mode “Conversion
restart” is turned on, so that single mode conversion restarts.
If this bit is set to "1" again while performing A-D conversion in scan mode, special operation mode “Forcible
single mode execution during scan mode” is turned on, so that the channel being converted in scan mode is
canceled and single mode conversion is performed. When the single mode conversion finishes, scan mode
A-D conversion restarts beginning with the canceled channel.
11
11-16
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
11.2.2 A-D Single Mode Register 1
A-D0 Single Mode Register 1 (AD0SIM1) <Address: H’0080 0081>
9 1011121314b15b8
ADSMSL ADSSPD ADSSHSL ANSEL
00000000
ADSSHSPD
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 ADSMSL 0: A-D conversion mode R W
A-D conversion mode select bit 1: Comparator mode
9 ADSSPD (Note 1) 0: Normal speed R W
A-D conversion speed select bit 1: Double speed
10 ADSSHSL 0: Disable sample-and-hold R W
A-D conversion method select bit 1: Enable sample-and-hold
11 ADSSHSPD (Note 2) 0: Normal sample-and-hold R W
A-D sample-and-hold conversion speed select bit 1: Fast sample-and-hold
12–15 ANSEL 0000 : Select ADiIN0 (i = 0) R W
A-D analog input pin select bit 0001 : Select ADiIN1
0010 : Select ADiIN2
0011 : Select ADiIN3
0100 : Select ADiIN4
0101 : Select ADiIN5
0110 : Select ADiIN6
0111 : Select ADiIN7
1000 : Select ADiIN8
1001 : Select ADiIN9
1010 : Select ADiIN10
1011 : Select ADiIN11
1100 : Setting inhibited
1101 : Setting inhibited
1110 : Setting inhibited
1111 : Setting inhibited
Note 1: The A-D conversion speed is determined by a combination of ADSSPD, ADSSHSL and ADSSHSPD bits and the A-D
Conversion Speed Control Register ADCVSD bit.
Note 2: Setting of this bit is effective when the sample-and-hold function is enabled by ADSSHSL bit.
A-D Single Mode Register 1 is used to select operation mode, conversion speed and analog input pins when the
A-D Converter is operating in single mode.
11
11-17
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
(1) ADSMSL (A-D Conversion Mode Select) bit (Bit 8)
This bit selects A-D conversion mode when the A-D Converter is operating in single mode. Setting this bit to
"0" selects A-D conversion mode, and setting this bit to "1" selects comparator mode.
(2) ADSSPD (A-D Conversion Speed Select) bit (Bit 9)
This bit selects the A-D conversion speed when the A-D Converter is operating in single mode. Setting this bit
to "0" selects normal speed, and setting this bit to "1" selects double speed.
(3) ADSSHSL (A-D Conversion Method Select) bit (Bit 10)
This bit enables or disables the sample-and-hold function when the A-D Converter is operating in single
mode. Setting this bit to "0" disables the sample-and-hold function, and setting this bit to "1" enables the
sample-and-hold function.
Setting of this bit has no effect if comparator mode is selected with the ADSMSL (A-D conversion mode
select) bit.
(4) ADSSHSPD (A-D Sample-and-Hold Speed Select) bit (Bit 11)
When the A-D Converter’s sample-and-hold function is enabled, this bit selects a conversion speed. When
this bit is "0", the conversion speed is the same as normal A-D conversion speed. When this bit is "1",
conversion is performed at a speed faster than normal A-D conversion speed.
Setting of this bit has no effect if the sample-and-hold function is disabled by setting the ADSSHSL (A-D
conversion method select) bit to "0".
For details about the conversion time, see Section 11.3.4, “Calculating the A-D Conversion Time.”
(5) ANSEL (A-D Analog Input Pin Select) bits (Bits 12–15)
These bits select the analog input pins when the A-D Converter is operating in single mode. A-D conversion
or comparate operation is performed on the channels selected with these bits. If these bits are accessed for
read, the value written to them is read out.
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
11
11-18
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
11.2.3 A-D Scan Mode Register 0
A-D0 Scan Mode Register 0 (AD0SCM0) <Address: H’0080 0084>
123456b7b0
ADCTRG0ADCMSLADCTRG1 ADSHIDE ADCREQ ADCSTTADCSTPADCCMP
00000100
<After reset: H’04>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 ADCTRG1 (Note 1) Bits 0 and 2 are used to select an A-D hardware trigger. R W
A-D hardware trigger select 1 bit b0 b2
0 0 : Input event bus 2
0 1 : Input event bus 3
1 0 : Output event bus 3
1 1 : TIN23S signal
1 ADCMSL 0: Single-shot mode R W
A-D scan mode select bit 1: Continuous mode
2 ADCTRG0 (Note 1) Bits 0 and 2 are used to select an A-D hardware trigger. R W
A-D hardware trigger select 0 bit (See the column for bit 0.)
3 ADCSEL 0: Software trigger R W
A-D conversion start trigger select bit 1: Hardware trigger
4 ADCREQ 0: A-D conversion interrupt request R W
Interrupt/DMA transfer request select bit 1: DMA transfer request
5 ADCCMP 0: A-D conversion in progress R
A-D conversion completed bit 1: A-D conversion completed
6 ADCSTP 0: No operation 0 W
A-D conversion stop bit 1: Stop A-D conversion
7 ADCSTT 0: No operation 0 W
A-D conversion start bit 1: Start A-D conversion
Note 1: Two bits—A-D hardware trigger select 1 (bit 0) and A-D hardware trigger select 0 (bit 2)—are used to select an A-D
hardware trigger.
A-D Scan Mode Register 0 is used to control operation of the A-D Converter during scan mode.
(1) ADCTRG (A-D Hardware Trigger Select) bits (Bits 0 and 2)
These bits select a hardware trigger when A-D conversion by the A-D Converter is to be started in hardware.
Select one from the following hardware trigger sources:
A-D0 Converter: Input event bus 2
Input event bus 3
Output event bus 3
TIN23 edge select output
The contents of these bits are ignored if a software trigger is selected by ADCSEL (A-D conversion start
trigger select bit).
11
11-19
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
(2) ADCMSL (A-D Scan Mode Select) bit (Bit 1)
This bit selects scan mode of the A-D Converter between single-shot scan and continuous scan.
Setting this bit to "0" selects single-shot scan mode, where the channels selected with the ANSCAN (A-D
scan loop select) bits are sequentially A-D converted and when A-D conversion on all selected channels is
completed, the conversion operation stops.
Setting this bit to "1" selects continuous scan mode, where after operation in single-shot scan mode finishes,
A-D conversion is reexecuted beginning with the first channel and continued until stopped by setting the
ADCSTP (A-D conversion stop) bit to "1".
(3) ADCSEL (A-D Conversion Start Trigger Select) bit (Bit 3)
This bit selects whether to use a software or hardware trigger to start A-D conversion during scan mode. If a
software trigger is selected, A-D conversion is started by setting the ADCSTT (A-D conversion start) bit to
"1". If a hardware trigger is selected, A-D conversion is started by the trigger source selected with the
ADCTRG (hardware trigger select) bits.
(4) ADCREQ (A-D Interrupt/DMA Transfer Request Select) bit (Bit 4)
This bit selects whether to request an A-D conversion interrupt or a DMA transfer when one cycle of scan
mode operation is completed. If neither an interrupt nor a DMA transfer are used, choose to request an A-D
conversion interrupt and use the A-D Conversion Interrupt Control Register of the Interrupt Controller (ICU)
to mask the interrupt request, or choose to request a DMA transfer and use the DMA Channel Control
Register to disable DMA transfers to be performed upon completion of A-D conversion.
(5) ADCCMP (A-D Conversion Completed) bit (Bit 5)
This is a read-only bit, whose value after reset is "1". This bit is "0" when the A-D Converter is performing
scan mode A-D conversion and is set to "1" when single-shot scan mode finishes or continuous scan mode
is stopped by setting the ADCSTP (A-D conversion stop) bit to "1".
(6) ADCSTP (A-D Conversion Stop) bit (Bit 6)
Setting this bit to "1" while the A-D Converter is performing scan mode A-D conversion causes the operation
being performed to stop. This bit is effective only for scan mode operation, and does not affect single mode
operation even when single and scan modes both are active during special operation mode.
Operation stops immediately after writing to this bit, and the A-D conversion being performed on any channel
is aborted in the middle, without transferring the result to the A-D data register.
If the A-D conversion start bit and A-D conversion stop bit are set to "1" at the same time, the A-D conversion
stop bit has priority.
(7) ADCSTT (A-D Conversion Start) bit (Bit 7)
This bit is used to start scan mode operation of the A-D Converter in software. Only when a software trigger
has been selected with the ADCSEL (A-D conversion start trigger select) bit, setting this bit to "1" causes A-
D conversion to start.
If the A-D conversion start bit and A-D conversion stop bit are set to "1" at the same time, the A-D conversion
stop bit has priority.
If this bit is set to "1" again while performing scan mode conversion, special operation mode “Conversion
restart” is turned on, so that scan mode operation is restarted using the contents set by A-D Scan Mode
Registers 0 and 1.
If this bit is set to "1" again while performing A-D conversion in single mode, special operation mode “Scan
mode start after single mode execution” is turned on, so that scan mode operation starts subsequently after
single mode has finished.
11
11-20
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
11.2.4 A-D Scan Mode Register 1
A-D0 Scan Mode Register 1 (AD0SCM1) <Address: H’0080 0085>
9 1011121314b15b8
ADCSPD ADCSHSL ADSCAN
0000000
ADCSHSPD
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
9 ADCSPD (Note 1) 0: Normal speed R W
A-D conversion speed select bit 1: Double speed
10 ADCSHSL 0: Disable sample-and-hold R W
A-D conversion method select bit 1: Enable sample-and-hold
11 ADCSHSPD (Note 2) 0: Normal sample-and-hold R W
A-D sample-and-hold conversion speed select bit 1: Fast sample-and-hold
12–15 ANSCAN <For write> R W
A-D scan loop select bit ‘B0000–1011 (channels 0–11)
<For read during conversion> (i = 0)
0000: Converting ADiIN0
0001: Converting ADiIN1
0010: Converting ADiIN2
0011: Converting ADiIN3
0100: Converting ADiIN4
0101: Converting ADiIN5
0110: Converting ADiIN6
0111: Converting ADiIN7
1000: Converting ADiIN8
1001: Converting ADiIN9
1010: Converting ADiIN10
1011: Converting ADiIN11
1100: (Note 3)
1101: (Note 3)
1110: (Note 3)
1111: (Note 3)
Note 1: The A-D conversion speed is determined by a combination of ADCSPD, ADCSHSL and ADCSHSPD bits and the A-D
Conversion Speed Control Register ADCVSD bit.
Note 2: Setting of this bit is effective when the sample-and-hold function is enabled by ADCSHSL bit.
Note 3: Because the 32182 has pins for only AD0IN0–AD0IN11, in no case will this bit pattern be read out, providing that the number
of scan channels is correctly set.
A-D Scan Mode Register 1 is used to select operation mode, conversion speed and scan loop when the A-D
Converter is operating in scan mode. The channels selected with the scan loop select bit are scanned sequen-
tially beginning with channel 0 (n-channel scan).
11
11-21
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
(1) ADCSPD (A-D Conversion Speed Select) bit (Bit 9)
This bit selects an A-D conversion speed when the A-D Converter is operating in scan mode. Setting this bit
to "0" selects normal speed, and setting this bit to "1" selects double speed.
(2) ADCSHSL (A-D Conversion Method Select) bit (Bit 10)
This bit enables or disables the sample-and-hold function when the A-D Converter is operating in scan mode.
Setting this bit to "0" disables the sample-and-hold function, and setting this bit to "1" enables the sample-
and-hold function.
(3) ADCSHSPD (A-D Sample-and-Hold Speed Select) bit (Bit 11)
When the A-D Converter’s sample-and-hold function is enabled, this bit selects a conversion speed. When
this bit is "0", the conversion speed is the same as normal A-D conversion speed. When this bit is "1",
conversion is performed at a speed faster than normal A-D conversion speed.
Setting of this bit has no effect if the sample-and-hold function is disabled by setting the ADCSHSL (A-D
conversion method select) bit to "0".
For details about the conversion time, see Section 11.3.4, “Calculating the A-D Conversion Time.”
(4) ANSCAN (A-D Scan Loop Select) bits (Bits 12–15)
The ANSCAN (A-D scan loop select) bits set the channels to be scanned during scan mode of the A-D
Converter.
The ANSCAN (A-D scan loop select) bits when accessed for read during scan operation serve as a status
register indicating the channel being scanned.
The value read from these bits during single mode is always B’0000.
If A-D conversion is stopped by setting A-D Scan Mode Register 0 ADCSTP (A-D conversion stop) bit to "1"
while executing scan mode, the value read from these bits indicates the channel whose A-D conversion has
been canceled.
Also, if read during single mode conversion of special operation mode “Forcible single mode execution dur-
ing scan mode,” the value of these bits indicates the channel whose A-D conversion has been canceled in
the middle of scan.
11
11-22
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
11.2.5 A-D Conversion Speed Control Register
A-D0 Conversion Speed Control Register (AD0CVSCR) <Address: H’0080 0087>
9 1011121314b15b8
ADCVSD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–14 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
15 ADCVSD (Note 1) 0: Slow mode R W
A-D conversion speed control bit 1: Fast mode
Note 1: The A-D conversion speed is determined by a combination of ADCVSD bit and A-D Single Mode Register 1’s relevant bit
during single mode, or a combination of ADCVSD bit and A-D Scan Mode Register 1’s relevant bit during scan mode.
The A-D Conversion Speed Control Register controls the A-D conversion speed during single and scan modes
of the A-D Converter. The A-D conversion speed is determined in combination with A-D Single Mode Register
1's conversion speed select bit (Double/Normal).
11
11-23
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
11.2.6 A-D Disconnection Detection Assist Function Control Register
A-D0 Disconnection Detection Assist Function Control Register (AD0DDACR) <Address: H’0080 0086>
123456b7b0
ADDDAEN
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–6 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
7 ADDDAEN (Note 1) 0: Disable A-D disconnection detection assist function R W
A-D disconnection detection assist function enable bit 1: Enable A-D disconnection detection assist function
Note 1: For the A-D disconnection detection assist function to be enabled, the conversion start state (discharge or precharge) must
be set using the A-D disconnection detection assist method select register after setting the ADDDAEN bit to "1".
The A-D Disconnection Detection Assist Function Control Register is used to enable or disable the content of
the A-D Disconnection Detection Assist Method Select Register.
Note: • If any analog input wiring is disconnected, the conversion result varies depending on the circuits
fitted external to the chip. This function must be fully evaluated in the actual application system
before it can be used.
11
11-24
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
11.2.7 A-D Disconnection Detection Assist Method Select Register
A-D0 Disconnection Detection Assist Method Select Register (AD0DDASEL) <Address: H’0080 008A>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
ADDDA
SEL0 ADDDA
SEL1 ADDDA
SEL2 ADDDA
SEL3 ADDDA
SEL4 ADDDA
SEL6 ADDDA
SEL7 ADDDA
SEL8 ADDDA
SEL9 ADDDA
SEL10 ADDDA
SEL11 ADDDA
SEL12 ADDDA
SEL13 ADDDA
SEL14 ADDDA
SEL15
ADDDA
SEL5
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 ADDDASEL0 0: Discharge before conversion R W
Channel 0 disconnection detection assist method select bit 1: Precharge before conversion
1 ADDDASEL1
Channel 1 disconnection detection assist method select bit
2 ADDDASEL2
Channel 2 disconnection detection assist method select bit
3 ADDDASEL3
Channel 3 disconnection detection assist method select bit
4 ADDDASEL4
Channel 4 disconnection detection assist method select bit
5 ADDDASEL5
Channel 5 disconnection detection assist method select bit
6 ADDDASEL6
Channel 6 disconnection detection assist method select bit
7 ADDDASEL7
Channel 7 disconnection detection assist method select bit
8 ADDDASEL8
Channel 8 disconnection detection assist method select bit
9 ADDDASEL9
Channel 9 disconnection detection assist method select bit
10 ADDDASEL10
Channel 10 disconnection detection assist method select bit
11 ADDDASEL11
Channel 11 disconnection detection assist method select bit
12 ADDDASEL12
Channel 12 disconnection detection assist method select bit
13 ADDDASEL13
Channel 13 disconnection detection assist method select bit
14 ADDDASEL14
Channel 14 disconnection detection assist method select bit
15 ADDDASEL15
Channel 15 disconnection detection assist method select bit
Notes: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
• For these bits to be enabled, the ADDDAEN bit (A-D Disconnection Detection Assist Function Control Register bit 7) must
be set to "1" before setting these bits.
In order to prevent the A-D conversion result from being affected by the analog input voltage leakage from any
preceding channel, the A-D Disconnection Detection Assist Method Select Register is used to control the con-
version start state by selecting whether to discharge or precharge the chopper amp capacitor before starting
regular conversion operation.
11
11-25
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
Figure 11.2.1 shows an example of A-D disconnection detection assist method in which the conversion start
state is set to the AVCC side (i.e., precharge before conversion is selected). Figure 11.2.2 shows an example
of A-D disconnection detection assist method in which the conversion start state is set to the AVSS side (i.e.,
discharge before conversion is selected).
Figure 11.2.1 Example of A-D Disconnection Detection on AVCC Side (Precharge Before Conversion Selected)
Figure 11.2.2 Example of A-D Disconnection Detection on AVSS Side (Discharge Before Conversion Selected)
Analog input
ADiINn
Precharge
Broken wire
R
C
Precharge
control signal
Chopper amp
capacitor
Discharge
control signal
Typical external circuit (Note 1)
On
Off
Note 1: In case of broken wire, the conversion result varies with external circuits.
Therefore, careful evaluation is required before this function can be used.
ADDDAEN
Analog input
ADiINn Discharge
Broken wire RC
Precharge
control signal
Chopper amp
capacitor
Discharge
control signal
Typical external circuit (Note 1)
Off
On
Note 1: In case of broken wire, the conversion result varies with external circuits.
Therefore, careful evaluation is required before this function can be used.
ADDDAEN
11
11-26
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
Disconnection detection voltage (without sample-and-hold)
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
A-D conversion cycle [kHz]
Voltage on disconnected port [mV]
Scan mode: Disconnection detection enabled
Scan mode: Disconnection detection disabled
2900
3100
3300
3500
3700
3900
4100
4300
4500
4700
4900
5100
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
A-D conversion cycle [kHz]
Voltage on disconnected port [mV]
Scan mode: Disconnection detection enabled
Scan mode: Disconnection detection disabled
Disconnection detection voltage (without sample-and-hold)
Figure 11.2.3 A-D Disconnection Detection Assist Data (when Discharge Before Conversion Selected)
Figure 11.2.4 A-D Disconnection Detection Assist Data (when Precharge Before Conversion Selected)
11
11-27
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
11.2.8 A-D Successive Approximation Register
A-D0 Successive Approximation Register(AD0SAR) <Address: H’0080 0088>
b01234567891011121314b15
ADSAR
0
0
0
0
0
??????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–5 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
6–15 ADSAR
A-D successive approximation value (A-D conversion mode)
RW
A-D successive approximation value/comparison value
Comparison value (comparator mode)
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
The A-D Successive Approximation Register (ADSAR) is used to read the conversion result of the A-D Con-
verter when operating in A-D conversion mode or write a comparison value when operating in comparator mode.
In A-D conversion mode, the successive approximation method is used to perform A-D conversion. With this
method, the reference voltage VREF and analog input voltages are sequentially compared bitwise beginning
with the high-order bit, and the comparison result is set in the A-D Successive Approximation Register (ADSAR)
bits 6–15. When the A-D conversion has finished, the value of this register is transferred to the 10-bit A-D Data
Register (ADDTn) corresponding to each converted channel. When this register is accessed for read in the
middle of A-D conversion, the value read from the register indicates the intermediate result of conversion.
In comparator mode, this register is used to write a comparison value (the voltage with which to “comparate”).
Simultaneously with a write to this register, the A-D Converter starts comparing the voltage on the analog input
pin selected with A-D Single Mode Register 1 and the value written in this register. After comparate operation,
the result is stored in the A-D Comparate Data Register (ADCMP).
Use the calculation formula shown below to find the comparison value to be written to the A-D Successive
Approximation Register (ADSAR) during comparator mode.
Comparison value = H’3FF x Comparate comparison voltage [V]
VREF0 input voltage [V]
11
11-28
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
11.2.9 A-D Comparate Data Register
A-D0 Comparate Data Register (AD0CMP) <Address: H’0080 008C>
b01234567891011121314b15
AD
CMP0 AD
CMP1 AD
CMP2 AD
CMP3 AD
CMP4 AD
CMP6 AD
CMP7 AD
CMP8 AD
CMP9 AD
CMP10 AD
CMP11 AD
CMP12 AD
CMP13 AD
CMP14 AD
CMP15
AD
CMP5
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–11 ADCMP0–ADCMP11 (Note 1) 0: Analog input voltage > comparison voltage R
A-D comparate result flag 1: Analog input voltage < comparison voltage
12–15 (Note 2) R–
Note 1: During comparator mode, the bits in this register correspond one for one to channels 0–11.
Note 2: Because the 32182 does not have the corresponding analog pins, the values read out from these bits are undefined.
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
When comparator mode is selected using the A-D Single Mode Register 1 ADSMSL (A-D conversion mode
select) bit, the selected analog input voltage is compared with the value written to the A-D Successive Approxi-
mation Register and the result is stored in the corresponding bit of this comparate data register.
The bit or flag in this register is "0" when analog input voltage > comparison voltage, or "1" when analog input
voltage < comparison voltage.
11
11-29
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2.10 10-bit A-D Data Registers
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 0(AD0DT0) <Address: H’0080 0090>
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 1(AD0DT1) <Address: H’0080 0092>
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 2(AD0DT2) <Address: H’0080 0094>
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 3(AD0DT3) <Address: H’0080 0096>
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 4(AD0DT4) <Address: H’0080 0098>
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 5(AD0DT5) <Address: H’0080 009A>
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 6(AD0DT6) <Address: H’0080 009C>
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 7(AD0DT7) <Address: H’0080 009E>
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 8(AD0DT8) <Address: H’0080 00A0>
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 9(AD0DT9) <Address: H’0080 00A2>
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 10(AD0DT10) <Address: H’0080 00A4>
10-bit A-D0 Data Register 11(AD0DT11) <Address: H’0080 00A6>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
AD0DT0-AD0DT11
0
0
0
0
0
??????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–5 No function assigned. 0–
6–15 AD0DT0-AD0DT11 10-bit A-D conversion result R
10-bit A-D data
Note: • This register must always be accessed in halfwords.
During single mode, the 10-bit A-D Data Registers are used to store the result of A-D conversion performed on
each corresponding channel.
During single-shot or continuous scan mode, the content of the A-D Successive Approximation Register is
transferred to the 10-bit A-D Data Register for the corresponding channel when A-D conversion on each channel
has finished. Each 10-bit A-D Data Register retains the last conversion result until they receive the next conver-
sion result transferred, allowing the content to be read out at any time.
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
11
11-30
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.2.11 8-bit A-D Data Registers
8-bit A-D0 Data Register 0(AD08DT0) <Address: H’0080 00D1>
8-bit A-D0 Data Register 1(AD08DT1) <Address: H’0080 00D3>
8-bit A-D0 Data Register 2(AD08DT2) <Address: H’0080 00D5>
8-bit A-D0 Data Register 3(AD08DT3) <Address: H’0080 00D7>
8-bit A-D0 Data Register 4(AD08DT4) <Address: H’0080 00D9>
8-bit A-D0 Data Register 5(AD08DT5) <Address: H’0080 00DB>
8-bit A-D0 Data Register 6(AD08DT6) <Address: H’0080 00DD>
8-bit A-D0 Data Register 7(AD08DT7) <Address: H’0080 00DF>
8-bit A-D0 Data Register 8(AD08DT8) <Address: H’0080 00E1>
8-bit A-D0 Data Register 9(AD08DT9) <Address: H’0080 00E3>
8-bit A-D0 Data Register 10(AD08DT10) <Address: H’0080 00E5>
8-bit A-D0 Data Register 11(AD08DT11) <Address: H’0080 00E7>
9 1011121314b15b8 AD08DT0-AD08DT15
????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–15 AD08DT0-AD08DT11 8-bit A-D conversion result R
8-bit A-D data
During single mode, the 8-bit A-D Data Registers are used to store the result of A-D conversion performed on
each corresponding channel.
During single-shot or continuous scan mode, the content of the A-D Successive Approximation Register is
transferred to the 8-bit A-D Data Register for the corresponding channel when A-D conversion on each channel
has finished. Each 8-bit A-D Data Register retains the last conversion result until they receive the next conver-
sion result transferred, allowing the content to be read out at any time.
11.2 A-D Converter Related Registers
11
11-31
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.3 Functional Description of A-D Converter
11.3.1 How to Find Analog Input Voltages
The A-D Converter performs A-D conversion using a 10-bit successive approximation method. The equation
shown below is used to calculate the actual analog input voltage from the digital value obtained by executing A-
D conversion.
Analog input voltage [v] = A-D conversion result x VREF input voltage [V]
1,024
The A-D Converter is a 10-bit converter, providing a resolution of 1,024 discrete voltage levels. Because the
reference voltage for the A-D Converter is the voltage applied to the VREF pin, make sure that an exact and
stable constant-voltage power supply is connected to VREF. Also make sure the analog circuit power supply
and ground (AVCC, AVSS) are separated from those of the digital circuit, with sufficient noise prevention mea-
sures incorporated.
For details about the conversion accuracy, see Section 11.3.5, “Accuracy of A-D Conversion.”
11.3 Functional Description of A-D Converter
Figure 11.3.1 Outline Block Diagram of the Successive Approximation-type A-D Converter Unit
ADiIN0
ADiIN1
ADiIN2
ADiIN3
ADiIN4
ADiIN5
ADiIN6
ADiIN7
ADiIN8
ADiIN9
ADiIN10
ADiIN11
Selector
AVSSi
VREFi
10-bit A-Di Successive
Approximation Register
(ADiSAR)
10-bit
A-Di Data Register
A-Di Comparate
Data Register
A-D Control Circuit
10-bit D-A Converter
Comparator
ADiCMP
ADiDT0–11
Successive Approximation-type
A-D Converter Unit
AVCCi
Vref
VIN
i = 0
Sample-and-Hold
Control Circuit
11
11-32
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.3.2 A-D Conversion by Successive Approximation Method
The A-D Converter use an A-D conversion start trigger (software or hardware) as they start A-D conversion.
Once A-D conversion begins, the following operation is automatically performed.
1. During single mode, A-D Single Mode Register 0’s A-D conversion/comparate completion bit is cleared to "0".
During scan mode, A-D Scan Mode Register 0’s A-D conversion completion bit is cleared to "0".
2. The content of the A-D Successive Approximation Register is cleared to H’0000.
3. The A-D Successive Approximation Register’s most significant bit (bit 6) is set to "1".
4. The comparison voltage, Vref (Note 1), is fed from the D-A Converter into the comparator.
5. The comparison voltage, Vref, and the analog input voltage, VIN, are compared, and the comparison result
will be stored in bit 6.
If Vref < VIN, then bit 6 = "1"
If Vref > VIN, then bit 6 = "0"
6. Operations in 3 through 5 above are executed for all other bits from bit 7 to bit 15.
7. The value stored in the A-D Successive Approximation Register by the time comparison for bit 15 has finished
is held in it as the A-D conversion result.
11.3 Functional Description of A-D Converter
1st comparison
b6 7 8 9 1011121314b15
1000000000
n9100000000
n9n810000000
n9 n8 n7 n6 n5 n4 n3 n2 n1 1
2nd comparison
3rd comparison
1
0th comparison
Conversion
completed
n9 n8 n7 n6 n5 n4 n3 n2 n1 n0
Result of 1st comparison
Result of 2nd comparison
If Vref > VIN, then nX = 0
If Vref < VIN, then nX = 1
A-D Successive Approximation Register (ADiSAR) i = 0
Figure 11.3.2 Changes of the A-D Successive Approximation Register during A-D Convert Operation
Note 1: The comparison voltage, Vref (the voltage fed from the D-A Converter into the comparator), is
determined according to changes of the A-D Successive Approximation Register content. Shown
below are the equations used to calculate the comparison voltage, Vref.
• If the A-D Successive Approximation Register content = 0
Vref [V] = 0
• If the A-D Successive Approximation Register content = 1 to 1,023
Vref [V] = (reference voltage VREF / 1,024) × (A-D Successive Approximation Register content – 0.5)
11
11-33
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.3 Functional Description of A-D Converter
The conversion result is stored in the 10-bit A-D Data Register (AD0DTn) corresponding to each converted
channel. There is also an 8-bit A-D Data Register (AD08DTn) for each channel, from which the 8 high-order bits
of the 10-bit conversion result can be read out.
The following shows the procedure for A-D conversion by a successive approximation method in each operation mode.
(1) Single mode
The convert operation stops when comparison for the A-D Successive Approximation Register bit 15 is
completed. The content (A-D conversion result) of the A-D Successive Approximation Register is transferred
to the 10-bit A-D Data Registers 0–11 for the converted channel.
(2) Single-shot scan mode
When comparison for the A-D Successive Approximation Register bit 15 on a specified channel is completed, the
content of the A-D Successive Approximation Register is transferred to the corresponding 10-bit A-D Data Regis-
ters 0–11, and the convert operations in steps 2 to 7 above are reexecuted for the next channel to be converted.
In single-shot scan mode, the convert operation stops when A-D conversion in one specified scan loop is completed.
(3) Continuous scan mode
When comparison for the A-D Successive Approximation Register bit 15 on a specified channel is completed, the
content of the A-D Successive Approximation Register is transferred to the corresponding 10-bit A-D Data Regis-
ters 0–11, and the convert operations in steps 2 to 7 above are reexecuted for the next channel to be converted.
In continuous scan mode, the convert operation is executed continuously until scan operation is forcibly termi-
nated by setting the A-D conversion stop bit (Scan Mode Register 0 bit 6) to "1".
11.3.3 Comparator Operation
When comparator mode (single mode only) is selected, the A-D Converter functions as a comparator which
compares analog input voltages with the comparison voltage that is set by software.
When a comparison value is written to the successive approximation register, the A-D Converter starts
“comparating” the analog input voltage selected by the Single Mode Register 1 analog input select bit with the
value written into the successive approximation register. Once comparate begins, the following operation is
automatically executed.
1. The A-D Single Mode Register 0 or A-D Scan Mode Register 0 A-D conversion/comparate completion bit
is cleared to "0".
2. The comparison voltage, Vref (Note 1), is fed from the D-A Converter into the comparator.
3. The comparison voltage, Vref, and the analog input voltage, VIN, are compared, and the comparison
result will be stored in the comparate result flag for the corresponding channel.
If Vref < VIN, then the comparate result flag = 0
If Vref > VIN, then the comparate result flag = 1
4. The comparate operation is stopped after storing the comparison result.
The comparison result is stored in the A-D Comparate Data Register (AD0CMP)’s corresponding bit.
Note 1: The comparison voltage, Vref (the voltage fed from the D-A Converter into the comparator), is
determined according to changes of the A-D Successive Approximation Register content. Shown
below are the equations used to calculate the comparison voltage, Vref.
• If the A-D Successive Approximation Register content = 0
Vref [V] = 0
• If the A-D Successive Approximation Register content = 1 to 1,023
Vref [V] = (reference voltage VREF / 1,024) x (A-D Successive Approximation Register content – 0.5)
11
11-34
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.3 Functional Description of A-D Converter
11.3.4 Calculating the A-D Conversion Time
The A-D conversion time is expressed by the sum of dummy cycle time and actual execution cycle time. The
following shows each time factor necessary to calculate the conversion time.
1. Start dummy time
A time from when the CPU executed the A-D conversion start instruction to when the A-D Converter
starts A-D conversion
2. A-D conversion execution cycle time
If sample-and-hold is enabled, the sampling time is included in this execution cycle time.
3. Comparate execution cycle time
4. End dummy time
A time from when the A-D Converter has finished A-D conversion to when the CPU can stably read out
the conversion result from the A-D data register.
5. Scan to scan dummy time
A time during single-shot or continuous scan mode from when the A-D Converter has finished A-D
conversion on a channel to when it starts A-D conversion on the next channel.
The equation to calculate the A-D conversion time is as follows:
A-D conversion time = Start dummy time + Execution cycle time
(+ Scan to scan dummy time + Execution cycle time
+ Scan to scan dummy time + Execution cycle time
+ Scan to scan dummy time .... + Execution cycle time)
+ End dummy time
Note: • Enclosed in ( ) are the conversion time required for the second and subsequent channels
to be converted in scan mode.
(1) Calculating the conversion time during A-D conversion mode
The following schematically shows the method for calculating the conversion time during A-D conversion mode.
Start dummy Execution cycle
A-D conversion
start trigger
Convert operation
starts Transferred to the
A-D data register
<Scan mode>
End dummy
Start dummy Execution cycle Execution cycle
<Single mode>
Completed
Execution cycle End dummy
Scan to
scan dummy
Scan to
scan dummy
(Channel 0) (Channel 1)
(Last channel)
Figure 11.3.3 Conceptual Diagram of A-D Conversion Time
11
11-35
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.3 Functional Description of A-D Converter
Table 11.3.1 Conversion Clock Periods in A-D Conversion Mode Unit: BCLK
Conversion speed Start dummy (Note 1) Execution cycle End dummy Scan to scan dummy (Note 2)
Slow mode Normal speed 4 294 1 4
Double speed 4 168 1 4
Fast mode Normal speed 4 126 1 4
Double speed 4 84 1 4
Note 1: The same applies to both software and hardware triggers.
Note 2: Only during scan operation, execution time per channel is added.
(2) Calculating the conversion time when sample-and-hold is enabled
The following schematically shows the method for calculating the conversion time when the sample-and-hold
function is enabled.
Start dummy
Execution cycle
A-D conversion
start trigger
Convert operation
starts
End dummy
Completed
Sampling
time
Figure 11.3.4 Conceptual Diagram of A-D Conversion Time when Sample-and-Hold is Enabled
Table 11.3.2 Conversion Clock Periods during Normal Sample-and-Hold Mode Unit: BCLK
Conversion speed Start dummy (Note 1) Execution cycle End dummy Scan to scan dummy (Note 2)
Slow mode Normal speed 4 294 1 4
Double speed 4 168 1 4
Fast mode Normal speed 4 126 1 4
Double speed 4 84 1 4
Note 1: The same applies to both software and hardware triggers.
Note 2: Only during scan operation, execution time per channel is added.
Table 11.3.3 Conversion Clock Periods during Fast Sample-and-Hold Mode Unit: BCLK
Conversion speed Start dummy (Note 1) Execution cycle End dummy Scan to scan dummy (Note 2)
Slow mode Normal speed 4 186 1 4
Double speed 4 96 1 4
Fast mode Normal speed 4 90 1 4
Double speed 4 48 1 4
Note 1: The same applies to both software and hardware triggers.
Note 2: Only during scan operation, execution time per channel is added.
11
11-36
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Start dummy Execution cycle
A-D conversion
start trigger Convert operation
starts Transferred to the
comparate data register
End dummy
Completed
11.3 Functional Description of A-D Converter
Figure 11.3.5 Conceptual Diagram of A-D Conversion Time during Comparator Mode
Table 11.3.4 Conversion Clock Periods during Comparator Mode Unit: BCLK
Conversion speed Start dummy Execution cycle End dummy
Slow mode Normal speed 4 42 1
Double speed 4 24 1
Fast mode Normal speed 4 18 1
Double speed 4 12 1
(4) A-D conversion time
A total A-D conversion time in various modes are shown in the table below.
Table 11.3.5 A-D Conversion Time (Total Time) Unit: BCLK
Conversion start method Conversion speed Conversion mode (Note 1) Conversion time When fast sample-
and-hold enabled
Software and Normal speed Single mode 299 191
hardware triggers n-channel single-shot scan/ (298 × n)+1 (190 × n)+1
(Note 2) continuous scan mode
Slow Comparator mode 47 47
Mode Double speed Single mode 173 101
n-channel single-shot scan/ (172 × n)+1 (100 × n)+1
continuous scan mode
Comparator mode 29 29
Normal speed Single mode 131 9 5
n-channel single-shot scan/ (130 × n)+1 (94 × n)+1
continuous scan mode
Fast Comparator mode 23 23
Mode Double speed Single mode 89 53
n-channel single-shot scan/ (88 × n)+1 (52 × n)+1
continuous scan mode
Comparator mode 17 17
Note 1: For single mode and comparator mode, this indicates an A-D conversion or comparate time per channel. For single-
shot and continuous scan modes, this indicates an A-D conversion time per scan loop.
Note 2: This indicates a time from when a register write cycle has finished to when an A-D conversion completion interrupt
request is generated, or a time from when an event bus or other MJT event has occurred to when an A-D conversion
completion interrupt request is generated.
(3) Calculating the conversion time during comparator mode
The following schematically shows the method for calculating the conversion time during comparator mode.
11
11-37
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.3.5 Accuracy of A-D Conversion
The accuracy of the A-D Converter is indicated by an absolute accuracy. The absolute accuracy refers to a
difference expressed by LSB between the output code obtained by A-D converting the analog input voltages and
the output code expected for an A-D converter with ideal characteristics. The analog input voltages used during
accuracy measurement are the midpoint values of the voltage width in which an A-D converter with ideal char-
acteristics produces the same output code. If VREF = 5.12 V, for example, the width of 1 LSB for a 10-bit A-D
converter is 5 mV, so that 0 mV, 5 mV, 10 mV, 15 mV, 20 mV, 25 mV and so on are selected as midpoints of the
analog input voltage.
If an A-D converter is said to have the absolute accuracy of ±2 LSB, it means that if the input voltage is 25 mV,
for example, the output code expected for an A-D converter with ideal characteristics is H’005, and the actual A-
D conversion result is in the range of H’003 to H’007. Note that the absolute accuracy includes zero and full-
scale errors.
When actually using the A-D Converter, the analog input voltages are in the range of AVSS to VREF. Note,
however, that low VREF voltages result in a poor resolution. Note also that output codes for the analog input
voltages from VREF to AVCC are always H’3FF.
H'000
H'001
H'002
H'003
H'3FE
H'3FF
A-D conversion result (hexadecimal)
Analog input voltage [V]
VREF
1024 ×1
Ideal A-D conversion characteristics
A-D conversion characteristics with infinite resolution
0VREF
1024 × 2VREF
1024 × 3VREF
1024 × 1022
VREF
1024 × 1023 VREF
1024 × 1024
Figure 11.3.6 Ideal A-D Conversion Characteristics Relative to the 10-bit A-D Converter’s Analog Input Voltages
11.3 Functional Description of A-D Converter
11
11-38
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.3 Functional Description of A-D Converter
H'000
H'001
H'002
H'003
H'004
H'005
H'006
Output code (hexadecimal)
0
Analog input voltage [mV]
Ideal A-D conversion characteristics
A-D conversion characteristics
with infinite resolution
510152025303540455055
H'007
H'008
H'009
H'00A
H'00B
+2 LSB
-2 LSB
Figure 11.3.7 Absolute Accuracy of A-D Converter
11
11-39
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.4 Inflow Current Bypass Circuit
11.4 Inflow Current Bypass Circuit
If when the A-D Converter is A-D converting a selected analog input an overvoltage exceeding the converter’s
absolute maximum rating is applied to any unselected analog input, the selector for the unselected analog input is
inadvertently turned on by that overvoltage. This causes current to leak to the selected analog input, and the
accuracy of the A-D conversion result is thereby deteriorated.
The Inflow Current Bypass Circuit fixes the internal signals of unselected analog inputs to the GND level, so that
when an overvoltage is applied, this circuit lets the current flow into the GND and prevents it from leaking to the
selected analog input. That way, the accuracy of the A-D conversion result is prevented from being deteriorated by
extreme voltages.
This circuit is always active while the A-D Converter is operating, and does not need to be controlled in software.
Unselected
channel
Selected
channel
To the internal logic
of the A-D Converte
r
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Fixed to GND level
External input
latched into
Assist circuit
Figure 11.4.1 Configuration of the Inflow Current Bypass Circuit
Figure 11.4.2 Example of an Inflow Current Bypass Circuit where VCCE + 0.7 V or More is Applied
Unselected channel
Selected channel
To the internal logic
of the A-D Converte
r
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Assist circuit
VCCE + 0.7 V or more
Leakage current
generated
Sensor input
Leakage current
generated
Unaffected
by leakage
11
11-40
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.4 Inflow Current Bypass Circuit
Figure 11.4.3 Example of an Inflow Current Bypass Circuit where GND – 0.7 V or Less is Applied
Table 11.4.1 Accuracy Errors (Actual Performance Values) when Current is Injected into AD0IN0
Note 1: The conversion accuracy is not affected unless the injection current is greater than 1 mA.
Unselected channel
Selected channel
To the internal logic
of the A-D Converte
r
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Assist circuit
GND - 0.7V or less
Leakage current
generated
Sensor input
Unaffected by
leakage
Leakage current
generated
A c curac y error on overcurrent i nj ected ports (Unit : LSB)
AD0IN0 AD0IN1 AD0IN2 AD0IN3 AD0IN4
10mA 0 0 0
0
9mA 000
0
8mA 000
0
7mA 000
0
6mA 000
0
5mA 000
0
4mA 000
0
3mA 000
0
2mA 000
0
1mA 000
0
0mA 000
0
-1mA 000
0
-2mA -100
0
-3mA -100
0
-4mA -100
0
-5mA -2 -1 0
0
-6mA -3 -1 0
0
-7mA -3 -1 0
0
-8mA -3 -1 0
0
-9mA -4 -1 0
0
-10mA -5 -1 0
0
Analog input pin
Injection
current
(Note 1)
AD0IN5 AD0IN6 AD0IN7 AD0IN8 AD0IN9 AD0IN10 AD0IN11
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
000000
0
11
11-41
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 11.5.1 Internal Equivalent Circuit of the Analog Input Part
11.5 Precautions on Using A-D Converter
• Forcible termination during scan operation
If A-D conversion is forcibly terminated by setting the A-D conversion stop bit (AD0CSTP) to "1" during scan
mode operation and the A-D data register for the channel that was in the middle of conversion is accessed for
read, the read value shows the last conversion result that had been transferred to the data register before the
conversion was forcibly terminated.
• Modification of the A-D converter related registers
If the content of any register—A-D Conversion Interrupt Control Register, Single or Scan Mode Registers or A-D
Successive Approximation Register, except the A-D conversion stop bit—is modified in the middle of A-D conver-
sion, the conversion result cannot be guaranteed. Therefore, do not modify the contents of these registers while A-
D conversion is in progress, or be sure to restart A-D conversion if register contents have been modified.
• Handling of analog input signals
When using the A-D Converter with its sample-and-hold function disabled, make sure the analog input level is
fixed during A-D conversion.
• A-D conversion completed bit read timing
To read the A-D conversion completed bit (Single Mode Register 0 bit 5 or Scan Mode Register 0 bit 5) immediately after A-D
conversion has started, be sure to adjust the timing 2 BCLK periods by, for example, inserting a NOP instruction before read.
• Regarding the analog input pins
Figure 11.5.1 shows the internal equivalent circuit of the A-D Converter’s analog input part. To obtain accurate
A-D conversion results, make sure the internal capacitor C2 of the A-D conversion circuit is charged up within a
predetermined time (sampling time). To meet this sampling time requirement, it is recommended that a stabiliz-
ing capacitor C1 be connected external to the chip.
The method for determining the necessary value of this external stabilizing capacitor with respect to the output
impedance of an analog output device is described below. Also, an explanation is made of the case where the
output impedance of an analog output device is low and the external stabilizing capacitor C1 is unnecessary.
• Rated value of the absolute accuracy
The rated value of the absolute accuracy is the actual performance value of the microcomputer alone, with
influences of the power supply wiring and noise on the board not taken into account. When designing the
application system, use caution for the board layout by, for example, separating the analog circuit power supply
and ground (AVCC, AVSS and VREF) from those of the digital circuit and incorporating measures to prevent the
analog input pins from being affected by noise, etc. from other digital signals.
11.5 Precautions on Using A-D Converter
Comparator
Inside the microcomputer
10-bit A-D Successive
Approximation Register (ADiSAR)
10-bit D-A Converter
VREF V2
C2
Cin : input pin capacitance (approx. 10 pF)
R2 : parasitic resistance of the
selector (1-2 K)
C2 : comparator capacitance
(approx. 2.9 pF)
Selector
R2
ii1 i2
ADIN n
C1
E
R1
C1 : parasitic capacitance of the board
+ stabilizing capacitance
R1 : resistance of analog output device
Analog output device
Cin
E : voltage of analog output device
V2 : voltage across C2
VREF : analog reference voltage
11
11-42
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Thus, for a 10-bit resolution A-D Converter where C2 = 2.9 pF, C1 is 0.06 µF or more. Use this value for
reference when setting up C1.
(b) Maximum value of the output impedance R1 when C1 is not added
If the external capacitor C1 in Figure 11.5.1 is not used, examination must be made to see if the analog input
device can fully charge C2 within a predetermined time. First, the equation to find i2 when C1 in Figure 11.5.1
does not exist is shown below.
i2 = C2(E - V2) ×exp { - t } ------------------------ Eq. B-1
Cin×R1+C2(R1+R2) Cin×R1+C2(R1+R2)
11.5 Precautions on Using A-D Converter
(a) Example for calculating the external stabilizing capacitor C1 (addition of this capacitor is recommended)
Assuming the R1 in Figure 11.5.1 is infinitely large and that the current necessary to charge the internal
capacitor C2 is supplied from C1, if the potential fluctuation, Vp, caused by capacitance division of C1 and C2
is to be within 0.1 LSB, then what amount of capacitance C1 should have. For a 10-bit A-D Converter where
VREF is 5.12 V, 1 LSB determination voltage = 5.12 V / 1,024 = 5 mV. The potential fluctuation of 0.1 LSB
means a 0.5 mV fluctuation.
Vp is also obtained by the equation below:
The relationship between the capacitance division of C1 and C2 and the potential fluctuation,
Vp, is obtained by the equation below:
C2
C1 + C2
Vp = × (E - V2) Eq. A-1
1
2
Vp = Vp1 × < Eq. A-2
i
VREF
10 × 2
×
x - 1
i = 0
where Vp1 = potential fluctuation in the first A-D conversion performed
and x = 10 for a 10-bit resolution A-D converter
When Eq. A-1 and Eq. A-2 are solved, the following results:
E - V2
Vp1
C1 = C2 { - 1 } Eq. A-3
1
2
C1 > C2 {10 × 2
×
- 1 } Eq. A-4
i
x - 1
i = 0
×
ADINi
Conversion time
for the first bit
Sampling time Comparison
time Repeated (10 times) for 10 bits
Second bit
Sampling time
When sample-and-hold
is disabled
* When sample-and-hold is enabled, the analog input is sampled for only the first bit.
Figure 11.5.2 A-D Conversion Timing Diagram
Figure 11.5.2 shows an A-D conversion timing diagram. C2 must be charged up within the sampling time
shown in this diagram. When the sample-and-hold function is disabled, the sampling time for the second and
subsequent bits is about half that of the first bit.
The sampling times at the respective conversion speeds are listed in the table 11.5.1. Note that when the
sample-and-hold function is enabled, the analog input is sampled for only the first bit.
11
11-43
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
11.5 Precautions on Using A-D Converter
Table 11.5.1 Sampling Time (in Which C2 Needs to Be Charged)
Conversion start method Conversion speed Sampling time for the first bit Sampling time for the second and subsequent bits
Single mode Slow mode Normal speed 27.5BCLK 13.5BCLK
(when sample-and Double speed 15.5BCLK 7.5BCLK
-hold disabled) Fast mode Normal speed 11.5BCLK 5.5BCLK
Double speed 7.5BCLK 3.5BCLK
Single mode Slow mode Normal speed 27.5BCLK
(when sample-and Double speed 15.5BCLK
-hold enabled) Fast mode Normal speed 11.5BCLK
Double speed 7.5BCLK
Comparator mode Slow mode Normal speed 27.5BCLK
Double speed 15.5BCLK
Fast mode Normal speed 11.5BCLK
Double speed 7.5BCLK
Therefore, the time in which C2 needs to be charged is found from Eq. B-1, as follows:
Sampling time (in which C2 needs to be charged) > Cin × R1 + C2(R1 + R2)--- Eq. B2
Thus, the maximum value of R1 can be obtained as a criterion from the equation below. Note, however, that
for single mode (when sample-and-hold is disabled), the sampling time for the second and subsequent bits
(C2 charging time) must be applied.
C2 charging time - C2 × R2
R1 < Cin + C2
11
11-44
A-D Converter
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
This page is blank for reasons of layout.
11.5 Precautions on Using A-D Converter
CHAPTER 12
SERIAL I/O
12.1 Outline of Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
12.3 Transmit Operation in CSIO Mode
12.4 Receive Operation in CSIO Mode
12.5 Precautions on Using CSIO Mode
12.6 Transmit Operation in UART Mode
12.7 Receive Operation in UART Mode
12.8 Fixed Period Clock Output Function
12.9 Precautions on Using UART Mode
12
12-2
Serial I/O
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.1 Outline of Serial I/O
The 32182 contains a total of four serial I/O channels, SIO0–SIO3. Channels SIO0 and SIO1 can be selected
between CSIO mode (clock-synchronous serial I/O) and UART mode (clock-asynchronous serial I/O). Channels
SIO2 and SIO3 are UART mode only.
• CSIO mode (clock-synchronous serial I/O)
Communication is performed synchronously with a transfer clock, using the same clock on both transmit and
receive sides. The transfer data is 8 bits long (fixed).
• UART mode (clock-asynchronous serial I/O)
Communication is performed at any transfer rate in any transfer data format. The transfer data length can be
selected from 7, 8 and 9 bits.
Channels SIO0–SIO3 each have a transmit DMA transfer and a receive DMA transfer request. These serial
I/Os, when combined with the internal DMA Controller (DMAC), allow serial communication to be performed
at high speed, as well as reduce the data communication load of the CPU.
Serial I/O is outlined below.
Table 12.1.1 Outline of Serial I/O
Item Description
Number of channels CSIO mode/UART mode : 2 channels (SIO0, SIO1)
UART only : 2 channels (SIO2, SIO3)
Clock During CSIO mode : Internal clock or external clock as selected (Note 1)
During UART mode : Internal clock only
Transfer mode Transmit half-duplex, receive half-duplex, transmit/receive full-duplex
BRG count source f(BCLK), f(BCLK)/8, f(BCLK)/32, f(BLCK)/256 (Note 2)
(when internal clock selected) f(BCLK): Peripheral clock operating frequency
Data format CSIO mode : Data length = 8 bits (fixed)
Order of transfer = LSB first (fixed)
UART mode: Start bit = 1 bit
Character length = 7, 8 or 9 bits
Parity bit = Added (odd, even) or not added
Stop bit = 1 or 2 bits
Order of transfer = LSB first (fixed)
Baud rate CSIO mode : 152 bits/sec to 2 Mbits/sec (when f(BCLK) = 20 MHz)
UART mode : 19 bits/sec to 156 Kbits/sec (when f(BCLK) = 20 MHz)
Error detection CSIO mode : Overrun error only
UART mode : Overrun, parity and framing errors
(Occurrence of any of these errors is indicated by an error sum bit)
Fixed period clock output function When using SIO0 and SIO1 as UART, this function outputs a divided-by-2BRG clock
from the SCLK pin.
Note 1: The maximum input frequency of an external clock during CSIO mode is f(BCLK)/16.
Note 2: If f(BCLK) is selected as the count source, the BRG set value is subject to limitations.
12.1 Outline of Serial I/O
12
12-3
Serial I/O
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Table 12.1.2 Interrupt Generation Functions of Serial I/O
Serial I/O Interrupt Request Source ICU Interrupt Sources
SIO0 transmit buffer empty or transmission finished SIO0 transmit interrupt
SIO0 reception finished or receive error SIO0 receive interrupt
SIO1 transmit buffer empty or transmission finished SIO1 transmit interrupt
SIO1 reception finished or receive error SIO1 receive interrupt
SIO2 transmit buffer empty or transmission finished SIO2,3 transmit/receive interrupt (group interrupt)
SIO2 reception finished or receive error SIO2,3 transmit/receive interrupt (group interrupt)
SIO3 transmit buffer empty or transmission finished SIO2,3 transmit/receive interrupt (group interrupt)
SIO3 reception finished or receive error SIO2,3 transmit/receive interrupt (group interrupt)
Note: • The transmission-finished interrupt is effective when the internal clock is selected in UART or CSIO mode.
Table 12.1.3 DMA Transfer Request Generation Functions of Serial I/O
Serial I/O DMA Transfer Request DMAC Input Channels
SIO0 transmit buffer empty DMA3, DMA4
SIO0 reception finished DMA4
SIO1 transmit buffer empty DMA6
SIO1 reception finished DMA3, DMA6
SIO2 transmit buffer empty DMA7
SIO2 reception finished DMA5
SIO3 transmit buffer empty DMA7, DMA9
SIO3 reception finished DMA8
12.1 Outline of Serial I/O
12
12-4
Serial I/O
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SCLKI0/SCLKO0
BCLK,
BCLK/8,
BCLK/32,
BCLK/256 Baud Rate
Generator
(BRG)
BCLK
(set value + 1)
1
Internal data bus
CSIO mode
When internal clock selected
CSIO
mode
UART
mode
When internal clock selected
1/16
1/2
Clock
Divider
RXD0
TXD0 Receive interrupt request
Transmit/
Receive
Control
Circuit
SIO0 Transmit Buffer Register
SIO0 Transmit Shift Register
Receive DMA transfer request
Transmit interrupt request
Transmit DMA transfer request
To DMA3, DMA4
SIO0 Receive Shift Register
SIO0 Receive Buffer Register
When external clock selected
When UART mode selected
Notes: • When BCLK is selected, the BRG set value is subject to limitations.
• SIO2 and SIO3 do not have the SCLKI/SCLKO function.
SCLKI1/SCLKO1
To DMA6
To the Interrupt
Controller (ICU)
SIO0
SIO1
SIO2
SIO3
RXD1
TXD1 Transmit/
Receive
Control
Circuit
SIO1 Transmit Shift Register
SIO1 Receive Shift Register
To DMA7
RXD2
TXD2 Transmit/
Receive
Control
Circuit
SIO2 Transmit Shift Register
SIO2 Receive Shift Register
To DMA7, DMA9
RXD3
TXD3 Transmit/
Receive
Control
Circuit
SIO3 Transmit Shift Register
SIO3 Receive Shift Register
Receive interrupt request
Receive DMA transfer request
Transmit interrupt request
Transmit DMA transfer request
Receive interrupt request
Receive DMA transfer request
Transmit interrupt request
Transmit DMA transfer request
Receive interrupt request
Receive DMA transfer request
Transmit interrupt request
Transmit DMA transfer request
To the Interrupt
Controller (ICU)
To DMA8
To DMA5
To DMA3, DMA6
To DMA4
To the Interrupt
Controller (ICU)
Figure 12.1.1 Block Diagram of SIO0–SIO3
12.1 Outline of Serial I/O
12
12-5
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
Shown below is a serial I/O related register map.
Serial I/O Related Register Map
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 0100 SIO23 Interrupt Request Status Register SIO03 Interrupt Request Enable Register 12-9
(SI23STAT) (SI03EN) 12-10
H'0080 0102 SIO03 Interrupt Source Select Register (Use inhibited area) 12-11
(SI03SEL)
| (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0110 SIO0 Transmit Control Register SIO0 Transmit/Receive Mode Register 12-13
(S0TCNT) (S0MOD) 12-14
H'0080 0112 SIO0 Transmit Buffer Register 12-17
(S0TXB)
H'0080 0114 SIO0 Receive Buffer Register 12-18
(S0RXB)
H'0080 0116 SIO0 Receive Control Register SIO0 Baud Rate Register 12-19
(S0RCNT) (S0BAUR) 12-22
| (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0120 SIO1 Transmit Control Register SIO1 Transmit/Receive Mode Register 12-13
(S1TCNT) (S1MOD) 12-14
H'0080 0122 SIO1 Transmit Buffer Register 12-17
(S1TXB)
H'0080 0124 SIO1 Receive Buffer Register 12-18
(S1RXB)
H'0080 0126 SIO1 Receive Control Register SIO1 Baud Rate Register 12-19
(S1RCNT) (S1BAUR) 12-22
| (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0130 SIO2Transmit Control Register SIO2 Transmit/Receive Mode Register 12-13
(S2TCNT) (S2MOD) 12-14
H'0080 0132 SIO2 Transmit Buffer Register 12-17
(S2TXB)
H'0080 0134 SIO2 Receive Buffer Register 12-18
(S2RXB)
H'0080 0136 SIO2 Receive Control Register SIO2 Baud Rate Register 12-19
(S2RCNT) (S2BAUR) 12-22
| (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 0140 SIO3 Transmit Control Register SIO3 Transmit/Receive Mode Register 12-13
(S3TCNT) (S3MOD) 12-14
H'0080 0142 SIO3 Transmit Buffer Register 12-17
(S3TXB)
H'0080 0144 SIO3 Receive Buffer Register 12-18
(S3RXB)
H'0080 0146 SIO3 Receive Control Register SIO3 Baud Rate Register 12-19
(S3RCNT) (S3BAUR) 12-22
12
12-6
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.2.1 SIO Interrupt Related Registers
The SIO interrupt related registers are used to control the interrupt request signals output from SIO to the
Interrupt Controller (ICU), as well as select the source of each interrupt request.
(1) Interrupt request status bit
This status bit is used to determine whether an interrupt is requested. When an interrupt request occurs, this
bit is set in hardware (cannot be set in software). The status bit is cleared by writing "0". Writing "1" has no
effect; the bit retains the status it had before the write. Because this bit is unaffected by the interrupt request
enable bit, it can also be used to inspect the operating status of peripheral functions.
In interrupt handling, make sure that within the grouped interrupt request status, only the status bit for the
interrupt request that has been serviced is cleared. If the status bit for any interrupt request that has not been
serviced is cleared, the pending interrupt request is cleared simultaneously with its status bit.
(2) Interrupt request enable bit
This bit is used to disable unnecessary interrupt requests within the grouped interrupt request. Set this bit to
"1" to enable interrupt requests or "0" to disable interrupt requests.
Figure 12.2.1 Interrupt Request Status and Enable Registers
To the Interrupt Controller
Interrupt request from
each peripheral function
Interrupt request status
Data bus
Set
Group interrupt
Interrupt request enable
clear
F/F
F/F
Data=0
12
12-7
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.2.2 Example for Clearing Interrupt Request Status
b4 5 b7
Interrupt request status
Initial state
Bit 6 event occurs
Interrupt request
Bit 4 event occurs
Only bit 6 cleared
Bit 4 data retained
b4 5 b7
1 1 0 1
Write to the interrupt request status
Example for clearing interrupt request status
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 0 0 0
Program example
ISTREG = 0xfd; /* Clear ISTAT1 (0x02 bit) only */
• To clear the Interrupt Request Status Register 0 (ISTREG) interrupt request status 1: ISTAT1 (0x02 bit)
To clear an interrupt request status, always be sure to write 1 to all other interrupt request status bits. At this time,
avoid using a logic operation like the one shown below. Because it requires three step-ISTREG read, logic operation
and write, if another interrupt request occurs between the read and write, status may be inadvertently cleared.
b4 5 6 b7
Interrupt request status
Bit 6 event occurs
Bit 4 event occurs
Only bit 6 cleared
Bit 4 also cleared
0 0 1 0
1 0 1 0
0 0 0 0
Read
0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0
Clear bit 6 (ANDing with 1101)
Write
6
6
ISTREG &= 0xfd; /* Clear ISTAT1 (0x02 bit) only */
12
12-8
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Receive
DMA transfer request
RFIN
(Reception Finished bit)
Note: • No reception-finished DMA transfer requests are generated if a receive error occurs.
Figure 12.2.4 Reception-finished DMA Transfer Request
(3) Selecting the source of an interrupt request
The interrupt request signals sent from each SIO to the Interrupt Controller (ICU) are classified into transmit
interrupts and receive interrupts. Transmit interrupt requests can be generated when the transmit buffer is
empty or transmission is finished, and the receive interrupt requests can be generated when reception is
finished or an receive error is detected, as selected by the Interrupt Source Select Register (SI03SEL).
Notes: • No interrupt request signals are generated unless interrupts are generated by the SIO Interrupt
Request Enable Register after enabling the TEN (Transmit Enable) bit or REN (Receive Enable) bit
for the corresponding SIO.
• SIO2 and SIO3 together comprise one interrupt group.
The transmission-finished interrupt is effective when the internal clock is selected in UART or CSIO mode.
(4) Notes on using transmit interrupts
While the SIO Interrupt Request Enable Register is set to enable interrupts, a transmit interrupt request is
generated upon enabling the corresponding TEN (Transmit Enable) bit.
(5) About DMA transfer requests from SIO
Each SIO can generate a transmit DMA transfer and a reception-finished DMA transfer request. These DMA
transfer requests can be generated by enabling each SIO’s corresponding TEN (Transmit Enable) bit or REN
(Receive Enable) bit. When using DMA transfers to communicate with external devices, be sure to set the
DMA Controller (DMAC) before enabling the TEN or REN bit. No reception-finished DMA transfer requests
are generated if a receive error occurs.
• Transmit DMA transfer request
Generated when the transmit buffer is empty and the TEN bit is enabled.
TEN
(Transmit Enable bit)
TBE
(Transmit Buffer
Empty bit)
Transmit DMA
transfer request
Figure 12.2.3 Transmit DMA Transfer Request
• Reception-finished DMA transfer request
A DMA transfer request is generated when the receive buffer is filled.
12
12-9
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SIO23 Interrupt Request Status Register (SI23STAT) <Address: H’0080 0100>
123456b7b0 IRQT2 IRQR3IRQT3IRQR2
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–3 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
4 IRQT2 0: Interrupt not requested R (Note 1)
SIO2 transmit interrupt request status bit 1: Interrupt requested
5 IRQR2 0: Interrupt not requested R (Note 1)
SIO2 receive interrupt request status bit 1: Interrupt requested
6 IRQT3 0: Interrupt not requested R (Note 1)
SIO3 transmit interrupt request status bit 1: Interrupt requested
7 IRQR3 0: Interrupt not requested R (Note 1)
SIO3 receive interrupt request status bit 1: Interrupt requested
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
The register indicates the transmit/receive interrupt requests from each SIO.
[Setting the interrupt request status bit]
This bit can only be set in hardware, and cannot be set in software.
[Clearing the interrupt request status bit]
This bit is cleared by writing "0" in software.
Note: • If the status bit is set in hardware at the same time it is cleared in software, the former has
priority and the status bit is set.
When writing to the SIO Interrupt Request Status Register, make sure only the bits to be cleared are set to "0"
and all other bits are set to "1". Those bits that have been set to "1" are unaffected by writing in software and
retain the value they had before the write.
12
12-10
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SIO03 Interrupt Request Enable Register (SI03EN) <Address: H’0080 0101>
9 1011121314b15b8
T0EN R0EN T1EN R1EN T2EN R2EN T3EN R3EN
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 T0EN 0: Mask (disable) interrupt request R W
SIO0 transmit interrupt request enable bit 1: Enable interrupt request
9 R0EN 0: Mask (disable) interrupt request R W
SIO0 receive interrupt request enable bit 1: Enable interrupt request
10 T1EN 0: Mask (disable) interrupt request R W
SIO1 transmit interrupt request enable bit 1: Enable interrupt request
11 R1EN 0: Mask (disable) interrupt request R W
SIO1 receive interrupt request enable bit 1: Enable interrupt request
12 T2EN 0: Mask (disable) interrupt request R W
SIO2 transmit interrupt request enable bit 1: Enable interrupt request
13 R2EN 0: Mask (disable) interrupt request R W
SIO2 receive interrupt request enable bit 1: Enable interrupt request
14 T3EN 0: Mask (disable) interrupt request R W
SIO3 transmit interrupt request enable bit 1: Enable interrupt request
15 R3EN 0: Mask (disable) interrupt request R W
SIO3 receive interrupt request enable bit 1: Enable interrupt request
These registers enable or disable the interrupt requests generated by each SIO. Interrupt requests from any SIO
are enabled by setting its corresponding interrupt request enable bit to "1".
12
12-11
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SIO03 Interrupt Request Source Select Register (SI03SEL) <Address: H’0080 0102>
123456b7b0 ISR0IST0 IST1 IST2 IST3 ISR3ISR2ISR1
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 IST0 0: Transmit buffer empty interrupt R W
SIO0 transmit interrupt request source select bit 1: Transmission finished interrupt
1 IST1 0: Transmit buffer empty interrupt R W
SIO1 transmit interrupt request source select bit 1: Transmission finished interrupt
2 IST2 0: Transmit buffer empty interrupt R W
SIO2 transmit interrupt request source select bit 1: Transmission finished interrupt
3 IST3 0: Transmit buffer empty interrupt R W
SIO3 transmit interrupt request source select bit 1: Transmission finished interrupt
4 ISR0 0: Reception finished interrupt R W
SIO0 receive interrupt request source select bit 1: Receive error interrupt
5 ISR1 0: Reception finished interrupt R W
SIO1 receive interrupt request source select bit 1: Receive error interrupt
6 ISR2 0: Reception finished interrupt R W
SIO2 receive interrupt request source select bit 1: Receive error interrupt
7 ISR3 0: Reception finished interrupt R W
SIO3 receive interrupt request source select bit 1: Receive error interrupt
These registers select the source of interrupt requests generated by each SIO when transmit or receive opera-
tion is completed.
(1) SIOn transmit interrupt request source select bit
[When set to "0"]
The transmit buffer empty interrupt is selected. A transmit buffer empty interrupt request is generated
when data is transferred from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register. Also, a transmit
buffer empty interrupt request is generated when the TEN (Transmit Enable) bit is set to "1" (interrupt
enabled).
[When set to "1"]
The transmission finished (transmit shift buffer empty) interrupt is selected. A transmission finished
interrupt request is generated when all of the data in the transmit shift register has been transferred.
Note: • Do not select the transmission finished interrupt when an external clock is selected in CSIO
mode.
(2) SIOn receive interrupt request source select bit
[When set to "0"]
The reception finished (receive buffer full) interrupt is selected. A reception finished interrupt request is
also generated when a receive error (except overrun error) occurs.
[When set to "1"]
The receive error interrupt is selected. Following types of errors constitute a receive error:
• CSIO mode: Overrun error
• UART mode: Overrun, parity and framing errors
12
12-12
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.2.5 Block Diagram of SIO2,3 Transmit Interrupt Requests
F/F
F/F
R3EN
IRQR3
F/F
F/F
T3EN
IRQT3
F/F
F/F
R2EN
IRQR2
F/F
F/F
T2EN
IRQT2
b15
b7
b14
b6
b13
b5
b12
b4
Data bus
SIO2, 3
transmit/receive
interrupt requests
(Level)
4-source inputs
<SI23STAT : H'0080 0100>
<SI03EN : H'0080 0101>
F/F
SIO2 reception
finished
SIO2 receive error
ISR2
b6
F/F
SIO2 transmit
buffer empty
SIO2 transmission
finished IST2
b2
F/F
SIO3 transmit
buffer empty
SIO3 transmission
finished IST3
b3
F/F
SIO3 reception
finished
SIO3 receive error
ISR3
b7
<SI03SEL : H'0080 0102>
12
12-13
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.2.2 SIO Transmit Control Registers
SIO0 Transmit Control Register (S0TCNT) <Address: H'0080 0110>
SIO1 Transmit Control Register (S1TCNT) <Address: H'0080 0120>
SIO2 Transmit Control Register (S2TCNT) <Address: H'0080 0130>
SIO3 Transmit Control Register (S3TCNT) <Address: H'0080 0140>
123456b7b0 TSTAT TBE TENCDIV
0
1010
0
0
0
<After reset: H’12>
b Bit Name Function R W
0, 1 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
2, 3 CDIV b2 b3 R W
BRG count source select bit 0 0: Select f(BCLK)
0 1: Select f(BCLK) divided by 8
1 0: Select f(BCLK) divided by 32
1 1: Select f(BCLK) divided by 256
4 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
5 TSTAT 0:Transmission stopped and no data in transmit buffer register R
Transmit status bit 1:Transmitting now or data present in transmit buffer register
6 TBE 0:Data present in transmit buffer register R
Transmit buffer empty bit 1: No data in transmit buffer register
7 TEN 0: Disable transmission R W
Transmit enable bit 1: Enable transmission
(1) CDIV (baud rate generator count source select) bits (Bits 2–3)
These bits select the count source for the Baud Rate Generator (BRG).
Note: • If f(BCLK) is selected as the count source for the BRG, care must be taken when setting the
BRG so that the baud rate will not exceed the maximum transfer speed. For details, see the
section in which the BRG register is explained.
(2) TSTAT (Transmit Status) bit (Bit 5)
[Set condition]
This bit is set to "1" by a write to the transmit buffer register while transmission is enabled.
[Clear condition]
This bit is cleared to "0" when transmission is idle (no data in the transmit shift register) and no data
exists in the transmit buffer register. This bit is also cleared by clearing the transmit enable bit.
(3) TBE (Transmit Buffer Empty) bit (Bit 6)
[Set condition]
This bit is set to "1" when data is transferred from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register
and the transmit buffer register is thereby emptied. This bit is also set by clearing the transmit enable bit
to "0".
[Clear condition]
This bit is cleared to "0" by writing data to the lower byte of the transmit buffer register while transmission
is enabled (TEN = "1").
(4) TEN (Transmit Enable) bit (Bit 7)
Transmission is enabled by setting this bit to "1" and disabled by clearing this bit to "0". If this bit is cleared to
"0" while transmitting data, the transmit operation stops.
12
12-14
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.2.3 SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Registers
SIO0 Transmit/Receive Mode Register (S0MOD) <Address: H'0080 0111>
SIO1 Transmit/Receive Mode Register (S1MOD) <Address: H'0080 0121>
SIO2 Transmit/Receive Mode Register (S2MOD) <Address: H'0080 0131>
SIO3 Transmit/Receive Mode Register (S3MOD) <Address: H'0080 0141>
9 1011121314b15b8 SMOD PEN SENPSELSTBCKS
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–10 SMOD b8 b9 b10 R W
Serial I/O mode select bit 0 0 0 : 7-bit UART
(Note 1) 0 0 1 : 8-bit UART
0 1 X : 9-bit UART
1 X X : 8-bit clock-synchronous serial I/O
11 CKS 0: Internal clock R W
Internal/external clock select bit 1: External clock (Note 2)
12 STB 0: One stop bit R W
Stop bit length select bit, UART mode only 1: Two stop bits (Note 3)
13 PSEL 0: Odd parity R W
Odd/even parity select bit, UART mode only 1: Even parity (Note 3)
14 PEN 0: Disable parity R W
Parity enable bit, UART mode only 1: Enable parity (Note 3)
15 SEN 0: Disable sleep function R W
Sleep select bit, UART mode only 1: Enable sleep function (Note 3)
Note 1: For SIO2 and 3, bit 8 is fixed to "0" in hardware. This bit cannot be set to "1" in software (to select clock-synchronous serial I/O).
Note 2: Has no effect when UART mode selected.
Note 3: Bits 12–15 have no effect during clock-synchronous mode.
The SIO Mode Registers consist of bits to set the serial I/O operation mode, data format and the functions used
during communication.
The SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Registers must always be set before the serial I/O starts operating. To change
register settings before the serial I/O starts sending or receiving data, first confirm that transmit and receive
operations have finished and then disable transmit/receive operations (by clearing the SIO Transmit Control
Register transmit enable bit and SIO Receive Control Register receive enable bit to "0") before making changes.
(1) SMOD (Serial I/O Mode Select) bits (Bits 8–10)
These bits select the operation mode of serial I/O.
(2) CKS (Internal/External Clock Select) bit (Bit 11)
This bit is effective when CSIO mode is selected. Setting this bit has no effect when UART mode is selected,
in which case the serial I/O is clocked by the internal clock.
(3) STB (Stop Bit Length Select) bit (Bit 12)
This bit is effective during UART mode. Use this bit to select the stop bit length that indicates the end of data
to transmit. Setting this bit to "0" selects one stop bit, and setting this bit to "1" selects two stop bits.
During clock-synchronous mode, the content of this bit has no effect.
12
12-15
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
(4) PSEL (Odd/Even Parity Select) bit (Bit 13)
This bit is effective during UART mode. When parity is enabled (bit 14 = "1"), use this bit to select the parity
attribute (whether odd or even). Setting this bit to "0" selects an odd parity, and setting this bit to "1" selects
an even parity.
When parity is disabled (bit 14 = "0") and during clock-synchronous mode, the content of this bit has no effect.
(5) PEN (Parity Enable) bit (Bit 14)
This bit is effective during UART mode. When this bit is set to "1", a parity bit is added immediately after the
data bits of the transmit data, and the received data is checked for parity.
The parity bit added to the transmit data is automatically determined to be "0" or "1" so that the attribute (odd/
even) derived by adding the number of 1’s in data bits and the content of the parity bit agrees with one that
was selected with the odd/even parity select bit (bit 13).
Figure 12.2.6 shows an example of a data format when parity is enabled.
(6) SEN (Sleep Select) bit (Bit 15)
This bit is effective during UART mode. If the sleep function is enabled by setting this bit to "1", data is latched
into the UART Receive Buffer Register only when the most significant bit (MSB) of the received data is "1".
12
12-16
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
When transmitting
If the attribute (odd/even) represented by the
number of 1's in data bits agrees with the selected
parity attribute, a parity bit "0" is added. If the
attribute (odd/even) represented by the number of 1's
in data bits does not agree with the selected parity
attribute, a parity bit "1" is added.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 PAR SP
ST
Attribute derived from b7 + b6 + ... + b0
If it agrees with the selected
parity attribute, PAR = "0" is added.
If it does not agree with the selected
parity attribute, PAR = "1" is added.
LSB MSB
When receiving
The received data is checked to see if the number of
1's included in its data and parity bits agrees with
the parity attribute (known as parity check).
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 PAR SP
ST
LSB MSB
If the result of b7 + b6 + ... + b0 + PAR does not agree
with the selected parity attribute, a parity error is assume
d
Notes : • Shown above is an example of a data format in 8-bit UART mode.
The data bit numbers (bn) above indicate bit numbers in a data list, and not the register bit numbers (bn).
b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 PAR SP
ST b0
9-bit UART mode
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 PAR SP
ST
8-bit UART mode
b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 PAR SP
ST
(Note 1)
7-bit UART mode
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1
Clock-synchronous mode b0
Note 1: Whether or not to add a parity bit is selectable.
Note 2: The stop bit can be chosen to be one bit or two bits long.
Direction of transfer
ST : Start bit PAR : Parity bit : One frame equivalent
b : Data bits SP : Stop bit
(Note 2)
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
Figure 12.2.6 Data Format When Parity is Enabled
12
12-17
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.2.4 SIO Transmit Buffer Registers
SIO0 Transmit Buffer Register (S0TXB) <Address: H'0080 0112>
SIO1 Transmit Buffer Register (S1TXB) <Address: H'0080 0122>
SIO2 Transmit Buffer Register (S2TXB) <Address: H'0080 0132>
SIO3 Transmit Buffer Register (S3TXB) <Address: H'0080 0142>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
TDATA
?
?
?
?
?
?
?????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–6 No function assigned. Fix to "0". ?0
7–15 TDATA Transmit data is set in these bits. ? W
Transmit data
The SIO Transmit Buffer Registers are used to set transmit data. These registers are a write-only register, and
the contents of these registers cannot be read out. Data must be LSB-aligned when set in these registers.
Therefore, write transmit data to bits 9–15 for the 7-bit data format (UART mode only), bits 8–15 for the 8-bit data
format, or bits 7–15 for the 9-bit data format (UART mode only).
Before setting transmit data in these registers, enable the Transmit Control Register TEN (Transmit Enable) bit
by setting it to "1". Writing data to these registers while the TEN bit is disabled (cleared to "0") has no effect.
When data is written to the SIO Transmit Buffer Register while transmission is enabled, the data is transferred
from that register to the SIO Transmit Shift Register, upon which the serial I/O starts sending data.
Note: For the 7-bit and 8-bit data formats, the register can be accessed bytewise.
12
12-18
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.2.5 SIO Receive Buffer Registers
SIO0 Receive Buffer Register (S0RXB) <Address: H'0080 0114>
SIO1 Receive Buffer Register (S1RXB) <Address: H'0080 0124>
SIO2 Receive Buffer Register (S2RXB) <Address: H'0080 0134>
SIO3 Receive Buffer Register (S3RXB) <Address: H'0080 0144>
b01234567891011121314b15
RDATA
?
?
?
?
?
?
?????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–6 No function assigned. 0–
8–15 RDATA Received data is stored in these bits. R
Received data
The SIO Receive Buffer Registers are used to store the received data. When the serial I/O has finished receiving
data, the content of the SIO Receive Shift Register is transferred to the SIO Receive Buffer Register. These
registers are a read-only register.
For the 7-bit data format (UART mode only), data is set in bits 9–15, with bits 8 and 7 always set to "0". For the
8-bit data format, data is set in bits 8–15, with bit 7 always set to "0".
When reading the content of the SIO Receive Buffer Register after reception is completed, if the serial I/O
finishes receiving the next data before the previous data is not read out, an overrun error occurs and the subse-
quent received data are not transferred to the Receive Buffer Register.
To restart normal receive operation, clear the Receive Control Register REN (Receive Enable) bit to "0".
Note: For the 7-bit and 8-bit data formats, the register can be accessed bytewise.
12
12-19
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.2.6 SIO Receive Control Registers
SIO0 Receive Control Register (S0RCNT) <Address: H'0080 0116>
SIO1 Receive Control Register (S1RCNT) <Address: H'0080 0126>
SIO2 Receive Control Register (S2RCNT) <Address: H'0080 0136>
SIO3 Receive Control Register (S3RCNT) <Address: H'0080 0146>
123456b7b0 PTY FLM ERSRSTAT RFIN REN OVR
0000000
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
1 RSTAT 0: Reception stopped R
Receive status bit 1: Reception in progress
2 RFIN 0: No data in receive buffer register R
Reception finished bit 1: Data present in receive buffer register
3 REN 0: Disable reception R W
Receive enable bit 1: Enable reception
4 OVR 0: No overrun error R
Overrun error bit 1: Overrun error occurred
5 PTY 0: No parity error R
Parity error bit, UART mode only 1: Parity error occurred
6 FLM 0: No framing error R
Framing error bit, UART mode only 1: Framing error occurred
7 ERS 0: No error R
Error sum bit 1: Error occurred
12
12-20
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
(1) RSTAT (Receive Status) bit (Bit 1)
[Set condition]
This bit is set to "1" by a start of receive operation. When this bit = "1", the serial I/O is receiving data.
[Clear condition]
This bit is cleared to "0" upon completion of receive operation or by clearing the REN (Receive Enable) bit.
(2) RFIN (Reception Finished) bit (Bit 2)
[Set condition]
This bit is set to "1" when all data bits have been received in the Receive Shift Register and whose
content is transferred to the Receive Buffer Register.
[Clear condition]
This bit is cleared to "0" by reading out the lower byte of the Receive Buffer Register or by clearing the
REN (Receive Enable) bit. However, if an overrun error occurs, this bit cannot be cleared by reading out
the lower byte of the Receive Buffer Register. In this case, clear REN (Receive Enable) bit to "0".
(3) REN (Receive Enable) bit (Bit 3)
Reception is enabled by setting this bit to "1", and is disabled by clearing this bit to "0", in which case the
receiver unit is initialized. Accordingly, the receive status and reception finished flags, as well as the overrun
error, framing error, parity error and error sum flags all are cleared.
The receive operation stops if the Receive Enable bit is cleared to "0" while receiving data.
(4) OVR (Overrun Error) bit (Bit 4)
[Set condition]
This bit is set to "1" when all bits of the next received data have been set in the Receive Shift Register
while the Receive Buffer Register still contains the previous received data. In this case, the received
data is not stored in the Receive Buffer Register. Although receive operation continues even when the
overrun error flag = "1", the received data is not stored in the Receive Buffer Register. This error bit must
be cleared before normal reception can be restarted.
[Clear condition]
This bit is cleared to "0" by only clearing the REN (Receive Enable) bit.
(5) PTY (Parity Error) bit (Bit 5)
This bit is effective in only UART mode. It is fixed to "0" during CSIO mode.
[Set condition]
The PTY (Parity Error) bit is set to "1" when the SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register PEN (Parity
Enable/Disable) bit is enabled and the parity (even or odd) of the received data does not agree with one
that was set by the said register’s PSEL (Parity Select) bit.
[Clear condition]
The PTY bit is cleared to "0" by reading out the lower byte of the SIO Receive Buffer Register or by
clearing the SIO Receive Control Register REN (Receive Enable) bit. However, if an overrun error
occurs, this bit cannot be cleared by reading out the lower byte of the Receive Buffer Register. In this
case, clear the REN (Receive Enable) bit.
12
12-21
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
(6) FLM (Framing Error) bit (Bit 6)
This bit is effective in only UART mode. It is fixed to "0" during CSIO mode.
[Set condition]
The FLM (Framing Error) bit is set to "1" when the number of received bits does not agree with one that
was set by the SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register.
[Clear condition]
The FLM bit is cleared to "0" by reading out the lower byte of the SIO Receive Buffer Register or by
clearing the SIO Receive Control Register REN (Receive Enable) bit.
However, if an overrun error occurs, this bit cannot be cleared by reading out the lower byte of the
Receive Buffer Register. In this case, clear the REN (Receive Enable) bit to "0".
(7) ERS (Error Sum) bit (Bit 7)
[Set condition]
This flag is set to "1" when any of overrun, framing or parity errors is detected at completion of reception.
[Clear condition]
If the detected error was an overrun error, this flag is cleared by clearing the REN (Receive Enable) bit
to "0". Otherwise, this flag is cleared by reading out the lower byte of the SIO Receive Buffer Register or
by clearing the SIO Receive Control Register REN (Receive Enable) bit.
12
12-22
Serial I/O
12.2 Serial I/O Related Registers
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.2.7 SIO Baud Rate Registers
SIO0 Baud Rate Register (S0BAUR) <Address: H'0080 0117>
SIO1 Baud Rate Register (S1BAUR) <Address: H'0080 0127>
SIO2 Baud Rate Register (S2BAUR) <Address: H'0080 0137>
SIO3 Baud Rate Register (S3BAUR) <Address: H'0080 0147>
9 1011121314b15b8 BRG
????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–15 BRG The baud rate count source selected by SIO Mode Register R W
Baud rate divide value is divided by (n + 1) where n = BRG set value.
(1) BRG (baud rate divide value) (Bits 8–15)
The SIO Baud Rate Registers are used to set a baud rate divide value, so that the baud rate count source
selected by SIO Mode Register is divided by (n + 1) where n = BRG set value.
Because the BRG value initially is undefined, be sure to set the divide value before the serial I/O starts
operating. The value written to the BRG during transmit/receive operation takes effect in the next cycle after
the BRG counter has finished counting.
When using the internal clock (to output the SCLKO signal) in CSIO mode, the serial I/O divides the internal
BCLK using a clock divider and then divides the resulting clock by (n + 1) where n = BRG set value and
further by 2, thereby generating a transmit/receive shift clock.
When using an external clock in CSIO mode, the serial I/O does not use the BRG. (Transmit/receive opera-
tions are synchronized to the externally supplied clock.)
During UART mode, the serial I/O divides the internal BCLK using a clock divider and then divides the
resulting clock by (n + 1) where n = BRG set value and further by 16, thereby generating a transmit/receive
shift clock.
When using SIO0 or SIO1 in UART mode, set the relevant port (P84 or P87) to function as an SCLKO pin, so
that a BRG output clock divided by 2 can be output from that SCLKO pin.
When using the internal clock (internally clocked CSIO mode or UART mode), if f(BCLK) is selected as the
BRG count source, make sure the transfer rate does not exceed 2 Mbits/second during CSIO mode, and that
BRG is equal to or greater than 7 during UART mode.
12
12-23
Serial I/O
12.3 Transmit Operation in CSIO Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.3 Transmit Operation in CSIO Mode
12.3.1 Setting the CSIO Baud Rate
The baud rate (data transfer rate) in CSIO mode is determined by a transmit/receive shift clock. The clock
source from which a transmit/receive shift clock derives is selected from the internal clock f(BCLK) or external
clock. The CKS (Internal/External Clock Select) bit (SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register bit 11) is used to
select the clock source.
The equation used to calculate the transmit/receive baud rate differs depending on whether an internal or exter-
nal clock is selected.
(1) When internal clock is selected in CSIO mode
When the internal clock is selected, f(BCLK) is divided by a clock divider before being supplied to the Baud
Rate Generator (BRG).
The clock divider’s divide-by value is selected from 1, 8, 32 or 256 by using the CDIV (baud rate generator
count source select) bits (Transmit Control Register bits 2–3).
The Baud Rate Generator divides the clock divider output by (baud rate register set value + 1) and further by
2, thus generating a transmit/receive shift clock.
When the internal clock is selected in CSIO mode, the baud rate is calculated using the equation below.
Baud rate = f(BCLK)
[bps] Clock divider’s divide-by value x (baud rate register set value + 1) x 2
Baud rate register set value = H’00 to H’FF (Note 1)
Clock divider’s divide-by value = 1, 8, 32 or 256
Note 1: If divide-by-1 (i.e., f(BCLK) itself) is selected as the baud rate generator count source, use
caution when setting the baud rate register so that the transfer rate will not exceed 2 Mbps.
(2) When external clock is selected in CSIO mode
In this case, the Baud Rate Generator is not used, and the input clock from the SCLKI pin serves directly as
a transmit/receive shift clock for CSIO.
The maximum frequency of the SCLKI pin input clock is f(BCLK)/16.
Baud rate = SCLKI pin input clock
[bps]
12
12-24
Serial I/O
12.3 Transmit Operation in CSIO Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.3.2 Initializing CSIO Transmission
To transmit data in CSIO mode, initialize the serial I/O following the procedure described below.
(1) Setting SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register
• Set the register to CSIO mode.
• Select the internal or an external clock.
(2) Setting SIO Transmit Control Register
• Select the clock divider’s divide-by ratio (when internal clock selected).
(3) Setting SIO Baud Rate Register
When the internal clock is selected, set a baud rate generator value. (See Section 12.3.1, “Setting the CSIO
Baud Rate.”)
(4) Setting the SIO interrupt related registers
• Select the source of transmit interrupt request (transmit buffer empty or transmission finished) (SIO Interrupt
Request Source Select Register).
• Enable or disable transmit interrupt requests (SIO Interrupt Request Enable Register).
Note: • Transmission finished interrupt requests are effective only when the internal clock is selected.
(5) Setting the Interrupt Controller (SIO Transmit Interrupt Control Register)
To use transmit interrupts, set their priority levels.
(6) Setting the DMAC
To issue DMA transfer requests to the internal DMAC when the transmit buffer is empty, set up the DMAC.
(See Chapter 9, “DMAC.”)
(7) Selecting pin functions
Because the serial I/O related pins serve dual purposes, set the pin functions for use as SIO pins or input/
output ports. (See Chapter 8, “Input/Output Ports and Pin Functions.”)
12
12-25
Serial I/O
12.3 Transmit Operation in CSIO Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.3.1 Procedure for Initializing CSIO Transmission
Set SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register
Initialize CSIO transmission
Note 1: Necessary when the internal clock is selected.
Note 2: If the internal clock and a divide-by ratio = 1 are selected, caution must be used when setting the baud rate register
so that the transfer rate will not exceed 2 Mbps.
Note 3: Transmission finished interrupts are effective only when the internal clock is selected.
• Set the register to CSIO mode
• Select the internal or external clock
(When using the DMAC)
Set DMAC
(When using interrupts)
Set Interrupt Controller
Set SIO interrupt related registers
• Divide-by ratio = H'00 to H'FF (Note 2)
Set SIO Baud Rate Register
• Select the clock divider divide-by ratio (Note 1)
Set SIO Transmit Control Register
Set Input/Output Port
Operation Mode Register
Serial I/O
related registers
End of CSIO transmit initialization
• Enable or disable transmit interrupt requests
• Select the source of transmit interrupt request (Note 3)
12
12-26
Serial I/O
12.3 Transmit Operation in CSIO Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.3.3 Starting CSIO Transmission
The serial I/O starts a transmit operation when all of the following conditions are met after being initialized.
(1) Transmit conditions when CSIO mode internal clock is selected
• The SIO Transmit Control Register transmit enable bit is set to "1".
• Transmit data (8 bits) is written to the lower byte of the SIO Transmit Buffer Register (transmit buffer
empty bit = "0")
(2) Transmit conditions when CSIO mode external clock is selected
• The SIO Transmit Control Register transmit enable bit is set to "1".
• Transmit data is written to the lower byte of the SIO Transmit Buffer Register (transmit buffer empty bit = "0")
• A falling edge of transmit clock on the SCLKI pin is detected.
Note 1: While the transmit enable bit is cleared to "0", writes to the transmit buffer register are ignored.
Always set the transmit enable bit to "1" before writing to the transmit buffer register.
Note 2: When the internal clock is selected, a write to the lower byte of the transmit buffer register in
above triggers transmission to start.
Note 3: The transmit status bit is set to "1" at the time data is set in the lower byte of the SIO Transmit
Buffer Register.
When transmission starts, the serial I/O sends data following the procedure described below.
• Transfer the content of the SIO Transmit Buffer Register to the SIO Transmit Shift Register.
• Set the transmit buffer empty bit to "1" (Note 1).
• Start sending data synchronously with the shift clock beginning with the LSB.
Note 1: A transmit interrupt request can be generated for reasons that the transmit buffer is empty or
transmission has finished. Also, a DMA transfer request can be generated when the transmit
buffer is empty. No DMA transfer requests can be generated for reasons that transmission has
finished.
12.3.4 Successive CSIO Transmission
Once data has been transferred from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register, the next data can
be written to the transmit buffer register even when the serial I/O has not finished sending the previous data. If
the next data is written to the transmit buffer register before transmission has finished, the previous and the next
data are transmitted successively.
Check the SIO Transmit Control Register’s Status Register’s transmit buffer empty flag to see if data has been
transferred from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register.
12
12-27
Serial I/O
12.3 Transmit Operation in CSIO Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.3.5 Processing at End of CSIO Transmission
When data transmission finishes, the following operation is automatically performed in hardware.
(1) When not transmitting successively
• The transmit status bit is cleared to "0".
(2) When transmitting successively
• When transmission of the last data in a consecutive data train finishes, the transmit status bit is cleared to "0".
12.3.6 Transmit Interrupts
(1) Transmit buffer empty interrupt
If the transmit buffer empty interrupt was selected using the SIO Interrupt Request Source Select Register, a
transmit buffer empty interrupt request is generated when data has been transferred from the transmit buffer
register to the transmit shift register. A transmit buffer empty interrupt request is also generated when the
TEN (Transmit Enable) bit is set to "1" (disabled enabled) while the transmit buffer empty interrupt has
been enabled.
(2) Transmission finished interrupt
If the transmission finished interrupt was selected using the SIO Interrupt Request Source Select Register, a
transmission finished interrupt request is generated by a falling edge of the internal transfer clock pulse at
which the last bit of data in the transmit shift register has been transmitted or when the transmit enable bit is
cleared.
The SIO Interrupt Request Enable Register and the Interrupt Controller (ICU) must be set before these
transmit interrupts can be used.
12.3.7 Transmit DMA Transfer Request
When data has been transferred from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register, a transmit DMA
transfer request for the corresponding SIO channel is output to the DMAC. A transmit DMA transfer request is
also output when the TEN (Transmit Enable) bit is set to "1" (disabled enabled).
The DMAC must be set before DMA transfers can be used during data transmission.
12
12-28
Serial I/O
12.3 Transmit Operation in CSIO Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.3.2 Transmit Operation during CSIO Mode (Hardware Processing)
The following processing is
automatically performed in hardware.
Transfer the content of the transmit
buffer to the transmit shift register
Set the transmit buffer empty bit to "1"
Transmit data
Y (Successive transmission)
Transmit
conditions met?
Transmit
conditions met?
Y
N
N
Clear the transmit status bit to "0"
Transmit DMA transfer request
Transmit interrupt request
(Note 1)
CSIO transmit
operation starts
End of CSIO
transmit operation
Note 1: This applies when the transmit interrupt request was enabled using the SIO Interrupt Request Enable Register
after selecting the transmit buffer empty interrupt with the SIO Interrupt Request Source Select Register.
12
12-29
Serial I/O
12.3 Transmit Operation in CSIO Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.3.8 Example of CSIO Transmit Operation
The following shows a typical transmit operation in CSIO mode.
Figure 12.3.3 Example of CSIO Transmission (Transmitted Only Once)
Note 1: Changes of the Interrupt Controller's SIO Transmit Interrupt Control Register interrupt request bit
Note 2: When transmit buffer empty interrupt is enabled (DMA transfer can also be requested at the same time)
Note 3: When transmission finished interrupt is enable
Note 4: The Interrupt Controller's IVECT register is read or the SIO Transmit Interrupt Control Register interrupt
request bit cleared
Note 5: A transmit interrupt request is generated when transmission is enabled.
Note 6: Be aware that even after transmit data is written to the transmit buffer, a transmit interrupt request is generated when
the data is transferred from the transmit buffer to the transmit shift register and the transmit buffer is thereby emptied.
Note 7: A transmission finished interrupt request is generated by a falling edge of the internal transfer clock pulse
at which transmission of the transmit shift register data has finished or when the transmit enable bit is cleared.
Note 8: It is inhibited to select the transmission finished interrupt when an external clock is selected.
Internal clock selected External clock selected
Set
Transmit enable bit
Transmit buffer empty bit
Transmit status bit
TXD
(When transmit buffer empty
interrupt is selected)
Transmit interrupt request
(Note 2) (Note 5) Transmit interrupt request
(Note 2) (Note 6)
Interrupt request accepted (Note 4)
Set by a write to the
transmit buffer
Write to the
transmit buffer
register
Transmit clock
(SCLKO)
<CSIO on transmit side>
Cleared
Cleared by completion
of transmission
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Content of the transmit buffer register
is transferred to the transmit shift register
: Interrupt request generated : Processing by software
<CSIO on transmit side> <CSIO on receive side>
SCLKO
TXD
SCLKI
RXD
Transmit interrupt request
(Note 3) (Note 7)
Interrupt request accepted
(When transmission finished
interrupt is selected)(Note 8)
(Internal transfer clock)
SIO transmit interrupt request
(Note 1)
12
12-30
Serial I/O
12.3 Transmit Operation in CSIO Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.3.4 Example of CSIO Transmission (Transmitted Successively)
Note 1: Changes of the Interrupt Controller's SIO Transmit Interrupt Control Register interrupt request bit
Note 2: When transmit buffer empty interrupt is enabled (DMA transfer can also be requested at the same time)
Note 3: When transmission finished interrupt is enable
Note 4: The Interrupt Controller's IVECT register is read or the SIO Transmit Interrupt Control Register interrupt request bit cleared
Note 5: A transmit interrupt request is generated when transmission is enabled.
Note 6: Be aware that even after transmit data is written to the transmit buffer, a transmit interrupt request is generated when the
data is transferred from the transmit buffer to the transmit shift register and the transmit buffer is thereby emptied.
Note 7: A transmission finished interrupt request is generated by a falling edge of the internal transfer clock pulse at which
transmission of the transmit shift register data has finished or when the transmit enable bit is cleared.
Note 8: It is inhibited to select the transmission finished interrupt when an external clock is selected.
: Interrupt request generated : Processing by software
Transmit enable bit
Transmit buffer empty bit
Transmit status bit
TXD
SIO transmit interrupt request
(Note 1)
Transmit clock
(SCLKO)
<CSIO on transmit side>
<CSIO on transmit side> <CSIO on receive side>
SCLKO
TXD
SCLKI
RXD
b7 b6 b5 b0 b7 b6 b5 b0
(Note 2)
(Note 5) (Note 2) (Note 2)(Note 6)
Next data is written at a transmit
buffer empty interrupt
First data Next data
Write to the
transmit buffer
register
(First data) (Next data)
Write to the
transmit buffer
register Cleared
Internal clock selected Exter nal clock selected
Set
(Internal transfer clock)
(When transmit buffer empty
interrupt is selected)
(When transmission finished
interrupt is selected) (Note 8)
(Note 3)
Transmit interrupt request
(Note 3)(Note 7)
Interrupt request accepted (Note 4)
Interrupt request accepted (Note 4)
12
12-31
Serial I/O
12.4 Receive Operation in CSIO Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.4 Receive Operation in CSIO Mode
12.4.1 Initialization for CSIO Reception
To receive data in CSIO mode, initialize the serial I/O following the procedure described below. Note, however,
that because the receive shift clock is derived by an operation of the transmit circuit, transmit operation must
always be executed even when the serial I/O is used for only receiving data.
(1) Setting SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register
• Set the register to CSIO mode.
• Select the internal or an external clock.
(2) Setting SIO Transmit Control Register
• Select the clock divider’s divide-by ratio (when internal clock selected).
(3) Setting SIO Baud Rate Register
When the internal clock is selected, set a baud rate generator value. (See Section 12.3.1, “Setting the CSIO
Baud Rate.”)
(4) Setting SIO interrupt related registers
• Select the source of receive interrupt request (reception finished or error) (SIO Interrupt Request Source
Select Register).
• Enable or disable receive interrupts (SIO Interrupt Request Enable Register).
(5) Setting SIO Receive Control Register
• Set the receive enable bit.
(6) Setting Interrupt Controller (SIO Transmit Interrupt Control Register)
To use receive interrupts, set their priority levels.
(7) Setting DMAC
Set up the DMAC when the DMA transfer is requested to the internal DMAC on completion of the transmission.
(See Chapter 9, “DMAC.”)
12
12-32
Serial I/O
12.4 Receive Operation in CSIO Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.4.1 Procedure for Initializing CSIO Reception
Initialize CSIO reception
Note 1: Necessary when the internal clock is selected.
Note 2: If the internal clock and a divide-by ratio = 1 are selected, caution must be used when setting the baud rate
register so that the transfer rate will not exceed 2 Mbps.
Set the register to CSIO mode
Select the internal or external clock
Set SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register
(When using the DMAC)
Set DMAC
(When using interrupts)
Set Interrupt Controller
Select the source of receive interrupt request
Set SIO interrupt related registers
Divide-by ratio = H'00 to H'FF
(Note 2)
Set SIO Baud Rate Register
Select the clock divider divide-by ratio
(Note 1)
Set SIO Transmit Control Register
Set Input/Output Port
Operation Mode Register
Serial I/O
related registers
Set SIO Receive Control Register
Set the receive enable bit
End of CSIO receive initialization
Enable or disable receive interrupt requests
(8) Selecting pin functions
Because the serial I/O related pins serve dual purposes, set the pin functions for use as SIO pins or input/
output ports. (See Chapter 8, “Input/Output Ports and Pin Functions.”)
12
12-33
Serial I/O
12.4 Receive Operation in CSIO Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.4.2 Starting CSIO Reception
The serial I/O starts receive operation when all of the following conditions are met after being initialized.
(1) Receive conditions when CSIO mode internal clock is selected
• The SIO Receive Control Register receive enable bit is set to "1".
• Transmit conditions are met. (See Section 12.3.3, “Starting CSIO Transmission.”)
(2) Receive conditions when CSIO mode external clock is selected
• The SIO Receive Control Register receive enable bit is set to "1".
• Transmit conditions are met. (See Section 12.3.3, “Starting CSIO Transmission.”)
Note: • The receive status bit is set to "1" at the time dummy data is set in the lower byte of the SIO
Transmit Buffer Register.
When the above conditions are met, the serial I/O starts receiving 8-bit serial data (LSB first) synchronously with
the receive shift clock.
12.4.3 Processing at End of CSIO Reception
When data reception finishes, the following operation is automatically performed in hardware.
(1) When reception is completed normally
The reception finished (receive buffer full) bit is set to "1".
Notes: • An interrupt request is generated if the reception finished (receive buffer full) interrupt has been enabled.
• A DMA transfer request is generated.
(2) When an error occurred during reception
If an error (only overrun error in CSIO mode) occurred during reception, the overrun error bit and receive
error sum bit are set to "1".
Notes: If the reception finished interrupt has been selected (by SIO Receive Interrupt Request Source Select
Register), neither a reception finished interrupt request nor a DMA transfer request is generated.
• If the receive error interrupt has been selected (by SIO Receive Interrupt Request Source
Select Register), a receive error interrupt request is generated when interrupt requests are
enabled. No DMA transfer requests are generated.
12
12-34
Serial I/O
12.4 Receive Operation in CSIO Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.4.2 Receive Operation during CSIO Mode (Hardware Processing)
Receive data
Set the SIO Receive Control Register
reception finished bit to "1"
Store the received data
in the receive buffer register
Set the SIO Receive Control Register
overrun error and receive error sum bits to "1"
Receive conditions
met?
Overrun error ?
Y
Y
N
N
End of CSIO receive
operation
CSIO receive operation
starts
12.4.4 About Successive Reception
If the following conditions are met when data reception has finished, data may be received successively.
• The receive enable bit is set to "1".
• Transmit conditions are met.
• No overrun error has occurred.
12
12-35
Serial I/O
12.4 Receive Operation in CSIO Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.4.5 Flags Showing the Status of CSIO Receive Operation
There are following flags that indicate the status of receive operation during CSIO mode:
• SIO Receive Control Register receive status bit
• SIO Receive Control Register reception finished bit
• SIO Receive Control Register receive error sum bit
• SIO Receive Control Register overrun error bit
When reading the content of the SIO Receive Buffer Register after reception is completed, if the serial I/O
finishes receiving the next data before the previous data is not read out, an overrun error occurs and the subse-
quent received data are not transferred to the receive buffer register.
Before receive operation can be restarted, the receive enable bit must temporarily be cleared to "0" to initialize
the receiver control unit.
The above reception finished bit, if no receive errors occurred (Note 1), may be cleared by reading out the lower
byte of the SIO Receive Buffer Register or clearing the REN (Receive Enable) bit.
However, if any receive error occurred, the reception finished bit can only be cleared by clearing the REN
(Receive Enable) bit, and cannot be cleared by reading out the lower byte of the SIO Receive Buffer Register.
Note 1: Overrun errors are the only error that can be detected during reception in CSIO mode.
12
12-36
Serial I/O
12.4 Receive Operation in CSIO Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.4.3 Example of CSIO Reception (When Received Normally)
Note 1: Changes of the Interrupt Controller's SIO Receive Interrupt Control Register interrupt request bit
Note 2: When reception finished interrupt is enabled (DMA transfer can also be requested at the same time)
Note 3: The Interrupt Controller's IVECT register is read or the SIO Receive Interrupt Control Register
interrupt request bit cleared
<CSIO on receive side>
<CSIO on transmit side>
<CSIO on receive side>
SCLKO TXD
SCLKI
RXD
Internal clock selected Exter nal clock selected
Receive clock
(SCLKO) Set
Receive enable bit
RXD
Receive status bit
Reception finished bit
SIO receive interrupt request
(Note 1)
(When reception finished
interrupt is selected)
(When receive error
interrupt is selected) No interrupt request
Interrupt request accepted (Note 3)
Reception finished interrupt request
(Note 2)
Read from the
receive buffer
: Interrupt request generated : Processing by software
Automatically cleared for each
receive operation performed
Clock stops
Cleared
Set by a write to
the transmit buffer
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
12.4.6 Example of CSIO Receive Operation
The following shows a typical receive operation in CSIO mode.
12
12-37
Serial I/O
12.4 Receive Operation in CSIO Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.4.4 Example of CSIO Reception (When Overrun Error Occurred)
<CSIO on receive side>
External clock selectedInternal clock selected
<CSIO on receive side> <CSIO on transmit side>
SCLKO
RXD
SCLKI
TXD
: Processing by software : Interrupt request generated
Receive clock
(SCLKI) Set
Receive enable bit
b7 b6 b0
RXD b7 b6
b0
Note 1: Changes of the Interrupt Controller's SIO Receive Interrupt Control Register interrupt request bit
Note 2: When reception finished interrupt is enabled
Note 3: When receive error interrupt is enabled
Note 4: The receive enable bit is cleared
Note 5: The Interrupt Controller's IVECT register is read or the SIO Receive Interrupt Control Register interrupt
request bit cleared
First data reception
completed Next data reception
completed
Reception finished bit
SIO receive interrupt request
(Note 1)
(When reception finished
interrupt is selected)
Receive buffer not read
out during this interval
Set
Overrun error bit cleared
(Note 4)
Reception finished
interrupt request
(Note 2)
Interrupt request accepted (Note 5)
Cleared
Receive error interrupt request
(Note 3)
Interrupt request accepted (Note 5)
(When receive error
interrupt is selected)
Overrun error bit
12
12-38
Serial I/O
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.5 Precautions on Using CSIO Mod
12.5 Precautions on Using CSIO Mode
• Settings of SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register and SIO Baud Rate Register
The SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register and SIO Baud Rate Register and the Transmit Control Register’s
BRG count source select bit must always be set before the serial I/O starts operating. If these settings need
to be changed after a transmit or receive operation has started, first check to see that transmit and receive
operations have finished and then clear the transmit and receive enable bits before making changes.
• Settings of BRG (Baud Rate Register)
If f(BCLK) is selected with the BRG clock source select bit, use caution when setting the BRG register so that
the transfer rate will not exceed 2 Mbps.
• About successive transmission
To transmit data successively, make sure the next transmit data is set in the SIO Transmit Buffer Register
before the current data transmission finishes.
• About reception
Because the receive shift clock in CSIO mode is derived by an operation of the transmit circuit, transmit
operation must always be executed (by sending dummy data) even when the serial I/O is used for only
receiving data. In this case, be aware that if the port function is set for the TXD pin (by setting the operation
mode register to "1"), dummy data may actually be output from the pin.
• About successive reception
To receive data successively, make sure that data (dummy data) is set in the SIO Transmit Buffer Register
before a transmit operation on the transmitter side starts.
• Transmission/reception using DMA
To transmit/receive data in DMA request mode, enable the DMAC to accept transfer requests (by setting the
DMA Mode Register) before serial communication starts.
• About reception finished bit
If a receive error (overrun error) occurs, the reception finished bit can only be cleared by clearing the receive
enable bit, and cannot be cleared by reading out the receive buffer register.
• About overrun error
If all bits of the next received data have been set in the SIO Receive Shift Register before reading out the SIO
Receive Buffer Register (i.e., an overrun error occurred), the received data is not stored in the receive buffer
register, with the previous received data retained in it. Although a receive operation continues thereafter, the
subsequent received data is not stored in the receive buffer register (receive status bit = "1").
Before normal receive operation can be restarted, the receive enable bit must be temporarily cleared to "0".
And this is the only way that the overrun error flag can be cleared.
• About DMA transfer request generation during SIO transmission
If the transmit buffer register becomes empty (transmit buffer empty flag = "1") while the transmit enable bit
remains set to "1" (transmission enabled), an SIO transmit buffer empty DMA transfer request is generated.
• About DMA transfer request generation during SIO reception
If the reception finished bit is set to "1" (receive buffer register full), a reception finished DMA transfer request
is generated. Be aware, however, that if an overrun error occurred during reception, this DMA transfer re-
quest is not generated.
12
12-39
Serial I/O
12.6 Transmit Operation in UART Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.6.1 Example of a Transfer Data Format during UART Mode
ST b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 PAR SP SP
LSB MSB
ST
Parity
bit Stop
bit
Start
bit
Data bits (8 bits)
Transmit data Next
data
12.6 Transmit Operation in UART Mode
12.6.1 Setting the UART Baud Rate
The baud rate (data transfer rate) in UART mode is determined by a transmit/receive shift clock. During UART
mode, the source for this transmit/receive shift clock is always the internal clock no matter how the internal/
external clock select bit (SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register bit 11) is set.
(1) Calculating the UART mode baud rate
After being divided by a clock divider, f(BCLK) is supplied to the Baud Rate Generator (BRG), after which it
is further divided by 16 to produce a transmit/receive shift clock.
The clock divider’s divide-by value is selected from 1, 8, 32 or 256 by using the SIO Transmit Control Regis-
ter CDIV (baud rate generator count source select) bits (bits 2–3).(Note 1)
The Baud Rate Generator divides the clock divider output by (baud rate register set value + 1) and further by
16, thus generating a transmit/receive shift clock.
When the internal clock is selected in UART mode, the baud rate is calculated using the equation below.
Baud rate = f(BCLK)
[bps] Clock divider’s divide-by value x (baud rate register set value + 1) x 16
Baud rate register set value = H’00 to H’FF (Note 1)
Clock divider’s divide-by value = 1, 8, 32 or 256
Note 1: If divide-by-1 (i.e., f(BCLK) itself) is selected as the baud rate generator count source,
make sure the value set in the baud rate register is equal to or greater than 7.
12.6.2 UART Transmit/Receive Data Formats
The transmit/receive data format during UART mode is determined by setting the SIO Transmit/Receive Mode
Register. Shown below is the transmit/receive data format that can be used in UART mode.
12
12-40
Serial I/O
12.6 Transmit Operation in UART Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Table 12.6.1 Transfer Data in UART Mode
Bit Name Content
ST (start bit) Indicates the beginning of data transmission. This is a low-level signal of a one bit
period, which is added immediately preceding the transmit data.
Bits 0–8 (character bits) Transmit/receive data transferred via serial I/O. In UART mode, 7, 8 or9 bits of data
can be transmitted/received.
PAR (parity bit) Added to the transmit/receive character. When parity is enabled, parity is
automatically set in such a way that the number of 1’s in the character including the
parity bit itself is always even or odd as selected by the even/odd parity select bit.
SP (stop bit) Indicates the end of data transmission, which is added immediately following the
character (or if parity is enabled, immediately following the parity bit). The stop bit
can be chosen to be one bit or two bits long.
Figure 12.6.2 Selectable Data Formats during UART Mode
ST b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 PAR SP SP
ST b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 PAR SP
ST b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 SPSP
ST b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 SP
LSB MSB
8-bit character
ST b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 SP
SPPAR
ST b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 SP
PAR
ST b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 SP
SP
ST b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 SP
LSB MSB
7-bit character
9-bit character
ST b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 PAR SP SP
ST b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 PAR SP
ST b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 SPSP
ST b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 SP
LSB MSB
b8
b8
b8
b8
Bits 0-7: Character (data) bits
SP: Stop bit
ST: Start bit
PAR: Parity bit
b0 b7 b8 b15
7-bit character
8-bit character
9-bit character
SIO Transmit Buffer Register
SIO Receive Buffer Register
N
otes:The high-order bits of the selected character length in the SIO Receive Buffer Register are fixed to "0".
The data bit numbers (bn) above indicate bit numbers in a data list, and not the register bit numbers (bn).
12
12-41
Serial I/O
12.6 Transmit Operation in UART Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.6.3 Initializing UART Transmission
To transmit data in UART mode, initialize the serial I/O following the procedure described below.
(1) Setting SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register
• Set the register to UART mode.
• Set parity (when enabled, select odd/even).
• Set the stop bit length.
• Set the character length (Note 1).
Note 1: During UART mode, settings of the internal/external clock select bit have no effect (only the
internal clock is useful).
(2) Setting SIO Transmit Control Register
• Select the clock divider’s divide-by ratio.
(3) Setting SIO Baud Rate Register
Set a baud rate generator value. (See Section 12.6.1, “Setting the UART Baud Rate.”)
(4) Setting SIO interrupt related registers
• Select the source of transmit interrupt request (transmit buffer empty or transmission finished)
(SIO Interrupt Request Source Select Register).
• Enable or disable SIO transmit interrupt requests (SIO Interrupt Request Enable Register).
(5) Setting Interrupt Controller (SIO Transmit Interrupt Control Register)
To use transmit interrupts, set their priority levels.
(6) Setting DMAC
To issue DMA transfer requests to the internal DMAC when the transmit buffer is empty, set up the DMAC.
(See Chapter 9, “DMAC.”)
(7) Selecting pin functions
Because the serial I/O related pins serve dual purposes, set the pin functions for use as SIO pins or input/
output ports. (See Chapter 8, “Input/Output Ports and Pin Functions.”)
12
12-42
Serial I/O
12.6 Transmit Operation in UART Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.6.3 Procedure for Initializing UART Transmission
Initialize UART transmission
Set the register to UART mode
Set parity (when enabled, select odd/even)
Set the stop bit length
Set the character length
Set SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register
(When using the DMAC)
Set DMAC related registers
Set Interrupt Controller
Set SIO interrupt related registers
Divide-by ratio = H'00 to H'FF (Note 1)
Set SIO Baud Rate Register
Select the clock divider divide-by ratio
Set SIO Transmit Control Register
Set Input/Output Port
Operation Mode Register
Serial I/O
related registers
End of UART transmit initialization
(When using interrupts)
Note 1: If f(BCLK) is selected for BRG count source (CDVI), it is necessary that the value set in the baud rate
register be equal to or greater than 7.
Select the source of transmit interrupt request
Enable or disable transmit interrupt requests
12
12-43
Serial I/O
12.6 Transmit Operation in UART Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.6.4 Starting UART Transmission
The serial I/O starts a transmit operation when all of the following conditions are met after being initialized.
• SIO Transmit Control Register TEN (Transmit Enable) bit is set to "1" (Note 1).
• Transmit data is written to the SIO Transmit Buffer Register (transmit buffer empty bit = "0").
Note 1: While the transmit enable bit is cleared to "0", writes to the transmit buffer are ignored. Always be
sure to set the transmit enable bit to "1" before writing to the transmit buffer register.
When transmission starts, the serial I/O sends data following the procedure described below.
• Transfer the content of the SIO Transmit Buffer Register to the SIO Transmit Shift Register.
• Set the transmit buffer empty bit to "1" (Note 2).
• Start sending data synchronously with the shift clock beginning with the LSB.
Note 2: A transmit interrupt request can be generated for reasons that the transmit buffer is empty or
transmission has finished. Also, a DMA transfer request can be generated when the transmit
buffer is empty. No DMA transfer requests can be generated for reasons that transmission has
finished.
12.6.5 Successive UART Transmission
Once data has been transferred from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register, the next data can
be written to the transmit buffer register even when the serial I/O has not finished sending the previous data. If
the next data is written to the transmit buffer before transmission has finished, the previous and the next data are
transmitted successively.
Check the SIO Transmit Control Register’s transmit buffer empty flag to see if data has been transferred from
the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register.
12.6.6 Processing at End of UART Transmission
When data transmission finishes, the following operation is automatically performed in hardware.
(1) When not transmitting successively
• The transmit status bit is cleared to "0".
(2) When transmitting successively
• When transmission of the last data in a consecutive data train finishes, the transmit status bit is cleared to "0".
12.6.7 Transmit Interrupts
(1) Transmit buffer empty interrupt
If the transmit buffer empty interrupt was selected using the SIO Interrupt Request Source Select Register, a
transmit buffer empty interrupt request is generated when data has been transferred from the transmit buffer
register to the transmit shift register. A transmit buffer empty interrupt request is also generated when the
TEN (Transmit Enable) bit is set to "1" (reenabled after being disabled) while the transmit buffer empty
interrupt has been enabled.
12
12-44
Serial I/O
12.6 Transmit Operation in UART Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.6.4 Transmit Operation during UART Mode (Hardware Processing)
The following processing is automatically performed in hardware.
Transfer the content of the transmit buffer
to the transmit shift register
Set the transmit buffer empty bit to "1" Transmit DMA transfer request
Transmit interrupt request
Transmit data
Y (Successive transmission)
Transmit conditions
met ?
Transmit conditions
met ?
Clear the transmit status bit to "0"
Y
N
N
(Note 1)
Note 1: This applies when the transmit interrupt was enabled using the SIO Interrupt Request Enable Register
after selecting the transmit buffer empty interrupt with the SIO Interrupt Request Source Select Register.
End of UART
transmit operation
UART transmit
operation starts
(2) Transmission finished interrupt
If the transmission finished interrupt was selected using the SIO Interrupt Request Source Select Register, a
transmission finished interrupt request is generated when data in the transmit shift register has all been
transmitted.
The SIO Interrupt Request Enable Register and the Interrupt Controller (ICU) must be set before these transmit
interrupts can be used.
12.6.8 Transmit DMA Transfer Request
When data has been transferred from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register, a transmit DMA
transfer request for the corresponding SIO channel is output to the DMAC. A transmit DMA transfer request is
also output when the TEN (Transmit Enable) bit is set to "1" (disabled enabled).
The DMAC must be set before DMA transfers can be used during data transmission.
12
12-45
Serial I/O
12.6 Transmit Operation in UART Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.6.9 Example of UART Transmit Operation
The following shows a typical transmit operation in UART mode.
<UART on transmit side>
<UART on transmit side> <UART on receive side>
TXD
RXD
Transmit enable bit
Transmit buffer
empty bit
b0
b6
b7
ST SP SP
PAR
Write to the
transmit buffer
register
Transmit status bit
TXD
SIO transmit interrupt request (Note 1)
Set
Cleared
: Processing by software : Interrupt request generated
Cleared
Transferred from the transmit buffer
to the transmit shift register
(transmission starts)
Set
Interrupt request accepted (Note 4)
(Note 2)(Note 6)
(Note 3)(Note 7)
(Note 2)
(Note 5)
Transmit
interrupt request Transmit interrupt request
Transmit interrupt request
Interrupt request accepted (Note 4)
(When transmit buffer empty
interrupt is selected)
(When transmission finished
interrupt is selected)
Note 1: Changes of the Interrupt Controller's SIO Transmit Interrupt Control Register interrupt request bit
Note 2: When transmit buffer empty interrupt is enabled (DMA transfer can also be requested at the same time)
Note 3: When transmission finished interrupt is enable
Note 4: The Interrupt Controller's IVECT register is read or the SIO Transmit Interrupt Control Register interrupt request bit cleared
Note 5: A transmit interrupt request is generated when transmission is enabled.
Note 6: Be aware that even after transmit data is written to the transmit buffer, a transmit interrupt request is generated when the
data is transferred from the transmit buffer to the transmit shift register and the transmit buffer is thereby emptied.
Note 7: A transmission finished interrupt request is generated when data in the transmit shift register has all been transmitted.
Figure 12.6.5 Example of UART Transmission (Transmitted Only Once)
12
12-46
Serial I/O
12.6 Transmit Operation in UART Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.6.6 Example of UART Transmission (Transmitted Successively)
: Processing by software : Interrupt request generated
Set
Transmit buffer
empty bit
Transmit enable bit
Cleared
Transmit status bit
Transferred from the
transmit buffer to the
transmit shift register
(transmission starts)
TXD
SIO transmit interrupt request
(Note 1)
(First data) (Next data)
Write to the
transmit buffer
register
First data
Next data is written
upon transmit interrupt
(Note 5)
(Note 2) (Note 2)
<UART on transmit side>
<UART on transmit side> <UART on receive side>
TXD
RXD
ST b7 b0 STSP b7 b0 SP
Cleared when transfer of
the last data is completed
Interrupt request accepted (Note 4)
Next data
(Note 2)(Note 6)
(Note 3) (Note 3)(Note 7)
Interrupt request accepted (Note 4)
(When transmit buffer empty
interrupt is selected)
(When transmission finished
interrupt is selected)
Write to the
transmit buffer
register
Note 1: Changes of the Interrupt Controller's SIO Transmit Interrupt Control Register interrupt request bit
Note 2: When transmit buffer empty interrupt is enabled (DMA transfer can also be requested at the same time)
Note 3: When transmission finished interrupt is enable
Note 4: The Interrupt Controller's IVECT register is read or the SIO Transmit Interrupt Control Register interrupt request bit cleared
Note 5: A transmit interrupt request is generated when transmission is enabled.
Note 6: Be aware that even after transmit data is written to the transmit buffer, a transmit interrupt request is generated when the
data is transferred from the transmit buffer to the transmit shift register and the transmit buffer is thereby emptied.
Note 7: A transmission finished interrupt request is generated when data in the transmit shift register has all been transmitted.
12
12-47
SERIAL I/O
12.7 Receive Operation in UART Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.7 Receive Operation in UART Mode
12.7.1 Initialization for UART Reception
To receive data in UART mode, initialize the serial I/O following the procedure described below.
(1) Setting SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register
• Set the register to UART mode.
• Set parity (when enabled, select odd/even).
• Set the stop bit length.
• Set the character length.
Note: • During UART mode, settings of the internal/external clock select bit have no effect (only the
internal clock is useful).
(2) Setting SIO Transmit Control Register
• Set the clock divider’s divide-by ratio.
(3) Setting SIO Baud Rate Register
Set a baud rate generator value. (See Section 12.6.1, “Setting the UART Baud Rate.”)
(4) Setting SIO interrupt related registers
• Select the source of receive interrupt request (reception finished or receive error) (Interrupt Request
Source Select Register).
• Enable or disable receive interrupts (Interrupt Request Enable Register).
(5) Setting Interrupt Controller
To use receive interrupt, set their priority levels.
(6) Setting DMAC
To issue DMA transfer requests to the internal DMAC when reception has finished, set up the DMAC. (See
Chapter 9, “DMAC.”)
(7) Selecting pin functions
Because the serial I/O related pins serve dual purposes, set the pin functions for use as SIO pins or input/
output ports. (See Chapter 8, “Input/Output Ports and Pin Functions.”)
12
12-48
SERIAL I/O
12.7 Receive Operation in UART Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.7.1 Procedure for Initializing UART Reception
Initialize UART reception
Set the register to UART mode
Set parity (when enabled, select odd/even)
Set the stop bit length
Set the character length
Set SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register
(When using the DMAC)
Set DMAC related registers
Set Interrupt Controller's
SIO Receive Interrupt Control Register
Set SIO interrupt related registers Select the source of receive interrupt reques
Enable or disable receive interrupt requests
Set SIO Baud Rate Register
Select the clock divider divide-by ratio
Set SIO Transmit Control Register
Serial I/O
related registers
End of UART receive initialization
(When using interrupts)
Divide-by ratio = H'00 to H'FF (Note 1)
Note 1: If clock divider divide-by ratio = 1 is selected, it is necessary that the value set in the baud rate
re
g
ister be e
q
ual to or
g
reater than 7.
Set Input/Output Port
Operation Mode Register
12
12-49
SERIAL I/O
12.7 Receive Operation in UART Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.7.2 Starting UART Reception
The serial I/O starts receive operation when all of the following conditions are met after being initialized.
• SIO Receive Control Register receive enable bit is set to "1"
• Start bit (falling edge signal) is applied to the RXD pin
When the above conditions are met, the serial I/O enters UART receive operation. However, the start bit is
checked again at the first rise of the internal receive shift clock and if it is detected high for reasons of noise, etc.,
the serial I/O stops receive operation and waits for the start bit again.
12.7.3 Processing at End of UART Reception
When data reception finishes, the following operation is automatically performed in hardware.
(1) When reception is completed normally
The reception finished (receive buffer full) bit is set to "1".
Notes: • An interrupt request is generated if the reception finished (receive buffer full) interrupt has been
enabled.
• A DMA transfer request is generated.
(2) When a receive error occurred
If an error occurred, the corresponding error bit (OE, FE or PE) and the receive error sum bit are set to "1".
Notes: • If the reception finished interrupt has been selected (by SIO Receive Interrupt Request Source
Select Register), a reception finished interrupt request is generated when interrupt requests
are enabled. However, this does not apply when the detected error is an overrun error, in which
case no reception finished interrupt requests are generated.
• If the receive error interrupt has been selected (by SIO Receive Interrupt Request Source
Select Register), a receive error interrupt request is generated when interrupt requests are
enabled.
• No DMA transfer requests are generated.
12
12-50
SERIAL I/O
12.7 Receive Operation in UART Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.7.2 Receive Operation during UART Mode (Hardware Processing)
The following processing is automatically performed in hardware.
Receive data
Y
Y
N
Transfer data from the SIO Receive Shift
Register to the SIO Receive Buffer Register
Set the SIO Receive Control Register
reception finished bit to "1"
Set the receive status bit to "1"
Overrun error ?
Parity error
or
framing error ?
Receive conditions
met ?
Start bit detected
normally ?
N
Set the SIO Receive Control
Register overrun error bit
and error sum bit to "1"
Set the SIO Receive Control
Register's corresponding error bit
and receive error sum bit to "1"
N
UART receive
operation starts
End of UART reception
Y
N
Y
12
12-51
SERIAL I/O
12.7 Receive Operation in UART Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.7.4 Example of UART Receive Operation
The following shows a typical receive operation in UART mode.
Figure 12.7.3 Example of UART Reception (When Received Normally)
<UART on receive side>
<UART on receive side> <UART on transmit side>
TXD
RXD
Note 1: Changes of the Interrupt Controller's SIO Receive Interrupt Control Register interrupt request bit
Note 2: When reception finished interrupt is enabled (DMA transfer can also be requested at the same time)
Note 3: The Interrupt Controller's IVECT register is read or the SIO Receive Interrupt Control Register interrupt
re
q
uest bit cleared
Receive enable bit
(SIO Receive Control Register)
b0
b6b7ST SP SP
PAR
Reception finished bit
RXD
Set
Cleared
: Processing by software : Interrupt request generated
Internal clock selected
Read from the
receive buffer
Reception finished
interrupt request
(Note 2)
Interrupt request accepted (Note 3)
Receive status bit Automatically cleared for
each receive operation
performed
SIO receive interrupt
request (Note 1)
(When reception finished
interrupt is selected)
(When receive error
interrupt is selected) No interrupt request
12
12-52
SERIAL I/O
12.7 Receive Operation in UART Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.7.4 Example of UART Reception (When Overrun Error Occurred)
<UART on receive side>
<UART on receive side> <UART on transmit side>
TXD
RXD
Note 1: Changes of the Interrupt Controller's SIO Receive Interrupt Control Register interrupt request bit
Note 2: When reception finished interrupt is enabled
Note 3: When receive error interrupt is enabled
Note 4: This is done by clearing the receive enable bit to "0".
Note 5: The Interrupt Controller's IVECT register is read or the SIO Receive Interrupt Control Register interrupt
request bit cleared
Receive enable bit
b7
ST SP
SP
Reception finished bit
RXD
Set
: Processing by software : Interrupt request generated
ST b7
Receive buffer not read
during this interval
First data reception
completed Next data reception
completed
(Note 5)
Overrun error bit
cleared (Note 4)
Overrun error bit
Set
SIO receive interrupt request
(Note 1)
(When reception finished
interrupt is selected)
Reception finished
interrupt request
Interrupt request accepted (Note 5)
Receive error interrupt request
(Note 3)
Interrupt request accepted (Note 5)
(When receive error
interrupt is selected)
(SIO Receive Control Register)
(Note 2)
12
12-53
SERIAL I/O
12.7 Receive Operation in UART Mode
32180 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 12.7.7 Delay in Receive Timing
12.7.5 Start Bit Detection during UART Reception
The start bit is sampled synchronously with the internal BRG output. If the received signal remains low for 8
BRG output cycles after the falling edge of the start bit, the CPU recognizes that part of the received signal as
the start bit and starts latching the received data another 8 cycles after that, beginning with the LSB (first bit). If
some sampled part of the received signal is high before being determined to be the start bit, the CPU starts
detecting the falling edge of the received signal again. Because the start bit is sampled synchronously with the
internal BRG output, there is a delay equivalent to one BRG output cycle at maximum. The subsequent received
data is latched into the internal circuit with that delayed timing.
Figure 12.7.5 Start Bit Detection
Figure 12.7.6 Example of an Invalid Start Bit (Not Received)
Internal BRG output
RXD LSB data
16 cycles
8 cycles 8 cycles
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Internal BRG output
RXD
8 cycles
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Internal RXD
Internal BRG output
RXD
Delay equivalent to one BRG output cycle at maximum
12
12-54
Serial I/O
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.8 Fixed Period Clock Output Function
When using SIO0 or SIO1 in UART mode, the relevant port (P84 or P87) can be switched for use as an SCLKO0
or SCLKO1 pin, respectively. That way, a BRG output clock divided by 2 can be output from the SCLKO pin.
Note: • This clock is output not just during data transfer.
12.8 Fixed Period Clock Output Function
Figure 12.8.1 Example of Fixed Period Clock Output
SCLKO
TXD
RXD
Clock output to
peripheral circuits
UART
transmission/reception
ST SP
Data
ST SPData
50% 50%
BRG period
Internal BRG
output
SCLKO output
1. Configuration when using BRG/2 clock
2. Operation timing
12
12-55
Serial I/O
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.9 Precautions on Using UART Mode
• Settings of SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register and SIO Baud Rate Register
The SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register and SIO Baud Rate Register and the Transmit Control
Register’s BRG count source select bit must always be set before the serial I/O starts operating. If these
settings need to be changed after a transmit or receive operation has started, first check to see that
transmit and receive operations have finished and then clear the transmit and receive enable bits before
making changes.
• Settings of BRG (Baud Rate Register)
If f(BCLK) is selected with the BRG clock source select bit, make sure the value set in the BRG register
is equal to or greater than 7.
Writes to the SIO Baud Rate Register take effect in the next cycle after the BRG counter has finished
counting. However, if the register is accessed for write while transmission and reception are disabled,
the written value takes effect at the same time it is written.
• Transmission/reception using DMA
To transmit/receive data in DMA request mode, enable the DMAC to accept transfer requests (by setting
the DMA Mode Register) before serial communication starts.
• About overrun error
If all bits of the next received data have been set in the SIO Receive Shift Register before reading out the
SIO Receive Buffer Register (i.e., an overrun error occurred), the received data is not stored in the
receive buffer register, with the previous received data retained in it. Once an overrun error occurs,
although a receive operation continues, the subsequent received data is not stored in the receive buffer
register. Before normal receive operation can be restarted, the receive enable bit must be temporarily
cleared. And this is the only way that the overrun error flag can be cleared.
• Flags showing the status of UART receive operation
There are following flags that indicate the status of receive operation during UART mode:
• SIO Receive Control Register receive status bit
• SIO Receive Control Register reception finished bit
• SIO Receive Control Register receive error sum bit
• SIO Receive Control Register overrun error bit
• SIO Receive Control Register parity error bit
• SIO Receive Control Register framing error bit
The manner in which the reception finished bit and various error flags are cleared differs depending on
whether an overrun error occurred, as described below.
[When an overrun error did not occur]
Cleared by reading out the lower byte of the receive buffer register or by clearing the receive enable bit.
[When an overrun error occurred]
Cleared by only clearing the receive enable bit.
12.9 Precautions on Using UART Mode
12
12-56
Serial I/O
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
12.9 Precautions on Using UART Mode
This page is blank for reasons of layout.
CHAPTER 13
CAN MODULE
13.1 Outline of the CAN Module
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
13.3 CAN Protocol
13.4 Initializing the CAN Module
13.5 Transmitting Data Frames
13.6 Receiving Data Frames
13.7 Transmitting Remote Frames
13.8 Receiving Remote Frames
13.9 Precautions about CAN Module
13
13-2 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.1 Outline of the CAN Module
The 32182 contains two-channel Full CAN modules compliant with CAN (Controller Area Network) Specification
V2.0 B Active. These CAN modules each have 16 message slots and three mask registers, effective use of which
helps to reduce the data processing load of the CPU.
The CAN modules are outlined below.
Table 13.1.1 Outline of the CAN Module
Item Description
Protocol CAN Specification V2.0 B Active
Number of message slots Total 16 slots (14 global slots, two local slots)
Polarity 0: Dominant
1: Recessive
Acceptance filter Global mask: 1
(Function to receive only a range Local mask: 2
of IDs specified by receive ID filter)
Baud rate 1 time quantum (Tq) = (BRP + 1) / (CPU clock/2)
(BRP: Baud Rate Prescaler set value)
Baud rate = 1 ..... Max 1 Mbps (Note 1)
Tq period × number of Tq’s for one bit
BRP: 1–255 (0: inhibited)
Number of Tq’s for one bit = Synchronization Segment + Propagation Segment
+ Phase Segment 1 + Phase Segment 2
Propagation Segment: 1–8Tq
Phase Segment 1: 1–8Tq
Phase Segment 2: 1–8Tq (IPT = "1")
Remote frame automatic The slot that received a remote frame responds by automatically sending a data frame.
response function
Timestamp function This function is implemented using a 16-bit counter. The count period is derived from the
CAN bus bit period by dividing it by 1, 2, 3 or 4.
BasicCAN mode BasicCAN function is materialized using two local slots.
Transmit abort function Transmit requests can be canceled.
Loopback function The CAN module receives the data transmitted by itself.
Return bus off function Error active mode is forcibly entered into after clearing the error counter.
Single shot function Transmission is not retried even when it failed due to arbitration-lost or a transmit error.
DMA transfer function DMA transfer request is generated when transmission failed or transmit/receive operation
finished (CAN0 only).
Self-diagnostic function Communication module is diagnosed by communicating internally in the CAN module.
Note 1: The maximum allowable error of oscillation depends on the system configuration (e.g., bus length, clock error, CAN
bus transceiver, sampling position and bit configuration).
13.1 Outline of the CAN Module
Table 13.1.2 DMA Transfer Requests Generated by CAN
DMA Transfer Request by CAN DMAC Input Channel
CAN0: Slot 0 transmission failed or slot 15 transmit/receive operation finished DMA0
CAN1: Slot 1 transmission failed or slot 14 transmit/receive operation finished DMA2
13-3
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
Table 13.1.3 Interrupt Requests Generated by CAN Modules
CAN Module Interrupt Request Source ICU Input Interrupt Source
CAN0 transmission completed CAN0 transmit/receive & error interrupt
CAN1 transmission completed CAN1 transmit/receive & error interrupt
CAN0 reception completed CAN0 transmit/receive & error interrupt
CAN1 reception completed CAN1 transmit/receive & error interrupt
CAN0 bus error CAN0 transmit/receive & error interrupt
CAN1 bus error CAN1 transmit/receive & error interrupt
CAN0 error passive CAN0 transmit/receive & error interrupt
CAN1 error passive CAN1 transmit/receive & error interrupt
CAN0 bus off CAN0 transmit/receive & error interrupt
CAN1 bus off CAN1 transmit/receive & error interrupt
CAN0 single shot CAN0 transmit/receive & error interrupt
CAN1 single shot CAN1 transmit/receive & error interrupt
Acceptance
Filter
Self-
diagnosis
Control
Baud Rate
Prescaler
CPUCLK
Message
Slot × 16
Transmit/receive
completed,
error or single shot
DMA0, 2
CAN0
Internal data bus
Interrupt
CTX0
CRX0
DAM Request
CAN
Protocol
Controller
Acceptance
Filter
Self-
diagnosis
Control
Baud Rate
Prescaler
CPUCLK
Message
Slot × 16
Transmit/receive
completed,
error or single shot
CAN1
Interrupt
CTX1
CRX1
CAN
Protocol
Controller
Figure 13.1.1 Block Diagram of the CAN Modules
13.1 Outline of the CAN Module
13
13-4 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
Shown below is a CAN module related register map.
CAN Module Related Register Map (1/11)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 1000 CAN0 Control Register 13-15
(CAN0CNT)
H'0080 1002 CAN0 Status Register 13-18
(CAN0STAT)
H'0080 1004 CAN0 Frame Format Select Register 13-21
(CAN0FFS)
H'0080 1006 CAN0 Configuration Register 13-22
(CAN0CONF)
H'0080 1008 CAN0 Timestamp Count Register 13-24
(CAN0TSTMP)
H'0080 100A CAN0 Receive Error Count Register CAN0 Transmit Error Count Register 13-25
(CAN0REC) (CAN0TEC)
H'0080 100C CAN0 Slot Interrupt Request Status Register 13-29
(CAN0SLIST)
H'0080 100E (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1010 CAN0 Slot Interrupt Request Enable Register 13-30
(CAN0SLIEN)
H'0080 1012 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1014 CAN0 Error Interrupt Request Status Register CAN0 Error Interrupt Request Enable Register 13-31
(CAN0ERIST) (CAN0ERIEN) 13-32
H'0080 1016 CAN0 Baud Rate Prescaler CAN0 Cause of Error Register 13-26
(CAN0BRP) (CAN0EF) 13-45
H'0080 1018 CAN0 Mode Register CAN0 DMA Transfer Request Select Register 13-46
(CAN0MOD) (CAN0DMARQ) 13-47
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1028 CAN0 Global Mask Register Standard ID0 CAN0 Global Mask Register Standard ID1 13-48
(C0GMSKS0) (C0GMSKS1)
H'0080 102A CAN0 Global Mask Register Extended ID0 CAN0 Global Mask Register Extended ID1 13-49
(C0GMSKE0) (C0GMSKE1)
H'0080 102C CAN0 Global Mask Register Extended ID2 (Use inhibited area) 13-50
(C0GMSKE2)
H'0080 102E (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1030 CAN0 Local Mask Register A Standard ID0 CAN0 Local Mask Register A Standard ID1 13-48
(C0LMSKAS0) (C0LMSKAS1)
H'0080 1032 CAN0 Local Mask Register A Extended ID0 CAN0 Local Mask Register A Extended ID1 13-49
(C0LMSKAE0) (C0LMSKAE1)
H'0080 1034 CAN0 Local Mask Register A Extended ID2 (Use inhibited area) 13-50
(C0LMSKAE2)
H'0080 1036 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1038 CAN0 Local Mask Register B Standard ID0 CAN0 Local Mask Register B Standard ID1 13-48
(C0LMSKBS0) (C0LMSKBS1)
H'0080 103A CAN0 Local Mask Register B Extended ID0 CAN0 Local Mask Register B Extended ID1 13-49
(C0LMSKBE0) (C0LMSKBE1)
H'0080 103C CAN0 Local Mask Register B Extended ID2 (Use inhibited area) 13-50
(C0LMSKBE2)
H'0080 103E (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1040 CAN0 Single-Shot Mode Control Register 13-52
(CAN0SSMODE)
H'0080 1042 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1044 CAN0 Single-Shot Interrupt Request Status Register 13-33
(CAN0SSIST)
H'0080 1046 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1048 CAN0 Single-Shot Interrupt Request Enable Register 13-34
(CAN0SSIEN)
| (Use inhibited area)
|
13-5
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
CAN Module Related Register Map (2/11)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 1050 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Control Register CAN0 Message Slot 1 Control Register 13-53
(C0MSL0CNT) (C0MSL1CNT)
H'0080 1052 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Control Register CAN0 Message Slot 3 Control Register 13-53
(C0MSL2CNT) (C0MSL3CNT)
H'0080 1054 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Control Register CAN0 Message Slot 5 Control Register 13-53
(C0MSL4CNT) (C0MSL5CNT)
H'0080 1056 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Control Register CAN0 Message Slot 7 Control Register 13-53
(C0MSL6CNT) (C0MSL7CNT)
H'0080 1058 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Control Register CAN0 Message Slot 9 Control Register 13-53
(C0MSL8CNT) (C0MSL9CNT)
H'0080 105A CAN0 Message Slot 10 Control Register CAN0 Message Slot 11 Control Register 13-53
(C0MSL10CNT) (C0MSL11CNT)
H'0080 105C CAN0 Message Slot 12 Control Register CAN0 Message Slot 13 Control Register 13-53
(C0MSL12CNT) (C0MSL13CNT)
H'0080 105E CAN0 Message Slot 14 Control Register CAN0 Message Slot 15 Control Register 13-53
(C0MSL14CNT) (C0MSL15CNT)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1100 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Standard ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Standard ID1 13-57
(C0MSL0SID0) (C0MSL0SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1102 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Extended ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Extended ID1 13-59
(C0MSL0EID0) (C0MSL0EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1104 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Extended ID2 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL0EID2) (C0MSL0DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1106 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL0DT0) (C0MSL0DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1108 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL0DT2) (C0MSL0DT3) 13-66
H'0080 110A CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL0DT4) (C0MSL0DT5) 13-68
H'0080 110C CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL0DT6) (C0MSL0DT7) 13-70
H'0080 110E CAN0 Message Slot 0 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL0TSP)
H'0080 1110 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Standard ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Standard ID1 13-57
(C0MSL1SID0) (C0MSL1SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1112 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Extended ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Extended ID1 13-59
(C0MSL1EID0) (C0MSL1EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1114 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Extended ID2 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL1EID2) (C0MSL1DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1116 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL1DT0) (C0MSL1DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1118 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL1DT2) (C0MSL1DT3) 13-66
H'0080 111A CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL1DT4) (C0MSL1DT5) 13-68
H'0080 111C CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL1DT6) (C0MSL1DT7) 13-70
H'0080 111E CAN0 Message Slot 1 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL1TSP)
H'0080 1120 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Standard ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Standard ID1 13-57
(C0MSL2SID0) (C0MSL2SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1122 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Extended ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Extended ID1 13-59
(C0MSL2EID0) (C0MSL2EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1124 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Extended ID2 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL2EID2) (C0MSL2DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1126 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL2DT0) (C0MSL2DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1128 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL2DT2) (C0MSL2DT3) 13-66
H'0080 112A CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL2DT4) (C0MSL2DT5) 13-68
H'0080 112C CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL2DT6) (C0MSL2DT7) 13-70
H'0080 112E CAN0 Message Slot 2 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL2TSP)
|
13
13-6 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN Module Related Register Map (3/11)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 1130 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Standard ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Standard ID1 13-57
(C0MSL3SID0) (C0MSL3SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1132 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Extended ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Extended ID1 13-59
(C0MSL3EID0) (C0MSL3EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1134 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Extended ID2 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL3EID2) (C0MSL3DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1136 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL3DT0) (C0MSL3DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1138 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL3DT2) (C0MSL3DT3) 13-66
H'0080 113A CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL3DT4) (C0MSL3DT5) 13-68
H'0080 113C CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL3DT6) (C0MSL3DT7) 13-70
H'0080 113E CAN0 Message Slot 3 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL3TSP)
H'0080 1140 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Standard ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Standard ID1 13-57
(C0MSL4SID0) (C0MSL4SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1142 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Extended ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Extended ID1 13-59
(C0MSL4EID0) (C0MSL4EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1144 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Extended ID2 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL4EID2) (C0MSL4DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1146 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL4DT0) (C0MSL4DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1148 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL4DT2) (C0MSL4DT3) 13-66
H'0080 114A CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL4DT4) (C0MSL4DT5) 13-68
H'0080 114C CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL4DT6) (C0MSL4DT7) 13-70
H'0080 114E CAN0 Message Slot 4 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL4TSP)
H'0080 1150 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Standard ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Standard ID1 13-57
(C0MSL5SID0) (C0MSL5SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1152 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Extended ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Extended ID1 13-59
(C0MSL5EID0) (C0MSL5EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1154 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Extended ID2 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL5EID2) (C0MSL5DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1156 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL5DT0) (C0MSL5DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1158 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL5DT2) (C0MSL5DT3) 13-66
H'0080 115A CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL5DT4) (C0MSL5DT5) 13-68
H'0080 115C CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL5DT6) (C0MSL5DT7) 13-70
H'0080 115E CAN0 Message Slot 5 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL5TSP)
H'0080 1160 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Standard ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Standard ID1 13-57
(C0MSL6SID0) (C0MSL6SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1162 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Extended ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Extended ID1 13-59
(C0MSL6EID0) (C0MSL6EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1164 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Extended ID2 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL6EID2) (C0MSL6DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1166 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL6DT0) (C0MSL6DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1168 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL6DT2) (C0MSL6DT3) 13-66
H'0080 116A CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL6DT4) (C0MSL6DT5) 13-68
H'0080 116C CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL6DT6) (C0MSL6DT7) 13-70
H'0080 116E CAN0 Message Slot 6 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL6TSP)
13-7
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
CAN Module Related Register Map (4/11)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 1170 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Standard ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Standard ID1 13-57
(C0MSL7SID0) (C0MSL7SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1172 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Extended ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Extended ID1 13-59
(C0MSL7EID0) (C0MSL7EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1174 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Extended ID2 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL7EID2) (C0MSL7DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1176 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL7DT0) (C0MSL7DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1178 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL7DT2) (C0MSL7DT3) 13-66
H'0080 117A CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL7DT4) (C0MSL7DT5) 13-68
H'0080 117C CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL7DT6) (C0MSL7DT7) 13-70
H'0080 117E CAN0 Message Slot 7 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL7TSP)
H'0080 1180 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Standard ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Standard ID1 13-57
(C0MSL8SID0) (C0MSL8SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1182 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Extended ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Extended ID1 13-59
(C0MSL8EID0) (C0MSL8EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1184 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Extended ID2 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL8EID2) (C0MSL8DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1186 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL8DT0) (C0MSL8DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1188 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL8DT2) (C0MSL8DT3) 13-66
H'0080 118A CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL8DT4) (C0MSL8DT5) 13-68
H'0080 118C CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL8DT6) (C0MSL8DT7) 13-70
H'0080 118E CAN0 Message Slot 8 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL8TSP)
H'0080 1190 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Standard ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Standard ID1 13-57
(C0MSL9SID0) (C0MSL9SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1192 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Extended ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Extended ID1 13-59
(C0MSL9EID0) (C0MSL9EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1194 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Extended ID2 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL9EID2) (C0MSL9DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1196 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL9DT0) (C0MSL9DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1198 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL9DT2) (C0MSL9DT3) 13-66
H'0080 119A CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL9DT4) (C0MSL9DT5) 13-68
H'0080 119C CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL9DT6) (C0MSL9DT7) 13-70
H'0080 119E CAN0 Message Slot 9 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL9TSP)
H'0080 11A0 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Standard ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Standard ID1 13-57
(C0MSL10SID0) (C0MSL10SID1) 13-58
H'0080 11A2 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Extended ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Extended ID1 13-59
(C0MSL10EID0) (C0MSL10EID1) 13-60
H'0080 11A4 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Extended ID2 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL10EID2) (C0MSL10DLC) 13-62
H'0080 11A6 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL10DT0) (C0MSL10DT1) 13-64
H'0080 11A8 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL10DT2) (C0MSL10DT3) 13-66
H'0080 11AA CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL10DT4) (C0MSL10DT5) 13-68
H'0080 11AC CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL10DT6) (C0MSL10DT7) 13-70
H'0080 11AE CAN0 Message Slot 10 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL10TSP)
13
13-8 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN Module Related Register Map (5/11)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 11B0 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Standard ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Standard ID1 13-57
(C0MSL11SID0) (C0MSL11SID1) 13-58
H'0080 11B2 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Extended ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Extended ID1 13-59
(C0MSL11EID0) (C0MSL11EID1) 13-60
H'0080 11B4 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Extended ID2 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL11EID2) (C0MSL11DLC) 13-62
H'0080 11B6 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL11DT0) (C0MSL11DT1) 13-64
H'0080 11B8 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL11DT2) (C0MSL11DT3) 13-66
H'0080 11BA CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL11DT4) (C0MSL11DT5) 13-68
H'0080 11BC CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL11DT6) (C0MSL11DT7) 13-70
H'0080 11BE CAN0 Message Slot 11 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL11TSP)
H'0080 11C0 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Standard ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Standard ID1 13-57
(C0MSL12SID0) (C0MSL12SID1) 13-58
H'0080 11C2 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Extended ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Extended ID1 13-59
(C0MSL12EID0) (C0MSL12EID1) 13-60
H'0080 11C4 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Extended ID2 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL12EID2) (C0MSL12DLC) 13-62
H'0080 11C6 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL12DT0) (C0MSL12DT1) 13-64
H'0080 11C8 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL12DT2) (C0MSL12DT3) 13-66
H'0080 11CA CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL12DT4) (C0MSL12DT5) 13-68
H'0080 11CC CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL12DT6) (C0MSL12DT7) 13-70
H'0080 11CE CAN0 Message Slot 12 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL12TSP)
H'0080 11D0 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Standard ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Standard ID1 13-57
(C0MSL13SID0) (C0MSL13SID1) 13-58
H'0080 11D2 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Extended ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Extended ID1 13-59
(C0MSL13EID0) (C0MSL13EID1) 13-60
H'0080 11D4 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Extended ID2 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL13EID2) (C0MSL13DLC) 13-62
H'0080 11D6 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL13DT0) (C0MSL13DT1) 13-64
H'0080 11D8 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL13DT2) (C0MSL13DT3) 13-66
H'0080 11DA CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL13DT4) (C0MSL13DT5) 13-68
H'0080 11DC CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL13DT6) (C0MSL13DT7) 13-70
H'0080 11DE CAN0 Message Slot 13 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL13TSP)
H'0080 11E0 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Standard ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Standard ID1 13-57
(C0MSL14SID0) (C0MSL14SID1) 13-58
H'0080 11E2 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Extended ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Extended ID1 13-59
(C0MSL14EID0) (C0MSL14EID1) 13-60
H'0080 11E4 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Extended ID2 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL14EID2) (C0MSL14DLC) 13-62
H'0080 11E6 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL14DT0) (C0MSL14DT1) 13-64
H'0080 11E8 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL14DT2) (C0MSL14DT3) 13-66
H'0080 11EA CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL14DT4) (C0MSL14DT5) 13-68
H'0080 11EC CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL14DT6) (C0MSL14DT7) 13-70
H'0080 11EE CAN0 Message Slot 14 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL14TSP)
13-9
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
CAN Module Related Register Map (6/11)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 11F0 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Standard ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Standard ID1 13-57
(C0MSL15SID0) (C0MSL15SID1) 13-58
H'0080 11F2 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Extended ID0 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Extended ID1 13-59
(C0MSL15EID0) (C0MSL15EID1) 13-60
H'0080 11F4 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Extended ID2 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data Length Register 13-61
(C0MSL15EID2) (C0MSL15DLC) 13-62
H'0080 11F6 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 0 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 1 13-63
(C0MSL15DT0) (C0MSL15DT1) 13-64
H'0080 11F8 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 2 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 3 13-65
(C0MSL15DT2) (C0MSL15DT3) 13-66
H'0080 11FA CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 4 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 5 13-67
(C0MSL15DT4) (C0MSL15DT5) 13-68
H'0080 11FC CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 6 CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 7 13-69
(C0MSL15DT6) (C0MSL15DT7) 13-70
H'0080 11FE CAN0 Message Slot 15 Timestamp 13-71
(C0MSL15TSP)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1400 CAN1 Control Register 13-15
(CAN1CNT)
H'0080 1402 CAN1 Status Register 13-18
(CAN1STAT)
H'0080 1404 CAN1 Frame Format Select Register 13-21
(CAN1FFS)
H'0080 1406 CAN1 Configuration Register 13-22
(CAN1CONF)
H'0080 1408 CAN1 Timestamp Count Register 13-24
(CAN1TSTMP)
H'0080 140A CAN1 Receive Error Count Register CAN1 Transmit Error Count Register 13-25
(CAN1REC) (CAN1TEC)
H'0080 140C CAN1 Slot Interrupt Request Status Register 13-29
(CAN1SLIST)
H'0080 140E (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1410 CAN1 Slot Interrupt Request Enable Register 13-30
(CAN1SLIEN)
H'0080 1412 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1414 CAN1 Error Interrupt Request Status Register CAN1 Error Interrupt Request Enable Register 13-31
(CAN1ERIST) (CAN1ERIEN) 13-32
H'0080 1416 CAN1 Baud Rate Prescaler CAN1 Cause of Error Register 13-26
(CAN1BRP) (CAN1EF) 13-45
H'0080 1418 CAN1 Mode Register (Use inhibited area) 13-46
(CAN1MOD) (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1428 CAN1 Global Mask Register Standard ID0 CAN1 Global Mask Register Standard ID1 13-48
(C1GMSKS0) (C1GMSKS1)
H'0080 142A CAN1 Global Mask Register Extended ID0 CAN1 Global Mask Register Extended ID1 13-49
(C1GMSKE0) (C1GMSKE1)
H'0080 142C CAN1 Global Mask Register Extended ID2 (Use inhibited area) 13-50
(C1GMSKE2)
H'0080 142E (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1430 CAN1 Local Mask Register A Standard ID0 CAN1 Local Mask Register A Standard ID1 13-48
(C1LMSKAS0) (C1LMSKAS1)
H'0080 1432 CAN1 Local Mask Register A Extended ID0 CAN1 Local Mask Register A Extended ID1 13-49
(C1LMSKAE0) (C1LMSKAE1)
H'0080 1434 CAN1 Local Mask Register A Extended ID2 (Use inhibited area) 13-50
(C1LMSKAE2)
H'0080 1436 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1438 CAN1 Local Mask Register B Standard ID0 CAN1 Local Mask Register B Standard ID1 13-48
(C1LMSKBS0) (C1LMSKBS1)
H'0080 143A CAN1 Local Mask Register B Extended ID0 CAN1 Local Mask Register B Extended ID1 13-49
(C1LMSKBE0) (C1LMSKBE1)
H'0080 143C CAN1 Local Mask Register B Extended ID2 (Use inhibited area) 13-50
(C1LMSKBE2)
H'0080 143E (Use inhibited area)
|
|
13
13-10 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN Module Related Register Map (7/11)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 1440 CAN1 Single-Shot Mode Control Register 13-52
(CAN1SSMODE)
H'0080 1442 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1444 CAN1 Single-Shot Interrupt Request Status Register 13-33
(CAN1SSIST)
H'0080 1446 (Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1448 CAN1 Single-Shot Interrupt Request Enable Register 13-34
(CAN1SSIEN)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1450 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Control Register CAN1 Message Slot 1 Control Register 13-53
(C1MSL0CNT) (C1MSL1CNT)
H'0080 1452 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Control Register CAN1 Message Slot 3 Control Register 13-53
(C1MSL2CNT) (C1MSL3CNT)
H'0080 1454 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Control Register CAN1 Message Slot 5 Control Register 13-53
(C1MSL4CNT) (C1MSL5CNT)
H'0080 1456 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Control Register CAN1 Message Slot 7 Control Register 13-53
(C1MSL6CNT) (C1MSL7CNT)
H'0080 1458 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Control Register CAN1 Message Slot 9 Control Register 13-53
(C1MSL8CNT) (C1MSL9CNT)
H'0080 145A CAN1 Message Slot 10 Control Register CAN1 Message Slot 11 Control Register 13-53
(C1MSL10CNT) (C1MSL11CNT)
H'0080 145C CAN1 Message Slot 12 Control Register CAN1 Message Slot 13 Control Register 13-53
(C1MSL12CNT) (C1MSL13CNT)
H'0080 145E CAN1 Message Slot 14 Control Register CAN1 Message Slot 15 Control Register 13-53
(C1MSL14CNT) (C1MSL15CNT)
(Use inhibited area)
H'0080 1500 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Standard ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Standard ID1 13-57
(C1MSL0SID0) (C1MSL0SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1502 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Extended ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Extended ID1 13-59
(C1MSL0EID0) (C1MSL0EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1504 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Extended ID2 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL0EID2) (C1MSL0DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1506 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL0DT0) (C1MSL0DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1508 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL0DT2) (C1MSL0DT3) 13-66
H'0080 150A CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL0DT4) (C1MSL0DT5) 13-68
H'0080 150C CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL0DT6) (C1MSL0DT7) 13-70
H'0080 150E CAN1 Message Slot 0 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL0TSP)
H'0080 1510 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Standard ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Standard ID1 13-57
(C1MSL1SID0) (C1MSL1SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1512 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Extended ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Extended ID1 13-59
(C1MSL1EID0) (C1MSL1EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1514 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Extended ID2 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL1EID2) (C1MSL1DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1516 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL1DT0) (C1MSL1DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1518 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL1DT2) (C1MSL1DT3) 13-66
H'0080 151A CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL1DT4) (C1MSL1DT5) 13-68
H'0080 151C CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL1DT6) (C1MSL1DT7) 13-70
H'0080 151E CAN1 Message Slot 1 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL1TSP)
|
|
13-11
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
CAN Module Related Register Map (8/11)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 1520 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Standard ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Standard ID1 13-57
(C1MSL2SID0) (C1MSL2SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1522 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Extended ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Extended ID1 13-59
(C1MSL2EID0) (C1MSL2EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1524 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Extended ID2 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL2EID2) (C1MSL2DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1526 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL2DT0) (C1MSL2DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1528 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL2DT2) (C1MSL2DT3) 13-66
H'0080 152A CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL2DT4) (C1MSL2DT5) 13-68
H'0080 152C CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL2DT6) (C1MSL2DT7) 13-70
H'0080 152E CAN1 Message Slot 2 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL2TSP)
H'0080 1530 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Standard ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Standard ID1 13-57
(C1MSL3SID0) (C1MSL3SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1532 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Extended ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Extended ID1 13-59
(C1MSL3EID0) (C1MSL3EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1534 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Extended ID2 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL3EID2) (C1MSL3DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1536 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL3DT0) (C1MSL3DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1538 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL3DT2) (C1MSL3DT3) 13-66
H'0080 153A CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL3DT4) (C1MSL3DT5) 13-68
H'0080 153C CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL3DT6) (C1MSL3DT7) 13-70
H'0080 153E CAN1 Message Slot 3 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL3TSP)
H'0080 1540 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Standard ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Standard ID1 13-57
(C1MSL4SID0) (C1MSL4SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1542 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Extended ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Extended ID1 13-59
(C1MSL4EID0) (C1MSL4EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1544 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Extended ID2 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL4EID2) (C1MSL4DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1546 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL4DT0) (C1MSL4DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1548 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL4DT2) (C1MSL4DT3) 13-66
H'0080 154A CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL4DT4) (C1MSL4DT5) 13-68
H'0080 154C CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL4DT6) (C1MSL4DT7) 13-70
H'0080 154E CAN1 Message Slot 4 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL4TSP)
H'0080 1550 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Standard ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Standard ID1 13-57
(C1MSL5SID0) (C1MSL5SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1552 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Extended ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Extended ID1 13-59
(C1MSL5EID0) (C1MSL5EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1554 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Extended ID2 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL5EID2) (C1MSL5DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1556 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL5DT0) (C1MSL5DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1558 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL5DT2) (C1MSL5DT3) 13-66
H'0080 155A CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL5DT4) (C1MSL5DT5) 13-68
H'0080 155C CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL5DT6) (C1MSL5DT7) 13-70
H'0080 155E CAN1 Message Slot 5 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL5TSP)
13
13-12 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN Module Related Register Map (9/11)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 1560 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Standard ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Standard ID1 13-57
(C1MSL6SID0) (C1MSL6SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1562 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Extended ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Extended ID1 13-59
(C1MSL6EID0) (C1MSL6EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1564 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Extended ID2 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL6EID2) (C1MSL6DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1566 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL6DT0) (C1MSL6DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1568 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL6DT2) (C1MSL6DT3) 13-66
H'0080 156A CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL6DT4) (C1MSL6DT5) 13-68
H'0080 156C CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL6DT6) (C1MSL6DT7) 13-70
H'0080 156E CAN1 Message Slot 6 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL6TSP)
H'0080 1570 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Standard ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Standard ID1 13-57
(C1MSL7SID0) (C1MSL7SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1572 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Extended ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Extended ID1 13-59
(C1MSL7EID0) (C1MSL7EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1574 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Extended ID2 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL7EID2) (C1MSL7DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1576 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL7DT0) (C1MSL7DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1578 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL7DT2) (C1MSL7DT3) 13-66
H'0080 157A CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL7DT4) (C1MSL7DT5) 13-68
H'0080 157C CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL7DT6) (C1MSL7DT7) 13-70
H'0080 157E CAN1 Message Slot 7 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL7TSP)
H'0080 1580 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Standard ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Standard ID1 13-57
(C1MSL8SID0) (C1MSL8SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1582 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Extended ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Extended ID1 13-59
(C1MSL8EID0) (C1MSL8EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1584 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Extended ID2 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL8EID2) (C1MSL8DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1586 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL8DT0) (C1MSL8DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1588 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL8DT2) (C1MSL8DT3) 13-66
H'0080 158A CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL8DT4) (C1MSL8DT5) 13-68
H'0080 158C CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL8DT6) (C1MSL8DT7) 13-70
H'0080 158E CAN1 Message Slot 8 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL8TSP)
H'0080 1590 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Standard ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Standard ID1 13-57
(C1MSL9SID0) (C1MSL9SID1) 13-58
H'0080 1592 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Extended ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Extended ID1 13-59
(C1MSL9EID0) (C1MSL9EID1) 13-60
H'0080 1594 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Extended ID2 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL9EID2) (C1MSL9DLC) 13-62
H'0080 1596 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL9DT0) (C1MSL9DT1) 13-64
H'0080 1598 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL9DT2) (C1MSL9DT3) 13-66
H'0080 159A CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL9DT4) (C1MSL9DT5) 13-68
H'0080 159C CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL9DT6) (C1MSL9DT7) 13-70
H'0080 159E CAN1 Message Slot 9 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL9TSP)
13-13
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
CAN Module Related Register Map (10/11)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 15A0 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Standard ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Standard ID1 13-57
(C1MSL10SID0) (C1MSL10SID1) 13-58
H'0080 15A2 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Extended ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Extended ID1 13-59
(C1MSL10EID0) (C1MSL10EID1) 13-60
H'0080 15A4 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Extended ID2 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL10EID2) (C1MSL10DLC) 13-62
H'0080 15A6 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL10DT0) (C1MSL10DT1) 13-64
H'0080 15A8 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL10DT2) (C1MSL10DT3) 13-66
H'0080 15AA CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL10DT4) (C1MSL10DT5) 13-68
H'0080 15AC CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL10DT6) (C1MSL10DT7) 13-70
H'0080 15AE CAN1 Message Slot 10 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL10TSP)
H'0080 15B0 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Standard ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Standard ID1 13-57
(C1MSL11SID0) (C1MSL11SID1) 13-58
H'0080 15B2 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Extended ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Extended ID1 13-59
(C1MSL11EID0) (C1MSL11EID1) 13-60
H'0080 15B4 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Extended ID2 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL11EID2) (C1MSL11DLC) 13-62
H'0080 15B6 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL11DT0) (C1MSL11DT1) 13-64
H'0080 15B8 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL11DT2) (C1MSL11DT3) 13-66
H'0080 15BA CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL11DT4) (C1MSL11DT5) 13-68
H'0080 15BC CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL11DT6) (C1MSL11DT7) 13-70
H'0080 15BE CAN1 Message Slot 11 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL11TSP)
H'0080 15C0 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Standard ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Standard ID1 13-57
(C1MSL12SID0) (C1MSL12SID1) 13-58
H'0080 15C2 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Extended ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Extended ID1 13-59
(C1MSL12EID0) (C1MSL12EID1) 13-60
H'0080 15C4 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Extended ID2 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL12EID2) (C1MSL12DLC) 13-62
H'0080 15C6 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL12DT0) (C1MSL12DT1) 13-64
H'0080 15C8 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL12DT2) (C1MSL12DT3) 13-66
H'0080 15CA CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL12DT4) (C1MSL12DT5) 13-68
H'0080 15CC CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL12DT6) (C1MSL12DT7) 13-70
H'0080 15CE CAN1 Message Slot 12 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL12TSP)
H'0080 15D0 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Standard ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Standard ID1 13-57
(C1MSL13SID0) (C1MSL13SID1) 13-58
H'0080 15D2 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Extended ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Extended ID1 13-59
(C1MSL13EID0) (C1MSL13EID1) 13-60
H'0080 15D4 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Extended ID2 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL13EID2) (C1MSL13DLC) 13-62
H'0080 15D6 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL13DT0) (C1MSL13DT1) 13-64
H'0080 15D8 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL13DT2) (C1MSL13DT3) 13-66
H'0080 15DA CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL13DT4) (C1MSL13DT5) 13-68
H'0080 15DC CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL13DT6) (C1MSL13DT7) 13-70
H'0080 15DE CAN1 Message Slot 13 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL13TSP)
13
13-14 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN Module Related Register Map (11/11)
Address +0 address +1 address See pages
b0 b7 b8 b15
H'0080 15E0 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Standard ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Standard ID1 13-57
(C1MSL14SID0) (C1MSL14SID1) 13-58
H'0080 15E2 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Extended ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Extended ID1 13-59
(C1MSL14EID0) (C1MSL14EID1) 13-60
H'0080 15E4 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Extended ID2 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL14EID2) (C1MSL14DLC) 13-62
H'0080 15E6 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL14DT0) (C1MSL14DT1) 13-64
H'0080 15E8 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL14DT2) (C1MSL14DT3) 13-66
H'0080 15EA CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL14DT4) (C1MSL14DT5) 13-68
H'0080 15EC CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL14DT6) (C1MSL14DT7) 13-70
H'0080 15EE CAN1 Message Slot 14 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL14TSP)
H'0080 15F0 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Standard ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Standard ID1 13-57
(C1MSL15SID0) (C1MSL15SID1) 13-58
H'0080 15F2 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Extended ID0 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Extended ID1 13-59
(C1MSL15EID0) (C1MSL15EID1) 13-60
H'0080 15F4 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Extended ID2 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data Length Register 13-61
(C1MSL15EID2) (C1MSL15DLC) 13-62
H'0080 15F6 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 0 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 1 13-63
(C1MSL15DT0) (C1MSL15DT1) 13-64
H'0080 15F8 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 2 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 3 13-65
(C1MSL15DT2) (C1MSL15DT3) 13-66
H'0080 15FA CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 4 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 5 13-67
(C1MSL15DT4) (C1MSL15DT5) 13-68
H'0080 15FC CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 6 CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 7 13-69
(C1MSL15DT6) (C1MSL15DT7) 13-70
H'0080 15FE CAN1 Message Slot 15 Timestamp 13-71
(C1MSL15TSP)
13-15
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
13.2.1 CAN Control Registers
CAN0 Control Register (CAN0CNT) <Address: H’0080 1000>
CAN1 Control Register (CAN1CNT) <Address: H’0080 1400>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
FR
ST
T
SP
TSRRB
O
BCM LBM RST
0
0
0
0
0
00
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
01
<After reset: H’0011>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–3 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
4 RBO 0: Enable normal operation R(Note 1)
Return bus off bit 1: Request clearing of error counter
5 TSR 0: Enable count operation R(Note 1)
Timestamp counter reset bit 1: Initialize count (to H’0000)
6–7 TSP 00: Select CAN bus bit clock R W
Timestamp prescaler bit 01: Select CAN bus bit clock divided by 2
10: Select CAN bus bit clock divided by 3
11: Select CAN bus bit clock divided by 4
8-10 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
11 FRST 0: Negate reset R W
Forcible reset bit 1: Forcibly reset
12 BCM 0: Disable BasicCAN mode R W
BasicCAN mode bit 1: BasicCAN mode
13 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
14 LBM 0: Disable loopback function R W
Loopback mode bit 1: Enable loopback function
15 RST 0: Negate reset R W
CAN reset bit 1: Request reset
Note 1: Only writing "1" is effective. Automatically cleared to "0" in hardware.
13
13-16 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
(1) RBO (Return Bus Off) bit (Bit 4)
Setting this bit to "1" clears the CAN Receive Error Count Register (CANnREC) and CAN Transmit Error
Count Register (CANnTEC) to H'00 and forcibly places the CAN module into an error active state. This bit is
cleared when the CAN module goes to an error active state.
Note: • Communication becomes possible when 11 consecutive recessive bits are detected on the
CAN bus after clearing the error counters.
(2) TSR (Timestamp Counter Reset) bit (Bit 5)
Setting this bit to "1" clears the value of the CAN Timestamp Count Register (CANnTSTMP) to H’0000. This
bit is cleared after the value of the CAN Timestamp Count Register (CANnTSTMP) is cleared to H’0000.
(3) TSP (Timestamp Prescaler) bits (Bits 6–7)
These bits select the count clock source for the timestamp counter.
Note: • Do not change settings of the TSP bits while CAN is operating (CAN Status Register CRS bit = "0").
(4) FRST (Forcible Reset) bit (Bit 11)
When the FRST bit is set to "1", the CAN module is separated from the CAN bus and the protocol control unit
is reset regardless of whether the CAN module currently is communicating. Up to 5 BCLK periods are re-
quired before the protocol control unit is reset after setting the FRST bit.
Notes: • In order for CAN communication to start, the FRST and RST bits must be cleared to "0".
• If the FRST bit is set to "1" during communication, the CTX pin output goes high immediately
after that. Therefore, setting the FRST bit to "1" while sending CAN frame may cause a CAN
bus error.
• The CAN Message Slot Control Register’s transmit/receive requests are not cleared for rea-
sons that the FRST or RST bits are set.
• When the protocol control unit is reset by setting the FRST bit to "1", the CAN Timestamp
Count and CAN Transmit/Receive Error Count Registers are initialized to "0".
(5) BCM (BasicCAN Mode) bit (Bit 12)
By setting this bit to "1", the CAN module can be operated in BasicCAN mode.
• Operation during BasicCAN mode
During BasicCAN mode, two local slots—slots 14 and 15—are used as dual buffers, and the received
frames with matching ID are stored alternately in slots 14 and 15 by acceptance filtering. Used for this
acceptance filtering when slot 14 is active (next received frame to be stored in slot 14) are the ID set in
slot 14 and local mask A, and those when slot 15 is active are the ID set in slot 15 and local mask B. Two
types of frames—data frame and remote frame—can be received in this mode. By setting the same ID
and the same mask register value for the two slots, the possibility of loosing messages when, for
example, receiving frames which have many IDs may be reduced.
13-17
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
• Procedure for entering BasicCAN mode
Follow the procedure below during initialization:
1) Set the ID for slots 14 and 15 and the local mask registers A and B. (We recommend setting the same
value.)
2) Set the frame types to be handled by slots 14 and 15 (standard or extended) in the CAN Extended ID
Register. (We recommend setting the same type.)
3) Set the Message Slot Control Registers for slots 14 and 15 for data frame reception.
4) Set the BCM bit to "1".
Notes: • Do not change settings of the BCM bit while CAN is operating (CAN Status Register CRS
bit = "0").
• The first slot that is active after clearing the RST bit is slot 14.
• Even during BasicCAN mode, slots 0 to 13 can be used the same way as in normal
operation.
(6) LBM (Loopback Mode) bit (Bit 14)
When the LBM bit is set to "1", if a receive slot exists whose ID matches that of the frame sent by the CAN
module itself, then the frame can be received.
Notes: • ACK is not returned for the transmit frame.
• Do not change settings of the LBM bit while CAN is operating (CAN Status Register CRS bit = "0").
(7) RST (CAN Reset) bit (Bit 15)
When the RST bit is cleared to "0", the CAN module is connected to the CAN bus and becomes ready to
communicate after detecting 11 consecutive recessive bits. Also, the CAN Timestamp Count Register
thereby starts counting. When the RST bit is set to "1", the bus will enter an idle state after sending frames
from the slots which have transmit requests set by that time, then the protocol control unit is reset and the
CAN module is disconnected from the CAN bus. Frames received during this time are processed normally.
Notes: • It is inhibited to set a new transmit request until the CAN Status Register CRS bit is set to "1"
and the protocol control unit is reset after setting the RST bit to "1".
• When the protocol control unit is reset by setting the RST bit to "1", the CAN Timestamp Count
and CAN Transmit/Receive Error Count Registers are initialized to "0".
• In order for CAN communication to start, the FRST and RST bits must be cleared to "0".
13
13-18 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
13.2.2 CAN Status Registers
CAN0 Status Register (CAN0STAT) <Address: H’0080 1002>
CAN1 Status Register (CAN1STAT) <Address: H’0080 1402>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
TSCRSCTSB
RSB
CRSLBSBCSCBSEPSBOS MSN
0
0000
0
0100000000
<After reset: H’0100>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
1 BOS 0: Not bus off R
Bus off status bit 1: Bus off state
2 EPS 0: Not error passive R
Error passive status bit 1: Error passive state
3 CBS 0: No error occurred R
CAN bus error bit 1: Error occurred
4 BCS 0: Normal mode R
BasicCAN mode status bit 1: BasicCAN mode
5 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
6 LBS 0: Normal mode R
Loopback status bit 1: Loopback mode
7 CRS 0: Operating R
CAN reset status bit 1: Reset
8 RSB 0: Not receiving R
Receive status bit 1: Receiving
9 TSB 0: Not sending R
Transmit status bit 1: Sending
10 RSC 0: Reception not completed R
Reception completed status bit 1: Reception completed
11 TSC 0: Transmission not completed R
Transmission completed status bit 1: Transmission completed
12–15 MSN Number of the message slot which has finished R
Message slot number bit sending or receiving
0000: Slot 0
0001: Slot 1
0010: Slot 2
0011: Slot 3
0100: Slot 4
0101: Slot 5
0110: Slot 6
0111: Slot 7
1000: Slot 8
1001: Slot 9
1010: Slot 10
1011: Slot 11
1100: Slot 12
1101: Slot 13
1110: Slot 14
1111: Slot 15
13-19
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
(1) BOS (Bus Off Status) bit (Bit 1)
When BOS bit = "1", it means that the CAN module is in a bus off state.
[Set condition]
This bit is set to "1" when the transmit error count register value exceeded 255 and a bus off state is
entered.
[Clear condition]
This bit is cleared when restored from the bus off state.
(2) EPS (Error Passive Status) bit (Bit 2)
When EPS bit = "1", it means that the CAN module is in an error passive state.
[Set condition]
This bit is set to "1" when the transmit or receive error count register value exceeded 127 and an error
passive state is entered.
[Clear condition]
This bit is cleared when restored from the error passive state.
(3) CBS (CAN Bus Error) bit (Bit 3)
[Set condition]
This bit is set to "1" when an error is detected on the CAN bus.
[Clear condition]
This bit is cleared when the CAN module finished sending or receiving normally.
(4) BCS (BasicCAN Status) bit (Bit 4)
When BCS bit = "1", it means that the CAN module is operating in BasicCAN mode.
[Set condition]
This bit is set to "1" when the CAN module is operating in BasicCAN mode. BasicCAN mode is useful
when the following conditions are met:
• CAN Control Register BCM bit = "1"
• Slots 14 and 15 both are set for data frame reception
[Clear condition]
This bit is cleared by clearing the BCM bit to "0".
(5) LBS (Loopback Status) bit (Bit 6)
When LBS bit = "1", it means that the CAN module is operating in loopback mode.
[Set condition]
This bit is set to "1" by setting the CAN Control Register LBM (loopback mode) bit to "1".
[Clear condition]
This bit is cleared by clearing the LBM bit to "0".
13
13-20 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
(6) CRS (CAN Reset Status) bit (Bit 7)
When CRS bit = "1", it means that the protocol control unit is in a reset state.
[Set condition]
This bit is set to "1" when the CAN protocol control unit is in a reset state.
[Clear condition]
This bit is cleared by clearing the CAN Control Register RST (CAN reset) and FRST bits to "0".
(7) RSB (Receive Status) bit (Bit 8)
[Set condition]
This bit is set to "1" when the CAN module is operating as a receive node.
[Clear condition]
This bit is cleared when the CAN module starts operating as a transmit node or enters a bus idle state.
(8) TSB (Transmit Status) bit (Bit 9)
[Set condition]
This bit is set to "1" when the CAN module is operating as a transmit node.
[Clear condition]
This bit is cleared when the CAN module starts operating as a receive node or enters a bus idle state.
(9) RSC (Reception Completed Status) bit (Bit 10)
[Set condition]
This bit is set to "1" when the CAN module has finished receiving normally (regardless of whether there
is any slot that meets receive conditions).
[Clear condition]
This bit is cleared when the CAN module has finished sending normally.
(10) TSC (Transmission Completed Status) bit (Bit 11)
[Set condition]
This bit is set to "1" when the CAN module has finished sending normally.
[Clear condition]
This bit is cleared when the CAN module has finished receiving normally.
(11) MSN (Message Slot Number) bits (Bits 12–15)
These bits indicate the relevant slot number when the CAN module has finished sending or finished storing
the received data. These bits cannot be cleared to "0" in software.
Note: • When CAN module receives the frame that is transmitted by the CAN module itself during
loopback mode, the MSN bits indicate the transmit slot number.
13-21
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
13.2.3 CAN Frame Format Select Registers
CAN0 Frame Format Select Register (CAN0FFS) <Address: H’0080 1004>
CAN1 Frame Format Select Register (CAN1FFS) <Address: H’0080 1404>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
FFE0 FFE1 FFE2 FFE3 FFE4 FFE6 FFE7 FFE8 FFE9 FFE10 FFE11 FFE12 FFE13 FFE14 FFE15FFE5
0000000000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 FFE0 (slot 0 extended format bit) 0: Standard ID format R W
1 FFE1 (slot 1 extended format bit) 1: Extended ID format
2 FFE2 (slot 2 extended format bit)
3 FFE3 (slot 3 extended format bit)
4 FFE4 (slot 4 extended format bit)
5 FFE5 (slot 5 extended format bit)
6 FFE6 (slot 6 extended format bit)
7 FFE7 (slot 7 extended format bit)
8 FFE8 (slot 8 extended format bit)
9 FFE9 (slot 9 extended format bit)
10 FFE10 (slot 10 extended format bit)
11 FFE11 (slot 11 extended format bit)
12 FFE12 (slot 12 extended format bit)
13 FFE13 (slot 13 extended format bit)
14 FFE14 (slot 14 extended format bit)
15 FFE15 (slot 15 extended format bit)
This register selects the format of frames handled by message slots corresponding to the respective bits in the
register. Setting any bit in this register to "0" selects the standard ID format, and setting any bit in this register to
"1" selects the extended ID format.
Note: • Settings of any bit in this register can only be changed when the corresponding slot does not
have transmit or receive requests set.
13
13-22 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
13.2.4 CAN Configuration Registers
CAN0 Configuration Register (CAN0CONF) <Address: H'0080 1006>
CAN1 Configuration Register (CAN1CONF) <Address: H'0080 1406>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
SAMPRBPH1PH2SJW
000000000000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–1 SJW 00: SJW = 1Tq R W
reSynchronization Jump Width setting bit 01: SJW = 2Tq
10: SJW = 3Tq
11: SJW = 4Tq
2–4 PH2 000: Phase Segment2 = 1Tq R W
Phase Segment2 setting bit 001: Phase Segment2 = 2Tq
010: Phase Segment2 = 3Tq
011: Phase Segment2 = 4Tq
100: Phase Segment2 = 5Tq
101: Phase Segment2 = 6Tq
110: Phase Segment2 = 7Tq
111: Phase Segment2 = 8Tq
5–7 PH1 000: Phase Segment1 = 1Tq R W
Phase Segment1 setting bit 001: Phase Segment1 = 2Tq
010: Phase Segment1 = 3Tq
011: Phase Segment1 = 4Tq
100: Phase Segment1 = 5Tq
101: Phase Segment1 = 6Tq
110: Phase Segment1 = 7Tq
111: Phase Segment1 = 8Tq
8–10 PRB 000: Propagation Segment = 1Tq R W
Propagation Segment setting bit 001: Propagation Segment = 2Tq
010: Propagation Segment = 3Tq
011: Propagation Segment = 4Tq
100: Propagation Segment = 5Tq
101: Propagation Segment = 6Tq
110: Propagation Segment = 7Tq
111: Propagation Segment = 8Tq
11 S AM 0: Sampled one time R W
Sampling count select bit 1: Sampled three times
12–15 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
Notes: • Do not change settings of the CAN Configuration Register (CAN0CONF or CAN1CONF) during CAN operation (CAN
Status Register CRS bit = "0").
• When setting the bits in this register, make sure the conditions given below are met:
• Number of Tq’s for one bit: 8–25 Tq’s
• SJW min (Phase Segment1, Phase Segment2)
• Phase Segment2 = max (Phase Segment1, IPT) where IPT = 1 for the internal CAN modules of the 32182
min() is the function that returns the smaller of two values; max() is the function that returns the maximum value.
13-23
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
(1) SJW bits (Bits 0–1)
These bits set the reSynchronization Jump Width.
(2) PH2 bits (Bits 2–4)
These bits set the width of Phase Segment2.
(3) PH1 bits (Bits 5–7)
These bits set the width of Phase Segment1.
(4) PRB bits (Bits 8–10)
These bits set the width of Propagation Segment.
(5) SAM bit (Bit 11)
This bit sets the number of times each bit is sampled. When SAM = "0", the value sampled at the end of
Phase Segment1 is assumed to be the value of the bit. When SAM = "1", the value of the bit is determined by
a majority circuit from three sampled values, each sampled 2 Tq’s before, 1 Tq before, and at the end of
Phase Segment1.
Table 13.2.1 Typical Settings of Bit Timing when CPU Clock = 80 MHz
Baud Rate BRP Set Value Tq Period (ns) No. of Tq’s in 1 Bit PROP + PH1 PH2 Sampling Point
1M bps 1 50 20 13 6 70%
3 100 10 7 2 80%
3 100 10 6 3 70%
3 100 10 5 4 60%
4 125 8 5 2 75%
4 125 8 4 3 63%
500K bps 4 125 16 13 2 88%
4 125 16 12 3 81%
4 125 16 11 4 75%
7 200 10 7 2 80%
7 200 10 6 3 70%
7 200 10 5 4 60%
9 250 8 5 2 75%
9 250 8 4 3 63%
Table 13.2.2 Typical Settings of Bit Timing when CPU Clock = 64 MHz
Baud Rate BRP Set Value Tq Period (ns) No. of Tq’s in 1 Bit PROP + PH1 PH2 Sampling Point
1M bps 1 62.5 16 10 5 69%
3 125 8 5 2 75%
3 125 8 4 3 63%
500K bps 3 125 16 13 2 88%
3 125 16 11 4 75%
7 250 8 5 2 75%
7 250 8 4 3 63%
13
13-24 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
13.2.5 CAN Timestamp Count Registers
CAN0 Timestamp Count Register (CAN0TSTMP) <Address: H’0080 1008>
CAN1 Timestamp Count Register (CAN1TSTMP) <Address: H’0080 1408>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
CANTSTMP
0000000000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–15 CANTSTMP 16-bit timestamp count value R
The CAN module contains a 16-bit up-count register. The count period can be selected from the CAN bus bit period
divided by 1, 2, 3 or 4 by setting the CAN Control Register (CANnCNT) TSP (Timestamp Prescaler) bits.
When the CAN module finishes sending or receiving, it captures the count register value and stores the value in a
message slot. The counter is made to start counting by clearing the CAN Control Register (CANnCNT) RST bit to "0".
Notes: • The CAN protocol control unit can be reset and the counter initialized to H’0000 by setting the
CAN Control Register (CANnCNT) RST (CAN Reset) bit to "1". Or the counter can be initialized
to H’0000 while the CAN module remains operating by setting the TSR (Timestamp Counter
Reset) bit to "1".
• If any slot with the matching ID exists during loopback mode, the CAN module stores the
timestamp value in that slot when it finished receiving. (No timestamp values are stored this
way when the CAN module finished sending.)
• The count period of the CAN Timestamp Count Register varies with the CAN resynchronization
function.
13-25
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
13.2.6 CAN Error Count Registers
CAN0 Receive Error Count Register (CAN0REC) <Address: H’0080 100A>
CAN1 Receive Error Count Register (CAN1REC) <Address: H’0080 140A>
123456b7b0 REC
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–7 REC Receive error count value R
During an error active/error passive state, a receive error count value is stored in this register.
The count is decremented when frames are received normally or incremented when an error occurred. If the
CAN module finished receiving normally when REC 128 (error passive), REC is set to 127. During a bus off
state, an undefined value is stored in this register. The count is reset to H’00 upon returning to an error active
state.
CAN0 Transmit Error Count Register (CAN0TEC) <Address: H’0080 100B>
CAN1 Transmit Error Count Register (CAN1TEC) <Address: H’0080 140B>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8 TEC
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–15 TEC Transmit error count value R
During an error active/error passive state, a transmit error count value is stored in this register.
The count is decremented when frames are transmitted normally or incremented when an error occurred. Dur-
ing a bus off state, an undefined value is stored in this register. The count is reset to H’00 upon returning to an
error active state.
13
13-26 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
13.2.7 CAN Baud Rate Prescalers
CAN0 Baud Rate Prescaler (CAN0BRP) <Address: H’0080 1016>
CAN1 Baud Rate Prescaler (CAN1BRP) <Address: H’0080 1416>
123456b7b0 BRP
00000001
<After reset: H’01>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–7 BRP Baud rate prescaler value R W
This register sets the Tq period of CAN. The CAN baud rate is determined by (Tq period × number of Tq’s in one bit).
Tq period = (BRP + 1) / (CPU clock/2)
CAN transfer baud rate = 1
Tq period × number of Tq’s in one bit
Number of Tq’s in one bit = Synchronization Segment + Propagation Segment
+ Phase Segment 1 + Phase Segment 2
Notes: • Setting H’00 (divide by 1) is inhibited.
• Do not change settings of the CAN Baud Rate Prescaler (CANnBRP) during CAN operation
(CAN Status Register CRS bit = "0").
13-27
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
13.2.8 CAN Interrupt Related Registers
The CAN interrupt related registers are used to control the interrupt request signals output to the Interrupt Control-
ler by CAN.
(1) Interrupt request status bit
This status bit is used to determine whether an interrupt is requested. When an interrupt request occurs, this
bit is set in hardware (cannot be set in software). The status bit is cleared by writing "0". Writing "1" has no
effect; the bit retains the status it had before the write. Because this bit is unaffected by the interrupt request
enable bit, it can also be used to inspect the operating status of peripheral functions. In interrupt handling,
make sure that within the grouped interrupt request status, only the status bit for the interrupt request that has
been serviced is cleared. If the status bit for any interrupt request that has not been serviced is cleared, the
pending interrupt request is cleared simultaneously with its status bit.
(2) Interrupt request enable bit
This bit is used to disable unnecessary interrupt requests within the grouped interrupt request. Set this bit to
"1" to enable interrupt requests or "0" to disable interrupt requests.
Figure 13.2.1 Interrupt Request Status and Enable Registers
To the Interrupt Controller
Interrupt request from
each peripheral function
Interrupt request status
Data bus
Set
• Group interrupt
Interrupt request enable
clear F/F
F/F
Data = 0
13
13-28 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
Figure 13.2.2 Example for Clearing Interrupt Request Status
b4 5 b7
Interrupt request status
Initial state
Event occurs on bit 6
Interrupt request
Event occurs on bit 4
Only bit 6 cleared
Bit 4 data retained
b4 5 b7
1 1 0 1
Write to the interrupt request status
Example for clearing interrupt request status
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 0 0 0
Program example
ISTREG = 0xfd; /* Clear ISTAT1 (0x02 bit) only */
To clear the Interrupt Request Status Register 0 (ISTREG) interrupt request status 1, ISTAT1 (0x02 bit)
To clear an interrupt request status, always be sure to write 1 to all other interrupt request status bits. At this time,
avoid using a logic operation like the one shown below. Because it requires three step-ISTREG read, logic operation
and write, if another interrupt request occurs between the read and write, status may be inadvertently cleared.
b4 5 6 b7
Interrupt request status
Event occurs on bit 6
Event occurs on bit 4
Only bit 6 cleared
Bit 4 also cleared
0 0 1 0
1 0 1 0
0 0 0 0
Read
0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0
Clear bit 6 (AND'ing with 1101)
Write
6
6
ISTREG &= 0xfd; /* Clear ISTAT1 (0x02 bit) only */
13-29
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
CAN0 Slot Interrupt Request Status Register (CAN0SLIST) <Address: H’0080 100C>
CAN1 Slot Interrupt Request Status Register (CAN1SLIST) <Address: H’0080 140C>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
SSB0 SSB1 SSB2 SSB3 SSB4 SSB6 SSB7 SSB8 SSB9 SSB10 SSB11 SSB12 SSB13 SSB14 SSB15SSB5
0000000000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 SSB0 (slot 0 interrupt request status bit) 0: Interrupt not requested R(Note 1)
1 SSB1 (slot 1 interrupt request status bit) 1: Interrupt requested
2 SSB2 (slot 2 interrupt request status bit)
3 SSB3 (slot 3 interrupt request status bit)
4 SSB4 (slot 4 interrupt request status bit)
5 SSB5 (slot 5 interrupt request status bit)
6 SSB6 (slot 6 interrupt request status bit)
7 SSB7 (slot 7 interrupt request status bit)
8 SSB8 (slot 8 interrupt request status bit)
9 SSB9 (slot 9 interrupt request status bit)
10 SSB10 (slot 10 interrupt request status bit)
11 SSB11 (slot 11 interrupt request status bit)
12 SSB12 (slot 12 interrupt request status bit)
13 SSB13 (slot 13 interrupt request status bit)
14 SSB14 (slot 14 interrupt request status bit)
15 SSB15 (slot 15 interrupt request status bit)
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the status it had before the write.
When using CAN interrupts, this register helps to know which slot requested an interrupt.
• Slots set for transmission
The corresponding bit is set to "1" when the CAN module finished sending. This bit is cleared by writing "0" in
software.
• Slots set for reception
The corresponding bit is set to "1" when the CAN module finished receiving and finished storing the received
message in the message slot. This bit is cleared by writing "0" in software.
When writing to the CAN slot interrupt request status, make sure only the bits to be cleared are set to "0" and all
other bits are set to "1". Those bits that have been set to "1" are unaffected by writing in software and retain the
value they had before the write.
Notes: • If the automatic response function is enabled for remote frame receive slots, the request status
is set after the CAN module finished receiving a remote frame and after it finished sending a
data frame.
• For remote frame transmit slots, the request status is set after the CAN module finished sending
a remote frame and after it finished receiving a data frame.
• If the request status is set by an interrupt request at the same time it is cleared in software, the
former has priority so that the request status is set.
13
13-30 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN0 Slot Interrupt Request Enable Register (CAN0SLIEN) <Address: H’0080 1010>
CAN1 Slot Interrupt Request Enable Register (CAN1SLIEN) <Address: H’0080 1410>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
IRB0 IRB1 IRB2 IRB3 IRB4 IRB6 IRB7 IRB8 IRB9 IRB10 IRB11 IRB12 IRB13 IRB14 IRB15IRB5
0000000000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 IRB0 (slot 0 interrupt request enable bit) 0: Mask (disable) interrupt request R W
1 IRB1 (slot 1 interrupt request enable bit) 1: Enable interrupt request
2 IRB2 (slot 2 interrupt request enable bit)
3 IRB3 (slot 3 interrupt request enable bit)
4 IRB4 (slot 4 interrupt request enable bit)
5 IRB5 (slot 5 interrupt request enable bit)
6 IRB6 (slot 6 interrupt request enable bit)
7 IRB7 (slot 7 interrupt request enable bit)
8 IRB8 (slot 8 interrupt request enable bit)
9 IRB9 (slot 9 interrupt request enable bit)
10 IRB10 (slot 10 interrupt request enable bit)
11 IRB11 (slot 11 interrupt request enable bit)
12 IRB12 (slot 12 interrupt request enable bit)
13 IRB13 (slot 13 interrupt request enable bit)
14 IRB14 (slot 14 interrupt request enable bit)
15 IRB15 (slot 15 interrupt request enable bit)
This register is used to enable or disable the interrupt requests that will be generated when data transmission or
reception in each corresponding slot is completed. Setting IRBn (n = 0–15) to "1" enables the interrupt request
to be generated when data transmission or reception in the corresponding slot is completed. The CAN Slot
Interrupt Request Status Register (CANnSLIST) helps to know which slot requested the interrupt.
13-31
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
CAN0 Error Interrupt Request Status Register (CAN0ERIST) <Address: H’0080 1014>
CAN1 Error Interrupt Request Status Register (CAN1ERIST) <Address: H’0080 1414>
123456b7b0 BEIS EPIS EOIS
000
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–4 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
5 BEIS 0: Interrupt not requested R(Note 1)
CAN bus error interrupt request status bit 1: Interrupt requested
6 EPIS
Error passive interrupt request status bit
7 EOIS
Bus off interrupt request status bit
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the status it had before the write.
When using CAN interrupts, if the interrupt request sources are associated with errors, this register helps to
know which source generated the interrupt.
(1) BEIS (CAN Bus Error Interrupt Request Status) bit (Bit 5)
The BEIS bit is set to "1" when a communication error is detected. This bit is cleared by writing "0" in soft-
ware.
(2) EPIS (Error Passive Interrupt Request Status) bit (Bit 6)
The EPIS bit is set to "1" when the CAN module goes to an error passive state. This bit is cleared by writing
"0" in software.
(3) EOIS (Bus Off Interrupt Request Status) bit (Bit 7)
The EOIS bit is set to "1" when the CAN module goes to a bus off passive state. This bit is cleared by writing
"0" in software.
When writing to the CAN error interrupt request status, make sure only the bits to be cleared are set to "0" and
all other bits are set to "1". Those bits that have been set to "1" are unaffected by writing in software and retain
the value they had before the write.
13
13-32 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN0 Error Interrupt Request Enable Register (CAN0ERIEN) <Address: H’0080 1015>
CAN1 Error Interrupt Request Enable Register (CAN1ERIEN) <Address: H’0080 1415>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8 BEIEN EPIEN EOIEN
000
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–12 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
13 BEIEN 0: Mask (disable) interrupt request R W
CAN bus error interrupt request enable bit 1: Enable interrupt request
14 EPIEN
Error passive interrupt request enable bit
15 EOIEN
Bus off interrupt request enable bit
(1) BEIEN (CAN Bus Error Interrupt Request Enable) bit (Bit 5)
The BEIEN bit enables or disables the interrupt requests to be generated when CAN bus errors occurred.
CAN bus error interrupt requests are enabled by setting this bit to "1".
(2) EPIEN (Error Passive Interrupt Request Enable) bit (Bit 6)
The EPIEN bit enables or disables the interrupt requests to be generated when the CAN module entered an
error passive state. Error passive interrupt requests are enabled by setting this bit to "1".
(3) EOIEN (Bus Off Interrupt Request Enable) bit (Bit 7)
The EOIEN bit enables or disables the interrupt requests to be generated when the CAN module entered a
bus off state. Bus off interrupt requests are enabled by setting this bit to "1".
13-33
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
CAN0 Single-Shot Interrupt Request Status Register (CAN0SSIST) <address: H’0080 1044>
CAN1 Single-Shot Interrupt Request Status Register (CAN1SSIST) <Address: H’0080 1444>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
SSIST0 SSIST1 SSIST2 SSIST3 SSIST4 SSIST5 SSIST6 SSIST7 SSIST8 SSIST9 SSIST10 SSIST11 SSIST12 SSIST13 SSIST14 SSIST15
0000000000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 SSIST0 0: No arbitration-lost or transmit error R(Note 1)
Slot 0 single-shot interrupt request status 1: Arbitration-lost or transmit error occurred
1 SSIST1
Slot 1 single-shot interrupt request status
2 SSIST2
Slot 2 single-shot interrupt request status
3 SSIST3
Slot 3 single-shot interrupt request status
4 SSIST4
Slot 4 single-shot interrupt request status
5 SSIST5
Slot 5 single-shot interrupt request status
6 SSIST6
Slot 6 single-shot interrupt request status
7 SSIST7
Slot 7 single-shot interrupt request status
8 SSIST8
Slot 8 single-shot interrupt request status
9 SSIST9
Slot 9 single-shot interrupt request status
10 SSIST10
Slot 10 single-shot interrupt request status
11 SSIST11
Slot 11 single-shot interrupt request status
12 SSIST12
Slot 12 single-shot interrupt request status
13 SSIST13
Slot 13 single-shot interrupt request status
14 SSIST14
Slot 14 single-shot interrupt request status
15 SSIST15
Slot 15 single-shot interrupt request status
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the status it had before the write.
If transmission in any slot failed for reasons of a detection of arbitration-lost or a transmit error, the correspond-
ing bit in this register is set to "1". The bit is cleared by writing "0" in software.
Furthermore, if the corresponding bit in the CAN single-shot interrupt request enable register has been set to "1",
an interrupt request can be generated when transmission failed.
When writing to the CAN single-shot interrupt request status, make sure only the bits to be cleared are set to "0"
and all other bits are set to "1". Those bits that have been set to "1" are unaffected by writing in software and
retain the value they had before the write.
13
13-34 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN0 Single-Shot Interrupt Request Enable Register (CAN0SSIEN) <Address: H’0080 1048>
CAN1 Single-Shot Interrupt Request Enable Register (CAN1SSIEN) <Address: H’0080 1448>
b01234567891011121314b15
SSIEN0 SSIEN1 SSIEN2 SSIEN3 SSIEN4 SSIEN5 SSIEN6 SSIEN7 SSIEN8 SSIEN9 SSIEN10 SSIEN11 SSIEN12 SSIEN13 SSIEN14 SSIEN15
0000000000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 SSIEN0 0: Disable interrupt request R W
Slot 0 single-shot interrupt request enable bit 1: Enable interrupt request
1 SSIEN1
Slot 1 single-shot interrupt request enable bit
2 SSIEN2
Slot 2 single-shot interrupt request enable bit
3 SSIEN3
Slot 3 single-shot interrupt request enable bit
4 SSIEN4
Slot 4 single-shot interrupt request enable bit
5 SSIEN5
Slot 5 single-shot interrupt request enable bit
6 SSIEN6
Slot 6 single-shot interrupt request enable bit
7 SSIEN7
Slot 7 single-shot interrupt request enable bit
8 SSIEN8
Slot 8 single-shot interrupt request enable bit
9 SSIEN9
Slot 9 single-shot interrupt request enable bit
10 SSIEN10
Slot 10 single-shot interrupt request enable bit
11 SSIEN11
Slot 11 single-shot interrupt request enable bit
12 SSIEN12
Slot 12 single-shot interrupt request enable bit
13 SSIEN13
Slot 13 single-shot interrupt request enable bit
14 SSIEN14
Slot 14 single-shot interrupt request enable bit
15 SSIEN15
Slot 15 single-shot interrupt request enable bit
This register is used to enable or disable the interrupt requests that will be generated when transmission in each
corresponding slot has failed. Setting any bit in this register to "1" enables the interrupt request to be generated
when transmission in the corresponding slot (in single-shot mode only) has failed. The CAN Single-Shot Inter-
rupt Request Status Register helps to know which slot requested the interrupt.
13-35
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
IRB7
SSB7
IRB6
SSB6
IRB5
SSB5
IRB4
SSB4
F/F
F/F
IRB3
SSB3
F/F
F/F
IRB2
SSB2
F/F
F/F
IRB1
SSB1
F/F
F/F
IRB0
SSB0
b7
b7
b6
b6
b5
b5
b4
b4
b3
b3
b2
b2
b1
b1
b0
b0
Data bus
Slot 0 transmission/reception completed
Slot 1 transmission/reception completed
Slot 2 transmission/reception completed
Slot 3 transmission/reception completed
Slot 4 transmission/reception completed
Slot 5 transmission/reception completed
Slot 6 transmission/reception completed
Slot 7 transmission/reception completed
To the remaining 27-source inputs in the next page
CAN0 transmit/receive &
error interrupt request
(Level)
35-source inputs
CAN0SLIST (H'0080 100C)
CAN0SLIEN (H'0080 1010)
Figure 13.2.3 Block Diagram of the CAN0 Transmit/Receive & Error Interrupt Requests (1/5)
13
13-36 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
IRB15
SSB15
IRB14
SSB14
IRB13
SSB13
IRB12
SSB12
F/F
F/F
IRB11
SSB11
F/F
F/F
IRB10
SSB10
F/F
F/F
IRB9
SSB9
F/F
F/F
IRB8
SSB8
b15
b15
b14
b14
b13
b13
b12
b12
b11
b11
b10
b10
b9
b9
b8
b8
Data bus
Slot 8 transmission/reception completed
Slot 9 transmission/reception completed
Slot 10 transmission/reception completed
Slot 11 transmission/reception completed
Slot 12 transmission/reception completed
Slot 13 transmission/reception completed
Slot 14 transmission/reception completed
Slot 15 transmission/reception completed
To the preceding page
(Level)
27-source inputs
CAN0SLIST (H'0080 100C)
CAN0SLIEN (H'0080 1010)
To the remaining 19-source inputs in the next page
Figure 13.2.4 Block Diagram of the CAN0 Transmit/Receive & Error Interrupt Requests (2/5)
13-37
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
Figure 13.2.5 Block Diagram of the CAN0 Transmit/Receive & Error Interrupt Requests (3/5)
F/F
F/F
EOIEN
EOIS
F/F
F/F
EPIEN
EPIS
F/F
F/F
BEIEN
BEIS
b15
b7
b14
b6
b13
b5
Data bus
CAN bus error occurs
Go to error passive state
Go to bus off state
To the preceding page
(Level)
19-source inputs
CAN0ERIST (H'0080 1014)
CAN0ERIEN (H'0080 1015)
To the remaining 16-source inputs in the next page
13
13-38 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
SSIEN7
SSIST7
SSIEN6
SSIST6
SSIEN5
SSIST5
SSIEN4
SSIST4
F/F
F/F
SSIEN3
SSIST3
F/F
F/F
SSIEN2
SSIST2
F/F
F/F
SSIEN1
SSIST1
F/F
F/F
SSIEN0
SSIST0
b7
b7
b6
b6
b5
b5
b4
b4
b3
b3
b2
b2
b1
b1
b0
b0
Data bus
Slot 0 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 1 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 2 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 3 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 4 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 5 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 6 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 7 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
To the preceding page
(Level)
16-source inputs
CAN0SSIST (H'0080 1044)
CAN0SSIEN (H'0080 1048)
To the remaining 8-source inputs in the next page
Figure 13.2.6 Block Diagram of the CAN0 Transmit/Receive & Error Interrupt Requests (4/5)
13-39
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
Figure 13.2.7 Block Diagram of the CAN0 Transmit/Receive & Error Interrupt Requests (5/5)
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
SSIEN15
SSIST15
SSIEN14
SSIST14
SSIEN13
SSIST13
SSIEN12
SSIST12
F/F
F/F
SSIEN11
SSIST11
F/F
F/F
SSIEN10
SSIST10
F/F
F/F
SSIEN9
SSIST9
F/F
F/F
SSIEN8
SSIST8
b15
b15
b14
b14
b13
b13
b12
b12
b11
b11
b10
b10
b9
b9
b8
b8
Data bus
Slot 8 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 9 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 10 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 11 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 12 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 13 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 14 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 15 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
To the preceding page
(Level)
8-source inputs
CAN0SSIST (H'0080 1044)
CAN0SSIEN (H'0080 1048)
13
13-40 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
Figure 13.2.8 Block Diagram of the CAN1 Transmit/Receive & Error Interrupt Requests (1/5)
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
IRB7
SSB7
IRB6
SSB6
IRB5
SSB5
IRB4
SSB4
F/F
F/F
IRB3
SSB3
F/F
F/F
IRB2
SSB2
F/F
F/F
IRB1
SSB1
F/F
F/F
IRB0
SSB0
b7
b7
b6
b6
b5
b5
b4
b4
b3
b3
b2
b2
b1
b1
b0
b0
Data bus
Slot 0 transmission/reception completed
Slot 1 transmission/reception completed
Slot 2 transmission/reception completed
Slot 3 transmission/reception completed
Slot 4 transmission/reception completed
Slot 5 transmission/reception completed
Slot 6 transmission/reception completed
Slot 7 transmission/reception completed
To the remaining 27-source inputs in the next page
CAN1 transmit/receive &
error interrupt request
(Level)
35-source inputs
CAN1SLIST (H'0080 140C)
CAN1SLIEN (H'0080 1410)
13-41
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
IRB15
SSB15
IRB14
SSB14
IRB13
SSB13
IRB12
SSB12
F/F
F/F
IRB11
SSB11
F/F
F/F
IRB10
SSB10
F/F
F/F
IRB9
SSB9
F/F
F/F
IRB8
SSB8
b15
b15
b14
b14
b13
b13
b12
b12
b11
b11
b10
b10
b9
b9
b8
b8
Data bus
Slot 8 transmission/reception completed
Slot 9 transmission/reception completed
Slot 10 transmission/reception completed
Slot 11 transmission/reception completed
Slot 12 transmission/reception completed
Slot 13 transmission/reception completed
Slot 14 transmission/reception completed
Slot 15 transmission/reception completed
To the preceding page
(Level)
27-source inputs
CAN1SLIST (H'0080 140C)
CAN1SLIEN (H'0080 1410)
To the remaining 19-source inputs in the next page
Figure 13.2.9 Block Diagram of the CAN1 Transmit/Receive & Error Interrupt Requests (2/5)
13
13-42 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
Figure 13.2.10 Block Diagram of the CAN1 Transmit/Receive & Error Interrupt Requests (3/5)
F/F
F/F
EOIEN
EOIS
F/F
F/F
EPIEN
EPIS
F/F
F/F
BEIEN
BEIS
b15
b7
b14
b6
b13
b5
Data bus
CAN bus error occurs
Go to error passive state
Go to bus off state
To the preceding page
(Level)
19-source inputs
CAN1ERIST (H'0080 1414)
CAN1ERIEN (H'0080 1415)
To the remaining 16-source inputs in the next page
13-43
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
Figure 13.2.11 Block Diagram of the CAN1 Transmit/Receive & Error Interrupt Requests (4/5)
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
SSIEN7
SSIST7
SSIEN6
SSIST6
SSIEN5
SSIST5
SSIEN4
SSIST4
F/F
F/F
SSIEN3
SSIST3
F/F
F/F
SSIEN2
SSIST2
F/F
F/F
SSIEN1
SSIST1
F/F
F/F
SSIEN0
SSIST0
b7
b7
b6
b6
b5
b5
b4
b4
b3
b3
b2
b2
b1
b1
b0
b0
Data bus
Slot 0 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 1 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 2 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 3 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 4 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 5 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 6 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 7 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
To the remaining 8-source inputs in the next page
To the preceding page
(Level)
16-source inputs
CAN1SSIST (H'0080 1444)
CAN1SSIEN (H'0080 1488)
13
13-44 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
Figure 13.2.12 Block Diagram of the CAN1 Transmit/Receive & Error Interrupt Requests (5/5)
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
F/F
SSIEN15
SSIST15
SSIEN14
SSIST14
SSIEN13
SSIST13
SSIEN12
SSIST12
F/F
F/F
SSIEN11
SSIST11
F/F
F/F
SSIEN10
SSIST10
F/F
F/F
SSIEN9
SSIST9
F/F
F/F
SSIEN8
SSIST8
b15
b15
b14
b14
b13
b13
b12
b12
b11
b11
b10
b10
b9
b9
b8
b8
Data bus
Slot 8 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 9 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 10 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 11 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 12 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 13 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 14 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
Slot 15 arbitration-lost/transmit error occurs
To the preceding page
(Level)
8-source inputs
CAN1SSIST (H'0080 1444)
CAN1SSIEN (H'0080 1488)
13-45
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
13.2.9 CAN Cause of Error Registers
CAN0 Cause of Error Register (CAN0EF) <Address: H’0080 1017>
CAN1 Cause of Error Register (CAN1EF) <Address: H’0080 1417>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8 BITEETR STFE FORME CRCE ACKE
000000
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–9 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
10 ETR 0: Error detected when sending R
Transmit/receive error judgment bit 1: Error detected when receiving
11 BITE 0: Bit error not detected R
Bit error detection bit 1: Bit error detected
12 STFE 0: Stuff error not detected R
Stuff error detection bit 1: Stuff error detected
13 FORME 0: Form error not detected R
Form error detection bit 1: Form error detected
14 CRCE 0: CRC error not detected R
CRC error detection bit 1: CRC error detected
15 ACKE 0: ACK error not detected R
ACK error detection bit 1: ACK error detected
This register indicates error information when a communication error occurred.
(1) ETR (Transmit/Receive Error Judgement) bit (Bit 10)
This bit is set to "1" if the CAN module was operating as a reception node when a communication error
occurred. The bit is cleared to "0" by a read of this register.
(2) BITE (Bit Error Detection) bit (Bit 11)
This bit is set to "1" when a bit error was detected. The bit is cleared to "0" by a read of this register.
(3) STFE (Stuff Error Detection) bit (Bit 12)
This bit is set to "1" when a stuff error was detected. The bit is cleared to "0" by a read of this register.
(4) FORME (Form Error Detection) bit (Bit 13)
This bit is set to "1" when a form error was detected. The bit is cleared to "0" by a read of this register.
(5) CRCE (CRC Error Detection) bit (Bit 14)
This bit is set to "1" when a CRC error was detected. The bit is cleared to "0" by a read of this register.
(6) ACKE (ACK Error Detection) bit (Bit 15)
This bit is set to "1" when an ACK error was detected. The bit is cleared to "0" by a read of this register.
Note: • Depending on the error status, two or more bits may be set at the same time.
13
13-46 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CRX pin
CTX pin
Self-diagnostic mode
Ack signal
generating
circuit
Rx
Tx
M32R/ECU CAN module
13.2.10 CAN Mode Registers
CAN0 Mode Register (CAN0MOD) <Address: H’0080 1018>
CAN1 Mode Register (CAN1MOD) <Address: H’0080 1418>
123456b7b0 CMOD
00
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–5 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
6–7 CMOD 00: Normal mode R W
CAN operation mode select bit 01: Bus monitor mode
10: Self-diagnostic mode
11: Settings inhibited
(1) CMOD (CAN Operation Mode Select) bits (Bit 6, Bit 7)
These bits select the CAN operation mode.
• Normal operation mode
Normal transmit/receive operations can be performed.
• Bus monitor mode
Only receive operation is performed. During bus monitor mode, the CTX output is fixed high and neither
ACK nor an error frame can be returned.
Note: • During bus monitor mode, issuing transmit requests is inhibited. The ACK bit is handled as
“Don’t care” during bus monitor mode. Therefore, if all bits of data including the CRC delim-
iter are received normally, it is assumed that data has been received normally no matter
whether the ACK bit is high.
• Self-diagnostic mode
CTX and CRX are connected together internally in the CAN module. When combined with loopback
mode, this mode allows communication to be performed within the CAN module alone. During self-
diagnostic mode, the CTX pin output is fixed high even when transmitting.
Figure 13.2.13 Conceptual Diagram of Self-Diagnostic Mode
13-47
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
13.2.11 CAN DMA Transfer Request Select Register
CAN0 DMA Transfer Request Select Register (CAN0DMARQ) <Address: H’0080 1019>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8
CDMSEL1 CDMSEL0
00
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–13 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
14 CDMSEL1 0: Slot 1 transmission failed R W
CAN DMA1 transfer request source select bit 1: Slot 14 transmission/reception completed
15 CDMSEL0 0: Slot 0 transmission failed R W
CAN DMA0 transfer request source select bit 1: Slot 15 transmission/reception completed
CAN0 can generate DMA transfer requests. This register is used to select the cause or source of that request.
(1) CDMSEL1 (CAN DMA1 Transfer Request Source Select) bit (Bit 14)
This bit selects one of the following two as the cause or source of a transfer request to DMA2.
• Slot 1 transmission failed
If the CDMSEL1 bit is set to "0", a transfer request is generated when transmission in slot 1 has failed for
reasons of arbitration-lost or transmit error.
• Slot 14 transmission/reception completed
If the CDMSEL1 bit is set to "1", a transfer request is generated when transmission/reception in slot 14
is completed.
Notes: • If slot 14 has been set for remote frame transmission, a DMA transfer request is generated
when remote frame transmission is completed as well as when data frame reception is
completed.
• If slot 14 has been set for remote frame reception (automatic response), a DMA transfer
request is generated when remote frame reception is completed as well as when data
frame transmission is completed.
Note: • CAN1 does not have the DMA transfer request function.
(2) CDMSEL0 (CAN DMA0 Transfer Request Source Select) bit (Bit 15)
This bit selects one of the following two as the cause or source of a transfer request to DMA0.
• Slot 0 transmission failed
If the CDMSEL0 bit is set to "0", a transfer request is generated when transmission in slot 0 has failed for
reasons of arbitration-lost or transmit error.
• Slot 15 transmission/reception completed
If the CDMSEL0 bit is set to "1", a transfer request is generated when transmission/reception in slot 15
is completed.
Notes: • If slot 15 has been set for remote frame transmission, a DMA transfer request is generated
when remote frame transmission is completed as well as when data frame reception is
completed.
• If slot 15 has been set for remote frame reception (automatic response), a DMA transfer
request is generated when remote frame reception is completed as well as when data
frame transmission is completed.
13
13-48 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
13.2.12 CAN Mask Registers
CAN0 Global Mask Register Standard ID0 (C0GMSKS0) <Address: H’0080 1028>
CAN0 Local Mask Register A Standard ID0 (C0LMSKAS0) <Address: H’0080 1030>
CAN0 Local Mask Register B Standard ID0 (C0LMSKBS0) <Address: H’0080 1038>
CAN1 Global Mask Register Standard ID0 (C1GMSKS0) <Address: H’0080 1428>
CAN1 Local Mask Register A Standard ID0 (C1LMSKAS0) <Address: H’0080 1430>
CAN1 Local Mask Register B Standard ID0 (C1LMSKBS0) <Address: H’0080 1438>
123456b7b0 SID0M SID1M SID2M SID3M SID4M
00000
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–2 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
3–7 SID0M–SID4M 0: ID not checked R W
(Standard mask ID0–standard mask ID4) 1: ID checked
CAN0 Global Mask Register Standard ID1 (C0GMSKS1) <Address: H’0080 1029>
CAN0 Local Mask Register A Standard ID1 (C0LMSKAS1) <Address: H’0080 1031>
CAN0 Local Mask Register B Standard ID1 (C0LMSKBS1) <Address: H’0080 1039>
CAN1 Global Mask Register Standard ID1 (C1GMSKS1) <Address: H’0080 1429>
CAN1 Local Mask Register A Standard ID1 (C1LMSKAS1) <Address: H’0080 1431>
CAN1 Local Mask Register B Standard ID1 (C1LMSKBS1) <Address: H’0080 1439>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8 SID6MSID5M SID7M SID8M SID9M SID10M
000000
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–9 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
10–15 SID5M–SID10M 0: ID not checked R W
(Standard mask ID5–standard mask ID10) 1: ID checked
Three mask registers are used in acceptance filtering: global mask register, local mask register A and local
mask register B. The global mask register is used for message slots 0-13, while local mask registers A and B are
used for message slots 14 and 15, respectively.
• If any bit in this register is set to "0", the corresponding ID bit is masked (assumed to have matched) during
acceptance filtering.
• If any bit in this register is set to "1", the corresponding ID bit is compared with the receive ID during
acceptance filtering and when it matches the ID set in the message slot, the received data is stored in it.
Notes: • SID0M corresponds to the MSB of the standard ID.
• The global mask register can only be modified when none of slots 0-13 have receive requests set.
• The local mask register A can only be modified when slot 14 does not have a receive request set.
• The local mask register B can only be modified when slot 15 does not have a receive request set.
13-49
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
CAN0 Global Mask Register Extended ID0 (C0GMSKE0) <Address: H’0080 102A>
CAN0 Local Mask Register A Extended ID0 (C0LMSKAE0) <Address: H’0080 1032>
CAN0 Local Mask Register B Extended ID0 (C0LMSKBE0) <Address: H’0080 103A>
CAN1 Global Mask Register Extended ID0 (C1GMSKE0) <Address: H’0080 142A>
CAN1 Local Mask Register A Extended ID0 (C1LMSKAE0) <Address: H’0080 1432>
CAN1 Local Mask Register B Extended ID0 (C1LMSKBE0) <Address: H’0080 143A>
123456b7b0 EID1MEID0M EID2M EID3M
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–3 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
4–7 EID0M–EID3M 0: ID not checked R W
(Extended mask ID0–extended mask ID3) 1: ID checked
CAN0 Global Mask Register Extended ID1 (C0GMSKE1) <Address: H’0080 102B>
CAN0 Local Mask Register A Extended ID1 (C0LMSKAE1) <Address: H’0080 1033>
CAN0 Local Mask Register B Extended ID1 (C0LMSKBE1) <Address: H’0080 103B>
CAN1 Global Mask Register Extended ID1 (C1GMSKE1) <Address: H’0080 142B>
CAN1 Local Mask Register A Extended ID1 (C1LMSKAE1) <Address: H’0080 1433>
CAN1 Local Mask Register B Extended ID1 (C1LMSKBE1) <Address: H’0080 143B>
9 1011121314b15b8 EID6MEID5MEID4M EID7M EID8M EID9M EID10M EID11M
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–15 EID4M–EID11M 0: ID not checked R W
(Extended mask ID4–extended mask ID11) 1: ID checked
13
13-50 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN0 Global Mask Register Extended ID2 (C0GMSKE2) <Address: H’0080 102C>
CAN0 Local Mask Register A Extended ID2 (C0LMSKAE2) <Address: H’0080 1034>
CAN0 Local Mask Register B Extended ID2 (C0LMSKBE2) <Address: H’0080 103C>
CAN1 Global Mask Register Extended ID2 (C1GMSKE2) <Address: H’0080 142C>
CAN1 Local Mask Register A Extended ID2 (C1LMSKAE2) <Address: H’0080 1434>
CAN1 Local Mask Register B Extended ID2 (C1LMSKBE2) <Address: H’0080 143C>
123456B7b0 EID12M EID13M EID14M EID15M EID16M EID17M
000000
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0,1 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
2–7 EID12M–EID17M 0: ID not checked R W
(Extended mask ID12–extended mask ID17) 1: ID checked
Three mask registers are used in acceptance filtering: global mask register, local mask register A and local
mask register B. The global mask register is used for message slots 0-13, while local mask registers A and B are
used for message slots 14 and 15, respectively.
• If any bit in this register is set to "0", the corresponding ID bit is masked (assumed to have matched) during
acceptance filtering.
• If any bit in this register is set to "1", the corresponding ID bit is compared with the receive ID during
acceptance filtering and when it matches the ID set in the message slot, the received data is stored in it.
Notes: • EID0M corresponds to the MSB of the extended ID.
• The global mask register can only be modified when none of slots 0-13 have receive requests set.
• The local mask register A can only be modified when slot 14 does not have a receive request set.
• The local mask register B can only be modified when slot 15 does not have a receive request set.
13-51
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 13
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slots controlled by
the global mask register
Slot controlled by local mask register A
Slot controlled by local mask register B
ID of received
frame ID set in slot Mask register
set value 0: The received message and slot IDs are
not checked for matching and handled as
"Don't care" (masked)
1: The received message and slot IDs are
checked for matching
Mask bit value
Acceptance judgment signal
Acceptance judgment signal
0: The received message is ignored
(not stored in any slot)
1: The received message is stored in
the slot that has the matching ID
Figure 13.2.14 Relationship between the Mask Registers and the Controlled Slots
Figure 13.2.15 Concept of Acceptance Filtering
13
13-52 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
13.2.13 CAN Single-Shot Mode Control Registers
CAN0 Single-Shot Mode Control Register (CAN0SSMODE) <Address: H’0080 1040>
CAN1 Single-Shot Mode Control Register (CAN1SSMODE) <Address: H’0080 1440>
b01234567891011121314b15
SSCNT0 SSCNT1 SSCNT2 SSCNT3 SSCNT4 SSCNT5 SSCNT6 SSCNT7 SSCNT8 SSCNT9 SSCNT10 SSCNT11 SSCNT12 SSCNT13 SSCNT14 SSCNT15
0000000000000000
<After reset: H’0000>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 SSCNT0 (Slot 0 single-shot mode bit) 0: Normal mode R W
1 SSCNT1 (Slot 1 single-shot mode bit) 1: Single-shot mode
2 SSCNT2 (Slot 2 single-shot mode bit)
3 SSCNT3 (Slot 3 single-shot mode bit)
4 SSCNT4 (Slot 4 single-shot mode bit)
5 SSCNT5 (Slot 5 single-shot mode bit)
6 SSCNT6 (Slot 6 single-shot mode bit)
7 SSCNT7 (Slot 7 single-shot mode bit)
8 SSCNT8 (Slot 8 single-shot mode bit)
9 SSCNT9 (Slot 9 single-shot mode bit)
10 SSCNT10 (Slot 10 single-shot mode bit)
11 SSCNT11 (Slot 11 single-shot mode bit)
12 SSCNT12 (Slot 12 single-shot mode bit)
13 SSCNT13 (Slot 13 single-shot mode bit)
14 SSCNT14 (Slot 14 single-shot mode bit)
15 SSCNT15 (Slot 15 single-shot mode bit)
Normally in CAN, if transmission has failed for reasons of arbitration-lost or transmit error, the transmit operation
is continued until successfully transmitted. This register is used to specify for each slot whether or not to retry a
transmit operation in such a case.
In single-shot mode, if transmission fails for reasons of arbitration-lost or transmit error, the transmit operation is
not retried. If any bit in this register is set to "1", the corresponding slot operates in single-shot mode.
Note: • Settings of this register can only be changed when the message slot control register for the slot
whose corresponding bit is to be modified is in the H’00 state.
13-53
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
13.2.14 CAN Message Slot Control Registers
CAN0 Message Slot 0 Control Register (C0MSL0CNT) <Address: H’0080 1050>
CAN0 Message Slot 1 Control Register (C0MSL1CNT) <Address: H’0080 1051>
CAN0 Message Slot 2 Control Register (C0MSL2CNT) <Address: H’0080 1052>
CAN0 Message Slot 3 Control Register (C0MSL3CNT) <Address: H’0080 1053>
CAN0 Message Slot 4 Control Register (C0MSL4CNT) <Address: H’0080 1054>
CAN0 Message Slot 5 Control Register (C0MSL5CNT) <Address: H’0080 1055>
CAN0 Message Slot 6 Control Register (C0MSL6CNT) <Address: H’0080 1056>
CAN0 Message Slot 7 Control Register (C0MSL7CNT) <Address: H’0080 1057>
CAN0 Message Slot 8 Control Register (C0MSL8CNT) <Address: H’0080 1058>
CAN0 Message Slot 9 Control Register (C0MSL9CNT) <Address: H’0080 1059>
CAN0 Message Slot 10 Control Register (C0MSL10CNT) <Address: H’0080 105A>
CAN0 Message Slot 11 Control Register (C0MSL11CNT) <Address: H’0080 105B>
CAN0 Message Slot12 Control Register (C0MSL12CNT) <Address: H’0080 105C>
CAN0 Message Slot 13 Control Register (C0MSL13CNT) <Address: H’0080 105D>
CAN0 Message Slot 14 Control Register (C0MSL14CNT) <Address: H’0080 105E>
CAN0 Message Slot 15 Control Register (C0MSL15CNT) <Address: H’0080 105F>
CAN1 Message Slot 0 Control Register (C1MSL0CNT) <Address: H’0080 1450>
CAN1 Message Slot 1 Control Register (C1MSL1CNT) <Address: H’0080 1451>
CAN1 Message Slot 2 Control Register (C1MSL2CNT) <Address: H’0080 1452>
CAN1 Message Slot 3 Control Register (C1MSL3CNT) <Address: H’0080 1453>
CAN1 Message Slot 4 Control Register (C1MSL4CNT) <Address: H’0080 1454>
CAN1 Message Slot 5 Control Register (C1MSL5CNT) <Address: H’0080 1455>
CAN1 Message Slot 6 Control Register (C1MSL6CNT) <Address: H’0080 1456>
CAN1 Message Slot 7 Control Register (C1MSL7CNT) <Address: H’0080 1457>
CAN1 Message Slot 8 Control Register (C1MSL8CNT) <Address: H’0080 1458>
CAN1 Message Slot 9 Control Register (C1MSL9CNT) <Address: H’0080 1459>
CAN1 Message Slot 10 Control Register (C1MSL10CNT) <Address: H’0080 145A>
CAN1 Message Slot 11 Control Register (C1MSL11CNT) <Address: H’0080 145B>
CAN1 Message Slot 12 Control Register (C1MSL12CNT) <Address: H’0080 145C>
CAN1 Message Slot 13 Control Register (C1MSL13CNT) <Address: H’0080 145D>
CAN1 Message Slot 14 Control Register (C1MSL14CNT) <Address: H’0080 145E>
CAN1 Message Slot 15 Control Register (C1MSL15CNT) <Address: H’0080 145F>
13
13-54 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
123456b7(b15)(b8)b0
RMRRTR RL RA ML TRSTAT TRFIN
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 TR 0: Do not use the message slot as transmit slot R W
Transmit request bit 1: Use the message slot as transmit slot
1 RR 0: Do not use the message slot as receive slot R W
Receive request bit 1: Use the message slot as receive slot
2 RM 0: Transmit/receive data frame R W
Remote bit 1: Transmit/receive remote frame
3 RL 0: Enable automatic response for remote frame R W
Automatic response inhibit bit 1: Disable automatic response for remote frame
4 RA During BasicCAN mode R
Remote active bit 0: Receive data frame (status)
1: Receive remote frame (status)
During normal mode
0: Data frame
1: Remote frame
5 ML 0: No message was lost R(Note 1)
Message lost bit 1: Message was lost
6 TRSTAT During a transmit slot R
Transmit/receive status bit 0: Transmission idle
1: Transmit request accepted
During a receive slot
0: Reception idle
1: Storing received data
7 TRFIN During a transmit slot R(Note 1)
Transmission/reception finished bit 0: Not transmitted yet
1: Finished transmitting
During a receive slot
0: Not received yet
1: Finished receiving
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the status it had before the write.
Notes: • If a transmit request is written to this register while the CAN module is reset (CANnCNT FRST
or RST bit = "1"), it starts sending upon detecting 11 consecutive recessive bits on the CAN bus
after exiting the reset state.
• If data/remote frame transmit requests are issued for two or more slots, the slot with the small-
est slot number sends a frame. If data/remote frame receive requests are issued for two or
more slots, the slot with the smallest slot number among the slots satisfying the receive condi-
tion receives a frame.
• If transmission failed when single-shot mode is selected, this register is cleared to H’00.
(1) TR (Transmit Request) bit (Bit 0)
To use the message slot as a transmit slot, set this bit to "1". To use the message slot as a data frame or
remote frame receive slot, set this bit to "0".
13-55
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
(2) RR (Receive Request) bit (Bit 1)
To use the message slot as a receive slot, set this bit to "1". To use the message slot as a data frame or
remote frame transmit slot, set this bit to "0".
If TR (Transmit Request) bit and RR (Receive Request) bit both are set to "1", device operation is undefined.
(3) RM (Remote) bit (Bit 2)
To handle remote frames in the message slot, set this bit to "1". There are following two methods of settings
to handle remote frames:
• Set for remote frame transmission
The data set in the message slot is transmitted as a remote frame. When the CAN module finished
sending, the slot automatically changes to a data frame receive slot. However, if a data frame is received
before the CAN module finished sending a remote frame, the received data is stored in the message slot
and the remote frame is not transmitted.
• Set for remote frame reception
Remote frames are received. The processing to be performed after receiving a remote frame is selected
by RL (automatic response inhibit) bit.
(4) RL (Automatic Response Inhibit) bit (Bit 3)
This bit is effective when the message slot has been set as a remote frame receive slot. It selects the
processing to be performed after receiving a remote frame. If this bit is set to "0", the message slot automati-
cally changes to a transmit slot after receiving a remote frame and transmits the data set in it as a data frame.
If this bit is set to "1", the message slot stops operating after receiving a remote frame.
Note: • Always set this bit to "0" unless the message slot is set for remote frame reception.
(5) RA (Remote Active) bit (Bit 4)
This bit functions differently for slots 0-13 and slots 14 and 15.
• Slots 0–13
This bit is set to "1" when the message slot is set for remote frame transmission (reception). Then, when
remote frame transmission (reception) is completed, the bit is cleared to "0".
• Slots 14 and 15
The function of this bit differs depending on how the CAN Control Register BCM (BasicCAN Mode) bit is
set. If BCM = "0" (normal operation), this bit is set to "1" when the message slot is set for remote frame
transmission (reception). If BCM = "1" (BasicCAN), this bit indicates which type of frame is received.
During BasicCAN mode, the received data is stored in slots 14 and 15 for both data and remote frames.
If RA = "0", it means that the frame stored in the slot is a data frame. If RA = "1", it means that the frame
stored in the slot is a remote frame.
(6) ML (Message Lost) bit (Bit 5)
This bit is effective for receive slots. It is set to "1" when unread received data contained in the message slot
is overwritten by reception. This bit is cleared by writing "0" in software.
13
13-56 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
(7) TRSTAT (Transmit/Receive Status) bit (Bit 6)
This bit indicates that the CAN module is sending or receiving and is accessing the message slot. This bit is
set to "1" when the CAN module is accessing, and set to "0" when not accessing.
• During a transmit slot
This bit is set to "1" when a transmit request for the message slot is accepted. It is cleared to "0" when
the CAN module lost in bus arbitration, when a CAN bus error occurs, or when transmission is
completed.
• During a receive slot
This bit is set to "1" while the CAN module is receiving data, with the received data being stored in the
message slot. Note that the value read from the message slot while the TRSTAT bit remains set is
undefined.
(8) TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit (Bit 7)
This bit indicates that the CAN module finished sending or receiving.
• When set for a transmit slot
This bit is set to "1" when the CAN module finished sending the data stored in the message slot.
This bit is cleared by writing "0" in software. However, it cannot be cleared when the TRSTAT (Transmit/
Receive Status) bit = "1".
• When set for a receive slot
This bit is set to "1" when the CAN module finished receiving normally the data to be stored in the
message slot. This bit is cleared by writing "0" in software. However, it cannot be cleared when the
TRSTAT (Transmit/Receive Status) bit = "1".
Notes: • Before reading the received data out of the message slot, be sure to clear the TRFIN
(Transmit/Receive Finished) bit to "0". If the TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit hap-
pens to be set to "1" after a read, it means that new received data was stored while
reading and the read data contains an undefined value. In that case, discard the read
data, clear the TRFIN bit to "0" and read out data again.
• When sending/receiving remote frames, the TRFIN bit is automatically cleared to "0" by
hardware. Therefore, the TRFIN bit cannot be used as a transmission/reception-finished
flag.
13-57
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
13.2.15 CAN Message Slots
CAN0 Message Slot 0 Standard ID0 (C0MSL0SID0) <Address: H’0080 1100>
CAN0 Message Slot 1 Standard ID0 (C0MSL1SID0) <Address: H’0080 1110>
CAN0 Message Slot 2 Standard ID0 (C0MSL2SID0) <Address: H’0080 1120>
CAN0 Message Slot 3 Standard ID0 (C0MSL3SID0) <Address: H’0080 1130>
CAN0 Message Slot 4 Standard ID0 (C0MSL4SID0) <Address: H’0080 1140>
CAN0 Message Slot 5 Standard ID0 (C0MSL5SID0) <Address: H’0080 1150>
CAN0 Message Slot 6 Standard ID0 (C0MSL6SID0) <Address: H’0080 1160>
CAN0 Message Slot 7 Standard ID0 (C0MSL7SID0) <Address: H’0080 1170>
CAN0 Message Slot 8 Standard ID0 (C0MSL8SID0) <Address: H’0080 1180>
CAN0 Message Slot 9 Standard ID0 (C0MSL9SID0) <Address: H’0080 1190>
CAN0 Message Slot 10 Standard ID0 (C0MSL10SID0) <Address: H’0080 11A0>
CAN0 Message Slot 11 Standard ID0 (C0MSL11SID0) <Address: H’0080 11B0>
CAN0 Message Slot 12 Standard ID0 (C0MSL12SID0) <Address: H’0080 11C0>
CAN0 Message Slot 13 Standard ID0 (C0MSL13SID0) <Address: H’0080 11D0>
CAN0 Message Slot 14 Standard ID0 (C0MSL14SID0) <Address: H’0080 11E0>
CAN0 Message Slot 15 Standard ID0 (C0MSL15SID0) <Address: H’0080 11F0>
CAN1 Message Slot 0 Standard ID0 (C1MSL0SID0) <Address: H’0080 1500>
CAN1 Message Slot 1 Standard ID0 (C1MSL1SID0) <Address: H’0080 1510>
CAN1 Message Slot 2 Standard ID0 (C1MSL2SID0) <Address: H’0080 1520>
CAN1 Message Slot 3 Standard ID0 (C1MSL3SID0) <Address: H’0080 1530>
CAN1 Message Slot 4 Standard ID0 (C1MSL4SID0) <Address: H’0080 1540>
CAN1 Message Slot 5 Standard ID0 (C1MSL5SID0) <Address: H’0080 1550>
CAN1 Message Slot 6 Standard ID0 (C1MSL6SID0) <Address: H’0080 1560>
CAN1 Message Slot 7 Standard ID0 (C1MSL7SID0) <Address: H’0080 1570>
CAN1 Message Slot 8 Standard ID0 (C1MSL8SID0) <Address: H’0080 1580>
CAN1 Message Slot 9 Standard ID0 (C1MSL9SID0) <Address: H’0080 1590>
CAN1 Message Slot 10 Standard ID0 (C1MSL10SID0) <Address: H’0080 15A0>
CAN1 Message Slot 11 Standard ID0 (C1MSL11SID0) <Address: H’0080 15B0>
CAN1 Message Slot 12 Standard ID0 (C1MSL12SID0) <Address: H’0080 15C0>
CAN1 Message Slot 13 Standard ID0 (C1MSL13SID0) <Address: H’0080 15D0>
CAN1 Message Slot 14 Standard ID0 (C1MSL14SID0) <Address: H’0080 15E0>
CAN1 Message Slot 15 Standard ID0 (C1MSL15SID0) <Address: H’0080 15F0>
123456b7b0 SID1SID0 SID2 SID3 SID4
?????
?
?
?
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–2 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
3–7 SID0–SID4 Standard ID0–standard ID4 R W
(Standard ID0–standard ID4)
These registers are the memory space for transmit and receive frames.
13
13-58 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN0 Message Slot 0 Standard ID1 (C0MSL0SID1) <Address: H’0080 1101>
CAN0 Message Slot 1 Standard ID1 (C0MSL1SID1) <Address: H’0080 1111>
CAN0 Message Slot 2 Standard ID1 (C0MSL2SID1) <Address: H’0080 1121>
CAN0 Message Slot 3 Standard ID1 (C0MSL3SID1) <Address: H’0080 1131>
CAN0 Message Slot 4 Standard ID1 (C0MSL4SID1) <Address: H’0080 1141>
CAN0 Message Slot 5 Standard ID1 (C0MSL5SID1) <Address: H’0080 1151>
CAN0 Message Slot 6 Standard ID1 (C0MSL6SID1) <Address: H’0080 1161>
CAN0 Message Slot 7 Standard ID1 (C0MSL7SID1) <Address: H’0080 1171>
CAN0 Message Slot 8 Standard ID1 (C0MSL8SID1) <Address: H’0080 1181>
CAN0 Message Slot 9 Standard ID1 (C0MSL9SID1) <Address: H’0080 1191>
CAN0 Message Slot 10 Standard ID1 (C0MSL10SID1) <Address: H’0080 11A1>
CAN0 Message Slot 11 Standard ID1 (C0MSL11SID1) <Address: H’0080 11B1>
CAN0 Message Slot 12 Standard ID1 (C0MSL12SID1) <Address: H’0080 11C1>
CAN0 Message Slot 13 Standard ID1 (C0MSL13SID1) <Address: H’0080 11D1>
CAN0 Message Slot 14 Standard ID1 (C0MSL14SID1) <Address: H’0080 11E1>
CAN0 Message Slot 15 Standard ID1 (C0MSL15SID1) <Address: H’0080 11F1>
CAN1 Message Slot 0 Standard ID1 (C1MSL0SID1) <Address: H’0080 1501>
CAN1 Message Slot 1 Standard ID1 (C1MSL1SID1) <Address: H’0080 1511>
CAN1 Message Slot 2 Standard ID1 (C1MSL2SID1) <Address: H’0080 1521>
CAN1 Message Slot 3 Standard ID1 (C1MSL3SID1) <Address: H’0080 1531>
CAN1 Message Slot 4 Standard ID1 (C1MSL4SID1) <Address: H’0080 1541>
CAN1 Message Slot 5 Standard ID1 (C1MSL5SID1) <Address: H’0080 1551>
CAN1 Message Slot 6 Standard ID1 (C1MSL6SID1) <Address: H’0080 1561>
CAN1 Message Slot 7 Standard ID1 (C1MSL7SID1) <Address: H’0080 1571>
CAN1 Message Slot 8 Standard ID1 (C1MSL8SID1) <Address: H’0080 1581>
CAN1 Message Slot 9 Standard ID1 (C1MSL9SID1) <Address: H’0080 1591>
CAN1 Message Slot 10 Standard ID1 (C1MSL10SID1) <Address: H’0080 15A1>
CAN1 Message Slot 11 Standard ID1 (C1MSL11SID1) <Address: H’0080 15B1>
CAN1 Message Slot 12 Standard ID1 (C1MSL12SID1) <Address: H’0080 15C1>
CAN1 Message Slot 13 Standard ID1 (C1MSL13SID1) <Address: H’0080 15D1>
CAN1 Message Slot 14 Standard ID1 (C1MSL14SID1) <Address: H’0080 15E1>
CAN1 Message Slot 15 Standard ID1 (C1MSL15SID1) <Address: H’0080 15F1>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8 SID7SID6SID5 SID8 SID9 SID10
??????
?
?
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
8, 9 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
10–15 SID5–SID10 Standard ID5–standard ID10 R W
(Standard ID5–standard ID10)
These registers are the memory space for transmit and receive frames.
13-59
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
CAN0 Message Slot 0 Extended ID0 (C0MSL0EID0) <Address: H’0080 1102>
CAN0 Message Slot 1 Extended ID0 (C0MSL1EID0) <Address: H’0080 1112>
CAN0 Message Slot 2 Extended ID0 (C0MSL2EID0) <Address: H’0080 1122>
CAN0 Message Slot 3 Extended ID0 (C0MSL3EID0) <Address: H’0080 1132>
CAN0 Message Slot 4 Extended ID0 (C0MSL4EID0) <Address: H’0080 1142>
CAN0 Message Slot 5 Extended ID0 (C0MSL5EID0) <Address: H’0080 1152>
CAN0 Message Slot 6 Extended ID0 (C0MSL6EID0) <Address: H’0080 1162>
CAN0 Message Slot 7 Extended ID0 (C0MSL7EID0) <Address: H’0080 1172>
CAN0 Message Slot 8 Extended ID0 (C0MSL8EID0) <Address: H’0080 1182>
CAN0 Message Slot 9 Extended ID0 (C0MSL9EID0) <Address: H’0080 1192>
CAN0 Message Slot 10 Extended ID0 (C0MSL10EID0) <Address: H’0080 11A2>
CAN0 Message Slot 11 Extended ID0 (C0MSL11EID0) <Address: H’0080 11B2>
CAN0 Message Slot 12 Extended ID0 (C0MSL12EID0) <Address: H’0080 11C2>
CAN0 Message Slot 13 Extended ID0 (C0MSL13EID0) <Address: H’0080 11D2>
CAN0 Message Slot 14 Extended ID0 (C0MSL14EID0) <Address: H’0080 11E2>
CAN0 Message Slot 15 Extended ID0 (C0MSL15EID0) <Address: H’0080 11F2>
CAN1 Message Slot 0 Extended ID0 (C1MSL0EID0) <Address: H’0080 1502>
CAN1 Message Slot 1 Extended ID0 (C1MSL1EID0) <Address: H’0080 1512>
CAN1 Message Slot 2 Extended ID0 (C1MSL2EID0) <Address: H’0080 1522>
CAN1 Message Slot 3 Extended ID0 (C1MSL3EID0) <Address: H’0080 1532>
CAN1 Message Slot 4 Extended ID0 (C1MSL4EID0) <Address: H’0080 1542>
CAN1 Message Slot 5 Extended ID0 (C1MSL5EID0) <Address: H’0080 1552>
CAN1 Message Slot 6 Extended ID0 (C1MSL6EID0) <Address: H’0080 1562>
CAN1 Message Slot 7 Extended ID0 (C1MSL7EID0) <Address: H’0080 1572>
CAN1 Message Slot 8 Extended ID0 (C1MSL8EID0) <Address: H’0080 1582>
CAN1 Message Slot 9 Extended ID0 (C1MSL9EID0) <Address: H’0080 1592>
CAN1 Message Slot 10 Extended ID0 (C1MSL10EID0) <Address: H’0080 15A2>
CAN1 Message Slot 11 Extended ID0 (C1MSL11EID0) <Address: H’0080 15B2>
CAN1 Message Slot 12 Extended ID0 (C1MSL12EID0) <Address: H’0080 15C2>
CAN1 Message Slot 13 Extended ID0 (C1MSL13EID0) <Address: H’0080 15D2>
CAN1 Message Slot 14 Extended ID0 (C1MSL14EID0) <Address: H’0080 15E2>
CAN1 Message Slot 15 Extended ID0 (C1MSL15EID0) <Address: H’0080 15F2>
123456b7b0 EID1EID0 EID2 EID3
????
?
?
?
?
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–3 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
4–7 EID0–EID3 Extended ID0–extended ID3 R W
(Extended ID0–extended ID3)
These registers are the memory space for transmit and receive frames.
Note: • If the message slot is set for the receive slot standard ID format, an undefined value is written to
the EID bits when storing received data.
13
13-60 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN0 Message Slot 0 Extended ID1 (C0MSL0EID1) <Address: H’0080 1103>
CAN0 Message Slot 1 Extended ID1 (C0MSL1EID1) <Address: H’0080 1113>
CAN0 Message Slot 2 Extended ID1 (C0MSL2EID1) <Address: H’0080 1123>
CAN0 Message Slot 3 Extended ID1 (C0MSL3EID1) <Address: H’0080 1133>
CAN0 Message Slot 4 Extended ID1 (C0MSL4EID1) <Address: H’0080 1143>
CAN0 Message Slot 5 Extended ID1 (C0MSL5EID1) <Address: H’0080 1153>
CAN0 Message Slot 6 Extended ID1 (C0MSL6EID1) <Address: H’0080 1163>
CAN0 Message Slot 7 Extended ID1 (C0MSL7EID1) <Address: H’0080 1173>
CAN0 Message Slot 8 Extended ID1 (C0MSL8EID1) <Address: H’0080 1183>
CAN0 Message Slot 9 Extended ID1 (C0MSL9EID1) <Address: H’0080 1193>
CAN0 Message Slot 10 Extended ID1 (C0MSL10EID1) <Address: H’0080 11A3>
CAN0 Message Slot 11 Extended ID1 (C0MSL11EID1) <Address: H’0080 11B3>
CAN0 Message Slot 12 Extended ID1 (C0MSL12EID1) <Address: H’0080 11C3>
CAN0 Message Slot 13 Extended ID1 (C0MSL13EID1) <Address: H’0080 11D3>
CAN0 Message Slot 14 Extended ID1 (C0MSL14EID1) <Address: H’0080 11E3>
CAN0 Message Slot 15 Extended ID1 (C0MSL15EID1) <Address: H’0080 11F3>
CAN1 Message Slot 0 Extended ID1 (C1MSL0EID1) <Address: H’0080 1503>
CAN1 Message Slot 1 Extended ID1 (C1MSL1EID1) <Address: H’0080 1513>
CAN1 Message Slot 2 Extended ID1 (C1MSL2EID1) <Address: H’0080 1523>
CAN1 Message Slot 3 Extended ID1 (C1MSL3EID1) <Address: H’0080 1533>
CAN1 Message Slot 4 Extended ID1 (C1MSL4EID1) <Address: H’0080 1543>
CAN1 Message Slot 5 Extended ID1 (C1MSL5EID1) <Address: H’0080 1553>
CAN1 Message Slot 6 Extended ID1 (C1MSL6EID1) <Address: H’0080 1563>
CAN1 Message Slot 7 Extended ID1 (C1MSL7EID1) <Address: H’0080 1573>
CAN1 Message Slot 8 Extended ID1 (C1MSL8EID1) <Address: H’0080 1583>
CAN1 Message Slot 9 Extended ID1 (C1MSL9EID1) <Address: H’0080 1593>
CAN1 Message Slot 10 Extended ID1 (C1MSL10EID1) <Address: H’0080 15A3>
CAN1 Message Slot 11 Extended ID1 (C1MSL11EID1) <Address: H’0080 15B3>
CAN1 Message Slot 12 Extended ID1 (C1MSL12EID1) <Address: H’0080 15C3>
CAN1 Message Slot 13 Extended ID1 (C1MSL13EID1) <Address: H’0080 15D3>
CAN1 Message Slot 14 Extended ID1 (C1MSL14EID1) <Address: H’0080 15E3>
CAN1 Message Slot 15 Extended ID1 (C1MSL15EID1) <Address: H’0080 15F3>
9 1011121314b15b8 EID6EID5EID4 EID7 EID8 EID9 EID10 EID11
????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–15 EID4–EID11 Extended ID4–extended ID11 R W
(Extended ID4–extended ID11)
These registers are the memory space for transmit and receive frames.
Note: • If the message slot is set for the receive slot standard ID format, an undefined value is written to
the EID bits when storing received data.
13-61
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
CAN0 Message Slot 0 Extended ID2 (C0MSL0EID2) <Address: H’0080 1104>
CAN0 Message Slot 1 Extended ID2 (C0MSL1EID2) <Address: H’0080 1114>
CAN0 Message Slot 2 Extended ID2 (C0MSL2EID2) <Address: H’0080 1124>
CAN0 Message Slot 3 Extended ID2 (C0MSL3EID2) <Address: H’0080 1134>
CAN0 Message Slot 4 Extended ID2 (C0MSL4EID2) <Address: H’0080 1144>
CAN0 Message Slot 5 Extended ID2 (C0MSL5EID2) <Address: H’0080 1154>
CAN0 Message Slot 6 Extended ID2 (C0MSL6EID2) <Address: H’0080 1164>
CAN0 Message Slot 7 Extended ID2 (C0MSL7EID2) <Address: H’0080 1174>
CAN0 Message Slot 8 Extended ID2 (C0MSL8EID2) <Address: H’0080 1184>
CAN0 Message Slot 9 Extended ID2 (C0MSL9EID2) <Address: H’0080 1194>
CAN0 Message Slot 10 Extended ID2 (C0MSL10EID2) <Address: H’0080 11A4>
CAN0 Message Slot 11 Extended ID2 (C0MSL11EID2) <Address: H’0080 11B4>
CAN0 Message Slot 12 Extended ID2 (C0MSL12EID2) <Address: H’0080 11C4>
CAN0 Message Slot 13 Extended ID2 (C0MSL13EID2) <Address: H’0080 11D4>
CAN0 Message Slot 14 Extended ID2 (C0MSL14EID2) <Address: H’0080 11E4>
CAN0 Message Slot 15 Extended ID2 (C0MSL15EID2) <Address: H’0080 11F4>
CAN1 Message Slot 0 Extended ID2 (C1MSL0EID2) <Address: H’0080 1504>
CAN1 Message Slot 1 Extended ID2 (C1MSL1EID2) <Address: H’0080 1514>
CAN1 Message Slot 2 Extended ID2 (C1MSL2EID2) <Address: H’0080 1524>
CAN1 Message Slot 3 Extended ID2 (C1MSL3EID2) <Address: H’0080 1534>
CAN1 Message Slot 4 Extended ID2 (C1MSL4EID2) <Address: H’0080 1544>
CAN1 Message Slot 5 Extended ID2 (C1MSL5EID2) <Address: H’0080 1554>
CAN1 Message Slot 6 Extended ID2 (C1MSL6EID2) <Address: H’0080 1564>
CAN1 Message Slot 7 Extended ID2 (C1MSL7EID2) <Address: H’0080 1574>
CAN1 Message Slot 8 Extended ID2 (C1MSL8EID2) <Address: H’0080 1584>
CAN1 Message Slot 9 Extended ID2 (C1MSL9EID2) <Address: H’0080 1594>
CAN1 Message Slot 10 Extended ID2 (C1MSL10EID2) <Address: H’0080 15A4>
CAN1 Message Slot 11 Extended ID2 (C1MSL11EID2) <Address: H’0080 15B4>
CAN1 Message Slot 12 Extended ID2 (C1MSL12EID2) <Address: H’0080 15C4>
CAN1 Message Slot 13 Extended ID2 (C1MSL13EID2) <Address: H’0080 15D4>
CAN1 Message Slot 14 Extended ID2 (C1MSL14EID2) <Address: H’0080 15E4>
CAN1 Message Slot 15 Extended ID2 (C1MSL15EID2) <Address: H’0080 15F4>
123456b7b0 EID15EID14EID13EID12 EID16 EID17
??????
?
?
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0, 1 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
2–7 EID12–EID17 Extended ID12–extended ID17 R W
(Extended ID12–extended ID17)
These registers are the memory space for transmit and receive frames.
Note: • If the message slot is set for the receive slot standard ID format, an undefined value is written to
the EID bits when storing received data.
13
13-62 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data Length Register (C0MSL0DLC) <Address: H’0080 1105>
CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data Length Register (C0MSL1DLC) <Address: H’0080 1115>
CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data Length Register (C0MSL2DLC) <Address: H’0080 1125>
CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data Length Register (C0MSL3DLC) <Address: H’0080 1135>
CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data Length Register (C0MSL4DLC) <Address: H’0080 1145>
CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data Length Register (C0MSL5DLC) <Address: H’0080 1155>
CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data Length Register (C0MSL6DLC) <Address: H’0080 1165>
CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data Length Register (C0MSL7DLC) <Address: H’0080 1175>
CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data Length Register (C0MSL8DLC) <Address: H’0080 1185>
CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data Length Register (C0MSL9DLC) <Address: H’0080 1195>
CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data Length Register (C0MSL10DLC) <Address: H’0080 11A5>
CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data Length Register (C0MSL11DLC) <Address: H’0080 11B5>
CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data Length Register (C0MSL12DLC) <Address: H’0080 11C5>
CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data Length Register (C0MSL13DLC) <Address: H’0080 11D5>
CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data Length Register (C0MSL14DLC) <Address: H’0080 11E5>
CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data Length Register (C0MSL15DLC) <Address: H’0080 11F5>
CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data Length Register (C1MSL0DLC) <Address: H’0080 1505>
CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data Length Register (C1MSL1DLC) <Address: H’0080 1515>
CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data Length Register (C1MSL2DLC) <Address: H’0080 1525>
CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data Length Register (C1MSL3DLC) <Address: H’0080 1535>
CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data Length Register (C1MSL4DLC) <Address: H’0080 1545>
CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data Length Register (C1MSL5DLC) <Address: H’0080 1555>
CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data Length Register (C1MSL6DLC) <Address: H’0080 1565>
CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data Length Register (C1MSL7DLC) <Address: H’0080 1575>
CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data Length Register (C1MSL8DLC) <Address: H’0080 1585>
CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data Length Register (C1MSL9DLC) <Address: H’0080 1595>
CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data Length Register (C1MSL10DLC) <Address: H’0080 15A5>
CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data Length Register (C1MSL11DLC) <Address: H’0080 15B5>
CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data Length Register (C1MSL12DLC) <Address: H’0080 15C5>
CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data Length Register (C1MSL13DLC) <Address: H’0080 15D5>
CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data Length Register (C1MSL14DLC) <Address: H’0080 15E5>
CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data Length Register (C1MSL15DLC) <Address: H’0080 15F5>
9 1011121314b15b8 DLC0 DLC1 DLC2 DLC3
????
?
?
?
?
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–11 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
12–15 DLC0–DLC3 0000: 0 bytes R W
Data length setting bit 0001: 1 bytes
0010: 2 bytes
0011: 3 bytes
0100: 4 bytes
0101: 5 bytes
0110: 6 bytes
0111: 7 bytes
1000: 8 bytes
| |
1111: 8 bytes
These registers are the memory space for transmit and receive frames. When sending, the register is used to
set the transmit data length. When receiving, the register is used to store the receive frame DLC.
13-63
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 0 (C0MSL0DT0) <Address: H’0080 1106>
CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 0 (C0MSL1DT0) <Address: H’0080 1116>
CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 0 (C0MSL2DT0) <Address: H’0080 1126>
CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 0 (C0MSL3DT0) <Address: H’0080 1136>
CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 0 (C0MSL4DT0) <Address: H’0080 1146>
CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 0 (C0MSL5DT0) <Address: H’0080 1156>
CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 0 (C0MSL6DT0) <Address: H’0080 1166>
CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 0 (C0MSL7DT0) <Address: H’0080 1176>
CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 0 (C0MSL8DT0) <Address: H’0080 1186>
CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 0 (C0MSL9DT0) <Address: H’0080 1196>
CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 0 (C0MSL10DT0) <Address: H’0080 11A6>
CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 0 (C0MSL11DT0) <Address: H’0080 11B6>
CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 0 (C0MSL12DT0) <Address: H’0080 11C6>
CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 0 (C0MSL13DT0) <Address: H’0080 11D6>
CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 0 (C0MSL14DT0) <Address: H’0080 11E6>
CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 0 (C0MSL15DT0) <Address: H’0080 11F6>
CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 0 (C1MSL0DT0) <Address: H’0080 1506>
CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 0 (C1MSL1DT0) <Address: H’0080 1516>
CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 0 (C1MSL2DT0) <Address: H’0080 1526>
CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 0 (C1MSL3DT0) <Address: H’0080 1536>
CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 0 (C1MSL4DT0) <Address: H’0080 1546>
CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 0 (C1MSL5DT0) <Address: H’0080 1556>
CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 0 (C1MSL6DT0) <Address: H’0080 1566>
CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 0 (C1MSL7DT0) <Address: H’0080 1576>
CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 0 (C1MSL8DT0) <Address: H’0080 1586>
CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 0 (C1MSL9DT0) <Address: H’0080 1596>
CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 0 (C1MSL10DT0) <Address: H’0080 15A6>
CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 0 (C1MSL11DT0) <Address: H’0080 15B6>
CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 0 (C1MSL12DT0) <Address: H’0080 15C6>
CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 0 (C1MSL13DT0) <Address: H’0080 15D6>
CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 0 (C1MSL14DT0) <Address: H’0080 15E6>
CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 0 (C1MSL15DT0) <Address: H’0080 15F6>
123456D7D0 C0MSL0DT0–C0MSL15DT0, C1MSL0DT0–C1MSL15DT0
????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–7 C0MSL0DT0–C0MSL15DT0, Message slot data 0 R W
C1MSL0DT0–C1MSL15DT0
These registers are the memory space for transmit and receive frames.
Notes: • During a receive slot, an undefined value is written to the register if the data length of the data
frame being stored (DLC value) = "0".
• The first byte of the CAN frame data field corresponds to message slot n data 0. Data is trans-
mitted or received beginning with the MSB side of the register.
13
13-64 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 1 (C0MSL0DT1) <Address: H’0080 1107>
CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 1 (C0MSL1DT1) <Address: H’0080 1117>
CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 1 (C0MSL2DT1) <Address: H’0080 1127>
CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 1 (C0MSL3DT1) <Address: H’0080 1137>
CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 1 (C0MSL4DT1) <Address: H’0080 1147>
CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 1 (C0MSL5DT1) <Address: H’0080 1157>
CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 1 (C0MSL6DT1) <Address: H’0080 1167>
CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 1 (C0MSL7DT1) <Address: H’0080 1177>
CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 1 (C0MSL8DT1) <Address: H’0080 1187>
CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 1 (C0MSL9DT1) <Address: H’0080 1197>
CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 1 (C0MSL10DT1) <Address: H’0080 11A7>
CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 1 (C0MSL11DT1) <Address: H’0080 11B7>
CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 1 (C0MSL12DT1) <Address: H’0080 11C7>
CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 1 (C0MSL13DT1) <Address: H’0080 11D7>
CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 1 (C0MSL14DT1) <Address: H’0080 11E7>
CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 1 (C0MSL15DT1) <Address: H’0080 11F7>
CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 1 (C1MSL0DT1) <Address: H’0080 1507>
CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 1 (C1MSL1DT1) <Address: H’0080 1517>
CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 1 (C1MSL2DT1) <Address: H’0080 1527>
CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 1 (C1MSL3DT1) <Address: H’0080 1537>
CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 1 (C1MSL4DT1) <Address: H’0080 1547>
CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 1 (C1MSL5DT1) <Address: H’0080 1557>
CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 1 (C1MSL6DT1) <Address: H’0080 1567>
CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 1 (C1MSL7DT1) <Address: H’0080 1577>
CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 1 (C1MSL8DT1) <Address: H’0080 1587>
CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 1 (C1MSL9DT1) <Address: H’0080 1597>
CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 1 (C1MSL10DT1) <Address: H’0080 15A7>
CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 1 (C1MSL11DT1) <Address: H’0080 15B7>
CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 1 (C1MSL12DT1) <Address: H’0080 15C7>
CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 1 (C1MSL13DT1) <Address: H’0080 15D7>
CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 1 (C1MSL14DT1) <Address: H’0080 15E7>
CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 1 (C1MSL15DT1) <Address: H’0080 15F7>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8 C0MSL0DT1–C0MSL15DT1, C1MSL0DT1–C1MSL15DT1
????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–15 C0MSL0DT1–C0MSL15DT1, Message slot data 1 R W
C1MSL0DT1–C1MSL15DT1
These registers are the memory space for transmit and receive frames.
Note: • During a receive slot, an undefined value is written to the register if the data length of the data
frame being stored (DLC value) is equal to or less than 1.
13-65
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 2 (C0MSL0DT2) <Address: H’0080 1108>
CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 2 (C0MSL1DT2) <Address: H’0080 1118>
CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 2 (C0MSL2DT2) <Address: H’0080 1128>
CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 2 (C0MSL3DT2) <Address: H’0080 1138>
CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 2 (C0MSL4DT2) <Address: H’0080 1148>
CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 2 (C0MSL5DT2) <Address: H’0080 1158>
CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 2 (C0MSL6DT2) <Address: H’0080 1168>
CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 2 (C0MSL7DT2) <Address: H’0080 1178>
CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 2 (C0MSL8DT2) <Address: H’0080 1188>
CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 2 (C0MSL9DT2) <Address: H’0080 1198>
CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 2 (C0MSL10DT2) <Address: H’0080 11A8>
CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 2 (C0MSL11DT2) <Address: H’0080 11B8>
CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 2 (C0MSL12DT2) <Address: H’0080 11C8>
CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 2 (C0MSL13DT2) <Address: H’0080 11D8>
CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 2 (C0MSL14DT2) <Address: H’0080 11E8>
CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 2 (C0MSL15DT2) <Address: H’0080 11F8>
CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 2 (C1MSL0DT2) <Address: H’0080 1508>
CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 2 (C1MSL1DT2) <Address: H’0080 1518>
CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 2 (C1MSL2DT2) <Address: H’0080 1528>
CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 2 (C1MSL3DT2) <Address: H’0080 1538>
CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 2 (C1MSL4DT2) <Address: H’0080 1548>
CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 2 (C1MSL5DT2) <Address: H’0080 1558>
CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 2 (C1MSL6DT2) <Address: H’0080 1568>
CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 2 (C1MSL7DT2) <Address: H’0080 1578>
CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 2 (C1MSL8DT2) <Address: H’0080 1588>
CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 2 (C1MSL9DT2) <Address: H’0080 1598>
CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 2 (C1MSL10DT2) <Address: H’0080 15A8>
CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 2 (C1MSL11DT2) <Address: H’0080 15B8>
CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 2 (C1MSL12DT2) <Address: H’0080 15C8>
CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 2 (C1MSL13DT2) <Address: H’0080 15D8>
CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 2 (C1MSL14DT2) <Address: H’0080 15E8>
CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 2 (C1MSL15DT2) <Address: H’0080 15F8>
123456b7b0 C0MSL0DT2–C0MSL15DT2, C1MSL0DT2–C1MSL15DT2
????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–7 C0MSL0DT2–C0MSL15DT2, Message slot data 2 R W
C1MSL0DT2–C1MSL15DT2
These registers are the memory space for transmit and receive frames.
Note: • During a receive slot, an undefined value is written to the register if the data length of the data
frame being stored (DLC value) is equal to or less than 2.
13
13-66 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 3 (C0MSL0DT3) <Address: H’0080 1109>
CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 3 (C0MSL1DT3) <Address: H’0080 1119>
CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 3 (C0MSL2DT3) <Address: H’0080 1129>
CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 3 (C0MSL3DT3) <Address: H’0080 1139>
CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 3 (C0MSL4DT3) <Address: H’0080 1149>
CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 3 (C0MSL5DT3) <Address: H’0080 1159>
CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 3 (C0MSL6DT3) <Address: H’0080 1169>
CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 3 (C0MSL7DT3) <Address: H’0080 1179>
CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 3 (C0MSL8DT3) <Address: H’0080 1189>
CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 3 (C0MSL9DT3) <Address: H’0080 1199>
CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 3 (C0MSL10DT3) <Address: H’0080 11A9>
CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 3 (C0MSL11DT3) <Address: H’0080 11B9>
CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 3 (C0MSL12DT3) <Address: H’0080 11C9>
CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 3 (C0MSL13DT3) <Address: H’0080 11D9>
CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 3 (C0MSL14DT3) <Address: H’0080 11E9>
CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 3 (C0MSL15DT3) <Address: H’0080 11F9>
CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 3 (C1MSL0DT3) <Address: H’0080 1509>
CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 3 (C1MSL1DT3) <Address: H’0080 1519>
CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 3 (C1MSL2DT3) <Address: H’0080 1529>
CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 3 (C1MSL3DT3) <Address: H’0080 1539>
CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 3 (C1MSL4DT3) <Address: H’0080 1549>
CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 3 (C1MSL5DT3) <Address: H’0080 1559>
CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 3 (C1MSL6DT3) <Address: H’0080 1569>
CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 3 (C1MSL7DT3) <Address: H’0080 1579>
CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 3 (C1MSL8DT3) <Address: H’0080 1589>
CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 3 (C1MSL9DT3) <Address: H’0080 1599>
CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 3 (C1MSL10DT3) <Address: H’0080 15A9>
CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 3 (C1MSL11DT3) <Address: H’0080 15B9>
CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 3 (C1MSL12DT3) <Address: H’0080 15C9>
CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 3 (C1MSL13DT3) <Address: H’0080 15D9>
CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 3 (C1MSL14DT3) <Address: H’0080 15E9>
CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 3 (C1MSL15DT3) <Address: H’0080 15F9>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8 C0MSL0DT3–C0MSL15DT3, C1MSL0DT3–C1MSL15DT3
????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–15 C0MSL0DT3–C0MSL15DT3, Message slot data 3 R W
C1MSL0DT3–C1MSL15DT3
These registers are the memory space for transmit and receive frames.
Note: • During a receive slot, an undefined value is written to the register if the data length of the data
frame being stored (DLC value) is equal to or less than 3.
13-67
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 4 (C0MSL0DT4) <Address: H’0080 110A>
CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 4 (C0MSL1DT4) <Address: H’0080 111A>
CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 4 (C0MSL2DT4) <Address: H’0080 112A>
CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 4 (C0MSL3DT4) <Address: H’0080 113A>
CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 4 (C0MSL4DT4) <Address: H’0080 114A>
CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 4 (C0MSL5DT4) <Address: H’0080 115A>
CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 4 (C0MSL6DT4) <Address: H’0080 116A>
CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 4 (C0MSL7DT4) <Address: H’0080 117A>
CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 4 (C0MSL8DT4) <Address: H’0080 118A>
CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 4 (C0MSL9DT4) <Address: H’0080 119A>
CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 4 (C0MSL10DT4) <Address: H’0080 11AA>
CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 4 (C0MSL11DT4) <Address: H’0080 11BA>
CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 4 (C0MSL12DT4) <Address: H’0080 11CA>
CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 4 (C0MSL13DT4) <Address: H’0080 11DA>
CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 4 (C0MSL14DT4) <Address: H’0080 11EA>
CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 4 (C0MSL15DT4) <Address: H’0080 11FA>
CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 4 (C1MSL0DT4) <Address: H’0080 150A>
CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 4 (C1MSL1DT4) <Address: H’0080 151A>
CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 4 (C1MSL2DT4) <Address: H’0080 152A>
CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 4 (C1MSL3DT4) <Address: H’0080 153A>
CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 4 (C1MSL4DT4) <Address: H’0080 154A>
CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 4 (C1MSL5DT4) <Address: H’0080 155A>
CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 4 (C1MSL6DT4) <Address: H’0080 156A>
CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 4 (C1MSL7DT4) <Address: H’0080 157A>
CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 4 (C1MSL8DT4) <Address: H’0080 158A>
CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 4 (C1MSL9DT4) <Address: H’0080 159A>
CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 4 (C1MSL10DT4) <Address: H’0080 15AA>
CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 4 (C1MSL11DT4) <Address: H’0080 15BA>
CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 4 (C1MSL12DT4) <Address: H’0080 15CA>
CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 4 (C1MSL13DT4) <Address: H’0080 15DA>
CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 4 (C1MSL14DT4) <Address: H’0080 15EA>
CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 4 (C1MSL15DT4) <Address: H’0080 15FA>
123456b7b0 C0MSL0DT4–C0MSL15DT4, C1MSL0DT4–C1MSL15DT4
????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–7 C0MSL0DT4–C0MSL15DT4, Message slot data 4 R W
C1MSL0DT4–C1MSL15DT4
These registers are the memory space for transmit and receive frames.
Note: • During a receive slot, an undefined value is written to the register if the data length of the data
frame being stored (DLC value) is equal to or less than 4.
13
13-68 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 5 (C0MSL0DT5) <Address: H’0080 110B>
CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 5 (C0MSL1DT5) <Address: H’0080 111B>
CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 5 (C0MSL2DT5) <Address: H’0080 112B>
CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 5 (C0MSL3DT5) <Address: H’0080 113B>
CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 5 (C0MSL4DT5) <Address: H’0080 114B>
CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 5 (C0MSL5DT5) <Address: H’0080 115B>
CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 5 (C0MSL6DT5) <Address: H’0080 116B>
CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 5 (C0MSL7DT5) <Address: H’0080 117B>
CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 5 (C0MSL8DT5) <Address: H’0080 118B>
CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 5 (C0MSL9DT5) <Address: H’0080 119B>
CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 5 (C0MSL10DT5) <Address: H’0080 11AB>
CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 5 (C0MSL11DT5) <Address: H’0080 11BB>
CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 5 (C0MSL12DT5) <Address: H’0080 11CB>
CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 5 (C0MSL13DT5) <Address: H’0080 11DB>
CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 5 (C0MSL14DT5) <Address: H’0080 11EB>
CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 5 (C0MSL15DT5) <Address: H’0080 11FB>
CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 5 (C1MSL0DT5) <Address: H’0080 150B>
CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 5 (C1MSL1DT5) <Address: H’0080 151B>
CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 5 (C1MSL2DT5) <Address: H’0080 152B>
CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 5 (C1MSL3DT5) <Address: H’0080 153B>
CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 5 (C1MSL4DT5) <Address: H’0080 154B>
CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 5 (C1MSL5DT5) <Address: H’0080 155B>
CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 5 (C1MSL6DT5) <Address: H’0080 156B>
CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 5 (C1MSL7DT5) <Address: H’0080 157B>
CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 5 (C1MSL8DT5) <Address: H’0080 158B>
CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 5 (C1MSL9DT5) <Address: H’0080 159B>
CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 5 (C1MSL10DT5) <Address: H’0080 15AB>
CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 5 (C1MSL11DT5) <Address: H’0080 15BB>
CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 5 (C1MSL12DT5) <Address: H’0080 15CB>
CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 5 (C1MSL13DT5) <Address: H’0080 15DB>
CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 5 (C1MSL14DT5) <Address: H’0080 15EB>
CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 5 (C1MSL15DT5) <Address: H'0080 15FB>
9 10 11 12 13 14 b15b8 C0MSL0DT5–C0MSL15DT5, C1MSL0DT5–C1MSL15DT5
????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–15 C0MSL0DT5–C0MSL15DT5, Message slot data 5 R W
C1MSL0DT5–C1MSL15DT5
These registers are the memory space for transmit and receive frames.
Note: • During a receive slot, an undefined value is written to the register if the data length of the data
frame being stored (DLC value) is equal to or less than 5.
13-69
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 6 (C0MSL0DT6) <Address: H’0080 110C>
CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 6 (C0MSL1DT6) <Address: H’0080 111C>
CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 6 (C0MSL2DT6) <Address: H’0080 112C>
CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 6 (C0MSL3DT6) <Address: H’0080 113C>
CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 6 (C0MSL4DT6) <Address: H’0080 114C>
CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 6 (C0MSL5DT6) <Address: H’0080 115C>
CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 6 (C0MSL6DT6) <Address: H’0080 116C>
CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 6 (C0MSL7DT6) <Address: H’0080 117C>
CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 6 (C0MSL8DT6) <Address: H’0080 118C>
CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 6 (C0MSL9DT6) <Address: H’0080 119C>
CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 6 (C0MSL10DT6) <Address: H’0080 11AC>
CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 6 (C0MSL11DT6) <Address: H’0080 11BC>
CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 6 (C0MSL12DT6) <Address: H’0080 11CC>
CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 6 (C0MSL13DT6) <Address: H’0080 11DC>
CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 6 (C0MSL14DT6) <Address: H’0080 11EC>
CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 6 (C0MSL15DT6) <Address: H’0080 11FC>
CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 6 (C1MSL0DT6) <Address: H’0080 150C>
CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 6 (C1MSL1DT6) <Address: H’0080 151C>
CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 6 (C1MSL2DT6) <Address: H’0080 152C>
CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 6 (C1MSL3DT6) <Address: H’0080 153C>
CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 6 (C1MSL4DT6) <Address: H’0080 154C>
CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 6 (C1MSL5DT6) <Address: H’0080 155C>
CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 6 (C1MSL6DT6) <Address: H’0080 156C>
CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 6 (C1MSL7DT6) <Address: H’0080 157C>
CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 6 (C1MSL8DT6) <Address: H’0080 158C>
CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 6 (C1MSL9DT6) <Address: H’0080 159C>
CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 6 (C1MSL10DT6) <Address: H’0080 15AC>
CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 6 (C1MSL11DT6) <Address: H’0080 15BC>
CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 6 (C1MSL12DT6) <Address: H’0080 15CC>
CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 6 (C1MSL13DT6) <Address: H’0080 15DC>
CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 6 (C1MSL14DT6) <Address: H’0080 15EC>
CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 6 (C1MSL15DT6) <Address: H’0080 15FC>
123456b7b0 C0MSL0DT6–C0MSL15DT6, C1MSL0DT6–C1MSL15DT6
????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–7 C0MSL0DT6–C0MSL15DT6, Message slot data 6 R W
C1MSL0DT6–C1MSL15DT6
These registers are the memory space for transmit and receive frames.
Note: • During a receive slot, an undefined value is written to the register if the data length of the data
frame being stored (DLC value) is equal to or less than 6.
13
13-70 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN0 Message Slot 0 Data 7 (C0MSL0DT7) <Address: H’0080 110D>
CAN0 Message Slot 1 Data 7 (C0MSL1DT7) <Address: H’0080 111D>
CAN0 Message Slot 2 Data 7 (C0MSL2DT7) <Address: H’0080 112D>
CAN0 Message Slot 3 Data 7 (C0MSL3DT7) <Address: H’0080 113D>
CAN0 Message Slot 4 Data 7 (C0MSL4DT7) <Address: H’0080 114D>
CAN0 Message Slot 5 Data 7 (C0MSL5DT7) <Address: H’0080 115D>
CAN0 Message Slot 6 Data 7 (C0MSL6DT7) <Address: H’0080 116D>
CAN0 Message Slot 7 Data 7 (C0MSL7DT7) <Address: H’0080 117D>
CAN0 Message Slot 8 Data 7 (C0MSL8DT7) <Address: H’0080 118D>
CAN0 Message Slot 9 Data 7 (C0MSL9DT7) <Address: H’0080 119D>
CAN0 Message Slot 10 Data 7 (C0MSL10DT7) <Address: H’0080 11AD>
CAN0 Message Slot 11 Data 7 (C0MSL11DT7) <Address: H’0080 11BD>
CAN0 Message Slot 12 Data 7 (C0MSL12DT7) <Address: H’0080 11CD>
CAN0 Message Slot 13 Data 7 (C0MSL13DT7) <Address: H’0080 11DD>
CAN0 Message Slot 14 Data 7 (C0MSL14DT7) <Address: H’0080 11ED>
CAN0 Message Slot 15 Data 7 (C0MSL15DT7) <Address: H’0080 11FD>
CAN1 Message Slot 0 Data 7 (C1MSL0DT7) <Address: H’0080 150D>
CAN1 Message Slot 1 Data 7 (C1MSL1DT7) <Address: H’0080 151D>
CAN1 Message Slot 2 Data 7 (C1MSL2DT7) <Address: H’0080 152D>
CAN1 Message Slot 3 Data 7 (C1MSL3DT7) <Address: H’0080 153D>
CAN1 Message Slot 4 Data 7 (C1MSL4DT7) <Address: H’0080 154D>
CAN1 Message Slot 5 Data 7 (C1MSL5DT7) <Address: H’0080 155D>
CAN1 Message Slot 6 Data 7 (C1MSL6DT7) <Address: H’0080 156D>
CAN1 Message Slot 7 Data 7 (C1MSL7DT7) <Address: H’0080 157D>
CAN1 Message Slot 8 Data 7 (C1MSL8DT7) <Address: H’0080 158D>
CAN1 Message Slot 9 Data 7 (C1MSL9DT7) <Address: H’0080 159D>
CAN1 Message Slot 10 Data 7 (C1MSL10DT7) <Address: H’0080 15AD>
CAN1 Message Slot 11 Data 7 (C1MSL11DT7) <Address: H’0080 15BD>
CAN1 Message Slot 12 Data 7 (C1MSL12DT7) <Address: H’0080 15CD>
CAN1 Message Slot 13 Data 7 (C1MSL13DT7) <Address: H’0080 15DD>
CAN1 Message Slot 14 Data 7 (C1MSL14DT7) <Address: H’0080 15ED>
CAN1 Message Slot 15 Data 7 (C1MSL15DT7) <Address: H’0080 15FD>
9 1011121314b15b8 C0MSL0DT7–C0MSL15DT7, C1MSL0DT7–C1MSL15DT7
????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–7 C0MSL0DT7–C0MSL15DT7, Message slot data 7 R W
C1MSL0DT7–C1MSL15DT7
These registers are the memory space for transmit and receive frames.
Note: • During a receive slot, an undefined value is written to the register if the data length of the data
frame being stored (DLC value) is equal to or less than 7.
13-71
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
13.2 CAN Module Related Registers
CAN MODULE
CAN0 Message Slot 0 Timestamp (C0MSL0TSP) <Address: H’0080 110E>
CAN0 Message Slot 1 Timestamp (C0MSL1TSP) <Address: H’0080 111E>
CAN0 Message Slot 2 Timestamp (C0MSL2TSP) <Address: H’0080 112E>
CAN0 Message Slot 3 Timestamp (C0MSL3TSP) <Address: H’0080 113E>
CAN0 Message Slot 4 Timestamp (C0MSL4TSP) <Address: H’0080 114E>
CAN0 Message Slot 5 Timestamp (C0MSL5TSP) <Address: H’0080 115E>
CAN0 Message Slot 6 Timestamp (C0MSL6TSP) <Address: H’0080 116E>
CAN0 Message Slot 7 Timestamp (C0MSL7TSP) <Address: H’0080 117E>
CAN0 Message Slot 8 Timestamp (C0MSL8TSP) <Address: H’0080 118E>
CAN0 Message Slot 9 Timestamp (C0MSL9TSP) <Address: H’0080 119E>
CAN0 Message Slot 10 Timestamp (C0MSL10TSP) <Address: H’0080 11AE>
CAN0 Message Slot 11 Timestamp (C0MSL11TSP) <Address: H’0080 11BE>
CAN0 Message Slot 12 Timestamp (C0MSL12TSP) <Address: H’0080 11CE>
CAN0 Message Slot 13 Timestamp (C0MSL13TSP) <Address: H’0080 11DE>
CAN0 Message Slot 14 Timestamp (C0MSL14TSP) <Address: H’0080 11EE>
CAN0 Message Slot 15 Timestamp (C0MSL15TSP) <Address: H’0080 11FE>
CAN1 Message Slot 0 Timestamp (C1MSL0TSP) <Address: H’0080 150E>
CAN1 Message Slot 1 Timestamp (C1MSL1TSP) <Address: H’0080 151E>
CAN1 Message Slot 2 Timestamp (C1MSL2TSP) <Address: H’0080 152E>
CAN1 Message Slot 3 Timestamp (C1MSL3TSP) <Address: H’0080 153E>
CAN1 Message Slot 4 Timestamp (C1MSL4TSP) <Address: H’0080 154E>
CAN1 Message Slot 5 Timestamp (C1MSL5TSP) <Address: H’0080 155E>
CAN1 Message Slot 6 Timestamp (C1MSL6TSP) <Address: H’0080 156E>
CAN1 Message Slot 7 Timestamp (C1MSL7TSP) <Address: H’0080 157E>
CAN1 Message Slot 8 Timestamp (C1MSL8TSP) <Address: H’0080 158E>
CAN1 Message Slot 9 Timestamp (C1MSL9TSP) <Address: H’0080 159E>
CAN1 Message Slot 10 Timestamp (C1MSL10TSP) <Address: H’0080 15AE>
CAN1 Message Slot 11 Timestamp (C1MSL11TSP) <Address: H’0080 15BE>
CAN1 Message Slot 12 Timestamp (C1MSL12TSP) <Address: H’0080 15CE>
CAN1 Message Slot 13 Timestamp (C1MSL13TSP) <Address: H’0080 15DE>
CAN1 Message Slot 14 Timestamp (C1MSL14TSP) <Address: H’0080 15EE>
CAN1 Message Slot 15 Timestamp (C1MSL15TSP) <Address: H’0080 15FE>
b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b15
C0MSL0TSP–C0MSL15TSP, C1MSL0TSP–C1MSL15TSP
????????????????
<After reset: Undefined>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–15 C0MSL0TSP–C0MSL15TSP, Message slot timestamp R W
C1MSL0TSP–C1MSL15TSP
These registers are the memory space for transmit and receive frames. When transmission/reception has fin-
ished, the CAN timestamp count register value is written to the register.
13
13-72 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
Figure 13.3.1 CAN Protocol Frames (1)
13.3 CAN Protocol
13.3.1 CAN Protocol Frames
There are four types of frames that are handled by CAN protocol:
(1) Data frame
(2) Remote frame
(3) Error frame
(4) Overload frame
Frames are separated from each other by an interframe space.
13.3 CAN Protocol
SOF Arbitration field
Control field
Data field CRC field ACK field
EOF
11 1 6 0–64 16 2 7
11 1 1 118 6 0–64 16 2 7
SOF EOF
11 1 6 16 2 7
11 1 1 118 6 16 2 7
Data frame
Remote frame
Standard format
Standard format
Extended format
Note: • The number in each field denotes the number of bits.
Extended format
1
1
1
1
Arbitration field
Control field
CRC field ACK field
13-73
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
Figure 13.3.2 CAN Protocol Frames (2)
13.3 CAN Protocol
Error flag Error delimiter Interframe space or overload flag
6–12 8
Overload flag
Overload delimiter
6–12 8
Interframe space or overload flag
Error frame
Overload frame
Interframe space
Intermission
Bus idle SOF of the next frame
For the case of an error active state
30–
Suspend transmission
For the case of an error passive state
380–
SOF of the next frame
Bus idle
Intermission
Note: • The number in each field denotes the number of bits.
1
1
13.3.2 Data Formats during CAN Transmission/Reception
Figure 13.3.3 shows an example of the transmit/receive transfer data format that can be used in CAN. Data is
transmitted/received sequentially beginning with the MSB side of the CAN message slot .
Figure 13.3.3 Example of a CAN Transmit/Receive Transfer Data Format
SOF SID0 SID1 SID2 SID3
MSB
Arbitration field
CAN frame
Arbitration field
b0 b1 b2 b3 b4
MSB
Data field
Data field
13
13-74 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.3.3 CAN Controller Error States
The CAN controller assumes one of the following three error states depending on the transmit error and receive
error counter values.
(1) Error active state
• This is a state where almost no errors have occurred.
• When an error is detected, an active error flag is transmitted.
• The CAN controller is in the state immediately after being initialized.
(2) Error passive state
• This is a state where many errors have occurred.
• When an error is detected, a passive error flag is transmitted.
(3) Bus off state
• This is a state where a very large number of errors have occurred.
CAN communication with other nodes cannot be performed until the CAN module returns to an error active state.
Error Status of the Unit Transmit Error Counter Receive Error Counter
Error active state 0–127 AND 0–127
Error passive state 128–255 OR 128 and over
Bus off state 256 and over
Transmit error counter > 255
Transmit error counter 128
OR
receive error counter 128
Transmit error counter < 128
AND
receive error counter < 128
11 consecutive recessive bits
detected on CAN bus 128 times
or reset by software
Error active
state
Error passive
state Bus off state
Initial setting
13.3 CAN Protocol
Figure 13.3.4 CAN Controller Error States
13-75
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.4 Initializing the CAN Module
13.4 Initializing the CAN Module
13.4.1 Initializing the CAN Module
Before performing communication, set up the CAN module as described below.
(1) Selecting pin functions
The CAN transmit data output pin (CTX) and CAN data receive input pin (CRX) are shared with input/output
ports. Be sure to select the functions of these pins. (See Chapter 8, “Input/Output Ports and Pin Functions.”
(2) Setting the Interrupt Controller (ICU)
To use CAN module interrupts, set their interrupt priority levels.
(3) Setting the CAN Error, CAN Single-Shot and CAN Slot Interrupt Request Enable Registers
To use CAN bus error, CAN error passive, CAN error bus off, CAN single-shot or CAN slot interrupts, set
each corresponding bit to "1" to enable the interrupt request.
(4) Setting the DMAC
To use DMA transfers by CAN, be sure to set the DMAC.
(5) Setting the CAN DMA transfer request select register
To use DMA transfers by CAN, set the CAN DMA transfer request select register to choose the cause of
transfer request.
(6) Setting the bit timing and the number of times sampled
Using the CAN Configuration Register and CAN Baud Rate Prescaler, set the bit timing and the number of
times the CAN bus is sampled.
1) Setting the bit timing
Determine the period Tq that is the base of bit timing, the configuration of Propagation Segment, Phase
Segment1 and Phase Segment2, and reSynchronization Jump Width. The equation to calculate Tq is
given below.
Tq = (BRP + 1) / (CPU clock/2)
The baud rate is determined by the number of Tq’s that comprise one bit. The equation to calculate the
baud rate is given below.
Baud rate (bps) = 1
Tq period × number of Tq’s in one bit
Number of Tq’s in one bit = Synchronization Segment + Propagation Segment + Phase Segment 1
+ Phase Segment 2
2) Setting the number of times sampled
Select the number of times the CAN bus is sampled from “one time” and “three times.”
• If one-time sampling is selected, the value sampled at only the end of Phase Segment1 is assumed to
be the value of the bit.
• If three-time sampling is selected, the value of the bit is determined by majority from three sampled
values, one sampled at the end of Phase Segment1 and the other sampled 1 Tq before and 2 Tq’s
before that.
13
13-76 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
Synchronization
Segment Propagation Segment Phase Segment1 Phase Segment2
(1)(2)(3) Sampling Point
This diagram shows the bit timing when one bit consists of 8 Tq's.
• If one-time sampling is selected, the value sampled at Sampling Point (1) is assumed to be the
value of the bit.
• If three-time sampling is selected, the value of the bit is determined by majority from CAN bus
values sampled at Sampling Points (1), (2) and (3).
1Tq
1 Bit
13.4 Initializing the CAN Module
Figure 13.4.1 Example of Bit Timing
(7) Setting the ID mask registers
Set the values of ID mask registers (Global Mask Register, Local Mask Register A and Local Mask Register
B) that are used in acceptance filtering of received messages.
(8) Settings for use in BasicCAN mode
Set the CAN Extended ID Register IDE14 and IDE15 bits. (We recommend setting the same value in these bits.)
• Set IDs in message slots 14 and 15.
• Set the Message Control Registers 14 and 15 for data frame reception (H’40).
(9) Settings for use in single-shot mode
Using the CAN Mode Register (CANnMODE) and CAN Control Register (CANnCNT), select CAN module
operation mode (BasicCAN, loopback mode) and the clock source for the timestamp counter.
(10) Setting CAN module operation mode
In the CAN Single-Shot Mode Control Register, set the slot that is to be operated in single-shot mode.
(11) Releasing the CAN module from reset
When settings (1) through (10) above are finished, clear the CAN Control Register (CANnCNT)’s forcible
reset (FRST) and reset (RST) bits to "0". Then, after detecting 11 consecutive recessive bits on the CAN bus,
the CAN module becomes ready to communicate.
13-77
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
Initialize the CAN module
Set the Input/Output Port
Operation Mode Register
Set the Interrupt Controller
Set the CAN related interrupt
request enable registers
Set the CAN
Configuration Register
Set the ID Mask Register
Set the CAN operation mode
Negate CAN reset
CAN module initialization
completed
Set interrupt priority
• Set the bit timing (baud rate)
• Set the number of times sampled
Set the ID mask bit
Set BasicCAN mode
• Set the CAN Extended ID Register
• Set IDs in message slots 14 and 15
• Set the Message Slot Control Register
Release the CAN module from reset
Set the CAN Error Interrupt Request
Enable Register
• Enable/disable CAN bus error
interrupt request
• Enable/disable CAN error
passive interrupt request
• Enable/disable CAN bus off
interrupt request
Set the CAN Slot Interrupt
Request Enable Register
• Enable/disable the interrupt
request to be generated when
transmission or reception in
the relevant slot has finished
Set the CAN Single-shot Interrupt
Request Enable Regiter
• Enable/disable the interrupt request
to be generated when single-shot
transission in the relevant slot has failed.
Set loopback mode
• Clear the CAN Control Register (CANnCNT)'s
FRST and RST bits
Set the DMAC
Set the CAN DMA transfer
request select register
Set the DMAC
Select the DMA transfer request source
Figure 13.4.2 Initializing the CAN Module
13.4 Initializing the CAN Module
13
13-78 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.5 Transmitting Data Frames
13.5 Transmitting Data Frames
13.5.1 Data Frame Transmit Procedure
The following describes the procedure for transmitting data frames.
(1) Initializing the CAN Message Slot Control Register
Initialize the CAN Message Slot Control Register for the slot to be transmitted by writing H’00 to the register.
(2) Confirming that transmission is idle
Read the CAN Message Slot Control Register that has been initialized and check the TRSTAT (Transmit/
Receive Status) bit to see that transmission/reception has stopped and remains idle. If this bit = "1", it means
that the CAN module is accessing the message slot. Therefore, wait until the bit is cleared to "0".
(3) Setting transmit data
Set the transmit ID and transmit data in the message slot.
(4) Setting the Extended ID Register
Set the corresponding bit in the Extended ID Register to "0" if the data is to be transmitted as a standard
frame, or "1" if the data is to be transmitted as an extended frame.
(5) Setting the CAN Message Slot Control Register
Write H’80 (Note 1) to the CAN Message Slot Control Register to set the TR (Transmit Request) bit to "1".
Note 1: Always be sure to write H’80 when transmitting data frames.
13-79
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.5 Transmitting Data Frames
Data frame transmit procedure
Initialize the CAN Message
Slot Control Register
Set ID and data in the
message slot
Set the Extended ID Register
Set the CAN Message Slot
Control Register
End of setting
Write H'00
Standard ID or extended ID
Write H'80 (transmit request)
Read the CAN Message Slot
Control Register
TRSTAT bit = 0
YES
NO
Confirm that transmission is idle
Figure 13.5.1 Data Frame Transmit Procedure
13.5.2 Data Frame Transmit Operation
The following describes data frame transmit operation. The operations described below are automatically per-
formed in hardware.
(1) Selecting a transmit frame
The CAN module checks slots which have transmit requests (including remote frame transmit slots) every
intermission to determine the frame to transmit. If two or more transmit slots exist, frames are transmitted in
order of slot numbers beginning with the smallest.
(2) Transmitting a data frame
After determining the transmit slot, the CAN module sets the corresponding CAN Message Slot Control
Register’s TRSTAT (Transmit/Receive Status) bit to "1" and starts transmitting.
(3) If lost in CAN bus arbitration or a CAN bus error occurs
If the CAN module lost in CAN bus arbitration or a CAN bus error occurs in the middle of transmission, the
CAN module clears the CAN Message Slot Control Register’s TRSTAT (Transmit/Receive Status) bit to "0".
If the CAN module requested a transmit abort, the transmit abort is accepted and the message slot is enabled
for write.
13
13-80 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.5 Transmitting Data Frames
(4) Completion of data frame transmission
When data frame transmission has finished, the CAN Message Slot Control Register’s TRFIN (Transmit/
Receive Finished) bit and the CAN Slot Interrupt Request Status Register are set to "1". Also, a timestamp
count value at which transmission has finished is written to the CAN Message Slot Timestamp (C0MSLnTSP,
C1MSLnTSP), and the transmit operation is thereby completed.
If the CAN slot interrupt request has been enabled, an interrupt request is generated at completion of trans-
mit operation. The slot which has had transmission completed goes to an inactive state and remains inactive
(neither transmit nor receive) until it is newly set in software.
B'1000 0010
B'0000 0001
(Note 1) B'1000 0001
B'0000 0000
(Note 1)
B'1000 0000
Write H'80 Transmission aborted
Transmit request
accepted
Note 1: When in this state, data can be written to the message slot.
Transmission
aborted
Transmit request accepted
Transmission aborted
Transmission completed
Transmission aborted
Transmission completed
Wait for transmission
B'0000 0010
Lost in CAN bus arbitration
or a CAN bus error occurs
Lost in CAN bus arbitration or
a CAN bus error occurs
Figure 13.5.2 Operation of the CAN Message Slot Control Register during Data Frame Transmission
13.5.3 Transmit Abort Function
The transmit abort function is used to cancel a transmit request that has once been set. This is accomplished by
writing H’0F to the CAN Message Slot Control Register for the slot to be canceled. When transmit abort is
accepted, the CAN module clears the CAN Message Slot Control Register’s TRSTAT (Transmit/Receive Sta-
tus) bit to "0", allowing for data to be written to the message slot. The following shows the conditions under which
transmit abort is accepted.
[Conditions]
• When the target message is waiting for transmission
• When a CAN bus error occurs during transmission
• When lost in CAN bus arbitration
1 2 3 4 5 6 b7(b15)(b8)b0
RMRRTR RL RA ML TRSTAT TRFIN
00000000
Bit arrangement in the CAN Message Slot Control Register
13-81
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.6 Receiving Data Frames
13.6 Receiving Data Frames
13.6.1 Data Frame Receive Procedure
The following describes the procedure for receiving data frames.
(1) Initializing the CAN Message Slot Control Register
Initialize the CAN Message Slot Control Register for the slot to be received by writing H’00 to the register.
(2) Confirming that reception is idle
Read the CAN Message Slot Control Register that has been initialized and check the TRSTAT (Transmit/
Receive Status) bit to see that reception has stopped and remains idle. If this bit = "1", it means that the CAN
module is accessing the message slot. Therefore, wait until the bit is cleared to "0".
(3) Setting the receive ID
Set the desired receive ID in the message slot.
(4) Setting the Extended ID Register
Set the corresponding bit in the Extended ID Register to "0" if a standard frame is to be received, or "1" if an
extended frame is to be received.
(5) Setting the CAN Message Slot Control Register
Write H’40 to the CAN Message Slot Control Register to set the RR (Receive Request) bit to "1".
13
13-82 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.6 Receiving Data Frames
Data frame receive procedure
Initialize the CAN Message Slot
Control Register
Set ID in the message slot
Set the Extended ID Register
Set the CAN Message Slot
Control Register
End of setting
Write H'00
Standard ID or extended ID
Write H'40 (receive request)
Read the CAN Message Slot
Control Register
TRSTAT bit = 0
YES
NO Confirm that reception is idle
Figure 13.6.1 Data Frame Receive Procedure
13.6.2 Data Frame Receive Operation
The following describes data frame receive operation. The operations described below are automatically per-
formed in hardware.
(1) Acceptance filtering
When the CAN module finished receiving data, it starts searching for the slot that satisfies the conditions for
receiving the received message, sequentially from slot 0 (up to slot 15). The following shows receive condi-
tions for the slots that have been set for data frame reception.
[Conditions]
• The received frame is a data frame.
The receive ID and the slot ID are identical, assuming the ID Mask Register bits set to "0" are “Don’t care.”
• The standard and extended frame types are the same.
Note: • In BasicCAN mode, slots 14 and 15 while being set for data frame reception can also
receive remote frames.
13-83
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
B'0100 0011
B'0000 0001 B'0100 0001
B'0000 0000
B'0100 0000
Clear the receive request
Set a receive
request
Store the received data
Clear the receive
request
Store the received data
Clear the receive request
Finished storing the received data
Finished storing the
received data
Clear the receive request
B'0000 0011
B'0100 0111
Store the received data
B'0100 0101
Finished storing
the received
data
B'0000 0111
B'0000 0101
Store the received data
Wait for the
received data
Wait for the received data
Finished storing
the received data
CPU read
CPU read
Clear the receive
request
Clear the receive
request
Clear the receive
request
Finished storing
the received data
Store the received data
Clear the receive request
Finished storing the
received data
Clear the receive request
Figure 13.6.2 Operation of the CAN Message Slot Control Register during Data Frame Reception
13.6 Receiving Data Frames
(2) When the receive conditions are met
When the receive conditions in (1) above are met, the CAN module sets the CAN Message Slot Control
Register’s TRSTAT (Transmit/Receive Status) bit and TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit to "1" while at
the same time writing the received data to the message slot. If the TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit is
already set to "1" at this time, the CAN module also sets the ML (Message Lost) bit to "1", indicating that the
message slot has been overwritten. The message slot has both of its ID and DLC fields entirely overwritten
and has an undefined value written in its unused area (e.g., extended ID field during standard frame recep-
tion and an unused data field).
Furthermore, a timestamp count value at which the message was received is written to the CAN Message
Slot Timestamp (C0MSLnTSP, C1MSLnTSP) along with the received data. When the CAN module finished
writing to the message slot, it sets the CAN Slot Interrupt Request Status bit to "1". If the interrupt request for
the slot has been enabled, the CAN module generates an interrupt request and enters a wait state for the
next reception.
(3) When the receive conditions are not met
The received frame is discarded, and the CAN module goes to the next transmit/receive operation without
writing to the message slot.
1 2 3 4 5 6 b7(b15)(b8)b0
RMRRTR RL RA ML TRSTAT TRFIN
00000000
Bit arrangement in the CAN Message Slot Control Register
13
13-84 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.6 Receiving Data Frames
13.6.3 Reading Out Received Data Frames
The following shows the procedure for reading out received data frames from the slot.
(1) Clearing the TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit
Write H’4E, H’40 or H’00 to the CAN Message Slot Control Register (C0MSLnCNT, C1MSLnCNT) to clear
the TRFIN bit to "0". After this write, the slot operates as follows:
Values Written to CnMSLnCNT Slot Operation after Write
H’4E Operates as a data frame receive slot. Whether overwritten can be verified by ML bit.
H’40 Operates as a data frame receive slot. Whether overwritten cannot be verified by ML bit.
H’00 The slot stops transmit/receive operation.
Notes: • If message-lost check by the ML bit is needed, write H’4E to clear the TRFIN bit.
• If the TRFIN bit was cleared by writing H’4E, H’40 or H’00, it is possible that new data will be stored in the slot while
still reading out a message from it.
(2) Reading out from the message slot
Read out a message from the message slot.
(3) Checking the TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit
Read the CAN Message Slot Control Register to check the TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit.
1) If TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit = "1"
It means that new data was stored in the slot while still reading out a message from it in (2) above. In this
case, the data read out in (2) may contain an undefined value. Therefore, reexecute the above
procedure beginning with clearing of the TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit in (1).
2) If TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit = "0"
It means that the CAN module finished reading out from the slot normally.
13-85
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.6 Receiving Data Frames
Reading out received data
Clear the TRFIN bit to 0
Read out from the message slot
Finished reading out
received data
Read the CAN Message Slot
Control Register
TRFIN bit = 0
YES
NO
Write H'4E, H'40 or H'00
Figure 13.6.3 Procedure for Reading Out Received Data
13
13-86 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.7 Transmitting Remote Frames
13.7.1 Remote Frame Transmit Procedure
The following describes the procedure for transmitting remote frames.
(1) Initializing the CAN Message Slot Control Register
Initialize the CAN Message Slot Control Register for the slot to be transmitted by writing H’00 to the register.
(2) Confirming that transmission is idle
Read the CAN Message Slot Control Register that has been initialized and check the TRSTAT (Transmit/
Receive Status) bit to see that transmission/reception has stopped and remains idle. If this bit = "1", it means
that the CAN module is accessing the message slot. Therefore, wait until the bit is cleared to "0".
(3) Setting transmit ID
Set the ID to be transmitted in the message slot.
(4) Setting the Extended ID Register
Set the corresponding bit in the Extended ID Register to "0" if the data is to be transmitted as a standard
frame, or "1" if the data is to be transmitted as an extended frame.
(5) Setting the CAN Message Slot Control Register
Write H’A0 to the CAN Message Slot Control Register to set the TR (Transmit Request) bit and RM (Remote)
bit to "1".
13.7 Transmitting Remote Frames
13-87
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.7 Transmitting Remote Frames
Remote frame
transmit procedure
Initialize the CAN Message Slot
Control Register
Set ID in the message slot
Set the Extended ID Register
Set the CAN Message Slot
Control Register
End of setting
Write H'00
Standard ID or extended ID
Write H'A0 (transmit request, remote)
Read the CAN Message Slot
Control Register
TRSTAT bit = 0
YES
NO
Confirm that transmission is idle
Figure 13.7.1 Remote Frame Transmit Procedure
13.7.2 Remote Frame Transmit Operation
The following describes remote frame transmit operation. The operations described below are automatically
performed in hardware.
(1) Setting the RA (Remote Active) bit
The RA (Remote Active) bit is set to "1" at the same time H’A0 (Transmit Request, Remote) is written to the
CAN Message Slot Control Register, indicating that the corresponding slot is to handle remote frames.
(2) Selecting a transmit frame
The CAN module checks slots which have transmit requests (including data frame transmit slots) every
intermission to determine the frame to transmit. If two or more transmit slots exist, frames are transmitted in
order of slot numbers beginning with the smallest.
(3) Transmitting a remote frame
After determining the transmit slot, the CAN module sets the corresponding CAN Message Slot Control
Register’s TRSTAT (Transmit/Receive Status) bit to "1" and starts transmitting.
13
13-88 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.7 Transmitting Remote Frames
(4) If lost in CAN bus arbitration or a CAN bus error occurs
If the CAN module lost in CAN bus arbitration or a CAN bus error occurs in the middle of transmission, the
CAN module clears the CAN Message Slot Control Register’s TRSTAT (Transmit/Receive Status) bit to "0".
If the CAN module requested a transmit abort, the transmit abort is accepted and the message slot is enabled
for write.
(5) Completion of remote frame transmission
When remote frame transmission finishes, the timestamp count value at which transmission finished is writ-
ten to the CAN Message Slot Timestamp (C0MSLnTSP, C1MSLnTSP) and the CAN Message Slot Control
Register’s RA (Remote Active) bit is cleared to "0". In addition, the CAN Slot Interrupt Request Status bit is
set to "1" by completion of transmission, but the CAN Message Slot Control Register’s TRFIN (Transmit/
Receive Finished) bit is not set to "1". If the CAN slot interrupt request has been enabled, an interrupt request
is generated when transmission has finished.
(6) Receiving a data frame
When remote frame transmission finishes, the slot automatically starts functioning as a data frame receive slot.
(7) Acceptance filtering
When the CAN module finished receiving data, it starts searching for the slot that satisfies the conditions for
receiving the received message, sequentially from slot 0 (up to slot 15). The following shows receive condi-
tions for the slots that have been set for data frame reception.
[Conditions]
• The received frame is a data frame.
The receive ID and the slot ID are identical, assuming the ID Mask Register bits set to "0" are “Don’t care.”
• The standard and extended frame types are the same.
Note: • In BasicCAN mode, slots 14 and 15 cannot be used as a transmit slot.
(8) When the receive conditions are met
When the receive conditions in (7) above are met, the CAN module sets the CAN Message Slot Control
Register’s TRSTAT (Transmit/Receive Status) bit and TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit to "1" while at
the same time writing the received data to the message slot. If the TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit is
already set to "1" at this time, the CAN module also sets the ML (Message Lost) bit to "1", indicating that the
message slot has been overwritten. The message slot has both of its ID and DLC fields entirely overwritten
and has an undefined value written in its unused area (e.g., extended ID field during standard frame recep-
tion and an unused data field).
Furthermore, a timestamp count value at which the message was received is written to the CAN Message
Slot Timestamp (C0MSLnTSP, C1MSLnTSP) along with the received data. When the CAN module finished
writing to the message slot, it sets the CAN Slot Interrupt Request Status bit to "1". If the interrupt request for
the slot has been enabled, the CAN module generates an interrupt request and enters a wait state for the
next reception.
Note: • If the CAN module receives a corresponding data frame before sending a remote frame, it stores the
received data frame in the slot and does not transmit the remote frame.
(9) When the receive conditions are not met
The received frame is discarded, and the CAN module goes to the next transmit/receive operation without
writing to the message slot.
13-89
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.7 Transmitting Remote Frames
B'0000 0000
B'0000 0000
Store the
received data
Lost in CAN bus
arbitration or a CAN
bus error occurred
Clear the transmit
request
B'0000 1010
B'1010 0011
Store the received data
Clear the transmit
request
B'0000 0011
B'0000 0001
Finished sending
a remote frame
CPU read
B'1010 0101
B'1010 1000
B'1010 1010
Finished storing the
received data
Clear the receive
request
Store the received data
Clear the receive request
B'1010 0001
B'1010 0111
B'0000 0111
B'0000 0101
Finished storing
the received data
Finished sending
a remote frame
B'1010 0000
Wait for
received data
B'1010 1011 B'0000 1011
Clear the transmit
request
B'0000 0001
Finished storing
the received data
B'0000 1000
CAN bus error
occurred Finished storing
the received data
Store the received data
Store the received data
Wait for
received data
Finished sending
a remote frame
Store the received data
Clear the receive request
Finished storing the
received data Clear the
receive request
Finished
sending
a remote
frame
Figure 13.7.2 Operation of the CAN Message Slot Control Register during Remote Frame Transmission
13.7.3 Reading Out Received Data Frames when Set for Remote Frame Transmission
The following shows the procedure for reading out the data frames that have been received in the slot when it is
set for remote frame transmission.
(1) Clearing the TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit
Write H’AE or H’00 to the CAN Message Slot Control Register (C0MSLnCNT, C1MSLnCNT) to clear the
TRFIN bit to "0". After this write, the slot operates as follows:
Values Written to CnMSLnCNT Slot Operation after Write
H’AE Operates as a data frame receive slot. Whether overwritten can be verified by ML bit.
H’00 The slot stops transmit/receive operation.
Notes: • If message-lost check by the ML bit is needed, write H’AE to clear the TRFIN bit.
• If the TRFIN bit was cleared by writing H’AE or H’00, it is possible that new data will be stored in the slot while still
reading out a message from it.
• The received data frame cannot be read out by writing H’A0 to the register. If the TRFIN bit is cleared by writing
H’A0, the slot performs remote frame transmit operation.
1 2 3 4 5 6 b7(b15)(b8)b0
RMRRTR RL RA ML TRSTAT TRFIN
00000000
Bit arrangement in the CAN Message Slot Control Register
13
13-90 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
Reading out received data
Clear the TRFIN bit to 0
Read out from the message slot
Finished reading out
received data
Read the CAN Message Slot
Control Register
TRFIN bit = 0
YES
NO
Write H'AE or H'00
Figure 13.7.3 Procedure for Reading Out Received Data when Set for Remote Frame Transmission
13.7 Transmitting Remote Frames
(2) Reading out from the message slot
Read out a message from the message slot.
(3) Checking the TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit
Read the CAN Message Slot Control Register to check the TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit.
1) If TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit = "1"
It means that new data was stored in the slot while still reading out a message from it in (2) above. In this
case, the data read out in (2) may contain an undefined value. Therefore, reexecute the above
procedure beginning with clearing of the TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit in (1).
2) If TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit = "0"
It means that the CAN module finished reading out from the slot normally.
13-91
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.8 Receiving Remote Frames
13.8 Receiving Remote Frames
13.8.1 Remote Frame Receive Procedure
The following describes the procedure for receiving remote frames.
(1) Initializing the CAN Message Slot Control Register
Initialize the CAN Message Slot Control Register for the slot to be received by writing H’00 to the register.
(2) Confirming that reception is idle
Read the CAN Message Slot Control Register that has been initialized and check the TRSTAT (Transmit/
Receive Status) bit to see that reception has stopped and remains idle. If this bit = "1", it means that the CAN
module is accessing the message slot. Therefore, wait until the bit is cleared to "0".
(3) Setting the receive ID
Set the desired receive ID in the message slot.
(4) Setting the Extended ID Register
Set the corresponding bit in the Extended ID Register to "0" if a standard frame is to be received, or "1" if an
extended frame is to be received.
(5) Setting the CAN Message Slot Control Register
1) When automatic response (data frame transmission) for remote frame reception is desired
Write H’60 to the CAN Message Slot Control Register to set the RR (Receive Request) bit and RM
(Remote) bit to "1".
2) When automatic response (data frame transmission) for remote frame reception is to be disabled
Write H’70 to the CAN Message Slot Control Register to set the RR (Receive Request) bit, RM (Remote)
bit and RL (Automatic Response Enable) bit to "1".
Note: • During BasicCAN mode, slots 14 and 15, although capable of receiving remote frames,
cannot automatically respond to remote frame reception.
13
13-92 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
Figure 13.8.1 Remote Frame Receive Procedure
13.8.2 Remote Frame Receive Operation
The following describes remote frame receive operation. The operations described below are automatically
performed in hardware.
(1) Setting the RA (Remote Active) bit
The RA (Remote Active) bit indicating that the corresponding slot is to handle remote frames is set to "1" at
the same time H’60 (Receive Request, Remote) or H’70 (Receive Request, Remote, Automatic Response
Disable) is written to the CAN Message Slot Control Register.
(2) Acceptance filtering
When the CAN module finished receiving data, it starts searching for the slot that satisfies the conditions for
receiving the received message, sequentially from slot 0 (up to slot 15). The following shows receive condi-
tions for the slots that have been set for data frame reception.
[Conditions]
• The received frame is a remote frame.
• The receive ID and the slot ID are identical, assuming the ID Mask Register bits set to "0" are “Don’t care.”
• The standard and extended frame types are the same.
13.8 Receiving Remote Frames
Remote frame
receive procedure
Initialize the CAN Message Slot
Control Register
Set ID in the message slot
Set the Extended ID Register
Set the CAN Message Slot
Control Register
End of setting
Write H'00
Standard ID or extended ID
Write H'60
(receive request, remote and automatic response enable)
Write H'70
(receive request, remote and automatic response disable)
Read the CAN Message Slot
Control Register
TRSTAT bit = 0
YES
NO
Confirm that reception is idle
13-93
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.8 Receiving Remote Frames
(3) When the receive conditions are met
When the receive conditions in (2) above are met, the CAN module sets the CAN Message Slot Control
Register’s TRSTAT (Transmit/Receive Status) bit and TRFIN (Transmit/Receive Finished) bit to "1" while at
the same time writing the received data to the message slot. In addition, a timestamp count value at which the
message was received is written to the CAN Message Slot Timestamp (C0MSLnTSP, C1MSLnTSP) along
with the received data. When the CAN module finished writing to the message slot, it sets the CAN Slot
Interrupt Request Status bit to "1". If the interrupt request for the slot has been enabled, the CAN module
generates an interrupt request.
Notes: • The ID field and DLC value are written to the message slot.
An undefined value is written to the extended ID area when receiving standard format frames.
• The data field is not written to.
• The RA and TRFIN bits are cleared to "0" after writing the received remote frame data.
(4) When the receive conditions are not met
The received data is discarded, and the CAN module waits for the next receive frame. No data is written to
the message slot.
(5) Operation after receiving a remote frame
The operation performed after receiving a remote frame differs depending on how automatic response is set.
1) When automatic response is disabled
The slot which has had reception completed goes to an inactive state and remains inactive (neither
transmit nor receive) until it is newly set in software.
2) When automatic response is enabled
After receiving a remote frame, the slot automatically changes to a data frame transmit slot and performs
the transmit operation described below. In this case, the transmitted data conforms to the ID and DLC of
the received remote frame.
• Selecting a transmit frame
The CAN module checks slots which have transmit requests (including remote frame transmit slots)
every intermission to determine the frame to transmit. If two or more transmit slots exist, frames are
transmitted in order of slot numbers beginning with the smallest.
• Transmitting a data frame
After determining the transmit slot, the CAN module sets the corresponding CAN Message Slot Control
Register’s TRSTAT (Transmit/Receive Status) bit to "1" and starts transmitting.
• If lost in CAN bus arbitration or a CAN bus error occurs
If the CAN module lost in CAN bus arbitration or a CAN bus error occurs in the middle of transmission,
the CAN module clears the CAN Message Slot Control Register’s TRSTAT (Transmit/Receive Status)
bit to "0". If the CAN module requested a transmit abort, the transmit abort is accepted and the message
slot is enabled for write.
• Completion of data frame transmission
When data frame transmission has finished, the CAN Message Slot Control Register’s TRFIN (Transmit/
Receive Finished) bit and the CAN Slot Interrupt Request Status Register are set to "1". Also, a
timestamp count value at which transmission has finished is written to the CAN Message Slot
Timestamp (C0MSLnTSP, C1MSLnTSP), and the transmit operation is thereby completed.
If the CAN slot interrupt request has been enabled, an interrupt request is generated at completion of
transmit operation. The slot which has had transmission completed goes to an inactive state and
remains inactive (neither transmit nor receive) until it is newly set in software.
13
13-94 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
Figure 13.8.2 Operation of the CAN Message Slot Control Register during Remote Frame Reception
B'0000 0000
B'0000 0000
Clear the
receive request
B'0000 1010
B'0110 0010
Store the received data
Clear the receive
request
B'0000 0010
B'0000 0001
Finished storing
the received data
B'0110 1000
B'0110 1011
Finished storing the received data
Clear the receive request
B'0110 0001
B'0110 0000
B'0111 1000
B'0000 1010
B'0000 0000
Wait for reception
Send a data frame
Clear the receive
request
Finished sending
a data frame Finished sending a data frame
Send a data frame
Finished storing
the received data
Store the
received data
B'0111 1011
Store the
received data
B'0111 0000
Finished storing
the received data
Finished storing the
received data
Clear the receive
request
Store the received data
Clear the receive
request
Write H'60
(automatic response
enabled)
Write H'70
(automatic response
disabled)
13.8 Receiving Remote Frames
1 2 3 4 5 6 b7(b15)(b8)b0
RMRRTR RL RA ML TRSTAT TRFIN
00000000
Bit arrangement in the CAN Message Slot Control Register
13-95
13
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
13.9 Precautions about CAN Module
13.9 Precautions about CAN Module
• Note for cancelation of transmit and receive CAN remote frame
When aborting remote frame transmission or canceling remote frame receiving, make sure that the RA (Remote
Active) bit is cleared to "0" after writing "H'00" or "H'0F" to the CAN Message Slot Control Register.
(1) When aborting remote frame transmission
Figure 13.9.1 Opertion Flow when Aborting Remote Frame Transmission
(2) When canceling remote frame receiving
Figure 13.9.2 Opertion Flow when Canceling Remote Frame Receiving
RA (Remote Active)
bit = "0"
Complete transmission
abort
Note 1: H'00 or H'0F can be used.
No
Yes
Start transmission abort
Write H'00 or H'0F to
CAN message slot
control register
(Note 1)
Read CAN message
slot control register
Complete receiving
abort
No
Yes
Start receiving abort
Write H'00 or H'0F to
CAN message slot
control register
(Note 1)
Read CAN message
slot control register
RA (Remote Active)
bit = "0"
Note 1: H'00 or H'0F can be used.
13
13-96 32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
CAN MODULE
This page is blank for reasons of layout.
13.9 Precautions about CAN Module
CHAPTER 14
REAL TIME DEBUGGER (RTD)
14.1 Outline of the Real-Time Debugger (RTD)
14.2 Pin Functions of the RTD
14.3 Functional Description of the RTD
14.4 Typical Connection with the Host
14
14-2
REAL TIME DEBUGGER (RTD)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
14.1 Outline of the Real-Time Debugger (RTD)
The Real-Time Debugger (RTD) is a serial I/O through which to read or write to any location in the entire area of
the internal RAM by using commands from outside the microcomputer. Because data transfers between the RTD
and internal RAM are performed via a dedicated internal bus independently of the M32R-FPU, RTD operation can
be controlled without the need to stop the M32R-FPU.
Table 14.1.1 Outline of the Real-Time Debugger (RTD)
Item Description
Transfer method Clock-synchronous serial I/O
Generation of transfer clock Generated by external host
RAM access area Entire area of the internal RAM (controlled by A16–A29)
Transmit/receive data length 32 bits (fixed)
Bit transfer sequence LSB first
Maximum transfer rate 2 Mbits/second
Input/output pins 4 pins (RTDTXD, RTDRXD, RTDACK, RTDCLK)
Number of commands Following five functions
• Monitor continuously
• Output real-time RAM content
• Forcibly rewrite RAM content (with verify)
• Recover from runaway condition
• Request RTD interrupt
Figure 14.1.1 Block Diagram of the Real-Time Debugger (RTD)
14.1 Outline of the Real-Time Debugger (RTD)
Control Circuit
Commands
Data
Data
Address
Address Data
RTD Control Circuit
Entire RAM area
CPU
Address Data
Bus Switching Circuit
RTDCLKRTDCLK
RTDACK
RTDTXD
RTDRXD
14
14-3
REAL TIME DEBUGGER (RTD)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
14.2 Pin Functions of the RTD
Pin Functions of the RTD are shown below.
Table 14.2.1 Pin Functions of the RTD
Pin Name Type Function
RTDTXD Output RTD serial data output
RTDRXD Input RTD serial data input
RTDACK Output Output a low-level pulse synchronously with the beginning clock edge of the output data word.
The width of this pulse indicates the type of instruction or data the RTD has received.
1 clock period: VER (continuous monitor) command
1 clock period: VEI (RTD interrupt request) command
2 clock periods: RDR (real-time RAM content output) command
3 clock periods: WRR (RAM content forcible rewrite) command or the data to rewrite
4 clock periods or more: RCV (recover from runaway) command
RTDCLK Input RTD transfer clock input
14.2 Pin Functions of the RTD
14
14-4
REAL TIME DEBUGGER (RTD)
14.3 Functional Description of the RTD
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
14.3 Functional Description of the RTD
14.3.1 Outline of the RTD Operation
Operation of the RTD is specified by a command entered from devices external to the chip. A command is
indicated by bits 16–19 (Note 1) of the RTD received data.
Table 14.3.1 RTD Commands
RTD Received Data Command
b19 b18 b17 b16 Mnemonic RTD Function
0 0 0 0 VER (VERify) Continuous monitor
0100
0101
0 1 1 0 VEI (VErify Interrupt request) RTD interrupt request
0 0 1 0 RDR (ReaD RAM) Real-time RAM content output
0 0 1 1 WRR (WRite RAM) RAM content forcible rewrite (with verify)
1 1 1 1 RCV (ReCoVer) Recover from runaway condition (Note 2), (Note 3)
0 0 0 1 System reserved (use inhibited)
(Note 1)
Note 1: The RTD received data bit 19 actually is not stored in the command register, and except for the RCV
command, handled as a “Don’t care” bit. (Bits 16–18 are effective for the command specified.)
Note 2: The RCV command must always be transmitted twice in succession.
Note 3: For the RCV command, all bits, not just 16–19, (i.e., bits 0–15 and bits 20–31) must be set to "1".
14.3.2 Operation of RDR (Real-time RAM Content Output)
When the RDR (real-time RAM content output) command is issued, the RTD is enabled to transfer the contents
of the internal RAM to external devices without causing the CPU’s internal bus to stop. Because the RTD reads
data from the internal RAM while there are no transfers performed between the CPU and internal RAM, no extra
CPU load is incurred.
Only the 32-bit word-aligned addresses can be specified for read from the internal RAM. (The two low-order
address bits specified by a command are ignored.) Data are read out and transferred from the internal RAM in
32-bit units.
Figure 14.3.1 RDR Command Data Format
31
X 0010
19 18 17 16
0
15
0
14 13 12 1
A16
0
X
20
A17A28A29
Command (RDR) Specified address
Note: • X = Don't care. (However, if issued immediately after the RCV command, bits 20-31 must all be set to 1.)
RTDRXD
(MSB side)
(LSB side)
14
14-5
REAL TIME DEBUGGER (RTD)
14.3 Functional Description of the RTD
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
32 c
l
oc
k
periods
RDR (A1) RDR (A2) RDR (A3)
D (A1) D (A2)
Note: • (An) = Specified address
• D(An) = Data at specified address (An)
RTDCLK
RTDRXD
RTDTXD
RTDACK
32 clock
periods 32 clock
periods 32 clock
periods
2 clock periods
Figure 14.3.2 Operation of the RDR Command
Figure 14.3.3 Read Data Transfer Format
31
b31
1
b0
0
b30
30
b1
Read data
RTDTXD
Note: • The read data is transferred LSB-first.
(MSB side)(LSB side)
14
14-6
REAL TIME DEBUGGER (RTD)
14.3 Functional Description of the RTD
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
32 clock
periods 32 clock
periods
WRR(A1) (A1) Write data
3 clock periods
RTDCLK
RTDRXD
RTDTXD
RTDACK
WRR(A2) (A2) Write data
D (A1) Read value
before writing D (A1) Verify value
after writing
Notes: • (An) = Specified address
• D
(
An
)
= Data at s
p
ecified address
(
An
)
32 clock
periods 32 clock
periods
Figure 14.3.5 Operation of the WRR Command
14.3.3 Operation of the WRR (RAM Content Forcible Rewrite)
When the WRR (RAM content forcible rewrite) command is issued, the RTD forcibly rewrites the contents of the
internal RAM without causing the CPU’s internal bus to stop. Because the RTD writes data to the internal RAM
while there are no transfers performed between the CPU and internal RAM, no extra CPU load is incurred.
Only the 32-bit word-aligned addresses can be specified for read from the internal RAM. (The two low-order
address bits specified by a command are ignored.) Data are written to the internal RAM in 32-bit units.
The external host should transmit the command and address in the first frame and then the write data in the
second frame. The RTD writes to the internal RAM in the third frame after receiving the write data.
Figure 14.3.4 WRR Command Data Format
The RTD reads out data from the specified address before writing to the internal RAM and again reads out data
from the same address immediately after writing to the internal RAM (this helps to verify the data written to the
internal RAM). The read data is output at the timing shown below.
31
X 0 0 11
19 18 17 16
0
15
0
14 13 12 1
A16
0
X
20
A17A28A29
Command (WRR) Specified address
Notes: • X = Don't care. (However, if issued immediately after the RCV command, bits 20-31 must all be set to 1.)
The specified address and write data are transferred LSB-first.
31
b31
1
b0
0
b30
30
b1
Write data
RTDRXD
(MSB side)
(MSB side)
(LSB side)
(LSB side)
RTDRXD
a) First frame
b) Second frame
14
14-7
REAL TIME DEBUGGER (RTD)
14.3 Functional Description of the RTD
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
14.3.4 Operation of VER (Continuous Monitor)
When the VER (continuous monitor) command is issued, the RTD outputs the data from the address that has
been accessed by an instruction (either read or write) immediately before receiving the VER command.
Figure 14.3.6 VER (Continuous Monitor) Command Data Format
32 clock
periods
RDR(A1) VER
2 clock periods
RTDCLK
RTDRXD
RTDTXD
RTDACK
D (A1)
Read value D (A1)
Latest read value
(Note 1) VER
Note 1: WRR command can also be used.
Notes: • (An) = Specified address
• D(An) = Data at specified address (An)
32 clock
periods 32 clock
periods 32 clock
periods
Figure 14.3.7 Operation of the VER (Continuous Monitor) Command
14.3.5 Operation of VEI (Interrupt Request)
When the VEI (interrupt request) command is issued, the RTD generates an interrupt request. Furthermore, the RTD
outputs the data from the address that has been accessed by an instruction (either read or write) immediately before
receiving the VEI command.
31
X00
00
19 18 17 16
00
15 14 0
X
20
Command (VER)
Notes: • X = Don't care.
(However, if issued immediately after the RCV command, bits 20-31 must all be set to 1.)
RTDRXD X
(MSB side)
(LSB side)
Figure 14.3.8 VEI (Interrupt Request) Command Data Format
31
X01
10
19 18 17 16
00
15 14 0
X
20
VEI (interrupt request generation) command
RTDRXD X
Note: • X = Don't care.
(However, if issued immediately after the VEI command, bits 20-31 must all be set to 1.)
(MSB side)
(LSB side)
14
14-8
REAL TIME DEBUGGER (RTD)
14.3 Functional Description of the RTD
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 14.3.10 RCV Command Data Format
31
1 1111
19 18 17 16
1
15 0
1
20
Command (RCV)
RTDRXD 1
Notes: • All of 32 data bits are 1's.
The RCV command must always be issued twice in succession.
(MSB side)
(LSB side)
32 clock
periods
RDR(A1) VEI
2 clock periods
RTDCLK
RTDRXD
RTDTXD
RTDACK
RTD interrupt request
RTD interrupt
D (A1)
Read value
Note 1: WRR command can also be used.
Notes: • (An) = Specified address
• D(An) = Data at specified address (An)
32 clock
periods 32 clock
periods 32 clock
periods
(Note 1)
D (A1)
Read value
Figure 14.3.9 Operation of the VEI (Interrupt Request) Command
14.3.6 Operation of RCV (Recover from Runaway)
If the RTD runs out of control, the RCV (recover from runaway) command may be issued to recover from the
runaway condition without the need to reset the system. The RCV command must always be issued twice in
succession. Also, any command issued immediately following the RCV command must have all of its bits 20–31
set to "1".
14
14-9
REAL TIME DEBUGGER (RTD)
14.3 Functional Description of the RTD
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
RCV
RCV command stored
RTDCLK
RTDRXD
RTDTXD
RTDACK
RCV
Bits 20-31
D(A1)
Indeterminate data during runaway condition
Indeterminate value during
runaway condition
Note: • The next command following the RCV command must have all of its bits 20-31 set to 1.
Next command following RCV command
2 clock periods
1 • • • 1 RDR(A1)
32 clock
periods 32 clock
periods 32 clock
periods 32 clock
periods
2 clock periods
Figure 14.3.11 Operation of the RCV Command
14.3.7 Method for Setting a Specified Address when Using the RTD
In the Real-Time Debugger (RTD), the low-order 16-bit addresses of the internal RAM can be specified. Be-
cause the internal RAM is located in a 64-KB area ranging from H’0080 4000 to H’0081 3FFF, the low-order 16-
bit addresses of that area (H’4000 to H’FFFF, H'0000 to H'3FFF) can be set. Setting the 16-bit lower addresses
H’4000–H’FFFF specifies a RAM area from H’0080 4000 to H’0080 FFFF. Similarly, setting the 16-bit lower
addresses H’0000–H’3FFF specifies a RAM area from H’0081 0000 to H’0081 3FFF.
Note also that two least significant address bits, A31 and A30, area always 0 because data are read and written
to and from the internal RAM in a fixed length of 32 bits.
SFR 16KB
H'0080 0000
H'0080 4000
Memory map
H'0081 3FFF
XXA29 – A16
Only H'0080 4000 to H'0081 3FFF
can be specified
• • •
RAM area
64 KB
Figure 14.3.12 Setting Addresses in the Real-Time Debugger
14
14-10
REAL TIME DEBUGGER (RTD)
14.3 Functional Description of the RTD
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
14.3.8 Resetting the RTD
The RTD is reset by applying a system reset (i.e., RESET# signal). The status of the RTD related output pins
after a system reset are shown below.
Table 14.3.2 RTD Pin Status after System Reset
Pin Name Status
RTDACK High-level output
RTDTXD High-level output
The first command transfer to the RTD after being reset is initiated by transferring data to the RTDRXD pin
synchronously with the falling edge of RTDCLK.
32 clock
periods
Don't Care RDR(A1)
RTDCLK
RTDRXD
RTDTXD
RTDACK
RESET#
System
reset
"H"
RDR(A2)
0000 0000 0000 0000 D(A2)
Notes: • (An) = Specified address
• D(An) = Data at specified address (An)
"H"
D(A1)
32 clock
periods
32 clock
periods
32 clock
periods
Figure 14.3.13 Command Transfer to the RTD after System Reset
14
14-11
REAL TIME DEBUGGER (RTD)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
(8 bits)
Check that the RTDACK signal is low.
RTDCLK
RTDRXD
RTDTXD
RTDACK
Transfer of one frame (32 bits)
1 2
Transfer of the
next frame
(8 bits) (8 bits)
Figure 14.4.2 Example of Communication with the Host (when Using VER Command)
14.4 Typical Connection with the Host
14.4 Typical Connection with the Host
The host uses a serial synchronous interface to transfer data. The clock for synchronous communication should
be generated by the host. An example for connecting the RTD and host is shown below.
Figure 14.4.1 Connecting the RTD and Host
The RTD communication is performed in a fixed length of 32 bits per frame. Because serial interfaces generally
handle data in 8-bit units, data is transferred separately in four operations, 8 bits at a time. The RTDACK signal is
used to verify that communication is performed normally.
The RTDACK signal goes low after a command is sent, providing a means of verifying the communication status.
When issuing the VER command, the RTDACK signal is pulled low for only one clock period. Therefore, after
sending 32 bits in one frame via a serial interface, turn off RTDCLK output and check that RTDACK is low. That
way, it is possible to know whether the RTD is communicating normally.
If it is desirable to identify the type of transmitted command by the width of RTDACK, use the microcomputer’s
internal measurement timer (to count RTDCLK pulses while RTDACK is low), or design a dedicated circuit.
RTDRXD
RTDTXD
RTDCLK
RTDACK
M32R/ECU Host
microprocessor
RXD
TXD
SCLK
PORT
(Note 1)
Note 1: This applies to the case where the RTDACK level is checked between transfer frames.
14
14-12
REAL TIME DEBUGGER (RTD)
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
14.4 Typical Connection with the Host
This page is blank for reasons of layout.
CHAPTER 15
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
15.1 Outline of the External Bus Interface
15.2 External Bus Interface Related Registers
15.3 Read/Write Operations
15.4 Bus Arbitration
15.5 Typical Connection of External Extension
Memory
15.6 Example of Bus Voltage Settings Using
VCC-BUS
15
15-2
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
15.1 Outline of the External Bus Interface
15.1.1 External Bus Interface Related Signals
The 32182 has the external bus interface related signals described below. These signals can be used in external
extension and processor modes. Furthermore, a dedicated power supply for the bus control pins (bus power
supply: VCC-BUS) is included. When used separately from other power supplies, it allows external devices
operating with other than the main power supply voltage to be connected.
The symbol “#” suffixed to the pin names (or signal names) means that the pins (or signals) are active-low.
(1) Address
The 32182 outputs a 20-bit address (A11–A30) for addressing any location in a 2-Mbyte space. The least
significant A31 is not output.
Note: • During external extension mode, these pins are switched for port after reset. Their pin functions must
be set for address output using the corresponding port operation mode register as necessary.
(2) Chip select (CS0#–CS3#)
The CS0#–CS3# signals are output for extended external areas divided in 2-Mbyte units. The CS0# signal
points to a 2-Mbyte area during processor mode or a 1-Mbyte area during external extension mode. (For
details, see Chapter 3, “Address Space.”)
Note: • During external extension mode, these pins are switched for port after reset. Their pin functions must
be set for chip select using the corresponding port operation mode register as necessary.
(3) Read strobe (RD#)
Output during an external read cycle, this signal indicates the timing at which to read data from the bus. This
signal is driven high when writing to the bus or accessing the internal area.
(4) Byte High Write/Byte High Enable (BHW#/BHE#)
The pin function changes depending on the Bus Mode Control Register (BUSMODC).
When BUSMOD = "0" and this signal is Byte High Write (BHW#), during external write access it indicates that
the upper byte (DB0–DB7) of the data bus is the valid data transferred. During external read and when
accessing the internal area it outputs a high.
When BUSMOD = "1" and this signal is Byte High Enable (BHE#), during external access (for read or write)
it indicates that the upper byte (DB0–DB7) of the data bus is the valid data transferred. When accessing the
internal area it outputs a high.
(5) Byte Low Write/Byte Low Enable (BLW#/BLE#)
The pin function changes depending on the Bus Mode Control Register (BUSMODC).
When BUSMOD = "0" and this signal is Byte Low Write (BLW#), during external write access it indicates that
the lower byte (DB8–DB15) of the data bus is the valid data transferred. During external read and when
accessing the internal area it outputs a high.
When BUSMOD = "1" and this signal is Byte Low Enable (BLE#), during external access (for read or write) it
indicates that the lower byte (DB8–DB15) of the data bus is the valid data transferred. When accessing the
internal area it outputs a high.
15.1 Outline of the External Bus Interface
15
15-3
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
(6) Data bus (DB0–DB15)
This is the 16-bit data bus used to access external devices. During external read access, data is latched from
the bus synchronously with the rising edge of the read strobe. During external write access, data is output
from the bus. When accessing the internal area, the bus functions as an input bus.
Note: • During external extension mode, these pins are switched for port after reset. Their pin functions must
be set for data bus using the corresponding port operation mode register as necessary.
(7) System clock/write (BCLK/WR#)
The pin function changes depending on the Bus Mode Control Register (BUSMODC).
When BUSMOD = "0" and this signal is System Clock (BCLK), it outputs the system clock necessary to
synchronize operations in an external system. When the CPU clock = 80 MHz, a 20 MHz clock is output from
BCLK. When not using the BCLK/WR function, this pin can be used as P70 by clearing the P7 Operation
Mode Register P70MD bit to "0".
When BUSMOD = "1" and this signal is Write (WR#), during external write access it indicates the valid data
transferred on the data bus. During external read cycle and when accessing the internal area it outputs a high.
Note: • During external extension mode, this pin is switched for port after reset. Its pin function must be set
for system clock/write using the corresponding port operation mode register as necessary.
(8) Wait (WAIT#)
When the 32182 started an external bus cycle, it automatically inserts wait states while the WAIT# input
signal is asserted. For details, see Chapter 16, “Wait Controller.” When not using the WAIT function, this pin
can be used as P71 by clearing the P7 Operation Mode Register P71MD bit to "0".
Note: • During external extension mode, this pin is switched for port after reset. Its pin function must be
set for wait using the corresponding port operation mode register as necessary.
(9) Hold control (HREQ#, HACK#)
The hold state refers to a state in which the microcomputer has stopped accessing the bus and the bus
interface related pins are tristated (high impedance). While the microcomputer is in a hold state, any bus
master external to the chip can use the system bus to transfer data.
A low signal input on the HREQ# pin places the microcomputer into a hold state. While the microcomputer
remains in a hold state after accepting the hold request and during a transition to the hold state, the HACK#
pin outputs a low-level signal. To exit the hold state and return to normal operating state, release the HREQ#
signal back high.
Note: • During external extension mode, these pins are switched for port after reset. Their pin functions must
be set for hold control using the corresponding port operation mode register as necessary.
The status of each pin during hold are shown below.
Table 15.1.1 Pin State during Hold Period
Pin Name Pin State or Operation
A11–A30, DB0–DB15, CS0#–CS3#, RD#, BHW#, BLW#, BHE#, BLE#, WR# High impedance
HACK# Output a low
Other pins (e.g., ports and timer output) Normal operation
(10) Bus power supply (VCC-BUS)
This pin supplies power to the bus control pins. A voltage different from that of the main power supply can be
applied, which is convenient when external devices are connected to the system.
15.1 Outline of the External Bus Interface
15
15-4
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
15.2 External Bus Interface Related Registers
The following describes the external bus interface related registers.
15.2.1 Port Operation Mode Registers
Ports P0–P4 (except P41–P43), P224 and P225 are switched for external access signal pins during external
extension mode when so set by the corresponding operation mode register. During processor mode, these ports
always function as external access signal pins.
During external extension mode, these pins are switched for port after reset. Therefore, by switching the pin
functions for only those pins that are needed for external access, the remaining pins can be used as port.
Ports P70–P73 can be switched for external access signal pins at any time irrespective of the CPU operation
mode. Ports P41–P43 always function as external access signal pins during external extension and processor
modes.
P0 Operation Mode Register (P0MOD) <Address: H’0080 0740>
123456b7b0
P00MD P01MD P02MD P03MD P04MD P05MD P06MD P07MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 P00MD 0: P00 R W
Port P00 operation mode bit 1: DB0
1 P01MD 0: P01 R W
Port P01 operation mode bit 1: DB1
2 P02MD 0: P02 R W
Port P02 operation mode bit 1: DB2
3 P03MD 0: P03 R W
Port P03 operation mode bit 1: DB3
4 P04MD 0: P04 R W
Port P04 operation mode bit 1: DB4
5 P05MD 0: P05 R W
Port P05 operation mode bit 1: DB5
6 P06MD 0: P06 R W
Port P06 operation mode bit 1: DB6
7 P07MD 0: P07 R W
Port P07 operation mode bit 1: DB7
Note: • Settings of the P0 Operation Mode Register are effective only when the CPU is operating in external extension mode.
15.2 External Bus Interface Related Registers
15
15-5
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
15.2 External Bus Interface Related Registers
P1 Operation Mode Register (P1MOD) <Address: H’0080 0741>
9 1011121314b15b8
P10MD P11MD P12MD P13MD P14MD P15MD P16MD P17MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 P10MD 0: P10 R W
Port P10 operation mode bit 1: DB8
9 P11MD 0: P11 R W
Port P11 operation mode bit 1: DB9
10 P12MD 0: P12 R W
Port P12 operation mode bit 1: DB10
11 P13MD 0: P13 R W
Port P13 operation mode bit 1: DB11
12 P14MD 0: P14 R W
Port P14 operation mode bit 1: DB12
13 P15MD 0: P15 R W
Port P15 operation mode bit 1: DB13
14 P16MD 0: P16 R W
Port P16 operation mode bit 1: DB14
15 P17MD 0: P17 R W
Port P17 operation mode bit 1: DB15
Note: • Settings of the P1 Operation Mode Register are effective only when the CPU is operating in external extension mode.
P2 Operation Mode Register (P2MOD) <Address: H’0080 0742>
123456b7b0
P20MD P21MD P22MD P23MD P24MD P25MD P26MD P27MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 P20MD 0: P20 R W
Port P20 operation mode bit 1: A23
1 P21MD 0: P21 R W
Port P21 operation mode bit 1: A24
2 P22MD 0: P22 R W
Port P22 operation mode bit 1: A25
3 P23MD 0: P23 R W
Port P23 operation mode bit 1: A26
4 P24MD 0: P24 R W
Port P24 operation mode bit 1: A27
5 P25MD 0: P25 R W
Port P25 operation mode bit 1: A28
6 P26MD 0: P26 R W
Port P26 operation mode bit 1: A29
7 P27MD 0: P27 R W
Port P27 operation mode bit 1: A30
Note: • Settings of the P2 Operation Mode Register are effective only when the CPU is operating in external extension mode.
15
15-6
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
15.2 External Bus Interface Related Registers
P3 Operation Mode Register (P3MOD) <Address: H’0080 0743>
9 1011121314b15b8
P30MD P31MD P32MD P33MD P34MD P35MD P36MD P37MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 P30MD 0: P30 R W
Port P30 operation mode bit 1: A15
9 P31MD 0: P31 R W
Port P31 operation mode bit 1: A16
10 P32MD 0: P32 R W
Port P32 operation mode bit 1: A17
11 P33MD 0: P33 R W
Port P33 operation mode bit 1: A18
12 P34MD 0: P34 R W
Port P34 operation mode bit 1: A19
13 P35MD 0: P35 R W
Port P35 operation mode bit 1: A20
14 P36MD 0: P36 R W
Port P36 operation mode bit 1: A21
15 P37MD 0: P37 R W
Port P37 operation mode bit 1: A22
Note: • Settings of the P3 Operation Mode Register are effective only when the CPU is operating in external extension mode.
P4 Operation Mode Register (P4MOD) <Address: H’0080 0744>
123456b7b0
P44MD P45MD P46MD P47MD
0000
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–3 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
4 P44MD 0: P44 R W
Port P44 operation mode bit 1: CS0#
5 P45MD 0: P45 R W
Port P45 operation mode bit 1: CS1#
6 P46MD 0: P46 R W
Port P46 operation mode bit 1: A13
7 P47MD 0: P47 R W
Port P47 operation mode bit 1: A14
Note: • Settings of the P4 Operation Mode Register are effective only when the CPU is operating in external extension mode.
15
15-7
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
15.2 External Bus Interface Related Registers
P7 Operation Mode Register (P7MOD) <Address: H’0080 0747>
9 1011121314b15b8
P75MD P76MD P77MDP70MD P71MD P72MD P73MD P74MD
00000000
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 P70MD 0: P70 R W
Port P70 operation mode bit 1: BCLK/WR#
9 P71MD 0: P71 R W
Port P71 operation mode bit 1: WAIT#
10 P72MD 0: P72 R W
Port P72 operation mode bit 1: HREQ#
11 P73MD 0: P73 R W
Port P73 operation mode bit 1: HACK#
12 P74MD 0: P74 R W
Port P74 operation mode bit 1: RTDTXD
13 P75MD 0: P75 R W
Port P75 operation mode bit 1: RTDRXD
14 P76MD 0: P76 R W
Port P76 operation mode bit 1: RTDACK
15 P77MD 0: P77 R W
Port P77 operation mode bit 1: RTDCLK
P22 Operation Mode Register (P22MOD) <Address: H’0080 0756>
123456b7b0
P220MD P222MD P223MD P224MD P225MD P226MD P227MD
0 000000
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 P220MD 0: P220 R W
Port P220 operation mode bit 1: CTX0
1 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
2, 3 Fix to "0" 00
4 P224MD 0: P224 R W
Port P224 operation mode bit (Note 1) 1: A11/CS2# (Note 2)
5 P225MD 0: P225 R W
Port P225 operation mode bit (Note 1) 1: A12/CS3# (Note 2)
6, 7 Fix to "0" 00
Note 1: Port P224 and P225 operation modes are effective only when the CPU is operating in external extension mode.
Note 2: Either of the functions is selected using the P22 Peripheral Output Select Register.
Notes: • P221 is a CAN input-only pin.
Although no pins are available for P222, P223, P226 and P227, because internal circuits are included, make sure the ports
are set for low-level output when initialized (to prevent current from flowing in through the port). However, P223 is an input-
only pin, so that there is no need to set it for output.
15
15-8
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
15.2 External Bus Interface Related Registers
15.2.2 Port Peripheral Output Select Register
To use ports P224 and P225 as external access signal pins, their pin functions must be set using the P22
Peripheral Output Select Register, because the A11 and CS2# pins and the A12 and CS3# pins are shared.
P22 Peripheral Output Select Register (P22SMOD) <Address: H’0080 0776>
123456b7b0
P224
S
M
D
P22
5
S
M
D
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–3 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
4 P224SMD 0: A11 R W
Port P224 peripheral output select mode bit 1: CS2#
5 P225SMD 0: A12 R W
Port P225 peripheral output select mode bit 1: CS3#
6–7 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
15
15-9
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
15.2.3 Bus Mode Control Register
Bus Mode Control Register (BUSMODC) <Address: H’0080 077F>
9 1011121314b15b8
BUSMOD
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–14 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
15 BUSMOD 0: WR signal separate mode R W
Bus mode control bit 1: Byte enable separate mode
This register is used to facilitate memory connections during processor mode and external extension mode.
When the Bus Mode Control bit (BUSMOD) = "0", the WR# signal is output separately for each byte area.
Signals RD#, BHW#, BLW#, BCLK# and WAIT# can be used.
When the Bus Mode Control bit (BUSMOD) = "1", the byte enable signal is output separately for each byte area.
Signals RD#, BHE#, BLE#, WR# and WAIT# can be used. In a WAIT control circuit configuration, because
BCLK output is not available, timing must be controlled external to the chip.
Note: • Any external bus area must temporarily be accessed for read or write before the Bus Mode
Control bit (BUSMOD) can be set to "1" (= byte enable separate mode).
For memory connection in boot mode, the Bus Mode Control Register has no effect, and the microcomputer
operates in the same way as when the Bus Mode Control bit (BUSMOD) is cleared to "0".
Figure 15.2.1 Pin Functions when External Bus Modes are Changed
CS0#–CS3#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
BHW#
BLW#
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
WR#
BHE#
BLE#
A11–A30
BCLK
BUSMOD bit = 0 BUSMOD bit = 1
15.2 External Bus Interface Related Registers
15
15-10
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
15.3 Read/Write Operations
(1) When the Bus Mode Control Register = "0"
External read/write operations are performed using the address bus, data bus and the signals CS0#–CS3#,
RD#, BHW#, BLW#, WAIT# and BCLK. In the external read cycle, the RD# signal is low while BHW# and
BLW# both are high, with data read in from only the necessary byte position. In the external write cycle, the
BHW# or BLW# signal output for the byte position to write is asserted low as data is written to the bus.
When an external bus cycle starts, wait states are inserted as long as the WAIT# signal is low. Unless
necessary, the WAIT# signal must always be held high.
Figure 15.3.1 Internal Bus Access during Bus Free State
15.3 Read/Write Operations
Bus-free state
Internal bus access
"H"
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Hi-z
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note: • Hi-Z denotes a high-impedance state.
(Don't Care)
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 0 (WR signal separated)
15
15-11
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 15.3.2 Read/Write Timing (for Zero Wait Access)
Read
Write
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Note: • When zero wait state is selected, assertion of WAIT# is not accepted.
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
Read (1 cycle)
(Don't Care)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
RD# "H"
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
Write (1 cycle)
(Don't Care)
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 0 (WR signal separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 000 (zero wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
15.3 Read/Write Operations
15
15-12
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 15.3.3 Read/Write Timing (for Access with Internal 2 and External 1 Wait States)
Read
Write
Read (4 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Note: • Circles in the above diagram denote the sampling timing.
"L"
Internal
2 wait states
External
1 wait state
(Don't Care)
"H"
(Don't Care)
Write (4 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
"L"
(Don't Care)
"H"
(Don't Care)
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 0 (WR signal separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 010 (2 wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
Internal
2 wait states
External
1 wait state
15.3 Read/Write Operations
15
15-13
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
(2) When the Bus Mode Control Register = "1"
External read/write operations are performed using the address bus, data bus and the signals CS0#–CS3#,
RD#, BHE#, BLE#, WAIT# and WR#. In the external read cycle, the RD# signal is low and the BHE# or BLE#
signal output for the byte position from which to read is asserted low, with data read in from only the neces-
sary byte position of the bus. In the external write cycle, the WR# signal goes low and the BHE# or BLE#
signal output for the byte position to write is asserted low, with data written to the necessary byte position.
When an external bus cycle starts, wait states are inserted as long as the WAIT# signal is low. Unless
necessary, the WAIT# signal must always be held high.
Figure 15.3.4 Internal Bus Access during Bus Free State
"H"
WR#
Bus-free state
Internal bus access
"H"
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHE#, BLE#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Hi-z
(Don't Care)
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Notes: • Hi-Z denotes a high-impedance state.
• BCLK is not output.
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 1 (byte enable separated)
15.3 Read/Write Operations
15
15-14
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 15.3.5 Read/Write Timing (for Zero Wait Access)
Read
Write
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHE#, BLE#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Notes: • When zero wait state is selected, assertion of WAIT# is not accepted.
• BCLK is not output.
Read (1 cycle)
WR#
(Don't Care)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHE#, BLE#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
Write (1 cycle)
WR#
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 1 (byte enable separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 000 (zero wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
"H"
(Don't Care)
BCLK
15.3 Read/Write Operations
15
15-15
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 15.3.6 Read/Write Timing (for Access with Internal 2 and External 1 Wait States)
Read
Write
Read (4 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Notes: • Circles in the above diagram denote the sampling timing.
• BCLK is not output.
"H"
Internal
2 wait states
External
1 wait state
WR#
"L"
(Don't Care)
Write (4 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
"H"
WR#
"L"
(Don't Care) (Don't Care)
(Don't Care)
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 1 (byte enable separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 010 (2 wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
Internal
2 wait states
External
1 wait state
15.3 Read/Write Operations
15
15-16
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
15.4 Bus Arbitration
15.4 Bus Arbitration
(1) When the Bus Mode Control Register = "0"
When the input signal on the HREQ# pin is pulled low and the hold request is accepted, the microcomputer
goes to a hold state and outputs a low from the HACK# pin. During hold state, all bus related pins are placed
in the high-impedance state, allowing data to be transferred on the system bus. To exit the hold state and
return to normal operating state, release the HREQ# signal back high.
Figure 15.4.1 Bus Arbitration Timing
DB0–DB15
BCLK
Bus cycle Idle
Go to
hold state
Hold state Return Next
bus cycle
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Notes: • Circles in the above diagram denote the sampling timing.
• Hi-Z denotes a high-impedance state.
• Idle cycles are inserted only when a hold state is entered immediately following an external read access.
HREQ#
HACK#
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
RD#
BHW#, BLW#
WAIT#
Hi-Z
(Don't Care)
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 0 (WR signal separated)
15
15-17
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
(2) When the Bus Mode Control Register = "1"
When the input signal on the HREQ# pin is pulled low and the hold request is accepted, the microcomputer
goes to a hold state and outputs a low from the HACK# pin. During hold state, all bus related pins are placed
in the high-impedance state, allowing data to be transferred on the system bus. To exit the hold state and
return to normal operating state, release the HREQ# signal back high.
Figure 15.4.2 Bus Arbitration Timing
DB0–DB15
BCLK
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Notes: • Circles in the above diagram denote the sampling timing.
• Hi-Z denotes a high-impedance state.
• Idle cycles are inserted only when a hold state is entered immediately following an external read access.
HREQ#
HACK#
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
RD#
BHW#, BLW#
WAIT#
Hi-Z
(Don't Care)
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
WR#
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 1 (byte enable separated)
Bus cycle Idle
Go to
hold state
Hold state Return Next
bus cycle
15.4 Bus Arbitration
15
15-18
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
15.5 Typical Connection of External Extension Memory
15.5 Typical Connection of External Extension Memory
(1) When the Bus Mode Control Register = "0"
A typical memory connection when using external extension memory is shown in Figure 15.5.1. (External
extension memory can only be used in external extension mode and processor mode.)
Figure 15.5.1 Typical Connection of External Extension Memory (when BUSMOD bit = "0")
Note: • The address and data are connected in such a way that pin 0 is the MSB and pin 15 is the LSB.
When connecting external extension memory, connections of the MSB and LSB sides must be
reversed.
Memory mapping
Internal flash memory
(384KB)
External memory area
(1MB)
Number of bus wait states can be set to 0-7.
Normally used as port. WAIT is used only when seven or more wait states are needed.
H'0000 0000
H'0040 0000
H'0020 0000
H'000F FFFF
H'0010 0000
External memory area
(2MB)
1M-CS0 area
2M-CS1 area
SRAM
Flash memory
A18
A0
D15
D0
RD#
CS#
max1MB
A18
A0
D15
D0
RD#(D0-D15)
CS#
WR#(D0-D7)
WR#(D8-D15)
max1MB*2
(total2MB)
M32182F3
A11
A30
D0
D15
RD#
CS0#
CS1#
BLW#
BHW#
WAIT#
Not used
H'0006 0000
15
15-19
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
15.5 Typical Connection of External Extension Memory
(2) When the Bus Mode Control Register = "1"
A typical memory connection when using external extension memory is shown in Figure 15.5.2. (External
extension memory can only be used in external extension mode and processor mode.)
Figure 15.5.2 Typical Connection of External Extension Memory (when BUSMOD bit = "1")
Note: • The address and data are connected in such a way that pin 0 is the MSB and pin 15 is the LSB.
When connecting external extension memory, connections of the MSB and LSB sides must be
reversed.
SRAM
M32182F3
A11
Memory mapping
Internal flash memory
(384KB)
A30
D0
D15
RD#
CS0#
CS1#
BLE#
BHE#
Number of bus wait states can be set to 0-7.
WAIT#
Normally used as port. WAIT is used only when seven or more wait states are needed.
H'0000 0000
H'0040 0000
H'0020 0000
H'000F FFFF
H'0010 0000
External memory area
(2MB)
1M-CS0 area
2M-CS1 area
Flash memory
A18
A0
D15
D0
RD#
CS#
max1MB
A19
A0
D15
D0
RD#(D0-D15)
CS#
BHE#(D0-D7)
BLE#(D8-D15)
max2MB
WR# WR#(D0-D15)
External memory area
(1MB)
Not used
H'0006 0000
15
15-20
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
(3) When the Bus Mode Control Register = "1" using a combination of 8/16-bit data bus memories
The diagram below shows a typical connection of external extension memory, with an 8-bit data bus memory
located in the CS0 area, and a 16-bit data bus memory located in the CS1 area. (External extension memory
can only be used in external extension mode and processor mode.)
15.5 Typical Connection of External Extension Memory
Memory mapping
Internal flash memory
(384KB)
External memory area
(1MB)
When CL = 50 pF, memory can be connected with only 2 ns of data delay.
Normally used as port. WAIT is used only when seven or more wait states are needed.
H'0000 0000
H'0040 0000
H'0020 0000
H'000F FFFF
H'0010 0000
External memory area
(2MB)
1M-CS0 area
2M-CS1 area
SRAM
8-bit memory
A18
A1
D7
D0
RD#
CS#
max1MB
A19
A0
D15
D0
BHE#
CS#
WR#(D0-D15)
RD#(D0-D15)
max2MB
M32182F3
A11
A30
D0
D15
RD#
CS0#
CS1#
BHE#
WR#
WAIT#
QS32X2245
D7
D8
A B
OE
BLE#
BLE#
A0 8-bit bus area
16-bit bus area
Note: • The QS32X2245 is a product made by the IDT Company.
A B
Number of bus wait states can be set to 0-7.
WR#
Not used
H'0006 0000
Figure 15.5.3 Typical Connection of External Extension Memory (when BUSMOD bit = "1" using a combina-
tion of 8/16-Bit Memories)
Note: • The address and data are connected in such a way that pin 0 is the MSB and pin 15 is the LSB.
When connecting external extension memory, connections of the MSB and LSB sides must be
reversed.
15
15-21
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
15.6 Example of Bus Voltage Settings Using VCC-BUS
15.6 Example of Bus Voltage Settings Using VCC-BUS
(1) When both port and memory are connected at 5 V
Ports and memory can be connected with external circuits via 5 V interfaces.
VCCE
VDDE
VCC-BUS
Bus
Connected at 5 V
5V
5V
Memory
5V
VCC
OSC-VCC
M32R/ECU Port
Figure 15.6.1 When Both Port and Memory are Connected at 5 V
(2) When ports and memory are connected at 3.3 V and 5 V, respectively
Ports and memory can be connected with external circuits via a 3.3 V interface and a 5 V interface, respec-
tively.
VCCE
VDDE
VCC-BUS
Port
Bus
Connected at 3.3 V
3.3V
5V 5V
M32R/ECU
Memory
5V
VCC
OSC-VCC
Figure 15.6.2 When Port and Memory are Connected at 3.3 V and 5 V, Respectively
15
15-22
EXTERNAL BUS INTERFACE
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
VCCE
VDDE
VCC-BUS
Port
Bus
Connected at 3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
M32R/ECU
Memory
3.3V
VCC
OSC-VCC
Figure 15.6.4 When Both Port and Memory are Connected at 3.3 V
15.6 Example of Bus Voltage Settings Using VCC-BUS
(3) When ports and memory are connected at 5 V and 3.3 V, respectively
Ports and memory can be connected with external circuits via a 5 V interface and a 3.3 V interface, respec-
tively.
VCCE
VDDE
VCC-BUS
Port
Bus
Connected at 5 V
5V
3.3V 3.3V
M32R/ECU
Memory
3.3V
VCC
OSC-VCC
Figure 15.6.3 When Port and Memory are Connected at 5 V and 3.3 V, Respectively
(4) When both port and memory are connected at 3.3 V
Ports and memory can be connected with external circuits via 3.3 V interfaces.
CHAPTER 16
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.1 Outline of the Wait Controller
16.2 Wait Controller Related Registers
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
16
16-2
WAIT CONTROLLER
32180 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
16.1 Outline of the Wait Controller
The Wait Controller controls the number of wait states inserted in bus cycles when accessing an extended exter-
nal area. The Wait Controller is outlined in the table below.
Table 16.1.1 Outline of the Wait Controller
Item Description
Target space Control is applied to the following address spaces depending on operation mode:
Single-chip mode: No target space (Settings of the Wait Controller have no effect)
External extension mode
:
CS0 area (1 Mbytes), CS1 area (2 Mbytes),
CS2 area (2 Mbytes), CS3 area (2 Mbytes)
Processor mode: CS0 area (2 Mbytes), CS1 area (2 Mbytes),
CS2 area (2 Mbytes), CS3 area (2 Mbytes)
Number of wait states that can be inserted
0–7 wait states set by software + any number of wait states set from the WAIT# pin
During external extension and processor modes, four chip select signals (CS0# to CS3#) are output, each corre-
sponding to one of the four extended external areas referred to as CS0 through CS3.
16.1 Outline of the Wait Controller
H'0000 0000
H'0010 0000
H'000F FFFF
H'0020 0000
H'001F FFFF
H'0040 0000
H'003F FFFF
H'0060 0000
H'005F FFFF
H'007F FFFF
Internal ROM area
CS0 area
CS1 area
CS2 area
CS3 area
CS0 area
(2MB)
CS1 area
(2MB)
CS2 area
(2MB)
CS3 area
(2MB)
Extended external area
Extended external area
Non-CS0 area
(Internal ROM access area)
<External extension mode> <Processor mode>
Reserved area
Figure 16.1.1 CS0–CS3 Area Address Map
When accessing the extended external area, the Wait Controller controls the number of wait states inserted in bus
cycles based on the number of wait states set by software and those entered from the WAIT# pin.
The number of wait states that can be controlled in software is 0 to 7.
When the input signal on the WAIT# pin is sampled low in the last cycle of internal wait state, the wait state is
extended as long as the WAIT# input signal is held low. Then when the WAIT# input signal is released back high,
the wait state is terminated and the next new bus cycle is entered into.
16
16-3
WAIT CONTROLLER
32180 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
16.1 Outline of the Wait Controller
Table 16.1.2 Number of Wait States that Can Be Set by the Wait Controller
Extended External Area
Address Number of Wait States Inserted
CS0 area H’0010 0000 to H’001F FFFF Zero to 7 wait states set by software
(external extension mode) + any number of wait states entered from the WAIT# pin
H’0000 0000 to H’001F FFFF (However, software settings have priority.)
(processor mode)
CS1 area H’0020 0000 to H’003F FFFF Zero to 7 wait states set by software
(external extension and + any number of wait states entered from the WAIT# pin
processor modes) (However, software settings have priority.)
CS2 area H’0040 0000 to H’005F FFFF Zero to 7 wait states set by software
(external extension and + any number of wait states entered from the WAIT# pin
processor modes) (However, software settings have priority.)
CS3 area H’0060 0000 to H’007F FFFF Zero to 7 wait states set by software
(external extension and + any number of wait states entered from the WAIT# pin
processor modes) (However, software settings have priority.)
16
16-4
WAIT CONTROLLER
32180 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
16.2 Wait Controller Related Registers
Shown below is a Wait Controller related register map.
Wait Controller Related Register Map
Address +0 address +1 address See
b0 b7 b8 b15 pages
H'0080 0180 CS0 Area Wait Control Register CS1 Area Wait Control Register 16-4
(CS0WTCR) (CS1WTCR)
H'0080 0182 CS2 Area Wait Control Register CS3 Area Wait Control Register 16-4
(CS2WTCR) (CS3WTCR)
16.2.1 CS Area Wait Control Registers
CS0 Area Wait Control Register (CS0WTCR) <Address: H’0080 0180>
CS1 Area Wait Control Register (CS1WTCR) <Address: H’0080 0181>
CS2 Area Wait Control Register (CS2WTCR) <Address: H’0080 0182>
CS3 Area Wait Control Register (CS3WTCR) <Address: H’0080 0183>
123456b7b0
WTCSEL (Note 3) SWAIT RECOV IDLE
1111111
b8 b1591011121314
0
<After reset: H’7F>
b Bit Name Function R W
0 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
(8)
1–3 WTCSEL 000: 0 wait state (Note 1) R W
(9-11) CSn block wait states select bit 001: 1 wait state (Note 2)
010: 2 wait state
011: 3 wait state
100: 4 wait state
101: 5 wait state
110: 6 wait state
111: 7 wait state
4 When using external bus, set this bit to "0". (Note 3) R W
(12)
5 SWAIT 0: No strobe wait R W
(13) Strobe signal wait bit 1: Strobe wait added
6 RECOV 0: No recovery cycle R W
(14) Recovery cycle addition bit 1: Recovery cycle added
7 IDLE 0: No post-read idle cycle R W
(15) Post-read idle cycle addition bit 1: Post-read idle cycle added
Note 1: When zero wait state is selected, wait states inserted by external WAIT input are not accepted. For zero wait state also,
make sure the SWAIT, RECOV and IDLE bits all are set to "0". Otherwise, device operation cannot be guaranteed.
Note 2: When one wait state is selected, do not set SWAIT bit = 1. Otherwise, device operation cannot be guaranteed.
Note 3: When using an external bus, set this bit to "0".
If a read cycle is followed immediately by a write cycle, one idle cycle is inserted unless RECOV bit = 1 and IDLE
bit = 0. Table 16.2.1 shows the relationship between RECOV bit and IDLE bit settings and the number of idle
cycles inserted after the bus cycle.
16.2 Wait Controller Related Registers
16
16-5
WAIT CONTROLLER
32180 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
16.2 Wait Controller Related Registers
Table 16.2.1 RECOV Bit and IDLE Bit Settings and the Number of Idle Cycles Inserted after Bus Cycle
RECOV IDLE Read (Followed by Write) Read (Followed by Read) Write
00 1 0 0
01 1 1 0
10 0 0 0
11 1 1 0
Note: • Under each of the above conditions, no recovery cycle is inserted when RECOV bit = 0, and one recovery cycle is
inserted when RECOV bit = 1.
16
16-6
WAIT CONTROLLER
32180 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.1 Internal Bus Access during Bus Free State
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
The following shows a typical operation of the Wait Controller. The Wait Controller can control bus access in zero
to 7 cycles. If more access cycles than that are needed, use the WAIT function in combination with the Wait
Controller.
(1) When the Bus Mode Control Register = 0
External read/write operations are performed using the address bus, data bus and the signals CS0#–CS3#,
RD#, BHW#, BLW#, WAIT# and BCLK.
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
Bus free state
Internal bus access
"H"
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Hi-z
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note: • Hi-Z denotes a high-impedance state.
(Don't Care)
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 0 (WR signal separated)
16
16-7
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.2 Read/Write Timing (for Zero Wait Access)
Read
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Note: • When zero wait state is selected, wait states inserted by WAIT# are not accepted.
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
Read
(1 cycle)
(Don't Care)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
RD# "H"
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
Write
(1 cycle)
(Don't Care)
Write
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 0 (WR signal separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 000 (zero wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
16
16-8
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.3 Read/Write Timing (for Access with Internal 1 Wait State)
Read
Read (2 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Note: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
1 wait state
(Don't Care)
"H"
(Don't Care)
Write
Write (2 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
1 wait state
(Don't Care)
"H"
(Don't Care)
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 0 (WR signal separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 001 (1 wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
16
16-9
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.4 Read/Write Timing (for Access with Internal 7 Wait States)
Read
Read (8 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Note: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
Internal 7 wait states
(Don't Care)
"H"
(Don't Care)
Write
Write (8 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
Internal 7 wait states
(Don't Care)
"H"
(Don't Care)
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 0 (WR signal separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 111 (7 wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
16
16-10
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.5 Read/Write Timing (for Access with Internal 2 and External 1 Wait States)
Read
Write
Read (4 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Note: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
"L"
Internal 2 wait states External
1 wait state
(Don't Care) "H" (Don't Care)
Write (4 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
"L"
Internal 2 wait states External
1 wait state
(Don't Care) "H" (Don't Care)
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 0 (WR signal separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 010 (2 wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
16
16-11
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.6 Read/Write Timing (for Access with Internal 2 and External n Wait States)
Read
Read (3 + n cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Note: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
"L"
Internal 2 wait states External n wait states
(Don't Care) "H" (Don't Care)
Write
Write (3 + n cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
"L"
Internal 2 wait states External n wait states
(Don't Care) "H" (Don't Care)
"L""L"
"L""L"
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 0 (WR signal separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 010 (2 wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
16
16-12
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.7 Read/Write Timing (for Access with Internal 1 Wait State + Strobe Wait)
Read
Read (2 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Note: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
1 wait state
(Don't Care) "H" (Don't Care)
Write
Write (2 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
1 wait state
(Don't Care) "H" (Don't Care)
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 0 (WR signal separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 001 (1 wait)
SWAIT bit = 1 (with strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
16
16-13
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.8 Read/Write Timing (Internal 1 Wait State + Recovery Cycle Added)
Read
Read (3 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Note: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
Internal
1 wait state Recovery
cycle
(Don't Care) "H" (Don't Care)
Write
Write (3 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
Internal
1 wait state Recovery
cycle
(Don't Care) "H" (Don't Care)
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 0 (WR signal separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 001 (1 wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 1 (with recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
16
16-14
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.9 Read/Write Timing (Internal 1 Wait State + Idle Cycle Added)
Read
Read (3 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Notes: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
• No idle cycles are added after the write cycle.
Internal
1 wait state Idle
cycle
(Don't Care)
"H"
(Don't Care)
Write
Write (2 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
Internal
1 wait state
(Don't Care)
"H"
(Don't Care)
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 0 (WR signal separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 001 (1 wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 1 (with idle cycle)
16
16-15
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.10 Read/Write Timing (Internal 1 Wait State + Recovery and Idle Cycles Added)
Read
Read (4 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Notes: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
• No idle cycles are added after the write cycle.
Internal
1 wait state Recovery
cycle
(Don't Care)
"H"
(Don't Care)
Write
Write (3 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHW#, BLW#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
Internal
1 wait state
(Don't Care)
"H"
(Don't Care)
Idle
cycle
Recovery
cycle
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 0 (WR signal separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 001 (1 wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 1 (with recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 1 (with idle cycle)
16
16-16
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
(2) When the Bus Mode Control Register = 1
External read/write operations are performed using the address bus, data bus and the signals CS0#–CS3#,
RD#, BHE#, BLE#, WAIT# and WR#.
Figure 16.3.11 Internal Bus Access during Bus Free State
"H"
WR#
Bus free state
Internal bus access
"H"
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHE#, BLE#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Hi-z
(Don't Care)
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Notes: • Hi-Z denotes a high-impedance state.
• BCLK is not output.
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 1 (byte enable separated)
16
16-17
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.12 Read/Write Timing (for Zero Wait Access)
Read Read
(1 cycle)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
WR#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Notes: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
When zero wait state is selected, wait states inserted by WAIT# are not accepted.
(Don't Care)
BHE#, BLE#
Write Write
(1 cycle)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
WR#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
(Don't Care)
BHE#, BLE#
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 1 (byte enable separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 000 (zero wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
16
16-18
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.13 Read/Write Timing (for Access with Internal 1 Wait State)
Read Read (2 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
WR#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Notes: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
• BCLK is not output.
(Don't Care)
BHE#, BLE#
Internal
1 wait state
(Don't Care)
Write Write (2 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
WR#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
(Don't Care)
BHE#, BLE#
Internal
1 wait state
(Don't Care)
"H"
"H"
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 1 (byte enable separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 001 (1 wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
16
16-19
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.14 Read/Write Timing (for Access with Internal 7 Wait States)
Read
Read (8 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHE#, BLE#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Notes: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
• BCLK is not output.
Internal 7 wait states
(Don't Care)
"H"
(Don't Care)
WR#
Write
Write (8 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHE#, BLE#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
Internal 7 wait states
(Don't Care)
"H"
(Don't Care)
WR#
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 1 (byte enable separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 111 (7 wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
16
16-20
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.15 Read/Write Timing (for Access with Internal 2 and External 1 Wait States)
Read
Read (4 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
WR#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Notes: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
• BCLK is not output.
(Don't Care)
BHE#, BLE#
Internal
2 wait states
(Don't Care)
"H"
External
1 wait state
"L"
Write
Write (4 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
WR#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
(Don't Care)
BHE#, BLE#
Internal
2 wait states
(Don't Care)
"H"
External
1 wait state
"L"
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 1 (byte enable separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 010 (2 wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
16
16-21
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.16 Read/Write Timing (for Access with Internal 2 and External n Wait States)
Read Read (3 + n cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHE#, BLE#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Notes: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
• BCLK is not output.
"L"
Internal 2 wait states External n wait states
(Don't Care) "H" (Don't Care)
Write Write (3 + n cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
BHE#, BLE#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
"L"
Internal 2 wait states External n wait states
(Don't Care) "H" (Don't Care)
"L""L"
"L"
"L"
WR#
WR#
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 1 (byte enable separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 010 (2 wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
16
16-22
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.17 Read/Write Timing (for Access with Internal 1 Wait State + Strobe Wait)
Read Read (2 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
WR#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Notes: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
• BCLK is not output.
(Don't Care)
BHE#, BLE#
Internal
1 wait state
(Don't Care)
Write Write (2 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
WR#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
(Don't Care)
BHE#, BLE#
Internal
1 wait state
(Don't Care)
"H"
"H"
Assert the valid byte position
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 1 (byte enable separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 001 (1 wait)
SWAIT bit = 1 (with strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
16
16-23
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.18 Read/Write Timing (Internal 1 Wait State + Recovery Cycle Added)
Read
Read (3 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
WR#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Notes: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
• BCLK is not output.
(Don't Care)
BHE#, BLE#
Internal
1 wait state
(Don't Care)
"H"
Recovery
cycle
Write
Write (3 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
WR#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
(Don't Care)
BHE#, BLE#
Internal
1 wait state
(Don't Care)
"H"
Recovery
cycle
Assert the valid byte position
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 1 (byte enable separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 001 (1 wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 1 (with recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 0 (without idle cycle)
16
16-24
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.19 Read/Write Timing (Internal 1 Wait State + Idle Cycle Added)
Read
Read (3 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
WR#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Notes: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
• BCLK is not output.
• No idle cycles are added after the write cycle.
(Don't Care)
BHE#, BLE#
Internal
1 wait state
(Don't Care)
"H"
Idle
cycle
Write
Write (2 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
WR#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
(Don't Care)
BHE#, BLE#
Internal
1 wait state
(Don't Care)
"H"
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 1 (byte enable separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 001 (1 wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 0 (without recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 1 (with idle cycle)
16
16-25
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 16.3.20 Read/Write Timing (Internal 1 Wait State + Recovery and Idle Cycles Added)
Read
Read (4 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
WR#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD#
"H"
Note 1: For details about the Bus Mode Control Register, see Section 15.2.3, "Bus Mode Control Register."
Note 2: For details about the CS Area Wait Control Register, see Section 16.2.1, "CS Area Wait Control Registers."
Notes: • Circles in the above diagram indicate the sampling timing.
• BCLK is not output.
• No idle cycles are added after the write cycle.
(Don't Care)
BHE#, BLE#
Internal
1 wait state
(Don't Care)
"H"
Recovery
cycle
Write
Write (3 cycles)
BCLK
A11–A30
CS0#–CS3#
WR#
DB0–DB15
WAIT#
RD# "H"
(Don't Care)
BHE#, BLE#
Internal
1 wait state
(Don't Care)
"H"
Recovery
cycle
Idle
cycle
Bus Mode Control Register (Note 1)
BUSMOD bit = 1 (byte enable separated)
CS Area Wait Control Register (Note 2)
WTCSEL bit = 001 (1 wait)
SWAIT bit = 0 (without strobe wait)
RECOV bit = 1 (with recovery cycle)
IDLE bit = 1 (with idle cycle)
16
16-26
WAIT CONTROLLER
16.3 Typical Operation of the Wait Controller
32182 Group User’s Manual (Rev.1.0)
This page is blank for reasons of layout.
CHAPTER 17
RAM BACKUP MODE
17.1 Outline of RAM Backup Mode
17.2 Example of RAM Backup when Power is Off
17.3 Example of RAM Backup for Saving Power
Consumption
17.4 Exiting RAM Backup Mode (Wakeup)
17
17-2
RAM BACKUP MODE
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
17.1 Outline of RAM Backup Mode
17.1 Outline of RAM Backup Mode
In RAM backup mode, the contents of the internal RAM are retained while the power is turned off (power for only
the RAM is on). RAM backup mode is used for the following two purposes:
• Back up the internal RAM data when the power is forcibly turned off from the outside (RAM backup when the
power is off)
• For the M32R/ECU to turn off the power to the CPU at any time as needed to reduce the system’s power
consumption while retaining the internal RAM data (RAM backup for saving the power consumption)
The M32R/ECU is placed in RAM backup mode by applying a voltage of 3.0–5.5 V to the VDDE pin (provided for
RAM backup) and 0 V to all other pins.
During RAM backup mode, the contents of the internal RAM are retained, while the CPU and internal peripheral I/
O remain idle. Because all pins except VDDE are held low during RAM backup mode, the power consumption in
the system can effectively be reduced.
17
17-3
RAM BACKUP MODE
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 17.2.1 Typical Circuit for RAM Backup at Power Outage
VREFn
SBI#
ADnINi
M32R/ECU
(Note 2)
Backup battery
VCC VDDE
VBB
VREF
Reference voltage for
power outage detection
Power outage
detection signal
Backup power supply
for power outage
Power supply monitor IC
Note 1: Power outage is detected by the DC IN (regulator input) voltage.
Note 2: These pins are used to detect a RAM backup signal.
Note 3: This pin outputs a high when the power is on and outputs a low when the power is off.
VDDE
DC IN Input Output
Regulator
AVCCn VCC-BUS OSC-VCC
OUT
(Note 3) VCCE
(Note 1)
C
17.2 Example of RAM Backup when Power is Off
A typical circuit for RAM backup at power outage is shown in Figure 17.2.1. The following explains how the RAM
can be backed up by using this circuit as an example.
17.2.1 Normal Operating State
Figure 17.2.2 shows the normal operating state of the M32R/ECU. During normal operation, input on the SBI#
pin or ADnINi (i = 0–15) pin which is used to detect a RAM backup signal remains high.
Figure 17.2.2 Normal Operating State (when VCCE = 5 V)
VREFn
SBI#
ADnINi M32R/ECU
(Note 2)
VCC VDDE
VBB
VREF
Note 1: Power outage is detected by the DC IN (regulator input) voltage.
Note 2: These pins are used to detect a RAM backup signal.
Note 3: This pin outputs a high when the power is on and outputs a low when the power is down.
VDDE
DC IN
Regulator
AVCCn VCC-BUS OSC-VCC
OUT
(Note 3)
(Note 4)
VCCE
C
"H"
5V5V5V5V5V
Input Output
Reference voltage for
power outage detection
(Note 1)
Backup battery
Power supply monitor IC
Backup power supply
for power outage
Power outage
detection signal
Note 4: Backup power suppl
y
= 3.0 to 5.5 V
17.2 Example of RAM Backup when Power is Down
17
17-4
RAM BACKUP MODE
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
VREFn
SBI#
ADnINi
M32R/ECU
(Note 2)
Backup battery
VCC VDDE
VBB
VREF
Reference voltage for
power outage detection
Power outage
detection signal
Backup power supply
for power outage
Power supply monitor IC
Note 1: Power outage is detected by the DC IN (regulator input) voltage.
Note 2: These pins are used to detect a RAM backup signal.
Note 3: This pin outputs a high when the power is on and outputs a low when the power is off.
Note 4: Determined by the input level on SBI# pin or ADnINi pin.
Note 5: The time needed for processing in (b) is secured by adjusting the capacitance.
VDDE
DC IN
Input Output
Regulator
AVCCn VCC-BUS OSC-VCC
OUT
(Note 3) VCCE
(Note 1)
C
"L"
0V0V0V0V0V
(Note 5)
3.0–5.5V
Example of RAM backup processing
Power goes off
(Note 4)
Create data for
backup RAM check
(a)
(b)
(c)
RAM backup mode
17.2 Example of RAM Backup when Power is Down
17.2.2 RAM Backup State
Figure 17.2.3 shows the power outage RAM backup state of the M32R/ECU. When the power supply goes off,
the power supply monitor IC starts feeding current from the backup battery to the M32R/ECU. Also, the power
supply monitor IC’s power outage detection pin outputs a low, causing the SBI# pin or ADnINi pin to go low,
which generates a RAM backup signal ((a) in Figure 17.2.3). Determination of whether the power is off must be
made with respect to the DC IN (regulator input) voltage in order to allow for a software processing time at power
outage.
To enable RAM backup mode, make the following setting:
(1) Create data for RAM check to verify whether the RAM data has been retained normally after returning from
RAM backup mode to normal mode ((b) in Figure 17.2.3).
If the power supply to VCC goes off after making above setting, the VDDE pin voltage goes to 3.0–5.5 V and all other
pin voltages drop to 0 V, and the M32R/ECU is thereby placed in RAM backup mode ((c) in Figure 17.2.3).
Figure 17.2.3 Power Outage RAM Backup State
17
17-5
RAM BACKUP MODE
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
RAM backup signal
External circuit
Port X
(Note 1)
IB
VREFn
SBI#
ADnINi M32R/ECU
(Note 3)
RAM backup power supply
Regulator
VDDE
DC IN Input Output
Regulator
AVCCn
(Note 2)
VCCE
Output
Note 1: This circuit outputs a low during RAM backup.
Note 2: This port outputs a high when the power is on, and is set for input mode when in RAM backup mode.
Note 3: These pins are used to detect a RAM backup signal.
OSC-VCC VCC-BUS
Figure 17.3.1 Typical RAM Backup Circuit for Saving Power Consumption
17.3 Example of RAM Backup for Saving Power Consumption
A typical RAM backup circuit for saving the microcomputer’s power consumption is shown in Figure 17.3.1. The follow-
ing explains how the RAM is backed up for the purpose of low-power operation by using this circuit as an example.
17.3.1 Normal Operating State
Figure 17.3.2 shows the normal operating state of the M32R/ECU. During normal operation, the RAM backup
signal output by the external circuit is high. Also, input on the SBI# pin or ADnINi (i = 0–15) pin which is used to
detect a RAM backup signal remains high.
Port X, which connects to the transistor’s base, should output a high. This causes the transistor’s base voltage,
IB, to go high so that current is fed from the power supply to the VCCE pin via the transistor.
Figure 17.3.2 Normal Operating State (when VCCE = 5 V)
RAM backup signal
(Note 1)
External circuit
Port X
IB
VREFn
SBI#
ADnINi
M32R/ECU
(Note 3)
RAM backup power supply
Regulator
VDDE
DC IN Input Output
Regulator
AVCCn
(Note 2)
VCCE
Output
Note 1: This circuit outputs a low during RAM backup.
Note 2: This port outputs a high when the power is on, and is set for input mode when in RAM backup mode (one of the port pins selected).
Note 3: These pins are used to detect a RAM backup signal.
VCC-BUS OSC-VCC
"H"
"H"
"H"
5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V
17.3 Example of RAM Backup for Saving Power Consumption
17
17-6
RAM BACKUP MODE
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
17.3 Example of RAM Backup for Saving Power Consumption
17.3.2 RAM Backup State
Figure 17.3.3 shows the RAM backup state of the M32R/ECU. Figure 17.3.4 shows a RAM backup sequence.
When the external circuit outputs a low, input on the SBI# or ADnINi pin is pulled low. A low on these input pins
generates a RAM backup signal (A and (a) in Figure 17.3.3). To enable RAM backup mode, make the following
settings:
(1) Create data for RAM check to verify after returning from RAM backup mode to normal mode whether
the RAM data has been retained normally ((b) in Figure 17.3.3).
(2) To materialize low-power operation, set all programmable input/output pins except port X for input
mode (or for output mode, with the output level fixed low) ((c) in Figure 17.3.3).
(3) Set port X for input mode (B and (d) in Figure 17.3.3). This causes the transistor’s base voltage, IB,
to go low, so that the power to all power supply pins except VDDE is shut off (C and D in Figure
17.3.3).
By settings in (1) to (3), the VDDE pin voltage goes to 3.0–5.5 V and all other pin voltages drop to 0 V, and the
M32R/ECU is thereby placed in RAM backup mode ((d) in Figure 17.3.3).
Figure 17.3.3 RAM Backup State for Low Power Operation
"L"
B
C
Example of RAM backup processing
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
"L"
"L"
"L"
"L"
RAM backup signal
External circuit
Port X
(Note 1)
IB
SBI#
ADnINi
M32R/ECU
(Note 3)
RAM power supply
Regulator
DC IN Input Output
Regulator
(Note 2)
Output
Note 1: This circuit outputs a low during RAM backup.
Note 2: This port outputs a high when the power is on, and is set for input mode
when in RAM backup mode (one of the port pins selected).
Note 3: These pins are used to detect a RAM backup signal.
Note 4: Determined by the input level on SBI# pin or ADnINi pin.
Note 5: Base voltage IB = 0 causes the power to all power supply pins except VDDE
to stop. See A to D in the above explanation.
0V 0V 0V0V0V 5V
A
Generate a RAM backup signal
(Note 4)
Create data for
backup RAM check
Set the pin connecting to the
transistor's base (port X)
for input mode
(Note 5)
RAM backup mode
D
VREFn VDDEAVCCnVCCE OSC-VCC
VCC-BUS
17
17-7
RAM BACKUP MODE
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
17.3 Example of RAM Backup for Saving Power Consumption
RESET#
SBI#
ADnINi
VDDE
Oscillation
stabilization time
External input signal
goes low
RAM backup
period
Power on
Port output setting
(high level)
External input signal
goes high
Port X
Port input
mode
f(XIN)
VCCE,
VREFn , AVCCn
5.0V or 3.3V
0V
VCC-BUS,OSC-VCC
Port output setting
(high level)
Oscillation
stabilization time
Figure 17.3.4 Example of a RAM Backup Sequence for Low Power Operation
17.3.3 Precautions to Be Observed at Power-On
When changing port X from input mode to output mode after power-on, pay attention to the following.
If port X is set for output mode while no data is set in the Port X Data Register, the port’s initial output level is
instable. Therefore, before changing port X for output mode, make sure the Port X Data Register is set to output
a high.
Unless this precaution is followed, port output may go low at the same time the port is set for output after the
oscillation has stabilized, causing the microcomputer to enter RAM backup mode.
17
17-8
RAM BACKUP MODE
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
17.4 Exiting RAM Backup Mode (Wakeup)
17.4 Exiting RAM Backup Mode (Wakeup)
The processing to place the M32R/ECU out of RAM backup mode and return it to normal operation mode is
referred to as “wakeup” processing. Figure 17.4.1 shows an example of wakeup processing.
Wakeup processing is initiated by applying a reset. The following shows how to execute wakeup processing.
(1) Reset the microcomputer ((a) in Figure 17.4.1).
(2) Set port X for output mode and output a high from the port ((b) in Figure 17.4.1) (Note 1)
(3) Compare the RAM content against the RAM check data created before entering RAM backup mode ((c) in
Figure 17.4.1).
(4) If the comparison in (3) did not match, initialize the RAM ((d) in Figure 17.4.1).
If the comparison in (3) matched, use the retained data in the program.
(5) Initialize each internal circuit ((e) in Figure 17.4.1) before returning to the main routine ((f) in Figure 17.4.1).
Note 1: For wakeup from power outage RAM backup mode, port X settings are unnecessary.
Figure 17.4.1 Wakeup Processing
OK
Error
Compare RAM content
against backup RAM
check data
Initialize the RAM
Example of wakeup processing
Reset
Set the transistor's base
connecting pin (port X)
for high-level output mode
(Note 1)
Initialize each circuit
To the main routine
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Note 1: For wakeu
p
from
p
ower outa
g
e RAM backu
p
mode
,
p
ort X settin
g
s are unnecessar
y
.
CHAPTER 18
OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT
18.1 Oscillator Circuit
18.2 Clock Generator Circuit
18
18-2
OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
18.1 Oscillator Circuit
The M32R/ECU contains an oscillator circuit that supplies operating clocks for the CPU core, internal peripheral I/
O and internal memory. The frequency supplied to the clock input pin (XIN) is multiplied by 8 by an internal PLL
circuit to produce the CPU clock, which is the operating clock for the CPU core and internal memory. The frequency
of this clock is divided by 4 in the subsequent circuit to produce the peripheral clock, which is the operating clock
for the internal peripheral I/O and external data bus.
18.1.1 Example of an Oscillator Circuit
An oscillator circuit can be configured by connecting a ceramic (or crystal) resonator between the XIN and XOUT pins
external to the chip. Figure 18.1.1 shows an example of a system clock generating circuit illustrating a resonator
connected external to the chip and a circuit connected to the PLL circuit control pin (VCNT). For the constants Rf, Cin,
Cout and Rd, the resonator manufacturer should be consulted to determine the appropriate values.
To use an externally sourced clock signal without using an internal oscillator circuit, connect the external clock
signal to the XIN pin and leave the XOUT pin open.
18.1 Oscillator Circuit
Figure 18.1.1 Example of an Oscillator Circuit
M32R/ECU
OSC-VCC XIN XOUT
OSC-VSS Rf
Rd
C
IN
C
OUT
VCNT BCLK/P70
C
Oscillator circuit To the
peripheral clock
PLL circuit
560pF
0.1µF
1K
Oscillator module
To the
CPU clock
1/4
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
Note 1: Permissible error ±10%
Oscillation stoppage
detection circuit
18
18-3
OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
18.1 Oscillator Circuit
18.1.2 XIN Oscillation Stoppage Detection Circuit
The M32R/ECU contains a detection circuit to find whether oscillation input to the PLL circuit has stopped. The
PLL circuit oscillates with the frequency of its normal mode of vibration in the absence of the reference oscillation
input.
The XIN oscillation input is sampled at the multiply-by-n frequency of the PLL circuit and when the XIN oscillation
is found to be at the same level, the XSTAT bit is set. Because the CPU continues operating with the PLL circuit’s
natural frequency even when the XIN oscillation has stopped, error handling for the stoppage of XIN oscillation
can be accomplished by inspecting XSTAT in software.
Figure 18.1.2 Block Diagram of the XIN Oscillation Stoppage Detection Circuit
Port Input Special Function Control Register (PICNT) <Address: H’0080 0745>
9 1011121314b15b8
PIEN0PISELX
S
TA
T
0
00
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8–10 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 0 0
11 XSTAT 0: XIN oscillating R (Note1)
XIN oscillation status bit 1: XIN inactive
12–13 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 0 0
14 PISEL 0 : Content of port output latch R W
Port input data select bit 1: Port pin level
15 PIEN0 0: Disable input R W
Port input enable bit 1: Enable input
Note 1: Only writing "0" is effective. Writing "1" has no effect; the bit retains the value it had before the write.
For details about the function of the port input data select bit (PISEL) and port input enable bit (PIEN0), see Section
8.3.5, “Port Input Special Function Control Register.”
Determination
circuit
Oscillator
circuit PLL circuit Counter
XIN
XSTAT
flag
XIN oscillation stoppage detection circuit
18
18-4
OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
18.1 Oscillator Circuit
(1) XSTAT (XIN oscillation status) bit (Bit 11)
1) Conditions under which XSTAT is set to "1"
XSTAT is set to "1" upon detecting that XIN oscillation has stopped. When XIN remains at the same level for
a predetermined time (3 BCLK periods up to 4 BCLK periods), XIN oscillation is assumed to have stopped.
When operating normally, XIN changes state (high or low) once every BCLK period.
2) Conditions under which XSTAT is cleared to "0"
XSTAT is cleared to "0" by a system reset or by writing "0". If XSTAT is cleared at the same time it is set in
1) above, the former has priority so that XSTAT is cleared. Writing "1" to XSTAT is ignored.
3) Method for detecting XIN oscillation stoppage by using XSTAT
Because the M32R/ECU internally contains a PLL, the internal clock remains active even when XIN oscillation
has stopped.
By reading XSTAT without clearing it after reset, it is possible to know whether XIN has stopped since the
reset signal was deasserted. Similarly, by reading XSTAT after clearing it by writing 0, it is possible to know
the current oscillating status of XIN. (However, there must be an interval of at least 5 BCLK periods (20 CPU
clock periods) between read and write.)
Figure 18.1.3 Procedure for Setting XSTAT
Read XSTAT
(1) To know whether XIN oscillation has stopped after being reset
Write XSTAT = 0
(2) To know the current status of XIN oscillation
Wait for 20 CPU
clock periods or more
Read XSTAT
Wait before inspecting XSTAT
18
18-5
OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
18.1 Oscillator Circuit
18.1.3 Oscillation Drive Capability Select Function
The microcomputer incorporates a four-stage oscillation drive capability select function.
Once the oscillation of the oscillator circuit has stabilized, the XIN-XOUT drive capability can be lowered. The
lower the drive capability, the smaller the amount of power consumption.
Clock Control Register (CLKCR) <Address: H’0080 0786>
123456b7b0
XDRVP XDRV
011
0
0
0
0
0
<After reset: H’03>
b Bit Name Function R W
0–4 No function assigned. Fix to "0". 00
5 XDRVP 0W
XDRV write control bit
6–7 XDRV XIN-XOUT drive capability (performance ratio) R W
XIN-XOUT drive capability select bit 00: Low 0.25
01: 0.50
10: 0.75
11: High 1.00
(1) XDRV write control bit (XDRVP) (Bit 5)
This bit controls writing to the XIN-XOUT drive capability select bits.
(2) XIN-XOUT drive capability select bits (Bits 6, 7)
The following shows the procedure for writing to these bits.
1. Set the write control bit (XDRVP) to "1".
2. Immediately following the above, reset the write control bit (XDRVP) to "0" and write the appropriate value
to the XIN-XOUT drive capability select bits.
Note: • If a write cycle to any other area occurs between 1 and 2, write to XDRV has no effect and the
written value is not reflected. Therefore, disable interrupts and DMA transfers before setting the
drive capability control bits. Note that a pair of two consecutive writes comprise a write opera-
tion.
18
18-6
OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
If a write cycle to other area exists in this interval,
settings of XDRV bits are not reflected.
XDRVP "1"
XDRVP "0"
XDRV Set value
• Example of correct setting
• Settings that do not have effect
Because a write cycle to other area exists,
the set value is not reflected.
XDRVP "1"
Write to other area
XDRVP "0"
XDRV Set value
(1)
(2)
Because these two consecutive writes comprise a pair,
the next set value is not reflected.
XDRVP "1"
XDRVP "1"
XDRVP "0"
XDRV Set value
Figure 18.1.4 Procedure for Setting the Oscillation Drive Capability
18.1 Oscillator Circuit
18
18-7
OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
18.1.4 System Clock Output Function
A clock whose frequency is twice that of the input clock (i.e., the peripheral clock) can be output from the BCLK
pin. The BCLK pin is shared with port P70. To use this pin to output the peripheral clock, set the P7 Operation
Mode Register (P7MOD) bit 8 to "1".
Configuration of the P7 Operation Mode Register is shown below.
P7 Operation Mode Register (P7MOD) <Address: H’0080 0747>
<After reset: H’00>
b Bit Name Function R W
8 P70MD 0:P70 R W
Port P70 operation mode bit 1:BCLK
9 P71MD 0:P71 R W
Port P71 operation mode bit 1:WAIT#
10 P72MD 0:P72 R W
Port P72 operation mode bit 1:HREQ#
11 P73MD 0:P73 R W
Port P73 operation mode bit 1:HACK#
12 P74MD 0:P74 R W
Port P74 operation mode bit 1:RTDTXD
13 P75MD 0:P75 R W
Port P75 operation mode bit 1:RTDRXD
14 P76MD 0:P76 R W
Port P76 operation mode bit 1:RTDACK
15 P77MD 0:P77 R W
Port P77 operation mode bit 1:RTDCLK
18.1.5 Oscillation Stabilization Time at Power-On
The oscillator circuit comprised of a ceramic (or crystal) resonator requires a finite time before its oscillation
stabilizes after being powered on. Therefore, there must be a certain amount of oscillation stabilization time that
suits the oscillator circuit used.
Figure 18.1.5 shows an oscillation stabilization time required at power-on.
18.1 Oscillator Circuit
9 1011121314b15b8
P70MD P71MD P72MD P73MD P74MD P75MD P76MD P77MD
00000000
Figure 18.1.5 Oscillation Stabilization Time at Power-On
RESET#
XIN
Oscillation stabilization time
OSC-VCC
18
18-8
OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
18.2 Clock Generator Circuit
18.2 Clock Generator Circuit
Supply independent clocks to the CPU and the internal peripheral circuit.
XIN pin
(8MHz–10MHz)
BCLK(peripheral clock)
(16MHz–20MHz)
CPUCLK(CPU clock)
(64MHz–80MHz)
X8
1/4
PLL
Figure 18.2.1 Conceptual Diagram of Clock Generation
CHAPTER 19
JTAG
19.1 Outline of JTAG
19.2 Configuration of the JTAG Circuit
19.3 JTAG Registers
19.4 Basic Operation of JTAG
19.5 Boundary Scan Description Language
19.6 Notes on Board Design when Connecting JTAG
19.7 Processing Pins when Not Using JTAG
19
19-2
JTAG
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
19.1 Outline of JTAG
19.1 Outline of JTAG
The M32R/ECU contains a JTAG (Joint Test Action Group) interface compliant with IEEE Standard Test Access
Port and Boundary-Scan Architecture (IEEE Std. 1149.1a-1993). This JTAG interface can be used as an input/
output path for boundary-scan test (boundary-scan path). For details about IEEE 1149.1 JTAG test access ports,
see IEEE Std. 1149.1a-1993 documentation.
Note: • The JTAG interface in the M32R/ECU is used to connect a JTAG emulator during debugging as well.
In this chapter, the JTAG interface is explained assuming its use as an input/output path for boundary-
scan test.
Functions of the JTAG interface-related pins mounted on the M32R/ECU are shown below.
Table 19.1.1 JTAG Pin Functions
Type Pin Name Signal Name I/O Function
TAP JTCK Test clock Input Clock input to the test circuit.
(Note 1) JTDI Test data Input Input Synchronous serial data input pin used to supply the test instruction
code and test data. This input is sampled on the rising edge of JTCK.
JTDO Test data Output Output Synchronous serial data output pin used to output the test instruction
code and test data. This signal changes state on the falling edge of JTCK,
and is output in only the Shift-IR or Shift-DR state. Otherwise, it goes to a
high-impedance state.
JTMS Test mode select Input Test mode select input to control the test circuit’s state transition. This input is
sampled on the rising edge of JTCK.
JTRST Test reset Input Active-low test reset input to initialize the test circuit asynchronously. To
ensure that the test circuit is reset without fail, JTMS input signal must be
held high while this signal changes state from low to high.
Note: TAP stands for Test Access Port (JTAG interface specified in IEEE 1149.1).
19
19-3
JTAG
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 19.2.1 Configuration of the JTAG Circuit
19.2 Configuration of the JTAG Circuit
The JTAG circuit included in the M32R/ECU consists of several circuit blocks as shown in Figure 19.2.1.
• Instruction register to hold the instruction code that is fetched through the boundary-scan path
• A set of registers which are accessed through the boundary-scan path (boundary-scan register, bypass register
and ID code register)
• Test access port (abbreviated TAP) controller to control the JTAG unit’s state transition
• Control logic to select input, output, etc.
19.2 Configuration of the JTAG Circuit
JTCK
JTMS
JTRST
TAP Controller
Instruction Register (6-bit)
(JTAGIR)
Decoder
JTDO
ID Code Register
(JTAGIDR)
Bypass Register
(JTAGBPR)
Boundary Scan Register
(JTAGBSR)
JTDI
Data register set
Buffer
Output selection
Output selection
M32R/ECU
19
19-4
JTAG
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
19.3 JTAG Registers
19.3 JTAG Registers
19.3.1 Instruction Register (JTAGIR)
The Instruction Register is a 6-bit register to hold instruction code. This register is set in the IR path sequence. The
instructions set in this register determine the data register to be selected in the subsequent DR path sequence.
The initial value of this register after test is reset (to initialize the test circuit) is b’000010 (IDCODE instruction).
After a test reset, the ID Code Register is selected as the data register until instruction code is set by an external
device. In the Capture-IR state, this register always has b’110001 (fixed value) loaded into it. Therefore, when in
the Shift-IR state, no matter what value was set in this register, the value b’110001 is always output from the
JTDO pin (sequentially beginning with the LSB). However, this value normally is not handled as instruction code.
Shown below is outside the scope of guaranteed operations. If this operation is attempted, the microcomputer
may handle b’110001 as instruction code, which makes the microcomputer unable to operate normally.
Capture-IR Exit1-IR Update-IR
Following instructions are supported for the JTAG interface of the M32R/ECU:
• Three instructions specified as essential in IEEE 1149.1 (EXTEST, SAMPLE/PRELOAD, BYPASS)
• Device identification register access instruction (IDCODE)
Table 19.3.1 JTAG Instruction List
Instruction Code Abbreviation Operation
b'000000 EXTEST Test the circuit/board-level connections external to the chip.
b'000001 SAMPLE/PRELOAD Sample the operating status of the circuit and output the sampled status from the
JTDO pin, while at the same time supplying the data used for boundary-scan test
from the JTDI pin and preset it in the Boundary Scan Register.
b'000010 IDCODE Select the ID Code Register to output the device and manufacturer
identification data from the JTDO pin.
b'111111 BYPASS Select the Bypass Register to inspect or set data.
Notes: • Do not set any other instruction code.
• For details about the IR path sequence, DR path sequence, test reset, Capture-IR state, Shift-IR state, Exit1-IR state
and Update-IR state, see Section 19.4, “Basic Operation of JTAG.”
19
19-5
JTAG
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
19.3 JTAG Registers
19.3.2 Data Register
(1) Boundary Scan Register (JTAGBSR)
The Boundary Scan Register is a 475-bit register used to perform boundary-scan test. The bits in this register
are assigned to each pin on the microcomputer.
Connected between the JTDI and JTDO pins, this register is selected when issuing EXTEST or SAMPLE/
PRELOAD instruction. In the Capture-DR state, this register captures the status of input pins or internal logic
outputs. In the Shift-DR state, while outputting the sampled value, this register receives the input data for
boundary-scan test to set pin functions (direction of input/output and tristate output pins) and output values.
(2) Bypass Register (JTAGBPR)
The Bypass Register is a 1-bit register used to bypass the boundary-scan path when the microcomputer is
not the target of boundary-scan test. Connected between the JTDI and JTDO pins, this register is selected
when issuing BYPASS instruction. This register is loaded with b’0 (fixed value) in the Capture-DR state.
(3) ID Code Register (JTAGIDR)
The ID Code Register is a 32-bit register used to identify the device and manufacturer. It holds the following
information:
• Version information (4 bits) : b’0000
Part number (16 bits) : b’0011 0010 0010 0011
Manufacturer ID (11 bits) : b’000 0001 1100
This register is connected between the JTDI and JTDO pins, and is selected when issuing IDCODE instruc-
tion. This register is loaded with said IDCODE data in the Capture-DR state, and outputs it from the JTDO pin
in the Shift-DR state.
The ID Code Register is a read-only register. Because the data written from the JTDI pin during DR path
sequence is ignored, make sure JTDI input = low while in the Shift-DR state.
Note: • For details about the Capture-DR and Shift-DR states, see Section 19.4, “Basic Operation of
JTAG.”
30 4 19 20 3130
1
Manufacturer IDPart numberVersion
4 bits 16 bits 11 bits
19
19-6
JTAG
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
19.4 Basic Operation of JTAG
19.4.1 Outline of JTAG Operation
The instruction and data registers basically are accessed in conjunction with the following three operations,
which are performed based on the TAP Controller’s state transition. The TAP Controller changes state accord-
ing to JTMS input, and generates control signals required for operation in each state.
• Capture operation
The result of boundary-scan test or the fixed data defined for each register is sampled. As a register opera-
tion, data input is latched into the shift register stage.
• Shift operation
The register is accessed from outside through the boundary-scan path. The sample value is output to the
outside at the same time data is set from the outside. As a register operation, the bits are shifted right
between each shift register stage.
• Update operation
The data set from the outside during shifting is driven. As a register operation, the value set in the shift
register stage is transferred to the parallel output stage.
The JTAG interface undergoes transition of the internal state depending on JTMS input and on such state
transition, it performs the following two operations. In either case, the operation basically is performed in
order of Capture Shift Update.
• IR path sequence
Instruction code is set in the instruction register to select the data register to be operated on in the subse-
quent DR path sequence.
• DR path sequence
Data inspection or setting is performed for the selected data register.
19.4 Basic Operation of JTAG
19
19-7
JTAG
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Select-DR-Scan
Test-Logic-Reset
Run-Test/Idle
0
1
0
Capture-DR
0
Shift-DR
0
Exit1-DR
1
Pause-DR
0
Exit2-DR
1
Update-DR
1
0
0
1 0
1
1
0
Select-IR-Scan
Capture-IR
0
Shift-IR
0
Exit1-IR
1
Pause-IR
0
Exit2-IR
1
Update-IR
1
0
0
1 0
1
1
0
11
Note:The values (0 or 1) in this diagram denote the state of JTMS input signal.
1
Figure 19.4.1 TAP Controller State Transition
The state transition of the TAP Controller and the basic configuration of the JTAG related registers are shown below.
Data input
G
0
1
D
T
Q D
T
R
Q
Shift-DR or Shift-IR
Clock-DR or Clock-IR
Update-DR or Update-IR
Test reset
From the preceding cell
To the next cell
Data output
Parallel output stage
Shift register stageInput multiplexer
Note:This dia
g
ram onl
y
shows the basic confi
g
uration; not all DR and IR are confi
g
ured the same wa
y
as shown here.
Figure 19.4.2 Basic Configuration of the JTAG Related Registers
19.4 Basic Operation of JTAG
19
19-8
JTAG
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
JTCK
Select-DR-Scan
Select-IR-Scan
Capture-IR
Shift-IR
Exit1-IR
Update-IR
Run-Test/Idle
Run-Test/Idle
Don't CareDon't Care Instruction code (6 bits)
1 0 0 0 1 1
LSB value MSB value
JTMS
TAP
states
JTDI
JTDO
High impedance High impedance
Shift output from the instruction
register is fixed to b'110001.
Finished storing instruction code in the
instruction register's shift register stage.
Instruction code is set in the parallel output
stage at fall of JTCK in the Update-IR state.
JTDI input is sampled at rise of
JTCK in the Shift-IR state.
JTDO is output at fall of
JTCK in the Shift-IR state.
Figure 19.4.3 IR Path Sequence
19.4 Basic Operation of JTAG
19.4.2 IR Path Sequence
Instruction code is set in the Instruction Register (JTAGIR) to select the data register to be accessed in the
subsequent DR path sequence. The IR path sequence is performed following the procedure described below.
(1) From the Run-Test/Idle state, apply JTMS = high for a period of 2 JTCK cycles to enter the Select-IR-
Scan state.
(2) Apply JTMS = low to enter the Capture-IR state. At this time, b’110001 (fixed value) is set in the Instruc-
tion Register’s shift register stage.
(3) Proceed and apply JTMS = low to enter the Shift-IR state. In the Shift-IR state, the value of the shift
register stage is shifted right one bit every cycle, and the data b’110001 (fixed value) that was set in (2) is
serially output from the JTDO pin. At the same time, instruction code is set in the shift register stage bit by
bit as it is serially fed from the JTDI pin. Because the instruction code is set in the Instruction Register that
consists of 6 bits, the Shift-IR state must be continued for a period of 6 JTCK cycles. To stop the shift
operation in the middle of the execution, enter the Pause-IR state via the Exit1-IR state (by setting JTMS
input from high to low). To return from the Pause-IR state, enter the Shift-IR state via the Exit2-IR state
(by setting JTMS input from high to low).
(4) Apply JTMS = high to move from the Shift-IR state to the Exit1-IR state. This completes the shift operation.
(5) Proceed and apply JTMS = high to enter the Update-IR state. In the Update-IR state, the instruction code
that was set in the Instruction Register’s shift register stage is transferred to the Instruction Register’s
parallel output stage, and decoding of JTAG instruction is thereby started.
(6) Proceed and apply JTMS = high to enter the Select-DR-Scan state or JTMS = low to enter the Run-Test/
Idle state.
19
19-9
JTAG
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
19.4.3 DR Path Sequence
Data inspection or setting is performed for the data register selected in the IR path sequence prior to the DR path
sequence. The DR path sequence is performed following the procedure described below.
(1) From the Run-Test/Idle state, apply JTMS = high for a period of 1 JTCK cycle to enter the Select-DR-
Scan state. Which data register will be selected at this time depends on the instruction that was set during
the IR path sequence performed prior to the DR path sequence.
(2) Apply JTMS = low to enter the Capture-DR state. At this time, the result of boundary-scan test or the fixed
data defined for each register is set in the data register’s shift register stage.
(3) Proceed and apply JTMS = low to enter the Shift-DR state. In the Shift-DR state, the DR value is shifted
right one bit every cycle, and the data that was set in (2) is serially output from the JTDO pin. At the same
time, setup data is set in the data register’s shift register stage bit by bit as it is serially fed from the JTDI
pin. By continuing the Shift-IR state as long as the number of bits that comprise the selected data register
(by applying JTMS = low), all bits of data can be set in and read out from the shift register stage. To stop
the shift operation in the middle of the execution, enter the Pause-DR state via the Exit1-DR state (by
setting JTMS input from high to low). To return from the Pause-DR state, enter the Shift-DR state via the
Exit2-DR state (by setting JTMS input from high to low).
(4) Apply JTMS = high to move from the Shift-DR state to the Exit1-DR state. This completes the shift operation.
(5) Proceed and apply JTMS = high to enter the Update-DR state. In the Update-DR state, the data that was
set in the data register’s shift register stage is transferred to the parallel output stage, and the setup data
is thereby made ready for use.
(6) Proceed and apply JTMS = high to enter the Select-DR-Scan state or JTMS = low to enter the Run-Test/Idle state.
19.4 Basic Operation of JTAG
Figure 19.4.4 DR Path Sequence
JTCK
Select-DR-Scan
Capture-DR
Shift-DR
Exit1-DR
Update-DR
Run-Test/Idle
Run-Test/Idle
Don't CareDon't Care
LSB value MSB value
JTMS
TAP
states
JTDI
JTDO
High impedance High impedance
Note: • Because all bits in the data register's shift register stage also are shifted right, data is output from JTDO
beginning with the LSB. Similarly, data is supplied to JTDI beginning with the LSB.
Finished storing setup data in
the selected data register's
shift register stage.
Setup data is set in the parallel output stage
at fall of JTCK in the Update-DR state.
JTDI input is sampled at rise of
JTCK in the Shift-DR state.
JTDO is output at fall of
JTCK in the Shift-DR state.
19
19-10
JTAG
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Note 1: The setup value for each register must be supplied to the JTDI pin beginning with the LSB.
Note 2: The value in each register is output to the JTDO pin beginning with the LSB. It is only in the Shift-IR state of IR path
sequence and the Shift-DR state of DR path sequence that valid data is output from the JTDO pin. In all other states,
the JTDO pin goes to a high-impedance state.
Note 3: This shows readout from the data register selected by the instruction that was set in the immediately preceding IR path
sequence. The value sampled during Capture-DR state is output at the shift register stage of the selected data register.
Test-Logic-
Reset state
Run-Test
/Idle state
IR path
sequence
DR path
sequence
Run-Test
/Idle state
IR path
sequence
DR path
sequence
TAP states
Instruction
code
#0
Setup data
#0 #1
Setup data
#1
JTDI
Fixed value
b'110001 (Note 3) b'110001
JTDO
Setup data is serially fed from JTDI.
Reference data is serially output from JTDO.
(1) Basic access
Test-Logic-
Reset state
Run-Test
/Idle state
IR path
sequence
DR path
sequence
#0 #0 #1 #2
JTDI
b'110001 (Note 3)JTDO
The same data register can be successively
operated on to set or inspect.
(2) Successive accesses to the same data register
Run-Test
/Idle state
(Note 3) (Note 3)
Specify the data register
to inspect or set.
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
DR path
sequence
DR path
sequence
Setup data Setup data
(Note 3)
Fixed value
Fixed value
Specify the data register
to inspect or set.
TAP states
Instruction
code
Instruction
code Setup data
Figure 19.4.5 Successive JTAG Access
19.4.4 Inspecting and Setting Data Registers
To inspect or set the data register, follow the procedure described below.
(1) To access the test access port (JTAG) for the first time, apply a test reset (to initialize the test circuit). One
of the following two methods may be used to apply a test reset:
• Pull the JTRST# pin low.
• Drive the JTMS pin high to apply 5 or more JTCK cycles
(2) Apply JTMS = low to enter the Run-Test/Idle state. To continue the idle state, hold JTMS input low.
(3) Apply JTMS = high to exit the Run-Test/Idle state and perform IR path sequence. In the IR path se-
quence, specify the data register to inspect or set.
(4) Proceed to perform DR path sequence. Feed setup data from the JTDI pin into the data register specified
in the IR path sequence, and read out reference data from the JTDO pin.
(5) To proceed to perform IR path or DR path sequence after the DR path sequence is completed, apply
JTMS = high to return to the Select-DR-Scan state.
To wait for the next processing after a series of IR and DR sequence processing is completed, apply
JTMS = low to enter the Run-Test/Idle state and keep that state.
19.4 Basic Operation of JTAG
19
19-11
JTAG
19.5 Boundary Scan Description Language
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
19.5 Boundary Scan Description Language
The Boundary Scan Description Language (abbreviated BSDL) is described in the supplements to the Standard
Test Access Port and Boundary-Scan Architecture of IEEE 1149.1-1990 and IEEE 1149.1a-1993. BSDL is a
subset of IEEE 1076-1993 Standard VHSIC Hardware Description Language (VHDL). BSDL allows to precisely
describe the functions of conforming components to be tested. For package connection test, this language is
used by Automated Test Pattern Generation tools, and for synthesized test logic and verification, this language
is used by Electronic Design Automation tools. BSDL provides powerful extended functions usable in internal
test generation and necessary to write hardware debug and diagnostics software.
The primary section of BSDL has statements of logical port description, physical pin map, instruction set and
boundary register description.
• Logical port description
The logical port description assigns meaningful symbol names to each pin on the chip. The logic type of each
pin, whether input, output, input/output, buffer or link, that defines the logical direction of signal flow is deter-
mined here.
• Physical pin map
The physical pin map correlates the chip’s logical ports to the physical pins on each package. By using
separate names for each map, it is possible to define two or more physical pin maps in one BSDL description.
• Instruction set statement
The instruction set statement writes bit patterns to be shifted in into the chip’s instruction register. This bit
pattern is necessary to place the chip into each test mode defined in standards. Instructions exclusive to the
chip can also be written.
• Boundary register description
The boundary register description is a list of boundary register cells or shift stages. Each cell is assigned a
separate number. The cell with number 0 is located nearest to the test data output (JTDO) pin, and the cell
with the largest number is located nearest to the test data input (JTDI) pin. Cells also contain related other
information which includes cell type, logical port corresponding to the cell, logical function of the cell, safety
value, control cell number, disable value and result value.
Note: • The Boundary Scan Description Language (BSDL) will be made available after mass-production
from our website for the M32R family application technology data.
19
19-12
JTAG
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
19.6 Notes on Board Design when Connecting JTAG
19.6 Notes on Board Design when Connecting JTAG
To materialize fast and highly reliable communication with JTAG tools, make sure wiring lengths of JTAG pins are
matched during board design.
M32R/ECU
JTDI
JTMS
JTCK
JTRST
User board
JTAG tool
Make sure wiring lengths are the same, and avoid bending wires as much as possible.
Be careful not to use through-holes within the wiring.
JTDO
33
33
VCCE(5V)
33
33
2K
10K
10K
0.1µF
SDI connector (JTAG connector)
Power
TDI
TMS
TCK
TRST
TDO
GND
Note 1: The RESET# related circuit and resistance-capacitance values must be determined depending on
the user board's system design conditions and the microcomputer's operating conditions.
Note 2: N-channel open-drain output is recommended for the RESET output of JTAG tools. For details, see JTAG tool specifications.
Notes: • Only if the JTRST pin is firmly tied to ground, the JTDO, JTDI, JTMS and JTCLK pins can be processed by either pullup or pulldown.
• Each of these pins must always be processed even when not using JTAG tools.
The same pullup/pulldown resistance values as when using JTAG tools may be used.
RESET#
(Note 1) RESET (Note 2)
33
10K
VSS
33
10K
10K
Figure 19.6.1 Notes on Board Design when Connecting JTAG Tools
19
19-13
JTAG
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
19.7 Processing Pins when Not Using JTAG
M32R/ECU
JTDI
JTMS
JTCK
JTRST
User board
JTDO
VCCE(5V)
0–100K
0–100K
0–100K
0–100K
0–100K
Note: • Only if the JTRST pin is firmly tied to ground, the JTDO, JTDI, JTMS and JTCLK pins can be processed
b
y
either
p
ullu
p
or
p
ulldown.
19.7 Processing Pins when Not Using JTAG
The following shows how the pins on the chip should be processed when not using JTAG tools.
Figure 19.7.1 Processing Pins when Not Using JTAG
19
19-14
JTAG
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
This page is blank for reasons of layout.
19.7 Processing Pins when Not Using JTAG
CHAPTER 20
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
20.1 Configuration of the Power Supply Circuit
20.2 Power-On Sequence
20.3 Power-Off Sequence
20
20-2
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
20.1 Configuration of the Power Supply Circuit
The 32182 operates with a single 5 V ± 0.5 V or 3.3 V ± 0.3 V single power supply.
Unless otherwise noted, 5 V ± 0.5 V and 3.3 V ± 0.3 V in this chapter are referred to simply by 5 V and 3.3 V,
respectively.
Table 20.1.1 Power Supply Functions
Power Supply Type Pin Name Function
5.0V or 3.3V VCCE Main power supply
AVCC0 Power supply for the A-D converter
VREF0 Reference voltage for the A-D converter
VCC-BUS Power supply for the external bus
OSC-VCC Power supply for the oscillator circuit
VDDE Power supply for the internal RAM backup
Figure 20.1.1 Configuration of the Power Supply Circuit (VCCE = 5.0 V or 3.3 V)
20.1 Configuration of the Power Supply Circuit
VCCE
32182
OSC-VCC
AVCC
VCC-BUS
VDDE
EXCVDD
VDC
Note 1: Make sure this voltage is the same as VCCE.
EXCVCC
1–10 µF
I/O Control Circuit
CPU
Peripheral Circuit
Flash Memory
PLL
Oscillator Circuit
A-D Converter Circuit
External Bus
RAM
Internal V oltage Generator Circuit
Main VDC
Backup Voltage Generator Circuit
Sub-VDC
1–10 µF
(Note 1)
20
20-3
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
20.2 Power-On Sequence
20.2 Power-On Sequence
20.2.1 Power-On Sequence when Not Using RAM Backup
The diagram below shows a turn-on sequence of the power supply (5.0 V or 3.3 V) when not using RAM backup.
0V
0V
0V
0V
VCCE,VDDE
VCC-BUS,
OSC-VCC
AVCC
VREF
RESET#
Note 1: After turning on all power supplies and holding the RESET# pin low for an oscillation stabilization time,
release the RESET# pin back high (to deassert the reset input).
Notes: • Power-on limitations
VCCE = OSC-VCC
VDDE VCCE, OSC-VCC
• However, if the above power-on limitations cannot be met, sufficient evaluation must be made during system design
in order to ensure that no power will be applied to the microcomputer with a potential difference of 1 V or more.
For potential differences 0 V to 0.6 V, there is almost no in-flow current. The amount of in-flow current begins to increase
when the potential difference exceeds 0.6 V.
(Note 1)
Figure 20.2.1 Power-On Sequence when Not Using RAM Backup
20
20-4
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
(Note 2)
3.0V
(Note 1)
VCCE,
VCC-BUS,
OSC-VCC
AVCC
VREF
RESET#
VDDE
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
Note 1: After turning on all power supplies and holding the RESET# pin low for an oscillation stabilization time,
release the RESET# pin back high (to deassert the reset input).
Note 2: Because of RAM backup, it is assumed that VDDE is 3.0 V or more. The diagram here is shown for the VCCE = 5 V case.
Notes: • Power-on limitations
VCCE = OSC-VCC
VDDE VCCE, OSC-VCC
• However, if the above power-on limitations cannot be met, sufficient evaluation must be made during system design
in order to ensure that no power will be applied to the microcomputer with a potential difference of 1 V or more.
For potential differences 0 V to 0.6 V, there is almost no in-flow current. The amount of in-flow current begins to increase
when the potential difference exceeds 0.6 V.
If VDDE is 3.0 V or more, there will be no problem even when
the limitations VDDE VCCE, OSC-VCC cannot be met.
Figure 20.2.2 Power-On Sequence when Using RAM Backup
20.2.2 Power-On Sequence when Using RAM Backup
The diagram below shows a turn-on sequence of the power supply (5.0 V or 3.3 V) when using RAM backup.
20.2 Power-On Sequence
20
20-5
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
20.3 Power-Off Sequence
20.3 Power-Off Sequence
20.3.1 Power-Off Sequence when Not Using RAM Backup
The diagram below shows a turn-off sequence of the power supply (5.0 V or 3.3 V) when not using RAM backup.
VCCE,
VCC-BUS,
OSC-VCC
AVCC
VREF
RESET#
VDDE
(Note 1)
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
Note 1: Wait until the RESET# pin goes low before turning the power supply off.
Notes: • Power-off limitations
VCCE = OSC-VCC
VDDE VCCE, OSC-VCC
• However, if the above power-off limitations cannot be met, sufficient evaluation must be made during system design
in order to ensure that no power will be applied to the microcomputer with a potential difference of 1 V or more.
For potential differences 0 V to 0.6 V, there is almost no in-flow current. The amount of in-flow current begins to increase
when the potential difference exceeds 0.6 V.
Figure 20.3.1 Power-Off Sequence when Not Using RAM Backup
20
20-6
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
20.3 Power-Off Sequence
20.3.2 Power-Off Sequence when Using RAM Backup
The diagram below shows a turn-off sequence of the power supply (5.0 V or 3.3 V) when using RAM backup with
HREQ function.
VCCE,
VCC-BUS,
OSC-VCC
AVCC
VREF
RESET#
VDDE
P72/HREQ#
3V
(Note 1) (Note 2)
(Note 3)
(Note 4)
Note 1: Pull the HREQ# input pin low to halt the CPU at the end of the bus cycle.
Or disable RAM access in software. P72 can be used as HREQ# irrespective of the operation mode.
However, HREQ# must be selected with the Port Operation Mode Register for P72.
Note 2: Pull the RESET# input pin low while the CPU is halted or RAM access is disabled.
Note 3: Wait until the RESET# pin goes low before turning the power supply off.
Note 4: Lower the VDDE voltage from 5.0 V to 3.0 V as necessary.
Notes: • Power-off limitations
VCCE = OSC-VCC
VDDE VCCE, OSC-VCC
• However, if the above power-off limitations cannot be met, sufficient evaluation must be made during system design
in order to ensure that no power will be applied to the microcomputer with a potential difference of 1 V or more.
For potential differences 0 V to 0.6 V, there is almost no in-flow current. The amount of in-flow current begins to increase
when the potential difference exceeds 0.6 V.
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
Figure 20.3.2 Power-Off Sequence when Using RAM Backup (VCCE = 5.0 V or 3.3 V)
20
20-7
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
VCCE,
VCC-BUS,
OSC-VCC
AVCC
VREF
RESET#
VDDE
P72/HREQ#
3V
5V
5V
3.3V
(Note 1) (Note 2)
(Note 3)
(Note 4)
Note 1: Pull the HREQ# input pin low to halt the CPU at the end of the bus cycle.
Or disable RAM access in software. P72 can be used as HREQ# irrespective of the operation mode.
However, HREQ# must be selected with the Port Operation Mode Register for P72.
Note 2: Pull the RESET# input pin low while the CPU is halted or RAM access is disabled.
Note 3: Wait until the RESET# pin goes low before turning the power supply off.
Note 4: Lower the VDDE voltage from 3.3 V to 3.0 V as necessary.
Notes: • Power-off limitations
VCCE = OSC-VCC
• However, if the above power-off limitations cannot be met, sufficient evaluation must be made during system design
in order to ensure that no power will be applied to the microcomputer with a potential difference of 1 V or more.
For potential differences 0 V to 0.6 V, there is almost no in-flow current. The amount of in-flow current begins to increase
when the potential difference exceeds 0.6 V.
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
Figure 20.3.3 Power-Off Sequence when Using RAM Backup (VCCE = 5.0 V, VDDE = 3.3 V)
20.3 Power-Off Sequence
20
20-8
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
20.3 Power-Off Sequence
Figure 20.3.4 Microcomputer Ready to Operate State (VCCE = 5.0 V or 3.3 V)
VCCE
32182
OSC-VCC
AVCC
VCC-BUS
VDDE
EXCVDD
VDC
EXCVCC
1–10 µF
CPU
PLL
RAM
1–10 µF
(Note 1)
0V
3.0–5.5V
0V
0V
0V
Note 1: Make sure this voltage is the same as VCCE.
Note 2: During RAM backup mode, it automatically switches to the sub-VDC for low-power operation.
I/O Control Circuit
Internal Voltage Generator Circuit
Main VDC
Backup Voltage Generator Circuit
Sub-VDC
(Note 2)
Peripheral Circuit
Flash Memory
Oscillator Circuit
A-D Converter Circuit
External Bus
Figure 20.3.5 SRAM Data Backup State (VCCE = 5.0 V or 3.3 V)
VCCE
32182
OSC-VCC
AVCC
VCC-BUS
VDDE
EXCVDD
VDC
EXCVCC
1–10 µF
I/O Control Circuit
CPU
Peripheral Circuit
Flash Memory
PLL
Oscillator Circuit
A-D Converter Circuit
External Bus
RAM
Internal Voltage Generator Circuit
Main VDC
Backup Voltage Generator Circuit
Sub-VDC
1–10 µF
(Note 1)
5 V or 3.3 V
5 V or 3.3 V
5 V or 3.3 V
5 V or 3.3 V
5 V or 3.3 V
(Note 2)
Note 1: Make sure this voltage is the same as VCCE.
Note 2: When the microcomputer is ready to operate, it automatically switches to the main VDC.
CHAPTER 21
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
21.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
21.2 Electrical Characteristics
when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz
21.3 Electrical Characteristics
when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz
21.4 Electrical Characteristics
when VCCE = 3.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz
21.5 Electrical Characteristics
when VCCE = 3.3 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz
21.6 Flash Memory Related Characteristics
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-2
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
21.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Rated Value Unit
VCCE Main Power Supply VCCE=OSC-VCC -0.3–6.5 V
OSC-VCC Clock Power Supply VCCE=OSC-VCC -0.3–6.5 V
VCC-BUS Bus Power Supply VCCE=OSC-VCC -0.3–6.5 V
VDDE RAM Power Supply VCCE=OSC-VCC -0.3–6.5 V
AVCC Analog Power Supply VCCEAVCCVREF -0.3–6.5 V
VREF Reference Voltage Input VCCEAVCCVREF -0.3–6.5 V
VI Xin -0.3–OSC-VCC+0.3 V
VCNT -0.3–3.2 V
Other -0.3–VCCE+0.3 V
VO Xout -0.3–OSC-VCC+0.3 V
Other -0.3–VCCE+0.3 V
Pd Power Dissipation Ta=-40–85C° 600 mW
Ta=-40–105C° 500 mW
Ta=-40–125C° 500 mW
TOPR Operating Ambient Temperature (Note 1) -40–125
Tstg Storage Temperature -65–150
Note 1: This does not guarantee that the microcomputer can operate continuously. Consult Renesas if the microcomputer is
going to be used for 85C°-plus applications.
21.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
21
21-3
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
VCCE Main Power Supply (Note 1) 4.5 5.0 5.5 V
OSC-VCC Clock Power Supply (Note 1) 4.5 5.0 5.5 V
VCC-BUS Bus Power Supply (Note 1) 4.5 5.0 5.5 V
VDDE RAM Power Supply (Note 1) 4.5 5.0 5.5 V
AVCC Analog Power Supply (Note 1) 4.5 5.0 5.5 V
VREF Reference Voltage Input (Note 1) 4.5 5.0 5.5 V
VIH Input High When When Threshold selection 0.45VCCE VCCE V
Voltage threshold CMOS input : 0.35 VCCE
(Note 4) switching is selected Threshold selection 0.6VCCE VCCE V
function is : 0.5VCCE
used Threshold selection 0.8VCCE VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE
When VT+/VT- 0.6VCCE VCCE V
Schmitt input : 0.5VCCE/0.35VCCE
is selected VT+/VT- 0.8VCCE VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE/0.35VCCE
VT+/VT- 0.8VCCE VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE/0.5VCCE
FP, MOD0, 1, JTMS, JTRST, JTDI, RESET 0.8VCCE VCCE V
Standard input for the following pins: 0.8VCCE VCCE V
RTDCLK, RTDRXD, SCLKI0, 1, 4, 5, RXD0–5,
TCLK0–3, TIN0–33, CRX0, 1
Standard input for the following pins: DB0–15, WAIT 0.43VCCE VCCE V
Standard input for the following pins: SBI, HREQ 0.6VCCE VCCE V
VIL Input Low When When Threshold selection 0 0.25VCCE V
Voltage threshold CMOS input : 0.35VCCE
(Note 4) switching is selected Threshold selection 0 0.4VCCE V
function : 0.5VCCE
is used Threshold selection 0 0.6VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE
When VT+/VT- 0 0.25VCCE V
Schmitt input : 0.5VCCE/0.35VCCE
is selected VT+/VT- 0 0.25VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE/0.35VCCE
VT+/VT- 0 0.4VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE/0.5VCCE
21.2 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz
21.2.1 Recommended Operating Conditions (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz)
Recommended Operating Conditions (Referenced to VCCE, OSC-VCC, VCC-BUS, VDDE = 5 V ± 0.5 V, Ta
= –40°C to 105°C Unless Otherwise Noted)
21.2 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz
21
21-4
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
VIL Input Low FP, MOD0, 1, JTMS, JTRST, JTDI, RESET 0 0.2VCCE V
Voltage Standard input for the following pins: 0 0.25VCCE V
(Note 4) RTDCLK, RTDRXD, SCLKI0, 1, 4, 5, RXD0–5,
TCLK0–3, TIN0–33, CRX0, 1
Standard input for the following pins: DB0–15, WAIT 0 0.16VCCE V
Standard input for the followingpins: SBI, HREQ 0 0.25VCCE V
IOH(peak) High State Peak Output Current P0–P22 (Note 2) -10 mA
IOH(avg) High State Average Output Current P0–P22 (Note 3) -5 mA
IOL(peak) Low State Peak Output Current P0–P22 (Note 2) 10 mA
IOL(avg) Low State Average Output Current P0–P22 (Note 3) 5 mA
CL Output Load JTDO, JTMS 80 pF
Capacitance Other than above 50 pF
f(XIN) External Clock Input Frequency 5 10 MHz
Note 1: Subject to conditions VCCE AVCC VREF, VCCE = OSC-VCC
Note 2: Make sure the total output current (peak) of ports is
| ports P0 + P1 + P41–P43 + P70–P73 | 80 mA
| ports P2 + P3 + P44–P47 + P224–P227 | 80 mA
| ports P6 + P9 + P11 + P12 | 80 mA
| ports P8 + P17 | 80 mA
| ports P74–P77 + P10 | 80 mA
| ports P13 + P15 + P220–P221 | 80 mA
Note 3: The average output current is a value averaged during a 100 ms period.
Note 4: The ports listed below operate with the VCC-BUS power supply, and not with the VCCE power supply. Therefore, the
reference voltage for these ports is the VCC-BUS input voltage.
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27, P30–P37, P41–P47, P70–P73, P224, P225
21.2 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz
21
21-5
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
ICCE VCCE/OSC-VCC Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=10.0MHz 1 20 mA
IDDE VDDE Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=10.0MHz 1 mA
ICC-BUS VCC-BUS Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=10.0MHz 10 mA
IAVCC AVCC Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=10.0MHz 3 mA
IVREF VREF Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=10.0MHz 1 mA
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
VOH Output High Voltage IOH-5mA VCCE+0.165 VCCE V
×IOH(mA)
VOL Output Low Voltage IOL5mA 0 0.15×IOL V
(mA)
VDDE RAM Retention Power Supply Voltage When operating 4.5 5.5 V
During backup 3.0 5.5 V
IIH High State Input Current VI=VCCE -5 5 µ A
IIL Low State Input Current VI=0V -5 5 µA
ICC Total Power Supply Current (Note 1) f(XIN)=10.0MHz, 75 mA
When reset
f(XIN)=10.0MHz, 80 120
When operating
IDDEhold RAM Retention VDDE=5.5V Ta=25C° 1 50 µA
Power Supply Current Ta=85C° 1500
Ta=105C° 4000
VDDE=3.0V Ta=25C° 0.5 10
Ta=85C° 300
Ta=105C° 1500
VT+- FP, MOD0, 1, JTMS, JTRST, JTDI, RESET 1.0 V
VT- Standard input for the following pins: 1.0
RTDCLK, RTDRXD, SCLKI0, 1, 4, 5, RXD0–5,
TCLK0–3, TIN0–33, CRX0, 1
Standard input for the following pins: SBI, HREQ 0.3
When threshold 0.7VCCE/0.35VCCE 1.0
switching function 0.7VCCE/0.5VCCE 0.3
is used (VT+ / VT–) 0.5VCCE/0.35VCCE 0.3
Note 1: Total amount of current when VCCE = OSC-VCC = VCC-BUS = VDDE = AVCC = VREF in single-chip mode
21.2.2 D.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz)
Electrical Characteristics (Referenced to VCCE, OSC-VCC, VCC-BUS, VDDE = 5 V ± 0.5 V, Ta = –40°C to
105°C Unless Otherwise Noted)
Electrical Characteristics of Each Power Supply Pin
21.2 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz
21
21-6
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Resolution VREF=VCCE=AVCC 10 bits
Absolute Without sample- Slow mode Normal speed ±2 LSB
Accuracy and-hold or Double speed ±2
(Note 1) during normal Fast mode Normal speed ±3
sample-and-hold Double speed ±3
During fast Slow mode Normal speed ±3
sample-and Double speed ±3
-hold Fast mode Normal speed ±3
Double speed ±8
TCONV Conversion Without sample- Slow mode Normal speed 14.95 µs
Time and-hold or Double speed 8.65
during normal Fast mode Normal speed 6.55
sample-and-hold Double speed 4.45
During fast Slow mode Normal speed 9.55
sample-and Double speed 5.05
-hold Fast mode Normal speed 4.75
Double speed 2.65
IIAN Analog Input Leakage Current (Note 2) AVSSANiAVCC -5 5 µA
Note 1: Absolute accuracy refers to the accuracy of output code relative to the analog input including all error sources
(including quantization error) in an A-D converter, and is calculated using the equation below.
Absolute accuracy = output code – (analog input voltage Ani / 1 LSB)
When AVCC = AVREF = 5.12 V, 1 LSB = 5 mV.
Note 2: This refers to the input leakage current on ANi while the A-D converter remains idle.
21.2.3 A-D Conversion Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz)
A-D Conversion Characteristics (Referenced to VCCE, OSC-VCC, VCC-BUS, VDDE = 5.12 V, Ta = –40°C to
105°C Unless Otherwise Noted)
21.2 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz
21
21-7
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
VCCE Main Power Supply (Note 1) 4.5 5.0 5.5 V
OSC-VCC Clock Power Supply (Note 1) 4.5 5.0 5.5 V
VCC-BUS Bus Power Supply (Note 1) 4.5 5.0 5.5 V
VDDE RAM Power Supply (Note 1) 4.5 5.0 5.5 V
AVCC Analog Power Supply (Note 1) 4.5 5.0 5.5 V
VREF Reference Voltage Input (Note 1) 4.5 5.0 5.5 V
VIH Input High When When Threshold selection 0.45VCCE VCCE V
Voltage threshold CMOS input : 0.35 VCCE
(Note 4) switching is selected Threshold selection 0.6VCCE VCCE V
function is : 0.5VCCE
used Threshold selection 0.8VCCE VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE
When VT+/VT- 0.6VCCE VCCE V
Schmitt input : 0.5VCCE/0.35VCCE
is selected VT+/VT- 0.8VCCE VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE/0.35VCCE
VT+/VT- 0.8VCCE VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE/0.5VCCE
FP, MOD0, 1, JTMS, JTRST, JTDI, RESET 0.8VCCE VCCE V
Standard input for the following pins: 0.8VCCE VCCE V
RTDCLK, RTDRXD, SCLKI0, 1, 4, 5, RXD0–5,
TCLK0–3, TIN0–33, CRX0, 1
Standard input for the following pins: DB0–15, WAIT 0.43VCCE VCCE V
Standard input for the following pins: SBI, HREQ 0.6VCCE VCCE V
VIL Input Low When When Threshold selection 0 0.25VCCE V
Voltage threshold CMOS input : 0.35VCCE
(Note 4) switching is selected Threshold selection 0 0.4VCCE V
function : 0.5VCCE
is used Threshold selection 0 0.6VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE
When VT+/VT- 0 0.25VCCE V
Schmitt input : 0.5VCCE/0.35VCCE
is selected VT+/VT- 0 0.25VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE/0.35VCCE
VT+/VT- 0 0.4VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE/0.5VCCE
21.3 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz
21.3.1 Recommended Operating Conditions (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz)
Recommended Operating Conditions (Referenced to VCCE, OSC-VCC, VCC-BUS, VDDE = 5 V ± 0.5 V, Ta
= –40°C to 125°C Unless Otherwise Noted)
21.3 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz
21
21-8
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
VIL Input Low FP, MOD0, 1, JTMS, JTRST, JTDI, RESET 0 0.2VCCE V
Voltage Standard input for the following pins: 0 0.25VCCE V
(Note 4) RTDCLK, RTDRXD, SCLKI0, 1, 4, 5, RXD0–5,
TCLK0–3, TIN0–33, CRX0, 1
Standard input for the following pins: DB0–15, WAIT 0 0.16VCCE V
Standard input for the followingpins: SBI, HREQ 0 0.25VCCE V
IOH(peak) High State Peak Output Current P0–P22 (Note 2) -10 mA
IOH(avg) High State Average Output Current P0–P22 (Note 3) -5 mA
IOL(peak) Low State Peak Output Current P0–P22 (Note 2) 10 mA
IOL(avg) Low State Average Output Current P0–P22 (Note 3) 5 mA
CL Output Load JTDO, JTMS 80 pF
Capacitance Other than above 50 pF
f(XIN) External Clock Input Frequency 5 10 MHz
Note 1: Subject to conditions VCCE AVCC VREF, VCCE = OSC-VCC
Note 2: Make sure the total output current (peak) of ports is
| ports P0 + P1 + P41–P43 + P70–P73 | 80 mA
| ports P2 + P3 + P44–P47 + P224–P227 | 80 mA
| ports P6 + P9 + P11 + P12 | 80 mA
| ports P8 + P17 | 80 mA
| ports P74–P77 + P10 | 80 mA
| ports P13 + P15 + P220–P221 | 80 mA
Note 3: The average output current is a value averaged during a 100 ms period.
Note 4: The ports listed below operate with the VCC-BUS power supply, and not with the VCCE power supply. Therefore, the
reference voltage for these ports is the VCC-BUS input voltage.
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27, P30–P37, P41–P47, P70–P73, P224, P225
21.3 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz
21
21-9
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Electrical Characteristics of Each Power Supply Pin
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
VOH Output High Voltage IOH-5mA VCCE+0.165 VCCE V
×IOH(mA)
VOL Output Low Voltage IOL5mA 0 0.15×IOL V
(mA)
VDDE RAM Retention Power Supply Voltage When operating 4.5 5.5 V
During backup 3.0 5.5 V
IIH High State Input Current VI=VCCE -5 5 µ A
IIL Low State Input Current VI=0V -5 5 µA
ICC Total Power Supply Current (Note 1) f(XIN)=8.0MHz, 65 mA
When reset
f(XIN)=8.0MHz, 65 90
When operating
IDDEhold RAM Retention VDDE=5.5V Ta=25C° 1 50 µA
Power Supply Current Ta=125C° 4000
VDDE=3.0V Ta=25C° 0.5 10
Ta=125C° 1500
VT+- FP, MOD0, 1, JTMS, JTRST, JTDI, RESET 1.0 V
VT- Standard input for the following pins: 1.0
RTDCLK, RTDRXD, SCLKI0, 1, 4, 5, RXD0–5,
TCLK0–3, TIN0–33, CRX0, 1
Standard input for the following pins: SBI, HREQ 0.3
When threshold 0.7VCCE/0.35VCCE 1.0
switching function 0.7VCCE/0.5VCCE 0.3
is used (VT+ / VT–) 0.5VCCE/0.35VCCE 0.3
Note 1: Total amount of current when VCCE = OSC-VCC = VCC-BUS = VDDE = AVCC = VREF in single-chip mode
21.3.2 D.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz)
Electrical Characteristics (Referenced to VCCE, OSC-VCC, VCC-BUS, VDDE = 5 V ± 0.5 V, Ta = –40°C to
125°C Unless Otherwise Noted)
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
ICCE VCCE/OSC-VCC Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=8.0MHz 90 mA
IDDE VDDE Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=8.0MHz 1 mA
ICC-BUS VCC-BUS Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=8.0MHz 10 mA
IAVCC AVCC Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=8.0MHz 3 mA
IVREF VREF Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=8.0MHz 1 mA
21.3 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz
21
21-10
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
21.3.3 A-D Conversion Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz)
A-D Conversion Characteristics (Referenced to VCCE, OSC-VCC, VCC-BUS, VDDE = 5.12 V, Ta = –40°C to
125°C Unless Otherwise Noted)
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Resolution VREF=VCCE=AVCC 10 bits
Absolute Without sample- Slow mode Normal speed ±2 LSB
Accuracy and-hold or Double speed ±2
(Note 1) during normal Fast mode Normal speed ±3
sample-and-hold Double speed ±3
During fast Slow mode Normal speed ±3
sample-and Double speed ±3
-hold Fast mode Normal speed ±3
Double speed ±8
TCONV Conversion Without sample- Slow mode Normal speed 18.6875 µs
Time and-hold or Double speed 10.8125
during normal Fast mode Normal speed 8.1875
sample-and-hold Double speed 5.5625
During fast Slow mode Normal speed 11.9375
sample-and Double speed 6.3125
-hold Fast mode Normal speed 5.9375
Double speed 3.3125
IIAN Analog Input Leakage Current (Note 2) AVSSANiAVCC -5 5 µA
Note 1: Absolute accuracy refers to the accuracy of output code relative to the analog input including all error sources
(including quantization error) in an A-D converter, and is calculated using the equation below.
Absolute accuracy = output code – (analog input voltage Ani / 1 LSB)
When AVCC = AVREF = 5.12 V, 1 LSB = 5 mV.
Note 2: This refers to the input leakage current on ANi while the A-D converter remains idle.
21.3 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 5 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz
21
21-11
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
VCCE Main Power Supply (Note 1) 3.0 3.3 3.6 V
OSC-VCC Clock Power Supply (Note 1) 3.0 VCCE 3.6 V
VCC-BUS Bus Power Supply (Note 1) 3.0 VCCE 3.6 V
VDDE RAM Power Supply (Note 1) 3.0 VCCE 3.6 V
AVCC Analog Power Supply (Note 1) 3.0 VCCE 3.6 V
VREF Reference Voltage Input (Note 1) 3.0 VCCE 3.6 V
VIH Input High When When Threshold selection 0.5VCCE VCCE V
Voltage threshold CMOS input : 0.35 VCCE
(Note 4) switching is selected Threshold selection 0.65VCCE VCCE V
function is : 0.5VCCE
used Threshold selection 0.8VCCE VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE
When VT+/VT- 0.65VCCE VCCE V
Schmitt input : 0.5VCCE/0.35VCCE
is selected VT+/VT- 0.8VCCE VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE/0.35VCCE
VT+/VT- 0.8VCCE VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE/0.5VCCE
FP, MOD0, 1, JTMS, JTRST, JTDI, RESET 0.8VCCE VCCE V
Standard input for the following pins: 0.8VCCE VCCE V
RTDCLK, RTDRXD, SCLKI0, 1, 4, 5, RXD0–5,
TCLK0–3, TIN0–33, CRX0, 1
Standard input for the following pins: DB0–15, WAIT 0.5VCCE VCCE V
Standard input for the following pins: SBI, HREQ 0.65VCCE VCCE V
VIL Input Low When When Threshold selection 0 0.2VCCE V
Voltage threshold CMOS input : 0.35VCCE
(Note 4) switching is selected Threshold selection 0 0.35VCCE V
function : 0.5VCCE
is used Threshold selection 0 0.5VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE
When VT+/VT- 0 0.2VCCE V
Schmitt input : 0.5VCCE/0.35VCCE
is selected VT+/VT- 0 0.2VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE/0.35VCCE
VT+/VT- 0 0.35VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE/0.5VCCE
21.4 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 3.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz
21.4.1 Recommended Operating Conditions (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz)
Recommended Operating Conditions (Referenced to VCCE, OSC-VCC, VCC-BUS, VDDE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, Ta
= –40°C to 105°C Unless Otherwise Noted)
21.4 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 3.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz
21
21-12
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
VIL Input Low FP, MOD0, 1, JTMS, JTRST, JTDI, RESET 0 0.2VCCE V
Voltage Standard input for the following pins: 0 0.2VCCE V
(Note 4) RTDCLK, RTDRXD, SCLKI0, 1, 4, 5, RXD0–5,
TCLK0–3, TIN0–33, CRX0, 1
Standard input for the following pins: DB0–15, WAIT 0 0.2VCCE V
Standard input for the followingpins: SBI, HREQ 0 0.2VCCE V
IOH(peak) High State Peak Output Current P0–P22 (Note 2) -10 mA
IOH(avg) High State Average Output Current P0–P22 (Note 3) -5 mA
IOL(peak) Low State Peak Output Current P0–P22 (Note 2) 10 mA
IOL(avg) Low State Average Output Current P0–P22 (Note 3) 5 mA
CL Output Load JTDO, JTMS 80 pF
Capacitance Other than above 50 pF
f(XIN) External Clock Input Frequency 5 10 MHz
Note 1: Subject to conditions VCCE AVCC VREF, VCCE = OSC-VCC
Note 2: Make sure the total output current (peak) of ports is
| ports P0 + P1 + P41–P43 + P70–P73 | 80 mA
| ports P2 + P3 + P44–P47 + P224–P227 | 80 mA
| ports P6 + P9 + P11 + P12 | 80 mA
| ports P8 + P17 | 80 mA
| ports P74–P77 + P10 | 80 mA
| ports P13 + P15 + P220–P221 | 80 mA
Note 3: The average output current is a value averaged during a 100 ms period.
Note 4: The ports listed below operate with the VCC-BUS power supply, and not with the VCCE power supply. Therefore, the
reference voltage for these ports is the VCC-BUS input voltage.
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27, P30–P37, P41–P47, P70–P73, P224, P225
21.4 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 3.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz
21
21-13
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
ICCE VCCE/OSC-VCC Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=10.0MHz 12 0 mA
IDDE VDDE Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=10.0MHz 1 mA
ICC-BUS VCC-BUS Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=10.0MHz 7 mA
IAVCC AVCC Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=10.0MHz 2 mA
IVREF VREF Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=10.0MHz 1 mA
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
VOH Output High Voltage IOH-2mA VCCE+0.5 VCCE V
×IOH(mA)
VOL Output Low Voltage IOL2mA 0 0.225×IOL V
(mA)
VDDE RAM Retention Power Supply Voltage When operating 3.0 3.6 V
During backup 3.0 3.6 V
IIH High State Input Current VI=VCCE -5 5 µ A
IIL Low State Input Current VI=0V -5 5 µA
ICC Total Power Supply Current (Note 1) f(XIN)=10.0MHz, 75 mA
When reset
f(XIN)=10.0MHz, 80 120
When operating
IDDEhold RAM Retention Power Supply Current Ta=25C° 0.5 10
Ta=85C° 300 µA
Ta=105C° 1500
VT+- FP, MOD0, 1, JTMS, JTRST, JTDI, RESET 0.65 V
VT- Standard input for the following pins: 0.5
RTDCLK, RTDRXD, SCLKI0, 1, 4, 5, RXD0–5,
TCLK0–3, TIN0–33, CRX0, 1
Standard input for the following pins: SBI, HREQ 0.2
When threshold 0.7VCCE/0.35VCCE 0.5
switching function 0.7VCCE/0.5VCCE 0.2
is used (VT+ / VT–) 0.5VCCE/0.35VCCE 0.2
Note 1: Total amount of current when VCCE = OSC-VCC = VCC-BUS = VDDE = AVCC = VREF in single-chip mode
21.4.2 D.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz)
Electrical Characteristics (Referenced to VCCE, OSC-VCC, VCC-BUS, VDDE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, Ta = –40°C to
105°C Unless Otherwise Noted)
Electrical Characteristics of Each Power Supply Pin
21.4 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 3.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz
21
21-14
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Resolution VREF=VCCE=AVCC 10 bits
Absolute Without sample- Slow mode Normal speed ±4 LSB
Accuracy and-hold or Double speed ±4
(Note 1) during normal Fast mode Normal speed ±6
sample-and-hold Double speed ±6
During fast Slow mode Normal speed ±4
sample-and Double speed ±4
-hold Fast mode Normal speed ±6
Double speed ±16
TCONV Conversion Without sample- Slow mode Normal speed 14.95 µs
Time and-hold or Double speed 8.65
during normal Fast mode Normal speed 6.55
sample-and-hold Double speed 4.45
During fast Slow mode Normal speed 9.55
sample-and Double speed 5.05
-hold Fast mode Normal speed 4.75
Double speed 2.65
IIAN Analog Input Leakage Current (Note 2) AVSSANiAVCC -5 5 µA
Note 1: Absolute accuracy refers to the accuracy of output code relative to the analog input including all error sources
(including quantization error) in an A-D converter, and is calculated using the equation below.
Absolute accuracy = output code – (analog input voltage Ani / 1 LSB)
When AVCC = AVREF = 3.072 V, 1 LSB = 3 mV.
Note 2: This refers to the input leakage current on ANi while the A-D converter remains idle.
21.4.3 A-D Conversion Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz)
A-D Conversion Characteristics (Referenced to VCCE, OSC-VCC, VCC-BUS, VDDE = 3.3 V, Ta = –40°C to
105°C Unless Otherwise Noted)
21.4 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 3.3 V, f(XIN) = 10 MHz
21
21-15
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
VCCE Main Power Supply (Note 1) 3.0 3.3 3.6 V
OSC-VCC Clock Power Supply (Note 1) 3.0 VCCE 3.6 V
VCC-BUS Bus Power Supply (Note 1) 3.0 VCCE 3.6 V
VDDE RAM Power Supply (Note 1) 3.0 VCCE 3.6 V
AVCC Analog Power Supply (Note 1) 3.0 VCCE 3.6 V
VREF Reference Voltage Input (Note 1) 3.0 VCCE 3.6 V
VIH Input High When When Threshold selection 0.5VCCE VCCE V
Voltage threshold CMOS input : 0.35 VCCE
(Note 4) switching is selected Threshold selection 0.65VCCE VCCE V
function is : 0.5VCCE
used Threshold selection 0.8VCCE VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE
When VT+/VT- 0.65VCCE VCCE V
Schmitt input : 0.5VCCE/0.35VCCE
is selected VT+/VT- 0.8VCCE VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE/0.35VCCE
VT+/VT- 0.8VCCE VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE/0.5VCCE
FP, MOD0, 1, JTMS, JTRST, JTDI, RESET 0.8VCCE VCCE V
Standard input for the following pins: 0.8VCCE VCCE V
RTDCLK, RTDRXD, SCLKI0, 1, 4, 5, RXD0–5,
TCLK0–3, TIN0–33, CRX0, 1
Standard input for the following pins: DB0–15, WAIT 0.5VCCE VCCE V
Standard input for the following pins: SBI, HREQ 0.65VCCE VCCE V
VIL Input Low When When Threshold selection 0 0.2VCCE V
Voltage threshold CMOS input : 0.35VCCE
(Note 4) switching is selected Threshold selection 0 0.35VCCE V
function : 0.5VCCE
is used Threshold selection 0 0.5VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE
When VT+/VT- 0 0.2VCCE V
Schmitt input : 0.5VCCE/0.35VCCE
is selected VT+/VT- 0 0.2VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE/0.35VCCE
VT+/VT- 0 0.35VCCE V
: 0.7VCCE/0.5VCCE
21.5 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 3.3 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz
21.5.1 Recommended Operating Conditions (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V f(XIN) = 8 MHz)
Recommended Operating Conditions (Referenced to VCCE, OSC-VCC, VCC-BUS, VDDE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, Ta
= –40°C to 125°C Unless Otherwise Noted)
21.5 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 3.3 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz
21
21-16
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
VIL Input Low FP, MOD0, 1, JTMS, JTRST, JTDI, RESET 0 0.2VCCE V
Voltage Standard input for the following pins: 0 0.2VCCE V
(Note 4) RTDCLK, RTDRXD, SCLKI0, 1, 4, 5, RXD0–5,
TCLK0–3, TIN0–33, CRX0, 1
Standard input for the following pins: DB0–15, WAIT 0 0.2VCCE V
Standard input for the followingpins: SBI, HREQ 0 0.2VCCE V
IOH(peak) High State Peak Output Current P0–P22 (Note 2) -10 mA
IOH(avg) High State Average Output Current P0–P22 (Note 3) -5 mA
IOL(peak) Low State Peak Output Current P0–P22 (Note 2) 10 mA
IOL(avg) Low State Average Output Current P0–P22 (Note 3) 5 mA
CL Output Load JTDO, JTMS 80 pF
Capacitance Other than above 50 pF
f(XIN) External Clock Input Frequency 5 8 MHz
Note 1: Subject to conditions VCCE AVCC VREF, VCCE = OSC-VCC
Note 2: Make sure the total output current (peak) of ports is
| ports P0 + P1 + P41–P43 + P70–P73 | 80 mA
| ports P2 + P3 + P44–P47 + P224–P227 | 80 mA
| ports P6 + P9 + P11 + P12 | 80 mA
| ports P8 + P17 | 80 mA
| ports P74–P77 + P10 | 80 mA
| ports P13 + P15 + P220–P221 | 80 mA
Note 3: The average output current is a value averaged during a 100 ms period.
Note 4: The ports listed below operate with the VCC-BUS power supply, and not with the VCCE power supply. Therefore, the
reference voltage for these ports is the VCC-BUS input voltage.
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27, P30–P37, P41–P47, P70–P73, P224, P225
21.5 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 3.3 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz
21
21-17
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
ICCE VCCE/OSC-VCC Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=8.0MHz 9 0 mA
IDDE VDDE Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=8.0MHz 1 mA
ICC-BUS VCC-BUS Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=8.0MHz 7 mA
IAVCC AVCC Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=8.0MHz 2 mA
IVREF VREF Power Supply Current When Operating f(XIN)=8.0MHz 1 mA
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
VOH Output High Voltage IOH-2mA VCCE+0.5 VCCE V
×IOH(mA)
VOL Output Low Voltage IOL2mA 0 0.225×IOL V
(mA)
VDDE RAM Retention Power Supply Voltage When operating 3.0 3.6 V
During backup 3.0 3.6 V
IIH High State Input Current VI=VCCE -5 5 µ A
IIL Low State Input Current VI=0V -5 5 µA
ICC Total Power Supply Current (Note 1) f(XIN)=8.0MHz, 65 mA
When reset
f(XIN)=8.0MHz, 65 90
When operating
IDDEhold RAM Retention Power Supply Current Ta=25C° 0.5 10 µA
Ta=125C° 1500
VT+- FP, MOD0, 1, JTMS, JTRST, JTDI, RESET 0.65 V
VT- Standard input for the following pins: 0.5
RTDCLK, RTDRXD, SCLKI0, 1, 4, 5, RXD0–5,
TCLK0–3, TIN0–33, CRX0, 1
Standard input for the following pins: SBI, HREQ 0.2
When threshold 0.7VCCE/0.35VCCE 0.5
switching function 0.7VCCE/0.5VCCE 0.2
is used (VT+ / VT–) 0.5VCCE/0.35VCCE 0.2
Note 1: Total amount of current when VCCE = OSC-VCC = VCC-BUS = VDDE = AVCC = VREF in single-chip mode
21.5.2 D.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz)
Electrical Characteristics (Referenced to VCCE, OSC-VCC, VCC-BUS, VDDE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, Ta = –40°C to
125°C Unless Otherwise Noted)
Electrical Characteristics of Each Power Supply Pin
21.5 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 3.3 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz
21
21-18
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
21.5.3 A-D Conversion Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V ± 0.3 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz)
A-D Conversion Characteristics (Referenced to VCCE, OSC-VCC, VCC-BUS, VDDE = 3.3 V, Ta = –40°C to
125°C Unless Otherwise Noted)
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Resolution VREF=VCCE=AVCC 10 bits
Absolute Without sample- Slow mode Normal speed ±TBD LSB
Accuracy and-hold or Double speed ±TBD
(Note 1) during normal Fast mode Normal speed ±TBD
sample-and-hold Double speed ±TBD
During fast Slow mode Normal speed ±TBD
sample-and Double speed ±TBD
-hold Fast mode Normal speed ±TBD
Double speed ±TBD
TCONV Conversion Without sample- Slow mode Normal speed 18.6875 µs
Time and-hold or Double speed 10.8125
during normal Fast mode Normal speed 8.1875
sample-and-hold Double speed 5.5625
During fast Slow mode Normal speed 11.9375
sample-and Double speed 6.3125
-hold Fast mode Normal speed 5.9375
Double speed 3.3125
IIAN Analog Input Leakage Current (Note 2) AVSSANiAVCC -5 5 µA
Note 1: Absolute accuracy refers to the accuracy of output code relative to the analog input including all error sources
(including quantization error) in an A-D converter, and is calculated using the equation below.
Absolute accuracy = output code – (analog input voltage Ani / 1 LSB)
When AVCC = AVREF = 3.072 V, 1 LSB = 3 mV.
Note 2: This refers to the input leakage current on ANi while the A-D converter remains idle.
21.5 Electrical Characteristics when VCCE = 3.3 V, f(XIN) = 8 MHz
21
21-19
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
21.6 Flash Memory Related Characteristics
Symbol Parameter Test Condition Rated Value Unit
MIN TYP MAX
Topr Flash Rewrite Ambient Temperature 0 70 °C
cycle Flash Rewrite Durability 100 times
tPRG Program Space 1page 8 12 0 ms
TBERS Block Erase Time 1Block 50 600 ms
21.6 Flash Memory Related Characteristics
21
21-20
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
(3) SBI
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
• The timing conditions are referenced to VCCE, OSC-VCC, VCC-BUS, VDDE = 5 V ± 0.5 V, Ta = –40°C to
125°C unless otherwise noted.
• The rated values below are guaranteed for the case where the output load capacitance of the measured pins
are 15 pF to 50 pF (for JTAG related values, a concentrated capacitance of 80 pF).
• The terms S, R, ID and W in the rated values shown below have the following meaning:
S: "1" when the CS Area Wait Control Register SWAIT bit = 1, or "0" when SWAIT bit = 0
R: "1" when the CS Area Wait Control Register RECOV bit = 1, or "0" when RECOV bit = 0
ID: Number of idle cycles inserted at the end of the bus cycle. Idle cycles may be inserted as specified by the
CS Area Wait Control Register IDLE bit, or inserted by default when a write operation is executed immedi-
ately after a read (ID = 0 or 1).
W: Number of wait states (selected by the WTCSEL bit)
21.7.1 Timing Requirements
(1) Input/output ports
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.7.1
tsu(P-E) Port Input Setup Time 100 n s [1]
th(E-P) Port Input Hold Time 0 ns [2]
(2) Serial I/O
a) CSIO mode, with internal clock selected
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.7.2
tsu(D-CLK) RXD Input Setup Time 150 n s [4]
th(CLK-D) RXD Input Hold Time 50 ns [5]
b) CSIO mode, with external clock selected
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.7.2
tc(CLK) CLK Input Cycle Time 640 n s [7]
tw(CLKH) CLK Input High Pulse Width 3 00 n s [8]
tw(CLKL) CLK Input Low Pulse Width 3 00 n s [9]
tsu(D-CLK) RXD Input Setup Time 60 ns [10]
th(CLK-D) RXD Input Hold Time 1 00 n s [11]
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.7.3
tw(SBIL) SBI# Input Pulse Width 5×ns [13]
tc(BCLK)
2
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
21
21-21
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Figs.
21.7.6
21.7.7
21.7.8
MIN MAX 21.7.9
21.7.10
tsu(D-BCLKH) Data Input Setup Time before BCLK 26 ns [31]
th(BCLKH-D) Data Input Hold Time after BCLK 0 ns [32]
tsu(WAITL-BCLKH) WAIT# Input Setup Time before BCLK 26 ns [33]
th(BCLKH-WAITL) WAIT# Input Hold Time after BCLK 0 ns [34]
tsu(WAITH-BCLKH) WAIT# Input Setup Time before BCLK 26 ns [78]
th(BCLKH-WAITH) WAIT# Input Hold Time after BCLK 0 ns [79]
tw(RDL) Read Low Pulse Width ( )×(1+2W-S)-20 ns [43]
tsu(D-RDH) Data Input Setup Time before Read 30 ns [44]
th(RDH-D) Data Input Hold Time after Read 0 n s [45]
tw(BLWL) Write Low Pulse Width With zero wait state ns [51]
tw(BHWL) (byte write mode) -8
With 1 or more wait states
( )×(2W-S)-20
td(RDH-BLWL) Write Delay Time after Read tc(BCLK)×( +R+ID)-10 ns [56]
td(RDH-BHWL)
td(BLWH-RDL) Read Delay Time after Write With zero wait state ns [57]
td(BHWH-RDL) -10
With 1 or more wait states
tc(BCLK)×(1+R)-10
tw(WRL) Write Low Pulse Width With zero wait state ns [68]
(byte enable mode) -6
With 1 or more wait states
( )×(2W-S)-20
td(RDH-WRL) Write Delay Time after Read tc(BCLK)×( +R+ID)-10 ns [80]
(byte enable mode)
td(WRH-RDL) Read Delay Time after Write With zero wait state ns [81]
(byte enable mode) -20
With 1 or more wait states
tc(BCLK)×(1+R)-20
tv(BCLKH-BLWL) Write Valid Time after BCLK -5 ns [90]
tv(BCLKH-BHWL) (with zero wait state)
td(BCLKH-RDL) Read Delay Time after BCLK 12 n s [92]
(when SWAIT = 1)
(4) TINi (i=0–33)
(5) Read and write timing
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.7.5
tw(TINi) TINi Input Pulse Width 7×ns [14]
tc(BCLK)
2
1
2
1
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
21
21-22
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.7.12
tr High-going Other than JTRST pin 10 ns [58]
Transition Time (JTCK, JTDI, JTMS, JTDO)
of Input JTRST pin When using TAP 10 ns
When not using TAP 2 ms
tf Low-going Other than JTRST pin 10 ns [59]
Transition Time (JTCK, JTDI, JTMS, JTDO)
of Input JTRST pin When using TAP 10 ns
When not using TAP 2 ms
(7) Input transition time of JTAG pins
(6) Bus arbitration timing
Note: • The rated values here are guaranteed for the case where the measured pin load capacitance CL = 80 pF.
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.7.11
tsu(HREQL-BCLKH) HREQ# Input Setup Time before BCLK 27 ns [35]
th(BCLKH-HREQL) HREQ# Input Hold Time after BCLK 0 ns [36]
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Figs.
21.7.6
21.7.8
MIN MAX 21.7.9
21.7.10
td(CSL-RDL) Chip Select Delay Time before Read ( )×(1+S)-16 ns [93]
td(CSL-BLWL) Chip Select Delay Time before Write ( )×(1+S)-15 ns [95]
td(CSL-BHWL)
td(CSL-WRL) Chip Select Delay Time before Write ( )×(1+S)-15 ns [96]
(byte enable mode)
td(BCLKL-BLWH) Write Delay Time after BCLK 14 ns [97]
td(BCLKL-BHWH)
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
21
21-23
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.7.14
tc(RTDCLK) RTDCLK Input Cycle Time 500 ns [82]
tw(RTDCLKH) RTDCLK Input High Pulse Width 230 ns [83]
tw(RTDCLKL) RTDCLK Input Low Pulse Width 230 ns [84]
td(RTDCLKH-RTDACK) RTDACK Delay Time after RTDCLK Input 160 ns [85]
tv(RTDCLKL-RTDACK) RTDACK Valid Time after RTDCLK Input 160 ns [86]
td(RTDCLKH-RTDTXD) RTDTXD Delay Time after RTDCLK Input tw(RTDCLKH)+160 ns [87]
th(RTDCLKH-RTDRXD) RTDRXD Input Hold Time 5 0 ns [88]
tsu(RTDRXD-RTDCLKL) RTDRXD Input Setup Time 60 +160 ns [89]
(8) JTAG interface timing
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.7.13
tc(JTCK) JTCK Input Cycle Time 100 ns [60]
tw(JTCKH) JTCK Input High Pulse Width 40 ns [61]
tw(JTCKL) JTCK Input Low Pulse Width 40 ns [62]
tsu(JTDI-JTCK) JTDI, JTMS Input Setup Time 15 ns [63]
th(JTCK-JTDI) JTDI, JTMS Input Hold Time 20 ns [64]
td(JTCK-JTDOV) JTDO Output Delay Time after JTCK Fall 40 ns [65]
td(JTCK-JTDOX) JTDO Output Hi-Z Delay Time after JTCK Fall 40 ns [66]
tw(JTRST) JTRST Input Low Pulse Width tc(JTCK) ns [67]
Note: • The rated values here are guaranteed for the case where the measured pin load capacitance CL = 80 pF.
(9) RTD timing
tc(RTDCLK)
2
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
21
21-24
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.7.2
td(CLK-D) TXD Output Delay Time 160 ns [12]
21.7.2 Switching Characteristics
(1) Input/output ports
(2) Serial I/O
a) CSIO mode, with internal clock selected
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.7.1
td(E-P) Port Data Output Delay Time 100 ns [3]
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.7.2
td(CLK-D) TXD Output Delay Time 60 ns [6]
th(CLK-D) TXD Hold Time 0 ns [98]
b) CSIO mode, with external clock selected
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.7.4
td(BCLK-TOi) TOi Output Delay Time 100 ns [15]
(3)TOi (i=0–44)
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
21
21-25
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Figs.
21.7.6
21.7.7
MIN MAX 21.7.8
21.7.9
tc(BCLK) BCLK Output Cycle Time ns [16]
tw(BCLKH) BCLK Output High Pulse Width -5 ns [17]
tw(BCLKL) BCLK Output Low Pulse Width -5 n s [18]
td(BCLKH-A) Address Delay Time after BCLK 24 ns [19]
td(BCLKH-CS) Chip Select Delay Time after BCLK 24 ns [20]
tv(BCLKH-A) Address Valid Time after BCLK -5 ns [21]
tv(BCLKH-CS) Chip Select Valid Time after BCLK -5 ns [22]
td(BCLKL-RDL) Read Delay Time after BCLK 10 ns [23]
tv(BCLKH-RDL) Read Valid Time after BCLK -5 ns [24]
td(BCLKL-BLWL) Write Delay Time after BCLK 11 n s [25]
td(BCLKL-BHWL)
tv(BCLKL-BLWL) Write Valid Time after BCLK -5 ns [26]
tv(BCLKL-BHWL)
td(BCLKL-D) Data Output Delay Time after BCLK With zero wait state: 11 ns [27]
With 1 or more wait states: 18
tv(BCLKH-D) Data Output Valid Time after BCLK With zero wait state: -4 ns [28]
With 1 or more wait states: -10
tpzx(BCLKL-DZ) Data Output Enable Time after BCLK -10 ns [29]
tpxz(BCLKH-DZ) Data Output Disable Time after BCLK 5 ns [30]
td(A-RDL) Address Delay Time before Read ( )×(1+S)-15 ns [39]
td(CS-RDL) Chip Select Delay Time before Read ( )×(1+S)-15 ns [40]
tv(RDH-A) Address Valid Time after Read tc(BCLK)×(R+ID) ns [41]
tv(RDH-CS) Chip Select Valid Time after Read tc(BCLK)×R ns [42]
tpzx(RDH-DZ) Data Output Enable Time after Read tc(BCLK)×( +R+ID) ns [46]
td(A-BLWL) Address Delay Time before Write ( )×(1+S)-15 ns [47]
td(A-BHWL) (byte write mode)
td(CS-BLWL) Chip Select Delay Time before Write ( ) ×(1+S)-15 ns [48]
td(CS-BHWL) (byte write mode)
tv(BLWH-A) Address Valid Time after Write With zero wait state: -5 ns [49]
tv(BHWH-A) (byte write mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)-5
tv(BLWH-CS) Chip Select Valid Time after Write With zero wait state: -5 ns [50]
tv(BHWH-CS) (byte write mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)-5
(4) Read and write timing
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(Xin)
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
21
21-26
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Figs.
21.7.6
21.7.7
MIN MAX 21.7.8
21.7.9
td(BLWL-D) Data Output Delay Time after Write With zero wait state: 5 ns [52]
td(BHWL-D) (byte write mode) With 1 or more wait states:
15-( )×S
tv(BLWH-D) Data Output Valid Time after Write With zero wait state: -7 ns [53]
tv(BHWH-D) (byte write mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)-13
tpxz(BLWH-DZ) Data Output Disable Time after Write With zero wait state: 5 ns [54]
tpxz(BHWH-DZ) (byte write mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)+5
td(A-WRL) Address Delay Time before Write ( )×(1+S)-15 ns [69]
(byte enable mode)
td(CS-WRL) Chip Select Delay Time before Write ( )×(1+S)-15 ns [70]
(byte enable mode)
tv(WRH-A) Address Valid Time after Write With zero wait state: -5 ns [71]
(byte enable mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)-5
tv(WRH-CS) Chip Select Valid Time after Write With zero wait state: -5 ns [72]
(byte enable mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)-5
td(BLE-WRL) Byte Enable Delay Time before Write ( ) ×(1+S)-15 ns [73]
td(BHE-WRL) (byte enable mode)
tv(WRH-BLE) Byte Enable Valid Time after Write With zero wait state: -5 ns [74]
tv(WRH-BHE) (byte enable mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)-5
td(WRL-D) Data Output Delay Time after Write With zero wait state: 7 ns [75]
(byte enable mode) With 1 or more wait states:
15-( )×S
tv(WRH-D) Data Output Valid Time after Write With zero wait state: -7 ns [76]
(byte enable mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)-13
tpxz(WRH-DZ) Data Output Disable Time after Write With zero wait state: 5 ns [77]
(byte enable mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)+5
tw(RDH) Read High Pulse Width ( )×(1+S)-5 ns [55]
Read and write timing (continued from the preceding page)
(5) Bus arbitration
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.7.11
td(BCLKL-HACKL) HACK# Delay Time after BCLK 29 ns [37]
tv(BCLKL-HACKL) HACK# Valid Time after BCLK -11 ns [38]
tc(BCLK)
2
1
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
1
2
1
2
tc(BCLK)
2
1
2
tc(BCLK)
2
1
2
1
2
tc(BCLK)
2
1
2
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
21
21-27
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
21.7.3 A.C. Characteristics
Figure 21.7.1 Input/Output Port Timing
Figure 21.7.2 Serial I/O Timing
Port output
[3] td(E-P)
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
BCLK
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
Port input
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
[1] tsu(P-E) [2] th(E-P)
Note:The ports listed below operate with the VCC-BUS power supply, and not with the VCCE power supply.
Therefore, the reference voltage for these ports is the VCC-BUS input voltage.
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27, P30–P37, P41–P47, P70–P73, P224, P225
SCLKO
TXD
RXD
[6]
td(CLK-D)
[4]
tsu(D-CLK)
[5]
th(CLK-D)
a) CSIO mode, with internal clock selected
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
b) CSIO mode, with external clock selected
SCLKI
TXD
RXD
[12]
td(CLK-D)
[10]
tsu(D-CLK)
[11]
th(CLK-D)
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
[7]
tc(CLK)
[8]
tw(CLKH)
[9]
tw(CLKL)
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
[98]
th(CLK-D)
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
21
21-28
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 21.7.3 SBI Timing
Figure 21.7.5 TINi Timing
Figure 21.7.4 TOi Timing
SBI#
[13] tw(SBIL)
0.2VCCE 0.2VCCE
BCLK
TOi
[15]
td(BCLK-TOi)
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.2VCC-BUS
TINi 0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
[14] tw(TINi)
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
21
21-29
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Notes: • For signal-to-signal timing, see Figure 21.7.8, "Read Timing (Relative to Read Pulse),"
and Figure 21.7.9, "Write Timing (Relative to Write Pulse)."
When using the threshold switching function, the data input and WAIT# voltage levels are
determined with respect to the rated minimum and maximum values for VIH and VIL.
BCLK
[16] tc(BCLK)
Data output
(DB0–DB15)
Address
(A11–A30)
BLW#
BHW#
CS#
(Access area)
WAIT#
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
[19] td(BCLKH-A)
0.43VCC-BUS
[17] tw(BCLKH)
[21] tv(BCLKH-A)
[18] tw(BCLKL)
[20] td(BCLKH-CS) [22] tv(BCLKH-CS)
[22] tv(BCLKH-CS)
[24] tv(BCLKH-RDL)[92] td(BCLKH-RDL)
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
[23] td(BCLKL-RDL)
[20] td(BCLKH-CS)
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
[32] th(BCLKH-D)[31] tsu(D-BCLKH)
[26] tv(BCLKL-BLWL)
tv(BCLKL-BHWL) [28] tv(BCLKH-D)
[30] tpxz(BCLKH-DZ)
[29] tpzx(BCLKL-DZ)
[27] td(BCLKL-D)
[33] tsu(WAITL-BCLKH) [34] th(BCLKH-WAITL)
[79] th(BCLKH-WAITH)[78] tsu(WAITH-BCLKH)
[25] td(BCLKL-BLWL)
td(BCLKL-BHWL)
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS 0.43VCC-BUS
CS#
(Non-access area)
RD#
Data input
(DB0–DB15)
[97] td(BCLKL-BLWH)
td(BCLKL-BHWH)
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
Figure 21.7.6 Read and Write Timing (Relative to BCLK) with 1 or More Wait States
21
21-30
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 21.7.7 Read and Write Timing (Relative to BCLK) with Zero Wait State
BCLK
[16] tc(BCLK)
Data output
(DB0–DB15)
Address
(A11–A30)
CS0#, CS1#,
CS2#, CS3#
BLW#
BHW#
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
[17] tw(BCLKH)
[18] tw(BCLKL)
[24] tv(BCLKH-RDL)
0.16VCC-BUS
[23] td(BCLKL-RDL)
0.16VCC-BUS
[32] th(BCLKH-D)[31] tsu(D-BCLKH)
[90] tv(BCLKH-BLWL)
tv(BCLKH-BHWL)
[28] tv(BCLKH-D)
[30] tpxz(BCLKH-DZ)
[29] tpzx(BCLKL-DZ)
[27] td(BCLKL-D)
[25] td(BCLKL-BLWL)
td(BCLKL-BHWL)
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
RD#
Data input
(DB0–DB15)
[20] td(BCLKH-CS)
[19] td(BCLKH-A) [22] tv(BCLKH-CS)
[21] tv(BCLKH-A)
Note: • When using the threshold switching function, the data input voltage levels are determined
with respect to the rated minimum and maximum values for VIH and VIL.
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
21
21-31
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 21.7.8 Read Timing (Relative to Read Pulse)
[55] tw(RDH)
Data output
(DB0–DB15)
Address
(A11–A30)
BLW#
BHW#
CS#
(Access area)
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
[43] tw(RDL)
[39] td(A-RDL) [41] tv(RDH-A)
[42] tv(RDH-CS)
[42] tv(RDH-CS)
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
[40] td(CS-RDL)
0.16VCC-BUS
[45] th(RDH-D)[44] tsu(D-RDH)
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
CS#
(Non-access area)
RD#
Data input
(DB0–DB15)
[57] td(BLWH-RDL)
td(BHWH-RDL) [56] td(RDH-BLWL)
td(RDH-BHWL)
[93] td(CSL-RDL)
[46] tpzx(RDH-DZ)
0.43VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
Note: • When using the threshold switching function, the data input voltage levels are determined
with respect to the rated minimum and maximum values for VIH and VIL.
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
21
21-32
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 21.7.9 Write Timing (Relative to Write Pulse)
Address
(A11–A30)
BLW#
BHW#
CS#
(Access area)
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
CS#
(Non-access area)
RD#
Data output
(DB0–DB15)
[56] td(RDH-BLWL)
td(RDH-BHWL) [57] td(BLWH-RDL)
td(BHWH-RDL)
0.43VCC-BUS
[51] tw(BLWL)
tw(BHWL)
[47] td(A-BLWL)
td(A-BHWL) [49] tv(BLWH-A)
tv(BHWH-A)
[50] tv(BLWH-CS)
tv(BHWH-CS)
[95] td(CSL-BLWL)
td(CSL-BHWL)
[48] td(CS-BLWL)
td(CS-BHWL) [50] tv(BLWH-CS)
tv(BHWH-CS)
[52] td(BLWL-D)
td(BHWL-D) [53] tv(BLWH-D)
tv(BHWH-D)
[54] tpxz(BLWH-DZ)
tpxz(BHWH-DZ)
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
21
21-33
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 21.7.10 Write Timing (Byte Enable Mode)
Address
(A11–A30)
WR#
CS#
(Access area)
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
CS#
(Non-access area)
RD#
Data output
(DB0–DB15)
[81]
td(WRH-RDL)
0.43VCC-BUS
[68]
tw(WRL)
[77]
tpxz(WRH-DZ)
BLE#
BHE#
0.16VCC-BUS
[73]
td(BLEL-WRL)
td(BHEL-WRL)
[74]
tv(WRH-BLEL)
tv(WRH-BHEL)
[71]
tv(WRH-A)
[80]
td(RDH-WRL)
[69]
td(A-WRL)
[96]
td(CSL-WRL)
[72]
tv(WRH-CS)
[72]
tv(WRH-CS)
[70]
td(CS-WRL)
[75]
td(WRL-D)
[76]
tv(WRH-D)
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
21
21-34
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 21.7.11 Bus Arbitration Timing
BCLK
HACK#
[36] th(BCLKH-HREQL)
[37] td(BCLKL-HACKL)
[38] tv(BCLKL-HACKL)
HREQ#
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS 0.16VCC-BUS
[35] tsu(HREQL-BCLKH)
0.16VCC-BUS
Figure 21.7.12 Input Transition Time of JTAG Pins
JTCK, JTDI
JTMS, JTRST
[58]
tr
[59]
tf
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
Note: • The rated values here are guaranteed for the case where the measured pin load capacitance CL = 80 pF.
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
21
21-35
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 21.7.14 RTD Timing
RTDCLK
RTDACK
RTDTXD
RTDRXD
[82]
tc(RTDCLK)
0.5VCCE 0.5VCCE 0.5VCCE
0.2VCCE 0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE 0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.5VCCE
[83]
tw(RTDCLKH)
[84]
tw(RTDCLKL)
[85]
td(RTDCLKH-RTDACK)
[86]
tv(RTDCLKL-RTDACK)
[89]
tsu(RTDRXD-RTDCLKL)
[87]
td(RTDCLKH-RTDTXD)
[88]
th(RTDCLKH-RTDRXD)
Figure 21.7.13 JTAG Interface Timing
JTCK 0.5VCCE
[60]
tc(JTCK)
[67]
tw(JTRST)
Data input
(JTDI)
JTMS
Data output
(JIDO)
JTRST
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.2VCCE 0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
Note:The rated values here are guaranteed for the case where the measured pin load capacitance CL = 80 pF.
[61]
tw(JTCKH)
[62]
tw(JTCKL)
[63]
tsu(JTDI-JTCK)
[64]
th(JTCK-JTDI)
[65]
td(JTCK-JTDOV)
[66]
td(JTCK-JTDOX)
21.7 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 5 V)
21
21-36
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
(3) SBI
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
• The timing conditions are referenced to VCCE, OSC-VCC, VCC-BUS, VDDE = 3.3V ± 0.3 V, Ta = –40°C to
125°C unless otherwise noted.
• The rated values below are guaranteed for the case where the output load capacitance of the measured pins
are 15 pF to 50 pF (for JTAG related values, a concentrated capacitance of 80 pF).
• The terms S, R, ID and W in the rated values shown below have the following meaning:
S: "1" when the CS Area Wait Control Register SWAIT bit = 1, or "0" when SWAIT bit = 0
R: "1" when the CS Area Wait Control Register RECOV bit = 1, or "0" when RECOV bit = 0
ID: Number of idle cycles inserted at the end of the bus cycle. Idle cycles may be inserted as specified by the
CS Area Wait Control Register IDLE bit, or inserted by default when a write operation is executed immedi-
ately after a read (ID = 0 or 1).
W: Number of wait states (selected by the WTCSEL bit)
21.8.1 Timing Requirements
(1) Input/output ports
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.8.1
tsu(P-E) Port Input Setup Time 100 ns [1]
th(E-P) Port Input Hold Time 0 ns [2]
(2) Serial I/O
a) CSIO mode, with internal clock selected
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.8.2
tsu(D-CLK) RXD Input Setup Time 150 ns [4]
th(CLK-D) RXD Input Hold Time 50 n s [5]
b) CSIO mode, with external clock selected
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.8.2
tc(CLK) CLK Input Cycle Time 640 ns [7]
tw(CLKH) CLK Input High Pulse Width 300 ns [8]
tw(CLKL) CLK Input Low Pulse Width 300 ns [9]
tsu(D-CLK) RXD Input Setup Time 60 ns [10]
th(CLK-D) RXD Input Hold Time 100 ns [11]
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.8.3
tw(SBIL) SBI# Input Pulse Width 5×ns [13]
tc(BCLK)
2
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-37
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Figs.
21.8.6
21.8.7
21.8.8
MIN MAX 21.8.9
21.8.10
tsu(D-BCLKH) Data Input Setup Time before BCLK 26 ns [31]
th(BCLKH-D) Data Input Hold Time after BCLK 0 ns [32]
tsu(WAITL-BCLKH) WAIT# Input Setup Time before BCLK 26 ns [33]
th(BCLKH-WAITL) WAIT# Input Hold Time after BCLK 0 ns [34]
tsu(WAITH-BCLKH) WAIT# Input Setup Time before BCLK 26 ns [78]
th(BCLKH-WAITH) WAIT# Input Hold Time after BCLK 0 ns [79]
tw(RDL) Read Low Pulse Width ( )×(1+2W-S)-20 ns [43]
tsu(D-RDH) Data Input Setup Time before Read 30 ns [44]
th(RDH-D) Data Input Hold Time after Read 0 n s [45]
tw(BLWL) Write Low Pulse Width With zero wait state ns [51]
tw(BHWL) (byte write mode) -11
With 1 or more wait states
( )×(2W-S)-20
td(RDH-BLWL) Write Delay Time after Read tc(BCLK)×( +R+ID)-10 ns [56]
td(RDH-BHWL)
td(BLWH-RDL) Read Delay Time after Write With zero wait state ns [57]
td(BHWH-RDL) -10
With 1 or more wait states
tc(BCLK)×(1+R)-10
tw(WRL) Write Low Pulse Width With zero wait state ns [68]
(byte enable mode) -7
With 1 or more wait states
( )×(2W-S)-20
td(RDH-WRL) Write Delay Time after Read tc(BCLK)×( +R+ID)-10 ns [80]
(byte enable mode)
td(WRH-RDL) Read Delay Time after Write With zero wait state ns [81]
(byte enable mode) -20
With 1 or more wait states
tc(BCLK)×(1+R)-20
tv(BCLKH-BLWL) Write Valid Time after BCLK -5 ns [90]
tv(BCLKH-BHWL) (with zero wait state)
td(BCLKH-RDL) Read Delay Time after BCLK 17 ns [92]
(when SWAIT = 1)
(4) TINi (i=0–33)
(5) Read and write timing
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.8.5
tw(TINi) TINi Input Pulse Width 7×ns [14]
tc(BCLK)
2
1
2
1
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-38
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.8.12
tr High-going Other than JTRST pin 10 ns [58]
Transition Time (JTCK, JTDI, JTMS, JTDO)
of Input JTRST pin When using TAP 10 ns
When not using TAP 2 ms
tf Low-going Other than JTRST pin 10 ns [59]
Transition Time (JTCK, JTDI, JTMS, JTDO)
of Input JTRST pin When using TAP 10 ns
When not using TAP 2 ms
(7) Input transition time of JTAG pins
(6) Bus arbitration timing
Note: • The rated values here are guaranteed for the case where the measured pin load capacitance CL = 80 pF.
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.8.11
tsu(HREQL-BCLKH) HREQ# Input Setup Time before BCLK 27 ns [35]
th(BCLKH-HREQL) HREQ# Input Hold Time after BCLK 0 ns [36]
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Figs.
21.8.6
21.8.8
MIN MAX 21.8.9
21.8.10
td(CSL-RDL) Chip Select Delay Time before Read ( )×(1+S)-16 ns [93]
td(CSL-BLWL) Chip Select Delay Time before Write ( )×(1+S)-16 ns [95]
td(CSL-BHWL)
td(CSL-WRL) Chip Select Delay Time before Write ( )×(1+S)-20 ns [96]
(byte enable mode)
td(BCLKL-BLWH) Write Delay Time after BCLK 14 n s [97]
td(BCLKL-BHWH)
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-39
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.8.14
tc(RTDCLK) RTDCLK Input Cycle Time 500 ns [82]
tw(RTDCLKH) RTDCLK Input High Pulse Width 230 ns [83]
tw(RTDCLKL) RTDCLK Input Low Pulse Width 230 ns [84]
td(RTDCLKH-RTDACK) RTDACK Delay Time after RTDCLK Input 160 ns [85]
tv(RTDCLKL-RTDACK) RTDACK Valid Time after RTDCLK Input 160 ns [86]
td(RTDCLKH-RTDTXD) RTDTXD Delay Time after RTDCLK Input tw(RTDCLKH)+160 ns [87]
th(RTDCLKH-RTDRXD) RTDRXD Input Hold Time 50 ns [88]
tsu(RTDRXD-RTDCLKL) RTDRXD Input Setup Time 60 +160 ns [89]
(8) JTAG interface timing
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.8.13
tc(JTCK) JTCK Input Cycle Time 100 ns [60]
tw(JTCKH) JTCK Input High Pulse Width 40 ns [61]
tw(JTCKL) JTCK Input Low Pulse Width 40 ns [62]
tsu(JTDI-JTCK) JTDI, JTMS Input Setup Time 15 ns [63]
th(JTCK-JTDI) JTDI, JTMS Input Hold Time 20 ns [64]
td(JTCK-JTDOV) JTDO Output Delay Time after JTCK Fall 40 ns [65]
td(JTCK-JTDOX) JTDO Output Hi-Z Delay Time after JTCK Fall 40 ns [66]
tw(JTRST) JTRST Input Low Pulse Width tc(JTCK) ns [67]
Note: • The rated values here are guaranteed for the case where the measured pin load capacitance CL = 80 pF.
(9) RTD timing
tc(RTDCLK)
2
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-40
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.8.2
td(CLK-D) TXD Output Delay Time 160 ns [12]
21.8.2 Switching Characteristics
(1) Input/output ports
(2) Serial I/O
a) CSIO mode, with internal clock selected
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.8.1
td(E-P) Port Data Output Delay Time 100 ns [3]
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.8.2
td(CLK-D) TXD Output Delay Time 60 ns [6]
th(CLK-D) TXD Hold Time 0 ns [98]
b) CSIO mode, with external clock selected
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.8.4
td(BCLK-TOi) TOi Output Delay Time 100 ns [15]
(3)TOi (i=0–44)
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-41
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Figs.
21.8.6
21.8.7
MIN MAX 21.8.8
21.8.9
tc(BCLK) BCLK Output Cycle Time ns [16]
tw(BCLKH) BCLK Output High Pulse Width -5 ns [17]
tw(BCLKL) BCLK Output Low Pulse Width -5 ns [18]
td(BCLKH-A) Address Delay Time after BCLK 29 ns [19]
td(BCLKH-CS) Chip Select Delay Time after BCLK 30 ns [20]
tv(BCLKH-A) Address Valid Time after BCLK -5 ns [21]
tv(BCLKH-CS) Chip Select Valid Time after BCLK -5 ns [22]
td(BCLKL-RDL) Read Delay Time after BCLK 14 ns [23]
tv(BCLKH-RDL) Read Valid Time after BCLK -5 n s [24]
td(BCLKL-BLWL) Write Delay Time after BCLK 14 n s [25]
td(BCLKL-BHWL)
tv(BCLKL-BLWL) Write Valid Time after BCLK -5 ns [26]
tv(BCLKL-BHWL)
td(BCLKL-D) Data Output Delay Time after BCLK With zero wait state: 14 ns [27]
With 1 or more wait states: 19
tv(BCLKH-D) Data Output Valid Time after BCLK With zero wait state: -4 ns [28]
With 1 or more wait states: -10
tpzx(BCLKL-DZ) Data Output Enable Time after BCLK -10 ns [29]
tpxz(BCLKH-DZ) Data Output Disable Time after BCLK 5 ns [30]
td(A-RDL) Address Delay Time before Read ( )×(1+S)-15 ns [39]
td(CS-RDL) Chip Select Delay Time before Read ( )×(1+S)-15 ns [40]
tv(RDH-A) Address Valid Time after Read tc(BCLK)×(R+ID) ns [41]
tv(RDH-CS) Chip Select Valid Time after Read tc(BCLK)×R ns [42]
tpzx(RDH-DZ) Data Output Enable Time after Read tc(BCLK)×( +R+ID) ns [46]
td(A-BLWL) Address Delay Time before Write ( )×(1+S)-15 ns [47]
td(A-BHWL) (byte write mode)
td(CS-BLWL) Chip Select Delay Time before Write ( )×(1+S)-15 ns [48]
td(CS-BHWL) (byte write mode)
tv(BLWH-A) Address Valid Time after Write With zero wait state: -5 ns [49]
tv(BHWH-A) (byte write mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)-5
tv(BLWH-CS) Chip Select Valid Time after Write With zero wait state: -5 ns [50]
tv(BHWH-CS) (byte write mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)-5
(4) Read and write timing
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(Xin)
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-42
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Figs.
21.8.6
21.8.7
MIN MAX 21.8.8
21.8.9
td(BLWL-D) Data Output Delay Time after Write With zero wait state: 5 ns [52]
td(BHWL-D) (byte write mode) With 1 or more wait states:
15-( )×S
tv(BLWH-D) Data Output Valid Time after Write With zero wait state: -7 ns [53]
tv(BHWH-D) (byte write mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)-13
tpxz(BLWH-DZ) Data Output Disable Time after Write With zero wait state: 5 ns [54]
tpxz(BHWH-DZ) (byte write mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)+5
td(A-WRL) Address Delay Time before Write ( )×(1+S)-20 ns [69]
(byte enable mode)
td(CS-WRL) Chip Select Delay Time before Write ( )×(1+S)-15 ns [70]
(byte enable mode)
tv(WRH-A) Address Valid Time after Write With zero wait state: -5 ns [71]
(byte enable mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)-5
tv(WRH-CS) Chip Select Valid Time after Write With zero wait state: -5 ns [72]
(byte enable mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)-5
td(BLE-WRL) Byte Enable Delay Time before Write ( )×(1+S)-15 ns [73]
td(BHE-WRL) (byte enable mode)
tv(WRH-BLE) Byte Enable Valid Time after Write With zero wait state: -5 ns [74]
tv(WRH-BHE) (byte enable mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)-5
td(WRL-D) Data Output Delay Time after Write With zero wait state: 9 ns [75]
(byte enable mode) With 1 or more wait states:
15-( )×S
tv(WRH-D) Data Output Valid Time after Write With zero wait state: -7 ns [76]
(byte enable mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)-13
tpxz(WRH-DZ) Data Output Disable Time after Write With zero wait state: 5 ns [77]
(byte enable mode) With 1 or more wait states:
tc(BCLK)×( +R)+5
tw(RDH) Read High Pulse Width ( )×(1+S)-5 ns [55]
Read and write timing (continued from the preceding page)
(5) Bus arbitration
Symbol Parameter Rated Value Unit See Fig.
MIN MAX 21.8.11
td(BCLKL-HACKL) HACK# Delay Time after BCLK 29 ns [37]
tv(BCLKL-HACKL) HACK# Valid Time after BCLK -11 n s [38]
tc(BCLK)
2
1
2
tc(BCLK)
2
tc(BCLK)
2
1
2
1
2
tc(BCLK)
2
1
2
tc(BCLK)
2
1
2
1
2
tc(BCLK)
2
1
2
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-43
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
21.8.3 A.C. Characteristics
Figure 21.8.1 Input/Output Port Timing
Figure 21.8.2 Serial I/O Timing
Port output
[3]
td(E-P)
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
BCLK
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
Port input
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
[1]
tsu(P-E)
[2]
th(E-P)
Note:The ports listed below operate with the VCC-BUS power supply, and not with the VCCE power supply.
Therefore, the reference voltage for these ports is the VCC-BUS input voltage.
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27, P30–P37, P41–P47, P70–P73, P224, P225
SCLKO
TXD
RXD
[6]
td(CLK-D)
[4]
tsu(D-CLK)
[5]
th(CLK-D)
a) CSIO mode, with internal clock selected
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
b) CSIO mode, with external clock selected
SCLKI
TXD
RXD
[12]
td(CLK-D)
[10]
tsu(D-CLK)
[11]
th(CLK-D)
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
[7]
tc(CLK)
[8]
tw(CLKH)
[9]
tw(CLKL)
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
[98]
th(CLK-D)
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-44
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 21.8.3 SBI Timing
Figure 21.8.5 TINi Timing
Figure 21.8.4 TOi Timing
SBI#
[13] tw(SBIL)
0.2VCCE 0.2VCCE
BCLK
TOi
[15]
td(BCLK-TOi)
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.2VCC-BUS
TINi
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
[14]
tw(TINi)
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-45
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 21.8.6 Read and Write Timing (Relative to BCLK) with 1 or More Wait States
Notes: • For signal-to-signal timing, see Figure 21.8.8, "Read Timing (Relative to Read Pulse),"
and Figure 21.8.9, "Write Timing (Relative to Write Pulse)."
When using the threshold switching function, the data input and WAIT# voltage levels are determined
with respect to the rated minimum and maximum values for VIH and VIL.
BCLK
[16] tc(BCLK)
Data output
(DB0–DB15)
Address
(A11–A30)
BLW#
BHW#
CS#
(Access area)
WAIT#
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
[19] td(BCLKH-A)
0.43VCC-BUS
[17] tw(BCLKH)
[21] tv(BCLKH-A)
[18] tw(BCLKL)
[20] td(BCLKH-CS) [22] tv(BCLKH-CS)
[22] tv(BCLKH-CS)
[24] tv(BCLKH-RDL)[92] td(BCLKH-RDL)
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
[23] td(BCLKL-RDL)
[20] td(BCLKH-CS)
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
[32] th(BCLKH-D)[31] tsu(D-BCLKH)
[26] tv(BCLKL-BLWL)
tv(BCLKL-BHWL) [28] tv(BCLKH-D)
[30] tpxz(BCLKH-DZ)
[29] tpzx(BCLKL-DZ)
[27] td(BCLKL-D)
[33] tsu(WAITL-BCLKH) [34] th(BCLKH-WAITL)
[79] th(BCLKH-WAITH)[78] tsu(WAITH-BCLKH)
[25] td(BCLKL-BLWL)
td(BCLKL-BHWL)
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS 0.43VCC-BUS
CS#
(Non-access area)
RD#
Data input
(DB0–DB15)
[97] td(BCLKL-BLWH)
td(BCLKL-BHWH)
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-46
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 21.8.7 Read and Write Timing (Relative to BCLK) with Zero Wait State
BCLK
[16]
tc(BCLK)
Data output
(DB0–DB15)
Address
(A11–A30)
CS0#, CS1#,
CS2#, CS3#
BLW#
BHW#
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
[17]
tw(BCLKH)
[18]
tw(BCLKL)
[24]
tv(BCLKH-RDL)
0.16VCC-BUS
[23]
td(BCLKL-RDL)
0.16VCC-BUS
[32]
th(BCLKH-D)
[31]
tsu(D-BCLKH)
[90]
tv(BCLKH-BLWL)
tv(BCLKH-BHWL)
[28]
tv(BCLKH-D)
[30]
tpxz(BCLKH-DZ)
[29]
tpzx(BCLKL-DZ)
[27]
td(BCLKL-D)
[25]
td(BCLKL-BLWL)
td(BCLKL-BHWL)
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
RD#
Data input
(DB0–DB15)
[20]
td(BCLKH-CS)
[19]
td(BCLKH-A)
[22]
tv(BCLKH-CS)
[21]
tv(BCLKH-A)
Note: • When using the threshold switching function, the data input voltage levels are determined
with respect to the rated minimum and maximum values for VIH and VIL.
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-47
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 21.8.8 Read Timing (Relative to Read Pulse)
[55] tw(RDH)
Data output
(DB0–DB15)
Address
(A11–A30)
BLW#
BHW#
CS#
(Access area)
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
[43] tw(RDL)
[39] td(A-RDL) [41] tv(RDH-A)
[42] tv(RDH-CS)
[42] tv(RDH-CS)
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
[40] td(CS-RDL)
0.16VCC-BUS
[45] th(RDH-D)[44] tsu(D-RDH)
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
CS#
(Non-access area)
RD#
Data input
(DB0–DB15)
[57] td(BLWH-RDL)
td(BHWH-RDL) [56] td(RDH-BLWL)
td(RDH-BHWL)
[93] td(CSL-RDL)
[46] tpzx(RDH-DZ)
0.43VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
Note: • When using the threshold switching function, the data input voltage levels are determined
with respect to the rated minimum and maximum values for VIH and VIL.
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-48
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 21.8.9 Write Timing (Relative to Write Pulse)
Address
(A11–A30)
BLW#
BHW#
CS#
(Access area)
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
CS#
(Non-access area)
RD#
Data output
(DB0–DB15)
[56] td(RDH-BLWL)
td(RDH-BHWL) [57] td(BLWH-RDL)
td(BHWH-RDL)
0.43VCC-BUS
[51] tw(BLWL)
tw(BHWL)
[47] td(A-BLWL)
td(A-BHWL) [49] tv(BLWH-A)
tv(BHWH-A)
[50] tv(BLWH-CS)
tv(BHWH-CS)
[95] td(CSL-BLWL)
td(CSL-BHWL)
[48] td(CS-BLWL)
td(CS-BHWL) [50] tv(BLWH-CS)
tv(BHWH-CS)
[52] td(BLWL-D)
td(BHWL-D) [53] tv(BLWH-D)
tv(BHWH-D)
[54] tpxz(BLWH-DZ)
tpxz(BHWH-DZ)
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-49
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 21.8.10 Write Timing (Byte Enable Mode)
Address
(A11–A30)
WR#
CS#
(Access area)
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
CS#
(Non-access area)
RD#
Data output
(DB0–DB15)
[81] td(WRH-RDL)
0.43VCC-BUS
[68] tw(WRL)
[77] tpxz(WRH-DZ)
BLE#
BHE# 0.16VCC-BUS
[73] td(BLEL-WRL)
td(BHEL-WRL) [74] tv(WRH-BLEL)
tv(WRH-BHEL)
[71] tv(WRH-A)
[80] td(RDH-WRL)
[69] td(A-WRL)
[96] td(CSL-WRL) [72] tv(WRH-CS)
[72] tv(WRH-CS)
[70] td(CS-WRL)
[75] td(WRL-D) [76] tv(WRH-D)
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-50
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 21.8.11 Bus Arbitration Timing
BCLK
HACK#
[36] th(BCLKH-HREQL)
[37] td(BCLKL-HACKL)
[38] tv(BCLKL-HACKL)
HREQ#
0.16VCC-BUS
0.43VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS
0.16VCC-BUS 0.16VCC-BUS
[35] tsu(HREQL-BCLKH)
0.16VCC-BUS
Figure 21.8.12 Input Transition Time of JTAG Pins
JTCK, JTDI
JTMS, JTRST
[58] tr [59] tf
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
Note: • The rated values here are guaranteed for the case where the measured pin load capacitance CL = 80 pF.
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-51
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Figure 21.8.14 RTD Timing
RTDCLK
RTDACK
RTDTXD
RTDRXD
[82]
tc(RTDCLK)
0.5VCCE 0.5VCCE 0.5VCCE
0.2VCCE 0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE 0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.5VCCE
[83]
tw(RTDCLKH)
[84]
tw(RTDCLKL)
[85]
td(RTDCLKH-RTDACK)
[86]
tv(RTDCLKL-RTDACK)
[89]
tsu(RTDRXD-RTDCLKL)
[87]
td(RTDCLKH-RTDTXD)
[88]
th(RTDCLKH-RTDRXD)
Figure 21.8.13 JTAG Interface Timing
JTCK 0.5VCCE
[60]
tc(JTCK)
[67]
tw(JTRST)
Data input
(JTDI)
JTMS
Data output
(JTDO)
JTRST
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
0.2VCCE 0.2VCCE
0.8VCCE
0.2VCCE
Note:The rated values here are guaranteed for the case where the measured pin load capacitance CL = 80 pF.
[61]
tw(JTCKH)
[62]
tw(JTCKL)
[63]
tsu(JTDI-JTCK)
[64]
th(JTCK-JTDI)
[65]
td(JTCK-JTDOV)
[66]
td(JTCK-JTDOX)
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
21
21-52
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
This page is blank for reasons of layout.
21.8 A.C. Characteristics (when VCCE = 3.3 V)
CHAPTER 22
TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS
22
22-2 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS
To be written at a later time.
APPENDIX 1
MECHANICAL SPECIFICAITONS
Appendix 1.1 Dimensional Outline Drawing
Appendix 1
Appendix 1-2
MECHANICAL SPECIFICAITONS
Appendix 1.1 Dimensional Outline Drawing
32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
Appendix 1.1 Dimensional Outline Drawing
(1) 144-pin LQFP
LQFP144-P-2020-0.50 Weight(g)
1.23
JEDEC Code
EIAJ Package Code Lead Material
Cu Alloy
144P6Q-A Plastic 144pin 20×20mm body LQFP
0.125
––
0.2
––
Symbol Min Nom Max
A
A2
b
c
D
E
HE
L
L1
y
b2
Dimension in Millimeters
HD
A1
0.225
I20.95
MD20.4
ME20.4
8 0 0.1
1.0 0.650.50.35 22.222.021.8 22.222.021.8 0.5 20.120.019.9 20.120.019.9 0.1750.1250.105 0.270.220.17 1.4
0.05 1.7
e
A
HD
D
HE
E
1
36
37
72
73
108
109
144
F
eLp 0.45
0.6
0.25
0.75
0.08
x
A3
MD
l2
b2
ME
e
Recommended Mount Pad
ybxM
A1A2
L1
L
Detail F Lp
A3
c
MMP
APPENDIX 2
INSTRUCTION PROCESSING TIME
Appendix 2.1 32182 Instruction Processing Time
Appendix 2
Appendix 2-2 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
INSTRUCTION PROCESSING TIME
Appendix 2.1 32182 Instruction Processing Time
Appendix 2.1 32182 Instruction Processing Time
For microcomputers, the number of instruction execution cycles in the E stage (Note 1) normally represents their
instruction processing time. However, depending on pipeline operation, other stages may affect the instruction
processing time. Especially when a branch instruction is executed, the processing time in each of the IF (Instruc-
tion Fetch), D (Decode) and E (Execution) stages of the next instruction must be taken into account.
The tables below show the instruction processing time in each pipelined stage of the 32182.
Note 1: Two E stages, E1 and EM, are used for the FPU instructions.
Table 2.1.1 Instruction Processing Time in Each Pipelined Stage (Other Than FPU Instructions)
Number of Execution Cycles in Each Stage
Instruction IF D E MEM1 MEM2 WB
Load instructions (LD, LDB, LDUB, LDH, LDUH, LOCK) R(Note 1) 1 1 R(Note 1) 1 1
Store instructions (ST, STB, STH, UNLOCK) R(Note 1) 1 1 W(Note 1) 1 (1)(Note 2)
BSET and BCLR instructions R(Note 1) 1 R(Note 1)W(Note 1) 1
+3
Multiply instructions (MUL) R(Note 1) 1 3 1
Divide/remainder instructions (DIV, DIVU, REM, REMU) R(Note 1) 1 3 7 1
Other instructions(including DSP function instructions R(Note 1) 1 1 1
BTST, SETPSW and CLRPSW)
Note 1: See the calculation methods for R and W described in the next page.
Note 2: Of the store instructions, only those that have register indirect + register update addressing modes require one cycle
in the WB stage (but not more than that).
Table 2.1.2 Instruction Processing Time in Each Pipelined Stage (FPU Instructions)
Number of Execution Cycles in Each Stage
Instruction IF D E1 EM EA E2 WB
FMADD and FMSUB instructions R(Note 1) 1 1 1 1 1
FDIV instruction R(Note 1) 1 14 1 1
Other FPU instructions R(Note 1) 1 1 1 1
Note 1: See the calculation methods for R and W described in the next page.
Appendix 2
Appendix 2-3 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
INSTRUCTION PROCESSING TIME
Appendix 2.1 32182 Instruction Processing Time
The following shows the number of memory access cycles in the IF and MEM stages. Shown here are the mini-
mum number of cycles required for memory access. Therefore, these values do not always reflect the number of
cycles actually required for memory or bus access.
In write access, for example, although the CPU finishes the MEM stage by only writing to the write buffer, this
operation actually is followed by a write to memory. Depending on the memory or bus state before or after the CPU
requests a memory access, the instruction processing may take more time than the calculated value.
• R (read cycle)
When existing in the instruction queue ..................................................... 1 CPUCLK cycle
When reading the internal resource (RAM) .............................................. 1 CPUCLK cycle
When reading the internal resource (ROM) .............................................. 2 CPUCLK cycles
When reading the internal resource (SFR) (byte or halfword) .................. 4 CPUCLK cycles
When reading the internal resource (SFR) (word) .................................... 8 CPUCLK cycles
When reading external memory (byte or halfword) ................................... 1 CPUCLK + 1 BCLK cycles (Note 1)
When reading external memory (word) .................................................... 1 CPUCLK + 2 BCLK cycles (Note 1)
When successively fetching instructions from external memory .............. 2 BCLK cycles (Note 1)
• W (write cycle)
When writing to the internal resource (RAM) ........................................... 1 CPUCLK cycle
When writing to the internal resource (SFR) (byte or halfword) ................ 4 CPUCLK cycles
When writing to the internal resource (SFR) (word) ................................. 8 CPUCLK cycles
When writing to external memory (byte or halfword) ................................ 1 BCLK cycle (Note 1)
When writing to external memory (word) .................................................. 2 BCLK cycles (Note 1)
Note 1: This applies when external memory is accessed with zero wait state. The instruction processing
time increases by 1 BCLK when one wait state is inserted.
Note: • BCLK and CPUCLK have the relationship 1 BCLK = 4 CPUCLK.
Appendix 2
Appendix 2-4 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
INSTRUCTION PROCESSING TIME
Appendix 2.1 32182 Instruction Processing Time
This page is blank for reasons of layout.
APPENDIX 3
PROCESSING OF UNUSED PINS
Appendix 3.1 Example Processing of Unused Pins
Appendix 3
Appendix 3-2 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
PROCESSING OF UNUSED PINS
Appendix 3.1 Example Processing of Unused Pins
An example of how to process the unused pins of the microcomputer is shown below.
(1) When operating in single-chip mode
Table 3.1.1 Example Processing of Unused Pins during Single-Chip Mode (Note 1)
Appendix 3.1 Example Processing of Unused Pins
Pin Name
P61–P63,
P74–P77, P82–P87, P93–P97,
P100–P107, P110–P117, P124–P127,
P130–P137, P150, P153,
P174, P175,
P220, P221
Processing
Set the port for input mode and pull each pin low to VSS or
pull high to VCCE via a 1 k-10 k resistor.
Or set the port for output mode and leave the pin open.
XOUT (Note 4)
AD0IN0–AD0IN11,
AVREF0, AVSS0
Leave open
Connect to VCCEAVCC0
JTAG
JTDO, JTMS, JTDI, JTCK
JTRST
Pull high to VCCE or low to VSS via a 0-100 k resistor
Pull low to VSS via a 0-100 k resistor
Connect to VSS
A-D converter
Note 1: Process the unused pins in the shortest wiring length possible (within 20 mm) from the microcomputer pins.
Note 2: If any port is set for output mode and left open, care should be taken because the port remains set for input
before it is changed for output in a program after being reset. Therefore, the voltage level at the pin is instable,
and the power supply current tends to increase while the port remains set for input. Because it is possible that
the content of the port direction register will inadvertently be altered by noise or noise-induced runaway,
higher reliability may be obtained by periodically setting the port direction register back again in a program.
Note, however, that P221 is input-only port and does not work as an output port.
Note 3: Make sure that unintended falling edges due to noise, etc. will be not applied. (A falling edge at the SBI# input
causes a system break interrupt to occur.)
Note 4: This is necessary when an external clock is connected to XIN.
SBI# (Note 3) Pull low to VSS via a 1 k-10 k resistor.
Input/output ports (Note 2)
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27,
P30–P37, P41–P47, P70–P73,
P224, P225
Set the port for input mode and pull each pin low to VSS or
pull high to VCC-BUS via a 1 k-10 kresistor.
Or set the port for output mode and leave the pin open.
Appendix 3
Appendix 3-3 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
PROCESSING OF UNUSED PINS
(2) When operating in external extension mode
Table 3.1.2 Example Processing of Unused Pins during External Extension Mode (Note 1)
Pin Name
P61–P63,
P74–P77, P82–P87, P93–P97,
P100–P107, P110–P117, P124–P127,
P130–P137, P150, P153,
P174, P175,
P220, P221
Processing
XOUT (Note 4)
AD0IN0–AD0IN11,
AVREF0, AVSS0
Leave open
Connect to VCCEAVCC0
JTAG
JTDO, JTMS, JTDI, JTCK
JTRST
Pull high to VCCE or low to VSS via a 0-100 k resistor
Pull low to VSS via a 0-100 k resistor
Connect to VSS
A-D converter
Note 1: Process the unused pins in the shortest wiring length possible (within 20 mm) from the microcomputer pins.
Note 2: If any port is set for output mode and left open, care should be taken because the port remains set for input
before it is changed for output in a program after being reset. Therefore, the voltage level at the pin is instable,
and the power supply current tends to increase while the port remains set for input. Because it is possible that
the content of the port direction register will inadvertently be altered by noise or noise-induced runaway,
higher reliability may be obtained by periodically setting the port direction register back again in a program.
Note, however, that P221 is input-only port and does not work as an output port.
Note 3: Make sure that unintended falling edges due to noise, etc. will be not applied. (A falling edge at the SBI# input
causes a system break interrupt to occur.)
Note 4: This is necessary when an external clock is connected to XIN.
BLW#/BLE#, BHW#/BHE#, RD# Leave open
SBI# (Note 3) Pull low to VSS via a 1 k-10 k resistor
Input/output ports (Note 2)
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27,
P30–P37, P44–P47, P70–P73,
P224, P225
Set the port for input mode and pull each pin low to VSS or
pull high to VCCE via a 1 k-10 k resistor.
Or set the port for output mode and leave the pin open.
Set the port for input mode and pull each pin low to VSS or
pull high to VCC-BUS via a 1 k-10 k resistor.
Or set the port for output mode and leave the pin open.
Appendix 3.1 Example Processing of Unused Pins
Appendix 3
Appendix 3-4 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
PROCESSING OF UNUSED PINS
Appendix 3.1 Example Processing of Unused Pins
(3) When operating in processor mode
Table 3.1.3 Example Processing of Unused Pins during Processor Mode (Note 1)
Pin Name
P61–P63,
P74–P77, P82–P87, P93–P97,
P100–P107, P110–P117, P124–P127,
P130–P137, P150, P153,
P174, P175,
P220, P221
Processing
XOUT (Note 4)
AD0IN0–AD0IN11,
AVREF0, AVSS0
Leave open
Connect to VCCEAVCC0
JTAG
JTDO, JTMS, JTDI, JTCK
JTRST
Pull high to VCCE or low to VSS via a 0-100 k resistor
Pull low to VSS via a 0-100 k resistor
Connect to VSS
A-D converter
Note 1: Process the unused pins in the shortest wiring length possible (within 20 mm) from the microcomputer pins.
Note 2: If any port is set for output mode and left open, care should be taken because the port remains set for input
before it is changed for output in a program after being reset. Therefore, the voltage level at the pin is instable,
and the power supply current tends to increase while the port remains set for input. Because it is possible that
the content of the port direction register will inadvertently be altered by noise or noise-induced runaway,
higher reliability may be obtained by periodically setting the port direction register back again in a program.
Note, however, that P221 is input-only port and does not work as an output port.
Note 3: Make sure that unintended falling edges due to noise, etc. will be not applied. (A falling edge at the SBI# input
causes a system break interrupt to occur.)
Note 4: This is necessary when an external clock is connected to XIN.
A11–A30, DB0–DB15,
BLW#/BLE#, BHW#/BHE#, RD#
CS0#, CS1#, CS2#, CS3# Leave open
SBI# (Note 3) Pull low to VSS via a 1 k-10 k resistor
Input/output ports (Note 2)
P70–P73
Set the port for input mode and pull each pin low to VSS or
pull high to VCCE via a 1 k-10 k resistor.
Or set the port for output mode and leave the pin open.
Set the port for input mode and pull each pin low to VSS or
pull high to VCC-BUS via a 1 k-10 k resistor.
Or set the port for output mode and leave the pin open.
APPENDIX 4
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.1 Precautions about the CPU
Appendix 4.2 Precautions about the Address Space
Appendix 4.3 Precautions about EIT
Appendix 4.4 Precautions To Be Observed when
Programming Internal Flash Memory
Appendix 4.5 Precautions to Be Observed after Reset
Appendix 4.6 Precautions about Input/Output Ports
Appendix 4.7 Precautions about the DMAC
Appendix 4.8 Precautions about the Multijunction Timers
Appendix 4.9 Precautions about the A-D Converter
Appendix 4.10 Precautions about Serial I/O
Appendix 4.11 Precautions about RAM Backup Mode
Appendix 4.12 Precautions about JTAG
Appendix 4.13 Precautions about Noise
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-2 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.1 Precautions about the CPU
Appendix 4.1.1 Precautions Regarding Data Transfer
When transferring data, be aware that data arrangements in registers and memory are different.
Word data (32 bits)
+0 +1 +2 +3
b0 b31
HH HL LH LL
b0 b31
HH HL LH LL
• Halfword data (16 bits)
+0 +1 +2 +3
b0 b31
H L
b0 b15
H L
• Byte data (8 bits)
+0 +1 +2 +3
b0 b31 b0 b7
(R0–R15)
(R0–R15)
(R0–R15)
+0 +1 +2 +3
b0 b31 b8 b15
(R0–R15)
+0 +1 +2 +3
b0 b31 b16 b23
(R0–R15)
+0 +1 +2 +3
b0 b31 b24 b31
(R0–R15)
+0 +1 +2 +3
b0 b31
H L
b16 b31
H L
(R0–R15)
Data in registers Data in memory
Figure 4.1.1 Difference in Data Arrangements
Appendix 4.1 Precautions about the CPU
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-3 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.2 Precautions about the Address Space
Appendix 4.2.1 Virtual Flash Emulation Function
The microcomputer has the function to map 4-Kbyte memory blocks beginning with the address H’0080 8000
into areas (S banks) of the internal flash memory that are divided in 4-Kbyte units. This functions is referred to as
the virtual flash emulation function.
This function allows the data located in 4-Kbyte blocks of the internal RAM to be changed with the flash memory
contents at the addresses specified by the Virtual Flash Bank Register. For details about this function, see
Section 6.6, “Virtual Flash Emulation Function.”
Appendix 4.3 Precautions about EIT
The Address Exception (AE) requires caution because if one of the instructions that use “register indirect + regis-
ter update” addressing mode (following three instructions) generates an address exception when it is executed,
the values of the registers to be automatically updated (Rsrc and Rsrc2) become undefined.
Except that the values of Rsrc and Rsrc2 become undefined, these instructions behave the same way as when
used in other addressing modes.
• Applicable instructions
LD Rdest, @Rsrc+
ST Rsrc1, @–Rsrc2
ST Rsrc1, @+Rsrc2
If the above case applies, consider the fact that the register values become undefined when you design the
processing to be performed after executing said instructions. (If an address exception occurs, it means that the
system has some fatal fault already existing in it. Therefore, address exceptions must be used on condition that
control will not be returned from the address exception handler to the program that was being executed when the
exception occurred.)
Appendix 4.4 Precautions To Be Observed when Programming Internal Flash Memory
The following describes precautions to be taken when programming/erasing the internal flash memory.
• When the internal flash memory is programmed or erased, a high voltage is generated internally. Because mode
transitions during programming/erase operation may cause the chip to break down, make sure the mode setting
pin/power supply voltages do not fluctuate to prevent unintended changes of modes.
• If the system uses any pins that are to be used by a general-purpose programming/erase tool, care must be taken
to prevent adverse effects on the system when the tool is connected.
• If the internal flash memory needs to be protected while using a general-purpose programming/erase tool, set any
ID in the flash memory protect ID verification area (H’0000 0084 to H’0000 008F).
• If the internal flash memory does not need to be protected while using a general-purpose programming/erase
tool, fill the entire flash memory protect ID verification area (H’0000 0084 to H’0000 008F) with H’FF.
• If the Flash Status Register 2 (FSTAT2)’s each error status is to be cleared (initialized to H’80) by resetting the
Flash Control Register 4 (FCNT4) FRESET bit, check to see that the Flash Status Register 1 (FSTAT1) FSTAT
bit = "1" (ready) before clearing the error status.
• Before resetting the Flash Control Register 1 (FCNT1) FENTRY bit from "1" to "0", check to see that the Flash Status
Register 1 (FSTAT1) FSTAT bit = "1" (ready) or the Flash Status Register 2 (FSTAT2) FBUSY bit = "1" (ready).
• Do not clear the FENTRY bit if the Flash Control Register 1 (FCNT1) FENTRY bit = "1" and the Flash Status
Register 1 (FSTAT1) FSTAT bit = "0" (busy) or the Flash Status Register 2 (FSTAT2) FBUSY bit = "0" (being
programmed or erased).
Appendix 4.2 Precautions about the Address Space
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-4 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.5 Precautions To Be Observed after Reset
Appendix 4.5.1 Input/output Ports
After reset, the microcomputer’s input/output ports are disabled against input in order to prevent current from
flowing through the port. To use any ports in input mode, set the Port Input Special Function Control Register
(PICNT) PIEN0 bit to enable them for input. For details, see Section 8.3, “Input/Output Port Related Registers.”
Appendix 4.6 Precautions about Input/Output Ports
Appendix 4.6.1 When Using Input/Output Ports in Output Mode
Because the value of the Port Data Register is undefined after reset, the Port Data Register must have its initial
value set in it before the Port Direction Register can be set for output. Conversely, if the Port Direction Register
is set for output before setting data in the Port Data Register, the Port Data Register outputs an undefined value
until any data is written into it.
Appendix 4.6.2 About the Port Input Disable Function
Because the input/output ports are disabled against input after reset, they must be enabled for input by setting
the Port Input Enable (PIEN0) bit to "1" before their input functions can be used.
When disabled against input, the input/output ports are in a state equivalent to a situation where the pin has a
low-level input applied. Consequently, if a peripheral input function is selected for any port (uncontrolled pin)
while disabled against input by using the Port Operation Mode Register, the port may operate unexpectedly due
to the low-level input on it.
Appendix 4.5 Precautions To Be Observed after Reset
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-5 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.7 Precautions about the DMAC
Appendix 4.7.1 About Writing to the DMAC Related Registers
Because DMA transfer involves exchanging data via the internal bus, the DMAC related registers basically can
only be accessed for write immediately after reset or when transfer is disabled (transfer enable bit = "0"). When
transfer is enabled, do not write to the DMAC related registers, except the DMA transfer enable bit, the transfer
request flag, and the DMA Transfer Count Register that is protected in hardware. This is a precaution necessary
to ensure stable DMA operation.
The table below lists the registers that can or cannot be accessed for write.
Table 4.7.1 DMAC Related Registers That Can or Cannot Be Accessed for Write
Status Transfer enable bit Transfer request flag Other DMAC related registers
Transfer enabled Can be accessed Can be accessed Cannot be accessed
Transfer disabled Can be accessed Can be accessed Can be accessed
Even for registers that can exceptionally be written to while transfer is enabled, the following conditions must be
observed:
(1) DMA Channel Control Register 0 transfer enable bit and transfer request flag
For all other bits in this register, be sure to write the same data that those bits had before the write. Note,
however, that only writing "0" is effective for the transfer request flag.
(2) DMA Transfer Count Register
When transfer is enabled, this register is protected in hardware, so that any data rewritten to it is ignored.
(3) Rewriting the DMA source and DMA destination addresses on different channels by DMA transfer
Although this operation means accessing the DMAC related registers while DMA is enabled, there is no
problem. Note, however, that no data can be transferred by DMA to the DMAC related registers on the
currently active channel itself.
Appendix 4.7.2 Manipulating the DMAC Related Registers by DMA Transfer
When manipulating the DMAC related registers by means of DMA transfer (e.g., reloading the DMAC related
registers with the initial values by DMA transfer), do not write to the DMAC related registers on the currently
active channel through that channel. (If this precaution is neglected, device operation cannot be guaranteed.)
It is only the DMAC related registers on other channels that can be rewritten by means of DMA transfer. (For
example, the DMAn Source Address and DMAn Destination Address Registers on channel 1 can be rewritten by
DMA transfer through channel 0.)
Appendix 4.7.3 About the DMA Interrupt Request Status Register
When clearing the DMA Interrupt Request Status Register, be sure to write "1" to all bits, except those to be
cleared. Writing "1" to any bits in this register has no effect, so that they retain the data they had before the write.
Appendix 4.7.4 About the Stable Operation of DMA Transfer
To ensure the stable operation of DMA transfer, never rewrite the DMAC related registers, except the channel
control register’s transfer enable bit, unless transfer is disabled. One exception is that even when transfer is
enabled, the DMA Source Address and DMA Destination Address Registers can be rewritten by DMA transfer
from one channel to another.
Appendix 4.7 Precautions about the DMAC
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-6 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.8 Precautions about the Multijunction Timers
Appendix 4.8.1 Precautions on Using TOP Single-Shot Output Mode
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TOP single-shot output mode.
• If the counter stops due to an underflow in the same clock period as the timer is enabled by external input,
the former has priority so that the counter stops.
• If the counter stops due to an underflow in the same clock period as count is enabled by writing to the enable
bit, the latter has priority so that count is enabled.
• If the timer is enabled by external input in the same clock period as count is disabled by writing to the enable
bit, the latter has priority so that count is disabled.
• Because the timer operates synchronously with the count clock, a count clock-dependent delay is included
before F/F output is inverted after the timer is enabled.
• When writing to the correction register, be careful not to cause the counter to overflow. Even if the counter
overflows due to correction of counts, no interrupt requests are generated for reasons of an overflow. There-
fore, if the counter underflows in the subsequent down-count after an overflow, a false interrupt request is
generated for an underflow that includes the overflowed count.
In the example in the next page, the reload register is initially set to H’FFF8. When the timer starts, the reload
register value is loaded into the counter, letting it start counting down. In the example here, the value H’0014 is
written to the correction register when the counter has counted down to H’FFF0.
As a result of this correction, the count overflows to H’0004 and the counter fails to count correctly. Also, an
interrupt request is generated for an erroneous overflowed count.
Appendix 4.8 Precautions about the Multijunction Timers
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-7 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Figure 4.8.1 Example of an Operation in TOP Single-shot Output Mode Where Count Overflows Due to Correction
Appendix 4.8 Precautions about the Multijunction Timers
H'FFFF
H'0000
H'FFF8
H'(FFF0+0014)
H'0004
H'FFF0
H'0014
H'FFF8
H'FFFF
Data inverted
by enable Data inverted
by underflow
H'(FFF8-1)
Counter
Count clock
Correction register
F/F output
TOP interrupt request
due to underflow
Enable bit
Note: • This diagram does not show detailed timing information.
Reload register
Write to the
correction register
Enabled
(by writing to the enable bit
or by external input) Disabled
(by underflow)
Indeterminate
value
Actual count after overflow
Overflow occurs
Indeterminate
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-8 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.8.2 Precautions on Using TOP Delayed Single-Shot Output Mode
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TOP delayed single-shot output mode.
• If the counter stops due to an underflow in the same clock period as the timer is enabled by external input,
the former has priority so that the counter stops.
• If the counter stops due to an underflow in the same clock period as count is enabled by writing to the enable
bit, the latter has priority so that count is enabled.
• If the timer is enabled by external input in the same clock period as count is disabled by writing to the enable
bit, the latter has priority so that count is disabled.
• Even if the counter overflows due to correction of counts, no interrupt requests are generated for reasons of
an overflow. Therefore, if the counter underflows in the subsequent down-count after an overflow, a false
interrupt request is generated for an underflow that includes the overflowed count.
• If the counter is accessed for read immediately after being reloaded pursuant to an underflow, the counter
value temporarily reads as H’FFFF but immediately changes to (reload value – 1) at the next clock edge.
Figure 4.8.2 Counter Value Immediately after Underflow
Count clock
Enable bit "H"
H'0001 H'0000 H'FFFF H'AAA9 H'AAA8
Counter value
H'AAAA
Reload register
Reload due to underflow
H'(AAAA-1) H'(AAAA-2)
What is seen during reload cycle is always H'FFFF,
and not the reload register value (in this case, H'AAAA).
Count down from the
reload register value
Reload cycle
Appendix 4.8 Precautions about the Multijunction Timers
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-9 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.8.3 Precautions on Using TOP Continuous Output Mode
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TOP continuous output mode.
• If the timer is enabled by external input in the same clock period as count is disabled by writing to the enable
bit, the latter has priority so that count is disabled.
• If the counter is accessed for read immediately after being reloaded pursuant to an underflow, the counter
value temporarily reads as H’FFFF but immediately changes to (reload value – 1) at the next clock edge.
• Because the timer operates synchronously with the count clock, a count clock-dependent delay is included
before F/F output is inverted after the timer is enabled.
Appendix 4.8.4 Precautions on Using TIO Measure Free-Run/Clear Input Modes
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TIO measure free-run/clear input modes.
• If measure event input and write to the counter occur in the same clock period, the write value is set in the
counter while at the same time latched into the measure register.
Appendix 4.8.5 Precautions on Using TIO PWM Output Mode
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TIO PWM output mode.
• If the timer is enabled by external input in the same clock period as count is disabled by writing to the enable
bit, the latter has priority so that count is disabled.
• If the counter is accessed for read immediately after being reloaded pursuant to an underflow, the counter
value temporarily reads as H’FFFF but immediately changes to (reload value – 1) at the next clock edge.
• Because the timer operates synchronously with the count clock, a count clock-dependent delay is included
before F/F output is inverted after the timer is enabled.
Appendix 4.8.6 Precautions on Using TIO Single-Shot Output Mode
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TIO single-shot output mode.
• If the counter stops due to an underflow in the same clock period as the timer is enabled by external input,
the former has priority so that the counter stops.
• If the counter stops due to an underflow in the same clock period as count is enabled by writing to the enable
bit, the latter has priority so that count is enabled.
• If the timer is enabled by external input in the same clock period as count is disabled by writing to the enable
bit, the latter has priority so that count is disabled.
• Because the timer operates synchronously with the count clock, a count clock-dependent delay is included
before F/F output is inverted after the timer is enabled.
Appendix 4.8 Precautions about the Multijunction Timers
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-10 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.8.7 Precautions on Using TIO Delayed Single-Shot Output Mode
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TIO delayed single-shot output mode.
• If the counter stops due to an underflow in the same clock period as the timer is enabled by external input,
the former has priority so that the counter stops.
• If the counter stops due to an underflow in the same clock period as count is enabled by writing to the enable
bit, the latter has priority so that count is enabled.
• If the timer is enabled by external input in the same clock period as count is disabled by writing to the enable
bit, the latter has priority so that count is disabled.
• If the counter is accessed for read immediately after being reloaded pursuant to an underflow, the counter
value temporarily reads as H’FFFF but immediately changes to (reload value – 1) at the next clock edge.
Appendix 4.8.8 Precautions on Using TIO Continuous Output Mode
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TIO continuous output mode.
• If the timer is enabled by external input in the same clock period as count is disabled by writing to the enable
bit, the latter has priority so that count is disabled.
• If the counter is accessed for read immediately after being reloaded pursuant to an underflow, the counter
value temporarily reads as H’FFFF but immediately changes to (reload value – 1) at the next clock edge.
• Because the timer operates synchronously with the count clock, a count clock-dependent delay is included
before F/F output is inverted after the timer is enabled.
Appendix 4.8.9 Precautions on Using TMS Measure Input
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TMS measure input.
• If measure event input and write to the counter occur in the same clock period, the write value is set in the
counter while at the same time latched into the measure register.
Appendix 4.8 Precautions about the Multijunction Timers
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-11 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.8.10 Precautions on Using TML Measure Input
The following describes precautions to be observed when using TML measure input.
• If measure event input and write to the counter occur in the same clock period, the write value is set in the
counter, whereas the up-count value (before being rewritten) is latched into the measure register.
• If clock bus 1 is selected and any clock other than BCLK/2 is used for the timer, the counter cannot be
written normally. Therefore, when using any clock other than BCLK/2, do not write to the counter.
• If clock bus 1 is selected and any clock other than BCLK/2 is used for the timer, the value captured into the
measure register is one count larger the counter value. During the count clock to BCLK/2 period interval,
however, the captured value is exactly the counter value.
The diagram below shows the relationship between counter operation and the valid data that can be captured.
Counter BACDE
F
ABCDE
When BCLK/2 is selected
BCLK/2
Captured
Counter BA C
When clock bus 1 is selected
BCLK/2
Count clock
Captured BCD
F
Figure 4.8.3 Mistimed Counter Value and the Captured Value
Appendix 4.8 Precautions about the Multijunction Timers
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-12 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Figure 4.9.1 Internal Equivalent Circuit of the Analog Input Part
Appendix 4.9 Precautions about the A-D Converter
Appendix 4.9 Precautions about the A-D Converter
• Forcible termination during scan operation
If A-D conversion is forcibly terminated by setting the A-D conversion stop bit (AD0CSTP) to "1" during scan
mode operation and the A-D data register for the channel that was in the middle of conversion is accessed for
read, the read value shows the last conversion result that had been transferred to the data register before the
conversion was forcibly terminated.
• Modification of the A-D converter related registers
If the content of any register—A-D Conversion Interrupt Control Register, Single or Scan Mode Registers or A-D
Successive Approximation Register, except the A-D conversion stop bit—is modified in the middle of A-D conver-
sion, the conversion result cannot be guaranteed. Therefore, do not modify the contents of these registers while A-
D conversion is in progress, or be sure to restart A-D conversion if register contents have been modified.
• Handling of analog input signals
When using the A-D Converter with its sample-and-hold function disabled, make sure the analog input level is
fixed during A-D conversion.
• A-D conversion completed bit read timing
To read the A-D conversion completed bit (Single Mode Register 0 bit 5 or Scan Mode Register 0 bit 5) immediately after A-D
conversion has started, be sure to adjust the timing 2 BCLK periods by, for example, inserting an NOP instruction before read.
• Regarding the analog input pins
Figure 4.9.1 shows the internal equivalent circuit of the A-D Converter’s analog input part. To obtain accurate A-
D conversion results, make sure the internal capacitor C2 of the A-D conversion circuit is charged up within a
predetermined time (sampling time). To meet this sampling time requirement, it is recommended that a stabiliz-
ing capacitor C1 be connected external to the chip.
The method for determining the necessary value of this external stabilizing capacitor with respect to the output
impedance of an analog output device is described below. Also, an explanation is made of the case where the
output impedance of an analog output device is low and the external stabilizing capacitor C1 is unnecessary.
• Rated value of the absolute accuracy
The rated value of the absolute accuracy is the actual performance value of the microcomputer alone, with
influences of the power supply wiring and noise on the board not taken into account. When designing the
application system, use caution for the board layout by, for example, separating the analog circuit power supply
and ground (AVCC0, AVSS0 and VREF0) from those of the digital circuit and incorporating measures to prevent
the analog input pins from being affected by noise, etc. from other digital signals.
Comparator
Inside the microcomputer
10-bit A-D Successive
Approximation Register (ADiSAR)
10-bit D-A Converter
VREF V2
C2
Cin : input pin capacitance (approx. 10 pF)
R2 : parasitic resistance of the
selector (1-2 K)
C2 : comparator capacitance
(approx. 2.9 pF)
Selector
R2
ii1 i2
ADIN n
C1
E
R1
C1 : parasitic capacitance of the board
+ stabilizing capacitance
R1 : resistance of analog output device
Analog output device
Cin
E : voltage of analog output device
V2 : voltage across C2
VREF : analog reference voltage
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-13 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Thus, for a 10-bit resolution A-D converter where C2 = 2.9 pF, C1 is 0.06 µF or more. Use this value for
reference when setting up C1.
(b) Maximum value of the output impedance R1 when C1 is not added
If the external capacitor C1 in Figure 4.9.1 is not used, examination must be made to see if the analog input
device can fully charge C2 within a predetermined time. First, the equation to find i2 when C1 in Figure 4.9.1
does not exist is shown below.
i2 = C2(E - V2) ×exp { - t } ----------------------------- Eq. B-1
Cin×R1+C2(R1+R2) Cin×R1+C2(R1+R2)
Appendix 4.9 Precautions about the A-D Converter
Figure 4.9.2 A-D Conversion Timing Diagram
Figure 4.9.2 shows an A-D conversion timing diagram. C2 must be charged up within the sampling time
shown in this diagram. When the sample-and-hold function is disabled, the sampling time for the second and
subsequent bits is about half that of the first bit.
The sampling times at the respective conversion speeds are listed in the table 4.9.1. Note that when the
sample-and-hold function is enabled, the analog input is sampled for only the first bit.
(a) Example for calculating the external stabilizing capacitor C1 (addition of this capacitor is recommended)
Assuming the R1 in Figure 4.9.1 is infinitely large and that the current necessary to charge the internal
capacitor C2 is supplied from C1, if the potential fluctuation, Vp, caused by capacitance division of C1 and C2
is to be within 0.1 LSB, then what amount of capacitance C1 should have. For a 10-bit A-D converter where
VREF is 5.12 V, 1 LSB determination voltage = 5.12 V / 1,024 = 5 mV. The potential fluctuation of 0.1 LSB
means a 0.5 mV fluctuation.
ADINi
Conversion time
for the first bit
Sampling time Comparison
time Repeated (10 times) for 10 bits
Second bit
Sampling time
When sample-and-hold
is disabled
* When sample-and-hold is enabled, the analog input is sampled for only the first bit.
Vp is also obtained by the equation below:
The relationship between the capacitance division of C1 and C2 and the potential fluctuation,
Vp, is obtained by the equation below:
C2
C1 + C2
Vp = × (E - V2) Eq. A-1
1
2
Vp = Vp1 × < Eq. A-2
iVREF
10 × 2×
x - 1
i = 0 where Vp1 = potential fluctuation in the first A-D conversion performed
and x = 10 for a 10-bit resolution A-D converter
When Eq. A-1 and Eq. A-2 are solved, the following results:
E - V2
Vp1
C1 = C2 { - 1 } Eq. A-3
1
2
C1 > C2 {10 × 2×- 1 } Eq. A-4
i
x - 1
i = 0
×
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-14 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.9 Precautions about the A-D Converter
Table 4.9.1 Sampling Time (in Which C2 Needs to Be Charged)
Conversion start method Conversion speed Sampling time for the first bit Sampling time for the second and subsequent bits
Single mode Slow mode Normal speed 27.5BCLK 13.5BCLK
(when sample-and Double speed 15.5BCLK 7.5BCLK
-hold disabled) Fast mode Normal speed 11.5BCLK 5.5BCLK
Double speed 7.5BCLK 3.5BCLK
Single mode Slow mode Normal speed 27.5BCLK
(when sample-and Double speed 15.5BCLK
-hold enabled) Fast mode Normal speed 11.5BCLK
Double speed 7.5BCLK
Comparator mode Slow mode Normal speed 27.5BCLK
Double speed 15.5BCLK
Fast mode Normal speed 11.5BCLK
Double speed 7.5BCLK
Therefore, the time in which C2 needs to be charged is found from Eq. B-1, as follows:
Sampling time (in which C2 needs to be charged) > Cin × R1 + C2(R1 + R2)--- Eq. B2
Thus, the maximum value of R1 can be obtained as a criterion from the equation below. Note, however, that
for single mode (when sample-and-hold is disabled), the sampling time for the second and subsequent bits
(C2 charging time) must be applied.
C2 charging time - C2 × R2
R1 < Cin + C2
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-15 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.10 Precautions about Serial I/O
Appendix 4.10.1 Precautions on Using CSIO Mode
• Settings of SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register and SIO Baud Rate Register
The SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register and SIO Baud Rate Register and the Transmit Control Register’s
BRG count source select bit must always be set before the serial I/O starts operating. If these settings need
to be changed after a transmit or receive operation has started, first check to see that transmit and receive
operations have finished and then clear the transmit and receive enable bits before making changes.
• Settings of BRG (Baud Rate Register)
If f(BCLK) is selected with the BRG clock source select bit, use caution when setting the BRG register so that
the transfer rate will not exceed 2 Mbps.
• About successive transmission
To transmit data successively, make sure the next transmit data is set in the SIO Transmit Buffer Register
before the current data transmission finishes.
• About reception
Because the receive shift clock in CSIO mode is derived by an operation of the transmit circuit, transmit
operation must always be executed (by sending dummy data) even when the serial I/O is used for only
receiving data. In this case, be aware that if the port function is set for the TXD pin (by setting the operation
mode register to "1"), dummy data may actually be output from the pin.
• About successive reception
To receive data successively, make sure that data (dummy data) is set in the SIO Transmit Buffer Register
before a transmit operation on the transmitter side starts.
• Transmission/reception using DMA
To transmit/receive data in DMA request mode, enable the DMAC to accept transfer requests (by setting the
DMA Mode Register) before serial communication starts.
• About reception finished bit
If a receive error (overrun error) occurs, the reception finished bit can only be cleared by clearing the receive
enable bit, and cannot be cleared by reading out the receive buffer register.
• About overrun error
If all bits of the next received data have been set in the SIO Receive Shift Register before reading out the SIO
Receive Buffer Register (i.e., an overrun error occurred), the received data is not stored in the receive buffer
register, with the previous received data retained in it. Although a receive operation continues thereafter, the
subsequent received data is not stored in the receive buffer register (receive status bit = "1").
Before normal receive operation can be restarted, the receive enable bit must be temporarily cleared to "0".
And this is the only way that the overrun error flag can be cleared.
• About DMA transfer request generation during SIO transmission
If the transmit buffer register becomes empty (transmit buffer empty flag = "1") while the transmit enable bit
remains set to "1" (transmission enabled), an SIO transmit buffer empty DMA transfer request is generated.
• About DMA transfer request generation during SIO reception
If the reception finished bit is set to "1" (receive buffer register full), a reception finished DMA transfer request
is generated. Be aware, however, that if an overrun error occurred during reception, this DMA transfer re-
quest is not generated.
Appendix 4.10 Precautions about Serial I/O
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-16 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.10.2 Precautions on Using UART Mode
• Settings of SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register and SIO Baud Rate Register
The SIO Transmit/Receive Mode Register and SIO Baud Rate Register and the Transmit Control
Register’s BRG count source select bit must always be set before the serial I/O starts operating. If these
settings need to be changed after a transmit or receive operation has started, first check to see that
transmit and receive operations have finished and then clear the transmit and receive enable bits before
making changes.
• Settings of BRG (Baud Rate Register)
If f(BCLK) is selected with the BRG clock source select bit, make sure the value set in the BRG register
is equal to or greater than 7.
Writes to the SIO Baud Rate Register take effect in the next cycle after the BRG counter has finished
counting. However, if the register is accessed for write while transmission and reception are disabled,
the written value takes effect at the same time it is written.
• Transmission/reception using DMA
To transmit/receive data in DMA request mode, enable the DMAC to accept transfer requests (by setting
the DMA Mode Register) before serial communication starts.
• About overrun error
If all bits of the next received data have been set in the SIO Receive Shift Register before reading out the
SIO Receive Buffer Register (i.e., an overrun error occurred), the received data is not stored in the
receive buffer register, with the previous received data retained in it. Once an overrun error occurs,
although a receive operation continues, the subsequent received data is not stored in the receive buffer
register. Before normal receive operation can be restarted, the receive enable bit must be temporarily
cleared. And this is the only way that the overrun error flag can be cleared.
• Flags showing the status of UART receive operation
There are following flags that indicate the status of receive operation during UART mode:
SIO Receive Control Register receive status bit
• SIO Receive Control Register reception finished bit
• SIO Receive Control Register receive error sum bit
• SIO Receive Control Register overrun error bit
• SIO Receive Control Register parity error bit
• SIO Receive Control Register framing error bit
The manner in which the reception finished bit and various error flags are cleared differs depending on
whether an overrun error occurred, as described below.
[When an overrun error did not occur]
Cleared by reading out the lower byte of the receive buffer register or by clearing the receive enable bit.
[When an overrun error occurred]
Cleared by only clearing the receive enable bit.
Appendix 4.10 Precautions about Serial I/O
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-17 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.11 Precautions about RAM Backup Mode
Appendix 4.11 Precautions about RAM Backup Mode
Appendix 4.11.1 Precautions to Be Observed at Power-On
When changing port X from input mode to output mode after power-on, pay attention to the following.
If port X is set for output mode while no data is set in the Port X Data Register, the port’s initial output level is instable.
Therefore, before changing port X for output mode, make sure the Port X Data Register is set to output a high.
Unless this precaution is followed, port output may go low at the same time the port is set for output after the
oscillation has stabilized, causing the microcomputer to enter RAM backup mode.
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-18 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.12 Precautions about JTAG
Appendix 4.12 Precautions about JTAG
Appendix 4.12.1 Notes on Board Design when Connecting JTAG
To materialize fast and highly reliable communication with JTAG tools, make sure wiring lengths of JTAG pins are
matched during board design.
M32R/ECU
JTDI
JTMS
JTCK
JTRST
User board
JTAG tool
Make sure wiring lengths are the same, and avoid bending wires as much as possible.
Be careful not to use through-holes within the wiring.
JTDO 33
33
VCCE(5V)
33
33
2K
10K
10K
0.1µF
SDI connector (JTAG connector)
Power
TDI
TMS
TCK
TRST
TDO
GND
Note 1: The RESET# related circuit and resistance-capacitance values must be determined depending on
the user board's system design conditions and the microcomputer's operating conditions.
Note 2: N-channel open-dr ain output is recommended f or the RESET output of JTA G tools . For details, see JTAG tool specifications.
Notes: • Only if the JTRST pin is firmly tied to ground, the JTDO , JTDI, JTMS and JTCLK pins can be processed b y either pullup or pulldo wn.
• Each of these pins must alwa ys be processed even when not using JTAG tools .
The same pullup/pulldo wn resistance v alues as when using JTA G tools ma y be used.
RESET#
(Note 1) RESET (Note 2)
33
10K
VSS
33
10K
10K
Figure 4.12.1 Notes on Board Design when Connecting JTAG Tools
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-19 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
M32R/ECU
JTDI
JTMS
JTCK
JTRST
User board
JTDO
VCCE(5V)
0–100K
0–100K
0–100K
0–100K
0–100K
Note: • Only if the JTRST pin is firmly tied to ground, the JTDO, JTDI, JTMS and JTCLK pins can be processed
by either pullup or pulldown.
Appendix 4.12.2 Processing Pins when Not Using JTAG
The following shows how the pins on the chip should be processed when not using JTAG tools.
Figure 4.12.2 Processing Pins when Not Using JTAG
Appendix 4.12 Precautions about JTAG
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-20 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.13 Precautions about Noise
The following describes precautions to be taken about noise and corrective measures against noise. The cor-
rective measures described here are theoretically effective for noise, but require that the application system
incorporating those measures be fully evaluated before it can actually be put to use.
Appendix 4.13.1 Reduction of Wiring Length
Wiring on the board may serve as an antenna to draw noise into the microcomputer. Shorter the total wiring
length, the smaller the possibility of drawing noise into the microcomputer.
(1) Wiring of the RESET# pin
Reduce the length of wiring connecting to the RESET# pin. Especially when connecting a capacitor between
the RESET# and VSS pins, make sure it is wired to each pin in the shortest distance possible (within 20 mm).
<Reasons>
Reset is a function to initialize the internal logic of the microcomputer. The width of a pulse applied to the
RESET# pin is important and is therefore specified as part of timing requirements. If a pulse in width
shorter than the specified duration (i.e., noise) is applied to the RESET# pin, the microcomputer will not
be reset for a sufficient duration of time and come out of reset before its internal logic is fully initialized,
causing the program to malfunction.
Figure 4.13.1 Example Wiring of the RESET# Pin
Reset
circuit
VSS
RESET#
VSS
RESET#
VSS
Noise
Reset
circuitVSS
Long wiring Short wiring
Appendix 4.13 Precautions about Noise
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-21 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
(2) Wiring of clock input/output pins
Use as much thick and short wiring as possible for connections to the clock input/output pins.
When connecting a capacitor to the oscillator, make sure its grounding lead wire and the OSC-VSS pin on the
microcomputer are connected in the shortest distance possible (within 20 mm).
Also, make sure the VSS pattern used for clock oscillation is a large ground plane and is connected to GND.
<Reasons>
The microcomputer operates synchronously with the clock generated by an oscillator circuit. Inclusion of
noise on the clock input/output pins causes the clock waveform to become distorted, which may result in
the microcomputer operating erratically or getting out of control. Furthermore, if a noise-induced poten-
tial difference exists between the microcomputer’s VSS level and that of the oscillator, the clock fed into
the microcomputer may not be an exact clock.
Figure 4.13.2 Example Wiring of Clock Input/Output Pins
OSC-VSS
XIN
XOUT
VSS
Noise
Thick and short wiring
Thin and long wiring
OSC-VSS
XIN
XOUT
VSS
Appendix 4.13 Precautions about Noise
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-22 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
(4) Wiring of the operation mode setup pins
When connecting the operation mode setup pins and the VCC or VSS pin, make sure they are wired in the
shortest distance possible.
<Reasons>
The levels of the operation mode setup pins affect the microcomputer’s operation mode. When connect-
ing the operation mode setup pins and the VCC or VSS pin, be careful that no noise-induced potential
difference will exist between the operation mode setup pins and the VCC or VSS pin. This is because the
presence of such a potential difference makes operation mode instable, which may result in the micro-
computer operating erratically or getting out of control.
Figure 4.13.3 Example Wiring of the VCNT Pin
(3) Wiring of the VCNT pin
Use as much thick and short wiring as possible for connections to the VCNT pin.
When connecting a capacitor to VCNT, make sure its grounding lead wire and the OSC-VSS pin on the
microcomputer are connected in the shortest distance possible.
Also, make sure the VSS pattern used for VCNT is a large ground plane and is connected to GND.
<Reasons>
The external circuit inserted for the VCNT pin plays the role of a low-pass filter that stabilizes the PLL’s
internal voltage and eliminates noise. If noise exceeding the limit of the low-pass filter penetrates into the
wiring, the internal circuit may be disturbed by that noise and become unable to produce a precise clock,
causing the microcomputer to operate erratically or get out of control.
Figure 4.13.4 Example Wiring of the MOD0 and MOD1 Pins
OSC-VSS
VCNT
VSS
Noise
Thin and long wiring Thick and short wiring
OSC-VSS
VCNT
VSS
VSS
VSS
Operation mode
setup pins
Noise
Long wiring Short wiring
Operation mode
setup pins
Appendix 4.13 Precautions about Noise
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-23 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.13.3 Processing Analog Input Pin Wiring
Insert a resistor of about 100 to 500 in series to the analog signal line connecting to the analog input pin at a
position as close to the microcomputer as possible. Also, insert a capacitor of about 100 pF between the analog
input pin and AVSS pin at a position as close to the AVSS pin as possible.
<Reasons>
The signal fed into the analog input pin (e.g., A-D converter input pin) normally is an output signal from a
sensor. In many cases, a sensor to detect changes of event is located apart from the board on which the
microcomputer is mounted, so that wiring to the analog input pin is inevitably long. Because a long wiring
serves as an antenna which draws noise into the microcomputer, the signal fed into the analog input pin
tends to be noise-ridden. Furthermore, if the capacitor connected between the analog input pin and
AVSS pin is grounded at a position apart from the AVSS pin, noise riding on the ground line may pen-
etrate into the microcomputer via the capacitor.
Figure 4.13.6 Example of a Resistor and Capacitor Inserted for the Analog Signal Line
Appendix 4.13.2 Inserting a Bypass Capacitor between VSS and VCC Lines
Insert a bypass capacitor of about 0.1 µF between the VSS and VCC lines. At this time, make sure the require-
ments described below are met.
• The wiring length between the VSS pin and bypass capacitor and that between the VCC pin and bypass
capacitor are the same.
• The wiring length between the VSS pin and bypass capacitor and that between the VCC pin and bypass
capacitor are the shortest distance possible.
• The VSS and VCC lines have a greater wiring width than that of all other signal lines.
Figure 4.13.5 Example of a Bypass Capacitor Inserted between VSS and VCC Lines
VSS
VCC
Chip Chip
VSSVCC
VSS
VCC
Analog
input pin
AVSS
Sensor
Noise
Microcomputer
Appendix 4.13 Precautions about Noise
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-24 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.13.4 Consideration about the Oscillator and VCNT Pin
The oscillator that generates the fundamental clock for microcomputer operation requires consideration to make
it unsusceptible to influences from other signals.
(1) Avoidance from large-current signal lines
Signal lines that conduct a large current exceeding the range of current values that the microcomputer can
handle must be routed as far away from the microcomputer (especially the oscillator and VCNT pin) as
possible. Also, make sure the circuit is protected with a GND pattern.
<Reasons>
Systems using a microcomputer have signal lines to control a motor, LED or thermal head, for example.
When a large current flows in these signal lines, it generates noise due to mutual inductance (M).
Figure 4.13.7 Example Wiring of a Large-Current Signal Line
OSC-VSS
XIN
XOUT
VCNT
Large current
Noise is generated by
mutual inductance between
the microcomputer and
an adjacent signal line
GND
M
Large current
M
OSC-VSS
XIN
XOUT
VCNT
GND
A signal line that conducts a large current
exists near the microcomputer.
Locate a signal line that conducts a large
current apart from the microcomputer.
Appendix 4.13 Precautions about Noise
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-25 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
(2) Avoiding effects of rapidly level-changing signal lines
Locate signal lines whose levels change rapidly as far away from the oscillator as possible. Also, make sure
the rapidly level-changing signal lines will not intersect the clock-related signal lines and other noise-sensi-
tive signal lines.
<Reasons>
Rapidly level-changing signal lines tend to affect other signal lines as their voltage level frequently rises and
falls. Especially if these signal lines intersect the clock-related signal lines, they will cause the clock waveform
to become distorted, which may result in the microcomputer operating erratically or getting out of control.
Figure 4.13.8 Example Wiring of a Rapidly Level-Changing Signal Line
XIN
XOUT
VCNT
High-speed serial I/O
High-speed timer input/output, etc.
Signal line intersecting the clock-related and other signal lines
XIN
XOUT
VCNT
High-speed serial I/O
High-speed timer input/output, etc.
Locate the signal line away from the clock-related and other signal lines
Appendix 4.13 Precautions about Noise
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-26 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
(3) Protection against signal lines that are the source of strong noise
Do not use any pin that will probably be subject to strong noise for an adjacent port near the oscillator and
VCNT pins. If the pin can be left unused, set it for input and connect to GND via a resistor, or fix it to output
and leave open. If the pin needs to be used, it is recommended that it be used for input-only.
For protection against a still stronger noise source, set the adjacent port for input and connect to GND via a
resistor, and use those that belong to the same port group as much for input-only as possible. If greater
stability is required, do not use those that belong to the same port group and set them for input and connect
to GND via a resistor. If they need to be used, insert a limiting resistor for protection against noise.
<Reasons>
If the ports or pins adjacent to the oscillator and VCNT pins operate at high speed or are exposed to
strong noise from an external source, noise may affect the oscillator circuit, causing its oscillation to
become instable.
Figure 4.13.9 Example Processing of a Noise-Laden Pin
XIN
XOUT
VCNT
Noise
Fast switching
Adjacent pin/peripheral pin
(set for output)
Oscillator
External noise or
switching noise
Switching noise from an output pin applied directly to the port
Noise
Adjacent pin/peripheral pin
(set for input)
External noise from an input pin applied directly to the port
Appendix 4.13 Precautions about Noise
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-27 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Figure 4.13.10 Example Processing of Pins Adjacent to the Oscillator and VCNT Pins
Adjacent pin/peripheral pin (set for input)
Method for limiting the effect of noise in input mode
Noise
Method for limiting noise with a resistor
Noise
Fast switching
Adjacent pin/peripheral pin (set for input)
Method for limiting the effect of noise in input mode
Adjacent pin/peripheral pin (set for output)
Method for limiting the effect of noise in output mode
Adjacent pin/peripheral pin (set for input)
Adjacent pin/peripheral pin (set for output)
Method for limiting switching noise with a resistor
Appendix 4.13 Precautions about Noise
Appendix 4
Appendix 4-28 32182 Group User's Manual (Rev.1.0)
SUMMARY OF PRECAUTIONS
Appendix 4.13.5 Processing Input/Output Ports
For input/output ports, take the appropriate measures in both hardware and software following the procedure
described below.
Hardware measures
• Insert resistors of 100 or more in series to the input/output ports.
Software measures
• For input ports, read out data in a program two or more times to verify that the levels coincide.
• For output ports, rewrite the data register at certain intervals because there is a possibility of the output data
being inverted by noise.
• Rewrite the direction register at certain intervals.
Figure 4.13.11 Example Processing of Input/Output Ports
Noise
Direction register
Data register
Data bus
Input/output port
Noise
Appendix 4.13 Precautions about Noise
RENESAS 32-BIT RISC SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER
USER’S MANUAL
32182 Group Rev.1.00
Editioned by
Committee of editing of RENESAS Semiconductor User’s Manual
This book, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form without permission
of Renesas Technology Corporation.
Copyright © 2003. Renesas Technology Corporation, All rights reserved.
1753, Shimonumabe, Nakahara-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa 211-8668 Japan
32182 Group
REJ09B0014-0100Z
User’s Manual